AA JS14A TC_RSX 11M_PLUS_V4.0_RSX 11M PLUS_and_Micro RSX_System_Management_Guide_Sep87 TC RSX PLUS V4.0 And Micro System Management Guide Sep87

AA-JS14A-TC_RSX-11M_PLUS_V4.0_RSX-11M-PLUS_and_MicroRSX_System_Management_Guide_Sep87 AA-JS14A-TC_RSX-11M_PLUS_V4.0_RSX-11M-PLUS_and_MicroRSX_System_Management_Guide_Sep87

User Manual: AA-JS14A-TC_RSX-11M_PLUS_V4.0_RSX-11M-PLUS_and_MicroRSX_System_Management_Guide_Sep87

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 682

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

RSX-ll M-PLUS and Micro/RSX
System Management Guide
Order No. AA-JS 14A-TC

RSX-ll M-PLUS and Micro/RSX
System Management Guide
Order No. AA-JS14A-TC

RSX-ll M-PLUS Version 4.0
MicrojRSX Version 4.0

Digital Equipment Corporation

Maynard, Massachusetts

First Printing, October 1979
Revised, November 1981
Updated, April 1983
Revised, July 1985
Revised, September 1987
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation
assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied
only in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its affiliated companies.
Copyright ©1979, 1981, 1983, 1985, 1987 by Digital Equipment Corporation
All Rights Reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
The postpaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this document requests the
user's critical evaluation to assist in preparing future documentation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:
DEC
DEC/CMS
DEC/MMS
DECnet
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL

EduSystem
lAS
MASSBUS
MicroPDP-11
Micro/RSX
PDP
PDT
RSTS
RSX

UNIBUS
VAX
VAX cluster
VMS
VT

~U~UIl~D
ZK3085

HOW TO ORDER ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION
DIRECT MAIL ORDERS
USA & PUERTO RICO *

CANADA

INTERNATIONAL

Digital Equiprnent Corporation

Digital Equipment
of Canada Ltd.
100 Herzberg Road
Kanata. Ontario K2K 2A6
Attn: Direct Order Desk

Digital Equipment Corporation
PSG Business Manager
c/o Digital's local subsidiary
or approved distributor

P.O. Box CS2008
Nashua. New Hampshire 03061

In Continental USA and Puerto Rico call 800-258-1710.
In New Hampshire. Alaska. and Hawaii call 603-884-6660.
In Canada call 800-267-6215.

Any prepaid order from Puerto Rico must be placed with the local Digital subsidiary (809-754-7575).
Internal orders should be placed through the Software Distribution Center (SDC). Digital Equipment Corporation. Westminster.
Massachusetts 01473.
This document was prepared using an in-house documentation production system. All page composition and make-up was
performed by TeX. the typesetting system developed by Donald E. Knuth at Stanford University. TeX is a trademark of the
American Mathematical Society.

Contents
Preface

xxi

Summary of Technical Changes

xxvii

Part I: Setting Up and Shutting Down the System
Chapter 1 Introduction to System Management
1.1

1.2
1.3

General System Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.1
Memory Partitions and Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.2
Primary and Secondary Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.3
Memory Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.3.1 Checkpointing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.3.2 Partition Fragmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.3.3 Memory Compaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.1.3.4 Disk Swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.1.4
Dynamic Checkpoint Space Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.1.5
Task Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.1.6
Round-Robin Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.1.7
Parity Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.1.8
Multiple File Control Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.1.9
File System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.1.10 Overlapped I/O Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Installing and Generating Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Setting Up Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Using System Management Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.3.1
1.3.2
Using the Account File Maintenance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.3.3
Setting Up Printers and Batch Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.3.4
Modifying Your System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

iii

1.4
1.5

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

1.10

1.11

1.3.5
Modifying the System Image File (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) . . . . . . . .
Shutting Down the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring and Controlling System Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.1
Resource Monitoring Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,"
1.5.2
Pool Monitoring Support (RSX-I1M-PLUS Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.3
The Console Logger (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.4
Resource Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventing the Loss of Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.1
Backing Up Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.2
Shadow Recording (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detecting and Correcting Hardware Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.1
Error Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.2
The I/O Exerciser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.3
The Bad Block Replacement Control Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering from a System Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8.1
Using the Executive Debugging Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8.2
Using the Crash Dump Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.1
I/O Queue Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.2
Disk Data Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customizing the System-User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.1 Creating Your Own CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.2 Modifying the DCL Task (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.3 Using a Catchall Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communicating with Other Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13

1-12
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-13
1-14
1-14
1-14
1-14
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-16
1-16
1-16
1-17
1-17
1-18
1-18
1-18
1-18
1-19
1-19
1-19

The Account File Maintenance Program

Changing Your Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Using an Account File from Another System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Invoking ACNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 2-3
Creating the Account File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Adding Account Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Deleting Account Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 2-6
Examining Account Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Listing Account Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Modifying Account Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Sorting Account Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Exiting from ACNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Increasing the Size of the Account File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Chapter 3 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5

3.6

Introduction to the Queue Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Queue Management Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Setting Up the Queue Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Using the Queue Manager to Spool Listing Files Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Queue Manager Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.5.1
INITIALIZE/QUEUE (QUE /CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.5.2
INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR (QUE /SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
DELETE/QUEUE (QUE /DEL:Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.5.3
3.5.4
DELETE/PROCESSOR (QUE /UNSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.5.5
ASSIGN/QUEUE (QUE / AS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.5.6
DEASSIGN/QUEUE (QUE /DEA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3.5.7
STOP / ABORT (QUE /KIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
STOP/PROCESSOR (QUE /STO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.5.8
3.5.9
STOP /QUEUE (QUE /STO:QUE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3.5.10 STOP /QUEUE/MANAGER (QUE /STO:QMG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
START /PROCESSOR (QUE /STA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.5.11
3.5.12 START /QUEUE (QUE /STA:QUE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3.5.13 START/QUEUE/MANAGER (QUE /STA:QMG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . ; . . . . . . 3-41
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.6.1
Error Messages from Queue Manager Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.6.2
Error Messages from the Output Despooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 3-50
3.6.3
Error Messages from the Batch Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Chapter 4
4.1

4.2

4.3
4.4
4.5

)

System Reconfiguration

Autoconfigure on Micro/RSX and Pregenerated RSX-11M-PLUS Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1
Using Non-DIGITAL Standard Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.2
Modifying ACFPAR.DAT . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
The Reconfiguration Services (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.1
Reconfiguration Components-CON, RD:, and HRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.2
System Device States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.3
Placing Devices Logically On Line and Off Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : ..... 4-6
Invoking the Command Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Entering CON Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
CON Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
BUILD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.5.1
4.5.2
CLEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.5.3
4.5.4
ESTATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.5.5
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

4.6

4.5.6
IDENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.7
LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.8
4.5.9
OFFLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.10
OFFLINE MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ONLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.11
ONLINE MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.12
SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.13
SWiTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.14
4.5.15
UNLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.1
CON Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.2
HRC Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5
5.1
5.2

5.3

5.4
5.5

4-18
4-19
4-20
4-22
4-25
4-26
4-28
4-29
4-31
4-32
4-33
4-33
4-36

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX- 11 M-PLUS
Systems Only)

Introduction to VMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1
Running VMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2
Running VMR with Indirect Command Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
VMR Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3.1
VMR Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3.2
Including Comments in VMR Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3.3
Extending a VMR Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
VMR File Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
VMR Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.5.1
ALTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.5.2
ASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.5.3
CANCEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.5.4
DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.5.5
5.5.6
FIX-IN-MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.5.7
INSTALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.5.8
LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
LOGICAL UNIT NUMBERS ... " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.5.9
5.5.10 PARTITION DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
REASSiGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.5.11
5.5.12 REDIRECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.5.13 REMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.5.14 RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.5.15
SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

I
\,

5.6

5.5.16 SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.17 TASKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.18 TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.19 UNFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.20 UNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VMR Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6

5-46
5-76
5-78
5-80
5-81
5-82

The SHUTUP Program

Prerequisites to Running SHUT UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Invoking SHUTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
SHUTUP Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
SHUTUP Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
The SHUTUP .CMD File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.6.1
System Shutdown Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.6.2
Example of a System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Part II: Resource Monitoring and Control
Chapter 7 Resource Monitoring Display
7.1

7.2

7.3
7.4

7.5

7.6

7.7

Introduction to RMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.1
Display Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.2
Setup Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Installing and Invoking RMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2.1
Installing RMD at Individual Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2.2
Invoking RMD at Individual Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2.3
Running RMD on a Slaved Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
The Help Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
The Memory Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.4.1
Altering the Memory Display from the Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.4.2
Altering the Memory Display from the MCR Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
The Active Task Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.5.1
Altering the Active Task Display from the Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7-11
7.5.2
Altering the Active Task Display from the MCR Command Line . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
The Task Header Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.6.1
Altering the Task Header display from the Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.6.2
Altering the Task Header Display from the MCR Command Line . . . . . . . . . 7-15
The I/O Counts Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

vii

7.8

7.9

7.10

7.11
7.12

7.7.1
Altering the I/O Counts Display from the Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7.2
Altering the I/O Counts Display front the NiCR Command Line . . . . . . . . . .
The System Statistics Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.1
Altering the System Statistics Display from the Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.2
Altering the System Statistics Display from the MCR Command Line . . . . . .
The General Statistics About a Cache Region Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.1
Altering the RMD C Display from the Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.2
Altering the RMD C Display from the MCR Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Detailed Statistics About a Cache Region Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.1
Altering the RMD D Display from the Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.2 Altering the RMD D Display from the MCR Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying the Task-Build Command File (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) . . . . . . . . .
RMD Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8
8.1
8.2

8.3

8.4

8.5

8.6

8.7

8.8
8.9

7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-19
7-19
7-21
7-21
7-21
7-23
7-24
7-24
7-25

Memory Management

Evaluating System Requirements for Dynamic Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8-1
Pool Monitoring Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2.1
The Executive Pool Monitor Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8-2
8.2.2
The Pool Monitor Task (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Pool Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Pool Level and Fragment Size Are Satisfactory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3.1
8.3.2
Low Pool Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8-4
8.3.3
High Pool Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.3.4
Largest Pool Fragment Is Too Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.3.5
Largest Pool Fragment Becomes Larger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Major Pool Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.4.1
Low Pool Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.4.2
High Pool Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
PMT Actions During Extreme Fragmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.5.1
PMT Messages During Extreme Pool Fragmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.5.2
Annotated Example of PMT Output for Extreme Fragmentation . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Setting Pool Limit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.6.1
Setting Low and High Pool Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.6.2
Setting Pool Fragment Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.6.3
Setting Base Priority for Nonprivileged Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
PMT Task-Build Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.7.1
Controlling PMT Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.7.2
Controlling PMT Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.7.3
Controlling Pool Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Aborting PMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Secondary Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

viii

8.9.1
8.9.2
8.9.3

8.10

Monitoring Secondary Pool Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Secondary Pool Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extending Secondary Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.9.3.1 Using the LOAD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.9.3.2 Modifying the Configuration Data File, SYSPARAM.DAT . . . . . . . . . . .
8.9.4
Increasing the Availability of Secondary Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.9.5
Saving Secondary Pool (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Compaction-The Shuffler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.10.1
Executive and Memory Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.10.2 Monitoring the Shuffler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.10.3 The Shuffler Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9
9.1

9.2
9.3

9.4

9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9

8-14
8-15
8-16
8-16
8-17
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-19
8-19
8-20

The Console Logger (RSX- 11 M-PLUS Systems Only)

The Console Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.1
Using CO: as a Pseudo Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1.2
Using CO: with the Console Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Installing COT ... and Loading CODRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Communicating with the Console Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.3.1
Writing to CO: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.3.2
Reading from CO: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Console Logging Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.4.1
Displaying Current Console and Log File Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.4.2
Starting Console Logging (SET /COLOG=ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.4.3
Stopping Console Logging (SET /COLOG=OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.4.4
Enabling or Reassigning CO: (fCOTERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.4.5
Disabling CO: (fNOCOTERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.4.6
Enabling or Reassigning the Log File (/LOGFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.4.6.1 Changing the Log File Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.4.6.2 Creating a New Version of the Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.4.6.3 Reassigning the Log File Back to the Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.4.7
Disabling the Log File (fNOLOGFILE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.4.8
Using Multiple Console Logging Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Monitoring the Status of the Console Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Redirecting the Console Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 9-9
Reading the Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Sample Console Logging Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Console Logging Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Chapter 10 Resource Accounting
10.1
10.2

10.3

10.4

10.5

10.6

10.7

10.8

Introduction to Resource Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Controlling Resource Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.2.1
START/ACCOUNTING Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.2.2 SET ACCOUNTING Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.2.3 STOP/ACCOUNTING Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Accessing Information in the Transaction File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.3.1
SHOW ACCOUNTING/INFORMATION Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.3.2 SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTIONJILE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Using DATATRIEVE-11 to Write an Accounting Report Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10.4.1 Converting the Transaction File to a DATATRIEVE-11 Readable File ...... 10-17
10.4.2 Using a DATATRIEVE-11 Report Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Creating Your Own Transaction Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10.5.1
Calling $QTRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.5.2 Calling $QTRN1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.5.3 Calling $QTRN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Account Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
10.6.1
Account Block Data Structures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
10.6.1.1 Account Block Header Area Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10.6.1.2 Account Block Accumulation Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10.6.1.3 Memory-Resident Account Blocks and Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
10.6.1.4 Transaction Block Diagrams and Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
10.6.2 Account Block Linkages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
System Resources Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
10.7.1 Executive Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
10.7.2 Secondary Pool Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Resource Accounting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Part III: System Problems and Performance

Chapter 11
11.1
11.2

11.3
11.4
11.5

11.6

System Faults " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.1 Media Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.2 Transient Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.3 Intermittent Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.4 Soft Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.5 Hard Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recoverable and Nonrecoverable Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.1 Device Unit and Controller Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.2 Processor Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.3 Memory Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standalone Maintenance for Multiprocessor Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 12
12.1
12.2

12.3

12.4
12.5

12.6

Handling System Problems
11-1
11-1
11-2
11-2
11-2
11-3
11-3
11-3
11-3
11-4
11-4
11-5
11-5
11-6

The I/O Exerciser

Introduction to lOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Running an I/O Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.2.1 Invoking lOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.2.2 Setting Up a Test Configuration-The CONFIGURE Command . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.2.3 Selecting Devices for Exercising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12.2.4 Using the lOX Command Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
lOX Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.3.1 Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.3.2 Execution Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12.3.3 Interactive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Using Indirect Command Files with lOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
lOX Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.5.1 Activity Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12.5.2 Error Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
lOX Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
ABORT.............................................. 12-15
12.6.1
12.6.2 BADBLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
12.6.3 BUFFERSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
12.6.4 COMPAREDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12.6.5 CONFIGURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
12.6.6 CONTROL_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
12.6.7 DENSITy............................................ 12-23
12.6.8 DESELECT........................................... 12-25

12.7

12.8

12.6.9 ERRORLIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.10 EXECUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.11 EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.12 FILESll . . . . . . . . , " " " " " , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.13 HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.14 INTERLEAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.15 LOGFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.16 LOOPBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.17 PARAMETERLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.18 PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.19 PRINT SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.20 PROCEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.21 RANDOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.22 RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.23 RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.24 REPORTERRORS.......................................
12.6.25 RESTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.26 RETRIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.27 RUNTIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.28 SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.29 S p y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.30 S T A R T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.31 SUMMARYTIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.32 TEMPORARYFILE .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.33 VERIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.34 VOLUMECHECK.......................................
12.6.35 WAIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.36 WRITECHECK.........................................
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Parameters for Exercising Files-II Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.7.1
12.7.2 Setting Parameters for Exercising NFS Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lOX Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8.1 Error Messages with Device Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8.2 Error Messages Without Device Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xii

12-26
12-27
12-29
12-30
12-32
12-33
12-34
12-35
12-36
12-40
12-42
12-43
12-44
12-45
12-46
12-47
12-48
12-49
12-50
12-51
12-54
12-55
12-56
12-57
12-58
12-60
12-61
12-62
12-63
12-63
12-65
12-71
12-71
12-77

Chapter 13 The Bad Block Replacement Control Task
13.1
13.2
13.3

13.4

Introduction to RCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing RCT and Loading DUDRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bad Block Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.1 Detecting Bad Blocks-The MSCP Disk Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.2 Notifying DUDRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.3 Replacing Bad Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.4 Bad Block Revectoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCT and the Error Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-1
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-6

Chapter 14 I/O Queue Optimization
14.1
14.2
14.3

14.4

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initiating Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2.1
Displaying Optimization Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Type of Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.1
Adjusting the Fairness Count Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.2 Nearest Cylinder Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.3 Elevator Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.4 Cylinder Scan Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-4
14-4
14-5
14-5
14-5

Chapter 15 Disk Data Caching
15.1

15.2

15.3
15.4

Associating Data Caching with a Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.1.1
Using the MOUNT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.1.2 Using the SET DEVICE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15.1.3 Specifying a Cache Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
15.1.4 Specifying Different Types of Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Monitoring Data Cache Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
15.2.1 Displaying Information About Devices (Cached and Uncached) . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
15.2.2 Displaying General Cache Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
15.2.3 Displaying Detailed Cache Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Modifying Data Cache Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
The Data Caching Environment ..... : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
15.4.1 The Data Cache Region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
15.4.2 The Data Cache Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
15.4.3 Deferred Disk Write Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
15.4.3.1 Recognition of I/O Packet Marked for Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
15.4.3.2 Deferring Disk Data Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
15.4.4 Data Cache Structures and Symbolic Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16

xiii

Part IV: Advanced Features

16.1
16.2
16.3

16.4

16.5

Introduction to Shadow Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Preparing Your System for Shadow Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Controlling Shadow Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
START Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
16.3.1
16.3.2 STOP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
16.3.3 ABORT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
16.3.4 CONTINUE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
16.3.5 DISPLAY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Error Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
16.4.1 Errors on the Primary Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
16.4.2 Errors on the Secondary Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
16.4.3 Errors on the Primary and Secondary Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
Shadow Recording Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11

Chapter 17 Command Line Interpreters
17.1

17.2

17.3

17.4

Introduction to Command Line Interpreters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
17.1.1
The Monitor Console Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
17.1.2 DIGITAL Command Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Installing and Initializing a CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
17.2.1
Specifying Task Names for CLls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
17.2.2 Prompts that Affect CLls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
17.2.3 Handling Continuation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Writing an Application CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
17.3.1
Using Executive Directives for CLls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
17.3.2 Interacting with the Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
17.3.3 Receiving System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
17.3.4 Interacting with Serial Command Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
Sample CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
17.4.1
MACRO-II CLI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
17.4.2 FORTRAN CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15

xiv

Chapter 18 The DCl Task
18.1
18.2

18.3
18.4

18.5

18.6

18.7
18.8
18.9

Introduction to the DCL Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Installing the DCL Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
18.2.1 Installing DCL as an Alternate CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
18.2.2 Running DCL as a Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
18.2.3 Installing DCL as a Prototype Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
18.2.4 Installing DCL as a Catchall Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Using DCL to Perform Flying Installs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Task Building DCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
18.4.1 The First-Pass Task Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
18.4.2 The Second-Pass Task Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Understanding How DCL Interprets Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
18.5.1 DCL Command Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
18.5.1.1 The Master Command Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
18.5.1.2 The Parser and Translator Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
18.5.2 A General Description of a Metalanguage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
18.5.3 The Macro Metalanguage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
18.5.4 Interpreting DCL Command Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
18.5.4.1 Parser Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
18.5.4.2 Translator Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
18.5.4.3 Parser/Translator Handling of Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
18.5.4.4 Parser/Translator Handling of Nonliterals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
18.5.4.5 Summary of Parser/Translator Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
18.5.4.6 Example of P /T Tables for DCL ASSIGN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
18.5.5 Mapping DCL to MCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
18.5.5.1 Using the MAP Attribute in the Parser Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17
18.5.5.2 Using the MAP Attribute in the Translator Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17
18.5.5.3 Using the MAP Attribute Without a Syntax Element • . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18
18.5.5.4 Summary of the Mapping Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18
18.5.6 The Intermediate Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
Adding New DCL Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-22
18.6.1
Creating the PT/TT File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-22
18.6.2 Creating the MCT Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-23
18.6.3 Specifying the Overlay Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24
18.6.4 Incorporating the PT /TT and MCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-26
Deleting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-27
Modifying Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-27
Attributes of Syntax Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-27
18.9.1
AND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-29
18.9.2 BC and BS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-30
18.9.3 BCT and BST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-31

18.9.4 CBM and CCBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.9.5 eop and oeop .......................................
18.9.6 DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.9.7 E R R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.9.8 H L P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.9.9 MAP and DMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.9.10 NO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.9.11 OPT and OPTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.9.12 PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.9.13 QUA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.9.14 TST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.10 Predefined Syntax Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.10.1 Basic Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.10.2 Common Command Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.10.3 Special Parser Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.10.4 Special Translator Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.10.5 Program Control Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.10.6 Example from DCL Command Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 19
19.1
19.2

19.3
19.4

Using the Catchall Task

TDX Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding How TDX Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.2.1
No ZZ Pseudo Device Assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.2.2 Pseudo Device ZZl Assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.2.3 Pseudo Device ZZ2 Assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting MCR Options for TDX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Tasks Permanently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix A
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4

18-33
18-35
18-36
18-37
18-38
18-39
18-43
18-44
18-46
18-47
18-49
18-50
18-50
18-51
18-54
18-56
18-57
18-58

19-1
19-3
19-3
19-4
19-4
19-7
19-8

RSX- 11 M-PLUS UFD Conventions

Group Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Member Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of System UFDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System File-Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index

xvi

A-I
A-2
A-2
A-3

Examples
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
8-1
10-1
10-2
10-3
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
15-1
15-2
19-1

Creating an Account File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Adding an Account Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Deleting an Account Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Examining an Account Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Listing Account Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Modifying an Account Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Sorting the Account File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
RMD Help Display Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Memory Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Active Task Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
I/O Counts Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
System Statistics Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Cache Region Display (General Statistics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Cache Region Display (Detailed Statistics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
PMT Output for Extreme Fragmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Call to the $QTRAN Entry Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Call to the $QTRNI Entry Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Call to the $QTRN2 Entry Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
PARAMETERLIST Display Shown in Four Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37
Exercising an RL02 with the FILESll Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-64
Exercising a Magnetic Tape with the SELECT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-66
Exercising an NFS RK07 with the VERIFY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-69
Cache Region Display (General Statistics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Cache Region Display (Detailed Statistics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
A Sample CATCHALL.CMD File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6

Figures
4-1
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-10
10-11
10-12

Sample Configuration for Increasing System Throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Privileged Task Interface Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Task Account Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
User Account Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
System Account Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Accounting Startup Transaction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Reset Accounting Transaction. Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Crash Recovery Transaction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Login Transaction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Invalid Login Transaction Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Allocate Device Transaction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Deallocate Device Transaction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Mount Device Transaction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

xvii

10-13
10-14
10-15
10-16
10-17
10-18
15-1
15-2

Dismount Device Transaction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Time Change Transaction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Despooler Transaction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Reader Spooling Transaction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Statistics Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Account Block Linkages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format of Data Cache Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format of Pool Header Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-43
10-45
10-46
10-47
10-49
10-51
15-17
15-17

Tables
3-1
4-1
4-2
4-3
5-1
5-2
5-3
9-1
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-10
10-11
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-15
12-1
12-2
13-1
18-1
19-1
A-I
A-2

Queue Manager Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
CON Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Exit Status Values for Units and Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Exit Status Values for Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Functional List of VMR Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
SET Keyword Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Valid Baud Rates for Variable-Speed Multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Summary of Console Logging Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Summary of Transaction File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Header Area Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Accumulation Fields for UAB, TAB, and SAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Task Account Block Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
User Account Block Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
System Account Block Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Reset Accounting Transaction Block Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Crash Recovery Transaction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Login Transaction Block Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Invalid Login Transaction Block Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Device Transaction Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
System Time Change Transaction Block Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Print Despooler Transaction Block Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Card Reader Spooling Transaction Block Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Device Statistics Block Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
lOX Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Parameter Commands by Device Type for the SELECT Command . . . . . . . . 12-52
Bad Block Replacement Method for Different Device Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
DCL Command Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
TDX Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Group Number Identification . . . . . . . ". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-I
Member Number Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

xviii

A-3
A-4
A-S

MeR User File Directories (UFDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
System UFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
System File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

xix

Preface

Manual Objectives
The RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX System Management Guide describes system programs
and procedures that test, monitor, maintain, and customize RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX
operating systems after system generation.

Intended Audience
This manual is written for system managers, operators, and system programmers who perform
system management functions. It is not intended to be a tutorial for general users.

Structure of This Document
The RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX System Management Guide is divided into four parts: Setting
Up and Shutting Down the System, Resource Monitoring and Control, System Problems and
Performance, and Advanced Features. In addition, Appendix A contains a description of User
File Directory (UFD) conventions.
Part I, Setting Up and Shutting Down the System, contains Chapters 1 to 6. Together, they
provide essential information for setting up accounts, queues, and peripheral devices on your
system. In addition, Part I includes a description of the system shutdown procedure (SHUTUP).
Chapter 1 provides a general overview of system management and serves as a guide to the
remainder of the manual. It includes descriptions of general system concepts and utilities.
Chapter 2 describes, with examples, how to use the Account File Maintenance Program
(ACNT) to create and maintain user accounts.
Chapter 3 describes how to set up the Queue Manager (QMG) for multistream line-printer
spooling and batch processing.

xxi

Chapter 4 describes how to use the reconfiguration services (CON and HRC) to modify your
Ca7'lt~T'n

-J------

------0--------.. If--

ronfiO'l1l'::\tion

h::\,,~ ::\n Re;.y _11 M_PT T Te;.
J-- ----'---- --_.- ---.- - ---

'UOll

on~l'::\tinO' 'l"'lt~T'n

-r--------o

i'lol~t~
-J------, "011
J-- r~n
----- --------

the system from the effects of faulty hardware by using CON and HRC. This chapter also
includes a description of the Autoconfigure task (ACFPRE. TSK) supplied with pregenerated
RSX-llf'.A-PLUS and Micro/RSX systems.
Chapter 5 describes how to use the Virtual Monitor Console Routine (VMR) to alter a
system image file on disk. You can modify parts of the system without repeating the system
generation procedure by using VMR. This chapter applies to RSX-11M-PLUS operating
systems only (excluding pregenerated systems).
Chapter 6 describes how to use the SHUTUP Program to shut down the system in an
orderly fashion.
Part II, Resource Monitoring and Control, contains Chapters 7 to 10. After you set up your
system, read Part II to learn how to monitor system usage and how to ensure a fair allocation
of resources.
Chapter 7 describes how to use the Resource Monitoring Display (RMD) to display
information about active tasks and available resources in your system.
Chapter 8 describes the tasks available for managing memory resources. It includes
information on the Pool Monitor Task (PMT), secondary pool, and the Shuffler (SHF)
task. However, note that PMT is supplied with RSX-11M-PLUS operating systems only
(excluding pregenerated systems).
Chapter 9 describes how to use the Console Logger to control I/O to the console output
device (CO) and to record system messages at a terminal or in a log file. This chapter
applies to RSX-11M-PLUS operating systems only (excluding pregenerated systems).
Chapter 10 describes Resource Accounting, which creates a transaction file of system usage
information.
Part III, System Problems and Performance, contains Chapters 11 to 15. These chapters contain
information for correcting hardware-related problems and for improving system performance.
Chapter 11 provides an overview of the terminology and tools associated with detecting
and correcting problems with your hardware. It also serves as an introduction to the rest
of the chapters in Part III.
Chapter 12 describes how to use the I/O Exerciser (lOX) to detect and diagnose problems
on the disk, terminal, and tape units In your system's hardware configuration.
Chapter 13 describes how the Bad Block Replacement Control Task (RCT) performs bad
block handling and recovery on Mass Storage Control Protocol (MSCP) devices such as the
RA81.
Chapter 14 describes I/O queue optimization, which improves the throughput of the disk
subsystems used in your system.

xxii

Chapter 15 describes disk data caching, a feature that enhances I/O operations by reducing
the number of physical I/O requests performed during disk operations.
Part IV, Advanced Features, contains Chapters 16 to 19. When you are familiar with the
operating system, read Part IV to learn how to customize your system to fit your particular
needs.
Chapter 16 describes Shadow Recording (SHA), which allows your system to maintain a copy
of all information being written to a Files-II disk. This chapter applies to RSX-IIM-PLUS
operating systems only (excluding pregenerated systems).
Chapter 17 describes command line interpreter (CLI) tasks, including how to write a CLI.
Chapter 18 describes how to task build and install the DIGITAL Command Language (DCL)
task with various options. It also describes the Macro Metalanguage (MML), a set of macros
that performs the mapping from DCL syntax to Monitor Console Routine (MCR) syntax.
With this language, you can alter or add commands to extend DCL. This chapter applies to
RSX-IIM-PLUS operating systems only (excluding pregenerated systems).
Chapter 19 describes a catchall task (TDX). TDX allows you to run uninstalled tasks and
abbreviate command names.
Appendix A describes the set of User File Directory (UFD) conventions observed by the operating
system for files on disk. A section of file naming conventions is also included.

Associated Documents
Before you read this manual, you should be familiar with the following manuals:
•

The RSX-I1M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual provides information on the Monitor Console
Routine (MCR) commands

•

The RSX-IIM-PLUS Command Language Manual and the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volumes 1
and 2, provide information on the DIGITAL Command Language (DCL)

•

The RSX-IIM-PLUS Utilities Manual describes the utilities supported by the RSX-IIM-PLUS
and Micro/RSX operating systems

Although you do not need to read the RSX-I1M-PLUS System Generation and Installation Guide
before reading this manual, system generation logically precedes your use of the programs and
procedures documented in this manual. In addition, the RSX-llM-PLUS System Generation and
Installation Guide contains information on the system startup procedure (STARTUP.CMD).

xxiii

Conventions Used in This Document
The following conventions are used in this manual:

Convention

rvleaning

SET

Uppercase letters and words indicate that you should enter the
letter or word exactly as shown.

file name

Lowercase letters and words indicate that you are to substitute
a word or value. In command descriptions, lowercase letters
indicate a variable whose actual value is determined when the
command is entered or the message is issued. For example, the
value of the variable task name depends on the name of the
task associated with the command or message.

n8 or #n
nlO or n.

In general, the base of a number is indicated as a subscript
to the number. For example: 777778 or 255 10 , However,
in command descriptions and examples, decimal values may
be indicated by a trailing period (.). Octal values may be
indicated either by the absence of a period or by a number sign
character ( # ) preceding the number. For example, the following
three values are equal:
#377
255.
377
Unless specified otherwise, all numeric values required in a
command can be entered as decimal or octal.

...

Square brackets around a comma and an ellipsis mark indicate
that you can use a series of optional elements separated by
commas.
For example, (argument[, ... ]) means that you
can specify a series of optional arguments by enclosing the
arguments in parentheses and by separating them with commas.
Square brackets are also part of the User Identification Code
(UIC) and User File Directory (UFD) syntax (for example,
[group,member] or [name]). When you use a UIC or a UFD (in
a file specification, for example), you must include the brackets.

]

{}

Braces indicate a choice of required options. You are to choose
from one of the options listed.

:argument

Some parameters and qualifiers can be altered by the inclusion
of arguments preceded by a colon. An argument can be either
numerical (COPIES:3) or alphabetical (NAME:QIX).

()

Parentheses are used to enclose more than one argument in a
command line. For example:
SET /CACHE=DUO:(DEFER_WRITES,DIRECTORY,LOGICAL)

xxiv

Convention

Meaning

The at sign invokes an indirect command file. The at sign
immediately precedes the file specification for the indirect
command file, as follows:
~filename[.filetype;version]

A horizontal ellipsis indicates the following:
•

Additional, optional arguments in a statement have been
omitted.

•

The preceding item or items can be repeated one or more
times.

•

Additional parameters, values, or other information can be
entered.

A vertical ellipsis shows where elements of command input or
statements in an example or figure have been omitted because
they are irrelevant to the point being discussed.

KEYNAME

This typeface denotes one of the keys on the terminal keyboard.
For example, the RETURN key.

black ink

In examples, what the system prints or displays is printed in
black.
In interactive examples, what the user types is printed in red.
System responses appear in black.

blue ink

Text in blue ink indicates that the information pertains to
RSX-11M-PLUS multiprocessor systems only.
A symbol with a 1- to 3-character abbreviation indicates that
you press a k~ on the terminal. For example, @IT] indicates the
RETURN key, l.!:EJ indicates the LINE FEED key, and IDELI indicates
the DELETE key.
The symbol ICTRLja I means that you are to press the key marked

CTRL while pressing another key. Thus, ICTRLjzl indicates that
you are to press the CTRL key and the Z key simultaneously.
echoed on some terminals as "Z. However, not all
control characters echo.
Examples of terminal display in this manual show control key
sequences as they are displayed on the terminal screen.

I CTRLjZ I is

xxv

Summary of Technical Changes

The following sections list new and modified features for the RSX-IIM-PLUS and MicrojRSX
Version 4.0 operating systems. These new features are documented in this revision of the

RSX-llM-PLUS and MicrojRSX System Management Guide.

New and Modified Features
The RSX-IIM-PLUS and MicrojRSX Version 4.0 operating systems have the following new
features:
•

New VMR INSTALL keyword jDFB

•

New VMR SET keyword jCHAR_LENGTH

•

Data caching default values

•

Deferred disk write requests (DFR) for data caching

•

Larger extent sizes for data caching

New INSTALL Command Keyword /DFB

The INSTALL command keyword jDFB=YES allows the binding of Executive device logical unit
number (LUN) assignments to be deferred until a task is loaded into memory. The jDFB=NO
keyword allows binding to occur only at the time the task is installed.
The default is jDFB=YES.
New SET Command Keyword /CHAR_LENGTH

The SET command keyword jCHAR_LENGTH establishes the length of characters transmitted
and received by terminals attached to the system through variable-speed multiplexers.
You can specify the character length as either 7 or 8 bits. If you do not specify a length, VMR
displays the current setting. The default value for transmission is 8-bit characters.
This keyword is not valid for serial-line units.

xxvii

Data Caching Default Values
Prior to this release, the SET /CACHE command used default values for any of the options not
explicitly called out in the command line. Now, the SET command sets the default values for
the data caching options at the time the cache is activated for a device. Subsequent commands
change only the options specified in the command line; all other options retain the values
established when the cache was activated.

Deferred Disk Write Requests for Data Caching
Deferred disk write requests (DFRs) are now a data caching option. If data caching is selected
at system generation, you can enable DFRs for temporary files when you mount a disk or
when you set device characteristics. DFRs are a useful way of speeding up I/O operations for
temporary files on your system disk or on disks that are relatively slow writing data.
You can select the option by using one of the following commands:

Larger Extent Sizes for Data Caching
The maximum size of an I/O request for data caching has been increased from 15 blocks to
127 blocks. The following options support the larger extent size:
•

[NO]DIRECTORY

•

[NO]LOGICAL

•

[NO]OVERLAY

•

[NO]READ-AHEAD

•

[NO]VIRTUAL

Note that extent sizes can be modified for cached devices by using the SET or MOUNT
commands.

Changes to the Document
The following changes in organization are included in this revision of the RSX-llM-PLUS and

Micro/RSX System Management Guide:
•

File Transfer and Terminal Emulation (moved)

•

Shuffler Task (moved)

•

Secondary Pool (new addition)

•

Catchall Task (new addition)

For a detailed description of the new organization for this manual, see the previous section
entitled "Structure of This Document."

xxviii

File Transfer and Terminal Emulation
Information on the Micro/RSX File Transfer utility (MFT) and the Data Terminal Emulator (DTE)
is now contained in the RSX-IIM-PLUS Utilities Manual.

Shuffler Task
Previously, the Shuffler (SHF) task was described in its own chapter. Information on the Shuffler
is now contained in Chapter 8.

Secondary Pool
Information on secondary pool support is now provided in Chapter 8.

Catchall Task
Information on a Catchall Task (TDX), which is supplied with RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX
operating systems, is now provided in Chapter 19.

xxix

Part I: Setting Up and Shutting Down the

System

Chapter 1
Introduction to System Management
This chapter provides an introduction to the concepts and procedures associated with managing
an RSX-IIM-PLUS operating system or a MicrojRSX operating system that has the Advanced
Programmer's Kit installed.

1. 1 General System Concepts
Before you begin to set up and to modify your operating system, you should understand the
features that it supports. The topics covered in this section will help you to understand the
interaction of various system components and to optimize your system's operation after a system
generation.

1.1.1 Memory Partitions and Regions
Partitions are contiguous areas of physical memory that are managed and dynamically allocated
to regions by the Executive. Each partition accommodates as mflny tasks, device drivers, and
common regions as possible at anyone time.
The Executive brings a task into memory for execution and places the task in competition with
other active tasks. When tasks are brought into memory, they are placed in a section of memory
called a subpartition or "region." Regions are contiguous areas of memory in which executable
tasks run. Common regions are code libraries and data commons that can be shared by tasks
for more efficient use of physical memory. A task can run in any region large enough to
contain it.

Introduction to System Management

1-1

1. 1.2 Primary and Secondary Pool
Primary pool (usually referred to simply as "pool") occupies part of the region in memory
allocated to the Executive. When you run a task or perform some other action that requires
pool, the system allocates pool space in units of memory called "packets" or "nodes." However,
because the Executive (and consequently, pool) is permanently loaded in low memory, primary
pool does not appear in the list of available partitions.
Primary pool contains the Executive's database and temporary data structures that are used by
tasks while they execute. Because nearly all Executive functions require pool, a system can
exhaust pool when the level of system activity is high (for example, if too many tasks are
installed or too many volumes are mounted at the same time). When pool is depleted, the
system does not appear to have failed; however, it does not function normally. If there are
data lights on the front of the processor, they may flicker, but the system does not accept input.
Under these conditions, the system often cannot display error messages because the Executive
requires pool space to perform I/O. Once a system exhausts pool, you must restart the system.
Note
You can prevent pool from being depleted in two ways. First, take the
maximum amount of pool compatible with your system configuration during
system generation. Second, use the Pool Monitor Task (PMT) and the Resource
Monitoring Display (RMD) to monitor pool, and take appropriate action before
pool gets too low. (For more information, see Chapter 8.)

Secondary pool is allocated from main memory and is extensible. However, when you extend
secondary pool, you do so at the expense of main memory. Each time you increase the amount
of secondary pool space, you decrease the amount of available memory. As a system manager,
you need to create an appropriate balance between the two resources.
For more information on managing primary and secondary pool, see Chapter 8.

1.1.3 Memory Allocation
Instead of allocating a fixed amount of memory for specific requirements, the Executive allocates
memory space as it is needed by waiting regions, as follows:
1.

Uses a priority level of 1 to 250 10 to determine a waiting region's use of a partition. (A
higher number indicates a higher priority.) Each time a region is accessed, it is merged into
a priority-ordered queue of regions waiting to be loaded into the partition.

Begins at the base of the partition and searches for a free, contiguous area large enough
for the waiting region. The Executive examines the list of allocated areas in the partition.
To calculate the size of the gaps between the areas, it orders the list of allocated areas
according to their physical memory addresses.

Allocates space within the partition to a waiting region. When the Executive locates a
sufficiently large gap, it allocates the space to a waiting region. To record the allocation, the
Executive merges the Partition Control Block (PCB) for the region into the list of allocated
areas.

Eliminates the region to free memory when the task is done executing. Each time a region
exits and frees memory in the partition, the Executive examines the partition wait-queue
and tries. to allocate memory to the highest-priority waiting region.

1-2 Introduction to System Management

In some instances, a waiting region cannot be loaded into a partition because there is not enough
memory space available. The Executive keeps track of outstanding I/O on a region-by-region
basis; if there is no I/O pending, the Executive moves common regions and task regions to
increase the available memory space.

1. 1.3. 1 Checkpointing
Checkpointing preempts a lower-priority region when a higher-priority region can be brought in
to make use of the freed memory. This optimizes the use of system resources while maintaining
a priority-scheduling discipline.
Checkpointing in a partition occurs as the result of a memory allocation failure. That is, the
Executive tries to allocate a contiguous area of a partition to a region and it cannot find an
unoccupied memory area of sufficient size. When this happens, the Executive reexamines the list
of allocated areas in the partition to determine whether it can form a free space of sufficient size
by checkpointing one or more neighboring regions. Each region considered for checkpointing
must be of a lower priority, it must be checkpointable, and it must have checkpointing enabled.
The Executive scans the list from the beginning, looking for a series of neighboring regions
(possibly separated by gaps of free space), where each region satisfies the checkpoint criteria.
If the memory occupied by a series of regions and free space satisfies the memory requirement
for the higher-priority region, the Executive moves or checkpoints the lower-priority regions
from memory to disk. Then, the Executive allocates the released memory to the higher-priority
region.
The checkpointed region is immediately placed in competition with other regions waiting for
residency. When the checkpointed region is reloaded, tasks mapped to that region continue
processing from the point where they were interrupted.

1. 1.3.2 Partition Fragmentation
Checkpointing cannot always free enough memory space to load a waiting region. This is a
result of partition fragmentation and can be caused by any of the following events:
•

Regions of various sizes entering and exiting memory.

•

Device drivers loaded in the middle of a partition. Device drivers, and other regions which
cannot be moved, divide a partition into two partition sections.

•

Regions with nonbuffered, outstanding I/O.
The Executive must wait for a region's I/O count to reach zero before the region can
be checkpointed. While the Executive waits, tasks that map the region are blocked from
execution. This prevents those tasks from issuing more I/O requests, which could delay the
loading of the waiting region.

•

Regions that are connected to the IPll driver.

•

Regions that are connected to an interrupt vector by the Executive directive Connect to
Interrupt Vector (CINT$).

•

Regions that have been fixed by the Executive for a memory parity error.

Introduction to System Management 1-3

If the Executive is unable to load a waiting region, the Executive requests the Shuffler (SHF).
Thp Sh11fflpr
----

movp~ rpP"ion~
in nartition~
( J . l

to create the free snace necessary to load a waitinQ"
1.

region. The Executive requests the Shuffler only when all other attempts to load a waiting
region fail.

1. 1'.3.3 Memory Compaction
The Shuffler is a privileged task designed to compact space in partitions when a memory
allocation failure occurs. When the Executive is unable to load a waiting region into a partition,
the Executive requests the Shuffler. The Shuffler searches memory for a partition that has at
least one region waiting for space. When the Shuffler locates such a partition, it attempts to
move or "shuffle" regions in the partition to create contiguous space .
. The Shuffler shuffles common regions created by Executive memory management directives.
Because the system maintains an outstanding I/O count on a region-by-region basis, the Shuffler
can determine whether outstanding I/O is pending. When there is no I/O pending, common
regions can be shuffled.
For more information on the Shuffler, see Chapter 8.

1. 1.3.4 Disk Swapping
Swapping varies task priorities so that tasks of equal or close priority checkpoint each other
periodically. This allows such tasks to share a portion of memory.
Swapping does not alter the checkpointing algorithm because a task can only checkpoint another
task of lower priority; it cannot checkpoint a task of equal or higher priority. The priority with
which you install a task (the installed priority) remains constant. However, the memory priority
of tasks varies over time. The memory priority determines the order in which tasks are swapped
to and from memory.
There are two parameters that control the swapping algorithm.
Parameters
Swapping interval

Determines how often the Executive scans the partition lists to modify the memory priority
of resident tasks. A typical swapping interval is 0.5 second.
Swapping priority range

Specifies the absolute value of the range through which a task's priority varies from its
installed priority. A typical value is 5. This value causes a task's memory priority to vary
from P+5 to P-5, where P is the priority set for the task when it is installed.
On RSX-IIM-PLUS operating systems, these parameters are set by commands in the command
file SYSVMR.CMD. You can change them by using the MCR or VMR commands SET /SWPC
and SET /SWPR. For a description of the MCR commands, see the RSX-11M-PLUS MeR
Operations Manual. For a description of the VMR commands, see Chapter 5 of this manual.
The key element of the swapping algorithm is a byte in the task's header that maintains
the swapping priority of the task. In a system that uses swapping, the Executive determines
whether or not a nonresident task should checkpoint a resident task by making a comparison.
It compares the running priority of the nonresident task with the sum of the running and

1-4 Introduction to System Management

swapping priorities (called the effective priority) of the resident task. If the running priority of
the nonresident task is greater than the effective priority of the resident task, then the resident
task is checkpointed.
Each time a task is read into memory (as the result of an initial task load or checkpoint
read request), the Executive initializes the swapping priority byte in the task header. At each
swapping interval, the swapping priority of each resident task is reduced by I, until it r.eaches
its lowest priority. If there is a possibility that checkpointing within a main partition'might
occur based on the new priorities, the Executive executes its partition allocation algorithm for
that partition.
When you specify the swapping parameters, consider how your system is used. For example, in
a highly interactive system, a high checkpoint rate may reduce the need for swapping. Editors
and other interactive tasks usually run at a higher priority than tasks devoted to computations;
however, they may also be checkpointed more frequently. While such tasks wait for terminal
input, they can be checkpointed out of memory by lower-priority tasks. Then, when the input
is complete, the interactive task can return to memory by checkpointing the lower-priority task.
In general, from the time a task is loaded into memory, the average time for the task to be
checkpointed by another task of the same running priority is roughly equal to the product of
the two swapping parameters (swapping interval and swapping priority range). Tasks with the
same running priority tend to get the same amount of time in memory. Tasks whose running
priorities differ by less than the swapping priority range tend to receive different amounts of
time in memory, with the higher priority tasks getting more time.

1. 1.4 Dynamic Checkpoint Space Allocation
Dynamic checkpoint space allocation allows all task checkpointing operations to use common
system checkpoint files. Thus, you can install tasks as checkpointable without having to allocate
checkpoint space in the task image file, and you can run multiple copies of a checkpointable
task. By allocating checkpoint space dynamically, the system reduces the number of tasks that
require memory residency at any given time.
To improve memory usage in large systems, make all or most of the tasks in the system
checkpointable. The DCL command SET DEVICE /CHECKPOINT_FILE (MCR command
Allocate Checkpoint Space or ACS) establishes and eliminates system checkpoint files. You can
establish one checkpoint file for each mounted Files-II volume.
When the Executive requires checkpoint space, it selects devices in the order in which you
allocate the checkpoint files. Therefore, if you issue multiple SET DEVICE (ACS) commands,
specify the fastest devices first. For example, a system may have both an RS04 fixed-head disk
and an RP06 movable-head disk. If you determine that limited checkpoint space (400 blocks)
can be allocated on the RS04, allocate additional space (2000 blocks) on the RP06 to ensure
that checkpoint allocation failures do not occur.
As the Executive allocates and deallocates checkpoint space, the checkpoint files can fill up
and become fragmented. When possible, the Executive reuses the restored checkpoint space.
However, depending on the sizes of the checkpoint files and the amount of fragmentation, the
Executive may fail to find space to fulfill a checkpoint request. In this case, a task must wait·
until additional memory or checkpoint space becomes available.

Introduction to System Management 1-5

If a critical task must get into memory, it may be unacceptable for a checkpoint operation to
l'_!l

lCl11.

_______ ~_

t::H~UH::

L1 __ I

______

! ___ ._

tHClt ClUy t,lVeU

• __ 1 _ _ _ _ _ ,

td.~K

Ld.ll

d.lWd.y~

1 __

•

...

LIleLKpunueu, allUCate cneCKpulnt space In tne

task image file. Then, if the Executive fails to find space for the task in the system checkpoint
files, it can checkpoint the task to the preallocated space. There can be no checkpoint allocation
failures in partitions in which all active tasks have preallocated checkpoint space.
Note
This does not apply to tasks that use external headers (that is, headers that are
placed in a reserved area immediately below the task image, instead of in pool).
External headers require system checkpoint space.
For more information on the SET DEVICE command, see the RSX-11M-PLUS Command Language
Manual or the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 1. For information on the ACS command, see
the RSX-11M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual.

1.1.5 Task Extension
The Executive directive Extend Task (EXTK$) allows tasks to increase or decrease their memory
allocation during execution. For example, the MACRO-II Relocatable Assembler (MAC) and
the Task Builder (TKB) use the EXTK$ directive to maintain a memory-resident symbol table,
until the table reaches a maximum size limit.
To modify the maximum size limit, use the DCL command SET SYSTEM /EXTENSION_LIMIT
(MCR command SET /MAXEXT). To reduce the initial memory requirements for these tasks,
install them with a small increment, such as 2048 10 • For large assemblies and task builds, these
utilities increase their size to the maximum limit, which also increases their speed. Then, before
processing the next command, they return to their original size.

1. 1.6 Round-Robin Scheduler
The round-robin scheduler ensures that all tasks of equal priority share the central processing unit
(CPU). The scheduler alternates between CPU-bound tasks of equal priority (that is, tasks that
have relatively high requirements for CPU time) and schedules tasks dedicated to I/O operations
to run before any of the CPU-bound tasks. However, note that this affects only those tasks
currently in memory (tasks that are in the Active Task List); tasks that are checkpointed or in
the partition wait queue are not affected.
The scheduler provides access to the CPU for a predetermined length of time measured in ticks.
A tick is a clock interrupt. The rate at which interrupts occur depends on the type of clock
installed in your system. For a line frequency clock, the tick rate is either 50 or 60 per second,
depending on the line frequency. For a programmable clock, a maximum of 1000 ticks is
available; you can select the actual frequency during system generation (see the RSX-11M-PLUS
System Generation and Installation Guide). To modify the time interval used by the round-robin
scheduler, use the SET /RNDC command.
Round-robin scheduling does not affect the standard processor competition among tasks of
different priorities. It also does not affect tasks that are not in the specified priority range.
To modify the high and low limits of the priority range considered for scheduling, use the
SET /RNDH and SET /RNDL commands, respectively.

1-6 Introduction to System Management

1. 1.7 Parity Support
If the Executive detects a main memory parity error within a task region, the Executive attempts
to declare a parity error asynchronous system trap (AST) to that task. If the parity error occurs
within a common region, the Executive attempts to declare a parity error AST to each task
mapped to the shared region. In either case, if a task to which a parity error AST is declared
does not have an AST recovery routine, the Executive aborts the task and issues a message to
let you know that the task has been aborted.

When the Executive detects an error in a region, it locks the region into memory. This prevents
that space from being reused. The Executive then invokes the FIXER task, which probes the
region until it finds the segment containing the error.
When a parity error is detected within the Executive, or if the Executive detects a parity error
while reading to or writing from a region, the system attempts to print the following message
before halting:
***EXEC PARITY ERROR STOP***

For cache parity errors on the PDP-II/20, the half of the cache in which the parity error is
detected may be disabled. If two errors in the same half are detected within the same minute,
the cache is disabled. If less than one error per minute is detected and the system recovers by
reading through to main memory, the cache is not disabled. When either one or both halves
of the cache are disabled, the system operates in a degraded state. However, errors continue to
be logged.

1. 1.8 Multiple File Control Processors
For RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX systems with several high-performance disks, you can
increase file system throughput by mounting each volume with a separate Files-II Ancillary
Control Processor (FIIACP). Multiple file control processors enhance the response to device
requests by reducing the need for physical I/O operations each time a disk device is requested.
The FIIACP buffers the bit map and Master File Directory (MFD) for one device at a time. If
you mount every volume with the same FIIACP, the FIIACP clears the buffer each time you
request a different volume. Then, to obtain the bit map and MFD for a requested volume, the
FIIACP must perform physical I/O to the disk. In contrast, if you mount each volume with
a separate FIIACP, the ACP reads the bit map and MFD into memory only once. Subsequent
requests to a volume are directed to the appropriate ACP, which buffers the bit map and MFD
for that volume.
See the RSX-IIM-PLUS Command Language Manual, the RSX-IIM-PLUS MCR Operations Manual,
or the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 1, for information on the commands used to mount
volumes with separate FIIACPs.

Introduction to System Management 1-7

1. 1.9 File System Options
By using the DeL commands INITIALlZh and MOUNT (MeR commands INI and MOU,
respectively), you can modify file system parameters such as the default extension block
count, the index file position, the memory buffers, and the mapping pointer count. (For
more information on these commands, see the RSX-11M-PLUS Command Language Manual, the
RSX-llM-PLUS MCR Operations Manual, or the MicrolRSX User's Guide, Volume 1.)
The following list describes some of the available options (MCR commands appear in
parentheses):
•

Default extension block count:
IEXTENSION (INI IEXT)

MOUNT IEXTENSION (MOU IEXT) or INITIALIZE

When a disk file is created or extended, File Control Services (FCS) allocates a default
number of additional disk blocks to the file (usually 5 blocks). For example, if a task writes
12 blocks of data in a file, three 5-block allocations are made, and the remaining three
blocks are unused. You can use the IEXTENSION qualifier

While ACNT is running, the system account file is locked. Tasks, such as HELLO or LOGIN,
cannot open the account file to verify account names and passwords. As a result, users are
temporarily unable to log in to the system. This does not affect users that are currently logged in
to the system; however, it does interfere with users who are attempting to log in. To minimize
this interference, run ACNT after users have already logged in and exit ACNT as soon as you
are finished.
After you enter the RUN command, ACNT identifies itself and displays the following list of
options:
RSX-11M-PLUS Account File Maintenance Program
Account Utility options are:
Add
Add an account to file
Delete
Delete an account file entry
Examine
Examine existing account
List
List account file
Modify
Modify account file
Sort
Sort account file
CTRL/Z
Terminate utility session
Enter option:

To select an option, type the first letter of the option name. For example, if you want to add
an account, type A. ACNT responds by requesting further input or by displaying information
for the option you select.

2.4 Creating the Account File
The CREATE option lets you create the account file. Create the account file immediately after
generating your system to allow normal use of the system. The CREATE option allocates the
account file LB:[O,O]RSX11.SYS and sets the file protection so that only privileged users and
privileged tasks can access the account file.
You can copy and extend the account file by using the Peripheral Interchange Program (PIP;
see Section 2.12). The new copy will have the default file protection; therefore, run ACNT
immediately. ACNT detects the incorrect protection codes and restores the proper protection.
Example 2-1 shows how to create the account file on RSX-11M-PLUS systems.

The Account File Maintenance Program 2-3

Example 2-1: Creating an Account File
>

At the Enter option: prompt, specify the maximum number of account entries to be listed in the
file. To specify a decimal value, append a period to the number. The system then creates an
account file, named LB:[O,O]RSXl1.SYS, large enough to contain nlO accounts. In the previous
example, the system creates an account file for 3510 accounts.
After the create operation completes, press the ESCAPE key to request a list of options. You
can then add accounts to the account file.

2.5 Adding Account Entries
The ADD option lets you add accounts to the account file. ACNT prompts you for the following
information:
•

UIC (the account number)

•

Default system device

•

Password

•

First name

•

Last name

•

Default file protection

•

Default directory string

•

Session identifier

•

Account number

•

CLI, if the system supports more than one CLI

•

Whether the user's terminal is to be slaved after login

ACNT maintains the file in ascending order by UIC.
The prompts for the password, first name, and last name specify the maximum number of
characters that ACNT accepts. Passwords can be up to 39 characters long; however, systems
using the DECnet package can use only 8-character passwords. The valid characters for user
names and passwords are as follows:

2-4 The Account File Maintenance Program

• A to Z,
• o to 9

uppercase and lowercase

•

' (apostrophe)

•

. (period)

•

- (hyphen)

•

$ (dollar sign)

•

! (exclamation point)

The default system device prompt requests a device name and unit number (optional, if the unit
is 0). ACNT accepts logical, physical, and pseudo device names. The acceptance of logical and
pseudo device names lets you move the user disk to another drive without having to change
the default device in the account file. When you specify the device name, do not include a
colon (:).
RSX-11M-PLUS systems include two additional prompts: one is for a session identifier and the
other is for the user account number. The session identifier and user account number are used
by the Resource Accounting program (see Chapter 10). The session identifier is also used by the
HELLO task (see the RSX-llM-PLUS MCR Operations Manual or the RSX-llM-PLUS Command

Language Manual).
Example 2-2 shows how to add an account.
Example 2-2:

Adding an Account Entry

RSX-llM-PLUS Account File Maintenance Program
Account Utility options are:
Add
Add an account to file
Delete
Delete an account file entry
Examine
Examine existing account
List
List account file
Modify
Modify account file
Sort
Sort account file
CTRL/Z
Terminate utility session
Enter option:
Enter account (group. member):
Default system device (DDU):
o
Password (39 chars. or fewer):
First name (12 chars. or fewer):
Last name (14 chars. or fewer):
Default file protection ([SY.OW.GR.WO]):
[RWED •RWED . R•R]
C)
Default directory string ([group. member] or [name]) :
Session ident (3 chars. or fewer):
CD
CD
Account number (4 digits or fewer):
Enter user CLI (default=MCR):
(8
Slave terminal? [Y/N]:
Disable login/logout messages? [Y/N]:

•e
o

•

•
•

In this example, ACNT creates an account for Kathy Bean.

Invokes the ACNT utility by using the RUN command.

.. Lists the available options.

The Account File Maintenance Program

2-5

Selects the ADD option to add an account entry.

Specifies the VIC with a group number of 10 (a nonprivileged account) and a member
number of 11.

Specifies the default system device. ACNT accepts logical, physical, and pseudo device
names. Specifying the pseudo device name SYO allows you to move the system disk to
another drive without having to change the default device in the account. Note that the
device name does not include a colon.

CD Specifies the password as BASEKITPL, which is encrypted by ACNT when the account is
created.

Creates the account for a user named Kathy Bean. Because the ACNT encryption routines
require the user's last name to form the encrypted password, you must specify a last name
to create a valid account entry. If you do not specify a last name, the account will not be
created with multiuser protection.

•

Specifies the default file protection as read, write, extend, and delete access for system and
owner, and read-only access for group and world.

CD Selects the user's last name (Bean) as the default directory string, which can be up to 9
characters long. Your response to this prompt is always interpreted as a named directory.
To specify the default directory string as a numbered (nonamed) directory, press the RETURN
key without specifying the VIC. By default, ACNT assigns the VIC to the default directory
(in this example, [10,11]).

4D Specifies WRT as the session identifier.
•

Specifies 23 as the account number.

Selects MCR as the user's CLI. MCR is the default for RSX-IIM-PLVS systems; DCL is the
default for Micro/RSX systems.

CD Sets the terminal to noslave status.
CI)

Enables login and logout messages.

After ACNT creates the account and finishes prompting for all the necessary information, it
returns the following message:
Account entry and directory have been created.

2.6 Deleting Account Entries
The DELETE option eliminates individual accounts from the file. After you specify the account
to be deleted, ACNT displays the account entry and requests a Y (Yes) or N (No) response for
verification. If you type N, ACNT searches for another account with the same VIC. If you type
V, ACNT asks if you want to delete the account's Vser File Directory (VFD) and other files;
type V again to delete these files. If you type N in response to the deletion query, the account's
files and VFD are left intact.

2-6 The Account File Maintenance Program

Before deleting the account's UFD, be sure that the files associated with the UFD are not
protected to prevent the system from deleting them. If the user has set the protection to
deny the system delete access, ACNT cannot delete those files; however, ACNT can still delete
the UFD. So, if you type Y in response to the Delete UFD and files? prompt, and ACNT is
unable to delete the files, ACNT will delete the UFD but not the files. If this happens, use the
File Structure Verification Utility (VFY) to eliminate the files (see the RSX-IIM-PLUS Utilities

Manual).
Example 2-3 shows how to delete accounts from the account file.

Example 2-3:

Deleting an Account Entry

•

7-AUG-87 14:30:02 RSX-11M-PLUS Multiuser Account File List

Page 1

Owner = [010,011]
Login_defaults = SYO: [BEAN]
L_name = BEAN
F_name = KATHY
Password = (ENCRYPTED)
Def_CLI = MCR
Session 10 = WRT
Account # = 23
Total_logins = 24
Last_login = 7-Aug-87 13:01:50
Def_dir_string
NOSilent
Characteristics = NOSlave
Def_Protection = [RWED,RWED,R,R]
This entry? [[YIN]]:
Delete UFO and files? [yIN]:
Account entry has been deleted

•oo

This example deletes Kathy Bean's account, [10,11].

Selects the DELETE option.

•

Specifies the account [10,11] for deletion.

•

Displays the account entry and prompts you for verification.

Prompts you before deleting the account UFD and files. If you are sure the system has
delete access to all the files associated with [10,11], type Y (Yes) in response to this question.
Otherwise, exit ACNT and use the MCR or DCL command SET to change the file protection
to SYSTEM:DELETE. Then, reinvoke ACNT and delete the account.

Displays a message to indicate that the account has been deleted.

The Account File Maintenance Program

2-7

2.7 Examining Account Entries
To display the information for a single account, use the EXAMINE option. To display the
information for a group of accounts or for all accounts in the account file, use the LIST option
(see Section 2.8).
You can specify the account you want to examine by entering either the UIC in the format [g,m]
or an account name. ACNT displays all accounts it finds that match the UIC or account name
specified.
The EXAMINE option displays the following information for each account in the account file:
•

UIC

•

Last name

•

User's CLI

•

Number of times the user has logged in to the system.

•

Whether the user's terminal is to be slaved after login.

•

Default file protection.

•

Default system device

•

First name

•

Session identifer and account number

•

Date and time of the last login.

•

Default directory string. If the default directory string is the same as the login default,
ACNT displays a blank space.

•

Status of the user's terminal as silent (or NOsilent) after login.

ACNT remains in Examine mode until you press the ESCAPE key to request a list of options.
Example 2-4 shows how to use ACNT to examine the accounts in the account file.

2-8 The Account File Maintenance Program

Example 2-4:

Examining an Account Entry

Page 1

Owner = [010,011]
Login_defaults = SYO: [BEAN] ~
L_name = BEAN
F_name = KATHY
Password=(ENCRYPTED) ~
Def_CLI = MCR
Session ID = WRT
Account # = 23 C)
Total_logins = 24
Last_login = 7-AUG-87 13:01:50 ~
Characteristics = NOSlave
Def_dir_string
NOSilent ~
Def_Protection = [RWED,RWED,R,R] ~

In this example, Kathy Bean's account is examined.
~

Lists the UIC [10,11] and login defaults. The default system device is SYO and the default
directory string is [BEAN].

Displays Kathy's last name and first name. The password is encrypted, so ACNT displays
(ENCRYPTED) instead of the password itself.

Displays the CLI (MCR), the session identifier (WRT), and the account number (23).

Displays the total number of logins (24), as well as the date (7-AUG-87) and time (13:01:50)
of the last login.

Displays the terminal characteristics (the terminal is set to NOSlave and NOSilent). ACNT
leaves a space in place of the default directory because it is the same as the login default
displayed in the first line.

Shows the default file protection. In this example, the file protection is read, write,
extend, and delete access for system and owner, and read access for group and world.
If you examine an account that does not use a default file protection, ACNT displays
NODeLYrotection.

After you examine an account or group of accounts, ACNT prompts you with the following
message:
Key to continue, CTRL/Z for ACNT options menu:

If you want to examine another entry, press the RETURN key. If you want to select a different
option or to exit ACNT, press CTRL/Z.

The Account File Maintenance Program 2-9

2.8 Listing Account Entries
The LIST option either displays on your terminal or lists in a file the account entries in the
account file. You can display all the entries or only a specified group of entries. If you type F (for
file), ACNT creates the file ACCOUNT.DMP, which contains all the account information you
request with the LIST option. After you exit from ACNT, you can print the ACCOUNT.DMP
file.
Example 2-5 shows how to list account entries.
Example 2-5:

Listing Account Entries

RSX-11M-PLUS Account File Maintenance Program
Account Utility options are:
Add
Add an account to file
Delete
Delete an account file entry
Examine
Examine existing account
List
List account file
Modify
Modify account file
Sort
Sort account file
CTRL/Z
Terminate utility session
Enter option:
..
Only the old UNENCRYPTED type passwords can be printed
Print passwords (default no)? [YIN]:
~
All accounts (default no)? [YIN]:
~
Enter group number:
List on Terminal(default) or File(ACCOUNT.DMP) [T/F]:

7-AUG-87 14:30:02 RSX-11M-PLUS Multiuser Account File List

Page 1

Owner = [010,011]
Login_defaults = SYO:[BEAN]
L_name = BEAN
F_name = KATHY
Password =
Def_CLI = MCR
Session ID = WRT
Account # = 23
Total_logins = 24
Last_login = 7-AUG-87 13:01:50
Characteristics = NOSlave
Def_dir_string
NOSilent
Def_Protection = [RWED,RWED,R,R]

This example lists only one account with the group number equal to 10. The member number
is II, and the owner is Kathy Bean.
.. Selects the LIST option by typing the letter L.
~

Shows that the password is not printed; the password field for the displayed entry is left
blank. (Note that encrypted passwords cannot be displayed, even if you specify Y in
response to the "Print passwords?" prompt.) This is the default.

Lists only a selected group of accounts. This is the default.

Specifies all accounts with the group number field of the UIC equal to 10.

Displays the account on the terminal (and not in the file, ACCOUNT .DMP). This is the
default.

After ACNT lists all the accounts you have specified, it returns the following prompt:
Key to continue, CTRL/Z for ACNT options menu:

2-10 The Account File Maintenance Program

To list more account entries, press the RETURN key. To exit ACNT or to select another option,
press CTRL/Z.

2.9 Modifying Account Entries
The MODIFY option allows you to change the password, default system device, default file
protection, first name and last name for an account, and the slave status of a terminal. You can
also change the session identifier and the account number. If you include support for multiple
CLls during system generation, you can change the default CLI for an account.
After you specify the account you want to modify, ACNT displays an account entry and asks
for verification. To indicate that the correct account was or was not specified, type either V
(Yes) or N (No), respectively. If you type N, ACNT searches the file for another entry with the
same VIC. If you type V, ACNT prompts for the entry details. If you do not want to change an
item, press the ESCAPE key.
Example 2-6 shows how to modify account information.

The Account File Maintenance Program

2-11

Example 2-6:

Modifying an Account Entry

•

7-AUG-87 14:30:02 RSX-llM-PLUS Multiuser Account File List

Page 1

Owner = [010,011]
Login_defaults = SYO: [BEAN]
L_name = BEAN
F_name = KATHY
Password = (ENCRYPTED)
Def_CLI = MCR
Session ID = WRT
Account # = 23
Total_logins = 24
Last_login = 7-AUG-87 13:01:50
Def_dir_string
NOSilent
Characteristics = NOSlave
Def_Protection = [RWED,RWED,R,R]
This entry? [Y/N]:

Type to leave entry unchanged
Password (39 chars. or fewer):
Default system device ( DDU ):
~
First name (12 chars. or fewer ):
Last name (14 chars. or fewer ):
Default file protection ([SY,OW,GR,WO]):
Default directory string ([group, member] or [name]):
New directory has been created
Enter user CLI (default=MCR):
Slave terminal? [Y/N]:
Disable login/logout messages? [Y/N]:
Session ident (3 chars. or fewer):
Account number (4 digits or fewer):

In this example, Kathy Bean's account is modified.

Specifies the MODIFY option.

•

Selects the account VIC [10,11]. Note that you can also specify the user's last name (in this
example, Bean).

Displays the requested entry and prompts you for verification.

Leaves the password, system device, first and last name, and default file protection
unchanged.

•

Changes the default directory string to MEMOS.

Displays a message to indicate that the default directory string has been changed.

•

Changes the session identifier to DEV.

2-12 The Account File Maintenance Program

ACNT prompts you for changes to all the account fields; then, ACNT prompts you with the
following message:
Key to continue, CTRL/Z for ACNT options menu:

Press CTRL/Z to return to the options menu. Then, if you want to exit ACNT, press CTRL/Z
again.

2.10 Sorting Account Entries
The SORT option sorts the account entries in ascending order by UIC. Example 2-7 shows how
to sort the account file.
Example 2-7:

Sorting the Account File

RSX-l1M-PLUS Account File Maintenance Program
Account Utility options are:
Add
Add an account to file
Delete
Delete an account file entry
Examine
Examine existing account
List
List account file
Modify
Modify account file
Sort
Sort account file
CTRL/Z
Terminate utility session
Enter option:

After the sort operation is complete, ACNT returns the following message and then redisplays
the ACNT menu:
Account file is now sorted by UlC

2. 11 Exiting from ACNT
The EXIT option allows you to exit from the ACNT program. When you exit from ACNT,
ACNT returns the following message:
Account file modification is complete

Note that this message is displayed even if you do not modify any of the account entries.

2.12 Increasing the Size of the Account File
The account file supplied with your system ([O,O]RSX11.SYS) can include a maximum of 36
accounts. If you need more accounts, create a larger account file. Then, run ACNT to reenter
the accounts that were in the previous file and to add new accounts.
To create a larger account file, use the following procedure:
1. Run the ACNT utility and use the LIST option to obtain a list of the accounts in the current
account file. Send the output to a file so that you can print it later.
2. Delete the current account file by using the following command line:
$

The Account File Maintenance Program

2-13

Run the ACNT utility again. ACNT prints an identification line and the following messages:

***

RSX-llM-PLUS Account File Maintenance Utility

***

Creating Account file -- LB: [O.O]RSXll.SYS
Enter maximum number of accounts:

Enter the maximum number of accounts that you expect to need. For example:
Enter maximum number of accounts:

To allow for future expansion, create a few more accounts than you currently need.
5.

Use the ADD option to reenter the accounts that were in the previous file and to add new
accounts.
Because the passwords for the previous accounts are encrypted, you need to assign a
temporary password for each account. Notify users of the temporary password and then
advise them to alter their passwords (with the SET PASSWORD command) as soon as they
log in to the system.

2.13 Error Messages
This section describes the messages that the ACNT utility displays on your terminal when it
encounters errors.
ACNT-Account already exists

Explanation: You attempted to add an account with a UIC and password that already exists
in the account file.
User Action: Use the LIST option to obtain a listing of all account entries in the account file.
Then, use a UIC and password that do not appear on the list.
ACNT -Account tile already exists

Explanation: You attempted to create an account file that already exists.
User Action: You cannot create a second account file. However, if you want to add an
account entry to the account file, select the ADD option by typing A.
ACNT -Account tile error

Explanation: The program detected an I/O error while processing the account file. This may
indicate that the disk is too full or that another user was attempting to access the same file.
User Action: Use the DIRECTORY/FULL command to see if the disk is full. Also, be
sure that no other (privileged) users are running ACNT. If the disk is full, purge or delete
unnecessary files to create more space. If another user is running ACNT, wait until they
are finished before reentering the RUN $ACNT command line.
ACNT -Account tile full

Explanation: The account file is full; you cannot add further accounts.
User Action: Create a larger account file. (For information on increasing the size of the
account file, see Section 2.12.)

2-14 The Account File Maintenance Program

ACNT -Cannot find account

Explanation: You attempted to delete, to examine, or to modify an account that does not
exist.

User Action: Use the LIST option to check the account name and UIC. Then, try again
specifying the correct account.
ACNT -Invalid default device name

Explanation: The default system device you specified is not a disk device.
User Action: Specify a disk as the default system device.
ACNT -Invalid option

Explanation: The option you specified in response to the Enter option: prompt is not a valid
option. You may have typed the name of the option incorrectly.
User Action: Specify one of the options listed in the menu (type A, D, E, L, M, S, or press
CTRL/Z).
ACNT-I/O Error

Explanation: The disk that has the account file is full or write-locked.
User Action: If the disk is full, delete files to provide space on the disk. If it is write-locked,
enable write access.
ACNT -Listing file error

Explanation: When you use the LIST option, ACNT attempts to open a file named
ACCOUNT.DMP. By default, ACNT searches for the file in your current UIC on the
device SY:. This message indicates that ACNT cannot open the file; for example, the device
is full or it does not contain a UFD for the current VIC. The device may be full, write-locked,
or it may not contain your current default directory.
User Action: If the device is full, delete some files. If the device is write-locked, enable write
access. If your current default directory does not exist on the current default device, create
the directory, change your default directory to one that does exist, or change your default
device to one that contains your default directory.
ACNT -Syntax or command input error

Explanation: You typed an invalid character.
User Action: Check the command syntax and reenter the information.
ACNT -Warning •• Device does not exist on current system. OK? [Y IN]:

Explanation: The specified default device is not known to the system.
User Action: If you enter Y (Yes) in response to the OK? prompt, ACNT retains the device
name as a logical device name. If you create accounts by using logical device names for
default devices, be sure to assign those logical names to actual devices before the accounts
are used. If you enter N (No), ACNT prompts again for another device name.

The Account File Maintenance Program 2-15

ACNT-Workflle-dyn.

memo exhausted

Explanaiion; The system dues nut have sufficient pool space for the requested operation.
This is usually a temporary condition.

User Action: Wait for pool to be restored; then, reenter the command. (For more information
on monitoring and restoring pool, see Chapters 7 and 8, respectively.)
ACNT-Workflle-open file

Explanation: The disk containing the account file is full or write-locked.
User Action: If the disk is full, delete files to provide space on the disk. If the disk is
write-locked, set default to a privileged UIC to enable write access.
ACNT -Workflle-vlrtual storage exceeded

Explanation: The workfile exceeds virtual memory or there is insufficient pool space. This
is usually a temporary condition.
User Action: Wait for pool to be restored; then, reenter the command. (For more information
on monitoring and restoring pool, see Chapters 7 and 8, respectively.)

2-16 The Account File Maintenance Program

Chapter 3
Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager
This chapter includes an illustrated sequence of steps for setting up the Queue Manager (QMG),
print processors, and batch processors. It also includes a description of commands to QMG and
a list of relevant error messages. This chapter does not include descriptions of the commands.
for print and batch processing operations. For information on using QMG to process print or
batch requests, see the RSX-11M-PLUS Batch and Queue Operations Manual or the MicrojRSX

User's Guide, Volume 2.
Except where noted, all commands in this chapter are privileged; you must have a privileged
account to use the commands.

3. 1 Introduction to the Queue Manager
Most systems include the Queue Manager (QMG) for multistream line printer spooling. Line
printer spooling is the process of coordinating output directed to a line printer. Without QMG,
output passes directly to the line printer. So, if many users and tasks direct output to the
line printer at the same time, the printer may print three lines of one file and then two of
another. However, when you use QMG, output is saved in separate files on a mass-storage
device (usually a disk). Then, QMG despools or transfers the files from the disk to the printer,
one at a time.
The Queue Manager also supports transparent spooling and batch processing. These features are
defined as follows:
Transparent spooling

Allows you to specify the name of a spooled output device as the
destination of a job (instead of using an output file specification).
Transparent spooling applies to any task that creates an output
file.

Batch processing

Allows you to submit a command file containing commands and
data to the system for execution. Note that you can use QMG
without batch processing, but you cannot have batch processing
without QMG.

For more information on spooling and batch processing, see the RSX-11M-PLUS Batch and
Queue Operations Manual or the MicrojRSX User's Guide, Volume 2.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-1

3.2 Queue Management Components
The queue management subsystem consists of five major components. They are as follows:
A command interface task (QMGCLI)

Processes print requests, batch requests, and queue access commands. (For more information
on the queue access commands, see the RSX-llM-PLUS Batch and Queue Operations Manual
or the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 1.) QMGCLI communicates with the Queue Manager
(QMG) by sending it data packets.
The Queue Manager (QMG)

Controls the queuing and dequeuing of print and batch jobs. QMG communicates with
QMGCLI and the despooler tasks to process requests.
The despool prototype task (LPP)

Attaches a device and despools print jobs to the device. It is an output despooler, which is
also called a print processor. You must install a print processor for each device you want
to be spooled (that is, for each device you place under the control of QMG).
With the exception of RL02 distribution kits, RSX-11M-PLUS systems include the source
files for LPP on device SY: in directory [121,10]. You can use this as a model to write print
processors (output despoolers) for your applications.
The batch processor prototype task (BPR)

Creates a virtual terminal that passes commands to the batch processor and to a system CLI
(MCR, DCL, or a user-written CLI.) The BPR task can be installed as many as 16 times.
The Card Reader Processor (CRP)

Reads a deck of cards containing a batch job, copies the cards to a file, and requests QMG
to create a batch job containing this file.
For information on using CRP, see the RSX-11M-PLUS Batch and Queue Operations Manual.

3.3 Setting Up the Queue Manager
You can set up the Queue Manager (QMG) with indirect command files or interactively.
There are two different methods for using indirect command files to set up QMG. The method
you select depends upon the type of RSX operating system you are using, as follows:
•

If you have a Micro/RSX or pregenerated RSX-11M-PLUS operating system, modify the
system configuration data file LB:[L2]SYSPARAM.DAT, which is used by the startup
command file LB:[l,2]STARTUP.CMD. (For information on SYSPARAM.DAT, see the
RSX-11M-PLUS System Generation and Installation Guide or the Micro/RSX System Manager's

Guide.)
•

If you have an RSX-11M-PLUS system (excluding RL02 distribution kits), use the prototype
command file LB:[1,2]QMGSTART.CMD supplied with your system. This file includes
commands for setting up the Queue Manager in a standard configuration. It sets up one
print processor and one batch processor. By modifying the command file, you can tailor
the Queue Manager to your installation.

3-2 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

If you use QMGSTART.CMD, invoke it during the system startup procedure by including
the following command line in LB:[1,2]STARTUP.CMD:
~LB:

[1.2]QMGSTART.CMD

For more information on altering system startup procedures, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS System
Generation and Installation Guide or the Micro/RSX System Manager's Guide.
The sections that follow explain how to bring QMG into your system interactively. Both MCR
and DCL commands are included. Each of the steps includes a block diagram of the Queue
Manager, processors, and devices as they exist at that point iu the procedure. The parts of the
subsystem added at each step are shown in red.
For a description of the individual commands and qualifiers, see Section 3.5.
To bring QMG into your system, perform the following steps:
1.

Install the Queue Manager as a checkpointable task, using the DCL command
INSTALL/CHECKPOINT or the MCR command INSTALL /CKP=YES.
DCL>
MCR>

The QMG task is located with the privileged utility tasks.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-3

0I3
LPO:

Unspooled

PRINT$
.PRINT

ZK-154-81

Start QMG by using the START/QUEUE/MANAGER (QUE /STA:QMG) command, which
also initializes the default queues PRINT and BATCH.
DCL>
MCR>

If the queue file [l,7]QUEUE.SYS does not exist, it is created on the spooling device SP:
(usually assigned to the system library device, LB:) and all previous queue assignments are
cleared.
If the queue file already exists, all queue assignments are maintained but they are not
assigned to processors. Therefore, you do not need to reinitialize queues (step 3), but you
must reinitialize the processors (step 5).

3-4 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

lliJ

Queue
Manager

LPO:
Unspooled

PRINT$
.PRINT

SUBMIT

PRINT
ZK-155-81

Initiali~e a device-specific queue to serve the system tasks sending output to the device LPO:
through QMG.

DCL>
MCR>

Initialization names and creates a queue. The default print queue (PRINT) is initialized in
the previous step, but you must initialize at least one more queue (even if your system has
only one printing device). There must be a device-specific queue for every spooled output
device. (PRINT is a general queue.) In addition, you must initialize the device-specific
queue before you initialize the associated device.
By convention, a device-specific queue is named after the device it supports. In this example,
the device-specific queue LPO supports the device LPO:.
You can initialize as many as 14 additional print queues for a total of 16. One must be the
default queue PRINT. The remaining 15 can be device-specific or general queues. Queues
for application processors are counted as print queues.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-5

Queue
Manager

Unspooled

Queue
PRINT

Queue
BATCH

PRINT$
.PRINT

Queue

LPO
Queue File

SUBMIT
ZK-156-81

Install a print processor for each physical printing device that you are planning to initialize.
DCL>
MCR>

Use the printer name to derive a name for the corresponding processor. For example, LPO:
is the printer that corresponds to the processor LPO. The despooler task LPP.TSK installs
automatically as LPO.
The print processors are located with the privileged utility tasks.

3-6 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

Queue
Manager

Un spooled

Queue

BATCH

Queue

LPO

PRINT$
.PRINT

FCS

Queue File

SUBMIT
ZK-157-81

If you have additional output devices, use the /TASK qualifier to install and to name print
processors for them, as follows:
DCL>
MCR>

You can install as many as 15 print processors. Applications processors are considered print
processors for this count.
5.

Initialize and set the desired attributes for the print processors.
DCL>
MCR>

The INITIALIZE command assigns the queue LPO to the print processor LPO. Before you
can initialize the print processor LPO, the queue LPO must exist (see steps 2 and 3).
Initialization of a print processor sets the associated output device spooled.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-7

Ln3

Queue
Manager

LPO:

Queue
BATCH

Queue
PRINT

Queue

LPO

PRINT$
.PRINT

FCS

Queue File

SUBMIT
ZK-158-81

If you plan to use a hardcopy terminal as both a terminal and a spooled device, use the

DCL qualifier j5HAREABLE (MCR switch j5HR) to establish output to that terminal as
shareable. For example:
DCL>
MCR>I

When a terminal is shareable, it is owned by the print or batch processor only while it is
printing a job. When the job completes, the processor detaches the terminal and you can
use the terminal to log in to the system. The Queue Manager (QMG) does not spool jobs
to the terminal if it is attached by another task. However, if you do not initialize the print
processor as shareable, QMG attaches the terminal and makes it unavailable to any other
task.
Note
When you initialize a processor as shareable, transparent spooling to the
associated device cannot occur.

3-8 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

6. Install the interface between QMG and other system tasks.
DeL>
MeR>

The QMG interface is controlled by the task $QMGPRT.TSK. Install the task with the task
name PRT.... The task $QMGPRT is located with the nonprivileged utility tasks.
For more information, see Section 3.4.

Queue
Manager

LPO
LPO:
Spooled

Queue
BATCH

Queue
PRINT

Queue

LPO

PRT ...

PRINT$
.PRINT

FCS

Queue File

SUBMIT
ZK-159-81

7. Assign the queues to the print processors to establish a connection between the two.
DeL>
MeR>

QMG can send jobs to assigned processors only. If you initialize a queue without assigning
it, jobs sent to the queue are not processed. You can assign each queue to more than one
processor, and you can assign more than one queue to each processor.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-9

Queue
Manager

LPO

Spooled

---~
Queue

Queue

BATCH

PRT ...

PRINT$
.PRINT

Queue

LPO

FCS

Queue File

SUBMIT
ZK-160-81

This step is required only if you want to establish general queues. The three previous steps
initialize a print processor and establish a device-specific print queue; your new printer is
ready to be used. However, when you specify a device-specific queue (for example, LPO)
in your PRINT command line, you do not have the option of sending your print job to any
other processor (or corresponding printer). If LPO is not available, your job must wait.
General queues can send print jobs to any available processor to which they have been
assigned. Therefore, if you have more than one printer and you want print jobs to go to
the first available printer (see Note), establish a connection between a general print queue
(such as PRINT) and the new print processor.
Note
Different types of print jobs are established by the PRINT command that
places them in a queue. Therefore, print jobs do not actually go to the "first
available printer"; more specifically, they are sent to the first available printer

that has the same characteristics as those specified in the PRINT command line.
8.

Install the batch processor (BPR).
DCL>
MCR>

3-10 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

The BPR task is located with the privileged utility tasks and installs automatically with the
taskname BAPO. If you have additional batch processors, use the fTASK qualifier to install
and name them, as follows:
DeL>
MeR>

You can install as many as 16 batch processors with names in the form BAPnnn, where
nnn represents one to three Radix-50 characters.

Queue

LPO

Manager

Spooled

-~
Queue

Queue

BATCH

Queue

LPO

PRT ...

PRINT$
.PRINT

FCS

Queue File

SUBMIT
ZK-161-81

Initialize the batch processors.
DeL>
MeR>

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-11

Queue
Manager

LPO

Unspooled

-~
Queue

Queue

BATCH

Queue

LPO

PRT ...

PRINT$
.PRINT

FCS

Queue File

SUBMIT
ZK-162-81

10. Initialize the batch queues.
DCL>
MCR>

The default queue BATCH is initialized with the command START/QUEUE/MANAGER,
but you can initialize as many as 15 additional batch queues with names consisting of up
to 6 alphanumeric characters.
Note that, unlike print processors, batch processors do not need device-specific queues.
There are no peripheral devices associated with batch processors.

3-12 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

Queue

BAPO

LPO

Manager

Spooled

---,
BATCH

Queue

Queue
PRINT

Queue

POGO

LPO

PRT ...

PRINT$
PRINT

FCS

Queue File

SUBMIT
ZK-163-81

11. Assign one or more batch queues to the processor.
DCL>.
MCR>'

If you initialize a queue but do not assign it to a processor, jobs can be queued but they
are not processed.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-13

Queue
Manager

BAPO

LPO:

---,
Queue
BATCH

Queue
PRINT

Queue

POGO

LPO

PRT . . .

PRINT$
.PRINT

FCS

Queue File

SUBMIT
ZK-153-81

3.4 Using the Queue Manager to Spool Listing Files Automatically
Certain utilities and compilers (such as the Task Builder (TKB) and the Fortran compiler (F77»
provide switches for spooling listing files to the Queue Manager (QMG) automatically. The
listing file is placed in the PRINT queue upon completion of the task build or compilation.
However, to provide support for this feature, the task QMGPRT.TSK must be installed.
RSX-IIM-PLUS operating systems (excluding RL02 distribution kits) are distributed with
the startup command file LB:[l,2]QMGSTART.CMD, which installs QMGPRT.TSK for you.
However, to install QMGPRT.TSK on a MicrojRSX or pregenerated RSX-IIM-PLUS system,
you must create your own secondary startup command file. Include one of the following
command lines in the file:
.IFNINS PRT ... INS $QMGPRT/SLV=NO

(if your eLI is MeR)

.IFNINS PRT ... INSTALL/NOSLAVE $QMGPRT

(if your eLI is DeL)

Then, add the following statement to the system configuration data file LB:[l,2]SYSPARAM.DAT:
STARTFILE=filename

3-14 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

Specify the full file specification (device, directory, and file name) for the secondary command
file.
By default, after you install QMGPRT. TSK, listing files are spooled to the PRINT queue
automatically. If you do not want a listing file printed, you must specify the appropriate switch
when you enter the command line.
For example, when you use the LINK command with the /MAP qualifier, TKB creates a task
image file (file type TSK) and a memory allocation file (file type MAP). If the system task
QMGPRT.TSK is installed, TKB calls QMG to spool your map file to the PRINT queue. If you
do not want the map file to be printed, you must specify the /NOPRINT qualifier in the LINK
command line.
If you do not install QMGPRT.TSK, you cannot print map or listing files directly. For example,
if you are using TKB, you cannot use the /SP switch. Instead, you must enter a separate PRINT
command line. The TKB command line tells TKB to create a task file and a map file (without
printing it); the PRINT command tells the system to print the map file.

For more information on using TKB, see the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX Task Builder Manual.
For information on using automatic spooling with other utilities, see the manual that corresponds
to each utility.

3.5 Queue Manager Command Descriptions
DCL and MCR commands control the Queue Manager (QMG). The commands for both CLls
invoke the same functions, but the command syntax is different. Use the command syntax that
is best for you. Both forms of syntax appear in the command descriptions; MCR commands or
command elements appear in parentheses. In the examples, commands are identified by the
explicit DCL> and MCR> prompts.
General Format for DCl Commands
DCL>DCLcommand/QMGqualifier[s] parameter[s] [/qualifier[s]]

General Format for MCR Commands
MCR>QUE ddnn: /function[:option[s]] [/sw[s]]

Processors, devices, and device-specific queues all have names derived from the name of the
spooled device. Thus, if LPl: is the spooled device, the corresponding processor is called LPl.
Likewise, the device-specific queue is called LPl.
In DCL command lines, when you specify the name of a processor, device, or queue, the
colon (:) is optional. However, the colon is required in MCR command lines. In MCR, include
the colon as part of a device name and to terminate a queue name. For example, in an MCR
command line, use the name XPRESS: to refer to a queue named XPRESS.
The sections that follow describe the commands for setting up and running QMG. For information
on using QMG (including the commands for print and batch processing operations), see the
RSX-11M-PLUS Batch and Queue Operations Manual.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-15

Table 3-1 provides an overview of the QMG commands. The command descriptions in the
sections that follow appear in the order listed in the table.

Table 3-1: Queue Manager Command Summary
DCl Command

MCR Command

INITIALIZE

QUE

Function

/QUEUE

/CR

Creates, names, and initializes a queue.

/PROCESSOR

/SP

Creates, names, and initializes a processor (print or batch) or despooler.

/QUEUE

/DEL:Q

Deletes a queue by name.

/PROCESSOR

/UNSP

Deletes a processor or des pooler by
name. Sets a device unspooled.

/AS:

Establishes a path from a queue
to a processor.

/QUEUE

/DEA

Eliminates the path from a queue
to a processor.

/ABORT

/KIL

Deletes an active job on a processor.

/PROCESSOR

/STO

Stops a processor.

/QUEUE

/STO:QUE

Stops queues.

/QUEUE/MANAGER

/STO:QMG

Stops QMG and deletes all processors.

/QUEUE

/STA:QUE

Starts a queue.

/PROCESSOR

/STA

Starts a processor or des pooler .

/QUEUE/MANAGER

/STA:QMG

Starts QMG and initializes default
queues.
Creates the queue file
LBO:[1,7]QUEUE.SYS. Clears all queue
assignments.

DELETE

ASSIGN
/QUEUE
DEASSIGN

STOP

START

3-16 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

INITIALIZE/QUEUE
QUE /eR
3.5. 1 INITIALIZE/QUEUE (QUE feR)
The INITIALIZE/QUEUE (QUE /CR) command creates, names, and initializes a queue.

Formats
DCL>INITIALIZE/QUEUE queuename/qualifier
MCR>QUE ddnn:/CR:typ

Del Parameter Qualifiers
/BATCH
/PRINT

MeR Queue Types
BATCH
PRINT

Parameters
queuename

Specifies the name of the queue to be initialized.
Queue names BATCH and PRINT are reserved, because the BATCH and PRINT queues are
initialized by the START/QUEUE/MANAGER (QUE /STA:QMG) command.
Initialize a queue for every output device to which QMG is to send print jobs. These are
called device-specific queues. Otherwise, any six alphanumeric characters make an acceptable
queue name for a general queue. For example, if you have no processor named LP1, then
you can use LP1 as a general queue name.
Initialize device-specific queues before you initialize the associated processor. After both
the queue and the processor are initialized, the queue can accept print jobs. In addition,
the named printer is set spooled; it is under the control of QMG.
ddnn

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the output device.
Del Parameter Qualifiers and MeR Queue Types
/BATCH (BATCH)

/PRINT (PRINT)

Tells QMG what kind of queue is being initialized. Queues for applications processors are
considered print queues.
The default qualifier is /PRINT (PRINT). However, for clarity, specify one of the two
qualifiers when you initialize a queue.

Notes
1.

No more than 16 print queues (including queues for applications processors) can be
initialized. This count includes the default PRINT and BATCH queues.

2. Once a queue is established, it can remain in the system across a system failure. However,
to avoid an accidental loss, you should reestablish print queues each time you bootstrap the
system.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-17

INITIALIZE/QUEUE
QUE /eR
Examples
Del>
MeR>

Creates, names, and initializes the print queue XPRESS. The queue now accepts print jobs, but
it must be assigned to an output processor before jobs can be taken from the queue.
Del>
MeR>

Assigns the queue initialized in the previous example to a print processor.
Del>
Del>
MeR>
MeR>

Creates, names, and initializes a print queue named LPO. This is a device-specific queue whose
name is derived from the name of an output device. This queue must be initialized before the
output despooler can be initialized. After both the queue and output despooler are initialized,
the queue can accept print jobs and the named printer is set spooled.

3-18 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR
QUE /SP
3.5.2 INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR (QUE /SP)
The INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR (QUE /SP) command creates, names, and initializes an output
despooler or batch processor. When you initialize a print processor, you set the associated
output device spooled. A spooled output device is a hardware device (usually a line printer) and
an associated processor that are under the control of the Queue Manager (QMG). The spooled
device services only one request at a time and processes only those jobs that have been passed
to it by QMG.
Processors, devices, and device-specific queues all have names derived from the name of the
spooled device. Thus, if LPl: is the spooled device, the corresponding processor is called LPl.
Likewise, the device-specific queue is called LPl:. However, when you specify the name of a
processor, device, or queue in a DCL command line, the colon (:) is optional.
Before you initialize the processor, the task must be installed. After you initialize the processor,
it "owns" the printer. All jobs sent to a processor are spooled to the printer that it owns.
Formats
DCL>INITIALIZE/processortype processorname[/qualifier]
MCR>QUE processorname:/SP[/switch]

Del Processor Types
/PROCESSOR
/PRINTER
/DEVICE
/BATCHJROCESSOR
/CARD-READER
/INPUT
/ APPLICATIONSJROCESSOR

MeR Functions
/SP
/SP
/SP
/BA
/INPUT
/INPUT
/SP/EX

Del Qualifiers
/BATCH_QUEUE:queuename
/CONSOLE:ddnn:
/FLAGJAGE:n
/FORMS:n
/LOWERCASE
/NOWARNINGS
/PRINTER_QUEUE:queuename
/SHAREABLE
/UPPERCASE

MeR Switches
/QUEUE::queuename
/TERM:ddnn:
/FL:n
/FO:n
/LOW
/NM
/QUEUE:queuename
/SHR
/NOLO

Parameters
/processortype

Specifies processor types, which are divided into the following groups:
•

/PROCESSOR, /PRINTER, and /DEVICE initialize a print processor (also called an
output despooler). They are synonyms; the effect of each is the same. However, the
synonyms are provided to improve the clarity of commands and documentation. Use
/PRINTER for printers and /DEVICE for other output devices. /PROCESSOR can be
used for any output device.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-19

INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR
QUE /SP
The MCR function ISP performs the same function. There are no synonyms in the
MeR form of this command.
Note that a device-specific queue must exist before the output despooler can be initialized
(see Section 3.5.1).
•

IBATCHJROCESSOR (/BA) initializes a batch processor.

•

ICARD-READER and IINPUT initialize a processor associated with a card reader
device (also called an input despooler). They are synonyms; the effect of each is the
same. The MeR function is IINPUT.

•

I APPLICATIONSJROCESSOR (/SP lEX) initializes a non-physical output despooler.
Use this processor type when the destination of the output is a software application
task or network. Also, use this type to initialize a user-written output despooler that
currently has no physical device in the system.

When you specify I APPLICATIONSJROCESSOR (/SP lEX), the Queue Manager does
not check for the existence of a physical device before initializing the processor. Thus,
the Queue Manager can despool output to an applications task, to a network, or to a
remote location.
In MCR format, you must combine the ISP and lEX functions.
processorname

Specifies the names of the device, processor, and queue; the names are interchangeable.
MCR users must include the colon (:), but DCL users can omit it. If you are initializing a
batch processor, specify the name in the form BAPn, where n is a decimal number from
o to 15.
You must initialize the device-specific queue before you initialize the print processor with
the same name and unit number (see Section 3.5.1).
DCl Qualifiers and MCR SWitches

With the exception of setting the number of flag pages, these qualifiers and switches have no
effect on the printed output of the printer being initialized. Instead, these qualifiers define
the kind of print jobs the processor can accept. (Different kinds of print jobs are established
by the PRINT command that places them in the queue. For information on modifying the
printed output of a print job, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS Batch and Queue Operations Manual or the
MicrolRSX User's Guide, Volume 2.)
A description of each DCL qualifier (MCR switch) follows in alphabetical order.
/BATCH_QUEUE:queuename (jQUEUE: :queuename)
/PRINTEILQUEUE:queuename (/QUEUE:queuename)

Specifies default batch and print queues for jobs read from the card reader. The default
queues are BATCH and PRINT, respectively.
/CONSOLE:ddnn: (/TERM:ddnn:)

Specifies which terminal will be used for messages that are displayed by the card reader
processor. The default for ddnn is COO:.

3-20 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR
QUE /SP
/FLAG_PAGE:n (/FL:n)

Specifies how many flag pages are to precede jobs and files printed by this processor. The
value n must be 0, 1, or 2; the default is O.
If the processor is being initialized to accept special forms, set this qualifier to O.

To change the value, use the IFLAG qualifier to the START command (/FL switch to ISTA
option).
/FORMS:n (/FO:n)

Specifies the forms that the printer can accept. The value for n can range from 0 to
255 bytes. QMG truncates records longer than 255 bytes. The default is O.
Users specify these values in their PRINT command lines. If an available printer does not
support the requested forms, the printer stops and print jobs must wait. To restart the
printer, change the value or values for IFORMS (/FO).
The lengths and widths of forms differ. If you have an RSX-IIM-PLUS system, you can
change both values in the forms table located in LB:[1,24]LPPBLD.CMD. The file contains
an explanation of the procedure, which is briefly summarized as follows:
•

To set the width, determine how many columns are needed to fill in the form. There
are no standard widths for forms, but 80 and 132 are the most common.

•

To set the length, determine whether your forms are of a standard length. All standardlength forms use form feeds, which are set on the hardware. All nonstandard forms use
simulated form feeds, which are set through the software by replacing the form-feed
character with the appropriate number of line feeds.

Determine which forms will be used on your system and assign each a number. Then,
edit the file LB:[1,24]LPPBLD.CMD to set up the forms table for the print processor to
correspond to the numbers you have assigned to the forms. After you complete the forms
table, use the LINK (TKB) command to task build the processor.
The following table lists the standard form types and settings for RSX-11M-PLUS and
Micro/RSX operating systems:
Form Type

Width

Length

Form Feed

132

Real

132

Simulated

132

Simulated

(4-66)

132

(4-66)

Simulated

The values for these form types represent the number of lines that can be printed on each
page before a form feed (that is, the page length). For example, if you want your printed
page to be 10 lines long, specify IFORMS:10 in the command line. If you want your printed
page to be 50 lines long, specify IFORMS:50.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-21

INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR
QUE /SP
The following table shows the forms requirements for a hypothetical installation. The form
names describe different uses for these special forms.
Form

Assigned n

Width

Length

Accordion

132

Paychecks

Invoices

Stationary

Moon Diary

Star Log

112

113

By initializing the print processor with different values for /FORMS, you establish the width
(80 or 132 columns) and the quality (draft or letter) of different printer modes.
The /FORMS qualifier also has special settings for certain types of printers. They are as
follows:
Form Type

Width

Length

Printer Type

124

LN03 printers

125

LA50 printers

126

80 or 132

LA100 and LA75 printers

127

80 or 132

LNO 1 printers

To print a file after you have initialized a processor with one of these form types, select the
correct printer mode by including one of the following form types in the PRINT command
line:
Form Type

Printer Mode

Specifies 132-column, draft quality. Also, specifies landscape mode for LN01
and LN03.

Specifies 80-column, letter: quality. Also, specifies portrait mode for LN01
and LN03.

Specifies 132-column, letter quality. Also, specifies landscape mode for LN01
and LN03.

Specifies 80-column, draft quality. Also, specifies portrait mode for LN01
and LN03.

For example, to print pages that are 80 columns wide and letter quality, use the following
command line:
$

3-22 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR
QUE /SP
Note that letter-quality printing is a feature of the printer itself; the PRINT command line
simply selects the feature by specifying the correct form type.
If you have processors attached to any form types other than 0 (for example, print processors
attached to FORMS: 1 and FORMS:2), always specify the forms type in the PRINT command
line. If you do not, QMG assigns your job to the default form type (FORMS:O) and your
job is not printed.
/lOWERCASE (/lOW)

Specifies the lowercase attribute for a printer (that is, the printer can accept print jobs with
/LOWERCASE specified in the PRINT command line).
Note that QMG does not prevent you from initializing a printer with the lowercase attribute,
even if the hardware does not actually support a lowercase character set. So, if a printer with
the lowercase character set is temporarily unavailable, you can initialize another printer with
the /LOWERCASE qualifier. Then, although the printer cannot print lowercase characters,
it accepts print jobs with /LOWERCASE specified in the PRINT command line.
In general, do not use this qualifier unless the printer actually has both the uppercase and
lowercase character sets.
Note
Due to lowercase-to-uppercase translation, the device driver for a printer
affects the printer's output. For more information, see the description of
the DCL command SET DEVICE in the RSX-llM-PLUS Command Language
Manual or the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 2, or see the description of
the MCR command DEV in the RSX-IIM-PLUS MCR Operations Manual.
/NOWARNINGS (/NM)

Reduces the amount of information that is displayed on the console terminal when the
system is bootstrapped and STARTUP.CMD is invoked. For example, if you use the
MCR command QUE LPO:/CR/NM, the Queue Manager (QMG) does not display the
message "Queue already exists." The /NOWARNINGS qualifier (/NM switch) suppresses
this message.
/SHAREABlE (/SHR)

Establishes the processor as shareable. The physical device is not "owned" by a processor if
it is not printing a job. If you do not specify /SHAREABLE, the output processor attaches
the device when it is initialized. No other job can access the device until it is detached,
which happens when the device is despooled.
However, if you initialize the processor as shareable, the device is attached at the beginning
of the QMG print job and is detached at the end of the job, leaving the device free for
other uses. Note that transparent spooling to ao shareable device cannot occur.
If you want to spool to the null device (NL:), specify the /SHAREABLE qualifier when you

initialize the print processor.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-23

INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR
QUE /SP
IUPPERCASE (/NOLO)

Specifies the no-"lowefcase attribute for a printer (that is, the printer cannot accept print
jobs with /LOWERCASE specified in the PRINT command line). Do not use this qualifier
unless the hardware involved does not have the lowercase character set.
This is the default.

Restrictions
If you are initializing a processor for a physical device (such as a printer or a terminal), the
system checks for the device and the device-specific queue. Before the processor is initialized,
the following conditions must be met:

•

The device must be part of the current system. That is, the device must be physically
connected to the system and included in your system's configuration.

•

For each print processor, there must be a device-specific queue with a name derived from
the name of the output device. The processor cannot be initialized until the device-specific
queue has been created.

These restrictions do not apply when you initialize batch processors or applications processors.
Neither a physical device nor a device-specific queue is needed to initialize a batch processor
or applications processor.

Notes
1. You can initialize up to 16 batch processors or 16 print processors (including applications
processors ).
2. You can initialize print queues whose names do not correspond to output devices. These
are called general queues.
3. The /LOWERCASE and /UPPERCASE qualifiers do not modify the printer's output. Instead,
they set up a "mask" that must be matched by the attributes of print jobs before they can
be sent to the printer. In general, initialize printers with their actual attributes (for example,
specify /UPPERCASE if the printer does not have the lowercase character set).

Examples
DeL>
MeR>!

Sets LPO: spooled. Jobs can be passed to LPO: from QMG. You must initialize a device-specific
queue named LPO before you can initialize the processor for device LPO:.
DeL>
MeR>

Initializes a print processor to control LP1: and specifies that jobs run on this printer will be
preceded by two flag pages. Jobs that specify /FLAGJAGE in the PRINT command line will
have two flag pages at the beginning of the job.

3-24 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR
QUE /SP
DCL>
MCR>

Initializes a print processor to control LPl: and states that the printer will only accept jobs
specifying /UPPERCASE in the PRINT command line.
DCL>

Creates, names, and initializes batch processor BAPO.
DCL>
MCR>

Creates, names, and initializes print processor LPO. The printer has the lowercase character set.
Jobs will have two flag pages when printed.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-25

DELETE/QUEUE
QUE /DEL:Q
3.5.3 DELETE/QUEUE (QUE /DEL:Q)
The DELETE/QUEUE (QUE /DEL:Q) command is a privileged command that deletes queues
by name.

Formats
DCL>DELETE/QUEUE queuename/ERASE
MCR>QUE queuename:/DEL:Q

Parameter
queuename/ERASE (/DEL:Q)

Specifies the name of a queue to be deleted. Only a privileged user can delete a queue by
using this parameter. The default queues BATCH and PRINT cannot be deleted.
If the queue has jobs in it, it cannot be deleted immediately. Instead, the queue is marked
for deletion until the last job is processed. Then, the queue itself is deleted; no new jobs
can be entered into the queue.

You cannot delete device-specific queues until after you have deleted the processor with the
same number (see Section 3.5.4).

Examples
DCL>
MCR>

Deletes the queue named MONA, if the queue is empty. If the queue has entries, it is marked
for deletion and is deleted as soon as the last job is removed from the queue. In the MCR
example, note that the colon in the queue name is required.

3-26 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

DELETE/PROCESSOR
QUE /UNSP
3.5.4 DELETE/PROCESSOR (QUE /UNSP)
The DELETE/PROCESSOR (QUE /UNSP) command deletes print processors, output despoolers,
or batch processors by name. The command also sets the device unspooled.
The DELETE/PROCESSOR (QUE /UNSP) command counteracts the INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR
(QUE /SP) command.

Formats
DCL>DELETE/processortype processorname
MCR>QUE processorname:/UNSP

DCL Processor Types
/PROCESSOR
/PRINTER
/DEVICE
/BATCHJROCESSOR
/ APPLICATIONSJROCESSOR

MCR Functions
/UNSP
/UNSP
/UNSP
/UNBA
/UNSP

Parameters
/ processortype

Specifies the processor types, which are divided into the following groups:
•

/PROCESSOR, /PRINTER, and /DEVICE delete a print processor (also called an output
despooler). They are synonyms; the effect of each is the same. However, the synonyms
are provided to improve the clarity of commands and documentation. Use /PRINTER
for printers and /DEVICE for other output devices. /PROCESSOR can be used for any
output device.
There are no synonyms in the MCR form of this command; the /UNSP switch performs
the same function for all types of output devices.

•

/BATCHJROCESSOR (/UNBA) deletes a batch processor.

•

/ APPLICATIONS_PROCESSOR (/UNSP) deletes a nonphysical output despooler. Use
this processor type when the destination of the output is a software application task or
network. Also, use this type to delete a user-written output despooler that currently
has no physical device in the system. This makes it possible for the Queue Manager
(QMG) to despool output to an applications task, to a network, or to a remote location.

Note that you must delete the output despooler before you can delete the device-specific
queue.
processorname

Specifies the name of the processor. For physical devices, the name of the processor is
identical with the name of the device. Thus, the device LPl: is controlled by processor
LPl:. DCL commands do not require that you include the colon (:), but you must include
the colon in all MCR commands.
Batch processors have names in the form BAPnnn, where nnn is one to three Radix-50
characters.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-27

DELETE/PROCESSOR
QUE /UNSP
Applications processors have names of six Radix-50 characters.

Examples
DCL>
MCR>

Deletes processor LPO:, the owner of line printer LPO:.
DCL>
MCR>

Deletes the batch processor named BAP2. Note the colon in the MeR command.
DCL>
DCL>
MCR>
MCR>

Shows the steps to follow to delete a device-specific queue.

3-28 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

ASSIGN/QUEUE
QUE /AS
3.5.5 ASSIGN/QUEUE (QUE / AS)
The ASSIGN/QUEUE (QUE / AS) command establishes a path from a queue to a processor.
This command can be used to redirect output from one processor to another or to group related
processors, such as plotters, under a single queue.

Formats
DCL>ASSIGN/QUEUE queuename processorname
MCR>QUE processorname:/AS:queuename

Parameters
queuename

Specifies the queue that is to be assigned to the processor.
processorname

Specifies the processor to which the queue is to be assigned. When you assign queues to
output devices, use the device name in the form ddnn.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-29

DEASSIGN/QUEUE
QUE /DEA
3.5.6 DEASSIGN/QUEUE (QUE /DEA)
The DEASSIGNiQUEUE (QUE iDEA) command eliminates the path from a queue to a
processor. It counteracts the ASSIGN/QUEUE (/ AS) command.

Formats
DCL>DEASSIGN/QUEUE queuename processorname
MCR>QUE processorname:/DEA:queuename

Parameters
queuename

Specifies the queue that is to be de assigned from the processor.
processorname

Specifies the processor from which the queue is to be deassigned. When you deassign
queues from output devices, use the device name in the form ddnn.

3-30 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

STOP/ABORT
QUE /KIL
3.5. 7 STOP/ABORT (QUE /KIL)
The STOP/ABORT (QUE /KIL) command deletes the active job on a given processor. Privileged
users can delete any job; nonprivileged users can delete their own jobs. To delete the job, you
need to know the name of the processor.
Formats
DCL>STOP/ABORT processorname
MCR>QUE processorname:/KIL

Parameter
processorname

Specifies the processor whose active job is to be deleted. Note that the MeR command
format requires a colon (;) after the processor name.
You can stop jobs running on any processor under the control of QMG, including batch
processors.
Notes

Use this command to stop a processor quickly (for example, if a job is printing only form
feeds).

As soon as the active job is deleted, QMG passes the next eligible job to the processor. The
command deletes only the job; it does not abort the processor.

3. You can also delete the active job on a card-reader processor with this command.
Example
DCL>
Processor?

Stops a print job on LPO. The currently active job is deleted from the queue and the next
eligible job is queued.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-31

SlOP IPROCESSOR
QUE 1510
3.5.8 STOP/PROCESSOR (QUE /STO)
The STOP/PROCESSOR (QUE iSTO) command stops a processor.

Formats
DCL>STOP/processortype processorname[/qualifier]
MCR>QUE processorname:/STO[:opt]

Del Processor Types
IPROCESSOR
IPRINTER
IDEVICE
IBATCHJROCESSOR
I APPLICATIONSJROCESSOR

MeR Function

Del Parameter Qualifiers
IABORT
IFILE-END
IJOB-END
IPAUSE

MeR Options
:AB
:EOF
:EOJ
(No equivalent)

ISTO
ISTO
ISTO
ISTO
ISTO

Parameters
/processortype
Specifies the processor types, which are divided into the following groups:

•

IPROCESSOR, IPRINTER, and IDEVICE stop a print processor (also called an output
despooler). They are synonyms; the effect of each is the same. However, the synonyms
are provided to improve the clarity of commands and documentation. Use IPRINTER
for printers and IDEVICE for other output devices. IPROCESSOR can be used for any
output device.

•

IBATCHJROCESSOR (/STO) stops a batch processor.

•

I APPLICATIONSJROCESSOR (IS TO) stops a nonphysical output despooler. Use
this processor type when the destination of the output is a software application task or
network. Also, use this type to stop a user-written output despooler that currently has
no physical device in the system.
When you specify I APPLICATIONSJROCESSOR, QMG does not check for the
existence of a physical device before stopping the processor.

The MCR function ISTO performs the same functions; there are no synonyms in the MCR
form of this command.
processorname
Specifies the processor to which the queue is assigned. To stop print processors, use the
device name in the form ddnn.

This command has no effect on the status of jobs in queues, but jobs are not dequeued
while the processor is stopped.
\

3-32 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

SlOP IPROCESSOR
QUE ISIO
DCl Qualifiers and MCR Options

Only one qualifier (or option) is permitted. The choice of qualifier (or option) here affects the
restarting of jobs when the processor is started again.
/ ABORT (:AB)

Stops the processor immediately. The current job is held in its queue.
/FILE_END (:EOF)

Stops the processor at the end of the current file.
/ JOB_END (:EOJ)

Stops the processor at the end of the current job.
/PAUSE

Stops the processor at the end of the current line. There is no MCR qualifier; /STO is
sufficient. This is the default.
Note

This command is counteracted by the START/PROCESSOR (QUE /STA) command. However,
you cannot enter the START/PROCESSOR (QUE /STA) command until the processor actually
stops.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-33

STOP/QUEUE
QUE /STO:QUE
3.5.9 STOP/QUEUE (QUE /STO:QUE)
The STOP jQUEUE (QUE jSTO:QUE) command stops queues. No jobs can be taken from the
queue, but jobs can still be added to the queue. If a job is active at the time this command is
issued, the job is allowed to complete processing, but no additional jobs are started.

Formats
DCL>STOP/QUEUE queuename
MCR>QUE queuename:/STO:QUE

Parameter
queuename

Specifies the queue to be stopped. Note the colon (:) in the MeR form of the command.

3-34 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

STOP /QUEUE/MANAGER
QUE /STO:QMG
3.5.10 STOP/QUEUE/MANAGER (QUE /STO:QMG)
The STOP/QUEUE/MANAGER (QUE /STO:QMG) command stops the Queue Manager (QMG)
and deletes all processors (including batch processors or output despoolers).
If you issue this command without the / ABORT (:AB) qualifier, QMG is marked for stop. As
soon as all currently active jobs on all processors are done, QMG stops. No more jobs can be
entered in the queue.

Formats
DCL>STOP/QUEUE/MANAGER[/ABORT]
MCR>QUE /STO:QMG[:AB]

Parameter
/ ABORT (:AB)

Holds all active jobs and exits QMG immediately.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-35

START IPROCESSOR
QUE ISlA
3.5.11 START/PROCESSOR (QUE /STA)
The START/PROCESSOR (QUE /STA) command starts a batch processor or output despooler.
Formats
DCL>START/processortype processorname [/qualifier[s]]
MCR>QUE processorname:/STA[:opt[s]]

Del Processor Types
/PROCESSOR
/PRINTER
/DEVICE
/BATCHJROCESSOR
/ APPLICATIONSJROCESSOR

MeR Function
/STA
/STA
/STA
/STA
/STA

Del Qualifiers
/ALIGN
/BACKSP ACE:n
/CONTINUE
/FLAG:n
/FORMS:n
/FORWARDSPACE:n
/NEXT_JOB
/PAGE:n
/RESTART
/TOP_OFJILE

MeR Options
/AL
:BA:n
(No equivalent)
/FL:n
/FO:n
:FW:n
:NE
:PA:n
:RES
:PA:O

Parameters
/processortype

Specifies the DCL processor types, which are divided into the following groups:
•

/PROCESSOR

•

/PRINTER

•

/DEVICE

•

/BATCHJROCESSOR

•

/ APPLICATIONSJROCESSOR)

The effect of each is the same. These synonyms are provided to assure unambiguous
commands and documentation. Use /PRINTER for line printers, /DEVICE for other output
devices, /BATCHJROCESSOR for batch processors, and / APPLICATIONSJROCESSOR
for applications processors.
In MCR format, use the /STA function.
processorname

Specifies the processor to be started. When starting a stopped output processor, use the
device name in the form ddnn.

3-36 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

START IPROCESSOR
QUE ISTA
DCl Qualifiers and MCR Options

Some qualifiers (options) have meaning for starting either batch or print processors, and some
have meaning for print processors only. The following list summarizes the restrictions:
•

The qualifiers ICONTINUE (the default for ISTA), IRESTART (IRES), INEXT-JOB (/NE),
and ITOP_OFJILE (P A:O) are appropriate for both print and batch processors.

•

Page-related qualifiers (:n) have meaning for print processors only. They have no effect
unless the user specifies a page length qualifier in the PRINT command.

•

IFORMS: (/FO:) and IFLAG: (/FL:) have meaning for print processors only.

A description of each qualifier follows. The qualifiers appear in alphabetical order.
/ ALIGN (/ AL)

Informs the print processor that the paper in the line printer is currently at the top of a
form. Use I ALIGN (I AL) when you have stopped the print processor to change forms.
The print processor maintains a count of how many lines it has descended on a form. The
I ALIGN. (/ AL) qualifier clears that count for new forms.
/BACKSPACE:n (:BA:n)

Specifies that the processor start n pages back in the current job.
/CONTINUE

Specifies that the processor carryon from the point where it was stopped. MCR
format does not require an option; this is the default action for the START/PROCESSOR
(QUE ISTA) command.
/FLAG:n (/FL:n)

Overrides the flag value set when the processor was initialized. The value n is the number
of flag pages printed at the beginning of the job.
When the processor starts again, the Queue Manager (QMG) sends the next job that matches
the attributes of the processor.
If you are restarting a processor to handle special forms, specify IFLAGS:O (/FL:O) to avoid
having a banner page printed on your special forms.
/FORMS:n (/FO:n)

Overrides the IFORMS value set when the processor was initialized. The value n can be
any number from 0 to 255.
For more information on setting the IFORMS value, see Section 3.5.2.
/FORWARDSPACE:n (:FW:n)

Specifies that the processor start n pages forward in the current job.
/NEXT_JOB (:NE)

Specifies that the processor start at the beginning of the next job.
/PAGE:n (:PA:n)

Specifies that the processor start at page n in the job that was active when the processor
was stopped.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-37

START IPROCESSOR
QUE ISTA
/RESlARl (:RES)

Specifies that interrupted jobs be restarted fro III the beginning of the file that was being
processed when the processor was stopped. This qualifier affects only jobs that were active
at the time the processor stopped.
/RESTART (:RES) conflicts with the use of the /NORESTART qualifer in the PRINT or
SUBMIT command lines. Use the command SHOW QUEUE to check for such jobs before
you use this qualifier. To finish jobs started with the /NORESTART qualifier, use the
/CONTINUE qualifer.
The effect of /RESTART (:RES) depends on the qualifier (or switch) used with the
STOP /PROCESSOR (QUE /STO) command to stop the processor, as follows:
•

If the qualifier was /P AUSE (the default for /STO), then any jobs active at that time

are restarted at their beginning.
•

If the qualifier was /FILE-END (:EOF), then jobs active at that time are restarted at
their beginning. If the active file was the last one in the job, no jobs are restarted.

•

If the qualifier was / ABORT (:AB) or if the system halted, the current active job is held
in its queue. /RESTART (:RES) has no effect.

•

If the qualifier was /JOB-END (:EO]), no job is currently active; /RESTART (:RES) has
no effect.

/lOP_Of_fILE (:PA:O)

Specifies that the processor start at the top of the current file in the current job.

Notes
1.

Choose carefully between the /RESTART (:RES) and /CONTINUE (MCR default) qualifiers.
/RESTART may conflict with the desires of users with print or batch jobs active at the time
a processor is stopped.
For example, if a user specifies /NORESTART (/RES) in a PRINT command line, and you
stop and restart the processor on which the print job is active, the user expects the job
to continue printing from the point at which it was stopped. However, if you start the
processor with the /RESTART (:RES) qualifier, the job is not continued. Instead, contrary
to what the user wanted to happen, the job is restarted at the top of the file.
If jobs with the no-restart attribute are active when you stop a processor, specify the

/CONTINUE (MCR default) qualifier to restart the processor.
printing the current job from the point at which it was stopped.

/CONTINUE continues

2. If you restart a processor to handle special forms, set the /FLAGS qualifier (:FL option) to
o to avoid having a banner page printed on your special forms.

3-38 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

START IPROCESSOR
QUE ISTA
Examples
DeL>
MeR>

Starts print processor LPO:. Printing continues from the point at which it was stopped.
DeL>
MeR>

Starts print processor LPO:. The processor inserts two flag pages at the beginning of the job and
at the beginning of each file if the user specifies /FLAGJAGE in the PRINT command line.
DeL>
MeR>

Starts batch processor BAPO. Batch processing continues from the point at which it was stopped.
DeL>
MeR>

Starts the batch processor BAPO.
DeL>
MeR>

Starts print processor LPl:. The job active at the time the processor was stopped is restarted.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-39

START/QUEUE
QUE /STA:QUE
3.5.12 START/QUEUE (QUE /STA:QUE)
The START /QUEUE (QUE /STA:QUE) command starts a queue that has previously been
stopped. START/QUEUE (QUE /STA:QUE) counteracts STOP/QUEUE (QUE /STO).

Formats
DCL>START/QUEUE queuename
MCR>QUE queuename:/STA:QUE

Parameter
queuename

Specifies the queue to be started. Note the colon (:) in the MeR format.

3-40 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

START IQUEUE/MANAGER
QUE 1ST A:QMG
3.5.13 START/QUEUE/MANAGER (QUE /STA:QMG)
The START/QUEUE/MANAGER (QUE /STA:QMG) command starts the Queue Manager
(QMG), initializes the default queues PRINT and BATCH, and creates the queue file
LBO:[l,7]QUEUE.SYS (unless it already exists). The command also clears all queue assignments.
If the queue file exists, all queues still contain their jobs, but the jobs are not assigned to
processors.

START /QUEUE/MANAGER
(QUE /STO:QMG).

(QUE

/STA:QMG)

counteracts

STOP /QUEUE/MANAGER

Formats
DCl>START/QUEUE/MANAGER
MCR>QUE /STA:QMG

Examples
DCl>
MCR>

Starts QMG and initializes the default queues PRINT and BATCH, if they are not already
initialized. (However, the default queue BATCH is neither accessible nor displayed.) In
addition, the command clears all assignments of queues to processors.
Any jobs that were active at the time QMG was stopped are held when QMG is started again.
All other jobs retain the status they had when QMG was stopped; all processors must be
reinitialized.
DCl>
MCR>

Stops QMG and deletes all processors.
DCl>
MCR>

Clears all assignments of queues to processors.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-41

START /QUEUE/MANAGER
QUE /STA:QMG
DeL>
DeL>
DeL>
DeL>
DeL>
DeL>
DeL>
DeL>
MeR>
MeR>
MeR>
MeR>
MeR>
MeR>
MeR>
MeR>

Re-creates the network of queues and processors.
DeL>
MeR>

Releases a held job that was active at the time the system halted.

3-42 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

3.6 Error Messages
The following sections provide a list of error messages and suggestions for appropriate responses.
The messages are divided into three groups: messages from the Queue Manager (QMG),
messages from the output despooler, and messages from the batch processor (preceded by the
mnemonic BPR). Each group is described separately. Within each section, the messages are
listed in alphabetical order according to the text of the message.

3.6.1 Error Messages from Queue Manager Commands
This section lists error messages, describes the meaning of the messages, and suggests actions
to correct the errors. Each error message is preceded by the first three letters of the command
that failed. For example:
QUE -- JOB DOES NOT EXIST

In the following list of messages, the letters com represent the first three letters of the command
that encountered the error.
com-Bad command line

Explanation: The command line could not be understood.
command line incorrectly.

You may have entered the

User Action: For a description of the valid command syntax, see Section 3.5. Then, reenter
the command line correctly.
com-Bad modify value

Explanation: You specified an incorrect value as the argument to a command qualifier.
User Action: For a description of valid command qualifier values, see Section 3.5. Then,
reenter the command line correctly.
com-Bad processor name

Explanation: The processor name includes invalid characters or too many characters.
User Action: Reenter the command with a valid processor name. Depending on the type of
processor, valid names are as follows:
•

Print processors must be named after the device they control (for example, the processor
LP2 controls the printer LP2:).

•

Batch processors must have names in the form BAPn.

•

Applications processors can have any name consisting of alphanumeric characters.

•

The maximum number of characters allowed in a processor name is six.

com-Bad queue name

Explanation: You included invalid or too many characters in the queue name.
User Action: Specify a queue name with no more than six alphanumeric characters.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-43

com-Bad spool device type

Expianation: You attempted to set a device spooied that is not recognized by QMG (for
example, a disk device).
User Action: Select a device that can be set spooled (for example, a line printer or a terminal).
If you have associated the processor with an invalid device (such as a disk), use the DCL
command REMOVE to remove the processor task. Then, reinstall it with a valid output
device type.
com-cannot delete device's queue

Explanation: You attempted to delete a queue before you deleted the processor attached to
it.

User Action: First, delete the processor; then, delete the queue.
com-Directive failure

Explanation: There is an unexpected system error.
User Action: Rebootstrap the system and reenter the command line. If the error persists,
either the QMG software is corrupt or there is a problem with the hardware. Submit a
Software Performance Report (SPR) to DIGITAL.
com-File entry not In job

Explanation: You tried to delete or modify a nonexistent file in a job.
User Action: Type the SHOW QUEUE command to determine the correct file entry number.
Reenter the command line with the correct entry number.
com-Illegal argument value

Explanation: You specified an illegal argument for a qualifier in the command line.
User Action: For a description of valid command qualifier values, see Section 3.5. Then,
reenter the command line correctly.
com-Illegal or contradictory qualifier

Explanation: You specified an incorrect qualifier in the command line.
User Action: For a description of valid command qualifiers, see Section 3.5. Then, reenter
the command line with the correct qualifier.
com-Illegal function code

Explanation: An unexpected system error or a user-written applications processor attempted
to send an invalid function to QMG.
User Action: Reenter the command line. If the error persists, check the applications processor
for coding errors.

3-44 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

com-Illegal or nonexistent intermediate device

Explanation: You assigned the pseudo device name for the spooling device SP: to an invalid
device (such as a terminal or printer) or a nonexistent device.
User Action: Assign the pseudo device name SP: to a valid disk device that is known to the
system (such as LB:).
com-Intermediate device not mounted

Explanation: The spooling device SP: is not mounted. You cannot use a device that is not
known to the system.
User Action: Mount the SP: device; then, reenter the command line.
com-Invalid entry number

Explanation: You specified an entry number that was either too long or nonnumeric.
User Action: Enter the SHOW QUEUE command to find the correct entry number; then,
reenter the command line with the correct number.
com-Invalid ftle spec syntax

Explanation: You entered the file specification incorrectly.
User Action: Reenter the command line with the correct file specification syntax.
com-Invalid job syntax

Explanation: You specified a job name incorrectly or with too many characters.
User Action: Reenter the command with the correct job name.
com-I/O error
I/O Error code nn

Explanation: This indicates a system error.
User Action: Reenter the command line. If the error persists, check the I/O error
code number that accompanies this message. This code number is explained in the
RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/O Drivers Reference Manual and the Micro/RSX User's
Guide, Volume 2. Take the action suggested by the error code.
com-Job already exists

Explanation: This indicates a system error or a user-written applications processor problem.
User Action: Reenter the command line. If the error persists, check the applications processor
for coding errors.
com-Job does not exist

Explanation: You specified a job that does not exist. You may have specified the job name
or directory incorrectly.
User Action: Type the SHOW QUEUE command. Determine the name and status of the
job. Check for the proper command syntax and retype the command.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-45

com-Job name not allowed

Explanation: You specified a naIll.e or an entry number with a command that does not use
either qualifier.
User Action: Reenter the command line without specifying a job name.
com-Message not sent

Explanation: This indicates a system error. The system may lack sufficient resources to
handle your request.

User Action: Wait for a few minutes; then, reenter the command.
com-Multiple functions detected

Explanation: You specified incompatible functions in a single command line.
User Action: Enter the functions in separate command lines.
com-Mutually exclusive switch/value

Explanation: You entered two or more conflicting qualifiers in the same command line.
User Action: For a description of valid command qualifiers, see Section 3.5. Then, reenter
the command line with the correct combination of qualifiers.
com-No file name given

Explanation: You did not specify a file name in the command line.
User Action: Reenter the command line and include a file name. If you are unsure as to the
placement of the file name in the command line, see Section 3.5 for the correct syntax.
com-No pool space

Explanation: The system does not have enough pool space available to execute the specified
command.

User Action: Wait for tasks to exit before you reenter the command.
com-No such command

Explanation: You specified a nonexistent command.
User Action: See Section 3.5 for the correct command syntax.
com-No switches allowed

Explanation: You specified a qualifier with a command that does not accept qualifiers.
User Action: Reenter the command without any qualifiers.

('
\

3-46 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

com-Operation inconsistent with job state

Explanation: A command attempted an action inconsistent with the job state. For example,
you attempted to abort a job that was not active.
User Action: Enter the SHOW QUEUE command to determine the status of the job. Also,
check the command syntax. Reenter the command with the correct job name and syntax.
com-Privileged command

Explanation: You attempted to execute a privileged command from a non privileged terminal.
User Action: Enter this command from a privileged terminal only. If you have a privileged
account, log in to the system with the name and password for that account; then, reenter
the command.
com-Processor already exists

Explanation: You attempted to initialize a processor that is already initialized. You can
initialize only one processor for each device that you want to set spooled; each processor is
named after the device it controls.
User Action: To change the attributes for the existing processor, delete the processor
(using the DELETE/PROCESSOR command). Then, reinitialize the processor with the
INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR command and the appropriate set of qualifiers.
com-Processor directory full

Explanation: You attempted to create more than 16 processors; the maximum allowed by
the Queue Manager is 16.
User Action: If you want to change the attributes for an existing processor, delete the
processor (using the DELETE/PROCESSOR command). Then, reinitialize the processor
with the INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR command and the appropriate set of qualifiers.
com-Processor does not exist

Explanation: You specified a device that is not set spooled.
User Action: Reenter the command with the proper device name.
com-Processor marked for delete

Explanation: The processor has been deleted by the DELETE/PROCESSOR/ERASE command and will exit after the current job is finished.
User Action: Wait for the processor to exit.
com-Processor task not installed

Explanation: You did not install the printer processor task (LPP. TSK) with the name of the
device that you want to set spooled.
User Action: Use the MCR or DCL command INSTALL to install the task LPP.TSK with the
name of the task that you want to set spooled.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-47

com-QMG did not start

Explanation: QMG did not start when you issued the START /QUEUE/MANAGER
command.

User Action: Check to be sure the directory LB:[1,7] exists. If not, create that directory; then,
reenter the command.
com-QMG error

Explanation: QMG detected an error within itself or the system.
User Action: Rebootstrap the system and reenter the command. If the error persists, either
the QMG software is corrupt or there is a problem with the hardware. Contact DIGITAL
Field Service or submit a DIGITAL Software Performance Report (SPR).
com-QMG marked for exit

Explanation: QMG has been stopped and is marked to exit after the current job is finished.
User Action: No user action is required. However, if you want to restart QMG, wait until it
exits completely and then restart it.
com-QMG not active

Explanation: The Queue Manager task QMG.TSK is not active; it is stopped, aborted,
dormant, or not installed.
User Action: Wait for a few minutes; then, reenter the command. If QMG is stopped, restart
it using the START/QUEUE/MANAGER command. If it has been aborted, use the DCL or
MCR command INSTALL to reinstall it, as follows:
DCL>
MCR>
com-QMG not installed

Explanation: The task QMG.TSK is not installed in the system.
User Action: Use the INSTALL command to reinstall QMG. TSK as a checkpointable task
(refer to the previous message).
com-Queue already exists

Explanation: You tried to create a queue that already exists.
User Action: To create an additional queue, reenter the command with a unique queue
name.
com-Queue and processor not of same type

Explanation: You attempted to associate an incompatible queue and processor (for example,
assigning a batch processor to a print queue).
User Action: Assign the processor to a queue of its own type.

3-48 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

com-Queue/device not allowed

Explanation: You specified an invalid queue or device.
User Action: Reenter the command with a valid queue name or device.
com-Queue/device not specified

Explanation: You did not specify a queue name or device in the command line.
User Action: Reenter the command line with a device or queue name.
com-Queue directory full

Explanation: You attempted to create 17 queues, but the maximum number allowed is 16.
User Action: To modify a queue, delete an existing queue (with DELETE/QUEUE) and
initialize a new one.
com-Queue does not exist

Explanation: You specified a queue that does not exist in the current system.
User Action: Enter the SHOW QUEUE command to obtain a list of queues that are known
to the system. Then, reenter the command with the name of an existing queue or create a
queue with that name.
com-Queue file full

Explanation: The queue file [l,7]QUEUE.SYS on the pseudo device LB: (or SP:) is full. QMG
has reached the maximum number that it can handle (that is, 999).
User Action: Wait for some jobs to finish; then, reenter the command.
com-Queue marked for delete

Explanation: You attempted to add a new job to a queue marked for deletion.
User Action: Send the job to another queue.
com-Redundant operation

Explanation: You requested an operation (such as deleting a queue) that has already been
done.

User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message.
com-Request failure on processor task

Explanation: You entered an INITIALIZE command, but QMG could not activate the
processor due to a system error.
User Action: Reboot the system; then, reenter the command. If the error persists, either
the QMG software is corrupt or there is a problem with the hardware. Submit a Software
Performance Report (SPR) to DIGITAL or contact DIGITAL Field Service.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-49

com-Spool device does not exist

Explanation: You specified a device to be spooied that does not exist in the system or is not
loaded.

User Action: If you entered the wrong device name, reeenter the command line with the
correct one. If you need to spool to a device that is not currently in the system, load that
device into the system. Then, reenter the command.
com-Spool device not available

Explanation: You attempted to spool to a device that is currently in use.
User Action: Wait until that device is available or spool to another device.
com-Spool device offline

Explanation: You attempted to spool to a device that is currently off line.
User Action: Place the device on line; then, reenter the command.
com-Spool device redirected

Explanation: The device to which you want to spool has been redirected to another device.
User Action: Use the REDIRECT command to redirect the spool device back to itself.
com-Spool device unloaded

Explanation: You specified a spool device that is not loaded in the system.
User Action: Load the spool device into the system.
com-Unable to open queue ftle

Explanation: QMG could not open the queue file.
User Action: Check to see if the queue file LB:[1,7]QUEUE.SYS is locked. If it is, use the
UNLOCK command so that the file can be opened.

3.6.2 Error Messages from the Output Despooler
All of these messages indicate a FATAL exit status for the job; the job does not complete. These
error messages from the output despooler task appear on the operator's console and in the
listing on the output device. When these errors occur, the despooler task prints the job flag
pages first and then the error messages on the first page of the listing.
The messages are preceded by the name of the output despooler (indicated by desp in the
following list). This name is derived from the name of the output device owned by the
despooler, such as LPO or TT2.
I/O error codes are explained in the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/O Drivers Reference
Manual and in the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 2.

3-50 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

desp-Attempt to space nn pages beyond eof on-filespec

Explanation: The START/PROCESSOR command attempted to start beyond the end of the
specified file.

User Action: Reenter the command line with a valid end-of-file (EOF).
desp-I/O Error nn on flle- filespec

Explanation: The task encountered an error and returned the I/O error code nn. These
codes are explained in the RSX-11M-PLUS and MicrojRSX I/0 Drivers Reference Manual and
in the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 2.
User Action: Look up the error and take corrective action.
desp-Job limit of nn pages exceeded on flle- filespec

Explanation: The PRINT command included the /P AGES:nn qualifier and your job exceeded
this limit.

User Action: Shorten the file or issue the PRINT command with a higher limit.
desp-Open error nn on flle- filespec

Explanation: The task could not open the file named in the error message for output. The
value nn is the I/O error code number. These codes are explained in the RSX-11M-PLUS
and Micro/RSX I/0 Drivers Reference Manual and in the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 2.
User Action: Check the directory listing for the state of the file. Look up the error; then,
take corrective action.
desp-Prlnt error nn on flle- filespec

Explanation: The task could not print the file named in the error message. The value nn is
the I/O error code number. These codes are explained in the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX
I/0 Drivers Reference Manual and in the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 2.
User Action: Check the directory listing for the state of the file. Look up the error; then,
take corrective action.

3.6.3 Error Messages from the Batch Processor
The batch processor (BPR) sends error messages to the system console terminal (CO:) and to
individual batch logs. Messages that result from system problems are returned to CO:; these
messages are discussed in this section. Errors that reflect difficulties in processing individual
batch jobs are returned to the user's batch log. They are listed in the RSX-I1M-PLUS Batch and

Queue Operations Manual.
BPR-Batch job jobname stili In progress

Explanation: This message indicates a system error. QMG attempted to start the batch job
while another job was in progress.
User Action: Submit an SPR and include the console output as well as any other relevant
information. If possible, reproduce the error.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-51

BPR-Error during send to QMG

Explanation: This message indicates a system error.
User Action: Submit an SPR and include the console output as well as any other relevant
information. If possible, reproduce the error.
BPR-lIlegal error-severity code n

Explanation: BPR failed to open the log file.
User Action: Check the log file destination. The device may be write-locked or the specified
directory may not exist.
BPR-Log file output error

Explanation: BPR failed to write to the log file.
User Action: Check the log file status. The device may not be available or the file may not
be in the directory.
BPR-Spawn failure

Explanation: BPR failed to attach to an active BYE task on a virtual terminal. This message
indicates a system error.

User Action: Submit an SPR and include the console output as well as any other relevant
information. If possible, reproduce the error.
BPR-Unable to create virtual terminal

Explanation: BPR was unable to create a virtual terminals for one of the following reasons:
•

The virtual terminal driver was not loaded.

•

On an RSX-IIM-PLUS system, support for virtual terminals was not included during
system generation.

•

When BPR attempted to create a virtual terminal, it exceeded the maximum limit for the
number of virtual terminals allowed by the system. (On an RSX-IIM-PLUS system,
you can set the maximum limit during system generation.)

3-52 Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager

User Action: If you are using an RSX-IIM-PLUS system (excluding RL02 distribution kits),
repeat the system generation procedure and include support for virtual terminals or increase
the maximum limit. If you are using a pregenerated RSX-IIM-PLUS or Micro/RSX system,
submit an SPR to DIGITAL.

Setting Up and Running the Queue Manager 3-53

Chapter 4
System Reconfiguration
Reconfiguration is the process of physically and logically connecting and disconnecting various
system resources. If you have an RSX-11M-PLUS operating system (excluding pregenerated
systems), you can use the reconfiguration services to add or to remove resources (such as
memory and devices) while the system is on line.
Pregenerated RSX-11M-PLUS systems (RL02 distribution kits) and MicrojRSX systems do not
support the reconfiguration services. Instead, they support a feature called Autoconfigure. When
you bootstrap your system, the Autoconfigure task ACFPRE.TSK automatically identifies the
devices in your configuration and creates the necessary data structures for those devices.
Section 4.1 describes how to use Autoconfigure to set up or to modify a pregenerated
RSX-11M-PLUS or MicrojRSX system. The rest of the chapter discusses the components
and commands of the reconfiguration services for RSX-I1M-PLUS systems.
Some of the information in this chapter applies only to multiprocessor systems. Blue ink is
used to distinguish this information.

4. 1 Autoconfigure on MicrojRSX and Pregenerated
RSX-ll M-PLUS Systems
The first time you bootstrap your MicrojRSX or pregenerated RSX-11M-PLUS system, the system startup procedure STARTUP.CMD executes the Autoconfigure task LB:[3,54]ACFPRE.TSK.
ACFPRE.TSK identifies the devices in your peripheral configuration (see Section 4.1.1), reads the
configuration file LB:[1,2]SYSPARAM.DAT, and creates data structures that describe the devices.
(Depending upon the configuration, this part of the startup procedure may take up to 1 minute
to complete.) The startup procedure then loads the appropriate device drivers.
In general, you probably will not need to change your peripheral configuration each
time you rebootstrap your system. So, to decrease the time required for system startup,
ACFPRE.TSK stores the information that describes your current configuration in the file
LB:[l,2]ACFPAR.DAT. For subsequent system startup procedures, STARTUP.CMD uses the
information in ACFPAR.DAT (instead of running ACFPRE.TSK again).

System Reconfiguration 4-1

If you add a peripheral device to your configuration, delete LB:[1,2]ACFPAR.DAT and rebootstrap
the system. To determine and record the configuration infonnation, the system startup procedure
will run ACFPRE.TSK again.

4. 1. 1 Using Non-DIGITAL Standard Configurations
DIGITAL uses certain standards to determine the correct CSR addresses and interrupt vectors for
peripheral devices on PDP-II systems. If your devices are set up according to these standards
(your DIGITAL Field Service Representative can verify this), ACFPRE.TSK can identify them.
However, because the system allocates device CSR addresses in a fixed order in the I/O page,
adding a peripheral may require changing the CSR and vector addresses of existing devices to
comply with DIGITAL standards.
If your system does not meet DIGITAL's configuration standards (for example, certain peripheral

options do not allow sufficient flexibility to meet the standards), or if you add a peripheral
device and do not wish to reconfigure existing peripheral devices, edit ACFPAR.DAT to modify
the configuration information accordingly.

4.1.2 Modifying ACFPAR.DAT
To modify the parameter file LB:[1,2]ACFPAR.DAT, edit the file and use the correct record
formats. ACFPAR.DAT contains the following types of records:
•

A CPU record

•

A line frequency record

•

Several controller records

The following subsections describe the corresponding formats for each type of record in more
detail.
CPU Record
CPU=l1/xx

The variable xx represents the model number of your PDP-II processor. For example, 23
and 73 are valid model numbers for the MicroPDP-II/23 and MicroPDP-II/73 processors,
respectivel y.
Line Frequency Record
LIN=n

To set the system clock, ACFPRE.TSK determines your power-line frequency. If necessary, you
can edit ACFPAR.DAT to correct the clock frequency.
The variable n can be either 50 or 60 hertz (Hz). If your line frequency is 50 Hz and your
system clock seems to lose time, n is set incorrectly to 60 Hz. Conversely, if your line frequency
is 60 Hz and your system clock seems to gain time, n· is set to 50 Hz. Specify a value for n
that is equal to your actual line frequency.
Controller Records
CON=cname,CSR=csradd,VEC=vecadd,UNI=(numuni,lowuni)

4-2 System Reconfiguration

Parameters
ename

Specifies the controller type and identification code.
respective devices are as follows:

Valid controller types and their

Controller Type

Devices

MSCP-type devices

TK50 and TU81 magnetic tapes

TSll, TSV05, TU80, and TK25 magnetic tapes

RL02 disks

YL
YV

DLll terminal intertaces

DZll and DZVll multiplexers

DHUll and DHVll multiplexers

The identification code is the sequential indicator of the controller from the DIGITAL
hardware alphabet.
esradd

Specifies the control and status register (CSR) address for the device.
veeadd

Specifies the first vector address for the device.
numuni

Specifies the number of available units attached to the controller.
lowuni

Specifies the unit number of the lowest numbered device unit (that is, the first unit number).
The numuni and lowuni parameters are included for DL, DU, and MU device types only.

Example

Adds a record describing an RC25 controller with one master unit (an RC25 master unit consists
of two drives) as the only extra peripheral on the system. The unit number plug on the drive
indicates that it is units 4 and 5.

System Reconfiguration 4-3

4.2 The Reconfiguration Services (RSX-ll M-PLUS Systems Only)
The reconfiguration services allow you to bypass failed devices and isolate your system from
the effects of faulty hardware. By reconfiguring your system, you can define a set of hardware
resources that are accessible from the online system. Later, you can use the reconfiguration
services to remove failed devices from the pool of allocated resources.
For example, after bootstrapping the system, you can place a failed disk drive off line. Then,
use another drive that is already on line to take over for the disabled unit.
The sections that follow describe the components and basic concepts associated with the system
reconfiguration services.

4.2.1 Reconflguration Components-CON, RD:, and HRC
The reconfiguration services consist of three components: a command interface (CON), a
loadable driver (RD:), and a privileged reconfiguration task (HRC). You must have enough
space in memory to contain both CON and HRC at the same time; otherwise, CON commands
fail.
The three components of the reconfiguration services are defined as follows:
The command interface (CON)

Receives and parses the commands that you enter to reconfigure the current system. Then,
CON creates and submits QIO packets to the reconfiguration driver (RD:).
The loadable driver (RD:)

Serves as an interface between a user task (either CON or an application task) and the HRC
task; it is the gateway between tasks that generate reconfiguration requests and the actual
implementation of those requests. RD: accepts QIO packets from a task and places these
packets into the queue for HRC.
Before RD: passes the QIO packets to HRC, it performs privilege and address boundary
checks. The checks ensure that the packets are using valid addresses and function codes.
RD: performs additional checks on some functions to ensure that it is attached to them.
For more information on RD:, see the reconfiguration sources located in the directory [27,10]
of the distribution kit (except the pregenerated RL02 and Micro/RSX distribution kits,
which do not contain any sources). Important modules for the interface are CNHRC.MAC,
HROOT.MAC, and HRSUB.MAC. Also, see the macro OLRDF$ in [l,l]EXEMC.MLB for a
description of volume access rights and mounted volumes.

Note
Programs written to use the current version of RD: may have to be modified
in the next release. You should centralize all code concerning RD: so that
you can make modifications easily.
The privileged reconflguration task (HRC)

Performs the actual reconfiguration operations for the system. To process reconfiguration
requests, HRC calls Executive routines, which then call the associated device drivers. HRC
services the requests for configuration information by passing the desired information directly
to the user buffer.

4-4 System Reconfiguration

After HRC services the request, a status is returned (by means of I/O completion) to the
requesting task. The status return is done to allow tasks other than CON to interface with
HRC.
The database for each system device contains status words that reflect device state. When you
change a system device state, HRC modifies the appropriate database status word either to grant
or to inhibit device access. Section 4.2.2 discusses system device states in more detail.

4.2.2 System Device States
The system reconfiguration services control the configuration state (on line or off line) of the
hardware devices. Therefore, they also control device access. A system device can assume one
of the following four states:
Online

Indicates the device is on line; access is granted.
In the online state, a device is logically on line for access. In other words, an access path
exists between the device and an online processor. A call to the driver's controller or to the
entry points of the unit status is successful.
The system grants access to online devices only. To access an online disk or tape volume
and to perform virtual I/O (for example, read or write operations to files), the volume must
also be mounted. (See the RSX-llM-PLUS MCR Operations Manual, the RSX-llM-PLUS
Command Language Manual, or the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 2 for a description of
volume access rights and mounted volumes.)
Offline

Indicates the device is off line; access is denied.
When a device is in the offline state, the system denies access to the device. Attempts
to access an offline device result in an I/O error (IE.OFL). (See the RSX-llM-PLUS and
Micro/RSX I/O Operations Reference Manual for lists and explanations of error codes.) Taking
a controller off line also takes all of its associated units off line, which places the units in
the marked for online state.
Marked for online

Indicates the device will be brought on line when an access path exists; access is denied.
The marked for online state indicates that a request to bring a device or controller on line
has been made, but part of the access path to the device or controller is off line. Access
attempts yield the error code IE.OFL. HRC places a device marked for online state logically
on line when it brings the entire access path on line.
Marked for offline

Indicates the device is in an indeterminate state; access is denied.
The marked for offline state indicates that the system encountered an unexpected error while
placing a specific device logically on line. Before you attempt or retry an online operation,
issue an explicit OFFLINE command.

System Reconfiguration 4-5

4.2.3 Placing Devices Logically On Line and Off Line
Before HRC places a device logically on line, it verifies that the device driver is loaded. Then, it
ensures that the controller is online by testing access to the device. If the controller can access
the device (that is, if an access path exists), HRC modifies the appropriate status word to reflect
that the device is on line. If the controller or device cannot be accessed, HRC marks the device
for online status. Then, when the access path is brought on line, HRC places the device on
line.
Before HRC places a device off line, it attempts to protect against loss or corruption of data
by verifying that the change in state (from online to offline) will not interfere with active
I/O. HRC considers a device active and rejects offline commands if the device has context.
The reconfiguration services define device context as a condition that indicates (or permits) I/O
activity on the device. The following is a list of conditions that define device context in more
detail:
•

A task is attached to the device (for example, the print despooler attaches the line printer).

•

The device (or an associated device) is a logged-in terminal.

•

The device (or an associated device) contains a mounted volume.

•

For the DT07 bus switch, a port is logically connected (or linked) to a processor.

•

For memory boxes, the memory within the box is logically on line (multiprocessor systems
only).

•

A disk device has data caching enabled.

You cannot take a controller off line if any of the units on the controller have context. (Dual-port
disks that support load sharing are an exception, because they they can switch paths dynamically.
Consequently, you can place one path with context off line as long as the alternate path is on
line. For more information on load sharing, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX Guide to

Writing an I/0 Driver.)

4.3 Invoking the Command Interface
You can reconfigure an RSX-11M-PLUS system interactively from a terminal or by using indirect
command files. The reconfiguration services act as an interface between your terminal and the
system. To use the reconfiguration services, invoke the command interface CON and then issue
the commands.
There are two ways to invoke CON interactively:
1.

Use the following one-line format to invoke CON, to execute a single command, and to
return control to the Monitor Console Routine (MCR):
MeR>

Use the following direct task format to invoke CON and obtain a task prompt (CON> ):
MeR>
eON>

Press CTRL/Z to exit from the direct task format.

4-6 System Reconfiguration

You can also enter commands through indirect command files. An indirect command file
that contains reconfiguration commands does not require terminal interaction when the file
is executed. Thus, indirect command files are a convenient means of creating configuration
command sequences that create different configurations or restore previous configurations.
Indirect command files can be nested to a maximum depth of three.

Examples
MCR>

Invokes CON, executes the reconfiguration commands contained in the indirect command file
CONFIG.CMD, and returns control to MCR.
CON>

Executes the commands in the file CONFIG.CMD and returns control to CON.

4.4 Entering CON Commands
To enter a CON command, type a command line in response to the default prompt (> )
or to the explicit command interface prompt (CON». A command line consists of three
components: a command name, required parameters, and a line terminator.
It is not necessary to use the entire command name when you enter a command line; CON
requires only the first three characters of the name. However, to make the intent of the
command input clear to someone reading a printed copy, type the command name in full. For
example, CON accepts either of the following command lines:
CON>
CON>

In the previous example, dev-spec is the target device specification.
A space or tab signals the end of the command name. Therefore, no spaces or tabs are permitted
within the name itself.

4.5 CON Command Descriptions
This section describes each of the reconfiguration commands in alphabetical order. Note that
there are no equivalent DIGITAL Command Language (DCL) commands for accessing CON.
Also, some of the commands must be issued from a privileged terminal.
Table 4-1 briefly summarizes the reconfiguration commands.

System Reconfiguration 4-7

Table 4-1:

CON Command Summary

Command

Function

BUILD

Creates a command sequence in an internal buffer that, if executed,
duplicates the current system configuration.

CLEAR

Erases the command sequence created with the BUILD command (but
not the file created with the LIST command) that is stored in the internal
buffer by CON.

DISPLAY

Displays the configuration and status of the hardware devices in the
current system.

ESTATUS

Emits the current status of a specific device.

HELP

Displays the help text for CON.

IDENT

Displays the current versions of CON and HRC and the date and time
the two tasks were built.

LINK

(Multiprocessor systems only.) Logically connects a port of a switched
bus run to a processor.

LIST

Displays the results from a BUILD command or puts the command
sequence into a specified file. A file type of CMD is recommended
because that is the default type for an indirect command file.
'

OFFLINE

Removes a device without context from the active set of devices in the
current configuration.

OFFLINE MEMORY

(Multiprocessor systems only.) Removes the MKAll memory box with
the highest addresses from the system. Note that you must first ensure
that tasks are not using the memory in the memory box.

ONLINE

Attempts to place a device logically on line.

ONLINE MEMORY

(Multiprvcessor systems only.) Adds an MKAll memory box to the
online configuration. Note that you must expand the partition structure
to use the additional memory.

SET

Alters the control and status register (CSR) or interrupt vector address
values of a device (and, on multiprocessor systems, activates or inhibits
the sanity timer and its alarm.)

SWITCH

(Multiprocessor systems only.) Logically disconnects a port of a switched
bus run from a processor and then connects the port to another processor.
The command is equivalent to a LINK command followed by an UNLINK
command.

UNLINK

(Multiprocessor systems only.) Logically disconnects a port of a switched
bus run from its respective processor.

4-8 System Reconfiguration

CON also accepts two switches, /HE and /NOMSG. These switches are used alone in the CON
command line. Their functions are as follows:

Switch

Function

/HE

Displays the help text for CON.

/NOMSG

Suppresses all information displays and error messages returned by CON. You
must exit from and then reenter CON to have the messages displayed again.

System Reconfiguration 4-9

BUILD
4.5.1 BUILD
The BUILD command creates a sequence of commands that, when executed, duplicates the
current system configuration. The sequence of reconfiguration commands that result from a
BUILD command is held in a buffer in memory. When this sequence of commands executes, the
reconfiguration commands restore the system to the exact state that existed when you entered
the BUILD command.

Format
CON>BUI[LD]

Example
CON>

Creates a sequence of commands that duplicates the current system configuration. To examine
the sequence of commands that is created, use the LIST command (see Section 4.5.8).

4-10 System Reconfiguration

CLEAR
4.5.2 CLEAR
The CLEAR command erases from the internal buffer the current sequence of commands created
by the BUILD command. The command does not delete the file created by the LIST command
(see Section 4.5.8).

Format
CON>CLEAR

Example
CON>
CON>

Removes from the internal buffer the command sequence that resulted from the previous BUILD
command.

System Reconfiguration 4-11

DISPLAY
4.5.3 DISPLAY
The DISPLAY command provides current system configuration information about the device
units, device controllers, processors, memory boxes, and memory box controllers.

Format
CON>DIS[PLAY] [keyword(s)] [FOR string]

Keywords
ALL
ATTRIBUTES
CONTROLLERS
FULL
UNITS
Parameters
keyword(s)

Specifies the type of configuration information that is to be displayed.
The DISPLAY command allows more than one keyword per command line. However, some
combinations (such as DISPLAY UNITS FULL FOR DB) are meaningless. The DISPLAY
command ignores inappropriate keywords.
If the command omits a keyword, the display contains the logical names and status flags
for every device unit and device controller in the current configuration.
FOR string

Allows a selective display of a particular device or device group. When you specify this
parameter, CON displays the requested information for the devices specified in the string.
You can also use one or two wildcard characters (*) in the string. Use one wildcard to
find out which devices are connected to the controller you have specified after the wildcard.
Use two wildcards to find out which devices have the attribute you have specified after the
wildcards (either ONLINE or OFFLINE).
The FOR string is an optional parameter.

Keyword Descriptions
All
Displays the same information as the FULL keyword with the addition of interrupt vector
addresses and CSR assignments for device controllers.
ATTRIBUTES

Displays interrupt vector addresses and CSR assignments for device controllers.
CONTROLLERS

Displays every device controller in the current configuration.

4-12 System Reconfiguration

DISPLAY
FULL

Displays the status flags for every device unit and device controller in the current
configuration. The status flags indicate the following:

Status Flag

Meaning

Accpath

The device has an online access path.

Context

For a tape or disk (mountable device), the device contains a mounted
volume. For a terminal, a user is logged in. Other devices are attached.

Driver

For a device unit, the driver is loaded. For a device controller, a driver is
available.

Massbus

The device is connected to an RH-type MASSBUS controller.

Multiport

The device is dual-ported (a dual-access device) between two controllers
(for example, a dual-ported RP06 drive).

Offline

The device is off line.

Online

The device is on line (or marked for on line).

Prv_Diag

(Used with the OFFLINE and ONLINE keywords.) The device is marked
for on line or off line, but before any action is taken, the corresponding
controller must be brought on line or taken off line.

Unknown

The CSR assignment for the device is 160000 8 and thus cannot be accessed.

UNITS

Displays every device unit in the current configuration. The display equates each device
unit with its respective controller.

Examples
CON>
DBO:
PORT
PORT
DB1 :
PORT
PORT

DBOA RHBO:
DBOB RHCO:
DB1A RHB1:
DB1B RHC1:

Offline,Multiport,Massbus,Accpath,Driver
Online
Online,Current,Accpath
Offline,Multiport,Massbus,Accpath,Driver
Online
Online,Current,Accpath

Displays information about all of the DB-type devices configured into the system.

System Reconfiguration 4-13

DISPLAY

CON>
ORO·
DB1:
DRO:
DR1:
MMO:
MM1:

RHBO: • RHeo :
RHB1: ,RHC1:
RHAO:
RHA1:
RHDOO:
RHD11:

COO:
TTO:
TT1:
TT2:
TT3:
VTO:
DKO:
DK1:
DLO:
LPO:
LP1:
LP2:

YLAO:
YZAO:
YZA1:
YZA2:
DKAO:
DKA1:
DLAO:
LPAO:
LPBO:
LPCO:

NLO:
DMO:
DM1:

DMAO:
DMA1:

Displays all of the device units and controllers configured into the system.
CON>

Displays all of the RH-type controllers.
CON>

Checks to see which devices have the ONLINE attribute (port-specific status is not displayed).

4-14 System Reconfiguration

ESTATUS
4.5.4 ESTATUS
The ESTATUS command causes CON to exit with its exit status word reflecting the current
state of a specified device. If you use this command with the Indirect Command Processor
(Indirect; see the RSX-11M-PLUS Indirect Command Processor Manual), the command returns a
16-bit word describing device status. You can use the status word to obtain information about
the configuration. Table 4-2 lists the values for the bits in the word for units and controllers;
Table 4-3 lists the values for ports.

Table 4-2:
Bit
No.

Exit Status Values for Units and Controllers

Bit
Value

Description

0
1
2

1
2
4

100

Sub controller device

200

Controller device

400

State:

Display

Exit status value:
0= Warning
1 = Success
2 = Error
4 = Severe error

o = Device online
1 = Device offline

Online
Offline

1000

Device is restricted to privileged
and diagnostic functions.

Prv_Diag

2000

Multiport device

Multiport

4000

MASSBUS device

Massbus

10000

Device's CSR is 160000 8 (unknown)

Unknown

20000

Device has an online access path

Accpath

40000

Device has context

Context

100000

Driver is loaded for this device

Driver

System~econfiguration

4-15

ESTATUS

Table 4-3:
Bit
No.

Exit Status Values for Ports

Bit
Value

1
2

400

Description

Display

Exit status value:
0= Warning
1 = Success
2 = Error
4 = Severe error
State:

o = Port online
1 = Port offline

2000

13
14

Online
Offline

Current port

Current

20000

An online access path to this port exists

Accpath

40000

Port or the device it services has context

Context

Example
>
AT.>
AT.>
>CON ESTAT DB1:
AT.>
>;126401
AT.>
AT.> ~z
>(0
>

Invoke Indirect.
Enable substitution mode.
Type CON command line.
System displays command line.
Requests display of .
System displays current contents.
Exit Indirect

Presents a session where the user has used Indirect interactively. The CON command line
displays the current status of DB1, which is stored in the Indirect special symbol .
The number 126401 has the following meaning:
100000
20000
6000
400
1

Device's driver loaded.
Device has online access path.
Device is both multiport and MASSBUS.
Device is off line.
Exit status is Success.

4-16 System Reconfiguration

HELP
4.5.5 HELP
The HELP command displays the help text for CON.
Format
CON>HE[LP]

Example
CON>
CON -- Configuration Control Command Task
Implemented commands:
ONLINE
ONLINE MEMORY
ONLINE ALL
OFFLINE
OFFLINE MEMORY
OFFLINE ALL
SET

Shows the form in which the HELP command displays information about the system
configuration.

System Reconfiguration 4-17

IDENT
4.5.6 IDENT
The IDENT command displays the current version numbers of the CON and HRC tasks. The
date and time the tasks were task built are also displayed.

Format
CON>IDENT

Example
CON>
CON -- CONFIGURE Version 4.00
Task built: 1-MAR-87 12:52:43.5
HRC -- HRC Version 004.000
Task built: 12-MAR-8723:59:10.9

In this example, Version 4.0 of CONFIGURE was task built on March I, 1987; Version 4.0 of
HRC was task built on March 12, 1987.

4-18 System Reconfiguration

LINK
4.5.7 LINK
The LINK command logically connects a port of a switched bus run to a processor and thus
permits access to the devices on the switched segment of the bus run.
To logically connect a switched bus run to the processor's UNIBUS, the devices on the switched
segment must all be off line or marked for on line. You cannot dynamically link switched bus
runs.
The LINK command is supported by multiprocessor systems only.
Format
CON>LINK UBx TO CPx

Parameters

UBx
Specifies the target-switched bus run. Switched bus runs are named using the designation
UB followed by a letter from the DIGITAL hardware alphabet as follows: UBE, UBF, UBH,
UB], UBK, UBL, UBM, UBN, UBP, UBR, UBS, and UBT.
CPx

Specifies the target processor (A, B, C, or D).
Example
CON>

Logically connects the first switched bus run (UBE) to processor A (CPA).

System Reconfiguration 4-19

LIST
4.5.8 LIST
The LIST command displays the current command sequence or writes the sequence to a file.
You can use this command to keep a list of the commands that will duplicate the current
configuration. If the buffer in which the current command sequence is stored is empty (see
Section 4.5.1 for the description of the BUILD command), CON returns the following message:
CON -- Command list is empty. Nothing to print

If you specify the file type CMD, you can execute the commands from the indirect command

file and then return to CON. For example, to produce the list of commands that will duplicate
the current configuration, enter the following commands:
CON>
CON>

Then, when you want to use the file to duplicate your configuration, execute it by typing the
following:
CON>
CON>

Format
CON>LIST [filespec]

Parameter
filespec

Specifies the name and location of the file to contain the command listing. The valid format
for the file specification is as follows:
ddnn: [g.m]filename.type;version

(For more information on file specifications, see the RSX-llM-PLUS MeR Operations Manual.)

4-20 System Reconfiguration

LIST
Example
CON>
CON>
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
OFFLINE
OFFLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE

RHA
RHB
RHC
OMA
YLA
YZA
OKA
OLA
LPA
OBO:
OB1:
ORO:
OR1:
MMO:
MM1:
COO:
TTO:
TTl:
TT2:

ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE

TT10:
OKO:
OK1:
OLO:
LPO:
NLO:
OMO:
OM1:

Creates a sequence of commands that duplicates the current system configuration. Next, the
LIST command displays the sequence of commands you would use to reestablish the current
system configuration (that is, the sequence of commands created by BUILD).

System Reconfiguration 4-21

OFFLINE
4.5.9 OFFLINE
The OFFLINE command changes the state of an inactive device to offline, which removes the
device from the active set of resources in the current system configuration. This prevents further
device access. Before attempting to take a device off line, be sure there is no I/O activity on
the device (see Section 4.2.3). HRC must be able, in 1000 10 tries or less, to verify that there is
no I/O activity in progress.
The transition to the offline state for a specific device controller is completed only if all
associated devices are also off line. If an associated device is not off line, HRC rejects the
OFFLINE command because placing the device off line could interfere with active I/O (the
device has context).
Before placing a device off line, be sure there are no conditions present that constitute device
context. To remove device context, enter the appropriate DCL or MCR commands (for example,
STOP a print processor, LOGOUT a terminal, or DISMOUNT the volume).

If a task has attached the device unit, the task must be detached (or request to be aborted)
before the unit can be placed off line. For example, if you issue an OFFLINE command for the
line printer controller LPB and the connected unit LP1: has context, CON rejects the command
and issues the following error message:
CON -- Unable to take unit with context offline

If the device is in the marked for online state (for example, a device unit with its controller off
line), the command changes the device state to offline. Subsequently, when the controller is
brought on line, the system does not activate the device.
If the device is marked for offline, the command changes the device state to offline and thus
enables a subsequent online attempt.
Individual ports of dual-port devices can be taken off line separately. You may want to do this
if the port does not work correctly (for example, you cannot access the device through the port),
or if you want to increase system throughput. Figure 4-1 is an example of how to increase
throughput.

4-22 System Reconfiguration

OFFLINE

Figure 4-1:

Sample Configuration for Increasing System Throughput

RHB
DBOB
DBO

DBOA

RHA
DB1A
DB1

ZK-575-81

With this configuration, the system uses the DBOA port. Because activity on DBI must use the
DBIA port, it has to wait until DBOA is free. If you place only ports DBOB and DBIA on line,
each DB disk has its own controller and does not have to wait for another port to be free.

Formats
CON>OFF[LINE] device-specl[,device-spec2 ... ,device-specn]
CON>OFF[LINE] ALL

Parameters
device-spec

Represents the target device specification. Note that device-spec also includes processors
(CPx).
ALL

Places all devices off line except the system disk and the terminal that issued the command.
Before you enter the OFFLINE ALL command, dismount all volumes (tapes and disks)
except the system disk and log out all terminals except the issuing terminal.
The OFFLINE ALL command is useful prior to saving a system image with the SAVE
command.

System Reconfiguration 4-23

OFFLINE
Requirements

Before you enter the OFFLINE command, be sure the following conditions are met:
•

Only a privileged user can modify the system configuration.

•

No tasks are attached to the device.

•

No volumes are mounted on the device.

•

If the device is a terminal, no users are logged in on it.

Example
CON>
CON>

Places the devices logically off line, which allows the bus run UBE to be placed off line. This
example assumes that no terminals are logged in to the system.

4-24 System Reconfiguration

OFFLINE MEMORY
4.5.10 OFFLINE MEMORY
The OFFLINE MEMORY command removes a memory box from the system configuration.
Because memory must be contiguous, the target box must be the memory box in the system
configuration with the highest addresses (the last memory box added to the system). If the
target box is not the last box in the memory configuration, CON rejects the command and issues
the following message:
HRC ... Can't take box offline. Not last box in memory

If a partition maps to a memory box targeted for offline status, CON rejects the command and

issues the following message:
HRC ... Can't take box offline. Partition overmaps box

Therefore, you must reduce the partition structure before removing the memory box. The DCL
command SET PARTITION ITOP (MCR command SET ITOP) can adjust the partition structure
up or down (see the RSX-IIM-PLUS Command Language Manual or the RSX-IIM-PLUS MCR
Operations Manual), but it is your responsibility to ensure that no one is using the memory in
the memory box. The system is protected so that you cannot bring the memory box off line if
it is in use.
The OFFLINE MEMORY command is supported by multiprocessor systems only.
Format
CON>OFF[LINE] MEM[ORY] memory-box

Example
CON>

Removes memory box MK2 from the system configuration.

System Reconfiguration 4-25

ONLINE
4.5. 11 ONLINE
The ONLINE command changes the state of a device to on line and enables device access.
The transition to the online state is completed only if an access path exists between the device
and the processor, and if the device driver can successfully initialize the device. If the device
lacks an access path, the ONLINE command changes the device state to the marked for online
state; the device is activated when an online access path becomes available (when the controller
is brought on line).
Note that the database values for interrupt vector and control and status register (CSR)
assignments have no effect on the system until the device is brought on line.
The ONLINE command activates a device unit only if the associated controller is on line. The
command first tests the unit to determine whether it actually exists on the controller and then
performs drive sizing to determine device unit type. If the unit exists, it is now ready for user
access. If the associated controller is off line, the command marks the unit for online status; it
is presence-tested and sized when the access path is completed and, if present, activated.
To activate a device controller, the ONLINE command tests the CSR address to determine
whether the controller is physically present. If the controller is present, then all of the
associated units that are marked for online status are presence-tested, sized, and brought on
line. Offline units remain in the relative offline state regardless of any ONLINE command
performed on the associated controller.
To activate a processor on multiprocessor systems, the ONLINE command issues a bootstrap
request to the target processor. If the target processor ignores the bootstrap request or cannot
boot successfully, CON issues the following message (after a timeout of 5 seconds):
**Command execution error. Device offline

Formats
CON>ONL[INE] device-spec1[.device-spec2 .... device-specn]
CON>ONL[INE] ALL

Parameters
device-spec

Represents the target device specification. Note that device-spec also includes processors
(CPx).
ALL

Places every device controller and device unit known to the system logically on line.

Note
Placing all devices on line takes several seconds on a large system. Also
the command does not generate any error messages to indicate that a device
may not be on line.
I

4-26 System Reconfiguration

ONLINE
Restrictions
•

Only a privileged user can modify the system configuration.

•

The specified device must be physically present in the target system and included in the
system at system generation.

•

If the specified device is serviced by a loadable driver, the driver and device database must
be loaded.

Notes
1.

Individual ports of dual-port devices can be placed on line separately. You may want to do
this if the port does not work correctly (for example, you cannot access the device through
the port) or if you want to increase system throughput.

For dual-port terminals, you need a Status Control Block (SCB) for each terminal to bring
the ports on line individually and to switch them individually. To bring the ports on
line, the ONLINE command places the controller on line. However, you must switch the
terminals manually by using the CS 11 switch on each terminal.

If you have only one SCB for each controller, all of the dual-port terminals have to be

switched over to the same controller.

Examples
CON>
CON>
CON>
CON>
CON>
CON>

Places the controller LPA and associated printer LPO: on line. Then, places the terminal
interfaces YZA and YZB on line. Last, places eight terminals on line for each controller (a total
of 16).
CON>

Places every controller and device unit known to the system, except central processing units
(CPUs), logically on line (that is, all controllers and devices included at system generation). If
a device unit or device controller lacks an access path, the command marks these for online
status.

System Reconfiguration 4-27

ONLINE MEMORY
4.5. 12 ONLINE MEMORY
The ONLINE MEMORY command adds a memory box to the system configuration. To place
the additional memory on line, you must first place the appropriate memory box port controllers
and the memory box itself logically on line. The box you specify will have the highest memory
addresses.
To use the additional memory, expand the partition structure with the DCL command
SET PARTITION ITOP (MCR command SET ITOP). For a description of these commands, see
the RSX-IIM-PLUS Command Language Manual or the RSX-IIM-PLUS MeR Operations Manual.
The ONLINE MEMORY command is supported by multiprocessor systems only.
Format
CON>ONLINE MEMORY memory-box

Example
CON>

Adds the memory box MK2 to the system configuration.

4-28 System Reconfiguration

SET
4.5.13 SET
The SET command changes the value of the CSR or the interrupt vector address for an offline
device. The values are stored in the device driver's database.
SET does not verify the CSR or interrupt vector address that you specify until you attempt to
place the controller on line. Therefore, if you specify an incorrect CSR address, the system
cannot access the device and the ONLINE command fails. Likewise, if you specify an incorrect
interrupt vector address and then place the device logically on line, the system sends interrupts
to nonexistent interrupt vectors; the device is not accessed. Also, if you specify an interrupt
vector that is in use and then attempt to place the controller on line, CON returns an error
message. (See the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX Guide to Writing an I/0 Driver for descriptions
of CSR and vector assignment errors.)
On multiprocessor systems, the SET command also activates the hardware sanity timer and
enables an alarm if the timer expires.

Format
CON>SET controller option=value

Parameters
controller

Specifies the device controller (for example, RHA or DMA).
option

Specifies one of the following options:
CSR

Alters the value of the controller's CSR address stored in the driver database.

VEC

Alters the value of the controller's interrupt vector address stored in the driver
database.

TIMER

Activates or inhibits the sanity timer for the CPx controller.
option is supported by multiprocessor systems only.)

ALARM

Activates or inhibits an alarm upon sanity timer timeout for the CPx controller.
(The ALARM option is supported by multiprocessor systems only.)

(The TIMER

value

Depends upon the option you select, as follows:
•

If you select the CSR option, specify a value greater than or equal to 160000 8 and
less than or equal to 1777778 , If you specify a CSR address of 160000 8 or less, the
device is not known to the system and cannot be placed on line. By modifying the
CSR addresses, you prevent the system from knowing about devices that should not
be brought on line. This is particularly useful if your current hardware configuration
differs from the generated system.

For example, if your target system has a DMC11 controller with a CSR address of
160100 8 and the generated system has a DZ11 controller with the same address, the
system will fail when the CON ONLINE ALL command attempts to bring the DMC11
on line as a DZ11. However, if you set the DMC11 controller's CSR address to 160000 8

System Reconfiguration 4-29

SET
or less, you prevent the CON ONLINE ALL command from bringing that controller on
line, which also prevents a system faiiure.
•

If you select the VEe option, the value must be less than 774 8 ,

•

If you select the TIMER or ALARM option, the value is either ON (to activate) or OFF
(to inhibit).

Note that these options apply to multiprocessor systems only.
Requirement

The device must be off line and the driver must be loaded.
Examples
CON>

Changes the interrupt vector address for the first line printer controller to 160 8,
CON>

Changes the CSR address for the first line printer controller to 1776008.

4-30 System Reconfiguration

SWITCH
4.5.14 SWITCH
The SWITCH command modifies the processor association of a switched bus run by performing
an unlink operation followed by a link operation. The command uses a special hardware
feature of the DT07 to guarantee that the switched bus is linked to the target processor after the
unlink operation. Thus, the SWITCH command ensures that the switched bus will be logically
connected to the desired processor.
For example, in a three-processor system, a properly configured switched bus can be connected
to anyone of three processors. An UNLINK command permits any processor to then link the
switched bus. However, the SWITCH command specifies that only a specific processor can
link the switched bus run following the unlink operation. If CPA and CPB are running as a
dual-processor system and CPC is a single-processor system, a switch from CPA to CPB occurs
even if CPC is trying to gain control of the bus.
CON rejects the command if a device attached to the switched bus has context (that is, the
device is processing or allowing processing of I/O).
The SWITCH command is supported by multiprocessor systems only.
Format
CON>SWITCH UBx TO CPx

Parameters

UBx
Specifies the target-switched bus run. Switched bus runs are named by using the designation
UB followed by a letter from the DIGITAL hardware alphabet (E, F, H, J, K, L, M, N, P, R,
S, and T).
CPx

Specifies the target processor.
Example
CON>
CON>
CON>
CON>
CON>
CON>
CON>
CON>
CON>

Logically disconnects the first switched bus run (UBE) from its respective processor and then
logically connects UBE to processor B.

System Reconfiguration 4-31

UNLINK
4.5. 15 UNLINK
The UNLINK command disconnects a port of a switched bus run from its respective processor.
This command reverses the effect of the LINK command.
CON rejects the command if any device attached to the switched bus has context (that is, the
device is processing or allowing processing of I/O).
Format
CON>UNLINK UBx

Parameter

UBx
Specifies the switched bus.
Example
CON>

! Terminals assumed not logged in

Disconnects the switched bus port of UBE from its respective processor.

4-32 System Reconfiguration

4.6 Error Messages
The CON and HRC error messages consist of one or more lines of information in the following
format:
CON -- error message
(detail of error message)

The first line is the general error message. The second and any succeeding lines define the error
message.
In addition to the description, the error messages may include Directive Status Word (DSW)
error codes and I/O error codes. For explanations of these codes, refer to the RSX-11M-PLUS
and Micro/RSX I/O Operations Reference Manual or the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 1.
A list of the CON and HRC error messages and a brief explanation of each follows.

4.6. 1 CON Error Messages
The following messages are returned by the CON interface:
CON-Bad indirect command file specification

Explanation: You specified the name of an indirect command file (@filename) with incorrect
syntax.

User Action: For information on the correct syntax for indirect command files, see the
RSX-11M-PLUS Indirect Command Processor Manual. Then, reenter the command line.
CON-Command execution error

Explanation: CON cannot process the specified command line. This message is followed by
more specific information.
User Action: Refer to the information that accompanies this message.
CON-Command intent inconsisten1 with device state

Explanation: You attempted to place a device on line that is in the marked for offline state.
User Action: Place the device offline, using an explicit OFFLINE command; then, reenter
the command.
CON-Command list is empty. Nothing to print

Explanation: The CON command LIST returns this message when the internal buffer for
CON is empty.

User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message.
CON-Command syntax error

Explanation: The command line does not conform to command syntax rules. The command
is displayed with a question mark (?) following the last recognized keyword or parameter
that you typed.
User Action: Check the command description for correct format and reenter the command
line.

System Reconfiguration 4-33

CON-CONFIGURE Version nnn

Explanation: CON returns this message when you enter the CON command IDENT.
User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message.
CON-CON is unable to do an extend task operation to obtain pool for a read of the system
configuration. Please ensure that a checkpoint file has been allocated and reissue the CON
command

Explanation: CON requires additional memory space.
User Action: Ensure that a checkpoint file has been allocated and reenter the CON command.
CON-File open error/FILE=filename/No such file

Explanation: You specified an invalid file specification with the LIST command.
User Action: Check the device name and User File Directory (UFD); then, reenter the
command line.
CON-HRC has timed out during initialization

Explanation: This message indicates an error in the I/O data structure.
User Action: Verify that your device data structures are correct.
CON-HRC version nnn

Explanation: This is an informational message only. CON returns the message when you
enter the CON command IDENT.
User Action: No user action is required.
CON-Illegal command

Explanation: You used an invalid CON command, or you used a valid CON command
incorrectl y.

User Action: Refer to the appropriate command description; then, reenter the command line
with valid command syntax.
CON-Illegal keyword

Explanation: You used an invalid keyword with the CON command, or you used a valid
keyword incorrectly.
User Action: Refer to the appropriate command description; then, reenter the command line
with valid command syntax.
CON-Initialization error

Explanation: CON is unable to initialize itself or its links with the RD: driver and the HRC ...
task.

User Action: Verify that the driver is loaded and that HRC ... is installed.

4-34 System Reconfiguration

CON-Initialization request of HRC ... has failed. Please ensure that HRC... is installed.

Explanation: CON is unable to run HRC ... because HRC ... is not installed.
User Action: Use the DCL command SHOW TASKS/INSTALLED or the MCR command
TAS to see if HRC ... is installed. If HRC ... is not installed, install it before you reenter the
command.
CON-Input error on input command file
FILE=fllename

Explanation: The file you have specified exists, but CON is unable to read it. The file may
be corrupt or the device drive may be damaged.
This message is usually followed by more specific information.

User Action: Check the file to be sure it is readable. Also, refer to the information that
accompanies this message.
CON-Internal consistency error

Explanation: An error internal to either CON or HRC has occurred. This is most often an
internal addressing trap or a malfunctioning driver.

User Action: If the problem seems to be with DIGITAL-standard software, submit a Software
Performance Report (SPR).
CON-Internal core pool exhausted

Explanation: CON is out of internal pool space or was invoked before checkpoint space was
allocated.

User Action: If your system is out of pool space, see Chapter 8. You may need to reboot
the system.
CON-Maximum indirect command file depth exceeded

Explanation: You specified an indirect command file that exceeds the maximum nesting
depth of three.

User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.
CON-No device name matches select string

Explanation: When you entered the DISPLAY command, you specified a logical device name
that does not exist in the system.
User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message.
CON-No HRC version information available

Explanation: When HRC is not installed, the CON command IDENT returns this message.
User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message.

System Reconfiguration 4-35

CON-No reconflguration driver is available
Output to HRC Is suppressed

Explanation: The reconfiguration driver (RD:) is not loaded in the system.
User Action: Load RD: and then reenter the command.
CON-Open error on input command file
FILE=fllename

Explanation: You specified an input file that does not exist.
User Action: Reenter the command with a valid file name.
CON-Unable to assign command LUN

Explanation: CON is unable to assign a logical unit number (LUN) to your terminal (TI) for
its command input. This may indicate a low pool condition.

User Action: Wait for pool to be restored; then, reenter the command.
CON-Unknown command error

Explanation: For undetermined reasons, CON cannot read the command.
User Action: Submit an SPR to DIGITAL.
CON-Unknown device or invalid device specification

Explanation: The device specified for a command other than the DISPLAY command is not
known to the system.
User Action: Consult the system configuration for the correct name of the target device.
CON-You must be privileged to modify the system configuration

Explanation: You attempted to modify the system configuration from a nonprivileged
terminal.

User Action: Enter the CON command from a privileged terminal.

4.6.2 HRC Error Messages
The following messages are related to HRC but also come from CON:
Attempt to quiet unit for controller failed

Explanation: When a controller with units on line is taken off line, the online units are set
to the marked for offline state. HRC attempts to access a unit only when the unit lacks
context and can be taken off line. HRC makes 1000 10 attempts to ensure that the device
does not have context. After 100010 unsuccessful attempts, CON displays this message.

User Action: Stop or abort the task that is performing I/O, or wait for the task to exit. Then,
reenter the command.

4-36 System Reconfiguration

Attribute format error

Explanation: HRC received a read or write attributes QIO in which the desired attributes
were either incorrectly specified or inappropriate for the specified device.
User Action: Correct the task that issued the QIO. If the error is due to CON, submit an
SPR.
CSR for controller not present in I/O page

Explanation: You attempted to bring a controller on line that does not exist in the current
hardware configuration.
User Action: Be sure you specified the correct device name. If necessary, use the Virtual
Monitor Console Routine (VMR) to include the device in the system image before attempting
to bring the device on line.
Device already linked

Explanation: (This message appears only on multiprocessor systems.) You entered a LINK
command for a bus run that is already linked to a CPU.
User Action: No user action is required. A bus run can be linked to one CPU only.
Device not linked

Explanation: (This message appears only on multiprocessor systems.) An UNLINK command
was issued for a bus run that is not currently linked to a CPU.
User Action: No user action is required. The bus run is already unlinked.
Device is unknown in this configuration

Explanation: You attempted to bring on line a device that is unknown because it was
previously assigned a control and status register (CSR) address of 160000 8 or less.
User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message.
Executive or driver status change error

Explanation: During a controller online or offline operation, either the Executive controller
status change routines ($KRBSC) or the driver's controller status change routine (xxKRB)
were unable to change the state of the controller.
This error indicates a problem with your hardware.

User Action: If possible, reenter the command with a different device name.
HRC ... can't take box offline. Not last box in memory

Explanation: (This message appears only on multiprocessor systems.) You attempted to take
off line a memory box that is not at the end of the current physical memory configuration.

User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.

System Reconfiguration 4-37

HRC ... can't take box offline. Partition overmaps box

Explanation: An attempt was made to take a memory box off line, but the memory is
currently in use for a partition.
User Action: Remove the partition with the DCL command SET Nap ARTITION (MCR
command SET INOP AR) or reduce it in size with the DCL command SET PARTITION ITOP
(MCR command SET ITOP). For a description of these commands, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS
Command Language Manual or the RSX-IIM-PLUS MeR Operations Manual.
HRC ... detected I/O database consistency error

Explanation: While taking a device off line, HRC detected an error in the structure of the
system device database. Your system image may be corrupt.
User Action: Use the Crash Dump Analyzer (CDA) to determine the source of the problem
or submit an SPR. (For more information on CDA, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS and MicrolRSX
Crash Dump Analyzer Reference Manual.)
HRC ... Internal addressing error

Explanation: An odd address trap (or other software trap) has occurred within HRC. This
may be due to a problem in HRC or an inconsistency in the system 1/0 database.
User Action: Submit an SPR to DIGITAL.
HRC ... internal tables insufficient for this system

Explanation: HRC creates a list of units on the stack when taking a controller off line. This
message is produced if HRC encounters a controller with too many units to create a list.
The maximum number of units for each controller is defined by the symbol .MXCTL in the
module HRPRE.MAC and is set to 256 10 , by default.
User Action: Modify the symbol, re-create the system image with VMR, or disc()nnect the
units from the controller.
HRC... invalid device specification

Explanation: (This message appears only on multiprocessor systems.) HRC received a request
to bring memory on line, but the specified device was not a memory box.

User Action: Reenter the command with a valid memory box.
HRC... request format error

Explanation: HRC received a QIO with an incorrect parameter format. If the issuing task
for the request was CON, this error implies a software fault.
User Action: Submit an SPR to DIGITAL.

4-38 System Reconfiguration

HRC ... unable to access device to size drive

Explanation: When certain types of device units are brought on line, HRC must "size" the
drive (for example, to determine if a DB device is an RPOS or an RP06). This message is
issued if the sizing process fails for any reason (for example, the drive is not turned on
when you issue the CON command ONL).

User Action: Be sure the drive is turned on; then, reenter the command.
HRC ... unknown error from online/offline call

Explanation: HRC received an unsuccessful status from the driver online/offline call. The
status was not one of the expected return codes.
User Action: Submit an SPR to DIGITAL.
Invalid device descriptor

Explanation: HRC received a request to take a port off line, but the port description was
invalid.

User Action: Modify the task so that it uses a valid port description.
Memory box parameter error

Explanation: You attempted to bring on line a set of memory boxes whose current physical
configuration does not allow HRC to execute the specified command.
User Action: Reset the memory boxes to a valid configuration.
Offline controller failure

Explanation: HRC attempted to take a controller off line (implicitly; for example, during an
UNLINK operation), but the controller did not change state correctly.
User Action: Enter explicit OFFLINE commands to place the controllers off line individually.
When you attempt to take the controller that resulted in this error off line, the OFFLINE
command will fail with a more specific error message.
Offline unit failure

Explanation: HRC attempted to take a unit off line (implicitly; for example, during an
UNLINK operation), but the unit did not change state correctly.

User Action: Enter explicit OFFLINE commands to place the units off line individually. When
you attempt to take the unit that resulted in this error off line, the OFFLINE command will
fail with a more specific error message.
Parameter error

Expl£mation: HRC received a request to link a bus run, but the device specified was not a
bus switch. If the requesting task was CON, this probably implies a software fault.
User Action: Submit an SPR to DIGITAL.

System Reconfiguration 4-39

Syntax error

Explanation: (This message appears only on multiprocessor systems.)
command to link a bus run to a device that is not a CPU.

HRC received a

User Action: Reenter the command with a valid CPU specification.
Timeout on unit quieting operation

Explanation: HRC was unsuccessful in attempting to "catch" a unit in its quiet state to take
it off line after 1000 lD attempts.
User Action: Stop or abort the task that is performing I/O, or wait for the task to exit. Then,
reenter the command.
Unable to access bus run

Explanation: HRC was unable to create or remove the vectors for a device because the
device's bus run was inaccessible. Because HRC checks bus run status and uses the marked
for online state for devices on offline bus runs, this message probably implies a software
fault.

User Action: Submit an SPR to DIGITAL.
Unable to switch unit from the current controller

Explanation: This error is displayed for two reasons:
1.

HRC attempted to take off line the controller for a port to which the bus switch is
currently switched.

HRC attempted to take off line a controller (with units) whose access path cannot be
changed.

User Action: No user action is required. HRC cannot take controllers off line under these
circumstances.
Unable to take unit with context offline

Explanation: You attempted to take one of the following units off line:
•

A mounted Files-II device

•

An attached device

•

A logged-in terminal

•

A bus switch whose bus run is currently linked

•

A memory box unit whose memory is currently on line

User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.

4-40 System Reconfiguration

Chapter 5
Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-ll M-PLUS
Systems Only)
This chapter describes the Virtual Monitor Console Routine (VMR), a privileged system task that
allows you to configure your system image file. The chapter begins with a brief introduction to
VMR and continues with information on running VMR and using VMR commands.
If you are familiar with VMR, you may want to skip directly to Section 5.5, which is called

VMR Command Descriptions. Section 5.5 contains command definitions, a list of parameters
and keywords you can use for each command, and examples of the commands.
A list of VMR error messages and suggested user actions appears at the end of the chapter.

5.1 Introduction to VMR
VMR commands are a subset of Monitor Console Routine (MCR) commands. They differ from
MCR commands in that VMR commands are directed to the disk image of a system rather than
to the current running system. You use VMR to make the same changes to the system image
file on disk that you would make to the running system with MCR. The system image file that
you configure by using VMR commands can later be bootstrapped.
There are three types of VMR commands: initialization, informational, and task control.
Table 5-1 contains a list of VMR commands grouped according to the function they perform.
See Section 5.5 for a description of each VMR command.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 5-1

Table 5-1:

Functional List of VMR Commands

Type of Command

Command Name

Initializa tion

ASSIGN
CONFIGURATION
INSTALL
LOAD
REDIRECT
SAVE
SET
TIME
UNLOAD

Task control

ALTER
CANCEL
FIX-IN-MEMORY
REASSIGN
REMOVE
RUN
UNFIX

Informa tional

DEVICES
LUNS
PARTITIONS
TASKLIST

5.2 Getting Started
Before invoking VMR, use the DIGITAL Command Language (DCL) command ASSIGN (MeR
command ASN) to assign the logical device names SY: and LB: to the device that holds the
system image file you want to modify. Also, set your default directory and User Identification
Code (UIC) to the system directory (SYSUIC) by using the DCL command SET DEFAULT
INONAMED (MCR command SET INONAMED followed by the command SET IUIC). By
default, the system directory is [1,54].
The symbol definition file that corresponds to the system image file must also meet the following
requirements:
•

It must have the same file name as the system image file.

•

It must have a file type of STB.

•

It must reside on the same device and in the same directory as the system image file (that

is, on device LB: and in the system directory).
When you have corresponding system image and symbol definition files, you can run VMR.
The subsections that follow describe the methods for running VMR.

5-2 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

5.2.1 Running VMR
Invoke the VMR task image with the RUN command or the task name (VMR, by default).

Formats
>

If you precede the task image file name (VMR. TSK) with a dollar sign ($), the system searches
for the file in the System Task Directory (STD) on the LB: device. The library directory is
searched first and then the system directory. (RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX systems are
supplied with the system directory set to [1,54] and the library directory set to [3,54].) If you
do not include the dollar sign, the system searches for the task image file in the directory to
which your terminal is currently set.
VMR responds by requesting the name of the system image file you want to modify. Enter the
name of the system image file at the Enter filename: prompt. For example:
Enter filename:

After you enter the name of the system image file, VMR opens and reads the symbol definition
file. Then, VMR opens the system image file and verifies that the file is actually a system
image. If it is, VMR displays the explicit VMR prompt (VMR». At the prompt, enter any
VMR command, or exit from VMR by pressing CTRL/Z.
If the system image file you specify has Executive data space support and you are running
VMR on your system for the first time, VMR loads the data space and displays the following
messages before issuing the VMR prompt:
Loading Executive data space
Data space loading completed

5.2.2 Running VMR with Indirect Command Files
To run VMR with an indirect command file, type VMR followed by a space. Then, enter an at
sign (@) followed by the name of the indirect command file. For example, to run VMR with
the command file TASKS.CMD, enter the following command line:
>

After the system loads VMR, VMR executes the indirect command file. When VMR reaches
the end of the file, it exits and returns control to the system. Note that the first line of the
command file must contain the name of the system image file you want to modify.
Once you have started VMR, you can execute an indirect command file anytime VMR prompts
for input. Indirect command files are useful when you want to repeat a series of commands for
several different systems (INSTALL commands, for example).
To execute an indirect command file interactively, enter an at sign (@) followed by the name
of the indirect command file at the VMR> prompt. For example:
VMR>

VMR executes the indirect command file, extracting command input from the specified file.
When it reaches the end of the file, it redisplays the VMR> prompt and waits for further input.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-3

VMR supports two levels of indirect command files; you can invoke a second indirect command
file from within the first one. However, if you try to invoke a third level (that is, if you invoke
another indirect command file from within the second file), VMR returns an error message.

5.3 VMR Command Syntax
The following sections describe how to format VMR commands and how to enter comments in
VMR command lines.

5.3.1 VMR Command Format
VMR command lines consist of a command name, parameters, one or more keywords, and
keyword values. The components of a VMR command line are described as follows:
Command name

Specifies the name of the VMR command.
You can abbreviate all VMR command names to three characters. VMR
accepts three characters and then searches for a space or tab followed by
the command parameter or a RETURN character (if there are no parameters).
Note that VMR does not permit embedded spaces or tabs in command names.

Parameter

Specifies the parameter for the command.
Certain VMR commands require parameters. VMR parameters can be file
specifications, keywords, devices, or task names. Always precede a parameter
with a space or tab.

Keyword

Specifies one or more keywords for the command.
VMR keywords are command specific. Most VMR keywords are preceded
by a slash (/). Some VMR commands permit more than one keyword per
command line.
VMR keywords can be placed in any order in a command line and still have
the same meaning. For example, the following two command lines have the
same meaning:
VMR>
VMR>

Keyword value

Specifies the value for the keyword.
Always precede a keyword value with an equal sign (=) or colon (:). In
the following command line, =SUPER is the keyword value assigned to the
keyword /TASK.
VMR>

5-4 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

5.3.2 Including Comments in VMR Commands
VMR interprets an entire line of text as a comment if the first character in the line is a
semicolon (;). For example:
VMR>;

To insert a comment within a command line, use an exclamation point (!) at the start of the
comment, and use an exclamation point or RETURN at the end of the comment. VMR ignores
all text between the two exclamation points or between the exclamation point and the RETURN
character. For example:
VMR>

Comments are especially useful to clarify command lines in VMR indirect command files.

5.3.3 Extending a VMR Command Line
You can extend a command line by using a hyphen (-) immediately before the line terminator.
Then, after you press the RETURN key, VMR returns the prompt (VMR> ) on the next display
line. At the prompt, enter the remainder of your command line.
Extra command lines are called continuation command lines. You can enter any number of these
continuation lines, but the total command line cannot exceed 132 10 characters. Command line
continuation is useful when selected keywords or options cause a command line to exceed 80
characters.
For example, an RSX-11M-PLUS system would respond to the following command line (typed
over three lines) in the same way as if the entire command had been typed on one line:
VMR>
VMR>
VMR>

Regardless of how many display lines you use to type a command, if the total number
of characters in the command line exceeds 132 10 , VMR returns an error message and your
command is not processed. VMR does not display the error message until after you press the
RETURN key to end the final line of the command.

5.4 VMR File Specifications
VMR accepts the following standard file specification format:
ddnn: [directory]filename.type;ver[/IM]

The components of VMR file specifications are described as follows:
ddnn:

Specifies the name of the device on which the file is located. A device name
consists of two American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)
characters (dd), which are followed by an optional 1- to 3-digit octal unit
number (nn). You must include a colon (:) at the end of the device name.
For example, DM1: is a valid device name.
The default device in VMR is SYO:.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-5

[directory]

Specifies the directory in which the file is located. There are two types of
directories in \':t\1R, numeric and named.

A numeric directory contains two octal numbers, from 1 to 3778 , separated by
a comma and enclosed in square brackets ([ ]). For example, [1,54] is a valid
numeric directory.
A named directory consists of one to nine alphanumeric characters, enclosed
in square brackets. For example, [IGGY] is a valid named directory.
If you do not specify a directory, the system defaults to the directory under
which VMR is currently running.
filename

Specifies the name of the file. In VMR, a file name can consist of up to nine
alphanumeric characters. For example, RSXIIM is a valid file name.
There is no default file name in VMR.

type

Specifies the type of file. VMR file types can consist of one to three
alphanumeric characters. You must precede a file type with a period. For
example, .SYS is a valid file type.
File types are optional. However, omitting a file type may cause VMR to
assign one by default. VMR assigns default file types to the following files:

File

Default File Type

System image file

SYS

Task image file

TSK

Indirect command file

CMD

ver

Specifies the version number of the file. A version number helps differentiate
files that would otherwise have identical file specifications. Always precede
a version number with a semicolon (;).
If you select support for decimal version numbers during system generation,
the version number is between 1 and 32,767 10 ,
If you do not specify a version number for a file, the system defaults to the
highest version number of that file in the directory.

JIM

Specifies a switch that, when added to the specification for the system image
file, overrides the VMR requirement for the symbol definition file. If you use
the JIM switch when you specify a system image file, the only command
VMR accepts is the SAVE command.
Use the JIM switch to write non-RSX-IIM-PLUS system images to secondary
media in bootable format. The JIM switch is also useful when you use an
RSX-I1M-PLUS system as a host system for developing small, memoryresident systems that must be loaded from a serial medium, such as magnetic
tape.

5-6 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

5.5 VMR Command Descriptions
The following pages include descriptions of the VMR commands in alphabetical order. Each
command description contains the following information:
Command abbreviation

Indicates the minimum number of letters that you can
specify when using the command name. The command
abbreviation is located at the outside margin of each page
in capital letters.

Command name and function

Includes the full command name in capital letters. The command name is followed by text describing the command's
function.

Command format

Describes the format of the command, including defaults,
acceptable values for parameters, and the effects of each
keyword on command function.

Notes

Include warnings about side effects, counteracting commands, or restrictions.

Examples

Illustrate the use of the command.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-7

ALl
5.5.1 ALTER
Use the ALTER (AL T) command to change the static priority of an installed task.
Format
ALT[ER] taskname Ikeyword

Parameter
taskname

Specifies the name of the task whose priority you want to alter.
Keyword
/PRI=priorify

Specifies the task's static priority. You can assign a priority from 1 to 250 10 , where the
highest priority is 250 10 and the lowest priority is 1. For example, a task with a priority of
200 10 takes precedence over a task with a priority of 199.
The system assumes that the priority value you specify is an octal number, unless you place
a period after the value.
Example
VMR>

Alters the static priority of task TEST to 248 10 ,
VMR>

Alters the static priority of task TEST to 50 8 ,

5-8 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

ASN
5.5.2 ASSIGN
Use the ASSIGN (ASN) command to define, delete, or display logical device assignments.
Logical device assignments are a way to associate logical names with physical, pseudo, or
logical devices. When you assign a logical name to a pseudo or logical device, the system
resolves the assignment to the associated physical device.
There are several types of logical device assignments. VMR supports the manipulation of global
assignments only. Global assignments apply to all tasks in the running system.
A logical device name has the same syntax as that of a physical device unit. It consists of a
2-character ASCII name (alphabetic) and an optional 1- or 2-digit octal unit number, followed
by a colon (:). The 2-character name can be either equivalent to a standard device name (for
example, DK:) or formed by two letters picked at random (for example, 22:). If a logical device
name is identical to a physical device name, the logical name is the one used by the system.

Note
You cannot use the VMR command ASSIGN to manipulate logical names of
any form other than lInn:. This restriction applies even if your system includes
extended logical name support.
The ASSIGN command has three formats. Note that a keyword USYSTEM or /GBL) is part of
the required syntax for each format.

Format 1: Defining Global ASSignments
ASN ppnn: =11 [nn] :/keyword

Parameters
ppnn:

Specifies a physical, logical, or pseudo device name.
II

Specifies a logical device name.
nn

Specifies an optional 1- or 2-digit unit number.

Keywords
/GBL

/SYSTEM

Define systemwide (global) logical device assignments. /GBL and /SYSTEM are synonyms.

Format 2: Displaying Global Assignments
ASN /keyword

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-9

ASN
Keywords
/GBL

/SYSTEM
Display systemwide (global) logical device assignments. JGBL and jSYSTEM are synonyms.
Format 3: Deleting Global Assignments
ASN =[llnn:]/keyword

linn

Specifies a logical device name, where nn is an optional 1- or 2-digit unit number. If you
omit lInn:, ASSIGN deletes all global assignments.
Keywords
/GBL

/SYSTEM
Deletes systemwide (global) logical device assignments. JGBL and jSYSTEM are synonyms.
Examples
VMR>

Defines the global logical device name GBO: and assigns it to the device DM.
VMR>
GB

DMO:

Global

(Terminal)

Displays all global assignments for the system.
VMR>

Deletes all global assignments.

5-10 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

CAN
5.5.3 CANCEL
Use the CANCEL (CAN) command to cancel time-based initiation requests for a task. These
requests result from the Executive directive RUN (RUN$) or any of the time-synchronized
variations of the VMR command RUN.
The CANCEL command does not affect the execution of a task active in the saved system image.
The CANCEL command removes only the time-based schedule requests still in the queue.
Format
CAN[CEL] taskname

Parameter
taskname

Specifies the name of the task whose time-based initiation requests are to be canceled.
Example
VMR>

Cancels all periodic rescheduling and time-based initiation requests for task XKE.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-11

CON
5.5.4 CONFIGURATION
Use the CONFIGURATION command (CON) to set the control and status register (CSR) or
vector address of a device or to display system configuration information.
The CON command has two formats.
Format 1: Setting the CSR and Vector Address
CON [FIGURATION] SET controller option=value

Parameters
controller

Specifies the name of the controller for which the CSR or vector address is to be changed
(for example, RHA or DMA).
option

Specifies one of the following options:
CSR=value

Sets the new CSR address for the controller.

VEC=value

Sets the new vector address for the controller.

Format 2: Displaying the System Configuration
CON [FIGURATION] DIS [PLAY] [keyword] [FOR string]

Keywords
CONTROLLERS
UNITS
CPU
FULL
Parameter
FOR string

Specifies an optional parameter that allows the selective display of a particular device or
device group. When you use this parameter, VMR displays the requested information for
the devices matching the specified string.
Keyword Descriptions
CON[TROLLERS]

Displays every device controller in the current configuration. The CONTROLLERS display
contains the following information:
•

Controller's name

•

Controller's status (whether it is on line or off line)

•

UNIBUS Run Mask (URM)

•

Controller's CSR address

5-12 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

CON
•

Controller's starting vector

•

Controller's priority

UNI[TS]

Displays every device unit in the current system. The UNITS display contains the following
informa tion:
•

Logical device name.

•

Controller name and physical unit number of the device on that controller. For dualaccess devices, this information is supplied for each port.

•

Device status (whether the device is on line or off line).

•

A field indicating that the device driver is loaded.

CPU

Displays all the central processing units (CPUs) in the current system.
FUL[L]

Displays the CPUs, the controllers, and the device units in the current configuration.
If you do not specify a keyword, the default is a FULL display.

Examples
VMR>

Sets the CSR address for the third DH11 controller to 160100.
VMR>

Sets the vector address for the third DH11 controller to 340.
VMR>
RHA
RHB
RHC
RHO

YMA
YZA
VMR>

OFL
OFL
OFL
OFL

CPA
CPA
CPA
CPA

CSR=176700
CSR=176300
CSR=172040
CSR=172440

VEC=254
VEC=150
VEC=204
VEC=224

OFL
OFL

CPA
CPA

CSR=170500
CSR=160100

VEC=300 PRI=5
VEC=340 PRI=5

PRI=5
PRI=5
PRI=5
PRI=5

Displays information about every device controller in the current configuration for a singleprocessor system.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 5-13

CON
VMR>
DBO:
DB1:
DB2:
DB3:

RHAO:
RHA1:
RHA2:
RHA3:

NLO:
VTO:
ROO:
VMR>

OFL
OFL
OFL
OFL

DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER

OFL
OFL
ONL

DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER

Displays information about every device unit in the current configuration for a single-processor
system.
VMR>
CPA
VMR>

Displays the CPU for a single-processor system.
VMR>
CPA
RHA
RHB
RHC
RHO

OFL
OFL
OFL
OFL

DBO:
DB1:
DB2:
DB3:

RHAO:
RHA1:
RHA2:
RHA3:

CPA
CPA
CPA
CPA

NLO:
VTO:
ROO:
VMR>

CSR=176700
CSR=176300
CSR=172040
CSR=172440

OFL
OFL
OFL
OFL

DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER

OFL
OFL
ONL

DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER

VEC=254
VEC=150
VEC=204
VEC=224

PRI=5
PRI=5
PRI=5
PRI=5

Displays the CPU, the controllers, and the device units in the current configuration for a
single-processor system.
VMR>
RHB
RHC
RHO
RHH
RHM
RHN

OFL
OFL
OFL
OFL
OFL
OFL

CPA
CPA
CPA
CPB
CPC
CPC

CSR=176300
CSR=176700
CSR=172440
CSR=176700
CSR=176700
CSR=172440

VEC=150
VEC=254
VEC=224
VEC=254
VEC=254
VEC=224

PRI=5
PRI=5
PRI=5
PRI=5
PRI=5
PRI=5

5-14 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

CON
RHR
RHS
VMR>

OFL
OFL

CPO
CPO

CSR=176300
CSR=176700

VEC=150 PRI=5
VEC=254 PRI=5

Displays information about all the RH-type controllers in the current configuration for a
multiprocessor system.
VMR>
CPA
CPB
CPC
CPO
VMR>

Displays all the CPUs in the current configuration for a multiprocessor system.
VMR>
CPA
CPB
CPC
CPO

BSO:
BS1:

BSAO:
BSCO:

BSBO:
BSDO:

OFL DRIVER
BSEO: BSFO:

DBO:

RHHO:

RHMO:

OFL DRIVER

VMR>

Displays all the CPUs, controllers, and device units in the current configuration for a
multiprocessor system.
VMR>
YHA
YHB
YHC
VMR>

OFL
OFL
OFL

CPA
CPA
CPA

CSR=160020
CSR=160040
CSR=160060

VEC=310 PRI=5
VEC=320 PRI=5
VEC=330 PRI=5

Displays information about all the YH-type controllers in the current configuration for a
multiprocessor system.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 5-15

DEV
5.5.5 DEVICES
Use the DEVICES (DEV) command to display the symbolic names of all device units in the
system image of a particular device type. If you do not specify a device type, VMR displays the
symbolic names of all device units.
The device names appear in a single vertical column. A second column, to the right, contains
additional information about each device (see Notes).
Format
DEV [ICES] [dd: ]

Parameter
dd:

Specifies the device type.
Notes

The pseudo device SY: is not redirected to the bootstrapped device until the system is
bootstrapped.

The following list describes the terms that can appear in the second column of the device
list when you use the DEVICES command. (More than one term can appear on the same
line.)
•

LOADED indicates that the driver for the device is loadable and currently loaded.

•

UNLOADED indicates that the driver for the device is loadable but not loaded.

•

The absence of either LOADED or UNLOADED indicates that the driver is permanently
resident. This means the driver is part of the Executive.

•

OFFLINE indicates that a device has yet to be brought on line by the reconfiguration
task. All physical devices in the device list have this notation. (For more information
about device states, see Chapter 4.)

•

A device name in the second column is the device to which the corresponding device
in the first column has been redirected.

5-16 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

DEV
Example
VMR>.
LPO:
DBO:
DB1:
DB2:
000:
001:
DKO:
DK1:

Loaded
Loaded
Loaded
Loaded
Loaded
Loaded
Loaded
Loaded

ORO:
DR1:
DSO:
DS1:
DTO:
DT1:
DXO:
DX1:
EMO:
MMO:
MM1:
COO:
TTO:
TTl:
TT2:

Loaded
Loaded
Offline Loaded
Offline Loaded
Loaded
Loaded
Loaded
Loaded
Unloaded
Loaded
Loaded
TTO:
Loaded
Loaded
Loaded

NLO:
TIO:
CLO:
LBO:
SYO:
VMR>

LPO:
ORO:
ORO:

Displays the symbolic names of all device units in the system image. The terms "Loaded" and
"Unloaded" refer to the status of the driver for the device. "Offline" refers to the current device
state.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 5-17

FIX
5.5.6 FIX-IN-MEMORY
Use the FIX-IN-MEMORY (FIX) command to load a task into memory and to load a region into
its partition in the system image. VMR can fix a task in the system image only if the partition
in which it is to be fixed is available.
Fixed tasks remain in memory even after they exit. Therefore, the system can run a fixed
task faster because the task resides in memory and does not need to be reloaded. However,
reexecuting fixed tasks is not always practical. If you expect to reexecute a fixed task, you
should write it in such a way that it initializes all impure data and logical unit number (LUN)
assignments at run time.
Use either the UNFIX or REMOVE command to remove a fixed task from memory or to remove
a region from its partition.

Format
FIX taskname[/keyword]

Keywords
IDIR
INSF
IREG
IRON
Parameter
taskname

Specifies the task or region that you want to fix in memory. If you do not specify a keyword,
VMR assumes that the task is a single-user task.

Keyword Descriptions
/DIR

Specifies that the task to be fixed is a directive common. Directive commons are used to
hold some of the Executive directives instead of keeping them in Executive address space.
Because directive commons contain Executive code, they must be installed and fixed in the
system image before the system can be bootstrapped. Directive commons are installed and
fixed in the system image by commands in the SYSVMRCMD file as part of the system
generation procedure.
Individual directive commons are installed and fixed contiguously in memory to form one
large directive common called DIRIIM. DIRIIM must be fixed in memory before any other
directive commons can be fixed. Other directive commons must be fixed contiguously to
DIRIIM.
Directive commons cannot be shuffled, which means that the Shuffler cannot move them
around in memory after they have been fixed. For more information about the Shuffler, see
Chapter 8.
To eliminate a directive common, use the REMOVE command with the IREG keyword.

5-18 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

FIX
INSF
Specifies that a fixed task cannot be shuffled. This means that the Shuffler cannot move the
task around in memory after the task has been fixed. For information about the Shuffler,
see Chapter 8.
IREG
Specifies that the task to be fixed is a common region.
IRON
Specifies that the task to be fixed is a multiuser task and that the read-only portion is to be
fixed in memory.

When you use the IRON keyword, specify the entire task name.

Restrictions
The following restrictions apply when you fix tasks:
•

You must install a task before you fix it.

•

Active tasks cannot be fixed.

•

Do not fix a checkpointable task because fixing a checkpointable task makes the task
noncheckpointable.

•

You cannot fix tasks whose names are in the forms ... xxx and xxx$$$ because that copy of
the task is never executed. (The task is a prototype task.)

Examples
VMR>

Fixes the task XKE in its partition.
VMR> .

Fixes the resident common TTCOM in its partition and specifies that the common cannot be
shuffled.
VMR>

Indicates that the EDI editor is built as a multiuser task and fixes the task's read-only portion
in memory.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 5-19

INS
5.5.7 INSTALL
The INSTALL (INS) command makes a task or common recognizable to the system. An installed
task is dormant (not active) until the Executive receives a request to run the task. INSTALL
accepts optional keywords that provide parameters not specified when the task was built or that
override previously specified parameters.
When you install a task, the system creates a Task Control Block (TCB) for the task in a
memory-resident table called the System Task Directory (STD). The task parameters contained
in the TCB enable the system to run the task when requested to do so by an MCR command
or by a system directive. You cannot run a task until it has been installed.

Note
The MCR command RUN has an option that installs a task, runs the task, and
then removes the task. For more information, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS MCR
Operations Manual.
When you install a task in an unsaved system, the system stores the file identification (file
ID) for the task image file in the task's header. In addition, it stores the logical block number
(LBN) of the task image in the Task Control Block (TCB). However, in the saved system, the
LBN of the installed task is not retained in the TCB. Instead, when you save the system, the
SAVE task uses the file ID located in the task's header to replace the LBN contained in the
TCB. Then, when you reboot the system, the system opens the task file and replaces the file
ID (stored in the TCB) with the current LBN. (If you delete a task before rebooting the system,
the system cannot open the task file. As a result, the system considers the task uninstalled; so,
it automatically removes the task's TCB from the STD.)
By replacing the LBN contained in the TCB with the file ID located in the task's header, the
MCR command SAVE makes it possible to move task files to different physical locations without
losing their file identifications. For example, the Disk Save and Compress Utility (DSC; supplied
with RSX-IIM-PLUS systems only) and the Backup and Restore Utility (BRU) compress and
copy a disk that contains a saved system. These procedures move the task files to different
physical locations. However, the TCB entries contain task file identifications instead of LBNs,
so the file identifications are preserved. Consequently, the system can function normally after it
is rebooted. (For more information on DSC and BRU, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS Utilities Manual.)

Format
INS [TALL] filespec[/keyword(s)]

Keywords
I AFF=[URM(s)]
I CKP=option
ICLI=option
IDFB=option
IFMAP=option
IINC=size
IIOP=option
IPAR=pname
IPMD=option
IPRI=number

IPRO=[system,owner,group,world]
IRON=option
IROP AR=pname
ISEC=option
ISLV=option
ISYNC=option
ITASK=taskname
IUIC=[group,member]
IWB=option
IXHR=option

5-20 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

INS
Parameters
filespec

Specifies a task image file specification in the following format:
LB: [g,m]filename.type;version

The task image file you specify must be on the device LB:. The default for the file type is
TSK.
Keyword Descriptions
/ AFF=[URM(s)]

Specifies the UNIBUS Run Mask (URM) affinity of a task running on a multiprocessor
system. When you specify the j AFF keyword, the installed task runs on the processor to
which the specified URMs are connected or the task does not run at all (if the tasks are on
different CPUs).
You must specify at least one URM. Enclose the URM or URMs in square brackets. If you
specify more than one URM, separate them with commas. For example:
/AFF=[UBE,UBF,UBH]

The option [URM(s)] represents the 3-letter name of the UNIBUS Run Mask (URM) for the
central processing unit (CPU) or switched UNIBUS run. The following names are valid
URM specifications:
CPA

UBE

UBK

UBP

CPB

UBF

UBL

UBR

CPC

UBH

UBM

UBS

CPD

UBI

UBN

UBT

/CKP=option

Enables or disables checkpointing for a task.
The options are YES and NO. If you specify jCKP=YES, checkpointing is allowed. If you
specify jCKP=NO, checkpointing is disabled for the task. The jCKP keyword overrides the
JCP switch specified at task build.
The task image file need not contain allocated checkpoint space. The jCKP=YES keyword
instructs the system to allocate checkpoint space for the task, when required, from a
checkpoint file. (For more information on allocating checkpoint space, see Chapter 1.)
The default is jCKP=YES for tasks that are eligible for checkpointing.
/CLI=option

Indicates that the task being installed is or is not a command line interpreter (CLI). (For
information on command line interpreters, see Chapters 17 and 18.)
The options are YES and NO. jCLI=YES indicates that the task is a command line interpreter.
jCLI=NO indicates that the task is not a command line interpreter.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 5-21

INS
To indicate that a task is a CLI, install it with the jCLI=YES keyword or task build it
with the Task Builder (TKB) switch /CL. i1...fter you install the eLI, you can use the rvfCR
command CLI to set your terminal to it. (See the RSX-IIM-PLUS and MicrojRSX Task
Builder Manual for more information on the TKB switch JCL. For information on the CLI
command, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS MCR Operations Manual.)
The default is specified at task-build time.
/DFB=option

Specifies whether or not the task's header is bound to Executive data structures when the
task is installed. More specifically, jDFB specifies whether or not the Unit Control Block
(UCB) pointers for the task's Logical Unit Table (LUT) and the Partition Control Block (PCB)
pointers for the task's address window are bound to the Executive logical unit number
(LUN) assignments.
The options are YES and NO. jDFB=YES specifies that binding to the Executive will be
deferred until the task is loaded into memory. If you specify jDFB=YES, you can avoid
problems that occur when a task is installed in more than one system (running or disk
resident) at the same time. If you specify jDFB=NO, binding occurs at the time the task is
installed.
The default is jDFB=YES.
/FMAP=option

Informs the system that the task uses the fast-mapping feature of the Executive. You can
use the jFMAP keyword only with tasks that have external headers.
The options are YES and NO. jFMAP=YES indicates that the task uses the fast-mapping
feature of the Executive. jFMAP=NO indicates that the task does not use the fast-mapping
feature of the Executive.
See the description of the jXHR keyword for more information about external headers. See
the RSX-IIM-PLUS and MicrojRSX Executive Reference Manual for more information about
fast mapping.
The default is specified at task-build time.
/INC=size

Indicates the extension size of a task. The extension size refers to the number of additional
words of address space you want allocated to a task. The extension size is usually expressed
in octal but may also be expressed in decimal by following the size with a period (.).
Tasks such as the MACRO-II assembler (MAC), TKB, the Peripheral Interchange Program
(PIP), the File Structure Verification Utility (VFY), and the Indirect Command Processor
(AT.), use additional address space as dynamic memory in which to allocate symbol tables
and buffers. The INSTALL command allocates the dynamic region between the end of the
task image and the end of the task's address space. The JINC keyword defines the number
of words in the region.
The JINC keyword overrides the TKB options EXTTSK and PAR.
When you install a common region with an increment, it no longer fits in its original task
image file. Therefore, you cannot specify both jINC=size and jWB=YES when you install
a common.

5-22 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

INS
The default size is the size specified at task-build time or zero.
/IOP=option

Informs the system that a privileged task needs access to the I/O page. The options are
YES and NO. If you specify /IOP=YES, INSTALL determines that the task uses the I/O
page (APR 7) and, if the task is larger than 8K words, INSTALL issues a warning message.
If you specify /IOP=NO, INSTALL assumes that the task does not need to use the I/O
page, and it does not issue a warning message.
/IOP complements the TKB switch /IP. Specifying /IP informs INSTALL that the task is
intentionally mapping to the I/O page.
The default is specified at task-build time.
/PAR=pname

Indicates a partition that overrides the partition name specified at task-build time. If the
partition you specify does not exist, VMR issues a warning message and attempts to install
the task in the GEN partition.
The default is specified at task-build time.
/PMD=option

Informs the system whether a Postmortem Dump (PMD) is required.
The options are YES and NO. If you specify /PMD=YES, the system performs a PMD of the
task when the task is aborted because of a synchronous system trap (SST) error condition.
If you specify /PMD=NO, the system does not perform a PMD when the task is aborted.
To generate a PMD, install the Postmortem Dump task PMD... in the system.
overrides the TKB switch /PM.

/PMD

The default is specified at task-build time.
/PRI=number

Specifies the priority for the task. The value of number can be between 1 and 250 10 , where
250 is the highest priority. The standard numbering conventions apply; that is, the default
is octal, and the value is a decimal number if it is followed by a period.
The default is specified at task build time or it is equal to 5010.
/PRO=[system,owner,group,world]

Sets the protection mask for a common region. The protection specification has the following
format:
[RWED,RWED,RWED,RWED]

The user classes (system, owner, group, world) are positional; that is, the location of the
word in the string defines the user class to whom the code applies. The square brackets
around the protection code are required syntax.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-23

INS
For each user class, the system recognizes the following types of protection access codes:
Code

Type of Access

Read access

Write access

Extend access

Delete access

To assign an access type to a particular group, place the access type or types in the same
position as the group name and separate the groups with commas. For example:
/PRO= [RWED ,RWED,ED,R]

To specify the default protection for a user class, enter an asterisk (*) instead of access
codes in that classes' place in the string. To prevent a group from having any type of
access, insert a comma in the group's position. For example:
/PRO=[RWED,RWED, ,RWED]

In this example, a task running under the same VIC group as the file's owner has no access.
You cannot specify protection options for a read-only common region or the read-only
portion of a multiuser task. A task linked to a common region with an improper protection
mask cannot be installed.
The default is /PRO=[RWED,RWED,RWED,RWED].
jRON=option

Informs the system that a common region is or is not a read-only region. This keyword
overrides the effect of the /PRO keyword.
The options are YES and NO. If you specify /RON=YES, the region is installed as read-only.
If you specify /RON=NO, the region is installed with read/write access.
The default is /RON=NO.
jROPAR=pname

Indicates the read-only partition pname into which the read-only portion of a multiuser task
is to be installed.
If the partition you specify does not exist, VMR issues a warning message and attempts to

install the read-only portion of the task into the partition containing the read/write portion
of the task. The /ROP AR keyword overrides the TKB option ROP AR.
The default is specified at task-build time.
jSEC=option

Places the Task Control Block (TCB) for the task being installed in secondary pool. (For
information on secondary pool, see Chapter 8.)

5-24 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

INS
The options are YES and NO. If you specify ISEC=NO, the TCB for the task is placed in
primary pool instead of secondary pool. The ISEC keyword is valid only for tasks whose
names are in the form ... xxx or xxx$$$.
The default is ISEC=YES.
ISLV=opfion

Informs the system of the task's slave status.
The options are YES and NO. If you specify ISLV=YES, data sent to the installed task is
marked with the TI: and UIC of the sending task. When the installed task receives the data,
the system sets the task's TI: and UIC to the TI: and UIC associated with the data. The
ISLV=YES keyword overrides the TKB switch ISL. If you specify ISLV=NO, the TI: of the
task does not change when the task receives data.
The ISLV keyword cannot be used with tasks whose names are in the form ... xxx or xxx$$$.
These tasks are prototype tasks and cannot be installed as slaved tasks.
The default is specified at task-build time.
ISYNC=opfion

Synchronizes task use of a common region by preventing tasks that share the common from
running at the same time (on different CPUs). This prevents the second task from reading
from or writing to the common while the first task is executing.
This keyword applies to multiprocessor systems only.
The options are YES and NO. You can specify ISYNC=YES for two or more tasks, but only
one of the tasks can execute at one time. If one of the tasks becomes blocked, the others
compete to execute.
The default is ISYNC=NO.

IT ASK=faskname
Specifies the name by which the system refers to the task.
The default taskname is the name specified at task-build time or the first six characters of
the file name.
IUIC=[group, member]

Specifies the UIC for the task. The task's UIC determines the file-protection class (system,
owner, group, world) to which a task belongs. The square brackets are required syntax.
The default is the UIC specified at task-build time. The UIC you specify with the
INSTALL IUIC command applies only to tasks started in one of the following ways:
•

Issuing the Executive directive Run Task (RUN$)

•

Entering a RUN command that specifies a time delay before run time

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-25

INS
Tasks run under the protection UIC of the issuing terminal (TI) if they are started in one of
the follovJing ways:
•

Typing the name as a command (for example, PIP for the Peripheral Interchange
Program or TKB for the Task Builder)

•

Entering a RUN command that does not specify a time delay before run time

/WB=option

Specifies the file to which a read/write common will be checkpointed. The options are YES
and NO. By default, a common is checkpointed to a system checkpoint file.
If you specify /WB=YES, the common is checkpointed to its original task image file; also,

when the common is removed, it is written back to its original task image file. However,
if a common is installed with an increment, it will no longer fit into its original task image

file. Therefore, when installing a common, you cannot specify /WB=YES with /INC=size.
If you specify /WB=NO, the common is checkpointed to a system checkpoint file, and it is

not written back to the original task image file when it is removed.
If a common is a read-only region, there is no need to checkpoint it.
ignores the /WB switch if a common is installed with /RON=YES.

Thus, INSTALL

The default is /WB=NO.
/XHR=option

Specifies that the Executive's copy of the task's header will be in an area external to the
system's pool.
The options are YES and NO. If you specify /XHR=YES, the task is installed with an
external header. If you specify /XHR=NO, the task is installed with a resident header.
When you specify /XHR=YES, the Executive's copy of the task's header is placed in a
reserved area immediately before the task image. When the task executes, the Executive
uses the copy of the header instead of the actual header. If the task is checkpointed, the
system writes the entire task image and the copy of the header into the checkpoint file.
Thus, the header in the task image is left unchanged.
/XHR corresponds to the TKB option /XH. The default is specified at task-build time. (For
a detailed description of the TKB option /XH, refer to the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX
Task Builder Manual.)
Notes

A TCB contains both the address of the load-device Unit Control Block (UCB) and the LBN
of the task image file. Because task image files are contiguous, the Executive can load the
task image in one transfer when an MCR command or system directive requests an installed
task. However, if the task is greater than 32K words, loading requires more than one
transfer. For example, if a task is built with user instruction and data space, the Executive
loads the data space first, and then it loads the instruction space.

If you use the INSTALL command to install a resident library, INSTALL makes an entry

for the resident library in the Common Block Directory (CBD). When a task maps to the
library, the system loads the library into memory. You can remove the library only when
tasks are no longer mapped to it.

5-26 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

INS
3.

Changes made in the memory image of a common can be preserved when the common is
removed by installing the common with the /WB=YES option.
If you install the common with the /WB=YES option, the REMOVE command writes the
common, with its changes, into the original task image file. Thus, the original image is
replaced. When the common is reinstalled, the new version of the common (as it existed in
memory when it was removed) is placed in memory.

You cannot use the INSTALL command to install device commons that have been created
with the SET PARTITION (SET /P AR) command. (A device common is a special type of
common that occupies physical addresses in the I/O page.)
When you use the SET command to create a device partition, the following operations
occur:

•

If the device partition being created is the first device partition in the system, the system
automatically creates a main partition called 10 PAR. The partition being created then
becomes a subpartition of 10 PAR.

•

The system creates an entry for the new device partition in the Common Block Directory
(CBD) and inserts the partition into the directory. The device partition is now a
device common. Because the system creates a common block for the device partition
automatically, there is no need to install it as a common. If you attempt to do so, you
will receive an error message.

Examples
VMR>

Installs task SCAN with the default priority and directory.
VMR>

Informs the system that the task SCAN is a command line interpreter (CLI).
VMR>

Informs the system that the task SCAN will use the fast-mapping feature of the Executive.
VMR> ,.,

Informs the system that the privileged task, SCAN, needs access to the I/O page.
VMR>-

Installs task MAC in the partition SYSCTL and increases the task size by 4096 10 words.
VMR>

Installs the fourth version of the task SCAN (file type TSK) from device LB:, group number 1,
member number 111, with a priority of 103 8 .

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-27

INS
VMR>

Requests the system to install the common region SCANCM with a protection mask that permits
tasks running under the same Vser Identification Code (VIC) as the file's owner to have read,
write, extend, and delete access. Tasks with other VIC's are denied access to the common.
VMR>

Informs the system that other tasks can share a common with the task SCAN, but only one of
the tasks may execute at one time.
VMR>

Specifies that the read/write common TEST will be checkpointed to its original task image file.

5-28 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

LOA
5.5.8 LOAD
The LOAD (LOA) command loads a nonresident (loadable) device driver into the system image.
LOAD either links a driver to an already resident database or loads a loadable database with the
driver. This command eliminates the need to link infrequently used device drivers permanently
into the Executive. The result is the potential for an increase in the amount of system dynamic
memory (pool).
You can load drivers that are up to 8K words in length. However, note that the loadable device
driver itself must map to locations above 4K.
For more information on loadable device drivers, see the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/0
Drivers Reference Manual.
Format
LOA[D] dd: [/keyword(s)]

Keywords
/CTB=cc[a,b, ... ]
/PAR=pname
/SIZE=psize
/VEC
Parameter
dd:

Specifies a 2-character American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) loadable
device driver name.
Keyword Descriptions
jCTB=cc[a,b, ... ]

Specifies that the multidriver controller Controller Table Block (CTB) in the resident database
be modified instead of the symbol $ddCTB in the loadable database. Note that the keyword
is necessary only if the driver contains a loadable database; to load most drivers, this
keyword is not required. (See the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX Guide to Writing an I/0
Driver for more information.)
Specify the following arguments:
cc

Specifies the name of the multidriver controller (CTB) to be used in the loadable database.
[a,b, ... ]

Specifies the slots in the CTB's Controller Request Block (KRB) table that should point at the
KRBs in the loadable database. The slots are named A,B,C,D,E,F,H,J,K,L,M,N,P,R,S, and T.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-29

LOA
jPAR=pname

Specifies the partition into which the driver is to be loaded. The pname value is the name
of the partition.
The /PAR keyword overrides the partition specified at task-build time.
jSIZE=psize

Specifies the minimum size of the partition (in octal words) into which the driver is to be
loaded.
VMR rounds the partition size up to the next largest unit of 100 8 , The partition size must
be less than 77,741 8 ,
jVEC

Specifies that the driver to be loaded is vectored.

Vectoring is a technique for building a portable device driver. You can load a vectored
driver into any RSX-11M-PLVS or Micro/RSX operating system that has the same version
number as the system on which the driver was built. However, you must specify the jVEC
keyword to suppress the validation of the Executive symbol table files used in the driver.
/VEC avoids the comparison of the driver symbol table file and the Executive symbol table
file.
For more information on vectored device drivers, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX

Guide to Writing an I/0 Driver.
Notes
1.

The driver for a device, for example ZY:, can indicate association with a partition by
allocating one word in the driver and by labeling it with the global symbol $ZYCOM.
If $ZYCOM is defined in a driver, you cannot load the driver until you create ZYCOM,
because the LOAD command writes the Partition Control Block (PCB) address of ZYCOM
into $ZYCOM.

Guidelines for building user-written, loadable device-driver tasks are defined in the

RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX Guide to Writing an I/0 Driver.
3.

The LOAD command requires that a driver's TSK and STB files reside in the same directory
and on the same disk as the system image file you are working on. For example, the
following command requires that the files DTDRV.TSK and DTDRV.STB reside on the
device SY:, under the current VIC:
LOAD DT:

The LOAD command requires the following pool space:

•

If the driver database is being loaded, the database needs contiguous pool space equal
to its size.

•

Each interrupt entry in the driver needs pool space for an Interrupt Control Block (ICB).

•

The PCB needs pool space.

5-30 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

LOA
Examples
VMR>

Loads the TU16 driver (MMDRV).
VMR>

Loads the RK05 driver (DKDRV) into DRVP AR.
VMR>

Loads the RM03 driver (DRDRV), using the RHB multidriver controller.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 5-31

LUN
5.5.9 LOGICAL UNIT NUMBERS
Use the LOGICAL UNIT NUMBERS (LUN) command to display the static logical unit number
(LUN) assignments for a specified task. Static assignments are those recorded in the task's disk
image file (for example, assignments specified at task-build time). The display consists of a list
of physical device units in one column and their corresponding LUNs in an adjoining column.
Format
LUN[S] taskname

Parameter
taskname

Specifies the name of the task whose LUNs you want to display.
Example
VMR>
SYO:
SYO:
CLO:
TT3:
TT3:
DKO:
TT3:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

The display shows static assignments for LUNs 1 to 7 as recorded in the task image file header.
No other LUNs are assigned statically to the task XKE.

5-32 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

PAR
5.5.10 PARTITION DEFINITIONS
Use the PARTITION DEFINITIONS (PAR) command to display a description of each memory
partition in the system image.
The display consists of six columns that specify the following information:
•

Partition name

•

Address of Partition Control Block (PCB)

•

Starting address of partition (in octal)

•

Size of partition (in octal)

•

One of the following partition types:

Display

Partition Type

MAIN

Main partition

TASK

Partition contains a task

DRIVER

Partition contains a device driver

RO COM

Partition is a read-only common

RW COM

Partition is a read/write common

DEVICE

Partition is a common and is mapped to the I/O page

SEC POOL

Partition is in secondary pool

CPU

Partition is a central processing unit (CPU) partition in a multiprocessor system

DEVICE partitions are used to allow tasks to communicate with specific device registers,
such as the UDC and ICS/ICR-ll industrial control subsystem.
For a description of subpartitions and dynamic regions, see Chapter 1 of this manual or refer
to the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX Executive Reference Manual. For more information on
loadable drivers, see the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX Guide to Writing an I/O Driver.
•

Description of partition occupant in one of the following forms:

Form

Meaning

[ taskname ]

An inactive memory-resident task

An active task

taskname>

( dd: )

The specific device driver

+ xxxx +

The name of the first installed task that is associated with an unnamed
common, usually the read-only segment of a multiuser task

! xxxx!

A common region

Format
PAR [TIT IONS]

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-33

PAR
Example
VMR>.I: :
SYSPAR 117734
065230
DRVPAR 117624
117340

00174400
00174400
00216400
00216400

00010000
00010000
00140000
00003100

MAIN
TASK
MAIN
DRIVER (DB:)

116634
116550
116504
116440
116374
036504
LDRPAR 117560
116054
TSTPAR 117514
SECPOL 117450
GEN
117404
115454
073400
052274
060774
037210
045104

00243300
00300600
00316400
00317700
00321200
00322600
00356400
00356400
00361200
00421200
00443200
00443200
00534000
00542600
00571400
00620100
00656200

00035300
00015600
00001300
00001300
00000100
00003200
00002600
00002600
00040000
00022000
04734600
00070600
00006000
00003500
00020100
00036100
00026400

RW COM 'TTCOM
DRIVER (TT:)
DRIVER (RD:)
DRIVER (VT:)
DRIVER (NL:)
DRIVER (DR:)
MAIN
TASK
< ... LDR>
MAIN
SEC POOL
MAIN
TASK

TASK

RO COM + ... EDI+
TASK

TASK

062254
061340
061674
061774
063050
071114
070100
037474
072244
042100
037540
064534
037724

01170400
01230400
01242500
01254600
01313700
01437000
01401400
01474400
01571100
01631100
01715600
02050500
02143000

00040000
00012100
00012100
00037100
00037100
00035400
00035400
00074500
00026500
00064500
00102700
00033500
00134300

TASK
TASK
TASK
TASK
TASK
TASK
TASK
TASK
TASK
TASK
TASK
TASK
RW COM

!RMSRES!

Displays a description of the following memory partitions in a saved system:
Partition

Description

SYSPAR

System partition, used by the Task Termination Notification Program (TKTN)
and other system tasks

DRVPAR

Contains the loadable device drivers

LDRPAR

Contains the Loader task, which is always fixed in memory

5-34 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

PAR

Partition

Description

TSTPAR

Used for running tests ("test" partition)

SECPOL

Secondary pool

GEN

General partition, the default for most tasks in memory

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-35

REA
5.5. 11 REASSIGN
Use the REASSIGN (REA) command to reassign a task's logical unit numbers (LUNs) from one
physical device unit to another. REASSIGN has no effect on the assignments for a task that is
fixed or loaded in memory. The reassignments affect only the static assignments recorded in
the task's disk image file.

Format
REA[SSIGN] taskname LUN new:

Parameters
taskname

Specifies the name of the task for which the LUN is to be reassigned.
LUN

Specifies the logical unit number.
new:

Specifies the new device unit, which can be a physical, logical, or pseudo device.

Examples
VMR>

Reassigns LUN 3 of task LODN to physical device TTO.
VMR>

Reassigns LUN 3 of task TEST to logical device XX.

5-36 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

RED
5.5. 12 REDIRECT
Use the REDIRECT (RED) command to redirect all I/O requests from one physical device unit
to another physical device unit.
You cannot redirect the following:
•

The pseudo device TI:

•

A device to the pseudo device TI:

•

A pseudo device to itself

•

An attached device

•

A terminal to the null device.

You can redirect a logged-in terminal to a device other than a terminal (except for the null
device); however, it is not generally advisable to do so because terminal I/O would be written
to the device. If you do redirect a terminal to another type of device, you should redirect the
terminal back to itself before you log out.

Format
RED[IRECT] new:=old:

Parameters
new:

Specifies the new device unit to which requests will be redirected.
old:

Specifies the old device unit from which requests will be redirected.

Examples
VMR>

Redirects all I/O requests for device TT6 to device TT3.
VMR>

Redirects all I/O requests for device LPO to device TTO.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-37

REM
5.5. 13 REMOVE
Use the REMOVE (REM) command to delete a task name or a region name from the System
Task Directory (STD). Removing a task from the system image makes the task unrecognizable
to the system. The action resulting from this command is the complement of INSTALL.
The REMOVE command cannot remove an active task from a saved system. An example of
such a task is SAV; an attempt to remove SAV from a saved system results in an error message.
Format
REM[OVE] name[/keyword]

Parameter
name

Specifies the name of the task, region, or directive common to be removed.
Keyword
/REG

Specifies that the name parameter you specify is the name of a region.
You must specify this keyword when removing the directive commons. To remove the
commons, use the following command line:
VMR>

Note that when you remove DIR11M, you remove all of the directive commons in the
system.
Notes

1. If a task or region that is the object of a REMOVE command is fixed, the command
automatically unfixes the task from the system image.
2.

REMOVE automatically cancels all time-based schedule requests for the specified task.

In general, use MCR on the running system to remove and install command line interpreter
(CLI) tasks. Then, to update the system image file, use the MCR command SAVE.
Although you can use the VMR command REMOVE to remove a CLI from the task image
file, you cannot remove the CLI until you use the MCR command CLI IELIM to eliminate
the CLI Parser Block (CPB). Likewise, you can use the VMR command INSTALL to install
a CLI, but you must use the MCR command CLI IINIT to initialize the CLI. Thus, for most
CLI tasks, MCR is a more direct method for eliminating and removing old CLls or installing
and initializing new ones.
An exception to this note is the primary MCR task (MCR ... ). The CPB for this task can
never be eliminated, and the task itself can be removed only with VMR.

A region cannot be removed if there are tasks installed in the system that reference that
region.

S. Changes made in the memory image of a common can be preserved when the common is
removed by installing the common with the IWB=YES option.

5-38 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

REM
If the common is installed with the jWB=YES option, the REMOVE command writes the
common, with its changes, into its original task image file, replacing the original image.
When the common is reinstalled, the new version of the common is placed in memory.
Example
VMR>

Removes the task named SCAN from the STD. The task image file remains unaffected.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-39

RUN
5.5.14 RUN
Use the RUN command to initiate the execution of an installed task at any of the following
time options:
•

At a time increment from the system image time

•

At a time increment from clock unit synchronization

•

At an absolute time of day

•

At one clock tick after the system bootstrap

All of these options are available with or without rescheduling, and each option has a separate
format.
You cannot run a task whose name is in the form ... xxx or xxx$$$. These tasks are prototype
tasks, which are never executed.
Note
The correct value to be inserted in the clock queue for Format 1 to Format 3 is
derived from the current value of the system time stored in the system image.
Therefore, the system image time must be set before any RUN requests are made,
or they may not occur at the correct time after the system is bootstrapped.
Format 1: Running at a Time Increment from System Image Time
RUN taskname time [/keyword(s)]

Keywords
IRSI=time
IUIC=[uic]
Parameters
taskname

Specifies the name of the task. A task name consists of one to six characters.
time

Specifies the number of time units added to the current system image time to determine the
time at which the task will run. When you specify this parameter with the IRSI keyword,
it specifies the number of time units added to the time of the task's last completed run to
determine the time at which the task will be run again.
The time parameter has the following format:
magu

5-40 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

RUN
mag
Specifies the magnitude or number of time units to be clocked. The maximum number of
time units you can specify depends on the type of time units, as follows:

Hours

Specifies a positive number from 0 to 24 10 •

Minutes

Specifies a positive number from 0 to 1440 10 .

Seconds

Specifies a positive number from 0 to 32,76710 •

Clock ticks

Specifies a positive number from 0 to 32,76710 •

If you are specifying a reschedule interval with the IRSI keyword and you specify a
magnitude of 0, the magnitude defaults to 1. For example, specifying IRSI=OH is the same
as specifying IRSI=lH.
The total time cannot exceed 24 hours. The magnitude is decimal by default.
u

Specifies the type of time units to be clocked. Use single letters to specify the following
time units:
Unit

Reschedule Interval

Clock ticks

Seconds

Minutes

Hours

A tick is a clock interrupt. The rate at which interrupts occur depends on the type of clock
installed in the system. For a line frequency clock, the tick rate is either 50 or 60 ticks
per second, corresponding to the line frequency. For a programmable clock, a maximum of
1000 ticks per second is available. (You can select the frequency during system generation.
For more information, see the RSX-llM-PLUS System Generation and Installation Guide.)
Keyword Descriptions
jRSI=time

Specifies the reschedule interval. The reschedule interval indicates to the system when the
task is to be run again. Each time the interval of time you specify lapses, the system issues
an initiation request for the task. The format for time is as follows:
magu

For information on specifying magu, see the preceding description of the time parameter.
The default is no rescheduling.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-41

RUN
jUIC=[uic]

Specifies the Vser Identification Code (VIC) for the task. The task's VIC determines the file
protection class (system,owner,group,world) to which the task belongs. The brackets are
part of the required syntax.
The default is the VIC established for pseudo device CO:.

Format 2: Running at a Time Increment from Clock Synchronization
RUN taskname sync [time] [/keyword(s)]

Keywords
jRSI=time
jVIC=[uic]
See Format 1 for a description of the keywords.

Parameters
taskname

Specifies the name of the task. A task name consists of one to six characters.
sync

Indicates the synchronization unit. You can specify the following synchronization values:

Unit

Synchronization

Synchronizes on the next tick.

Synchronizes on the next second.

Synchronizes on the next minute.

Synchronizes on the next hour.

time

Specifies that the time increment value, if present, is added to the synchronization value
to produce the time the task will be run. The format for specifying time is described in
Format 1.
When you specify this format, the system determines the task run time by waiting for the
specified time unit (sync) and then by waiting for the specified time increment (time) to elapse.

Format 3: Running at an Absolute Time of Day
RUN taskname hh:mm:ss [/keyword(s)]

Keywords
jRSI=time
jVIC=[uic]
These keywords are described under Format 1.

5-42 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

RUN
Parameters
taskname

Specifies the name of the task. A task name consists of one to six characters.
hh:mm:ss

Specifies the absolute time of day at which the task will be run. Replace the letters in the
format with decimal numbers and indicate the following time units:
hh

Specifies hours.

Specifies minutes.

Specifies seconds.

Format 4: Running at a Clock Tick after System Bootstrap
RUN taskname [/keyword(s)]

Keywords
jRSI=time
jVIC=[uic]

These keywords are described under Format 1.
Parameter
taskname

Specifies the name of the task. A task name consists of one to six characters.
Examples
VMR>'

Runs task XKE 15 minutes from the current system image time.
VMR>

Runs task XKE 15 minutes from the current system image time, rescheduling it every 90 seconds.
The task will run under VIC [3,1].
VMR>

Synchronizes with the system image time on the next hour, runs the task XKE 5 minutes after
synchronization, and reschedules the task to run every hour after the last completed run.
VMR>

Runs task XKE at 5 minutes before midnight.
VMR>

Runs task XKE one clock tick after the system bootstrap and reschedules the task to run every
2 minutes after that.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-43

SAY
5.5.15 SAVE
Use the SAVE (SAV) command to write the image of a system onto a sequential medium in
bootable format. You can then transport the magnetic tape or diskette to another computer
and bootstrap it by using a hardware bootstrap. (Refer to the description of the JIM switch in
Section 5.4.)
On paper tape, system images are created in absolute loader format and must be bootstrapped
with the absolute loader.

Format
SAYEE] ddnn: [label] [/keyword(s)]

Keywords
jBOOT=type
/DENS=1600
Parameters
ddnn:

Specifies the device unit onto which the system image is written. The SAVE command
accepts the following devices:
Mnemonic

Device

Tape cassette

TU58 DECtape II

DECtape

RX33jRX50 diskette, RA60 disk, and RC25 disk (removable)

RXOI diskette

RX02 diskette

TEI6jTUI6jTU45/TU77 magnetic tape

TS 11 jTSV05 /TU80 magnetic tape

TEI0/TUI0/TS03 magnetic tape

TK50 cartridge tape and TU81 magnetic tape

Paper tape

label

Specifies the file label name that must be specified for all devices except paper tape. The
label name can be 1 to 12 alphanumeric characters.

5-44 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

SAY
Keyword Descriptions
/BOOT=fype:

Specifies the type of boot block being used when the system image is saved. The options
for type are DX and DY (for RX01s and RX02s, respectively).
The IBOOT keyword allows you to use an RX01 drive to bootstrap a system that was saved
using an RX02 drive in single-density mode. Similarly, IBOOT allows you to use an RX02
drive to bootstrap a system that was saved using an RX01 drive in single-density mode.
If you do not use IBOOT, the boot block for the type of device being used is written to the
device.
/DENS:: 1600

Specifies the bits per inch (bpi) density for MM-type magnetic tapes (such as TU77).
Notes

1. When you bootstrap systems on media other than paper tape, regardless of the size of the
system image, the last 1000 8 bytes of physical memory are not copied to accommodate the
bootstrap.
2.

When you save a system on paper tape, contiguous blocks that contain only zeros and
begin on a 32-word address are compressed into two words that contain the zero count.
This compression significantly reduces both the amount of paper tape required and the time
expended to create the tape and read it into memory. After the entire image has been
loaded into memory, a short routine writes zeros into the appropriate blocks of memory
before passing control to the bootstrapped system.

Systems saved on a 9-track magnetic tape drive can be bootstrapped from a drive capable
of bootstrapping that tape density.

When you specify the 11M switch with the system file specification, the SAVE command
always uses a bootstrap that does not enable memory management.

Unless you specify IDENS=1600, when you save a system image to a magnetic tape drive
that supports multiple densities, the drive is forced to 6250 bpi (for TU81 drives) or 800 bpi
(for all other drives) before the system starts the SAVE operation.

Example
VMR>

Writes the system image onto the MT device in bootable format. System changes made by
other VMR commands are also saved with the system image.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-45

SET
5.5.16 SET
The SET command allows you to do the following:
•

Set and display device characteristics for devices.

•

Set and display default VICs for terminals.

•

Set and display system VIC.

•

Set and display terminal status.

•

Create and eliminate partitions.

•

Add space to the system dynamic memory.

•

Enable write-checking and seek optimization on devices that support it.

When you use the SET command, a situation may arise in which the system fails to accept
privileged user input. To prevent this from happening, be sure the system always has at least
one privileged terminal (for entering privileged commands) and one nonslaved terminal (for
entering unsolicited input to MCR).
VMR permits only one keyword per command line. You can prefix most keywords by NO to
negate or disable the function of the keyword. VMR returns a syntax error message when NO
precedes a keyword for which it is invalid.
Examples of the SET command follow the keyword descriptions.

Format
SET /keyword[=value]

Table 5-2 briefly summarizes the SET command keywords. They are grouped according to the
functions they perform, as follows:
•

Setting device characteristics

•

Establishing directories

•

Modifying memory allocation

•

Setting pool limits

•

Ensuring system protection

•

Tuning the system

5-46 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

SET

Table 5-2:

SET Keyword Summary

Keyword

Description
Setting Device Characteristics

j[NO]ABAUD[=ttnn: ]

Enables or disables autobaud detection for a terminal.

j[NO]ANSI[=ttnn:]

Specifies support for American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) standard escape sequences.

j[NO]AVO[=ttnn:]

Specifies the advanced video option for a terminal.

j[NO]BLKMOD[=ttnn: ]

Enables or disables local editing and block-mode
transmission.

j[NO]BRO[=ttnn: ]

Enables or disables the broadcast option.

jBUF=ddnn:[size]

Sets or displays the default buffer size.

jCHAR_LENGTH=ttnn:[size]

Sets or displays the length of characters transmitted
and received.

j[NO]CRT[=ttnn:]

Enables or disables the backwards deletion option.

j[NO]DEC[=ttnn:]

Indicates compatibility with VT100-series terminals.

j[NO]EBC[=ttnn: ]

Enables or disables the 8-bit character option.

j[NO]ECHO[=ttnn:]

Displays or inhibits the display of input characters on
a terminal.

j[NO]EDIT[=ttnn:]

Specifies performance of ANSI-defined advanced
editing functions.

j[NO]ESCSEQ[=ttnn: ]

Enables recognition of escape sequences.

j[NO]FDX[=ttnn:]

Enables or disables simultaneous processing of input
and output (the full-duplex option).

j[NO]FORMFEED[=ttnn: ]

Indicates whether or not a terminal has a hardware
form feed.

jHFILL=ttnn:[value]

Specifies the number of fill characters placed after a
carriage return.

j[NO]HHT[=ttnn:]

Indicates whether or not a terminal has a hardware
horizontal tab.

j[NO]HSYNC[=ttnn: ]

Enables or disables sychronization between the host
system and the specified terminal.

jLINES=ttnn:[value]

Establishes the number of lines per page for a
terminal.

j[NO]LOWER[=ttnn:]

Enables or disables the conversion of lowercase input
characters to uppercase.

j[NO]OPT=[ddnn:opttyp]

Enables or disables IjO queue optimization.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-47

SET

Table 5-2 (Cont.):

SET Keyword Summary

Keyword

Description
Setting Device Characteristics

j[NO]PARITY[=ttnn:[option]]

Enables or disables parity generation and checking
for a terminal.

j[NO]PASTHRU[=ttnn:]

Enables or disables standard operating system responses to special characters (such as CTRLjC or
CTRLjO).

j[NO]PRINTER_PORT[=ttnn:]

Indicates that a terminal does or does not have a
printer port.

j[NO]PRIV[=ttnn:]

Establishes a terminal as privileged or nonprivileged.

j[NO]PUB[=ddnn:]

Establishes a device as public or nonpublic.

j[NO]REGIS[=ttnn: ]

Indicates that a terminal does or does not support the
ReGIS graphics character set.

j[NO]REMOTE[=ttnn::[speed]]

Declares that at terminal line is remote (connected to
a modem) or local.

j[NO]RPA[=ttnn:]

Enables or disables the read-pass-all option.

j[NO]SERIAL[=ttnn: ]

Specifies serial or parallel processing of unsolicited
input.

j[NO]SLAVE[=ttnn:]

Establishes or removes slave status from a terminal.

j[NO]SOFT[=ttnn:]

Specifies whether or not a terminal accepts softwaredefined character sets.

jSPEED=ttnn:[recv:xmit]

Establishes the receive and transmit baud rate.

jTERM=ttnn: [type]

Establishes the terminal type.

j[NO]TTSYNC[=ttnn:]

Enables or disables the terminal synchronization
option.

j[NO]TYPEAHEAD[=ttnn:[size]]

Specifies whether or not a terminal driver stores input
characters in a buffer to prevent their loss.

JUI C [=[uic][: ttnn ]]

Establishes the default UIC.

j[NO]VFILL[=ttnn: ]

Enables or disables the vertical fill characters option.

j[NO]WCHK[=ddnn:]

Enables or disables write-checking.

j[NO]WRAP[=ttnn:]

Enables or disables the wraparound option.

5-48 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

SET

Table 5-2 (Cont.):

SET Keyword Summary

Keyword

Description

Establishing Directories
/LIBUIC[=[ uic]]

Establishes the UIC for nonprivileged system task
library files.

/NETUIC[=[uic]]

Specifies the UIC in which all DECnet-related tasks
are stored.

/SYSUIC[=[uic]]

Establishes the UIC for the system and all system
tasks.
Modifying Memory Allocation

/ AFF=[UNIBUS-run-mask, ... ]

Specifies which I/O page contains the device partition. This keyword is supported on multiprocessor
systems only.

/BOT=pname:value

Directs VMR to move the bottom boundary of the
specified partition (pname) up or down.

/MAXEXT[=size]

Establishes the maximum size to which a task can
extend itself.

/P AR=pname[: base:size[ :type]]

Establishes or displays a partition.

/NOP AR=pname

Eliminates a partition from the system.

/POOL[=top]

Specifies the top of pool.

/POOLSIZE[=value]

Increases the total size of pool.

/SECPOL

Displays secondary pool use on the system.

/TOP=pname:value

Modifies the top boundary of a partition.
Setting Pool Limits

/PLCTL[=[high][ :[low][: [frz][: [basep]]]]

Sets the pool limit parameters used by the Pool
Monitor Task (PMT).

Ensuring System Protection
/[NO]LOGON

Enables or disables logging in on the system.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-49

SET

Table 5-2 (Cont.):

SET Keyword Summary

Keyword

Description

Tuning the System
jRNDC[=nn]

Defines the length of the Executive round-robin
scheduling in ticks.

jRNDH[=nn]

Defines the highest priority considered for Executive
round-robin scheduling.

jRNDL[=nn]

Defines the lowest priority considered for Executive
round-robin scheduling.

jSWPC[=nn]

Defines the number of clock ticks for a single
Executive swapping interval.

jSWPR[=nn]

Defines a priority range for Executive swapping.

Notes on Memory Allocation Keywords
1.

If a command attempts to eliminate a partition in which tasks are installed or drivers loaded,

VMR rejects the command until the tasks have been removed.
2.

When you define a partition, the name must not already be defined as a partition. In
addition, a partition cannot overlap any other partition.

The address specified with the jPOOL keyword must be lower than the base address of
the first partition in the system.

Once you have allocated space to the pool, you cannot recover the space for use in partitions.

When the highest memory addresses of a system are allocated, the size of the partition
is modified automatically to reflect the amount of memory present when the system is
bootstrapped.

The top address of the last partition is modified by the SAVE command at boot time to
reflect the actual top of physical memory of the hardware in use.

Keyword Descriptions
/ ABAUD[=tfnn:]

Enables autobaud detection for the remote dial-up line for the specified terminal. The
terminal driver samples the line's first input character, tries to determine the incoming
speed, and sets the interface speed accordingly.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals with autobaud
detection.
/NOABAUD[=tfnn:]

Disables autobaud detection for the specified terminal. The terminal driver does not attempt
to determine the incoming speed for the remote dial-up line.

5-50 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

SET
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that do not have
autobaud detection.
/ AFF=[UNIBUS-run-mask, ... ]

Specifies which I/O page will contain the device partition. / AFF is required for creating
device partitions on the system.
This keyword is supported on RSX-11M-PLUS multiprocessor systems only.
[UNIBUS-run-mask, ... ]

Specifies the 3-letter name of the UNIBUS Run Mask (URM) with which the device partition
is associated. Use one of the following names:
Valid UNIBUS Run Mask (URM) Names
ePA

UBE

UBK

UBP

ePB

UBF

UBL

UBR

epe

UBH

UBM

UBS

ePD

UBI

UBN

UBT

For example, to create a device partition that is mapped to the I/O page for ePA, enter the
following command line:

Specify at least one URM. If you specify more than one URM, separate them with commas.
The brackets are part of the required syntax.
/ ANSI[=ttnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal supports ANSI escape sequences. When you
omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that have the ANSI character
set.
/NOANSI[=ttnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal does not support ANSI escape sequences.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all terminals that do not have the
ANSI character set.
/AVO[=ttnn:]

Informs the system that the specified VT100-series terminal has the advanced video option.
This option gives the terminal the capability to blink, perform bolding, and flash parts of
the screen, and to set the screen at 132 10 columns. If the word SET-UP blinks in set-up
mode, the terminal has the advanced video option.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that have the
advanced video option.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-51

SET
/NOAVO[ =tfnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal does not have the advanced video option.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all terminals that do not have the
advanced video option.
/BLKMOD[=tfnn:]

Enables local editing and block-mode transmission for the specified terminal. When you
omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that have the block-mode
option enabled.
/NOBLKMOD[ =tfnn:]

Disables local editing and block-mode transmission for the specified terminal. When you
omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that have the block-mode
option disabled.
/BOT=pname:value

Directs VMR to move the bottom boundary of the specified partition (pname) up or down
the amount indicated by the value parameter. The IBOT keyword modifies the bottom
boundary of a partition even though it has tasks installed in it. If you modify the partition
so that it becomes too small to hold the tasks installed in it, VMR displays a warning
message but modifies the partition anyway.
Specify values for pname and value, as follows:
pname

Specifies the 1- to 6-character alphanumeric partition name.
value

Specifies the number of 64-byte blocks.
The value parameter can be supplied in five formats: +value, -value, value, +* or *, and -*,
as follows:
Format

Action

+value

Moves the partition's bottom boundary up the amount indicated by the specified
value. Moving the bottom boundary up makes the partition smaller.
You must supply the value in the same units as those of the base and size
parameters for the SET keyword IP AR.

-value

Moves the partition's bottom boundary down the amount indicated by the
specified value. Moving the bottom boundary down makes the partition larger.

value

Moves the partition's bottom boundary until the total partition size is equal to
the specified value.

5-52 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

SET

Format

Action

+* or *

Moves the partition's bottom boundary up as far as possible. Note that using
this format will cause the bottom boundary to move up to the bottom of the first
fixed task or fixed driver loaded into the partition at the time the IBOT keyword
is executed. If there is nothing loaded into the partition, it assumes a size of one
64-byte block.

Moves the partition's bottom boundary down as far as possible. Using this
format will cause the bottom boundary of the partition to move down to the top
boundary of the partition below it, or to the top of the Executive pool if the
partition is the lowest partition in memory.

/BRO[=ftnn:]

Enables the broadcast option for the specified terminal. The terminal can receive messages
sent from other terminals with the MCR command BROADCAST.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that can receive
messages.
/NOBRO[=ftnn:]

Disables the broadcast option for the specified terminal.
messages sent from other terminals.

The terminal cannot receive

When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that cannot receive
messages.
/BUF=ddnn:[slze]

Sets the default buffer size of the specified device. The size you specify must be from 0
to 255 10 , (For a terminal, the size you specify must be greater than or equal to 1510)'
The IBUF keyword is particularly useful for defining line printer width (for example, 80 or
132 columns).
When you omit the size specification, VMR displays the current buffer size of the device.
/CHAR_LENGTH=ftnn:[size]

Establishes the length of characters transmitted and received by terminals attached to the
system through variable-speed multiplexers. However, note that the command is not valid
for serial-line units.
You can specify the character length as either 7 or 8 bits. If you do not specify a length,
VMR displays the current setting. The default value for transmission is 8-bit characters.
/CRT[=ttnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal is a cathode-ray tube (CRT) terminal and
enables the backwards deletion option.
When you enable the backwards deletion option, pressing the RUBOUT or DELETE key
moves the printing position one space to the left and erases any character displayed in that
position.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

5-53

SET
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that are defined
as eRTs.
/NOCRT[=ftnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal is not a CRT and disables the backwards
deletion option. When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals
that are not defined as CRTs.
/DEC[=tfnn:]

Indicates that the specified terminal is upward compatible with the VT100-series of terminals.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that are upward
compatible.
/NODEC[ =ftnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal is not upward compatible with the
VT100-series of terminals. When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all
the terminals that are not upward compatible.
/EBC[=ftnn:]

Enables the 8-bit character option. The terminal driver passes all 8 bits of the characters
to the specified terminal. When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the
terminals that have the 8-bit character option enabled.
/NOEBC[=tfnn:]

Disables the 8-bit character option. The terminal driver clears the eighth bit of the characters
before passing them to the device. When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays
all the terminals that do not have the 8-bit character option enabled.
/ECHO[ =tfnn:]

Enables the echo option. The terminal driver displays each character that is typed on the
specified terminal. When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals
that have the echo option enabled.
/NOECHO[=tfnn:]

Disables the echo option. The terminal driver does not display the characters that are typed
on the specified terminal. When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the
terminals that have the echo option disabled.
/EDIT[=ftnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal can perform ANSI-defined advanced editing
functions. The VT102 is an example of such a terminal. When you omit the terminal
specification, VMR displays all the terminals that can perform the advanced editing functions.
/NOEDIT[=tfnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal cannot perform ANSI-defined advanced
editing functions. When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals
that cannot perform the advanced editing functions.

5-54 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

SET
/ESCSEQ[=ttnn:]

Enables the recognition of escape sequences from the specified terminal. The terminal
driver treats the ESC character as the beginning of an escape sequence rather than as a line
terminator. (See the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/O Drivers Reference Manual for more
information on escape sequences.)
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that recognize
escape sequences.
/NOESCSEQ[ =ttnn:]

Disables the recognition of escape sequences at the specified terminal. When you omit the
terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that do not support the recognition
of escape sequences.
/FDX[=ttnn:]

Enables the full-duplex option. The terminal driver accepts input from the specified terminal
while simultaneously outputting to it. When you omit the terminal specification, VMR
displays all the terminals that have the full-duplex option enabled.
/NOFDX[=ttnn:]

Disables the full-duplex option. The terminal driver will not process input and output
from the specified terminal simultaneously. When you omit the terminal specification, VMR
displays all the terminals that do not have the full-duplex option enabled.
/FORMFEED[ =ttnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal supports a hardware form feed. When you
omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that support hardware form
feeds.
/NOFORMFEED[=ttnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal does not support a hardware form feed.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals on the system
that do not support hardware form feeds.
/HFILL=ttnn: [value]

Specifies the number of fill characters (value) that the terminal driver is to place after a
carriage return when sending output to the specified terminal. The value is a number from
o to 7.
When you omit the value parameter, VMR displays the number of fill characters currently
being output by the terminal driver to the specified terminal.
/HHT[=ttnn:]

Indicates that the specified terminal supports a hardware horizontal tab. When you omit
the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals on the system that support a
hardware horizontal tab.
/NOHHT[=ttnn:]

Indicates that the specified terminal does not support a hardware horizontal tab. When
you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that do not suppprt a
hardware horizontal tab.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-55

SET
/HSYNC[=tfnn:]

Enables host-terminal synchronization. Host-terminal synchronization con trois the typeahead buffer to prevent it from overflowing. When the type-ahead buffer is nearly full,
the system temporarily locks the terminal keyboard by generating a CTRL/S sequence.
CTRL/S prevents you from entering more information. After the terminal transmits all of
the information in the type-ahead buffer to the operating system, the system unlocks the
keyboard by generating a CTRL/Q, which allows the terminal to receive input.
The /HSYNC keyword is recommended for users with terminals that transmit information
in blocks, for example, the DIGITAL VT131 and VT132 terminals. It is also recommended
for users with terminals that emulate these models. If you do not have one of these
terminals it is unlikely that you will fill the type-ahead buffer. To change the size of your
type-ahead buffer, use the /TYPEAHEAD keyword.
/HSYNC is the default for the VT100-series of terminals. When you omit the terminal
specification, VMR displays all the terminals that have host-terminal synchronization.
For more information on type-ahead buffers, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/O

Drivers Reference Manual.
/NOHSYNC[ =tfnn:]

Disables host-terminal synchronization for the specified terminal. Disabling synchronization
means that when the type-ahead buffer for the terminal is nearly full, the system does not
lock the keyboard, and subsequent input is lost.
/NOHSYNC is the default for VT52 terminals. When you omit the terminal specification,
VMR displays all the terminals that do not have host-terminal synchronization.
For more information on type-ahead buffers, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/O

Drivers Reference Manual.
/LiBUIC[ =[uic]]

Directs the MCR command INSTALL to search the specified User Identification Code (UIC)
in response to a RUN $file or INSTALL $file command.
The UIC is in the format [g,m], where g and m are octal numbers from 1 to 3778 that
represent a group and member number, respectively. The brackets are part of the required
syntax.
When you omit the uic specification, VMR displays the current library UIC. The default
library UIC is [3,54].
/LlNE5=tfnn:[value]

Establishes the number of lines per page on the specified terminal. The value is a number
from 1 to 255 10 • If you specify a number that is larger than the number of lines per page
supported by the specified terminal type, VMR defaults to the largest possible value.
When you omit the value parameter, VMR displays the lines per page for the specified
terminal.
/lOGON

Allows users to log in to the system. /LOGON and /NOLOGON clear and set a flag
checked by the HELLO command when a user attempts to log in on a terminal.

5-56 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

SET
/NOLOGON

Prevents users from logging in to the system. /NOLOGON provides a means of preventing
users from accessing the system during such activities as system maintenance or account
file maintenance.
/LOWER[=ftnn:]

Specifies that lowercase characters are not converted to uppercase when received from the
specified terminal. When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals
for which lowercase characters are not converted.
/NOLOWER[=tfnn:]

Resets the terminal characteristics of the specified terminal so that lowercase characters
received on input are automatically converted to uppercase and echoed as uppercase. When
you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals for which conversion to
uppercase is specified.
/MAXEXT[=size]

Establishes the maximum size to which a task can extend itself beyond its mapped array
area by using the Executive directive Extend Task (EXTK$). (See the RSX-IIM-PLUS and
Micro/RSX Executive Reference Manual for a description of the directive.) The size is given
in units of 64 1O -byte blocks. The maximum size allowed is 177,7778 blocks.
Specify the size in one of the following formats:
Specified Size

Resulting Size

(n8*100 8)

(nlO*64 1O )

(n8*4000 8)

n.K

(nlO*2048 10 )

1777778

When you omit the size specification, VMR displays the current maximum extension size in
64 1O -byte units.
/NETUIC[ =[ uic]]

Specifies the VIC in which all DECnet-related tasks are stored. The /NETVIC keyword
applies only to systems that select the external communication products option during
system generation.
The VIC is in the format [g,m], where g and m are octal numbers from 1 to 3778 that
represent a group and member number, respectively. The square brackets are part of the
required syntax.
When you omit the uic specification, VMR displays the current network VIC.
/OPT[ =ddnn:optfyp]

Enables disk I/O queue optimization for the specified device. For more information on
optimization and on the algorithm parameter for this keyword (opttype), see Chapter 14.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-57

SET
Specify the device and optimization algorithm, as follows:
ddnn:

Specifies the device that will use I/O queue optimization. Valid devices are ~B, DL, DM,
and DR devices. If you do not specify a device, VMR displays all the devices that use
optimization.
opttyp

Specifies the algorithm for optimization. The algorithms are as follows:
NEAREST
ELEVATOR
CSCAN
The default algorithm set at system generation is NEAREST.
When you omit ddnn: and opttyp, VMR displays all the devices that have I/O queue
optimization enabled.
/NOOPT[=ddnn:]

Disables disk I/O queue optimization for the specified device. When you omit the device
specification, VMR displays all the devices that do not use I/O queue optimization.
/PAR=pname[:base:size[:fype]]

Establishes a partition in memory.
pname

Specifies the 1- to 6-character alphanumeric partition name.
base

Specifies the physical base address of the partition specified as a number of 64-byte blocks
or as a wildcard (*).
size

Specifies the size of the partition in 64-byte blocks or as a wildcard (*).
The size can range from 1 to 170,000 8 (1920K-words), minus the size of the Executive and
other partitions in the system.

5-58 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

SET
type

Specifies one of the following partition types:

Type

Function

SYS

Establishes a main partition, which is allocated for user tasks and loadable drivers.

SECPOL Establishes a secondary pool partition, which is allocated for secondary pool.
DEV

Establishes a common partition that maps the device registers. Device partitions
are allocated for device commons that tasks use to access the device registers on
the I/O page. Note that creating a device partition automatically creates a main
partition named 10 PAR, which spans the entire I/O page. The partition you
specify with the /P AR keyword then becomes a subpartition of 10 PAR.
On multiprocessor systems, use the / AFF keyword to specify which I/O page
contains the device partition.

CPU

Establishes a central processing unit (CPU) partition, which is allocated on
multiprocessor systems to store vectors for all the devices associated with the
specified processor.

The partition type is optional. However, if you do not specify a partition type, SYS is the
default partition type assigned.
You can enter the base and size arguments as wildcards (*) or in one of the following
formats:
Format

Calculated Value

nnnn

(nnnns* l OOs)

nnnn.

(nnnnlO*64 1O )

nnnK

(nnns*4000s)

nnn.K

(nnnlO*2048 1O )

For SYS partitions, the size can range from 0 to 1920K or any valid representation of these
limits. For example, the following values for size allocate a 2048 1O -byte partition:

If you specify the base address of a partition as a wildcard (*), VMR creates a partition at
the lowest address possible for a partition of the size you specify. If you specify the size of

a partition with a wildcard, VMR creates the largest possible partition starting at the base
address you specify. If you specify wildcards for both the base and size, VMR creates a
partition that completely fills the first gap in the existing partition layout.
If you specify a wildcard for a CPU partition, VMR creates a partition of size (n-l)*4K,

where n is the number of processors specified during system generation. Note that when
you establish the base and size for a CPU partition, the entire CPU partition must be below
124K.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-59

SET
If you do not specify base, size, or type, VMR displays the values of these parameters for
the named partition. If the named partition is a main partition, VMR also displays the

parameters of all its subpartitions.
/NOPAR=pname

Eliminates a named partition from the system. The partition you specify is eliminated from
the list of partitions and the system. If any tasks or commons are installed in or attached
to the partition, the partition is not eliminated, and VMR generates an error message.
/PARITY[ =ftnn:[ option]]

Enables parity generation and checking. The option you specify selects the state of the
parity bit. If you do not enable parity checking, parity bits are not transmitted.
Parity checking is used to verify the transmission of data between a terminal and the
operating system. Verification occurs by sending an extra bit (called a "parity bit") with each
character, which serves as a check that the transmitted character was received properly.
The options for IP ARITY are EVEN and ODD. The state of the parity bit (0 or 1) is
determined by the option you specify, as follows:
/PARITY=ttnn :EVEN

Adds either a 0 or 1 to make the total number of parity bits even. This is the default.
/PARITY=ttnn:ODD

Adds either a 0 or 1 to make the total number of parity bits odd.
The system checks parity on input from a terminal. The terminal checks parity on output
from the system. The parity check does not return an error under the following conditions:
•

If you specify an EVEN parity and the system counts an even number of bits

•

If you specify an ODD parity and the system counts an odd number of bits

Note that the terminal hardware must be set to the same mode of parity generation and
checking as the system for correct data transmission to occur. On the VT200-series of
terminals, this is done through the terminal's set-up mode.
Note
The IP ARITY keyword is not related to the IEBe keyword.
character option clears the eighth data bit only.

The 8-bit

When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that have parity
checking enabled.
/NOPARITY[=ttnn:]

Disables parity generation and checking for the specified terminal. Data transmitted between
the terminal and the system is not verified.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that do not have
parity generation and checking enabled.
(
\

5-60 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

SET
/PASTHRU[=ftnn:]

Requests the system to ignore the original function of special characters typed at the specified
terminal and, instead, to pass them to a program in their binary form. If your terminal does
not seem to be working properly, it may have been set to /PASTHRU.
/P ASTHRU allows you to suppress standard operating system responses to special characters
(for example, CTRL/C and CTRL/O), thereby controlling output to the terminal screen.
While /P ASTHRU is enabled, the terminal does not recognize any control characters, except
CTRL/S and CTRL/Q if it is set to /TTSYNC, nor does it respond to carriage-return or
line-feed characters.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that have been
set to /PASTHRU.
/NOPASTHRU[=ftnn:]

Requests the system to recognize the original function of special characters typed at the
specified terminal. When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals
that have not been set to /PASTHRU.
/NOPASTHRU is the default.
/PLCTL[ =[high][: [Iow][:[frsiz][ :basep]]]]

Sets the pool limit parameters used by the Pool Monitor Task (PMT). The following list
defines the parameters:
high

Specifies the high pool limit in bytes.
low

Specifies the low pool limit in bytes.
frsiz

Specifies the minimum byte size of the largest free pool block required for avoiding low
pool actions by PMT.
basep

Specifies the base task priority, which is the lowest priority a nonprivileged task can have
and still be eligible for memory contention during times of low pool; this priority remains
in effect until pool conditions improve. (Note that only those tasks requested to run while
the system is in a low pool state are affected).

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-61

SET
The following list defines the limits of the parameters and shows the default values:
Parameter

Minimum Limit

Maximum Limit

Default

high

Low parameter

Total size of system
pool

1600 10 bytes

low

8410 bytes

High parameter

60010 bytes

frsiz

8410 bytes

High parameter

200 10 bytes

basep

010 bytes

250 10 bytes

5110 bytes

See Chapter 8 for more information on determining values for these parameters.
When you omit the parameter specifications, VMR displays the current parameters for the
system.
/POOL[ =top]

Increases the size of pool.
top

Specifies the first location in memory used for partition allocation. A wildcard (*) directs
VMR to supply the maximum amount of pool possible.
Specify the wildcard as follows:
/POOL=*

If you request more pool than can be supplied, VMR prints a warning message and supplies
the maximum amount of pool possible.
If you do not specify a value for top, VMR displays the virtual address of the top of the
Executive, the size of the longest block of pool space in words, the total number of words
in the pool, and the lowest physical address at which a partition can start. The format for
the display is as follows:
POOL=top:max:total[:par]

This format displays top in units of 64-byte blocks, max and total in decimal words, and
par as the lowest physical address (32-word blocks).

Note
You can use the address when calculating partition layouts for systems
supporting kernel data space. If your' system is not a kernel data space
system, this value is always equal to the virtual address of the top of pool.
/POOLSIZE[ =value]

Increases the size of pool. The value you specify indicates the total amount of pool to be
allocated.
If you do not specify a value, VMR displays the virtual address of the top of the Executive,

the size of the longest block of pool space in words, the total number of words in the pool,
and the lowest physical address at which a partition can start in 32-word blocks.

5-62 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

SET
The jPOOL and jPOOLSIZE keywords perform the same function. jPOOL allows you to
specify the top of pool. jPOOLSIZE allows you to specify the total size of pool.
/PRINTEILPORT[=tfnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal has a printer port. The VT200-series of
terminals, for example, has printer ports. When you omit the terminal specification, VMR
displays all the terminals that have a printer port.
/NOPRINTER_PORT[ =tfnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal does not have a printer port. When you omit
the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that do not have a printer port.
/PRIV[=tfnn:]

Sets the specified terminal to privileged status. When you omit the terminal specification,
VMR displays all the privileged terminals in the system.
/NOPRIV[ =tfnn:]

Sets the specified terminal to nonprivileged status. When you omit the terminal specification,
VMR displays all the nonprivileged terminals in the system.
/PUB[=ddnn:]

Establishes the specified device as a public device. When you omit the device specification,
VMR displays all the public devices in the system.
/NOPUB[=ddnn:]

Causes the specified device to lose its public status. When you omit the device specification,
VMR displays all the non public devices in the system.
/REGIS[ =tfnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal supports the ReGIS graphics set. When
you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that support the ReGIS
graphics set.
The VT125 and the VT240 terminals both support the ReGIS graphics set.
/NOREGIS[ =tfnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal does not support the ReGIS graphics set.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that do not
support the ReGIS graphics set.
/REMOTE[=ttnn:[speed]]

Informs the system that the specified terminal is connected to a modem and can be connected
to the system by means of a dial-up network. The terminal has a line to a multiplexer that
supports remote lines (such as a DHUll).
Specifying speed establishes the initial speed (answer speed) of the remote dial-up line
for the specified terminal. You cannot specify an answer speed for a DLll or DLVll
multiplexer.
Table 5-3 lists the valid baud rates for various multiplexers. 1
1 The DHQll, CXA16, and CXB16 multiplexers do not support remote lines.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-63

SET

Table 5-3:

Valid Baud Rates for Variable-Speed Multiplexers

Multiplexer
DH11

DHU11/DHV11/DHQ11

DZ11 /DZQ11 /DZV11

CXY08/CXA16/CXB16

Valid Baud Rates
0

134.5

600

4800
9600

150

1200

200

1800

EXTA (user-specified A)

110

300

2400

EXTB (user-specified B)

300

2000

19200

110

600

2400

134.5

1200

4800

150

1800

9600

150

1800

4800

300

2000

7200

110

600

2400

9600

134.5

1200

3600

300

2000

110

600

2400

134.5

1200

4800

150

1800

9600

19200

When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the remote terminals. When
you omit the speed specification, the current setting for the terminal remains in effect.
/NOREMOTE[ =ttnn:]

Establishes the terminal's line as a local line that is not connected to a modem. When you
omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the local terminals.
/RNDC[=nn]

Defines the length of the Executive round-robin scheduling interval in ticks. (For more
information on scheduling, see Chapter 1.)
The length value nn is assumed to be octal, unless you place a period after the value. The
minimum value for nn is O. When you omit the length specification, VMR displays the
current value for the interval.

5-64 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

SET
/RNDH[=nn]

Defines the highest priority that is considered for Executive round-robin scheduling. For
more information on scheduling, see Chapter 1.
Specify a value for nn between 1 and 250 10 , where 250 10 is the highest priority and 1 is the
lowest priority. For example, a priority of 200 10 takes precedence over a priority of 199 10 .
The priority you enter is assumed to be octal unless you place a period after the number.
Also, it must be higher than the one specified with the jRNDL keyword. If you do not
specify a priority, VMR displays the current value for the priority.
/RNDL[=nn]

Defines the lowest priority, from 1 to 250, that will be considered for Executive roundrobin scheduling. 25010 is the highest priority and 1 is the lowest priority you can assign.
Therefore, a priority of 200 10 takes precedence over a priority of 199 10 .
The priority you enter is assumed to be octal unless you place a period after the number.
The priority class must be lower than the one specified with the jRNDH keyword. (For
more information, see Chapter 1.)
When you omit the priority class, VMR displays the current value for the priority.
/RPA[=tfnn:]

Enables the read-pass-all option. The terminal driver passes all characters input at the
keyboard to the terminal's input buffer. When you omit the terminal specification, VMR
displays all the terminals on the system that have the read-pass-all option enabled.
/NORPA[=tfnn:]

Disables the read-pass-all option. The terminal driver does not pass special function
characters (for example, CTRLjC) input at the keyboard to the terminal's input buffer.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals on the system
that have the read-pass-all option disabled.
/SECPOL

Displays secondary pool use in the system. The display is in the following format:
SECPOL=secfr:secsiz:pctfr

sedr

Specifies the number of free blocks in secondary pool in units of 32 1O -word
blocks.

secsiz

Specifies the size of secondary pool in units of 32 1O -word blocks.

pctfr

Specifies the percentage of free blocks in secondary pool.

/SERIAL[ =tfnn:]

Causes unsolicited input from the specified terminal to be processed serially, rather than in
parallel.
Usually, if you enter a second command line before the first command line has completed
executing, the system processes the second command line in parallel with the first. When a
terminal is set to serial processing, however, the system waits until the first command line
is finished processing before starting the second.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-65

SET
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that process
serially.
The default is jNOSERIAL.
/NOSERIAL[=tfnn:]

Causes unsolicited input from the specified terminal to be processed in parallel rather than
serially. Parallel processing means that one or more command lines are processed at the
same time. This is the default.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that process in
parallel.
/SLAVE[=tfnn:]

Establishes the specified terminal as one that can enter data only if it is solicited by a
task. Therefore, the specified terminal always rejects unsolicited input (other than CTRLjO,
CTRLjQ, and CTRLjS).
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals currently classified
as slaved.
/NOSLAVE[=tfnn:]

Sets the specified terminal to nonslaved status. When you omit the terminal specification,
VMR displays all the terminals currently classified as nonslaved.
/SOFT[=tfnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal can accept software-defined character sets.
The VT200-series of terminals can accept these character sets. When you omit the terminal
specification, VMR displays all the terminals that accept software-defined character sets.
/NOSOFT[=tfnn:]

Informs the system that the specified terminal cannot accept software-defined character sets.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that do not accept
software-defined character sets.
/SPEED=tfnn:[recv:xmit]

Establishes the receive and transmit speed for terminals attached to the system through a
variable-speed multiplexer. The values are as follows:
recv

Specifies the speed at which characters are input to the computer from the terminal.
xmlt

Specifies the speed at which characters are output to the terminal from the computer.

5-66 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

SET
You must specify both the recv and xmit values when setting the speed. If you do not
specify either value, VMR displays the current settings.
For a list of valid baud rates, see Table 5-3. If you have a multiplexer that does not support
split speeds, the receive and transmit speeds must be the same.
/SWPC[=nn]

Defines the number of clock ticks for a single Executive swapping interval. (For a description
of swapping, see Chapter 1.)
The number of clock ticks nn is in the range 0 to 45,568 10 , The number of clock ticks is
assumed to be octal unless you place a period after the number.
When you omit the clock ticks specification, VMR displays the current value for the interval.
/SWPR[=nn]

Defines a priority range for Executive swapping.
Chapter 1.)

(For a description of swapping, see

The priority number nn is in the range 0 to 12710 , where 12710 is the highest priority and
o is the lowest priority. For example, a priority of 10010 takes precedence over a priority
of 99. The priority you enter is assumed to be octal unless you place a period after the
priority number.
The value for the /SWPR keyword affects the installed priority of all tasks. Each task
is initiated at its installed priority, plus the value for nn as assigned in /SWPR=nn
(priority + nn). While the task is executing, its priority is decremented until it becomes the
installed priority minus the value for nn (priority - nn). When the priority reaches this
lower limit, the task is swapped out so that another task with a higher priority can execute.
The priority for the new task changes in the same way.
When you omit the range specification, VMR displays the current value for the priority
range.
/SYSUIC[ =[ uic]]

Establishes the UIC for the system and all system tasks. The UIC has the format [g,m],
where g and m are octal numbers that represent a group and member number, respectively.
The UIC specified with the /SYSUIC keyword also becomes the default UIC used by the
LOAD command and the install-run-remove option of the MCR command RUN.
When you omit the UIC specification, VMR displays the current system UIC (by default,
[1,54]).

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-67

SET
/TERM=tfnn:[type]

Establishes the terminal type of the specified terminal. When VMR sets the terminal type,
it automatically sets the HFILL, VFILL, CRT, FORMFEED, and HHT characteristics for the
terminal. The standard terminal types are as follows:

Standard Terminal Types
ASR33

LA30P

LA50

LA2xx

VT50

VTlOl

VT132

ASR35

LA30S

LA75

LA2l0

VT52

VTl02

VT2xx

DTCOI

LA34

LAlOO

LQPOI/02/03 VT55

VTl05

LN03

KSR33

LA36

LA120

PC3xx

VT6l

VT125

LA12

LA38

LA180S

VT05B

VT100

VT13l

If you specify a terminal type that is unknown to VMR, VMR does not set any device

characteristics for the terminal. However, VMR stores the value you have specified in the
Unit Control Block (UCB). When you omit the type parameter, VMR displays the terminal
type of the specified terminal.
VMR also accepts an alternate form of the command. You can specify the terminal type
and equate it to the desired terminal. This automatically associates certain characteristics
of the particular terminal type with the specified terminal. (See the RSX-IIM-PLUS and
Micro/RSX I/O Drivers Reference Manual for a list of the implicit characteristics for each
terminal type.) The command is in the following format:
SET /term-type=ttnn:

The term-type parameter is one of the standard terminal types. Note that the terminal types
are mutually exclusive.
/TOP=pname:value

Directs VMR to move the top boundary of the specified partition up or down the amount
indicated by the value parameter.
The /TOP keyword modifies the top boundary of a partition even if the partition has tasks
installed in it. If you modify the partition so that it becomes too small to hold the tasks
installed in it, VMR displays a warning message but modifies the partition anyway.
pname

Specifies the 1- to 6-character alphanumeric partition name.
value

Specifies the number of 64-byte blocks.
The value can be supplied in five formats: +value, -value, value, +'" or "', and -"', as follows:

5-68 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-I1M-PLUS Systems Only)

SET

Format

Action

+value

Moves the partition's top boundary up by the specified amount. Moving the
partition's top boundary up makes the partition larger. Note that you must
supply the value in the same units as the base and size parameters for the /P AR
keyword.

-value

Moves the partition's top boundary down by the specified amount. Moving the
partition's top boundary down makes the partition smaller.

value

Moves the partition's top boundary until the partition's total size is equal to the
specified value.

+* or *

Moves the partition's top boundary up as far as possible. The most the top
boundary can move up is to the bottom boundary of the partition above it, or,
to the top of memory, if the partition is the last partition in memory.

Moves the partition's top boundary down as far as possible. The most the top
boundary can move down is to the top of the first fixed task, common, or driver
in the partition at the time the /TOP keyword is executed. If the partition is
available (unoccupied), it assumes a size of one 64-byte block.

/TTSYNC[=tfnn:]

Enables the terminal synchronization option for the specified terminal. This means that
the system responds to the CTRL/S and CTRL/Q characters used to control the flow of
information on the terminal screen, when you type them on the terminal. /TTSYNC is the
default.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that have terminal
synchronization.
/NOTTSYNC[=tfnn:]

Disables the terminal synchronization option for the specified terminal. The system will not
respond to the CTRL/S and CTRL/Q characters when you type them on the terminal.
If you set your terminal to /NOTTSYNC, the NO SCROLL key on VT100-series terminals
and the HOLD SCREEN key on VT200-series terminals will no longer work.

When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that do not have
terminal synchronization.
/TYPEAHEAD[ =ftnn:[ size])

Enables the type-ahead option for the specified terminal. The terminal driver stores input
characters in the type-ahead buffer before passing them to the task. When the type-ahead
option is enabled, characters input during periods between requests are not lost.
The size parameter applies only to operating systems that support kernel data space. It
specifies the size of the type-ahead buffer, which can be between 0 and 255 10 , However,
if you specify 0 or 1, the effect is the same as /NOTYPEAHEAD; the terminal does not
have the type-ahead option enabled. The default size is 66 on 1- and D-space systems. On
systems that do not include support for 1- and D-space, the size is fixed at 58.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that have the
type-ahead option enabled.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-69

SET
For more information on type-ahead buffers, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/O
Drivers Reference lvfanual.
/NOTYPEAHEAD[ =ttnn:]

Disables the type-ahead option for the specified terminal. The terminal driver does not
store characters to prevent their loss because the size of the buffer is forced to 1.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals that do not have
the type-ahead option enabled.
For more information on type-ahead buffers, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/O
Drivers Reference Manual.
/UIC[ =[ulc: ]ttnn:]

Establishes the specified User Identification code (UIC) as the default UIC for the specified
terminal (the default is the issuing terminal, TI:). A privileged user can override the terminal
UIC with the /UIC keyword of the RUN command.
External MCR function tasks are requested with the /UIC keyword. These tasks are the
MOUNT, INSTALL, DMO, and UFD commands (which execute as tasks), and all systemsupplied software.
When you specify only the terminal, VMR displays the UIC for that terminal.
/VFILL[=ttnn:]

Enables the vertical fill characters option for the specified terminal. The terminal driver
adds four fill characters following each line feed. When you omit the terminal specification,
VMR displays all the terminals on the system that have the VFILL option enabled.
/NOVFILL[ =ttnn:]

Disables the vertical fill characters option for the specified terminal. The terminal driver
does not add any vertical fill characters following line feeds. When you omit the terminal
specification, VMR displays all the terminals on the system that do not have the VFILL
option enabled.
/WCHK[=ddnn:]

Specifies that all write operations to Files-II devices are to be followed by a write-check.
The checks assure the reliability of data transfers to the specified disk. When you omit the
device specification, VMR displays all Files-II disk drives with write-checking enabled.
/NOWCHK[=ddnn:]

Specifies that write-checking is to be disabled for the specified device. When you omit the
device specification, VMR displays all disks that support write-checking but have the option
disabled.
/WRAP[ =ttnn:]

Enables the wraparound option for the specified terminal. The terminal driver automatically
generates a carriage-return/line-feed combination when the number of input characters
exceeds the buffer size of the specified terminal. Both the carriage return and line feed are
transparent and do not appear in the input buffer.

5-70 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

SET
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals on the system
that have the wraparound option enabled.
/NOWRAP[=ftnn:]

Disables the wraparound option for the specified terminal. The terminal driver does not
accept input characters beyond the input buffer size for the terminal.
When you omit the terminal specification, VMR displays all the terminals on the system
that have the wraparound option disabled.

Examples
VMR>~

Enables the autobaud detection option for terminal TT4.
VMR>
ABAUD=TT2:
ABAUD=TT4:
ABAUD=TT5:

Displays all the terminals that have the autobaud detection option enabled.
VMR>'

Informs the system that the VT100 terminal TT22 has the advanced video option.
VMR>

Enables local editing and block-mode transmission for the terminal TT3.
VMR>

Enables the broadcast option for terminal TT5.
VMR>
BRO=TT2:
BRO=TT4:
BRO=TT5:

Displays all the terminals that have the broadcast option enabled.
VMR>:
BUF=LPO: 132.

Displays the current buffer size of the hardcopy terminal LPO.
VMR>

Sets the buffer size of terminal TTl to 40 10 •
VMR>

Enables the backwards deletion option on the display terminal whose number is TT3.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-71

SET
VMR>
CRT=TT3:
CRT=TT7:
CRT=TT12:

Displays all the terminals that have the backwards deletion option enabled.
VMR>

Informs the system that terminal TTI0 is not upward compatible with the VT100-series of
terminals.
VMR>

Informs the system that terminal TT25 can perform ANSI-defined advanced editing functions.
VMR>

Establishes terminal TT3 as a terminal that can send and receive escape sequences.
VMR>
ESCSEQ=TT3:
ESCSEQ=TT7:
ESCSEQ=TT16:

Displays all the terminals that can send and receive escape sequences.
VMR>

Disables support of escape sequences for terminal TT3.
VMR>

Enables host-terminal synchronization for terminal TT22.
VMR>
VMR>
LA30S=TTO:
LA30S=TT2:

Sets TT2 as an LA30S terminal and then displays all the LA30S terminals.
VMR>
NETUIC=[20.3]

Displays the current network VIC.
VMR>

Sets the network VIC to [25,6].
VMR>

Enables I/O queue optimization for the device DMl, using the NEAR algorithm.

5-72 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

SET
VMR>
OPT=DBO:NEAR
OPT=DB1:NEAR
OPT=DMO:NEAR
OPT=DM1:NEAR

Displays all the disk devices that have I/O queue optimization enabled.
VMR>

Enables parity generation and checking for terminal TT15 and informs the system that if an
even number of bits are counted during data transmission, the transmission of data does not
return an error.
VMR>

Informs the system that it should ignore special characters typed at terminal TT22 and that it
should pass the characters to a program in their binary form.
VMR>
PLCTL=1600. :600. : 200. : 51.

Displays the current pool limit parameters used by the Pool Monitor Task (PMT).
VMR>

Informs the system that terminal TT22 has a printer port.
VMR>

Sets TTO to be a privileged terminal.
VMR>
PRIV=TTO:
PRIV=TT1:

Displays all privileged terminals.
VMR>

Informs the system that the terminal TT15 supports the ReGIS graphic character set.
VMR>

Sets the terminal line corresponding to TT21 as a remote dial-up line.
VMR>
REMOTE=TT1:
REMOTE=TT2:
REMOTE=TT3:
REMOTE=TT4:
REMOTE=TT21:

Displays all the terminals that are currently set as remote dial-up lines.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-73

SET
VMR>
RNDC=6.

Displays the current length of the round-robin scheduling interval.
VMR>

Sets the length of the round-robin scheduling interval to 10 lD ticks.
VMR>
SECPOL=285. :640:44%

Displays the amount of secondary pool currently being used.
VMR>

Sets TT3 to be a slaved terminal.
VMR>

Informs the system that terminal TT22 accepts software-defined character sets.
VMR>
SWPR=5.

Displays the current value for the Executive swapping priority range.
VMR>

Sets the Executive swapping priority range to 1OlD'
VMR>
Term=TT25:

VT100

Displays the terminal type of terminal TT25 as VT100.
VMR>

Requests the system to give terminal TT25 the same capabilities as a VT200-series terminal.
VMR>

Enables terminal synchronization for terminal TT22.
VMR>
VT05B=TT4:
VT05B=TT5:
VT05B=TT6:

Displays all VT05B terminals.
VMR>

Enables write-checking on device DKl.

5-74 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

SET
VMR>

Defines a partition called SYSP AR whose base address is 42000 8 and whose length is
14,000 8 bytes.
VMR>

Eliminates the main partition SYSP AR.
VMR>

Creates a partition named GEN, setting the base address as low as possible and making the
partition as large as possible.
VMR>

Establishes the top of pool.
VMR>
POOL=1200:11470. :11738. :2003

Shows that the last virtual address in the Executive is 120000, the longest free block is 11,470 10
words, and the total of all pool space is 11,738 10 words. The lowest physical address at which
a partition can start is 2003 (32-word blocks).

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-75

TAS
5.5. 17 TASKLIST
Use the TASKLIST (TAS) command to display a description of each installed task in the system.
The display contains several columns that list, from left to right, the following information:
•

Task name

•

Task version identification

•

Task Control Block (TCB) address

•

Partition name

•

Task priority

•

Size of task in bytes (in octal)

•

Load device identification

•

Disk address logical block number (in octal) on unsaved systems, or the image or task file
identification on saved systems

•

Task memory state (saved systems only)

The display lists the tasks installed in primary pool and then the tasks installed in secondary
pool. The tasks in secondary pool are indicated by a plus sign (+).

Format
TAS[KLIST] [taskname]

Parameter
taskname

Specifies the name of a single installed task, whose description you want displayed.

Examples
VMR>
TKTN
... MCR
MCR ...
... INS
... LOA
... UNL
VMR>

03.14
01.01
3.3
4
03.3
03.4

035300
035174
035070
035614
035510
035404

GEN
GEN
GEN
GEN
GEN
GEN

248.
160.
160.
100.
50.
50.

00010000
00040000
00010000
00040000
00040000
00040000

LBO:-00631420
LBO:-00630300
LBO:-00627721
LBO:-00627333
LBO:-00627643
LBO:-00070512

Illustrates an unsaved system.

5-76 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

TAS
VMR>
... LOR
TKTN
MTAACP
MCR ...
" .OCL
OCL ...
· .. MCR
... MOU
F11ACP
OBOOFl
COT ...
· .. OMO
· .. INI
... UFO
PMO ...
lIRC ...
SHF ...
FXR. "
... INS
· .. SAV
SAVTO
... PRV
... AT.
... BOO
· .. ACS
... HEL
VMR>

08.03
03.14
0010
3.3
0113A
0113A
01.01
23.00
M0320
M0320
XOO.Ol
23.00
20.01
V0410
3.1
01.01
03.01
01
4
04.35
04.35
4.30
04.25
04.08
01.1
01.25

034210
115424
115214
116464
115634
115530
036770
036250
117674
117570
117360
117254
116674
116044
114630
036560
115320
117104
116570
116254
036130
036664
037254
117464
115740
037360

SYSPAR
GEN
GEN
SYSPAR
GEN
GEN
GEN
GEN
GEN
GEN
GEN
GEN
GEN
GEN
GEN
GEN
SYSPAR
GEN
GEN
TSTPAR
TSTPAR
GEN
GEN
GEN
GEN
GEN

248. 00003000
248. 00010000
200. 00013500
160. 00010000
160. 00040000
160. 00010000
160. 00040000
160. 00040000
149. 00065700
149. 00065700
145. 00015400
140. 00040000
140. 00040000
140. 00040000
140. 00023600
140. 00050400
105. 00010000
100. 00003100
100. 00027700
100.00040000
100. 00040000
100. 00040000
65. 00057700
50. 00040000
50. 00040000
50. 00044100

LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:-

FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE

IO:(1111.12) FIXEO
IO:(31540.27)
IO:(31461.24)
IO:(31454.12)
IO:(31344.53)
IO:(31345.5)
IO:(30546.34)
IO:(5424.15)
IO:(30101.47)
IO:(31370.6)
IO:(31336.120)
IO:(31346.23)
IO:(31424.55)
IO:(31541.34)
IO:(31464.70)
IO:(31240.21)
IO:(31521.40)
IO:(31371.113)
IO:(31435.12)
IO:(31475.5)
IO:(31475.5)
IO:(3433.163)
IO:(31421.131)
IO:(31323.6)
IO:(~1321.73)

IO:(31416.15)

Illustrates a saved system. The display for a saved system differs from the display for an
unsaved system in that the file ID of the task file, rather than the logical block number, is
displayed. FIXED indicates that the task is fixed in memory.
VMR>

BAPO
QMG ...
LPO
LPl
SHC ...
SHUTUP

· .. OMO
... MCR
... MOU
... OCL

02
1. 7
1. 9
1. 9
Ol.0l
02
23.20
2.4
2502
00

113440 GEN
112450 GEN
112734 ·GEN
112604 GEN
110600 GEN
110320 GEN
006025+ GEN
006037+ GEN
006041+ GEN
006130+ GEN

80. 00045700
75. 00031400
70. 00015400
70. 00015400
60. 00051700
50.00011200
160. 00015500
160. 00032000
160. 00040000
160. 00035600

LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:LBO:-

FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE
FILE

IO: (4332.27)
IO:(4366.2)
IO:(4354.135)
IO:(4354.135)
IO:(4360.2)
IO:(4320.65)
IO:(4167.35)
IO:(2132.227)
IO: (4205.13)
IO:(2535.1525)

VMR>

This example is from an RSX-I1M-PLUS saved system that has tasks installed in secondary
pool.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-77

TIM
5.5.18 TIME
Use the TIME (TIM) command to set the date and time or to display the date and time. The
TIME command has two formats.
Formats
TIM[E] [hrs:mins[:secs]] [m1/day/year]
TIM[E] [hrs:mins[:secs]] [day-m2-year]

Parameters
hrs

Specifies hours (range 0 to 23).
mins

Specifies minutes (range 0 to 59).
secs

Specifies seconds (range 0 to 59). This parameter is optional; the default is zero.
ml

Specifies the numeric representation of month (range 1 to 12).
m2

Specifies the 3-letter abbreviation for month.
day

Specifies the day (range 1 to 31).
year

Specifies the year (range 0 to 99). The year is relative to 1900; therefore, 1987 is entered
as 87.
Notes
1. You can specify the time and date in any order.

2. If you specify the time and the date, VMR sets the system image clock and calendar.
3. If you specify the time but not the date, VMR only sets the clock.
4. If you specify the date but not the time, VMR only sets the calendar.
5. If you don't specify a time or date, VMR displays the current system image time and date.
6. The form used to specify the date does not affect the display format. The date is always
displayed as day-month-year.
7. All numeric values are decimal. No terminating period is required.

5-78 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

TIM
Examples
VMR>
10:23:31 21-JUN-87

Displays the current system image time and date.
VMR>

Sets the time to 14:30:00 and the date to 24-JUN-87.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-79

UNF
5.5. 19 UNFIX
Use the UNFIX (UNF) command to free a fixed task from the virtual memory of the system
image. The UNFIX command is the complement of the FIX command.
If a fixed task exits or aborts, it still occupies the physical memory in the partition.

Format
UNF[IX] taskname[/keyword]

Keywords
IREG
IRON
Parameter
taskname

Specifies the task that you want to unfix from memory.
Keyword Descriptions
IREG
Specifies that the task to be unfixed is a common region.
IRON
Specifies that the read-only segment of a task is to be unfixed from memory.
Example
VMR>

Unfixes task XKE, which frees the partition in which it resides.

5-80 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

UNL
5.5.20 UNLOAD
Use the UNLOAD (UNL) command to remove a loadable device driver from the system image.
If a device is attached, however, its driver cannot be unloaded.
To unload a device driver from the system image, the driver's symbol definition file must reside
on LB: under the same directory as the directory of the system image file. By default, the system
directory is [1,54]; the library directory is [3,54].
The UNLOAD command cannot remove a loadable database from the system image, even if
the database was loaded by means of the LOAD command.
Format
UNL[OAD] dd: [/VEC]

Parameters
dd:

Specifies a 2-character ASCII device name. This is a required parameter.

jVEC
Specifies that the driver to be unloaded is vectored.

Vectoring is a technique for building a portable device driver. You can load a vectored
driver into any RSX-11M-PLUS or MicrojRSX operating system that has the same version
number as the system on which the driver was built. However, you must specify the jVEC
keyword to suppress the validation of the Executive symbol table files used in the driver.
jVEC avoids the comparison of the driver symbol table file and the Executive symbol table
file.
For more information on vectored device drivers, see the RSX-11M-PLUS and MicrojRSX
I j 0 Drivers Reference Manual.
Example
VMR>

Unloads the line printer driver (LPDRV).

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 5-81

5.6 VMR Error Messages
This section contains explanations for VMR error messages. Error messages can appear in one
of the following formats:

Format 1: Diagnostic Error Messages
VMR -- *DIAG* message

A diagnostic error message usually indicates that something unexpected happened, but that the
error did not interfere with VMR's operation.

Format 2: Unmarked Error Messages
VMR -- message

An unmarked error message usually indicates that VMR rejected the command line. If the
command line that caused the error is in an indirect command file, VMR ignores the rejected
line and attempts to execute the remaining command lines.

Format 3: Fatal Error Messages
VMR -- *FATAL* message

A fatal error message indicates that VMR rejected the command line and that VMR has either
exited or reset itself to the beginning (that is, VMR redisplays the Enter filename: prompt).
If the command line that caused the error is in an indirect command file, VMR exits without
attempting to execute the remaining command lines.
The following explanations for error messages contain the text of the error message, but not the
format. They are in alphabetical order.
VMR-Access to common block denied

Explanation: You attempted to install a task that has specified illegal access to a shared
region.

User Action: Enter the command from a User Identification Code (UIC) that has the necessary
access privileges.
VMR-Addressing extensions not supported

Explanation: You attempted to install a task that was built, using the virtual section (VSECT)
directive, into a system image that does not support the VSECT feature.
User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.
VMR-Alignment error

Explanation: The base address or size of the partition being created with the SET command
conflicts with existing partitions or physical memory.
User Action: Create the partition with a different base address.

5-82 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

VMR-Base address must be on a 4K boundary

Explanation: The virtual base address of the task being installed is not aligned on a 4K
boundary.

User Action: Rebuild the task for the correct starting address; then, reenter the command.
VMR-Base mismatch common block

Explanation: The base address of the partition does not match the address of the common
block. The task image is probably built against a different version of the common than the
common currently installed in the system.
User Action: Rebuild the task against the current version of the common. Then, reenter the
command.
VMR-Bus switch not loaded

Explanation: You attempted to load a device that requires a bus run before you loaded the
bus switch driver (BS:).
User Action: Load the bus switch driver (BS:); then, reenter the command.
VMR-Cannot fix an I/O space task

Explanation: You attempted to fix a task that is built with instruction and data space.
User Action: No user action is required. These tasks cannot be fixed.
VMR-Cannot have multiple pool or CPU partitions

Explanation: You attempted to create the secondary pool partition SECPOL in a system that
already has a SECPOL partition.
User Action: No user action is required. There can be only one SECPOL partition in a
system. (However, you can load additional secondary pool space into memory by creating
secondary pool subpartitions in the GEN partition. For more information, see Chapter 8.)
VMR-Cannot install shared region with increment

Explanation: You specified both the jINC=size and the jWB=YES keywords when installing
a common. When a common is installed with an increment, it will no longer fit in its
original task image file; therefore, you cannot have the common written back into its task
image file (jWB=YES).
User Action: Install the common with either the jINC=size keyword or the jWB=YES
keyword.
VMR-Cannot install tasks or commons from other than LB:

Explanation: SAVE does not allow saving of a system that has tasks andj or commons that
were not installed from the library device LB:.

User Action: No user action is required. A task or common cannot be installed from a device
other than LB:.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-83

VMR-Cannot load/unload a pseudo device

Explanation: The device you attempted to load is a pseudo device. Pseudo devices do not
have device drivers.
User Action: When you load or unload a device driver, specify the physical name of the
driver.
VMR-Cannot unfix a mapped common region

Explanation: You attempted to unfix a common region that is currently mapped by a task.
User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.
VMR-Cannot unfix the directive common

Explanation: Because directive commons are merged with DIRIIM as they are fixed, the size
of a particular common is unknown.

User Action: No user action is required. Directive commons can be removed but not unfixed.
VMR-Checkpoint area too small

Explanation: The area allocated for checkpointing in the task image file is smaller than the
partition into which the task is being installed. The system image does not support the
dynamic allocation of checkpoint space.

User Action: Allocate additional checkpoint space by rebuilding the task with the Task
Builder (TKB) switch / AL. (For more information, see the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX
Task Builder Manual.)
VMR-Checkpoint space too small, using checkpoint file

Explanation: The checkpoint space allocated in the task image file is too small to hold the
task (usually because of the /INe keyword). The system image supports the dynamic
allocation of checkpoint space. It will use the checkpoint file to store the task when it rolls
it out to disk.

User Action: No user action is required. This is a warning message.
VMR-Circular redirect error

Explanation: The attempt to redirect a device failed because it would result in a circular
device list.

User Action: Redirect the device to a different device.
VMR-Command I/O error

Explanation: The system detected an I/O error while the command line was being read.
This error may indicate that pool has been depleted.

User Action: Reenter the command. If necessary, wait until pool is restored; then, reenter
the command.

5-84 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

VMR-Command line too long

Explanation: The command line is longer than 13210 characters.
User Action: Reenter the command line with fewer characters.
VMR-Command syntax error

Explanation: The syntax of the command line is incorrect. The incorrect part of the command
line is enclosed in brackets.
User Action: Reenter the command line with the correct command line format.
VMR-Common block currently installed

Explanation: You attempted to install a common block that has already been installed.
User Action: Be sure you specified the correct name for the common block. If so, no further
action is necessary.
VMR-Common block is task partition

Explanation: A task's request for access to a common block has been rejected because the
requested partition is a task partition. This error usually occurs when there is an error in
the task source code or when two tasks use the same name.
User Action: Modify the code to correct the error or to specify a different task name.
VMR-Common block not loaded < commonname >

Explanation: The common block specified by VMR in the error message has been linked to
the task, but the common block has not been installed yet.

User Action: Install the common block, and then install the task.
VMR-Common block parameter mismatch

Explanation: Parameters of a common block did not match those in the task's label block.
This error occurs when you attempt to run a task with either an older or a more recent
version of a common.

User Action: Rebuild the task with the common; then, reenter the RUN command.
VMR-CTB < name> does not exist

Explanation: The Controller Table Block (CTB) name that you specified with the LOAD
JCTB keyword does not exist in the resident database.

User Action: Reenter the command with the correct CTB name.
VMR-CTB name < name> is a duplicate

Explanation: The loadable database contains a CTB with a name that is the same as a CTB
name in the resident database. CTB names must be unique.
User Action: Rename the CTB in the loadable database; then, reload the database.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-85

VMR-CTB < name> not supported by driver-not loaded

Explanation: This is a warning message.
following reasons:

VMR displays this message for either of the

•

The Driver Dispatch Table (DDT) in the driver does not have all the CTB mnemonics
that the rest of the database (that is, Data Control Blocks (DCBs) and CTBs) implies that
it should have.

•

The CTB is defective. A defective CTB may contain a wrong name or it may point at
the wrong DCB.

User Action: Reenter the command with the correct CTB name.
VMR-Data space file exceeds available space in system image

Explanation: The RSXIIM.5YS file is not large enough to contain the Executive data-space
image file DSPIIM.TSK.
This message applies only to systems with separate Executive instruction and data space.

User Action: Create a larger system image file with the PIP switch /BL or the COPY
command qualifier /BLOCK_SIZE, as follows:
MCR>
DCL>
VMR-DCB table for CTB is full

Explanation: LOAD attempted to write the address of the Device Control Block (DCB) of the
loadable database into the DCB table of the Controller Table for a multicontroller device.
There were no null entries in the DCB table.

User Action: For more information on DCB tables, see the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX
Guide to Writing an I/O Driver.
VMR-Deferred binding not supported

Explanation: You specified the /DFB=YES keyword with the INSTALL command, but the
system does not support deferred binding.

User Action: Reenter the command without the /DFB keyword.
VMR-Devlce < ddnn: > is attached

Explanation: You attempted to unload a driver that has one or more of its device units
attached. The first attached unit is ddnn. You cannot unload a driver that has device units
attached.
User Action: Specify a different device or wait for the task to complete; then, reenter the
command.

5-86 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

VMR-Devlce Is not In system

Explanation: VMR displays this message for any of the following reasons:
•

You attempted to save an image on a device that does not exist on the host system.

•

You attempted to redirect I/O requests to a device that does not exist on the host
system.

•

You specified a device in the LOAD command line for which there is no database. This
is caused by one of the following two conditions:
The device does not exist in the system device tables.
You did not declare the device to be loadable; therefore, LOAD cannot find a
loadable database for it.

•

You specified a device in the command line that has not been defined in the system
image.

•

You specified a device in the DEVICES command line that does not exist in the system
image.

User Action: Reenter the command with either the name of a device that is known to the
system or the correct control and status register (CSR) address for the device.
VMR-Device not mounted

Explanation: You failed to mount the device that contains the system image file.
User Action: Mount the system device and reenter the command.
VMR-Device not redirectable

Explanation: You attempted to redirect a device that is not redirectable (according to the
Unit Control Block (UCB) for the device).
User Action: Reenter the command with a valid device name.
VMR-Device not terminal

Explanation: You attempted to set terminal characteristics for a device that is not a terminal.
User Action: Use the MCR command DEV to obtain a list of valid terminal names; then,
reenter the command with one of the names listed.
VMR-Devlce not variable speed multiplexer

Explanation: You attempted to set the speed for a terminal that is not attached to a variablespeed multiplexer (such as DHVll or DZVll).
User Action: No user action is required. You cannot set the baud rate for a terminal that is
not attached to variable-speed multiplexer.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-87

VMR-Oirective common not contiguous to OIR 11 M

Explanation: The directive commons were not installed contiguous to DIRIIM.
User Action: Install all the directive commons sequentially (that is, install DIRIIM first, then
DR211M, then DR311M, and so on). Do not install other common regions between the
directive commons.
For an example of how to load the directive commons, see the SYSVMRCMD file in
directory [1,54] on the pseudo device LB:.
VMR-Oirective common(s) not installed

Explanation: Not all of the directive commons were installed in the system image.
User Action: Install the commons. Then, fix them in memory.
VMR-Oriver already resident

Explanation: You attempted to load an already loaded device driver or one that is
permanently resident in the system image.
User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message.
VMR-Oriver built with wrong executive STB file

Explanation: The symbol definition file for the driver you attempted to load or unload is
not compatible with the Executive symbol definition file for the current system image. This
means that the driver has been built for another system and must be rebuilt before you can
load it into the current system.
User Action: Task build the driver again with the correct RSXIIM.STB file.
VMR-Oriver cannot be unloaded

Explanation: You attempted to unload a permanently resident driver (that is, a driver linked
permanently to the Executive).
User Action: No user action is required. Only loadable drivers can be removed.
VMR-Oriver dispatch table is inconsistent

Explanation: You attempted to load a driver with an illegally formatted DDT.
User Action: For information on formatting the DDT, refer to the RSX-llM-PLUS and
Micro/RSX Guide to Writing an I/O Driver.
VMR-Oriver not loaded

Explanation: In the UNLOAD command line, you specified a driver that is not resident in
memory.

User Action: Before you initialize or mount the device, load the device driver.

5-88 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

VMR-Driver requires running system for load/unload

Explanation: The driver you requested has the symbols $ddLOA or $ddUNL in its source.
Support of driver load/unload calls can be provided only by the MCR commands LOAD
and UNLOAD.
User Action: For information on the MCR commands LOAD and UNLOAD, see the
RSX-IIM-PLUS MCR Operations Manual.
VMR-Executive too large

Explanation: The Executive is too large to be accommodated in the system image. This
message indicates that the Executive is larger than 20K.
User Action: No user action is required. The system is unusable.
VMR-External headers not supported

Explanation: You attempted to install a task built with external headers in a system that was
not generated with external header support.
User Action: Include external header support during system generation or by modifying the
command file INSBLD.CMD. If you cannot include external header support, then enter the
INSTALL command without specifying /XHR=YES.
VMR-Fast map not supported

Explanation: You attempted to install a task with the /FMAP=YES keyword, without having
first selected support for fast mapping during system generation.
User Action: Install the task with the /FMAP=NO keyword.
VMR-Feature not supported in system image

Explanation: The command you entered requires a feature that is not currently supported
by the system.
User Action: Select support for the desired feature during system generation.
VMR-File < name> has illegal STB format

Explanation: The driver's symbol definition file contains illegal object code or data record
format.

User Action: Check and rebuild the driver; then, reenter the command.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-89

VMR-File has inconsistent data

Explanation: This error can occur for the following reasons:
•

You attempted to fix a partition or a task that is logically beyond the end of the system
image file.

•

The partition for loadable drivers is logically beyond the end of the system image file.
The system image is probably corrupt.

•

The partition of the common library you are attempting to load is logically beyond the
end of the system image file.

These problems indicate that either the system image file is too small or the organization
of the partitions within the system image file is incorrect.

User Action: Use the PAR command to examine the partitions. Also, check the size of the
system image file RSXIIM.SYS. If necessary, create a larger system image file with the PIP
switch IBL or the COpy command qualifier IBLOCK_SIZE, as follows:
MeR>

VMR-File < name> not a valid driver task image

Explanation: The driver's task image is invalid for one of the following reasons:
•

The driver's task image has been overlaid.

•

The driver has a header.

•

The driver has referenced a resident library.

User Action: Rebuild the driver. To ensure that the task image is valid, follow the guidelines
in the RSX-IIM-PLUS and MicrolRSX Guide to Writing an liD Driver.
VMR-File not contiguous

Explanation: You attempted to install a task or to load a device driver from a noncontiguous
file.

User Action: To produce a contiguous file, use the DCL command COpy ICONTIGUOUS
or the Peripheral Interchange Program (PIP) switch ICO. Then, reenter the command. (For
information on the COpy command, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS Command Language Manual.
For information on PIP, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS Utilities Manual.)
VMR-File not found

Explanation: You requested a file not located in the directory of the volume you specified.
User Action: Use the PIP switch ILl to obtain a directory listing. Reenter the command
with the correct file specification.

5-90 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

VMR-File not task image

Explanation: The data in the label block of the task you tried to install is incorrect, which
indicates that the file is not a task image.
User Action: Reenter the command with the correct name for the task image file. If the task
image is corrupt, modify and rebuild the task, or use another version of the task image.
VMR-lIIegal device/volume

Explanation: You attempted to save your system image on an invalid device.
User Action: Reenter the command with a valid device name. (For a list of valid devices,
see Section 5.5.15.)
VMR-Illegal driver task APR usage

Explanation: The device driver being loaded must be built for Active Page Register (APR) 5
and must be less than or equal to 4K words.
User Action: Rebuild the driver correctly.
VMR-lilegal error severity code

Explanation: This message indicates an internal failure in VMR.
User Action: If this error persists, submit a DIGITAL Software Performance Report (SPR).
VMR-lilegal ftle speciftcation

Explanation: The file specification is incorrect or contains wildcards.
User Action: Reenter the command with a valid file specification.
VMR-lilegal ftrst APR

Explanation: The task you tried to install was built using an incorrect base APR.
User Action: Rebuild the task and observe the following rules:
•

A nonprivileged task must be built with APR 0 as its base APR.

•

A privileged task that does not map into the Executive must be built with APR 0 as its
base APR.

•

If the Executive is 16K words or less, a privileged task that is to map to the Executive

routines and data structures must be built with APR 4 as its base APR.
•

If the Executive is 20K words, (or less on RSX-IIM-PLUS systems), a privileged task

that is to map to the Executive routines and data structures must be built with APR 5
as its base APR.
VMR-lIIegal function

Explanation: You entered a command that VMR does not recognize, or the command line
refers to a feature that is not supported in the system. You may have entered the command
line incorrectly.
User Action: Reenter the command with the correct command syntax.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-91

VMR-Illegal Get Command Line

Explanation: This message indicates a system faiiure .
. User Action: If the error persists, submit an SPR.
VMR-lilegal keyword value

Explanation: You entered a value for a keyword that is out of range.
User Action: Reenter the command line with a valid keyword.
VMR-lilegal priority

Explanation: You specified an invalid priority for the task.
User Action: Specify a priority value between 1 and 250, where 250 is the highest priority
and 1 is the lowest priority. A priority is assumed to be octal unless you put a period after
the priority number.
VMR-lilegal slave attribute

Explanation: You attempted to install a task with the ISL V keyword, but the task's name is
in the form ... xxx.
User Action: No user action is required. The task is a prototype task and cannot be installed
as a slaved task.
VMR-lilegal switch

< switch>

Explanation: The switch following the error message is incorrect in the context of the
command line you have entered.
User Action: Reenter the command line with the correct switch.
VMR-lIlegal use of partition or common

Explanation: You attempted to install a task in a central processing unit (CPU) partition
(CPUP AR) or secondary pool partition (SECPOL). Although you can install a task with
its Task Control Block (TCB) in secondary pool, the task itself cannot be installed in the
secondary pool partition.
User Action: Install the task in a partition other than CPUP AR or SECPOL.
VMR-lilegal use of partition or region

Explanation: You attempted to load a driver into a common or secondary pool partition.
User Action: Reenter the command with a different partition.

5-92 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

VMR-lliegal value for symbol in file

Explanation: The symbol symname is defined to an illegal value in file ddDRV.STB. This
can occur for several reasons, some general and some specific to individual symbols. For
example:
•

Symbols cannot have odd values.

•

Most symbols cannot be defined as zero.

•

The $ddTBL symbol must exist and have a value less than $ddEND.

•

Mapped loadable drivers cannot reference $INTSV.

Since ddDRV.5TB had to pass a previous inspection by the LOA command, there probably
has been a procedural error or ddDRV.STB has been corrupted.

User Action: See the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX Guide to Writing an I/O Driver for more
information.
VMR-Incorrect assignment of SY: or LB:

Explanation: The device SY: or LB: is not assigned to the same device as the system image
file you are trying to work with in VMR.
User Action: No user action is required. This is a warning message.
VMR-Indirect command syntax error

Explanation: You entered an invalid indirect command file specification.
User Action: Reenter the command line with the correct indirect command file specification.
VMR-Indirect file depth exceeded

Explanation: You attempted to reference more than two levels of indirect command files.
User Action: No user action is required. VMR is limited to two levels of nesting.
VMR-Indirect file open failure

Explanation: The indirect command file specified in the command line could not be opened.
User Action: Check to see that the specified file exists and is not locked.
VMR-Install device not LBO:

Explanation: You attempted to install a task from other than the boot device.
User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.
VMR-Installed tasks or commons may no longer fit in partition

Explanation: You shortened a partition so that the tasks and/or commons that are installed
in it may no longer fit. VMR shortens the partition even though this situation exists.
User Action: No user action is required. This is a warning message.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-93

VMR-Interrupt vector already in use

Explanation: The interrupt vector for the device driver being loaded is already being used
by another driver. (VMR assumes a vector is in use if it does not point to one of the
nonsense-interrupt entry points in the system image.)
User Action: Reenter the eON command with a valid vector address (that is, an address
that is not currently being used).
VMR-Invalid driver database at offset xxxx in tile

Explanation: The driver name has an invalid database value at offset xxxx relative to the
symbol $ddDAT. This can occur for one of the following reasons:
•

An invalid value, for example, D.VeB was odd.

•

The value for a word is not within the bounds of the loadable database. LOAD produces
an error message citing the offending value.

•

An element is missing from the loadable database. LOAD attempts to verify one kind
of data structure as another kind. For example, if a DeB is missing, LOAD tries to
verify the following VeB as the DeB. LOAD cites the DeB as being incorrect.

User Action: See the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX Guide to Writing an I/O Driver.
VMR-Invalid interrupt vector

Explanation: You specified an interrupt vector address in the driver database that is too high
in memory for the system image.
User Action: Reenter the command with a lower vector address.
VMR-Invalid keyword

Explanation: You specified a keyword that is incorrect in the context of the command.
User Action: Reenter the command line with the correct keyword.
VMR-Invalld record address for file

Explanation: LOAD attempted to write outside of the system image file or at a byte boundary.
This error may be caused by either a corrupted system image or an STB file that does not
match the system image.

User Action: If the problem is due to a corrupted system image, create a new system image
file and run VMR again. If the problem is due to an incorrect STB file, locate the correct
STB file before you create the new system image file.

5-94 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

VMR-Invalld speed

Explanation: VMR displays this message for either of the following reasons:
•

You requested a speed that the multiplexer line you specified does not support.

•

You specified unequal receive and transmit speeds for a multiplexer that does not
support split-speeds.

User Action: Reenter the command with a speed that is supported by the corresponding
multiplexer.
VMR-Invalld time parameter

Explanation: The time field you specified in the RUN command line is incorrect.
User Action: Reenter the command with the time in hours and minutes (for example, 13:00
for 1:00 P.M.).
VMR-Invalld ule

Explanation: You specified an illegal value for either a group number or a member number.
User Action: Reenter the command with group and member numbers between- 1 and 3778 ,
VMR-I/O error on Input file

Explanation: An input I/O error occurred on the indicated file. Either the file is corrupted
or the device is damaged.
User Action: Check the device; if necessary, use another device. If the device is functioning
properly, but the error persists, the file is probably corrupted. If possible, use the Backup
and Restore Utility (BRU) to restore a copy of the file.
VMR-I/O error on output device

Explanation: SAVE has encountered an I/O error on the output device while writing the
system image. This is a hardware-related problem.
User Action: Correct the problem with the output device drive. Then, create a new system
image file and run VMR again.
VMR-I/O error on output file

Explanation: An output I/O error occurred on the indicated file. The device drive may be
damaged or the file may be corrupt.
User Action: Correct the problem with the output device drive or use new media. Then,
create a new system image file and run VMR again.
VMR-KRB Interrupt vector In use

Explanation: You attempted to load a driver that specifies an interrupt vector that is not
pointing to a nonsense-interrupt entry point address. This is usually caused by a previously
loaded driver that has used this vector.
User Action: No user action is required. When you receive this message, LOAD has loaded
the driver correctly, but it has not overwritten the interrupt vector.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-95

VMR-KRB interrupt vector too high

Explanation: You attempted to load a driver that specifies an interrupt vector address that is
higher than the highest permissible vector address in the system.
User Action: No user action is required. When you get this message, LOAD has loaded the
driver correctly, but it has not overwritten the interrupt vector.
VMR-KRB

not in loadable database

Explanation: You attempted to load the driver for a multicontroller device with a loadable
database. The special symbol (KRBname) that defines the location of the Controller Request
Block (KRB) in the multicontroller device's CTB table is not defined in the loadable database.
User Action: For more information on the special symbol KRB, refer to the RSX-IIM-PLUS
and Micro/RSX Guide to Writing an I/0 Driver.
VMR-KRB table of CTB will not accept KRB

Explanation: You attempted to load the driver for a multicontroller device with a loadable
database. If this operation is to succeed, then the following conditions must exist:
•

The appropriate slot in the CTB must exist.

•

The slot in the CTB must be unused.

When VMR issues this error message, one of these conditions has not been met.

User Action: See the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX Guide to Writing an I/0 Driver.
VMR-Length mismatch common block

Explanation: The length parameter for the common block, as described in the label block for
the task image, does not match the corresponding length parameter defined in the system
image. A task's label block data must match system data for that task before it can be
installed.

User Action: Rebuild the task and then install it.
VMR-Loadable driver larger than 4K

Explanation: This is a warning message.

You are loading a driver that is larger than

4K words.

User Action: Make sure your driver is written to map the additional 4K words of memory
when needed.
VMR-Loadable driver support not in system

Explanation: You attempted to load a device into a system image that does not contain the
Executive routine $INTSI. The routine is needed to support loadable device drivers.
User Action: Include support for loadable device drivers during system generation. For more
information, see the RSX-llM-PLUS System Generation and Installation Guide.

5-96 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

VMR-Loglcal device not In system

Explanation: The device you specified has not been defined and therefore ASSIGN could
not find it in the logical device assignment table.
User Action: Use the DFL command to define the logical device name; then, reenter the
command.
VMR-LUN out of range

Explanation: You attempted to reassign a logical unit number (LUN) for a task that is higher
than the maximum number of LUNs allocated for the task when it was built.

User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.
VMR-No checkpoint space, assuming not checkpointable

Explanation: This is a warning message. You attempted to install a task as checkpointable,
but the task was not built as checkpointable and therefore had no checkpoint space allocated
in the task image file. Because the system image does not support the dynamic allocation
of checkpoint space, INSTALL does not consider the task to be checkpointable.
User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message.
VMR-No checkpoint space or dynamic checkpoint ftle

Explanation: You attempted to install a task built with external headers or as checkpointable,
but the task does not have any checkpoint space and the system does not have a checkpoint
file.
User Action: Reenter the command without the /XHR=YES or /CKP=YES keywords.
VMR-No

Ica pool

space for CPU

< cpu>

Explanation: The Interrupt Control Block (ICB) pool space required to load the device driver
has been exhausted. The ICB space allocated during system generation for the specified
central processing unit (CPU) may be insufficient for your application. However, note that
more ICB space will become available during the system startup procedure.

User Action: Load the device driver during the system startup procedure (when more ICB
space is available), or run the system generation procedure again and specify a larger ICB
pool.
VMR-No LUNs

Explanation: The task that you specified as an argument of the LUN command does not
have any logical units assigned to it.

User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message; it indicates that
there are no assignments to display.
VMR-No pool space

Explanation: The pool space required to load the driver is not available in the system image.
User Action: Wait for pool to be restored; then, reenter the command.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-97

VMR-No room available In STO for new task

Explanation: There is no dynamic storage available to make an entry in the System Task
Directory (STD).

User Action: No user action is required. The task cannot be installed.
VMR-No table space for optional directive common

Explanation: You attempted to fix a directive common in the RSX-11M-PLUS system image,
but the extra table space built into the system database for optional directive commons has
already been used. You may have loaded the directive commons incorrectly.
User Action: Install all the directive commons sequentially (that is, install DIR11M first, then
DR211M, then DR311M, and so on). Do not install other common regions between the
directive commons.
For an example of how to load the directive commons, see the SYSVMR.CMD file in
directory [1,54] on the pseudo device LB:.
VMR-Nonexlstent memory

Explanation: You attempted to define a partition in nonexistent memory.
User Action: Reenter the command with valid memory addresses.
VMR-Not enough APRs for task Image

Explanation: The Task Builder (TKB) allows you to specify, as a multiple of 4K, the virtual
base address of a task image. Privileged tasks that access the Executive start at either virtual
address 1000008 for a 16K Executive or at virtual address 120000 8 for a 20K Executive. If
the virtual base address of the task is set too high, there are not enough APRs remaining
to map the task image. (See the RSX-I1M-PLUS and Micro/RSX Task Builder Manual for
information on privileged tasks.)
User Action: Reset the virtual base address of the task image; then, reenter the command. For
information on setting the virtual base address for privileged tasks, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS
and Micro/RSX Task Builder Manual.
VMR-Old device attached

Explanation: You attempted to redirect an attached device.
User Action: Wait until the device is no longer attached; then, reenter the command.
VMR-Open failure on file

Explanation: The indicated file cannot be opened.
User Action: Check to see that the specified file exists and is not locked.
VMR-Operatlon cannot extend above first 124K of memory

Explanation: You attempted to create with the SET command a CPU partition whose upper
limit is above 124K words.

User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.

5-98 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

VMR-Operatlon not allowed for partitions

Explanation: You attempted a SET operation that is not allowed for the type of partition
specified in the error message.
User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.
VMR-Optlonal directive common successfully loaded

Explanation: VMR has successfully fixed in the system image a directive common that is not
one of the commons required by RSX-11M-PLUS.
User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message.
VMR-Partltlon already exists

Explanation: You attempted to define a partition, using the SET command, with a name
already in use as a partition name.
User Action: Reenter the command with a unique partition name.
VMR-Partltlon or common region Is busy

Explanation: VMR displays this message for the following reasons:
•

You attempted to fix a task or common region in a partition that is full. The task or
region cannot be fixed.

•

You attempted to load a device driver into a partition, but the partition is full.

•

You attempted to remove a partition that still has tasks installed in it. The partition
cannot be removed.

•

You attempted to remove a region that is referenced by tasks installed in the system.

User Action: To free the occupied memory partition, use the UNFIX or REMOVE command
(see Sections 5.5.19 or 5.5.13, respectively). Then, reenter the command with the name of
the task you want to fix or remove.
VMR-Partltlon Is a common

Explanation: You attempted to load a device driver into a common partition.
User Action: Load the device driver into a different partition.
VMR-Partitlon is not a common

Explanation: Partition

< pname >

was found, but it is not a common partition.

User Action: Define the partition as a common partition; then, reenter the command.
VMR-Partitlon < pname > is too small

Explanation: You attempted to load the driver into a partition that is either too small for the
driver or that does not currently have enough space for the driver. Or, you attempted to
install a task that is too large for the specified partition.
User Action: Load the driver into a different partition, or create more room in the partition
by removing drivers, commons, or fixed tasks.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 5-99

VMR-Partition < pname > not in system

Explanation: VMR displays this message for either of the following reasons:
•

The partition you specified in the command line is not in the system image.

•

You attempted to load a driver into a partition that does not exist in the system, or
LOAD found a symbol $xxCOM in the driver and partition xxCOM does not exist in
the system.

User Action: Install the partition before you attempt to load the driver.
VMR-Partition not In system, defaulting to GEN

Explanation: You attempted to install a task in a partition that does not exist. VMR will try
to install the task in the partition GEN.
User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message.
VMR-Partitlon reduced to executive common size

Explanation: When an Executive common is installed in its partition, the partition is reduced
to the top of the common to eliminate any unused space in the partition.
User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message.
VMR-Pool link error at xxxx Block=yyyy zzzz

Explanation: When SET /POOL traced the pool linkage, it detected an error at location xxxx
in the system image. The contents of xxxx is yyyy and the contents of xxxx+2 is zzzz.
User Action: The system image file is corrupted. Create a new system image file and run
VMR again.
VMR-Privileged task overmaps I/O page

Explanation: A privileged task that may need access to the I/O page does not have that
access. This message occurs if the task is installed with the /IOP=YES option.
User Action: Install the task without the /IOP=YES option.
VMR-Pseudo device assignment error

Explanation: You attempted to assign a logical device name to a pseudo device.
User Action: No user action is required. Logical device names cannot be assigned to pseudo
devices.
VMR-Pseudo device redirect error

Explanation: You attempted to redirect one pseudo device to another pseudo device.
User Action: No user action is required. This is not allowed.

5-100 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

VMR-RjO partition not In system, defaulting to task's

Explanation: You specified a read-only partition that does not exist in the system.
User Action: No user action is required. INSTALL will place the read-only portion of your
multiuser task into the same partition as the read/write portion of the task.
VMR-Recelve data or by reference list not empty

Explanation: You attempted to remove a task with entries in its receive queues from the
system image.
User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.
VMR-Reference to memory beyond end of system image file

Explanation: VMR attempted to fix a task, to load a driver, or to install a common beyond
the space limits of the system image file. As a result, the command does not execute.
User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.
VMR-Space used

Explanation: You attempted to create a partition in a storage area that is already occupied.
User Action: Reenter the command with an area that is available.
VMR-Specifled partition for common block

Explanation: You attempted to install a task in a common block.
User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.
VMR-Specifled partition too small

Explanation: This message can occur for the following reasons:
•

You attempted to install a task into a partition that is smaller than the task.

•

You attempted to install a driver into a partition that is smaller than the driver.

User Action: Use the /INe keyword to reinstall the task with a larger increment (see the
description of the INSTALL command). If the error persists, submit a Software Performance
Report (SPR).
VMR-Symbol is doubly defined by file

Explanation: The symbol symname is defined twice in the specified file. Duplicate symbols
are illegal.
User Action: No user action is required. The driver is not loaded or unloaded.
VMR-Symbol is undefined in file

Explanation: LOAD found the symbol symname in the specified file, but the symbol is not
defined.
User Action: Define or delete the symbol and reenter the command line.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 5-101

VMR-Syntax error

Explanation: You have typed the command line incorrectly.
User Action: Check the command specification; then, retype the command line according to
the correct command format.
VMR-System Image Is not RSX-ll M-PLUS

Explanation: You attempted to use RSX-IIM-PLUS VMR on a non-RSX-IIM-PLUS system
image file.

User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.
VMR-Task active

Explanation: The task you specified as an argument to the command is active.
User Action: If necessary, abort the task and then reenter the command.
VMR-Task or common region already fixed

Explanation: You attempted to fix a task or common region in memory that is already fixed.
User Action: Be sure that you specified the correct task name. Note that the name of the
task to be fixed in memory must be unique.
VMR-Task has attached common regions

Explanation: This message can occur for the following reasons:
•

You attempted to fix or unfix a task in memory that is linked toa shared region. VMR
cannot fix or unfix such tasks.

•

You attempted to remove a task that is linked to a shared region from the system image.
VMR cannot remove such tasks.

User Action: No user action is required.
VMR-Task Image currently Installed

Explanation: You attempted to install a checkpointable task that has checkpoint space
allocated in its task image. The task has already been installed.

User Action: To install checkpointable tasks more than once, perform the following steps:
1. Allocate checkpoint space for the task in a system checkpoint file.

Use a different name for the task each time you install it.

VMR-Task Image I/O error

Explanation: The task cannot be installed or the driver cannot be loaded. VMR could not
read the task image file or could not rewrite the task image header. The specified device
may be write-locked.
User Action: Enable write access or specify another device. Then, install a valid task image
and reenter the command.

5-102 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

VMR-Task Image virtual address overlaps common block

Explanation: The virtual addresses you reserved for the task image overlap those you reserved
for the common block specified in the error message. Corruption of the task image file may
have caused the overlap.
User Action: Rebuild the task; then, reenter the command.
VMR-Task Is checkpolntable

Explanation: You attempted to fix a checkpointable task in memory.
User Action: No user action is required. Checkpointable tasks cannot be fixed.
VMR-Task Is not multi-user

Explanation: You attempted to fix the read-only portion of a multiuser task in memory, but
the task you named in the command line is not a multiuser task.
User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.
VMR-Task name already In use

Explanation: You attempted to install a task of the same name as that of one already installed
in the system image.
User Action: Rename the task and then install it.
VMR-Task not Installed with external header

Explanation: This is a warning message to indicate that the specified task is installed with
its header in the pool.
User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message.
VMR-Task not In system

Explanation: You referenced a task that is not installed in the system.
User Action: Install the task with the INSTALL command; then, reenter the command.
VMR-Task not removed,

eLI

has messages enabled

Explanation: You attempted to remove a command line interpreter (CLI) task that is able to
receive messages from the system.
User Action: No user action is required. The task may have messages that it has not received
yet, so the remove request is aborted.
VMR-Task or common not In memory

Explanation: You attempted to remove a task or common from the system that is
checkpointed and, therefore, is not in memory.
User Action: Wait for the task to come back in to memory; then, remove it.

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 5-103

VMR-Task or common region is not ftxed

Explanation: You attempted to unfix a task that is not fixed in the system image.
User Action: No user action is required. The task is already unfixed.
VMR-Task or common region not in system

Explanation: You referenced a task or common region that has not been installed in the
system or you attempted to run a prototype task.
User Action: Install the task or common region with the INSTALL command; then, reenter
the command.
VMR-11 redirect error

Explanation: You attempted to redirect the pseudo device TI:.
User Action: No user action is required. Tl: cannot be redirected.
VMR-TT redirect error

Explanation: You attempted to redirect a terminal to the null device.
User Action: No user action is required. This combination is not allowed.
VMR-Too many common block requests

Explanation: You attempted to install a task that contains too many common block requests.
User Action: No user action is required. A task is limited to seven common block references.
VMR-Too many LUNs

Explanation: You attempted to install a task that contains more than 25510 logical unit
number (LUN) assignment requests.
User Action: No user action is required. A task is limited to 255 10 LUN assignments.
VMR-Too many symbols of the form $xxTMO in ftle name

Explanation: LOAD is attempting to extract symbols of the form $xxTMO from the driver's
symbol definition file. There are more symbols of this form than LOAD can process.
User Action: See the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX Guide to Writing an I/O Driver for more
information.
VMR-Top of pool set to , requested amount not available

Explanation: You requested more pool space than the system can provide.
User Action: No user action is required. The system provides as much as possible in this
case.

5-104 Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

VMR-Undeflned common block

< blockname>

Explanation: You attempted to install a task that references a common block that is not
defined in the system image. This message may indicate that the task was built for another
system.
User Action: Rebuild the task with the common; then, reenter the INSTALL command.
VMR-Unknown partition

Explanation: You attempted an operation on a partition that does not exist in the system.
User Action: Be sure you entered the correct partition name.
VMR-User D-space not supported

Explanation: An attempt was made to install a task with separate instruction and data space
on a system that does not support user data space.
User Action: Select support for user instruction and data space during system generation, or
install the task without separate instruction and data space.
VMR-Virtual terminal error

Explanation: You attempted to enable, using the SET command, a terminal option for a
virtual terminal.
User Action: No user action is required. This cannot be done.
VMR-Wrlte-cneck not supported for device

Explanation: You attempted to enable write-checking for a device that does not support it.
User Action: Reenter the command without requesting write-checking, or specify a device
that supports write-checking. Write-checking is supported for all disks except DL-type
devices (RLOI and RL02) and DX-type devices (RXOls).

Virtual Monitor Console Routine (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 5-105

Chapter 6
The SHUTUP Program
SHUTUP is the system program that enables orderly shutdown of an RSX-l1M-PLUS or
Micro/RSX system. SHUTUP sends warning messages, aborts nonprivileged tasks, and
dismounts devices on the system.

6. 1 Prerequisites to Running SHUTUP
Before you use SHUTUP to shut down the system, be sure the following tasks are installed:
•

INDIRECT, the Indirect Command Processor

•

ACS, if dynamic checkpoint space is established

•
•

BYE
DMO, if there are any mounted devices

If the indirect command file LB:[1,2]SHUTUP.CMD is present, you can use it to install the BYE
and· DMO tasks. (For more information, see Section 6.5.) The system installs Indirect and the
ACS task for you.

6.2 Invoking SHUTUP
Use the RUN command to invoke SHUTUP from a privileged terminal, as follows:
>

SHUTUP displays the following message when invoked:
RSI-ttM-PLUS Shut down program

The SHUTUP Program

6-1

6.3 SHUTUP Input
SHUTUP prompts for the number of minutes as follows:
•

Number of minutes to wait before the system is shut down

•

Number of minutes between warning messages

•

Number of minutes before disabling logins

If you specify less than 4 minutes to wait before shutdown, SHUTUP does not ask the last
two questions. Instead, SHUTUP sets the interval between messages to 1 minute and disables
logins immediately.

The number of minutes between messages must be greater than zero and less than the number
of minutes before shutdown minus three. If you specify either value incorrectly, SHUTUP
ignores your answer and displays the prompt again.
The following is an example of SHUTUP prompts and user input:
Enter minutes to wait before shutdown:
Enter minutes between messages:
Enter minutes to wait before disabling logins:
Reason for shutdown «CR> for none):

After receiving your input, SHUTUP asks for confirmation as follows:
OK to shutdown? [yIN]:

If your response to the question is N (No), SHUTUP terminates without taking any action. If
your response is Y (Yes), SHUTUP sends warning messages to terminals.

The following section explains the messages issued by SHUTUP.

6.4 SHUTUP Output
SHUTUP sends warning messages to terminals that are logged in to the system. However, a
terminal set to NOBROADCAST receives the warning messages only during the last 5 minutes
before shutdown.
SHUTUP sends the following warning messages:
Please finish up, 15 minutes before shutdown -- WALNUT
Reason for shutdown: Field Service PM

Three minutes later, SHUTUP sends additional messages:
Please finish up, 12 minutes before shutdown -- WALNUT
Reason for shutdown: Field Service PM

The messages include a 6-character name that is a DECnet node name (if the DECnet package
is active) or the system name that was selected during system generation (if DECnet is not
active). In the previous messages, WALNUT is the 6-character name.
SHUTUP continues to issue the warning messages at the specified interval. When 3 minutes
remain before system shutdown, SHUTUP changes the interval between messages to 1 minute.

6-2 The SHUTUP Program

When the specified delay before disabling logins expires (measured from the time sHUTUP is
started), sHUTUP displays the following message on the invoking terminal:
All further logins are disabled

After sHUTUP logs out all terminals, aborts all nonprivileged tasks, and dismounts all devices,
it displays the following message on the invoking terminal:
SHUTUP operation complete

Then, sHUTUP halts the processor.
At this point, you can either bootstrap another system or resume operation of the current
system. To continue with the current system, press the continue switch (CONT) on the CPU
console of the PDP-II or, on a MicroPDP-ll, the Restart button. After you press the switch,
logins are enabled and the following message appears on the invoking terminal:
Logins are now enabled

Before you use the system, mount the devices and follow normal system startup procedures.

6.5 The SHUTUP.CMD File
The indirect command file LB:[1,2]sHUTUP.CMD customizes the system shutdown procedure.
During the system shutdown procedure, sHUTUP submits this file to the Indirect Command
Processor for execution.
The sHUTUP task-build file LB:[I,24]sHUBLD.CMD specifies the amount of time (the timeout
interval) that sHUTUP.CMD has to execute. The default timeout interval is 12010 seconds.
However, if you are using an RsX-IIM-PLUs system, you can change the timeout interval
for sHUTUP.CMD by modifying sHUBLD.CMD. (Information on modifying sHUBLD.CMD is
contained in the file.)
If the timeout interval expires and sHUTUP.CMD is still executing, sHUTUP asks if you want
to wait for sHUTUP.CMD to finish. For example:
Command (AT.) Timeout - Continue waiting? [YIN]:

If you enter N (No), sHUTUP continues without waiting any longer. If you enter Y (Yes),
sHUTUP waits an additional 3010 seconds. If sHUTUP.CMD has not finished at the end of
3010 seconds, sHUTUP continues without waiting any longer.

Use sHUTUP.CMD to install BYE and DMO (SHUT UP cannot execute properly unless these
tasks are installed). If the DECnet package is installed on your system, use sHUTUP.CMD to
shut down the network. Also, if you want to shut down your own application programs with
sHUTUP, modify sHUTUP.CMD accordingly.

The SHUTUP Program 6-3

The following is an example of a SHUTUP.CMD file:
;THIS SHUTUP.CMD FILE INSTALLS BYE,
;DMO, AND ACC, IF THEY ARE NOT INSTALLED,
;AND ALSO ACTIVATES A COMMAND FILE (NETSTOP)
;TO SHUT DOWN THE NETWORK IF THE NETWORK
;IS ACTIVE.
,

.ENABLE SUBSTITUTION
.IFNINS ... BYE INS $BYE
.IFNINS ... DMO INS $DMO
.IFNINS ... ACC INS $ACC
.IFNACT NETACP .GOTO 20
«ILB: [1 , 2] NETSTOP
.20:

For more information on writing indirect command procedures, seethe RSX-IIM-PLUS Indirect
Command Processor Manual.

6.6 System Shutdown
The following sections describe the shutdown procedure for RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX
systems. An annotated example of a system shutdown supplements the description.

6.6. 1 System Shutdown Procedure
When the delay before system shutdown expires, SHUTUP performs the following functions:
1. Stops the Console Logger (if active)
2.

Redirects the console terminal to the TI: of SHUTUP

3. Submits the indirect command file LB:[l,2]SHUTUP.CMD (if present) to the Indirect
Command Processor for execution
4.

Logs off logged-in terminals

5. Stops the Queue Manager (QMG; if active)
6. Stops Resource Accounting (if active)
7.

Stops the Error Log Task (ERRLOG; if active)

8. Checkpoints all read/write commons
9. Deallocates checkpoint space and dismounts devices
10. Halts the processor
After SHUTUP halts the processor, you can either bootstrap another system or resume operation
of the current system.

6-4 The SHUTUP Program

6.6.2 Example of a System Shutdown
The following is an example of a system shutdown:
>

RSX-llM-PLUS Shut down program
Enter minutes to wait before shutdown:
Enter minutes between messages:
Enter minutes to wait before disabling logins:
Reason for shutdown «CR> for none):
OK to shutdown? [Y/N]:
05-MAR-87 16:34 Please finish up. 10 minutes before shutdown -- ALMOND
Reason for shutdown: FIELD SERVICE PM
All further logins are disabled
05-MAR-87 16:39 Please finish up. 5 minutes before shutdown
Reason for shutdown: FIELD SERVICE PM

ALMOND

05-MAR-87 16:41 Please finish up. 3 minutes before shutdown
Reason for shutdown: FIELD SERVICE PM

ALMOND

05-MAR-87 16:42 Please finish up. 2 minutes before shutdown
Reason for shutdown: FIELD SERVICE PM

ALMOND

05-MAR-87 16:43 Please finish up. 1 minute
Reason for shutdown: FIELD SERVICE PM

before shutdown -- ALMOND

05-MAR-87 16:44 System is now shutting down -- ALMOND
Reason for shutdown: FIELD SERVICE PM
QUE /STO: QMG 0
>
STOP/ACCOUNTING SHUTUP
~
16:44:38 SYSLOG -- 47. Exiting
(oLB: [1. 2] SHUTUP
•
>

>(0
>
ELI /NOLOG
16:46:20: ERRLOG -- Error Logging stopped
>
ACS DUO:/BLKS=O. ~
ACS -- Checkpoint file now inactive
>
DMO DUO:/DEV/LOCK=V ~
DMO -- System disk being dismounted
DMO -- SYSTEM dismounted from DUO: *** Final dismount initiated ***

16:46:43 *** DUO: -- Dismount complete
>
SHUTUP operation complete tt

To Jhut down the system in this example, SHUTUP does the following:

Stops the Queue Manager (QMG).

Stops Resource Accounting.

The SHUTUP Program

6-5

•

Invokes the indirect command file LB:[1,2]SHUTUP.CMD.
The @ message indicates the end of the command file SHUTUP.CMD.

Runs the task ELI to terminate the Error Log Task (ERRLOG).

CD Deallocates checkpoint files on DUO.

Dismounts the disk on DUO.
The VIRTUAL option, /LOCK=V, is privileged. When you specify the VIRTUAL option,
the DISMOUNT command (MCR command DMO) does not clear the volume as valid and
does not spin down the disk. (Refer to the RSX-llM-PLUS Command Language Manual,
the RSX-llM-PLUS MCR Operations Manual or the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 1 for
additional information on the VIRTUAL option.)

Displays a message when SHUTUP has finished executing.

6-6 The SHUTUP Program

Part II: Resource Monitoring and Control

Chapter 7
Resource Monitoring Display
The Resource Monitoring Display (RMD) is a privileged task that displays information about
your system resources. This information includes the active tasks, their location in memory,
the amount of memory they occupy, and the available pool space. On video terminals such as
VT52s, VT100-series, VT200-series, and Professional series terminals, RMD provides dynamic
displays. On hardcopy terminals such as LA120s, RMD provides "snapshot" displays. RMD
automatically alters the display format according to terminal type; you do not have to set
parameters or rebuild the RMD task image.

7. 1 Introduction to RMD
RMD consists of "pages." A page contains up to 24 lines of information, which is equal to one
screen on cathode-ray tube (CRT) terminals. The pages are divided into two types: display
pages and setup pages.

7. 1. 1 Display Pages
There are eight display pages available:
•

Memory (M)

•

Active Task (A)

•

Task Header (T)

•

Help (H)

•

I/O Counts (I)

•

System Statistics (S)

•

General Statistics About a Cache Region (C)

•

Detailed Statistics About a Cached Device (D)

After you enter the RMD command, type the letter indicated in parentheses to view the
corresponding display page.

Resource Monitoring Display 7-1

7. 1.2 Setup Pages
There are five setup pages. Each setup page is associated with a display page. (The Help display
page has no associated setup page.) To access a setup page from a display page, press the
ESCAPE key on your terminal. The setup page describes and prompts you for setup commands,
which alter the content of the information displayed on the associated display page.
Setup parameters stay in effect until you alter them with subsequent setup commands (entered
from the setup page or the Monitor Console Routine (MCR) command line).

7.2 Installing and Invoking RMD
Individual users can invoke RMD at their terminals. For large systems that support many
terminals, you may want to run RMD continuously on a slaved terminal near the computer. To
install and invoke RMD for use by individual users or to run RMD on a slaved terminal, use
one of the procedures described in the following subsections.

7.2. 1 Installing RMD at Individual Terminals
Privileged users can use the DIGITAL command language (DCL) or MCR command RUN to run
an uninstalled version of RMD (LB:[3,54]RMD.TSK or $RMD). However, nonprivileged users
cannot use RMD unless a privileged user installs it for them. To install RMD, enter the DCL or
MCR command INSTALL at a privileged terminal, as follows:
>

When you specify a dollar sign ($) in the INSTALL command line, INSTALL searches for the
file RMD.TSK in the library and system User Identification Codes (UICs; by default, [3,54] and
[1,54], respectively) on device LB:. (For more information on the INSTALL command, see the
RSX-IIM-PLUS MeR Operations Manual, the RSX-IIM-PLUS Command Language Manual, or the

Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 2.)

7.2.2 Invoking RMD at Individual Terminals
To invoke an installed copy of RMD, enter the RMD command.

Format
RMD [page] [.setupcommands]

Parameters
page

Specifies one of the display page abbreviations (M, A, T, or H, I, S, C, and D). The default
page is the Memory display (M).
setupcommands

Specify a list of valid setup commands for the display page that you have selected. The
setup commands are the same as those available to you from the setup page associated with
the display page. The default setup commands are discussed in Sections 7.3 to 7.10, which
describe the content of each display page and how to use setup commands to alter display
parameters.

7-2 Resource Monitoring Display

From a privileged terminal, you can invoke an uninstalled copy of RMD by using the RUN
command. However, if you plan to alter displays from the MCR command line, you must use
an installed copy of RMD.

7.2.3 Running RMD on a Slaved Terminal
To run RMD on a slaved terminal and to allow users to invoke RMD at their own terminals,
install RMD twice. Specify a different task image file and a different task name for each
installation.
The task image file RMD.TSK (which has been task built at system generation with the task
name ... RMD) is located in the library UIC (by default, [3,54]) on device LB:. The task RMD.TSK
is the copy of RMD that the system installs for individual users to invoke. Logical unit numbers
(LUNs) 1 and 2 in this task image are assigned to the issuing terminal (TI:) so that a user at
any terminal can invoke RMD.
To run RMD on a slaved terminal, perform the following steps:
1.

From a privileged terminal, create a copy of RMD.TSK in the system UIC on your system
disk named RMDEMO.TSK. If your library UIC is [3,54] and your system disk is DRO, use
one of the following command sequences:
DCL Format
DCL>
DCL>
DCL>'

MCR Format
MCR>
MCR>
MCR>

From a privileged terminal or from a command file to be executed at a privileged terminal,
install RMDEMO by using one of the following command sequences:
DCL Format
DCL>
DCL>
DCL>
DCL>
DCL>

MCR Format
MCR>
MCR>
MCR>
MCR>
MCR>

The parameter ttnn is the terminal at which you want to run RMDEMO.
This command sequence installs RMD with task name RMDEMO, reassigns LUNs 1 and 2
to the terminal you want to set slaved, slaves the terminal, and invokes the task.

Resource Monitoring Display 7-3

Because the DeL command ASSIGN fTASK (MeR command REASSIGN) alters the task
image on disk, you must use two task images rather than simply installing RMD twice with
different task names.

7.3 The Help Display
The Help display describes how to select display pages. Other display pages (such as the
Memory, Active Task, and Task Header displays) use the entire screen, so they cannot provide
you with prompts or information on using the display. If you need to know how to access
a setup page from a display page or how to select another display page, press the H key (for
Help).
You can also display the Help page directly by entering the following MeR command line:
>

Example 7-1 shows the Help display page.
Example 7-1:

RMD Help Display Page

Use the following keys to switch display pages:
ACDHI MS T -

Active Task Display
General Cache Statistics Display
Detailed Cache Statistics Display
Help Display (this page)
I/O Counts Display
Memory Display
System Statistics Display
lets you enter a setup command if any setup commands
are available for that display page
replots the current display page
or exits RMD

Because you cannot modify the parameters for the Help display, there is no corresponding setup
page.

7.4 The Memory Display
The Memory display graphically represents the entire system memory, including the approximate
size and locations of partitions and active tasks. The display also shows pool statistics, the
name of the task that is currently executing, and other information about the status of your
operating system. To access the Memory display from another display page, press the M key
(for Memory). To access the Memory display from the MeR command line, enter the following
command:

If you invoke RMD without specifying a display page, RMD defaults to the Memory display.
The following annotated example shows a "snapshot" of a Memory display. The numbers in
Example 7-2 correspond to the numbered items in the list that follows the example.

7-4 Resource Monitoring Display

Example 7-2:

Memory Display

•

RSX-llM-PLUS V4.0

BL40

(ATHENA)

1024K UP 001:19:11

22-MAR-87 13:20:24

•

TASK=FRKT32

FREE=

POOL=1688.:1968. :47.
1688. :1968. :47.

SYO:107640.
OBO:OMO

OB1:60608.
OB2:22210.

PARS

SECPOOL=3483. :4096. :85%
3483. : 4096. : 85%

SYSPAR:O
SECPOL:P
GEN
:0

IN:
34
218
OUT

ORTO
F . TH P NN.
C
ICTU
C.3R 0 TT.
A
RTC:
S.4C 0 ...
C
~
1.0
RAT. L ELS
H
o 1.M
ET3 . . CAE
E
OK M.
S. 4. . LTA
!!]!)
! !+»==! !!+======================================
0*******120*****240*****360*****480*****600*****720*****840*****
EPO----P-------O------------------------------------------------ GD
960*****1080****1200****1320****1440****1560****1680****1800****
===!+»»»»+>+--+>-»
.OOOELBBNAMF . AB R
.UBBVPAAETAA . TR M
.000C2PPT.IL . . U 0
P013. 01AVL$ E VV V
IFFF.
C5Q$ 0 44 5
AUt.

ERRSEQ
28. ~

$ T

This display contains the following information:

Operating system type, version number, and base level.

•

Six-character name that is a DECnet node name (if the DECnet package is running on your
system) or the system name that you selected during system generation (if DECnet is not
running on your system).

•

Size of the system memory in K words.

Time elapsed in units of days, hours, and minutes, since the system was last bootstrapped.

Current date and time.

Name of the task currently executing, or if no task is executing other than RMD, *IDLE*
(which indicates that the Executive is executing the idle loop).
Note
To determine which task is executing, RMD examines the Active Task List
(ATL). Instead of displaying the task that is currently executing (which is
always RMD, because RMD generates the display), RMD determines which
task is scheduled to run immediately after RMD stops executing.

•

Number of free blocks on the first four Files-11 devices in your system configuration. If a
device is dismounted, RMD displays "DMO." If a device is off line, RMD displays "0FL."
Magnetic tapes can also be displayed, but only if you previously selected them from the
I/O Counts setup page.

Resource Monitoring Display 7-5

Pool information appears in the following format:
POOL=X:Y:Z

The variables X, Y, and Z are defined as follows:

Specifies the number of words in the largest free block in pool.

Specifies the number of free words in pool.

Specifies the number of fragments in the pool free list.

The second line records the maximum pool depletion that has occurred since you invoked
RMD. This line is useful if RMD has been running on a slaved terminal since the system
was last bootstrapped.
@)

Secondary pool information appears in the following format:
SECPOOL=A:B:CY.

The variable A, B, and C are defined as follows:
A

Specifies the number of free blocks in secondary pool.

Specifies the total number of blocks in secondary pool.

Specifies the percentage of free blocks in secondary pool.

The second line records the largest depletion of secondary pool that has occurred since you
invoked RMD. This line is useful if RMD has been running on a slaved terminal since the
system was last bootstrapped.

7-6 Resource Monitoring Display

4D Partitions in memory are displayed in the following format:
partitionname:type

partitionname

Specifies the name of the memory partition being displayed. In this
example, the partitions are as follows:

Partition Name

Description

SYSP AR

The system partition. Usually reserved for system
tasks, such as the Task Termination Notification
Program (TKTN).

SECPOL

The secondary pool partition.
Note that this
partition is extensible (see Chapter 8).

GEN

The general partition. This is the default for most
user tasks in memory.

Specifies one of the following types of partitions:

type

Type

Description

Dynamic partition

Secondary pool partition

•

Number of tasks in memory (IN:) and the amount of memory they use (in l024-word or
lK increments). Also, the number of active tasks swapped or checkpointed out of memory
(OUT) and the amount of memory they would require (in l024-word or lK increments).
In this example, there are 34 tasks in memory, and they use 218K of memory. There are
currently no tasks waiting to run.

Name of each task, common, or driver in memory and its location in memory using the
following symbols to designate size, type (task, common, or driver), and other attributes:

Symbol

Attribute

Active task

[]

Task not active, yet occupies memory

! !

Named common

Unnamed common (displayed name is first attached task)
Loaded driver that uses a device mnemonic
Task or region not fixed in memory
Task or region fixed in memory

The hyphens and equal signs represent the approximate amount of memory that each task,
driver, or common occupies. Where the display shows only one delimiter and no hyphens
or equal signs, the open delimiter is in the same location as the closing delimiter of the
preceding task.

Resource Monitoring Display 7-7

Partition size and location. The beginning of each partition is marked with the same symbols
as those listed previously, plus the following additions:
Symbol

Meaning

Executive partition

Dynamic partition

Secondary pool partition

The lines of asterisks are approximate representations of the amount of memory occupied by
each partition. The numbers are in I024-word or IK increments. Each numerical character
also represents the same amount of memory as an asterisk. RMD always divides the system
memory into groups of eight units.

4D System error count sequence recorded by the Error Logger (always zero if the Error Logger
is not present in your system).

7.4. 1 Altering the Memory Display from the Setup Page
To alter the Memory display, access the setup page for the Memory display by pressing the
ESCAPE key. The setup page describes and prompts you for commands that you use to alter
the Memory display. You can enter multiple commands after each prompt by using commas as
separators.
The following setup commands are available for altering the Memory display:
FREEx=ddnn:

Specifies the four Files-II devices to be displayed (see Example 7-2). The
variable x is a number from 1 to 4; ddnn specifies a device name and unit
number. The default is your system disk SY: and the next three Files-II
devices in the system configuration.

RATE=s

Specifies how often RMD replots the Memory display. The variable s is the
replot rate in seconds. The default rate is once per second.
This command applies to CRT (video display) terminals only.

You can truncate the command names to 1 character (for example, FI=ddnn:). These setup
parameters stay in effect until you alter them, even if you request another display page and
then return to the Memory display.

7.4.2 Altering the Memory Display from the MCR Command Line
You can enter the FREE and RATE commands as part of the MeR command line. (The general
format of the MCR command line is discussed in Section 7.2.2.) In the following example,
RMD displays the number of free blocks on DMO (instead of the third Files-II device in your
configuration) and replots the display every 3 seconds (instead of every second):

7-8 Resource Monitoring Display

RSX-11M-PLUS V4.0
TASK=*IDLE*

BL40

POOL=1672. :1964. :47.
1672. :1964. :47.
IN:
35
202
OUT

(ATHENA)
FREE=

1024K UP 001:19:14 22-MAR-87 13:23:55
SYO:107640. DMO:DMO
DBO:DMO
DB1:60608.
PARS
SECPOOL=3486. :4096. :85%
3486. :4096. :85%
SECPOL:P
SYSPAR:D
C
GEN
:D
A
C
H
E

DRTD
F . TH P NN.
ICTU
C.3R 0 TT.
RTC:
S.4C 0 ...
1.0
RAT. L ELS
o 1.M
ET3 . . CAE
OK M.
S . 4 . . LTA
!!]!)
!!+»==! !!+======================================
0*******120*****240*****360*****480*****600*****720*****840*****
EPD----P-------D-----------------------------------------------960*****1080****1200****1320****1440****1560****1680****1800****
===!+»»»»+>+--+»>
.DDDELBBNAMF ATA
.UBBVPAAETAA . TTT
. 000C2PPT.IL . . 3.
P013. 01AVL$ E V4V
IFFF.
C5Q$ D 4 5
A111.
P $ T

ERRSEQ
28 .

To change the first and second Files-II devices to DB! and DB2 respectively, use the following
MeR command line:
>

For example:
>

RSX-11M-PLUS V4.0
TASK=F11ACP

BL40

POOL=1604. : 1856. : 48.
1604.:1856. :48.
IN:
35
211
OUT

(ATHENA)
FREE=

1024K UP 001:19:15 22-MAR-87 13:24:28
DB1:60608.
DBO:DMO
DB2:22210.
DB3:146741.
PARS
SECPOOL=3481. : 4096. : 84%
3481. :4096. :84%
SYSPAR:D
SECPOL:P
C
GEN
:D
A
C
H
E

DRTD
F.TH P NN.
ICTU
C.3R 0 TT.
RTC:
S.4C 0 ...
1.0
RAT. L ELS
o 1.M
ET3 . . CAE
OK M.
S . 4 . . LTA
!!]!)
! !+»==!! !+======================================
0*******120*****240*****360*****480*****600*****720*****840*****
EPD-- - - P- -- - - --D- - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -"- - - - - - - - - -- - - - - -- - - - - -- - -960*****1080****1200****1320****1440****1560****1680****1800****
===!+»»»»+>+--+»>->
.DDDELBBNAMF
ATAP
.UBBVPAAETAA . TTTI
. 000C2PPT.IL . . 3.P
P013. 01AVL$ E V4VT
IFFF.
C5Q$ D 4 53
A111.
P $ T
6

ERRSEQ
28 .

Resource Monitoring Display 7-9

These setup parameters stay in effect until you alter them with subsequent setup commands
(using the setup page or an TYleR command iine). Even if you switch to another display page
and then return to the Memory Display, RMD does not restore the default setup parameters.
Other RMD pages also allow you to select the devices to be displayed. After you select a
device, it becomes common across all the display pages. For example, if you select Fl =DMO
for the Memory display page, and then switch to the I/O Counts Display page, RMD displays
DMO as the first device (by default, the first device listed on the I/O Counts page is SY:).

7.5 The Active Task Display
The Active Task display shows you the active tasks in the system. To access this display from
another display page, press the A key (for Active Task). Example 7-3 shows a typical Active
Task display.
Example 7-3:

Active Task Display

RSX-11M-PLUS V4.0

BL40

Name

Length

. . . LDR
RMDV5
NETACP
EVC ...
MCR .. ,
DB02F1
EMOOFi
DB07F1
DR06F1
DB03F1
DR05F1
DB01F1
F11ACP
DB06F1
DUOOF1
PMT ...
HRC .. ,
SYSLOG
BAP1
BAPO

00005000
00041100
00023700
00033200
00031600
00014400
00014400
00014400
00014400
00014400
00014400
00014400
00014400
00014400
00014400
00007100
00057400
00020400
00047600
00047600

COO
VT5
COO
COO
TT2
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO

Pri

1024K OWN=ALL

248 .
225.
200.
198.
160.
149.
149.
149.
149.
149.
149.
149.
149.
149.
149.
148.
140.
130.
80.
80.

22-MAR-87 13:20:29

I/O

Status flags

O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.

-CHK
RUN
STP
STP
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
RUN
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP

STP
-CHK
ACP
-PMD
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
-CHK
-PMD
-PMD
-PMD
-PMD
-PMD

-PMD
-PMD
-PMD
PRY
-PMD
ACP
ACP
ACP
ACP
ACP
ACP
ACP
ACP
ACP
STP
PRY
PRY
PRY
PRY
PRY

PRY NSD
REM PRY
PRY NSD
PRY
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
PRY
REM
ACP

CLI
PRY
PRY
PRY
PRY
PRY
PRY
PRY
NSD
PRY
REM

NSD
NSD
NSD
NSD
NSD
NSD
NSD
NSD
NSD
PRY

NSD
SLY
SLY

This display contains the following six fields:

Name of the task

Length of the task (size) in octal bytes

e
e

Terminal from which the request to run the task was issued
Running priority of the task

Outstanding I/O count

Status flags

7-10 Resource Monitoring Display

NSD

The status flags use the same mnemonics as the DCL command SHOW TASKS/ACTIVE/FULL
(MCR command ATL). See the RSX-IIM-PLUS Command Language Manual, the RSX-IIM-PLUS
MCR Operations Manual, or the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 2 for the definitions of the
status flags.

7.5. 1 Altering the Active Task Display from the Setup Page
To alter the Active Task display, press the ESCAPE key, which displays the setup page for the
Active Task display. The setup page describes and prompts you for commands that you use to
alter the Active Task display. You can enter multiple commands after each prompt by using
commas as separators. The setup commands available for altering the Active Task display are
as follows:
OWNER=ttnn:

Displays only those tasks that have been issued by a particular terminal. The
parameter ttnn represents the terminal that issued the task. The default is
ALL, which displays tasks issued from all terminals.

PRIORITY=p

Determines the highest priority of the tasks to be displayed. When the active
task list is too long to fit on one screen, use this command to limit the number
of tasks that are displayed.
The letter p is a task's running priority. The default is 250, which is the
highest possible priority.

RATE=s

Specifies how often RMD replots the Active Task display. The variable s is
the replot rate in seconds. The default rate is once per second.
This command applies to CRT (video display) terminals only.

TASK=taskname

Specifies the name of the task whose header you want to display. Note
that the TASK command displays the Task Header display page. (The Task
Header display is discussed in Section 7.6.) This is the only setup command
that switches display pages.
There is no default for the TASK command.

You can truncate these commands to their shortest unique forms. These setup parameters stay
in effect until you alter them, even if you switch to another display page and back to the Active
Task display.

7.5.2 Altering the Active Task Display from the MCR Command Line
You can enter the same setup commands discussed in the previous section as part of the MCR
command line.
To display only those tasks issued from your own terminal, use the setup command OWNER
and specify the terminal TI:. For example:
$

RSX-11M-PLUS V4.0
TI

Name

Length

RMDV5
AT.V5

00041100 VT5
00053500 VT5

BL40
Pri

1024K OWN=TI:
I/O

225. O.
64. O.

22-MAR-87 13:28:36

Status flags
RUN -CHK -PMD REM
SEF STP WFR -PMD

PRY
REM PRY

Resource Monitoring Display 7-11

Likewise, to display the Active Task display using 200 as the maximum task priority and
replotting the display every 3 seconds, use the setup commands PRIORITY and RATE. For
example:
>

RSX-llM-PLUS V4.0

BL40

1024K OWN=ALL

22-MAR-87 13:29:01

Name

Length

Pri

I/O

Status flags

NETACP
EVC ...
MCR ...
DB02Fl
EMOOFl
DB07Fl
DR06Fl
DB03Fl
DB01Fl
DR05Fl
FllACP
DB06Fl
DUOOFl
PMT ...
HRC ...
SYSLOG
BAPl
BAPO
QMG ...
LPl

00023700
00033200
00031600
00014400
00014400
00014400
00014400
00014400
00014400
00014400
00014400
00014400
00014400
00007100
00057400
00020400
00047600
00047600
00033700
00016700

COO
COO
TT2
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO
COO

200.
198.
160.
149.
149.
149.
149.
149.
149.
149.
149.
149.
149.
148.
140.
130.
80.
80.
75.
70.

O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.

STP
STP
RUN
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
-CHK
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP

O.
O.

ACP
-PMD
-CHK
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
STP
-PMD
-PMD
-PMD
-PMD
-PMD
-PMD
-PMD

-PMD
PRV
STP
ACP
ACP
ACP
ACP
ACP
ACP
ACP
ACP
ACP
ACP
PRV
PRV
PRV
PRV
PRV
PRV
PRV

PRV

NSD

-PMD
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
REM
PRV
REM
REM

PRV
PRV
PRV
PRV
PRV
PRV
PRV
PRV
NSD
PRV
PRV

CLI
NSD
NSD
NSD
NSD
NSD
NSD
NSD

NSD

NSD
NSD

NSD
SLV
SLV
SLV

For comparison, the following display uses 50 as the maximum task priority:
$
RSX-l1M-PLUS V4.0
Name

Length

BL40
Pri

T34T34 00012500 TT34 50.
MAILQ 00140400 COO 50.
PIPV4 00105600 VT4 50.

1024K OWN=ALL

22-MAR-87 13:29:14

I/O

Status flags

O.
O.

-CHK WFR -PMD REM
WFR -PMD PRV
RUN WFR -PMD REM

By using the setup command TASK, you can display selected tasks. In the following example,
RMD displays information about the Queue Manager (QMG):
>

RSX-llM-PLUS V4.0
Task: QMG...
Own: COO:

8L40

1024K

22-MAR-87 13:30:12

Partition: GEN
Status: STP -PMD PRV
I/O: O.
Dpri: 75. Pri: 75. Spri: 70.

Len: 00033700

RO = 122322 Rl = 123722 R2 = 122722 R3 = 001006 R4 = 000000 R5 = 000000
PC = 120724 PS = 170000 SP = 120406 $DSW = 1.
Eflg = 000000 000000

7-12 Resource Monitoring Display

LUN File
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

LUN File

DU1:QUEUE.SYS;0
SPO:
SYO:
LPO:
COO:

If you specify the name of a task that is not currently active, RMD displays the message "Task

not in system" and all the display fields are left blank. For example:
>

RSX-11M-PLUS V4.0 BL40
Task not in system
Task: PIPV4
Own:
RO
PC

=
=

1024K

Partition:
I/O:
Dpri:
R1
PS

=
=

R2
SP

22-MAR-87 13:29:43
Status:
Pri:

=
=

LUN File

Spri:

R3 =
$DSW =

Len:
R4 =
Eflg =

LUN File

7.6 The Task Header Display
The Task Header display contains the following information about the specified task:
•

N arne of the task

•

Name of the partition in which the task runs

•

Status flags, which have the same mnemonics as in the Active Task display

•

Owner of the task by terminal number

•

Outstanding I/O count

•

Default priority

•

Running priority

•

Swapping priority

•

Length, in octal bytes

•

Contents of the six general-purpose registers, the program counter (PC), and the Processor
Status Word (PSW)

•

Contents of the Directive Status Word (DSW)

•

Local event flags

•

Logical unit number (LUN) assignments to a maximum of 26 LUNs

When RMD displays file names in the list of LUN assignments, the file name is the name of the
file when it was created. If the file has been renamed, the display does not reflect the current
file name.

Resource Monitoring Display 7-13

If you invoke RMD from the MCR command line without specifying the name of a task, RMD

displays the setup page first so that you can specify the task name (see Section 7.6.1). To access
this display from another display page, press the T key (for Task Header).

7.6. 1 Altering the Task Header display from the Setup Page
To alter the Task Header display, press the ESCAPE key, which displays the setup page for the
Task Header display. Then, enter one of the following two commands:
RATE=s

Specifies how often RMD replots the Task Header display. The variable s is
the replot rate in seconds. The default rate is once per second.
This command applies to CRT (video display) terminals only.

TASK=taskname

Specifies the name of the task whose header you want to display. There is
no default for this command; you must specify a task name.

The setup page describes and prompts you for these commands, as follows:
The following commands are available for this page:
RATE=s

to change replot rate to's' seconds

TASK=t

to display header for task It'

to return
COMMAND>

After you enter a command at the COMMAND> prompt, RMD displays the prompt again. If
you press the RETURN key, RMD displays the Task Header page for the specified task. In the
following example, RMD displays the task header for the PMT task:
COMMAND>
COMMAND>
RSX-11M-PLUS V4.0
Task: PMT...
Own: COO:
RO = 000074
PC = 122040

BL40

1024K

Partition: GEN
Status: STP -PMD PRV
I/O: O.
Dpri: 148. Pri: 148. Spri: 143.
R1 = 000102
PS = 170000

R2 = 000000
SP = 120212

LUN File
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

22-MAR-87 13:20:44

R3 = 146176
$DSW = 1.

Len: 00007100

R4 = 140700 R5 = 000000
Eflg = 000100 000000

LUN File

COO:
SYO:
SYO:
SYO:
TrO:

You can truncate these commands to their shortest unique forms. These setup parameters
remain in effect until you alter them, even if you switch to another display page and back to
the Task Header display.
To enter multiple commands after each COMMAND> prompt, separate the commands with
commas.

7-14 Resource·Monitoring Display

7.6.2 Altering the Task Header Display from the MCR Command Line
Both the RATE and TASK commands are available to you from the MCR command line. To
specify a task name or plot rate directly, invoke and enter the command on the same line, as
follows:
>

Taskname is the name of the task whose header you want RMD to display, and s is the replot
rate in seconds. For example:
>

RSX-11M-PLUS V4.0
Task: PMT...
Own: COO:
RO
PC

= 000074
= 122040

BL40

1024K

Partition: GEN
Status: STP -PMD PRV
I/O: O.
Dpri: 148. Pri: 148. Spri: 143.
R1
PS

= 000102
= 170000

R2
SP

= 000000
= 120212

LUN File
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

22-MAR-87 13:31:10

R3 = 146176
$DSW = 1.

Len: 00007100

R4 = 140700 R5 = 000000
Eflg = 000100 000000

LUN File

COO:
SYO:
SYO:
SYO:
TIO:

RMD displays the Task Header display for PMT, replotting the page every 2 seconds. Note that
you must give the full task name. In this case the task name is "PMT ... ," not "PMT."
If you do not specify a task name in the MCR command line, RMD displays the setup page.

Use the setup page to select a task whose header you want RMD to display (see Section 7.6.1).

7.7 .The I/O Counts Display
The I/O Counts display shows you I/O and error logging counts for up to six error logging
devices. By default, the first six error logging disk devices in your hardware configuration are
displayed. To access this display from another display press the I key (for I/O). To access this
display from the MCR command line, type the following:
>

Example 7-4 displays the I/O counts for the first six error logging devices in an RSX-I1M-PLUS
system.

Resource Monitoring Display 7-15

Example 7-4:

I/O Counts Display

RSX-llM-PLUS V4.0
Device
Name
SYO:
DBO:

22-MAR-87 11:42:43

BL40

I/O Count

60698.

I/O
Per Sec

Cylinders
Per I/O

4.00
2.18

2.50
2.08

Words
Per Sec
1024.00
558.54

Error
Count/limi t
last
avg

0/100
0/100

soft
hard

last
avg

Dismounted

soft
hard

DB1:

31262.

0.00
0.46

0.00
0.00

00.00
89.82

last
avg

2/100
0/100

soft
hard

DB2:

1175.

0.00
0.00

last
avg

0/100
0/100

soft
hard

DB3:

6786.

0.00
0.00

last
avg

0/100
0/100

soft
hard

DB4:

Dismounted

last
avg

soft
hard

The I/O Counts display contains the following information for each device:
•

Device name of the displayed device

•

Total number of I/O requests to the device

•

Number of I/O requests issued to the device in the last second

•

Average number of I/O requests issued to the device per second

•

Average number of cylinders crossed per I/O request during the last second

•

Average number of cylinders crossed per I/O request

•

Number of words transferred during the last second

•

Average number of words transferred per second

•

Count and limit of soft I/O errors

•

Count and limit of hard I/O errors

The I/O Counts display works only on video terminals.

7.7. 1 Altering the I/O Counts Display from the Setup Page
To alter the I/O Counts display, you press the ESCAPE key, which displays the setup page for
the I/O Counts display. The setup page lists the available commands you can use to alter the
I/O Counts display and prompts you for a command. You can enter multiple commands after

7-16 Resource Monitoring Display

each prompt by using commas as separators. The setup commands available for altering the
I/O Counts display are as follows:
DEVICEx=ddnn:

Selects the error logging devices to be displayed. The letter x is a number
from 0 to 6 and ddnn is an error logging device. By default, RMD displays
the first six error logging disk devices in your hardware configuration.
You can select magnetic tape devices; however, RMD does not display fields
Sand 6 for tapes.
See the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX Error Logging Manual for a list of valid
error logging devices.

RATE=s

Determines how often RMD replots the I/O Counts Display. The letter s is
the replot rate in seconds. The default replot rate is once per second.
This command applies to CRT (video display) terminals only.

You can truncate these commands to their shortest unique forms. These setup parameters stay
in effect until you alter them, even if you switch to another display page and then return to the
I/O Counts display.

7.7.2 Altering the I/O Counts Display from the MCR Command Line
You can enter the DEVICE and RATE commands as part of the MCR command line. For
example, when you enter the following command line, RMD displays I/O count information
for DRS and replots the display every 2 seconds:
>

The information for DRS is displayed in the position that would normally display information
for the second error logging device in your hardware configuration. For example:
>
RSX-llM-PLUS V4.0
Device
Name

22-MAR-87 13:40:03

BL40

I/O Count

I/O
Per Sec

Cylinders
Per I/O

Words
Per Sec

Error
Count/limi t

SYO:

70385.

0.00
0.42

0.00
91.26

0.00
130.84

last
avg

0/100
0/100

soft
hard

DR5:

6657.

0.00
0.00

00.00
0.00

last
avg

0/100
0/100

soft
hard

DBl :

31421.

0.00
0.00

00.00
0.00

last
avg

3/100
0/100

soft
hard

DB2:

1175.

0.00
0.00

last
avg

0/100
0/100

soft
hard

DB3:

6786.

0.00
0.00

last
avg

0/100
0/100

soft
hard

DB4:

Dismounted

last
avg

soft
hard

Likewise, to change the first and second device display positions to DBI and DB2, respectively,
use the following MCR command line:
>

Resource Monitoring Display 7-17

These setup parameters stay in effect until you alter them by using setup commands from the
setup page. Even if you switch to another display page, and then return to the I/O Counts
display, RMD does not restore the default parameters.

7.8 The System Statistics Display
The System Statistics display shows you general information about the operation of your system.
Much of this information comes from Resource Accounting; therefore, this display is useful only
if Resource Accounting was included when your system was generated and is currently active.
To access this display from another display, press the S key. To access this display from the
MCR command line, type RMD S.
Example 7-5 displays the System Statistics page for an RSX-IIM-PLUS system.
Example 7-5:

System Statistics Display

RSX-11M-PLUS V4.0

Current tasks:
Current users:

4907.
57.

Total tasks run:
Total logons:
Shuffler runs:
Error sequence:
System pool:
Secondary pool:

22-MAR-87 13:21:46

BL40

147.

Directives
QIOs
CPU ticks
Zero CPU intervals
Checkpoints

9.•

Memory utilization:
Checkpoint utilization:

1520. :1884. :49.
3483. :4096. :85%
Total

Item

37.

1376284.
616028.
682430.
396464.
O.

Last

58Y.
0%

0
0

Avg/Sec

0
G
CD
«i>

This display contains the following information:

Total number of tasks run and the number of currently active tasks

•

Total number of times users have logged in to the system and the number of users currently
logged in

Number of times the Shuffler has executed (see Chapter 8 for more information on the
Shuffler task)

Error sequence count

Primary pool information (in the same format as in the Memory display) and the percentage
of system memory used

Secondary pool information and the percentage of system checkpoint files used

Total number of directives issued, the number of directives issued during the last second,
and the average number of directives issued per second

G Total number of QIOs issued, the number of QIOs issued during the last second, and the
average number of QIOs issued per second

7-18 Resource Monitoring Display

Total number of running central processing unit (CPU) ticks (dock intervals), the number
of running CPU ticks during the last second, and the average number of running CPU ticks
per second

Total number of zero CPU intervals, number of zero CPU intervals during the last second,
and the average number of zero CPU intervals per second

•

Total number of task checkpoints, number of task checkpoints during the last second, and
the average number of task checkpoints per second

Note that the last and average (AvgjSec) values for the last five fields do not appear in this
example because the example was recorded on a hardcopy terminal (an LAI2).

7.8.1 Altering the System Statistics Display from the Setup Page
You can alter the replot rate on the System Statistics display by pressing the ESCAPE key, which
displays the setup page for the System Statistics Display. The setup page lists the command
format for altering the replot rate and prompts you for a command.
The RATE=s setup command alters the replot rate of the System Statistics display. The variable
s is the replot rate in seconds. The default rate is once per second.
The replot rate parameter stays in effect until you alter it, even if you switch to another display
page and then return to the System Statistics display.

7.8.2 Altering the System Statistics Display from the MCR Command Line
You can enter the RATE command as part of the MCR command line. For example, when you
enter the following MCR command line, RMD replots the System Statistics Display once every
2 seconds:
>

7.9 The General Statistics About a Cache Region Display
The General Statistics About a Cache Region display (RMD C display) shows you general
statistics about a particular cache region. (However, you must have previously established disk
data caching through the MOUNT or SET command to use this display. For more information
on disk data caching, see Chapter 15 of this manual.) To access this display from another
display, press the C key (for Cache Region). To access this display from the MCR command
line, type RMD C.
Example 7-6 displays general cache statistics about the CACHE region.

\
Resource Monitoring Display 7-19

Example 7-6:

Cache Region Display (General Statistics)

RSX-11M-PLUS V4.0

BL40

Cache Statistics (General)

Cache Region Name: CACHE

22-MAR-87 13:17:11

Region Size: 47440 (2500. disk blocks)

Device
Name
DB6:
DB7:

Total Hit Fail Load
Reads Rate Rate Rate
58834. 92%
4%
2%
O.
0%
0%
0%

Total Hit Fail Defer
Writes Rate Rate Rate
19393. 62%
0%
0%
O.
0%
0%
0%

Total

58834.

19393.

92%

62%

Total
I/O Ops
78227.

o.
78227.

Cache
Used
96%
0%
96%

The RMD C Display contains the following information about each cache region:
•

The name of the cache region. By default, the name of the region is CACHE.

•

The actual memory size (in octal) of the cache region in 32-word memory blocks, followed
in parentheses by the decimal number of disk blocks available in the extent storage area.
(The memory size includes the private cache pool area as well as the extent storage area.)

•

The name of the device or devices for which caching is enabled.

•

The total count of all types of read requests issued to that device. These include VIRTUAL,
READAHEAD, DIRECTORY, LOGICAL, and OVERLAY read requests.

•

The percentage of all read requests that were satisfied by the cache (the Read Hit Rate).

•

The percentage of all read requests that could not be satisfied by the cache (the Read Fail
Rate).

•

The percentage of all read requests that resulted in data being loaded into the cache (the
Load Rate).

•

The count of all write requests issued to the device. These include VIRTUAL, DIRECTORY,
and LOGICAL write requests.

•

The percentage of all write requests that caused updating of blocks already loaded in the
cache (the Write Hit Rate).

•

The percentage of all write requests that could not be directed to the cache because of an
extent overlap (the Write Fail Rate).

•

The percentage of all write requests to temporary files that were deferred from write-through
to the disk (the Defer Write Rate). The actual write operation to the disk was performed
sometime after the user's write request was completed.

•

The total of all read and write operations for the device.

•

The percentage of the cache extent storage area used by the device.

•

The grand totals for the cache region.

For more information on the RMD C display, see Chapter 15.

7-20 Resource Monitoring Display

7.9.1 Altering the RMD C Display from the Setup Page
To alter the RMD C display, press the ESCAPE key, which displays the setup page for the
General Statistics about a Cached Region display. The setup page lists the available commands
you can use to alter the display and prompts you for a command. You can enter multiple
commands after each prompt by using commas as separators. The setup commands available
for altering this display are as follows:
REGION=name

Specifies the cache region to be displayed. The default region is CACHE.

RATE=s

Allows you to determine how often RMD replots the general statistics about
a cache region. The variable s is the replot rate in seconds. The default rate
is once per second.
This command applies to CRT (video display) terminals only.

You can truncate these commands to their shortest unique forms. (For this display page, the
shortest unique form is RA for RATE and RE for REGION.) These setup parameters stay in
effect until you alter them, even if you switch to another display page and then return to the
RMD C Display.

7.9.2 Altering the RMD C Display from the MCR Command Line
You can enter the REGION and RATE commands as part of the MCR command line. For
example, when you enter the following command line, RMD displays general statistics for the
region named CACHE and replots the display every 2 seconds:
>
RSX-11M-PLUS V4.0

BL40

Cache Statistics (General)

Cache Region Name: CACHE

22-MAR-87 13:33:13

Region Size: 47440 (2500. disk blocks)

Device
Name
DB6:

Total Hit Fail Load
Reads Rate Rate Rate
60951. 92%
4%
2%

Total Hit Fail Defer
Writes Rate Rate Rate
19594. 62%
0%
0%

Total

60951.

19594.

92%

62%

Total
I/O Ops
80545.

Cache
Used
99%

80545.

99%

For more information on the RMD C display, see Chapter 15.

7.10 The Detailed Statistics About a Cache Region Display
The Detailed Statistics About a Cache Region display (RMD D display) shows you detailed
statistics about a particular cache region. (However, you must have previously established disk
data caching through the MOUNT or SET command to use this display. For more information
on disk data caching, see Chapter 15 of fhis manual.) To access this display from another
display, press the D key (for Detailed Statistics.) To access this display from the MCR command
line, type RMD D.
Example 7-7 displays detailed cache statistics about the CACHE region.

Resource Monitoring Display 7-21

Exampie 7-7:

Cache Region Dispiay (Detailed Statistics)

RSX-llM-PLUS V4.0

BL40

Cache Statistics (Detailed)

Device Name: SYO:
Cache Status: Active

22-MAR-87 13:17:22

Region Name: CACHE
Region Size: 47440
Requests Being Cached: Dir.Ovr.Vir.Log.Rdh

Virtual
Reads
14951.
Read Hit Rate
87%
Read Load Rate
3%

Readahead
O.
0%
0%

Directory
24398.
93%
1%

Logical
4842.
92%
4%

Overlay
14676.
95%
4%

Total
58867.
92%
2%

Read Overlap
0%
Extent Too Big
0%
Max Extent Size 127.

0%
0%
127.

5%
0%
3.

1%
0%
127.

0%
0%
127.

2%
0%

10380.
86%
0%

48.
70%
0%

34778.

4890.

Writes
8965.
Write Hit Rate
33%
Write Overlap
0%
Total I/O

23916.

19393.
62%
0%
14676.

Primary Pool Allocation Failure Rate (as a %of Total I/Os):
Cache Pool Allocation Failure Rate (as a % of Total Read I/Os):
Read Load Failure Rate (as a % of Cache Load I/Os):
Deferred Write Rate (as a % of Total Write I/Os):

78260.

0%
2%
0%
0%

The RMD D Display contains the following information about each cached device:
•

The name of the cache region.

•

The region size (in octal, measured in 32-word memory blocks.)

•

Whether the cache is ACTIVE, ENABLED, DEFER, or a combination of all three.
ACTIVE indicates that the device is being cached through the region.
ENABLED indicates that the device will automatically be cached when it is mounted
(even if the MOUNT command does not explicitly request that the device be cached).
DEFER indicates that deferred write requests to temporary files are enabled for the
device.

•

The types of cache I/O operations enabled for the device. The types can be VIRTUAL
(VIR), READAHEAD (RDH), DIRECTORY (DIR), LOGICAL (LOG), and OVERLAY (OVR).
However, note that values for RDH are not currently recorded; RMD displays them as zeros.

•

The number of read requests issued for each of the I/O types listed in the display, as well
as the total of all read requests.

•

The Read Hit Rate, Read Load Rate, Read Overlap Rate, and the Extent Too Big rate for
each type of request. Each of these rates is computed as a percentage of the total number
of read operations for the particular type of request.

•

The maxirnum extent size for each of the I/O types.

•

The number of write requests issued for each of the I/O types and the total of all write
requests. Note that READAHEAD and OVERLAY write requests do not exist, so these fields
are blank.

7-22 Resource Monitoring Display

•

The Write Hit Rate and Write Overlap Rate for each type of I/O request. Each of these
rates is computed as a percentage of the total number of write operations of a particular
type.

•

The total number of each type of I/O request, as well as the total number of all I/O
operations.

•

The following rates, which are not accumulated by I/O type:
The Primary Pool Allocation Failure Rate line shows how often the allocation cannot
be done as a percentage of the total number of I/Os issued for that device.
The Cache Pool Allocation Failure Rate is similar to the Primary Pool Allocation Failure
Rate, except that allocation from the cache pool is only required on read operations.
Therefore, the rate is computed as a percentage of the total number of read operations.
The Read Load Failure Rate is the percentage of all cache load attempts that failed
because of an I/O error.
The Deferred Write Rate is the rate at which write requests to temporary files were
able to be deferred. This is computed as a percentage of the total number of write
operations.
All cache I/O requests require that an I/O packet be allocated from primary pool.

For more information on the RMD D display, see Chapter 15.

7. 1O. 1 Altering the RMD D Display from the Setup Page
To alter the display, press the ESCAPE key, which displays the setup page for the Detailed
Statistics About A Cached Region display. The setup page lists the available commands you can
use to alter the display and prompts you for a command. You can enter multiple commands
after each prompt by using commas as separators. The setup commands available for altering
this display are as follows:
DEVICE=ddnn:

Specifies the cached device about which detailed statistics are to be displayed.
The default device is SY:. Note that you can display only one device at a
time.

RATE=s

Determines how often RMD replots the detailed statistics about a cache
region. The variable s is the replot rate in seconds. The default rate is once
per second.
This command applies to CRT (video display) terminals only.

Resource Monitoring Display 7-23

7.10.2 Altering the RMD D Display from the MCR Command Line
You can enter the DEVICE and RATE commands as part of the MCR command line. For
example, when you enter the following command line, RMD displays detailed statistics for DB6
and replots the display every 2 seconds:
>

RSX-11M-PLUS V4.0

BL40

Cache Statistics (Detailed)

Device Name: DB6:
Cache Status: Active

Region Name: CACHE
Region Size: 47440
Requests Being Cached: Dir.Ovr.Vir.Log.Rdh

Virtual
Reads
15103.
Read Hit Rate
87%
Read Load Rate
3%

Readahead

Read Overlap
0%
Extent Too Big
0%
Max Extent Size 127.

0%
0%

Directory
24812.
93%
1%

Logical
5235.
93%
3%

Overlay
15826.
95%
4%

Total
60976.
92%
2%

0%
0%
127.

5%
0%
3.

1%
0%
127.

0%
0%
127.

2%
0%

10497.
86%
0%

48.
70%
0%

35309.

5283.

Writes
9049.
Write Hit Rate
33%
Write Overlap
0%
Total I/O

22-MAR-87 13:33:40

24152.

19594.
62%
0%
15826.

Primary Pool Allocation Failure Rate (as a % of Total l/Os):
Cache Pool Allocation Failure Rate (as a % of Total Read l/Os):
Read Load Failure Rate (as a % of Cache Load l/Os):
Deferred Write Rate (as a % of Total Write l/Os):

80570.

0%
2%
0%
0%

These setup parameters stay in effect until you alter them by using setup commands from the
setup page. Even if you switch to another display page, and then return to this display, RMD
does not restore the default parameters.

7.1 1 Modifying the Task-Build Command File (RSX-l 1M-PLUS
Systems Only)
To change the defaults for RMD on an RSX-I1M-PLUS system, you can modify the task-build
command file RMDBLD.CMD in directory (1,24] on device LB:. For more information, see the
descriptions contained within the file.
Note
This option is available only to conventional RSX-I1M-PLUS systems; pregenerated RSX-I1M-PLUS (RL02 distribution kits) and Micro/RSX systems do not
include the command file RMDBLD.CMD.

7-24 Resource Monitoring Display

7 . 12 RMD Error Messages
RMD generates the following error messages:
RMO-Allocated screen buffer too small for this device

Explanation: RMD requires more internal memory to display the requested display on the
type of terminal on which you are running RMD.

User Action: Rebuild RMD with a larger screen buffer by modifying the task-build command
file as discussed in Section 7.11.
RMO-lilegal command-xxxxx

Explanation: You entered an illegal command xxxxx either on the MCR command line or in
response to the COMMAND> prompt on a setup page.
User Action: Enter the correct command as described in this chapter.
RMO-Page does not exist

Explanation: You requested a display page from the MCR command line that does not exist.
User Action: Reenter the command line with a correct display mnemonic.
RMO-Segment 'xxxxxx' not found

Explanation: The module xxxxxx was not found in the task image for RMD. This denotes
an error in how RMD was task built.
User Action: Check that RMD has been built with all the required modules.
RMO-Terminal type not defined

Explanation: The operating system and RMD do not recognize your terminal type.
User Action: Check your terminal type by using the DCL command SHOW TERMINAL
(MCR command SET jTERM=TI:). If this setting is incorrect, use the DCL or MCR
command SET to correct it. If the setting is correct, use a different type of terminal.
RMO-Terminal type not set

Explanation: You did not build RMD to display the requested display page on the type of
terminal to which your terminal is set.
User Action: Check your terminal type by using the DCL command SHOW TERMINAL
(MCR command SET jTERM=TI:). If this setting is incorrect, use the DCL or MCR
command SET to correct it. If the setting is correct, use a different type of terminal.

Resource Monitoring Display 7-25

RMD-Terminal type not yet supported

Explanation: RMD does not recognize your terminal type.
User Action: Check your terminal type by using the DCL command SHOW TERMINAL
(MCR command SET jTERM=TI:). If this setting is incorrect, use the DCL or MCR SET
command to correct it. If the setting is correct and you are using an RSX-IIM-PLUS system,
you can write a terminal characteristics module for the terminal similar to the module in
the file [14,lO]V52CHA.MAC. Then, assemble the module, include the -new module in the
ODL file, and rebuild RMD.

7-26 Resource Monitoring Display

Chapter 8
Memory Management
This chapter describes the tasks supplied with the RSX-IIM-PLUS operating system for
managing the allocation and availablility of memory resources. It includes a description of
the Pool Monitor Task (PMT), the secondary pool, and the Shuffler (SHF) task.

8.1 Evaluating System Requirements for Dynamic Memory
During its execution, the RSX-IIM-PLUS Executive has varying needs for dynamic memory.
Instead of allocating a fixed amount of memory for each requirement, the Executive makes use
of a dynamically allocated memory space called dynamic storage or pool. When allocated space
is no longer needed, the Executive releases it back to the pool of available memory.
Pool requirements for a system are dependent upon the configuration, application, and degree
of system loading. Enough pool must be available to satisfy peak demands; otherwise, a
degradation in system performance occurs.
Because nearly all Executive functions require pool, a system can exhaust pool when system
activity is heavy. This can happen if too many tasks are installed, if too many volumes are
mounted, or if a number of other conditions are present. When this happens, the system does
not appear to have failed, but it is not functioning normally (for example, if there are data lights
on the front of the processor, they will be flickering, but the system may not accept input).
Under these conditions, the system often cannot display error messages because the Executive
requires pool space to perform I/O. Once a system exhausts pool, you may need to restart the
system.
You can avoid this condition in two ways. First, if you have an RSX-IIM-PLUS system,
take the maximum amount of pool compatible with your system configuration during system
generation. The command file SYSVMR.CMD does this for you automatically during system
generation. Second, use PMT (RSX-IIM-PLUS systems only) and the Resource Monitoring
Display (RMD) to monitor pool, and take appropriate action before pool gets too low. (For
more information on RMD, see Chapter 7.)

Memory Management

8-1

8.2 Pool Monitoring Support
Pool monitoring support controls the use of the system's pool resources. This support monitors
pool levels, restricts use of pool, and notifies you when pool is near depletion. PMT also
responds to extreme fragmentation. However, due to the seriousness of this pool problem, PMT
requires your interaction to aid in system recovery. To ensure that PMT functions correctly,
respond to PMT's prompts (see Section 8.S.1).
Pool monitoring support is included in the system by default. You do not need to select any
option; system generation establishes the support for you. Pool monitoring support consists
of two parts: the Executive pool monitor code and the privileged Pool Monitor Task (PMT).
However, note that PMT is only available with RSX-IIM-PLUS systems; it is not included
with MicrojRSX distribution kits.

8.2. 1 The Executive Pool Monitor Code
The pool monitor code within the Executive monitors the amount of free pool and detects major
pool events. When a major pool event occurs, the Executive notifies PMT of the event and of
the current condition of pool.
The mechanism used by the Executive to detect pool events is called the pool monitor interface.
Briefly, the interface functions as follows:
•

Provides the Executive with the ability to declare information to PMT.

•

Provides the Executive with the capability to receive a response or acknowledgement from
PMT. Then, the Executive can use the acknowledgement to control further information
displays.

The details of how this interface works are beyond the scope of this manual. However, it is
fully described in the source code for the Executive module CORAL.MAC. CORAL.MAC is in
the directory [11,10] on all RSX-IIM-PLUS systems, except those supplied as RL02 distribution
kits (that is, as pregenerated systems).

8.2.2 The Pool Monitor Task (RSX-l1 M-PLUS Systems Only)
The Pool Monitor Task (PMT) is supplied on your RSX-IIM-PLUS distribution kit, or it can be
task built and installed during the system generation procedure. Whenever the resultant system
is bootstrapped, PMT is activated by the Executive.
If you decide not to use PMT, you can write and run your own pool monitor task. However,
before you write your own task, you should be familiar with the Executive pool monitor
interface. On all RSX-IIM-PLUS systems, except those supplied as pregenerated systems
(RL02 distribution kits), the interface is described in the Executive module [11,10]CORAL.MAC.
Any task with the task name PMT ... is considered to be a "pool monitor task."

PMT monitors pool conditions. The conditions that PMT responds to include those detected and
reported by the Executive (see Section 8.4). PMT also monitors pool fragmentation. Through
this monitoring, PMT can respond to another major pool event and react to extreme pool
fragmentation. The other major pool event (not reported by the Executive) occurs when PMT
detects that the largest free pool fragment is less than the minimum required fragment size.
(See Section 8.S for further discussion of extreme fragmentation.)

8-2 Memory Management

Once it has been activated by the Executive, PMT operates in a cycle. PMT determines the
size of the largest pool fragment whenever it receives the Executive's notification of a pool
condition, or at least at regular time intervals. It then compares this size to the minimum
required fragment size. Based on the Executive's report on the current pool condition and what
PMT detects when monitoring fragmentation, PMT determines what the current state of pool is
and responds to it accordingly.
The minimum required fragment size is set by using the Monitor Console Routine (MCR) or
Virtual Monitor Console Routine (VMR) command SET /PLCTL, or the DIGITAL Command
Language (DCL) command SET SYSTEM/POOL/LIMITS. See Section 8.6.2 for more information
on the minimum required fragment size.

8.3 Pool Conditions
The condition of pool is directly related to the acceptable high and low pool limits. (To set and
manipulate pool limits, see Section 8.6.1). When the size of free pool crosses the high or low
limit, a new pool condition exists. The possible pool conditions are low pool and high pool.
A high pool condition exists when the amount of free pool is sufficient to support current and
less demanding system workloads. A low pool condition exists when the amount of free pool
is nearing the point where system performance will degrade if the workload on the system
increases.
Major pool events cause either a high or low pool condition to exist. PMT responds to pool
fragmentation and to pool conditions; however, the response varies depending upon the current
level of pool fragmentation. A high or low pool condition, combined with a specific pool
fragmentation level, creates either a high or low pool state. The levels that influence PMT's
response are as follows:
•

If the largest fragment is equal to or greater than the minimum required fragment size, then

PMT acts only on the condition of pool as reported by the Executive.
•

If the largest fragment becomes smaller than the minimum required fragment size, PMT
considers this to be a low pool event. If the system is not already in a low pool state, this

event causes a transition to that state. PMT then responds accordingly.
Although extreme fragmentation is another pool event that PMT responds to, it is different from
those events previously described (see Section 8.5). To determine the overall state of pool, PMT
uses information concerning the current level of fragmentation and information provided by the
Executive. The following subsections describe specific pool events and conditions and PMT's
response to them.

8.3.1 Pool Level and Fragment Size Are Satisfactory
The Executive notifies PMT that the pool level is above the high limit and PMT detects that
fragment size is greater than the minimum required fragment size. PMT concludes that a high
pool state exists and executes actions appropriate for a high pool state (see Section 8.4.2).

Memory Management 8-3

8.3.2 Low Pool Condition
The Executive notifies PMT that a low pool condition exists.
PMT determines whether the change in pool reported by the Executive is temporary. The
change is temporary if, by the time PMT responds to the Executive's notification, enough free
pool has accumulated to push the total above the high limit. If the change is temporary, PMT
ignores the notification and continues to execute high pool state actions. If the change is not
temporary, PMT concludes that a low pool state exists and executes actions appropriate for a
low pool state (see Section 8.4.1).

8.3.3 High Pool Condition
The Executive notifies PMT that a high pool condition exists.
PMT determines whether the change in pool reported by the Executive is temporary. The
change is temporary if, by the time PMT responds to the Executive's notification, the total
amount of free pool has moved below the high limit. If the change is temporary, PMT ignores
the notification and continues to execute low pool state actions. If the change is not temporary,
PMT initiates actions appropriate for a high pool state (see Section 8.4.2).

8.3.4 Largest Pool Fragment Is Too Small
PMT detects that the largest pool fragment is smaller than the minimum required fragment size.
PMT concludes that a low pool state exists and executes actions for a low pool state. Note that
this low pool state overrides any pool conditions reported by the Executive. This pool event will
cause the system to be in a low pool state even if the Executive reports a high pool condition.

8.3.5 Largest Pool Fragment Becomes Larger
PMT detects that the size of the largest pool fragment has become larger than the minimum
required fragment size.
PMT decides that the current pool state must be based on the latest pool condition reported by
the Executive. If the Executive reported a high pool condition, PMT decides that a high pool
state exists. If the Executive reported a low pool condition, PMT decides that a low pool state
exists. In either situation, PMT takes the appropriate action for that state.

8.4 Major Pool Events
The Executive pool monitor code responds to three major pool events. Two are classified as
low pool events and one is classified as a high pool event. The occurrence of these events
directly affects the condition of pool, creating either a high or low pool state. The Executive
responds by notifying PMT of the pool event and the resultant pool condition. The Executive
also activates PMT, so PMT is responsible for any further response to the pool condition.

8-4 Memory Management

8.4. 1 Low Pool Event
A low pool event occurs when one of the following conditions exist:
•

The total amount of free pool falls below the low pool limit. (To set the low pool limit,
use the MCR or VMR command SET /PLCTL, or the DCL command SET SYSTEM/POOL
/LIMITS. For more information on these commands, see Section 8.6.1.)

•

The largest pool fragment is too small for the process requesting it (a pool allocation failure
occurs).
Note
A pool allocation failure is not the same as pool fragmentation. For more
information on pool fragmentation, see Section 8.3.

When a low pool event occurs, the system enters a low pool state. In response, PMT does the
following:
•

Disables checkpointing for itself.

•

Sets its internal cycle interval to 20 seconds.

•

Prevents nonprivileged users from logging in.

•

Suppresses INSTALL/RUN/REMOVE sequences on non privileged terminals.

•

Sends a warning message to all logged-in terminals. For example:
OS-AUG-S7 13:35:10 -- Low pool -- Please exit active tasks - ZEPHYR

In this example, if the DECnet package is not running on your system, ZEPHYR is the
system name selected during system generation. If the DECnet package is running on your
system, ZEPHYR is the DECnet node name.
PMT sends this message at 20-second intervals until it concludes that a high pool state
exists. Users cannot suppress the message with the DCL command SET TERMINAL
/NOBROADCAST (MCR command SET /NOBRO). However, the effectiveness of this
message depends on whether users exit from their active tasks. If they choose to ignore
this message, a low pool state continues to exist.
•

Sends a warning message to and displays pool statistics at the console terminal.
example:

For

OS-AUG-S7 13:35:20 -- Warning -- Pool is critically low
Total free pool = 1116. bytes
Largest fragment = 112. bytes

Following the warning message, PMT displays the total amount of free pool and the largest
free fragment of pool existing at the onset of the low pool state. PMT broadcasts this
message at 20-second time intervals until it concludes that a high pool state exists.
This recovery procedure continues until the total amount of free pool rises above the high pool
limit and the largest pool fragment is large enough for the process requesting it (that is, until a
high pool event occurs).

Memory Management 8-5

8.4.2 High Pool Event
A high pool event occurs when a system that has a low pool condition regains enough space
to cause the amount of free pool to rise above the high pool limit. When the system attains
a high pool state, its response to a low pool event is complete; it no longer needs to actively
regain pool space.
When PMT concludes that a high pool state exists, it executes the following actions:
1.

Sets its internal cycle interval to 1 minute

Enables checkpointing for itself

Removes any pool use controls

PMT then stops itself so that its impact on system resources is minimized. PMT restarts itself
when the internal cycle interval has elapsed.
To set the high pool limit, use the MCR or VMR command SET /PLCTL, or the DCL command
SET SYSTEM/POOL/LIMITS. For more information on these commands see Section 8.6.1.

8.5 PMT Actions During Extreme Fragmentation
Extreme fragmentation exists when the largest pool fragment is too small for any additional
dormant tasks to become active. In this case, pool is exhausted; you may not be able to enter
any commands to free pool space (including the ABORT command). At this point, PMT takes
immediate action to prevent total pool depletion by executing the following steps:
1. Enters kernel mode, which prevents any other tasks from executing but allows the system
to respond to device interrupts.
2.

Prevents the Task Termination Notification Program (TKTN) from being invoked. (Invoking
TKTN at this time depletes the available pool.) It does this by clearing the Task Control
Block (TCB) pointer for TKTN, which is stored within the Executive.

Sends a warning message to the console terminal.

Prompts you to abort one or more of the tasks displayed. (You must be at the console to
free pool in response to the PMT prompts.) After you select a task to abort, PMT returns
to user mode until the abort operation is finished.

5. Displays a message at the terminal running the task and at the console terminal when a
task is successfully aborted.
6.

Displays at the console terminal (upon request) an updated list of abortable tasks.

8.5. 1 PMT Messages During Extreme Pool Fragmentation
When extreme pool fragmentation occurs, PMT displays a message and a list of abortable tasks
at the console terminal, as follows:
dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss -- Warning -- Free pool exhausted
Abortable tasks in memory:
tttttt

I/O=xxx.

8-6 Memory Management

ttnn:

Display Fields
dd-mmm-yy

Displays the current date (for example, 22-Jul-87).
hh:mm:ss

Displays the current time in hours (24-hour time), minutes, and seconds.
tttttt
Displays the name of the abortable task.
p

Indicates a privileged task (a blank space indicates a nonprivileged task).

xxx
Displays the total outstanding I/O count for the task.
ttnn
Displays the terminal from which the task is currently running.
PMT lists the tasks in order of decreasing priority but does not display the priority of individual
tasks. Then, PMT prompts you to select one of the tasks from the list, as follows:
Enter a task to abort. or press RETURN to exit:

The abortable task list includes only those tasks that PMT considers eligible to abort. A task is
abortable if it meets the following requirements:
•

It must be active.

•

It must be resident in memory.

•

It cannot be privileged and running from the console terminal.

•

It cannot be a command line interpreter (CLI) task, an Ancillary Control Processor (ACP),
or the task loader.

•

It cannot have any internal conditions that prevent it from exiting upon an abort request
(for example, it is already aborted).

Aborting tasks releases pool resources for use by the remaining active tasks and allows the
system to continue operation. However, use discretion when selecting tasks to abort; aborting
certain tasks could render all or part of your application unusable. Therefore, only abort tasks
that consume pool and are relatively expendable (such as the Peripheral Interchange Program,
PIP, or the MACRO-II assembler, MAC).
By default, PMT does not include the privileged' tasks running from the console terminal in the
abortable task list. Therefore, if you do not want PMT to consider a privileged task abortable,
run the task from the console terminal.

Memory Management 8-7

PMT may also display the following messages during extreme fragmentation:
Task not installed, try again:
Task not aborted, try again:

Explanation: The task you specified is not installed, or it is not on the list of abort able tasks.
User Action: If you press the LINE FEED key in response to either prompt, PMT displays the
list of abortable tasks. 1£ you press the RETURN key, PMT returns to user mode for at least
7 seconds, giving the system an opportunity to recover from the low pool state.
Task not aborted, try again:

Explanation: The task is listed as abortable, but the task exited before PMT was able to
abort it.

User Action: Enter another task name.
"tttttt" aborted

Explanation: PMT sends this message to the console terminal after it successfully aborts a
task (taskname tttttt).
User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message.
OS-AUG-S7 13:35: 10-Warning-Free pool exhausted
"tttttt" aborted

Explanation: If the task was not running from the console terminal, PMT displays these
messages at the terminal from which the task was running.
User Action: No user action is required. This message informs the user running a task that
the task has been aborted.
Press LINE FEED for an updated task list,
enter a task to abort, or press RETURN to exit:

Explanation: PMT sends this message to the console terminal after it aborts a task.
User Action: Enter the name of a task to be aborted, or press the RETURN key to exit.

8.5.2 Annotated Example of PMT Output for Extreme Fragmentation
An annotated example of PMT output for extreme fragmentation is shown in Example 8-1. The
numbers in the example correspond to the numbered items in the list that follows the example.

8-8 Memory Management

Example 8-1:

PMT Output for Extreme Fragmentation

8-AUG-87 13:42:23 -- Warning -- Free pool exhausted
Abortable tasks in memory:
RMDEMO
COT...
AT.T30
EDIT14
MAIT20
TEST
PIPT21
MACT47

P
P
P

I/O=
1/0=
1/0=
I/O=
1/0=
1/0=
1/0=
1/0=

1.
1.
1.

1.
1.

TTO:
TTO:
TT30:
TT14:
TT20:
COO:
TT21:
TT47:

Enter a task to abort, or press RETURN to exit:
"PIPT21" aborted

Press LINE FEED for an updated task list,
enter a task to abort, or press RETURN to exit:
Abortable tasks in memory:
RMDEMO
COT ...
AT.T30
EDIT14
MAIT20
TEST
MACT47

P
P
P

O.
O.

1/0=
1/0=
1/0=
1/0=
1/0=
1/0=
1/0=

1.
1.
1.

O.
1.

TTO:
TTO:
TT30:
TT14:
TT20:
COO:
TT47:

Enter a task to abort, or press RETURN to exit:
Task not installed, try again:
"EDIT14 aborted

Press LINE FEED for an updated task list,
enter a task to abort, or press RETURN to EXIT:

Sends a warning message to logged-in terminals.

Et Displays the list of abortable tasks at the console terminal.
•

Prompts for a task to abort (PIPT21 is entered).

Aborts PIPT21.

CD Prompts for an updated task list, a task to abort, or to exit. (Press the LINE FEED key for an
updated task list.)
~

Displays the list of abortable tasks.

Prompts for a task to abort (EDT is entered).

Indicates that a task with the name EDT is not installed, and requests that you try again
(EDIT14 is entered).

Aborts EDIT14.

Prompts for an updated task list, a task to abort, or to exit. (Press the RETURN key to exit.)

Memory Management 8-9

8.6 Setting Pool Limit Parameters
The DCL command SET SYSTEM/POOL/LIMITS (MCR command SET /PLCTL) sets the pool
limit parameters used by the Executive pool monitor code and PMT. The syntax, parameters,
and parameter limits for the VMR command are discussed in Chapter 5. For a description of
the MCR command, see the RSX-llM-PLUS MeR Operations Manual; for the DCL command,
see the RSX-llM-PLUS Command Language Manual. Guidelines for setting the four command
parameters are discussed in the following subsections.
To determine whether the pool limits need to be changed during a low pool state, compare the
current values with the information sent to the console terminal (see Section 8.4.1).

8.6.1 Setting Low and High Pool Limits
The first two parameters of the SET /PLCTL command establish the low and high pool limits.
The Executive pool monitor code uses these limits to determine when major pool events occur.
In general, you should set the low limit value to the point where your system's workload cannot
increase without the risk of a pool resource deadlock. The appropriate value for this limit varies
with each system. You can determine the best value by experimenting with various limits. The
default value for the low pool limit is 60010 bytes.
Set the high limit value to reflect the type of use your system receives. The high limit parameter
controls the point where a low pool state is transformed into a high pool state. The high limit
defaults to 1600 10 bytes.
If pool use fluctuates considerably, a limit set much higher than the low limit can reduce the
number of pool state transitions. If pool use is typically constant, a high limit set close to the
low limit shows critical changes in the pool state more frequently. Since pool needs and use
vary, you should experiment with this parameter to determine the optimum value.

8.6.2 Setting Pool Fragment Size
This parameter establishes the minimum size of the largest pool fragment. PMT uses this limit
to determine when pool fragmentation problems exist. When the largest pool fragment is the
minimum size or greater, a high pool state exists. A low pool state exists when the largest
pool fragment is smaller than the minimum size. By default, the lowest permissible size of the
largest pool fragment is 200 10 bytes. Experiment with this parameter to determine the optimum
value.
Fragmentation is one of the more frequent and less desirable pool problems. Thus, the value
that you specify for this parameter can have an immediate impact on successful pool monitoring.

8.6.3 Setting Base Priority for Nonprivileged Tasks
This parameter establishes the base priority for non privileged tasks. The optimum value is
application specific, but the default is 5110. During a low pool state, PMT uses this parameter
to restrict newly requested nonprivileged tasks from competing for memory resources (see
Section 8.4.1). Only those tasks with a priority less than the specified base priority are restricted
in this way.

8-10 Memory Management

8.7 PMT Task-Build Options
By altering PMT's task-build file PMTBLD.CMD and rebuilding the task image, you can modify
the following features:
•

Timing control

•

PMT default Actions

•

Pool use controls

Each of these features affect PMT's response to pool conditions.
To include a modified version of PMT in the system permanently, use VMR to change the task
image, and then reboot the system. To run a modified version of PMT in the current system,
use DCL or MCR to remove the previous version and then install the new version.
The steps for modifying PMT with VMR are as follows:

Use the VMR command REMOVE to remove PMT (the task name is PMT ... ) from the
System Task Directory (STD).

Edit the task-build file (PMTBLD.CMD contains information on modifying PMT).

Task build PMT.

Use the VMR command INSTALL to install the modified task image.

Reboot the system to execute the modified version of PMT.

The steps for modifying PMT with DCL or MCR are as follows:

1. Abort PMT.
2.

Use the DCL or MCR command REMOVE to remove PMT from the STD.

3. Edit the task-build file.
4.

Task build PMT.

Use the DCL or MCR command INSTALL to install the modified version of PMT.

Use the DCL or MCR command RUN to run PMT.

The following sections describe the task-build options in more detail.

8.7. 1 Controlling PMT Timing
PMT operates in a cycle, running at regular intervals to monitor fragmentation and stopping
after the monitoring is done. When the Executive interrupts the cycle to report a new pool
event, PMT resets the cycle to begin at the point at which it was interrupted.
PMT's cycle can have one of two possible time lengths, depending on the current state of pool.
If a low pool state exists, the cycle lasts 20 seconds (plus the time PMT requires to execute the
low pool state actions). If a high pool state exists, the cycle lasts 60 seconds (plus the time PMT
requires to execute the high pool state actions).

Memory Management 8-11

To reduce the number of PMT cycles during a high pool state, lengthen the time it takes for
each cycle to complete. (The 60-second value is the default as well as the minimum value
for the cycle.) However, note that if you increase this value, PMT may not be as effective
at monitoring pool fragmentation. To compensate for this problem, use the DCL command
SET SYSTEM/POOL/LIMITS (MCR or VMR command SET /PLCTL), which increases the
minimum size of the largest pool fragment parameter (see Section 8.6.2). Increasing the
minimum fragment size increases PMT's chances of detecting pool fragment~tion problems.

8.7.2 Controlling PMT Action
You can modify some of the actions that PMT executes during the cycle. The actions are as
follows:
•

Sending warning messages to logged-in terminals

•

Checkpointing stopped tasks in memory

•

Aborting certain privileged tasks

Sending Warning Messages to Logged-in Terminals

When a low pools state exists, PMT sends warning messages to logged-in terminals. However,
by modifying PMTBLD.CMD, you can suppress these messages.
Checkpointing Stopped Tasks in Memory

When a low pool state exists, PMT requests the Executive to force checkpointing of all memoryresident tasks that have been stopped without outstanding nonbuffered I/O. (This includes tasks
with outstanding buffered I/O, CLI tasks, and ACP tasks.) When the Executive checkpoints a
task, it deallocates the task header, thereby reducing fragmentation.
You can modify PMTBLD.CMD to force checkpointing of memory-resident stopped tasks during
a high pool state. On systems with a large number of tasks that do not use external headers,
this reduces the effect of long-term fragmentation. Although this can increase the effective
use of available pool space, it may also cause a noticeable increase in disk I/O as tasks are
checkpointed. In addition, note that CLI tasks, ACP tasks, and tasks with outstanding buffered
I/O are always exempt from checkpointing while a high pool state exists (even if you modify
PMTBLD.CMD).
Aborting Certain Privileged Tasks

During extreme fragmentation, PMT displays a list of abortable tasks and prompts for tasks to
abort. By default, PMT does not list or abort privileged tasks running from the console terminal.
You can override this default by modifying PMTBLD.CMD. However, there are exceptions to
this option. These exceptions (CLI tasks, ACP tasks, and the task loader) cannot be listed as
abortable tasks.

8.7.3 Controlling Pool Use
When a low pool state is in effect, PMT executes the default pool use controls described in
Section 8.4.1. You can suppress any of these controls by modifying PMTBLD.CMD and by task
building PMT again.

8-12 Memory Management

8.8 Aborting PMT
To terminate PMT, abort the task with one of the following methods:
•

Issue an ABORT command from a privileged terminal.

•

Issue the Executive directive Abort Task (ABRT$) from a privileged task.

PMT then performs the following actions before it exits:
•

Restores a Task Control Block (TCB) pointer for the Task Termination Notification program
(TKTN), if PMT previously cleared the pointer and TKTN is currently installed (see
Section 8.4.2). This restores normal TKTN operations.

•

Prevents the Executive's pool monitor code from requesting PMT after PMT exits. PMT
clears a TCB pointer for PMT ... that was previously set by the DCL, MCR, or VMR INSTALL
command.

•

Cancels any outstanding pool use controls that were invoked by a low pool state.

•

Displays the following message at the console terminal:
Remove and reinstall PMT to restore pool monitoring
"PMT ... " aborted

This indicates that the TCB pointer for PMT has been cleared so that the Executive can no
longer run PMT. To restore the pointer, use DCL or MCR to remove and reinstall PMT.

8.9 Secondary Pool
Primary pool (usually referred to simply as "pool") is part of the Executive's partition in memory
and contains the Executive's database. Secondary pool is allocated from main memory. Unlike
primary pool, secondary pool is extensible. However, when you extend secondary pool, you
do so at the expense of main memory. Each time you increase the amount of secondary pool
space, you decrease the amount of available memory. As a system manager, you need to create
an appropriate balance between the two resources.
The system requires secondary pool to function normally. In particular, it uses secondary pool
to contain the following data structures:
•

TCBs for prototype tasks (tasks named ... xxx or xxx$$$)

•

Error Logging packets

•

Terminal Unit Control Block (UCB) extensions, for instruction and data space (1- and
D-space) systems

•

UCB extensions for mass-storage devices

•

Named directory context blocks

•

Extended logical name data structures

•

MeR command lines

•

Executive send/receive data packets

Memory Management 8-13

•

The map section of file windows (a stub file is kept in primary pool)

•

Resource Accounting account blocks (System Account Blocks (SABs), User Account Blocks
(UABs), and Task Account Blocks (TABs»

All other data structures are located in primary pool.
Certain conditions can deplete secondary pool rapidly. For example, a disconnected terminal
can generate noise that MCR interprets as a steady stream of input characters. MCR is unable
to send error messages as rapidly as it receives the input data, so the data packets accumulate
in secondary pool. Similarly, if someone leans on one of the terminal keypad keys for an
extended period of time, the escape sequences sent to MCR can create an overload of command
line packets.
When secondary pool becomes very low, nonprivileged users cannot log in to the system. (The
system permits privileged users to log in, although the accounting system does not record their
system usage.) Users (privileged or nonprivileged) who are already logged in to the system
cannot enter commands. Files and logical names become inaccessible, and devices cannot be
placed on line. If the number of free blocks in secondary pool reaches zero, rebooting the
system is the only way for you to regain control.
To avoid this situation, monitor secondary pool usage. If necessary, increase the total size or
availability of secondary pool (by removing installed tasks, for example). The subsections that
follow describe how to monitor, extend, and increase the availability of secondary pool.

8.9.1 Monitoring Secondary Pool Usage
The DCL command SHOW SECONDARY_POOL (MCR command SET jSECPOL) displays
secondary pool use on the system.
Display Format
SECPOL=secfr:secsiz:pctfr

secfr

Displays the number of free blocks in secondary pool in units of 32 1O -word blocks.
secsiz

Displays the total size of secondary pool in units of 32 1O -word blocks.
pctfr

Displays the percentage of free blocks in secondary pool.
Example
DCL>
SECPOL=285. :640. :44%
MCR>
SECPOL=285. :640. :44%

Displays the amount of secondary pool currently being used.

8-14 Memory Management

8.9.2 Displaying Secondary Pool Partitions
The DCL command SHOW PARTITIONS (MCR command PAR) displays a description of each
memory partition in the system, including secondary pool (SEC POOL). The display includes
the following information:
•

Partition name (SECPOL)

•

Address of the Partition Control Block (PCB)

•

Starting address of the partition (in octal)

•

Size of the partition (in octal)

•

Partition type (SEC POOL)

Use this command to determine whether or not a secondary pool partition is currently in
use. (For more information on the SHOW PARTITIONS command, see the RSX-11M-PLUS
Command Language Manual. For information on the PAR command, see the RSX-11M-PLUS
MCR Operations Manual.)

Formats
DCL>SHOW PARTITIONS
MCR>PAR[TITIONS]

Examples
>
SYSPAR 117734
065230
DRVPAR 117624
117340
117274
117164
117120

00174400
00174400
00216400
00216400
00221500
00226100
00227400

00010000
00010000
00140000
00003100
00001300
00001300
00004000

MAIN
TASK
MAIN
DRIVER (DB:)
DRIVER (DK:)
DRIVER (DS:)
DRIVER (DM:)

LDRPAR 117560
116054
SECPOL 117450
GEN
117404
115454
073400
052274
060774
037210

00356400
00356400
00421200
00443200
00443200
00534000
00542600
00571400
00620100

00002600
00002600
00022000
04734600
00070600
00006000
00003500
00020100
00036100

MAIN
TASK
< ... LDR>
SEC POOL
MAIN
TASK

TASK

RO COM + ... EDI+
TASK

TASK

Displays the PCB address as 117450, the starting address for the secondary pool partition as
421200 8 , and the total size of the partition as 22,000 8 bytes.

Memory Management 8-15

8.9.3 Extending Secondary Pool
Loading additional secondary pool into memory increases the availability of secondary pool,
but it reduces the amount of memory available for tasks and common regions. To avoid an
unacceptable decrease in system performance, add secondary pool in small increments and
monitor the system after each addition.

8.9.3.1 Using the LOAD Command
The LOAD /EXP=SEC command creates an additional secondary pool subpartition (called a
region; see Chapter 1) in the GEN partition. You can enter the LOAD /EXP=SEC command
many times, increasing the amount of secondary pool slightly each time. Note that the LOAD
command does not alter the SECPOL partition; the size of SECPOL is determined when the
partition is created during system generation (see Section 8.9.5).
To decrease the size of secondary pool after you have extended it with the LOAD command, you
must rebootstrap the system. You cannot unload secondary pool with the UNLOAD command.

Note
The LOAD command does not initiate checkpointing to free a space in a
partition.
Format
LOAD /EXP=SEC [/SIZE=parsize]

Keywords
/EXP=5EC

Specifies the name of the extended Executive partition (SEC.TSK) to be loaded into memory.
By default, SEC is loaded into the partition.
/SIZE=parsize

Specifies the minimum size (in words) of the partition into which secondary pool is to be
loaded and creates a memory region of this size.
The value of parsize is rounded up to the next highest unit of 1008 words and must be less
than 100,0008 words.

Examples
>

Loads 500 8 additional words of secondary pool into a region in the GEN partition.

8-16 Memory Management

OCL>
SECPOL 117734 00120000
SYSPAR 117670 00160000
117624 00160000
117270 00264600
116664 00270700

GEN

114040
113500
056520
060624

00454700
00531700
00604500
01043000

00040000
00274700
00104600
00004100
00031600

SEC POOL
MAIN
RO COM !OIR11M!
TASK
< ... LOR>
TASK

03323100
00040000
00014400
00022000

MAIN
RO COM !FCSRES!
TASK

TASK

057350 03600000 00001000 RW COM !SEC.PL!

Displays the total secondary pool size as 41,000 8 bytes. The SECPOL partition is 40,000 8 bytes;
the region of secondary pool added to the GEN partition is 10008 bytes. (See the previous
description of the SHOW PARTITIONS and PAR commands.)

8.9.3.2 Modifying the Configuration Data File, SYSPARAM.DAT
The SECONDARYJOOL parameter in the configuration data file SYSPARAM.DAT specifies
the amount by which secondary pool is increased when the system startup procedure
executes. On pregenerated RSX-11M-PLUS and MicrojRSX systems, you can edit the
file LB:[l,2]SYSPARAM.DAT and change the value specified for the SECONDARYJOOL
parameter. Then, restart the system to obtain the increase (or decrease) in secondary pool.

Format
SECONOARY_POOL=n

Specifies the number of 32-word blocks by which secondary pool is increased. To load
additional secondary pool, increase the value for n. To unload secondary pool, decrease the
value for n.
The default is SECONDARY_POOL=O; no additional secondary pool is loaded.

8.9.4 Increasing the Availability of Secondary Pool
Depending on your application, increasing the total size of secondary pool may not be
appropriate. If your requirements for memory generally exceed your requirements for secondary
pool, then you may decide to increase the availability of secondary pool (instead of the overall
size).
By using DCL (or MCR) commands, you can create free pool space, as follows:
•

Use the SHOW TASKS jINSTALLED (TAL) and SHOW TASKS j ACTIVE (ATL) commands
to determine which tasks are currently using secondary pool. By default, when you install
a prototype task (that is, a task with a name in the form ... xxx or xxx$$$), the Task Control
Block (TCB) is placed in secondary pool. When the tasks are run, the system copies the
TCBs into primary pool.

Memory Management 8-17

If you use the REMOVE command to eliminate some of the installed prototype tasks, the
space that was previously required for the TeBs is freed for other uses.

•

Use the SHOW ASSIGNMENTS/ALL (ASN /ALL) and SHOW LOGICALS/ALL
(DFL / ALL) commands to display all the logical assignments for your system, group, and
current terminal session. If possible, delete some of the assignments with the DEASSIGN
(ASN or DFL) command.

•

Use the Resource Accounting POOL _RESERVE parameter to limit the use of secondary
pool. The parameter POOL _RESERVE allows you to alter the secondary pool limit when
you start Resource Accounting. The format is as follows:

The value parameter specifies the number of blocks of secondary pool (in decimal) that
Resource Accounting must leave free after each allocation. If Resource Accounting cannot
leave this amount free, the allocation fails. This prevents the swamping of secondary pool.
The default for value is a quarter of the total secondary pool size. Use of the default is
recommended.
By modifying the secondary pool limit, you can restrict the amount of secondary pool used
by Resource Accounting. If you do not use Resource Accounting, deactivate it by entering
the STOP / ACCOUNTING command.
For more information on Resource Accounting, see Chapter 10.

8.9.5 Saving Secondary Pool (RSX-ll M-PLUS Systems Only)
After you load additional secondary pool into memory (using the LOAD command), you may
want to make the increase in secondary pool permanent. You can do this in one of two ways:
•

Re-create the system image with VMR

•

SAVE the current system image

If the system image file is too small, use the VMR command SET /P AR to place secondary
pool in a lower portion of memory, or use the Peripheral Interchange Program (PIP) to make
the system image file larger. Then, run VMR again to reinitialize the file. For more information
on the correct procedure, see the RSX-llM-PLUS System Generation and Installation Guide.

The SAVE command copies the current RSX-11M-PLUS operating system image (the contents
of main memory) into the system image file from which the current system was booted.
(The system image file is a special task image file named, by convention, RSX11M.SYS.) The
command saves the image so that a hardware bootstrap or the BOOT command can later be
used to reload and restart it. In addition, the SAVE command saves secondary pool, which
contains prototype TCBs.
There is no size restriction; the size of the system image file determines the maximum size that
can be saved. However, the system image file must be contiguous and it must be large enough
to contain all of secondary pool.
For a description of the SAVE command format and keywords, see the RSX-11M-PLUS MeR

Operations Manual.

8-18 Memory Management

8.10 Memory Compaction-The Shuffler
The Shuffler (SHF) is a privileged task designed to compact space in partitions when a memory
allocation failure occurs. This section describes the Shuffler structure, ways to monitor the
Shuffler, and the Shuffler algorithms for the operating system.

8. 10. 1 Executive and Memory Usage
The Shuffler task image is approximately 70010 words long and is installed during system
generation. By default, it is built for the partition SYSP AR, which is also used by the MCR
dispatcher and the Task Termination Notification program (TKTN). To obtain better performance
with a heavily loaded system, fix the Shuffler in its own partition. Then, the Shuffler does not
have to compete for memory with MCR and TKTN.
The Shuffler is useful on a system with few tasks loaded in memory, because such a system
only requires the Shuffler intermittently. In contrast, if your system is heavily loaded with tasks,
the Shuffler may execute too often (due to frequent memory allocation failures). However, you
can control the frequency at which the Shuffler executes by modifying a timer in the Executive
common region.
The word $SHFTM in the Executive system common region serves as a timer. Each time the
Executive requests the Shuffler, this timer is checked. If the timer registers zero, the Shuffler
can be requested; otherwise, the request for the Shuffler is ignored.
The amount of time (in clock ticks) that elapses before the Shuffler is requested again is stored
in the system common area $SHFCT. When a request to the Shuffler is successful, $SHFTM is
initialized for the new interval and the time interval is stored in $SHFCT.
As a privileged user, you can modify the value in $SHFCT by using the MCR command OPEN.
To change $SHFCT, obtain a copy of the Executive map file RSXIIM.MAP that is produced
during system generation. Use the map to determine the address of the global symbol $SHFCT.
Then, use the OPEN command to examine or to modify the value. If the value is set too high,
fragmentation may become a problem because the Shuffler is not requested often enough. If
the value is set too low (or to zero), system response may decrease because the Shuffler is being
requested too frequently.

8.10.2 Monitoring the Shuffler
During peak system usage periods, several memory allocation failures may result in repeated
requests to the Shuffler, which produces a noticeable decrease in response time. To monitor
the Shuffler's effect on your system, use the Resource Monitoring Display (RMD). RMD is a
privileged task that displays information concerning task activity on the operating system. (For
more information on RMD, see Chapter 7.)
To monitor Shuffler activity with RMD, dedicate a video terminal to running the RMD display.
Monitor the memory display page for the following information:
•

The currently executing task. *IDLE* indicates that no task is executing.

•

The number of active tasks in memory and the amount of memory they occupy

•

The number of active tasks checkpointed (on disk) and the total memory they would require

Memory Management 8-19

If the Shuffler is active, tasks are moving down in the partition, and the currently executing task
field registers the Shuffler as the active task. (Occasionally, even though the Shuffler registers
as the active task, tasks cannot be seen moving down in the partition.)

To verify that tasks are not moving when the Shuffler is executing, check the number of active
tasks checkpointed (on disk) and the number of tasks waiting for memory. If this count remains
the same over a period of time, the Shuffler is executing but cannot create enough space for
waiting tasks. If this happens, the Shuffler is consuming system resources and should be
aborted.
If the Shuffler task continues to consume system resources, remove the Shuffler from your
system with the DeL or MeR command REMOVE.

8.10.3 The Shuffler Algorithms
When a memory allocation failure occurs, the Executive requests the Shuffler. The Shuffler
searches memory for a partition that has at least one region waiting for space. When the
Shuffler locates such a partition, it attempts to move (shuffle) regions in the partition to create
the contiguous area necessary to load waiting regions.
The Shuffler shuffles common regions created by Executive memory management directives.
Because the system maintains an outstanding I/O count on a region-by-region basis, the Shuffler
can determine whether outstanding I/O is pending. When there is no I/O pending, common
regions can be shuffled.
The Shuffler uses two algorithms to move regions in memory. Each algorithm executes several
steps repeatedly until the partition reaches a stable state.
The First Pass Algorithm

In the first pass, the Shuffler attempts to move each region to the base of the partition. When
regions are moved to the base of the partition, free space is created at the top of the partition
so that a waiting region can enter memory. Shuffling occurs in the following steps:
1. The Shuffler calls the Executive to unconditionally checkpoint all task regions of checkpointable tasks that have been stopped or blocked with a command line interpreter (eLI)
command.
2.

The Shuffler attempts to move each region to the base of the partition and blocks each
executable task from further execution. If a region has outstanding I/O, the Shuffler waits
for the outstanding I/O count to reach zero. If the I/O count does not reach zero in
approximately 0.5 second, the Shuffler marks the region as having outstanding I/O and
restarts the first pass algorithm (step 1).

3. After shuffling is complete, each task mapped to the region is unblocked and resumes
execution.
Unless you fix tasks in dedicated partitions, fixed tasks can also be shuffled.
If fragmentation is eliminated at the end of the first pass and there is enough space available,
then a region may be loaded into memory. However, space may not be available if there are
several regions already loaded in memory, or if fragmentation is dividing the partition into two
or more partition sections. A partition section is a subset of the area in a partition. Each partition
section is flanked on at least one side by a region that cannot be shuffled. For example, if a

8-20 Memory Management

device driver is loaded in the middle of a partition, that partition is divided into two partition
sections.
If the Shuffler encounters a region that cannot be shuffled during the first pass, it shuffles the

regions that can be moved to the base of the partition section. The Shuffler does not shuffle
regions around a region that cannot be moved. The free space in each partition section cannot
be merged with the free space in another partition section; however, it can be merged at the
top of each section.
If memory space is not available for waiting regions or if partition sections remain after the first

pass, the Shuffler initializes the second pass algorithm.
The Second Pass Algorithm

The second pass algorithm is executed once for each partition section within a partition. This
pass attempts to create a reverse priority list of regions that can be checkpointed by the waiting
task.
During the second pass, the Shuffler creates a list in ascending priority order of the regions in
each partition section. Then, the Shuffler compares the size of the waiting region with the sum
of free space in the partition section, plus the total of one or more lower priority, checkpointable
regions. If the waiting region is smaller, the Shuffler tells the Executive to checkpoint the lower
priority region or regions.
Checkpointing the lower priority region or regions creates available space in memory, but the
space may not be contiguous. The Executive can initiate the first pass algorithm to accumulate
the free space in the partition section and to allocate it to the waiting region. As long as
there are regions in a partition that cannot be moved, memory stays divided into two or more
partition sections.
If the Shuffler completes the second pass without finding room for a waiting region, the Shuffler

searches for the next partition with waiting regions. When no other regions are waiting for
memory space, the Shuffler exits.

Memory Management 8-21

Chapter 9
The Console Logger (RSX-ll M-PLUS Systems Only)
The Console Logger consists of a driver (CODRV) and a task (COT ... ). Together, they control
I/O to the console output device (pseudo device CO:) and record time-stamped system messages
on a terminal, in a log file, or both. You select support for Console Logging during system
generation. Then, you enter Monitor Console Routine (MCR) SET commands from a privileged
terminal to start and stop Console Logging, to disable the log file or the console terminal, and
to reassign the log file and console terminal.

9. 1 The Console Output Device
Your system has a console output device (CO:) and a console terminal. When the Console
Logger is active, I/O to CO: is controlled by the console output task (COT ... ) and the console
driver (CODRV). When the Console Logger is not active, CO: is a pseudo device; I/O to CO: is
controlled by the terminal driver. In both cases, output to CO: can be forwarded to a terminal
that you assign as the console terminal.

9. 1. 1 Using CO: as a Pseudo Device
When the Console Logger is not active, CO: is a pseudo device. The terminal driver controls
all I/O to CO: that is redirected to the console terminal. If you start Console Logging and then
decide you want to use CO: as a pseudo device, you can stop Console Logging by specifying
the option =OFF with the MCR command SET /COLOG (see Section 9.4.3).
You can redirect CO: to any terminal on your system by using the DCL command
ASSIGN/REDIRECT (MCR command REDIRECT). The ASSIGN/REDIRECT (REDIRECT)
command redirects all I/O requests previously directed to one physical or pseudo device
unit (such as CO:) to another physical or pseudo device unit (such as a terminal).

Format
DCL>ASSIGN/REDIRECT oddnn:=nddnn:
MCR>REDIRECT nddnn:=oddnn:

The Console Logger (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 9-1

Parameters

oddnn
Specifies the old device unit from which requests have been redirected.

nddnn
Specifies the new device unit to which subsequent requests will be directed.
For more information on the ASSIGN/REDIRECT command, see the RSX-llM-PLUS Command
Language Manual or the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 2. For information on the REDIRECT
command, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS MCR Operations Manual.

9.1.2 Using CO: with the Console Logger
When the Console Logger is active, the console driver (CODRV) and the console output task
(COT ... ) control all I/O to CO:. If you stop Console Logging and then decide you want to
use CO: with the Console Logger, you can start Console Logging by specifying the option =ON
with the MCR command SET /COLOG (see Section 9.4.2).
Console Logging allows you to record messages sent to CO: in a log file. You can record
messages on the console terminal, in the log file, or both. When you do not need an online
display of Console Logging, you can record messages in the log file and leave the terminal free
for a different use. (For information on the corresponding commands, see Section 9.4.)
Prior to sending the first message after a change of date, the Console Logger sends the current
time and date. The Console Logger also time-stamps messages to CO: that have not been
time-stamped by the task issuing the message. The time appears in the following format:
hh:mm: ss

For example, if a message was sent at 5 minutes and 5 seconds after 1 o'clock in the afternoon,
the time-stamp would appear as follows:
13:10:05

Note that the hours are in shown in 24-hour time.

9.2 Installing COT ... and Loading CODRV
On RSX-IIM-PLUS operating systems, if you select Console Logging during system generation,
the system generation procedure installs the console output task (COT ... )
and loads
the console driver (CODRV); the necessary commands are included in the command file
LB:[1,54]SYSVMR.CMD. Pregenerated RSX-IIM-PLUS (RL02 distribution kits) and Micro/RSX
operating systems install COT ... and load CODRV during the system startup procedure.
However, if one of the following two conditions exists, you need to reinstall COT ... and reload
CODRV:
1.

You have removed CODRV, COT ... , or both, and you want to restore Console Logging.

You have altered SYSVMR.CMD to eliminate the commands for installing COT ... and for
loading CODRV.

To install COT ... , use the DCL, MCR, or VMR INSTALL command, as follows:
>

9-2 The Console Logger (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

To load CODRV, use the MCR or VMR command LOAD, as follows:
>

For more information on the DCL and MCR commands, see the appropriate command language
manuals. For a description of the VMR commands INSTALL and LOAD, see Chapter 5.

9.3 Communicating with the Console Logger
You can use MCR commands to communicate with the Console Logger directly. Because COT ...
is a privileged task, you must issue the commands from a privileged terminal. Console Logging
commands start and stop Console Logging, assign the console terminal, and specify the console
log file. These commands are processed by the COT ... task.
There are no DCL equivalents for the Console Logging commands.
Table 9-1 summarizes the Console Logging commands. Section 9.4 describes each Console
Logging command in detail.
Table 9-1:

Summary of Console Logging Commands

Command

Function

SET /COLOG

Displays the current console terminal and log file
assignments.

SET /COLOG=ON

Starts Console Logging.

SET /COLOG=OFF

Stops Console Logging.

SET /COLOG/COT[ERM][=TTnn:]

Enables the console terminal or changes the console
terminal assignment.

SET /COLOG/NOC[OTERM]

Disables the console terminal.

SET /COLOG/LOG[FILE][=[filespec]]

Enables the console log file or changes the logfile
assignment.

SET /COLOG/NOLOGFILE

Disables the log file.

You can also communicate with the Console Logger by running tasks that use the driver
CODRV. Tasks communicate with CODRV by issuing Executive directive Queue I/O requests
(QIO$). CODRV handles I/O to the console device CO: for read and write requests.
Tasks can attach to the console device; however, the attach does not provide the task with
exclusive access to CO: (it is considered a null operation or no-op). All other I/O functions
to the console device are passed to the terminal driver as if they were issued directly to the
console.
The subsections that follow describe task communication with the Console Logger.

The Console Logger (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

9-3

9.3.1 Writing to CO:
Tasks can issue QIO$ requests to print systenl messages on the console terminal or to write
system messages in the console log file. For example, HELLO issues a QIO$ to print a message
to the console terminal each time a user logs in to the system.
Messages to CO: can begin with a CTRL/G sequence (that is, a bell sound) to ensure that
COT... sends the message to the most recently assigned console terminal. If you disable the
console terminal by specifying the /NOCOTERM option, and you want the message to go to
the most recently assigned console terminal, begin the message by pressing CTRL/G. (For a
description of the /NOCOTERM option, see Section 9.4.5.)
The buffer in COT... accepts messages not longer than 256 10 bytes. Note that the MCR
command SET /BUFFERSIZE, which sets the buffer size of device CO:, does not affect this
restriction. (For more information on the SET /BUFFERSIZE command, see the RSX-llM-PLUS
MCR Operations Manual.)

9.3.2 Reading from CO:
Tasks can issue QIO$ requests to read input from the console terminal. As a result, you can
use the console terminal to respond interactively to system prompts.
When messages are read from the console terminal, COT... does not record the messages in a
log file.

9.4 Console Logging Command Descriptions
Console Logging commands perform the following functions:
•

Display the current console terminal and log file assignments.

•

Start and stop Console Logging.

•

Change the console terminal and log file assignments.

•

Disable the console terminal or the log file.

Use the MCR command SET for all the Console Logging command formats.

General Format
SET /COLOG[MCRoption] ...

Keyword
/COLOG

Specifies the Console Logging keyword.

Parameter
MCRoption

Specifies one of the Console Logging functions.
letters.

9-4 The Console Logger (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

You can truncate the options to three

9.4.1 Displaying Current Console and Log File Assignments
To display the current console terminal and log file assignments, enter the MCR command
SET jCOLOG without specifying a Console Logging function, as follows:
>

Use the preceding command to determine if the Console Logger is active. When the Console
Logger is active, COT... displays the current console terminal and log file assignments. For
example:
>
COT -Console = TTOOO:
Logfile = DBOOO: [1.4]CONSOLE.LOG;1

If the Console Logger is not active, COT... displays the console and log file assignments as

"None." For example:
COT -Console = None
Logfile = None

9.4.2 Starting Console Logging (SET /COLOG=ON)
To start Console Logging, specify the option =ON with the command SET jCOLOG.

Format
SET /COLOG=ON

When you start Console Logging, COT ... retains the current console terminal assignment. If
you have just bootstrapped the system, COT ... assigns CO: to the terminal TTO.
The default location and name of the log file is LB:(1,4]CONSOLE.LOG. The COT ... task always
creates a new version of the default log file when you start Console Logging.

9.4.3 Stopping Console Logging (SET /COLOG=OFF)
To stop Console Logging, specify the option =OFF with the command SET jCOLOG.

Format
SET /COLOG=OFF

When you stop Console Logging, the current console terminal assignment is retained. Use the
DCL command SHOW DEVICES (MCR command DEV) to display the current console terminal.
(For a description of how to monitor CO: redirection, see Section 9.5.)

Note
Do not abort the COT ... task. Aborting COT ... causes severe pool fragmentation.

The Console Logger (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 9-5

9.4.4 Enabling or Reassigning CO: (/COTERM)
To enable the most recent console terminal assignment or to reassign the default assignment to
a different device, specify the /COTERM option with the command SET /COLOG.

Format
SET /COLOG/COTERM[=ttnn:]

Parameter
ttnn:

Specifies the newly assigned console terminal.
When you bootstrap your system, the default console terminal assignment is TTO. When you
start Console Logging, the default console terminal assignment is the current console output
device.

9.4.5 Disabling CO: (/NOCOTERM)
If you cannot dedicate one of your terminals to receiving system messages, disable the console
terminal. The Console Logger can maintain a log file of system messages without using a
console terminal.

To disable the console terminal, specify the /NOCOTERM option with the SET /COLOG
command.
>

Then, assign CO: to the null device (NL:). Use one of the following commands:
MCR>
DCL>

If you do not assign CO: to a null device, the Console Logger displays the message "Device not
ready" whenever it receives a message beginning with a CTRL/G sequence (a bell sound).

9.4.6 Enabling or Reassigning the Log File (/LOGFILE)
To enable the log file or to reassign it to a different file specification, specify the /LOGFILE
option with the command SET /COLOG.

Format
SET /COLOG/LOG[FILE] [=[filespec]]

Parameter
ftlespec

Represents any valid file specification. The default file specification is LB:[l,4]CONSOLE.LOG.
For a description of valid file specifications, see the RSX-11M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual
or the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 1.

9-6 The Console Logger (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

Using the /LOGFILE option, you can do the following:
•

Change only part of the log file specification.

•

Create a new version of the log file.

•

Reassign the log file back to the default specification.

These changes are described in the following subsections.

9.4.6. 1 Changing the Log File Specification
To change only part of the file specification for the log file, type only that part of the file
specification after the equal sign (=). When you do not specify the complete file specification,
the COT ... task uses the default file specification LB:[l,4]CONSOLE.LOG to supply the missing
values.
For example, if the system default device LB: is DRO, specify
DBO:[301,55]CONSOLE.LOG by entering the following command line:

the

log

file

If you want the log file to be TESTLOG.LOG in the default User Identification Code (UIC) on
device LB:, enter the following command line:
>

9.4.6.2 Creating a New Version of the Log File
When you use the /LOGFILE option to reassign the log file, the COT ... task creates a new
version of the current log file. However, you can also use /LOGFILE to create a new version
without reassigning the file, as follows:
>

Although a new version of the log file is created, the rest of the file specification does not
change.

If you disabled the log file with the /NOLOGFILE option, this command line restores the most
recent log file assignment.

9.4.6.3 Reassigning the Log File Back to the Default
To change a log file back to the default, specify the /LOGFILE option without the equal sign,
as follows:
>

The preceding command line creates and opens a new version of the default log file.

The Console Logger (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only) 9-7

9.4.7 Disabling the Log File (/NOLOGFILE)
To prevent the Console Logger from recording system messages in the log file, specify the
/NOLOGFILE option with the command SET /COLOG.

Format
SET /COLOG/NOLOGFILE

After you disable the log file, you still receive system messages (time-stamped by COT ... ) at
the console terminal.

9.4.8 Using Multiple Console Logging Commands
You can enter multiple Console Logging commands in a command line by separating each
option with a slash (/).
The following examples show how to use several Console Logging commands in a single
command line.

Examples
>

Starts Console Logging and assigns the console terminal to TT17. This command line also
opens a log file named TESTLOG.TST in the default User File Directory (UFD) on the default
system device (LB:).
>

Disables the console terminal and restores the log file to the default.

9.5 Monitoring the Status of the Console Terminal
If you do not specify a Console Logging function, the SET /COLOG command displays the
console terminal assignment. For example:
>
COT -Console
Logfile

= TT051:
= DBOOO: [1.4]CONSOLE.LOG

To determine the status of CO: while the Console Logger is active, you can also use the DCL
command SHOW DEVICES (MCR command DEV). If CO: is active, the system responds with
a message to indicate that the console driver (CODRV) is loaded and COT ... is handling system
messages to CO:. For example:
DCL>

coo:

LOADED

MCR>
COO: LOADED

9-8 The Console Logger (RSX-IIM-PLUS Systems Only)

If you disable Console Logging, the system displays the terminal to which you have redirected
the CO: pseudo device. For example:
DCL>

coo:

TT51:

MCR>

coo:

TT51:

Before COT... exits, it redirects CO: to the current console terminal. If there is no console
terminal when you stopped Console Logging (that is, if you disabled it with the /NOCOTERM
option), then CO: is redirected to the last terminal COT ... assigned as the console terminal. In
the previous example, the terminal driver handles messages directed to CO: and redirects them
to TT51.
If you disable the console terminal with the /NOCOTERM option but continue to record system
messages to CO: in a log file, use the SHOW DEVICES (DEV) command to determine the status
of CO:. For example:
DCL>

coo:

LOADED

>
COO: LOADED

In this example, the console driver is loaded. COT... handles all messages directed to CO:;
however, system messages are not directed to a terminal. Use the display option SET /COLOG
to verify that CO: is not assigned to a terminal.

9.6 Redirecting the Console Terminal
Use the DCL command ASSIGN/REDIRECT (MCR command RED) to redirect CO: to a terminal
when the Console Logger is not active. If you try to redirect CO: while the Console Logger is
active, ASSIGN/REDIRECT (RED) returns the following error message:
-- Device not redirectable

For example, assume that the Console Logger is active and the console terminal is assigned to
TT2. When you stop Console Logging, COT ... redirects CO: to TT2 before exiting. To verify
that CO: is redirected to TT2, use the SHOW DEVICES (DEV) command. Then, to assign the
console terminal to TTO, use the ASSIGN/REDIRECT (RED) command, as follows:
DCL>
MCR>

When you restart Console Logging, COT ... assigns TTO as the console terminal.

The Console Logger (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 9-9

9.7 Reading the Log File
To read the log file, use the DCL command TYPE with the /SHARED qualifier or use the
Peripheral Interchange Program (PIP) with the Shared Read (/SR) switch. When you specify
the /LOGFILE option, the log file is open for writing; so, to read the file, you must specify that
it is shareable. Use one of the following command lines:
DCL>
MCR>

If you omit the /SHARED qualifier (/SR switch), you will receive the following error message:
xxx -- Open failure on input file
DRO:[1,4]CONSOLE.LOG;1 -- Accessed for write

The variable xxx represents the first three letters of the command (that is, TYP or PIP).
For more information on PIP, see the RSX-11M-PLUS Utilities Manual. For more information
on the TYPE/SHARED command, see the RSX-I1M-PLUS Command Language Manual or the
Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 2.

Example
16:43:19
16:43:35
16:45:07
16:46:21
16:46:32
16:47:22
16:47:38
16:47:49
16:47:58
16:48:01
16:49:40

Logout user
Login user
Login user
*** DMO: -Login user
Login user
*** LPO: -Logout user
Logout user
Login user
Login user

[1,4] TT53:
ALPHA
[7,334] TT53:
BRAVO
[7,42] TT13:
Dismount complete
DECNET
[240,240] TT30:
CHARLIE
[7,373] TT22:
Not ready
[1,4] TT53:
[7,373] TT22:
ALPHA
[7,334] TT53:
DECNET
[240,240] HTO:

Displays a sample log file.

9.8 Sample Console Logging Sessions
The examples that follow show typical Console Logging terminal sessions. They illustrate how
to use the Console Logging commands described in this chapter.
These examples assume that the pseudo device LB: is assigned to DBO.

Examples
>

COT -Console
Logfile

= None

Displays the current console terminal (none) and log file (none) assignments, indicating that the
Console Logger is not active.

9-10 The Console Logger (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

DCL>

coo:

TTO:

MCR>

coo:

TTO:

Uses the DCL command SHOW DEVICES (MCR command DEV) to show how CO: is redirected.
CO: is redirected to TTO, which means that the Console Logger is not active and that the terminal
driver redirects CO: to TTO.
>
>

coo:

LOADED

Starts Console Logging and then shows that the Console Logger is active because CODRV is
loaded.
>
COT -Console
Logfile

= TTOOO:
= DBOOO:[1.4]CONSOLE.LOG;1

Shows that COT... redirects CO: to TTO and that DBO:[1,4]CONSOLE.LOG;1 is the log file.
These are both the defaults when you bootstrap your system.
>
>,

Assigns the console terminal to TT51 and the log file to DR:[301,55]TEST.LOG. The COT ... task
fills in the missing fields of the file specification with values from the default file specification.
In this example, COT ... supplies the file type.
>
COT -Console
Logfile

= TT051:
= DROOO: [301.55]TEST.LOG;1

Displays the current console terminal (TT51) and log file (DR:[301,55]TEST.LOG;1) assignments
resulting from command lines in the preceding example.
>
>
COT -Console = None
Logfile = DROOO:[301.55]TEST.LOG;1

Disables the console terminal and retains the current log file (DR:[301,55]TEST.LOG;1). The
display option confirms this.
>

coo:

LOADED

Shows that when you disable the console terminal with the /NOCOTERM option (see the
previous example), the Console Logger is still active (CODRV is loaded), but CO: is not
redirected to any terminal.

The Console Logger (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

9-11

>
>
COT -Console
Logfile

= TT051:

= None:

Illustrates the multiple commands that restore the most recent console terminal assignment
(TTSl) and disable the log file. The display option confirms this.
>
>
COT -Console = TT017:
Logfile = DROOO: [301.55]TEST.LOG;2

Illustrates multiple commands, which assign the console terminal to TT17 and which restore
the most recent log file. The display option confirms these assignments. The version number
of the log file is incremented.
>
>
COT -Console = None
Logfile = None
>
coo: TT17:

Stops Console Logging. The display option confirms that the Console Logger is not active. CO:
is redirected to TT17, which was the last console terminal assignment before COT ... exited.
MCR>
MCR>

coo:

TT51:

DCL>
DCL>

coo:

TT51:

Redirects CO: to TTSI with the DCL command ASSIGN/REDIRECT (MCR command RED) and
confirms this with the DCL command SHOW DEVICES (MCR command DEV).
>
>
COT -Console
Logfile

= TT051:
= DB001: [7.301]CONSOLE.LOG;1

Illustrates multiple commands on a command line, which start Console Logging, retain the
current console terminal assignment (TTSl) redirected with the ASSIGN/REDIRECT (RED)
command in the previous example, and open a log file DBOOl:[7,301]CONSOLE.LOG;1. The
display option confirms these assignments.

9-12

The Console Logger (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

>
>

COT -Console
Logfile

= TTOOO:

= DBOOO: [l,4]CONSOLE.LOG;2

Illustrates multiple commands on a command line, which assign the console terminal to TTO
and restore the default log file. The display option confirms these assignments. The version
number of the log file is incremented.
DCL>
TYP -- Open failure on input file
DBO: [l,4]CONSOLE.LOG;3 -- Accessed for write
MCR>
PIP -- Open failure on input file
DBO:[l,4]CONSOLE.LOG;3 -- Accessed for write

Illustrates what happens when you try to read an open log file without the DCL TYPE command
qualifier /SHARED (the PIP Shared Read switch /SR).
DCL>
16:43:19
16:43:35
16:45:07
16:46:21
16:46:32
16:47:22
16:47:38
16:47:49
16:47:58
16:48:01
16:49:40

Logout user [1,4] TT53:
[7,334] TT53:
Login user ALPHA
[7,42] TT13:
Login user BRAVO
*** DMO: -- Dismount complete
Login user DECNET
[240,240] TT30:
Login user CHARLIE
[7,373] TT22:
*** LPO: -- Not ready
Logout user [1,4] TT53:
Logout user [7,373] TT22:
[7 ,334] TT53:
Login user ALPHA
[240 , 240] HTO:
Login user DEC NET

MCR>.
16:43: 19
16:43:35
16:45:07
16:46:21
16:46:32
16:47:22
16:47:38
16:47:49
16:47:58
16:48:01
16:49:40

Logout user [1,4] TT53:
[7,334] TT53:
Login user ALPHA
[7,42] TT13:
Login user BRAVO
*** DMO: -- dismount complete
Login user DEC NET
[240,240] TT30:
Login user CHARLIE
[7,373] TT22:
*** LPO: -- not ready
Logout user [1,4] TT53:
Logout user [7,373] TT22:
[7 ,334] TT53:
Login user ALPHA
[240,240] HTO:
Login user DECNET

Shows how to read an open log file by using the /SHARED qualifier (PIP /SW switch). Each
message in the log file begins with time-stamping.
>'

COT -- Not logging on a terminal or to a file, COT exiting
>
COO: TTO:

Disables the console terminal and the log file. COT ... exits because no Console Logging is in
progress. COT ... displays a message informing you that it is exiting. The MCR command DEV

The Console Logger (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 9-13

shows that CO is redirected to TTO, which was the console terminal assignment before COT ...
exited.

9.9 Console Logging Error Messages
COT... generates the following error messages:
COT -LUN assignment to console terminal failed

Explanation: You specified an incorrect terminal number as the console terminal.
User Action: Use the /COTERM option to assign the console terminal to a terminal in your
hardware configuration.
COT-Illegal console terminal

Explanation: You tried to assign a device that is off line or that is not a terminal to CO:.
The device may be illegal because it is a spooled terminal.
User Action: Use the /COTERM option to assign a terminal in your hardware configuration
to CO:.
COT-Console driver not loaded, COT exiting

Explanation: The console driver, CODRV, is not loaded.
User Action: Load the console driver and start Console Logging.
COT-Maximum consecutive write errors, disabling logftle

Explanation: An error occurred on five consecutive write operations to the log file. COT ...
closes the log file and disables logging to the log file.
User Action: Determine the problem that caused the write errors and correct it. Then, restart
the COT ... task.
COT-Not logging on a terminal or to a ftle, COT exiting

Explanation: You have disabled the console terminal with the /NOCOTERM option and
you have disabled the log file with the /NOLOGFILE option.
User Action: If you did not intend to stop Console Logging, start it again by specifying
either a log file, console terminal, or both.
COT-Unable to redirect CO: to a terminal-CO: is offline, COT exiting

Explanation: CO is off line. There is· a problem with the most recent console terminal
assignment. It may be off line, a spooled terminal, or not a terminal.
User Action: Start COT ... and specify a valid console terminal with the /COTERM option.
Then, stop Console Logging.
COT -Syntax error

Explanation: You made an error in entering a Console Logging command.
User Action: Check the command description in Section 9.4 and enter the command correctly.

9-14 The Console Logger (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

COT-Will attempt console LUN assignment to TTnn:

Explanation: This error message may occur when you stop Console Logging. If COT ...
cannot redirect the console terminal to the terminal currently assigned as the console
terminal, it tries to redirect CO to the previous console terminal assignment. If that fails, it
tries TTO. If that fails, it generates the following error message:
COT -- LUN assignment to console terminal failed

User Action: Start Console Logging again by specifying a valid console terminal. Then, stop
Console Logging.
COT-Illegal command-Console logging has not been turned on

Explanation: You issued a Console Logging command before starting Console Logging.
User Action: Start Console Logging and then reenter the command.
COT -Logflle x error
fllespec-QIO Error Code -nn.

Explanation: An I/O error occurred while COT ... was performing an operation on the log
file. The function being performed, x, is WRITE, OPEN, or CLOSE. The filespec is any
valid file specification designated for the log file. The error code, -nn., is an I/O error code.
User Action: Find the I/O Error Code in the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/O Operations
Reference Manual and take the appropriate action.

The Console Logger (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 9-15

Chapter 10
Resource Accounting
10.1 Introduction to Resource Accounting
Resource Accounting provides a transaction file of system usage information. The data collected
in the transaction file pertains to your computing environment. How you interpret and analyze
this data depends on your objectives. For example, are you interested in billing or system
measurement? To tailor the accounting information and format to your application, you can
write a report program (Section 10.4). This program accesses the transaction file, reads the
required data fields, and writes a report for you.
For conventional RSX-11M-PLUS operating systems (that is, excluding pregenerated systems),
Resource Accounting is a system generation option. For pregenerated RSX-11M-PLUS (RL02
distribution kits) and MicrojRSX operating systems, Resource Accounting is included by default
during the system startup procedure.
If you are using a conventional RSX-11M-PLUS system, you can also write a privileged program
to define and to create your own transactions. By using specific entry points in the Executive
Accounting module, you can write these transactions into the transaction file (see Section 10.5).

Table 10-1 lists some of the system usage information gathered by Resource Accounting and
saved in the transaction file.

Resource Accounting 10-1

Table 10-1:

Summary of Transaction File Information

Type of Data

Transaction File Information

User

Session identification, terminal number, and account number
Billing stop date and time
Central processing unit (CPU) usage time
Tasks active at time of logout or system failure
Number of tasks run
Number of directives and QIOs issued
Status at logout or system failure

Task

Session identification, terminal, and account number
Disk overlay loads
Number of times checkpointed
Number of times context has been loaded
Highest running priority
Task begin time and end time
CPU usage time
Number of directives and QIOs issued
Status at logout or system failure

System

Accounting start date and time
Accounting stop date and time (0 if system fails)
Shutdown code
Transaction file ID, sequence number, and device
Last scan date, time, and scan rate in seconds
Total CPU time and total CPU zero intervals
Total number of tasks executed
Total number of logins
Number of current users
Number of checkpoints
Number of Shuffler (SHF) runs
Number of directives issued
Number of QIOs issued

10-2 Resource Accounting

Table 10-1 (Cont.):

Summary of Transaction File Information

Type of Data

Transaction File Information

User name, ID, terminal, and account number
Login User Identification Code (UIC), date, and time
Illegal password
(Invalid login only)
Session ID, terminal, and account number

Device allocation
Device deallocation

Allocation or deallocation date, time, and device

Device mount
Device dismount

Session ID, terminal, and account number
Mount date, time, and device
Volume label for Files-II mounted device
Type of mount (foreign, shared, and so on)
Owner UIC
Volume protection code
Name of Ancillary Control Processor (ACP) for device

Print Job Data

Session ID, terminal, and account number
Print job date and time
Job name and page count
Number of files printed, printer device, and forms number
Job priority

Card Reader Job Data

Session ID, terminal, and account number
Batch or print job name
Number of cards read
Reader device name and number

System Time Change

Old Time
New Time

Device Usage Data

I/O counts
Error counts
Tuning information

Resource Accounting 10-3

10.2 Controlling Resource Accounting
The following Resource Accounting commands start, stop, and modify the accounting subsystem:
Command

Function

START / ACCOUNTING

Starts up the accounting subsystem.

STOP / ACCOUNTING

Shuts down the accounting subsystem.

SET ACCOUNTING

Changes parameters in an accounting subsystem that has already
been started.

All the commands for controlling Resource Accounting are privileged.

10-4 Resource Accounting

START/ACCOUNTING
10.2.1 START/ACCOUNTING Command
The START/ACCOUNTING command starts up the accounting subsystem. The SYSLOG and
... ACC tasks must be installed before you issue the START/ACCOUNTING command. If you
do not supply the optional parameters, the system uses the default values.

Format
START/ACCOUNTING [parameter_i] . . . [parameter_n]

Parameters
CRASH-REASON:yes/no
EXTEND_SIZE:value
FILE:filespec
POOL -RESERVE:value
SCAN -RATE:value
STATISTICS_SCAN[:rate]
SYSTEM_STATISTICS:yes/no
TASK:yes/no
Parameter Descriptions
CRASH_REASON:yes/no

Instructs Resource Accounting to display the prompt Reason for crash: when you restart
accounting after a system failure.
If you enter CRASH-REASON:YES and a system failure occurs while scanning is active,
Resource Accounting prompts you to enter a reason for the crash when you restart
accounting. The reason can be as many as 60 characters in length and is stored in
the Crash Recovery Transaction Block.
If you enter CRASH-REASON:NO, a prompt does not appear. This is the default.
EXTEND_SIZE:value

Specifies the size of the initial allocation for the transaction file and for each extension when
it is needed. The value can be any amount up to 65,535 8 blocks. If there is low accounting
activity, a small extension size is adequate because few extensions are required and overhead
is low. If accounting activity is high, a larger extension size lowers the overhead if disk
space is available for the larger extension.
The default value is 10 10 blocks.
FllE:tllespec

Specifies the name of the transaction file that Resource Accounting creates to store the data.
The default is LB:[l,6]ACNTRN.SYS.
POOLRESERVE :value

Specifies the number of blocks (in decimal) of secondary pool that Resource Accounting
must leave free after each allocation. If Resource Accounting cannot leave this amount free,
the allocation will fail and prevent the swamping of secondary pool.
The default is a quarter of the total secondary pool size. Use of the default is recommended.

Resource Accounting 10-5

START / ACCOUNTING
SCAN_RATE :value

Specifies the time interval between the periods when Resource Accounting writes the SAB
and active User Account Blocks (UABs) to the scan file called LB:[1,6]SYSSCAN.TMP.
Writing the SAB and UABs to the scan file protects against loss in the event of a system
"crash."
Specify the value as a decimal number n, followed by an M, for minutes, or an S, for
seconds. If you specify 0, no scanning is done; therefore, if the system fails (" crashes"), the
active UABs and the SAB are not recorded in the transaction file and the data is lost.
The default is SCAN -RATE:5M.
If Resource Accounting finds a scan file when you start, it outputs a crash transaction and
copies the data in the scan file to the new transaction file. A copy of this crash transaction,
followed by the transaction file, is shown as the output of the SHOW ACCOUNTING
/TRANSACTIONJILE command in Section 10.3.2. Resource Accounting copies all the
old data before it writes the startup transaction and before it processes any new data.

When you stop Resource Accounting, the scan file is deleted.
ST ATISTlCS_SCAN[: rate]

Specifies a scan rate for the collection of device statistics. These device statistics measure
seek-optimization parameters and provide information on disk activity and throughput. The
device statistics are collected either once or periodically.
To indicate a one-time-only collection, do not specify a rate. To collect statistics periodically,
specify a value for the rate in minutes (nM) or seconds (nS).
If you specify this parameter, you must also specify the SYSTEM_STATISTICS parameter
(unless you are making a one-time request). If you specify SYSTEM_STATISTICS:YES, the
default value for STATISTICS_SCAN is 1 minute. If you specify SYSTEM_STATISTICS:NO
or STATISTICS_SCAN:O, the system does not accumulate device statistics.
SYSTEM_STATISTICS:yes/no

Specifies to Resource Accounting whether or not to accumulate systemwide statistics.
Systemwide statistics are the contents of the accumulation fields in the System Account
Block (SAB). These fields are as follows:

Accumulation Field System Statistic
B.CPU

Total CPU time used

B.DIR

Total directive count

B.QIO

Total QIO$ count

B.TAS

Total task count

The default is SYSTEM_STATISTICS:YES.
TASK:yes/no

Requests data on individual tasks running on the system. You can run task accounting when
the system is running at peak load times and the task accounting data can be analyzed on
a per task basis to identify heavy resource users.

10-6

Resource Accounting

START/ACCOUNTING
If you enter TASK:YES, task accounting is initiated. If you enter TASK:NO, task accounting
is stopped. The default is TASK:NO.

Note
Task accounting requires substantial disk space because the transaction file
can become quite large; therefore, request task accounting only when you
require the task accounting data.
Example

The type of device statistics collected by Resource Accounting is shown in the following output
from a transaction file:
Device Statistics
Time of Device Statistics = 15-JUN-87 16:27:23
Device = DR1:
10 Count = O.
Words Transferred Count = O.
Soft Error Limit = 8.
Soft Error Count = O.
Hard Error Limit = 5.
Hard Error Count = O.
Cylinder Crossed Count = O.
Current Fairness Count = O.
Fairness Count Limit = 10.
Device Statistics
Time of Device Statistics = 15-JUN-87 16:27:23
Device = DR2:
10 Count = 13832.
Words Transferred Count = 9002804.
Soft Error Limit = 8.
Soft Error Count = O.
Hard Error Limit = 5.
Hard Error Count = O.
Cylinder Crossed Count = 1053
Current Fairness Count = O.
Fairness Count Limit = 10.
Device Statistics
Time of Device Statistics = 15-JUN-87 16:27:24
Device = DR3:
10 Count = 68490.
Words Transferred Count = 80640306.
Soft Error Limit = 8.
Soft Error Count = O.
Hard Error Limit = 5.
Hard Error Count = O.
Current Fairness Count = 7.
Cylinder Crossed Count = 313.
Fairness Count Limit = 10.

This example lists the transaction file device statistics for DRl, DR2, and DR3. Definitions for
terms appearing in the example are as follows:
I/O count

Displays the number of I/O requests to the device.

Words transferred count

Displays the amount of data transferred in decimal words.

Soft error

Indicates a recoverable error (see Chapter 11). The I/O operation
completes successfully.

Hard error

Indicates a nonrecoverable error (see Chapter 11). The I/O
operation does not complete.
Also, see the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX Error Logging Manual
for more information about hard and soft errors.

Resource Accounting 10-7

5T ART / ACCOUNTING

Cylinder crossed count

Displays the number of cylinders crossed while accessing data.
Cylinders are intervals of disk space. This data can be analyzed for
I/O queue optimization purposes (see Chapter 14).

Fairness count

10-8 Resource Accounting

Indicates a I/O queue optimization parameter that indicates how
many times an I/O request was passed over (see Chapter 14).

(

SET ACCOUNTING
10.2.2 SET ACCOUNTING Command
The SET ACCOUNTING command allows you to change the value of parameters specified when
Resource Accounting was started with the START / ACCOUNTING command or previously
modified with a SET command. (A transaction is written containing the old and new values.)
The following options can be changed while Resource Accounting is running:
•

The file that transactions are written to

•

The size of the extensions

•

The scan rate for the scan file

•

The scan rate for collecting device statistics

•

The state of task accounting (on or off)

Format
SET ACCOUNTING [[/]parameter_1] . . . [ [/]parameter_n]

Parameters
EXTEND_SIZE:value
FILE[ :filespec]
SCAN-RATE:value
STATISTICS_SCAN:value
TASK:yes/no
Parameter Descriptions
EXTEND_SIZE :value

Changes the size for each extension of the transaction file specified with the
START / ACCOUNTING EXTEND_SIZE parameter.
FILE[ :fllespec]

Changes the file to which transactions are written. The default is the current file specification.
SCAN_RATE:value

Changes the scan rate for the scan file specified with the FILE parameter. To disable this
parameter, specify SCAN -RATE:O.
STATISTICS_SCAN:value

Changes the scan rate for collecting device statistics. To disable this parameter, specify
STATISTICS_SCAN:O.
TASK:yes/no

Requests data on individual tasks running on the system. Task accounting creates Task
Account Blocks (TABs) for all active tasks in the system. All data for each task is gathered
starting at this time.
If you enter TASK:NO, task accounting is stopped. Task accounting on a per task basis is

terminated and the data for all active tasks is written to the transaction file. However, tasks
that have a CPU time limit specified require task accounting data to check the time limit.
Therefore, the data for these tasks is written to the transaction file when the task exits.

Resource Accounting 10-9

STOP/ACCOUNTING

10.2.3 STOP/ACCOUNTING Command
The STOP/ACCOUNTING command shuts down the Resource Accounting subsystem. The
parameter is provided to indicate why the shutdown is occurring and must be entered with the
command. Resource Accounting enters the reason for the shutdown in the System Account
Block (SAB).

Formats
STOP/ACCOUNTING reason
STOP/ACCOUNTING CLEAN_UP

Reasons for Shutdown
MAINTENANCE

Stops Resource Accounting to perform system maintenance.
REBOOT

Stops Resource Accounting to rebootstrap the system.
SCHEDULED_SHUTDOWN

Stops Resource Accounting because the system is being shut down or used for other purposes
and accounting is not needed.
SHUTUP

Stops Resource Accounting to shut down the system. This is the default reason for the
SHUTUP program (see Chapter 6).
OTHER

Specifies a reason if none of the other reasons are adequate.
CLEAN_UP

Stops Resource Accounting in an organized manner; that is, it "cleans up" all the data
structures to allow accounting to restart successfully.
Specify STOP/ACCOUNTING CLEAN _UP if the SYSLOG task aborts or if accounting
encounters a fatal error. Accounting accepts this command only after Resource Accounting
fails or aborts.
When you specify CLEAN_UP, the system assumes that all accounting data in memory is
invalid. It deallocates the data back to secondary pool without writing it to the transaction
file. If the Resource Accounting data structures are corrupted, the system may fail while it

attempts to deallocate secondary pool.
You can restart accounting normally after you issue this command.

10-10 Resource Accounting

10.3 Accessing Information in the Transaction File
To access the system usage information contained in the transaction file, use the SHOW
ACCOUNTING commands. They are as follows:
Command

Function

SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTIONJILE

Converts the transaction file to a readable
format.
You can display the formatted
transaction file on a terminal or store it for
later use.

SHOW ACCOUNTING/INFORMATION

Displays accounting information about a
specific terminal.

SHOW ACCOUNTING/DATATRIEVE

Converts a transaction file to a file
that is readable by DATATRIEVE-ll (see
Section 10.4).

The subsections that follow describe the SHOW ACCOUNTING/INFORMATION and SHOW
ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTIONJILE commands. The SHOW ACCOUNTING/DATATRIEVE
command is described in Section 10.4.

Resource Accounting 10-11

SHOW ACCOUNTING /INFORMATION
10.3.1 SHOW ACCOUNTING/INFORMATION Command
This command displays, on the issuing terminal (TI:), the accounting information for the specified
terminal. Nonprivileged users can receive their own accounting data. A privileged user can
obtain any accounting data.

Format
SHOW ACCOUNTING/INFORMATION [parameter]

Parameters
ttnn:

Displays accounting data for the terminal ttnn. A privileged user has access to the accounting
data of any terminal on the system. Nonprivileged users can access information about their
own account.
If you do not specify a terminal, the accounting data of the terminal issuing the command
is displayed.

co
Displays the accounting data of the system tasks that are currently running.
SYS

Displays the current system totals at your terminal.
TASK=taskname

Shows accounting data for the specified task if the system is maintaining task accounting.
(See the description of the TASK parameter for the START/ACCOUNTING and SET
ACCOUNTING commands.)

10-12 Resource Accounting

SHOW ACCOUNTING /TRANSACTION_FILE
10.3.2 SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTION_FILE Command
The SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTION_FILE command converts the transaction file into
a readable format. It either displays this file on a terminal or writes it into another file. The
SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTION -FILE command uses the current transaction file as
the default file. (When Resource Accounting is not running, there is no default file.)

Format
SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTION_FILE[:infilespec] outfilespec

Parameters
Infllespec

Specifies the transaction file to be read. If you do not specify an input file, the current
transaction file is used.
outfllespec

Specifies either a terminal (specified as ttnn or TI:) or a valid file specification. The default
file is the transaction file named in the START/ACCOUNTING command.

Notes
1.

The record size in the transaction file is equal to the transaction length. (The only exception
to this is the Resource Accounting startup transaction that only occurs once and is
51210 bytes long. The startup transaction consists of a file header only, but its size is
increased to 51210 bytes to force a file extension.)

The directory [126,10] on the RSX-11M-PLUS distribution kit includes the source code
for the SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTION_FILE command. The code serves as an
example of how to read the transaction file.

3. For a detailed description of the unformatted version of the transaction file, see Section 10.6
or the file [126,10]ACNDF.DOC on the RSX-11M-PLUS distribution kit.

Example
The SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTION -FILE command produces a formatted display of
the transaction file. The following example shows the format of a typical transaction file:
ACCOUNTING DATA - CURRENT FILE
SYSTEM CRASH RECORD
TIME OF LAST SCAN = 7-JUN-87 10:48:17
RESTART TIME = 7-JUN-87 19:58:15
REASON = •

11-JUN-87 16:56:04
SCAN RATE (SEC)

= 300. 4t

USER - ALPHA
P ~
SESSION ID = Fl143
TI: = TT40:
ACCOUNT = 1.
LOGIN UIC = [7.111]
LOGGED ON = 7-JUN-87 08:58:53
LOGGED OFF = 00-000-00 00:00:00
BILLING STOPPED = 7-JUN-87 10:48:17
CPU = 4461.
TASKS ACTIVE = 1.
TASKS RUN = 95.
QIOS = 6215.
DIRECTIVES = 10240.

Resource Accounting 10-13

SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTION_FILE
STATUS

ACT

CRH

USER - SYSTEM TASKS
SESSION ID = $SYO
TI: = CO:
ACCOUNT = O.
LOGON UIC = [0.0]
LOGGED ON = 6-JUN-87 15:48:16
LOGGED OFF = 00-00-00 00:00:00 BILLING STOPPED = 7-JUN-87 10:48:17
CPU = 103866.
TASKS ACTIVE = 9.
TASKS RUN = 601.
QIOS = 128967.
DIRECTIVES = 667250.
STATUS
ACT CRH
TOTAL SYSTEM STATISTICS ~
ACCOUNTING STARTED = 6-JUN-87 15:48:16
ACCOUNTING STOPPED = 00-000-00 00:00:00
SHUTDOWN CODE = 0
TRANS FILE ID = 1422
SEQ NUM = 1
DEVICE = DB1:
TIME OF LAST SCAN = 7-JUN-87 10:48:17
SCAN RATE (SEC) = 300.
TOTAL CPU = 441264.
ZERO CPU INTERVALS = 374665.
TOTAL TASKS = 3236.
TOTAL LOGONS = 60.
CURRENT USERS = 27.
CHECKPOINTS = 23.
SHF RUNS = O.
DIRECTIVES = 2373564.
QIOS = 556015.
ACCOUNTING STARTUP
ACCOUNTING STARTED = 7-JUN-87 19:58:16
LOGIN - BETA
B
SESSION ID = RXPl
LOGON UIC = [7.102]

TI: = TT26:
ACCOUNT = O.
TIME = 7-JUN-87 19:58:35

ACCOUNT = 1.
TI: = TT55:
TIME = 7-JUN-87 20:05:44

DEVICE MOUNT
SESSION ID = Fl12
TI: = TT55:
ACCOUNT = 1.
TIME = 7-JUN-87 20:06:37
DEVICE = DR1:
VOL ID = WELCOMEBACK
OWNER UIC = [0.0]
ACP NAME =F11ACP
VOL PROT MASK = 0
USER - ALPHA
P
SESSION ID = F112
TI: = TT55:
ACCOUNT = 1.
LOGON UIC = [7.111]
LOGGED ON = 7-JUN-87 20:05:44
LOGGED OFF = 7-JUN-87 20:06:43
BILLING STOPPED = 7-JUN-87 20:06:43
CPU = 141.
TASKS ACTIVE = O.
TASKS RUN = 17.
DIRECTIVES = 472.
QIOS = 166.
LOGIN - OMEGA
D
SESSION ID = RXP3
LOGON UIC = [7.71]

TI: = TT37:
ACCOUNT = 4.
TIME = 7-JUN-87 20:08:11

DEVICE ALLOCATION
SESSION ID = RXP4
TI: = TT37:
ACCOUNT
TIME = 7-JUN-87 20:09:12
DEVICE = DLO:
LOGIN - THETA
D
SESSION ID = SPR5
LOGON UIC = [7.327]

10-14

Resource Accounting

= 4.

TI: = TT55:
ACCOUNT = O.
TIME = 7-JUN-87 20:09:14

SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTION_FILE
DEVICE MOUNT
SESSION ID = RXP4
TI: = TT37:
ACCOUNT = 4.
TIME = 7-JUN-87 20:09:15
DEVICE = DLO:
VOL ID =
OWNER UIC = [7.107]
ACP NAME = TSTACP
VOL PROT MASK

DEVICE DEALLOCATION
SESSION ID = RXP4
TI: = TT37:
ACCOUNT = 4.
TIME = 7-JUN-87 20:09:15
DEVICE = DLO:
USER - SYSTEM TASKS
SESSION ID = $SYO
TI: = CO:
ACCOUNT = O.
LOGON UIC = [0.0]
LOGGED ON = 7-JUN-87 19:58:16
LOGGED OFF = 00-000-00 00:00:00
BILLING STOPPED = 7-JUN-87 20:13:21
CPU = 1603.
TASKS ACTIVE = 4.
TASKS RUN = 64.
DIRECTIVES = 2986.
TOTAL SYSTEM STATISTICS
ACCOUNTING STARTED = 7-JUN-87 19:58:16
ACCOUNTING STOPPED = 7-JUN-87 20:13:21
SHUTDOWN CODE = 4
TRANS FILE ID = 205
SEQ NUM = 20
DEVICE = DRO:
STATISTICAL SCAN RATE (SEC.) = 3600.
FILE EXT. SIZE = 10.
TIME OF LAST SCAN = 7-JUN-87 20:13:17
SCAN RATE (SEC) = 300.
TOTAL CPU = 4260.
ZERO CPU INTERVALS = 3063.
TOTAL TASKS = 243.
TOTAL LOGONS = 7.
CURRENT USERS = 1.
CHECKPOINTS = O.
SHF RUNS = O.
DIRECTIVES = 10241.
QIOS = 4946.

To minimize loss of data, Resource Accounting writes the System Account Blocks (SABs) and
currently active User Account Blocks (UABs) to a temporary file every n seconds or minutes
(unless you specify SCAN _RATE: 0 in the START/ACCOUNTING or SET ACCOUNTING
command line).
The process of writing this file is called a scan. When you restart Resource Accounting, it
copies any existing temporary file of accounting data into the accounting file. If the scan
rate is 0, the SABs are memory resident until you stop Resource Accounting or until the
system fails.
The currently active UABs are memory resident until a user logs out. Therefore, if a system
failure ("crash") occurs with the scan rate at 0, the SAB and current UAB data is lost.

The crash reason appears here if Resource Accounting prompts you for a reason for
the system failure. The prompt appears only if you specify the CRASH-REASON:YES
parameter in the START/ACCOUNTING command line.

The User Account Block (P. Alpha) shows a logged out date and time of 0 because the
system crashed. There mayor may not be a status line as the last line of the UAB. The

Resource Accounting 10-15

SHOW ACCOUNTING /TRANSACTION_FILE
status line indicates the bit setting of the status mask byte (B.STM) in the UAB. Three of
the bits cause this line to appear if they are on. These bits are as follows:

Status Bit

Meaning

ACT (BS.ACT)

Indicates that the UAB was written to the file while still active (all activity
had not ceased). This can happen when UABs are copied from the scan
file or when all the data structures are written out because accounting
has stopped.

LGO (BS.LGO)

Indicates that the user has logged out with tasks remaining active or with
clock queue requests pending.

CRH (BS.CRH)

Indicates that this UAB came from the scan file and was copied into the
transaction file when Accounting was started after a system crash.

The TOTAL SYSTEM STATISTICS block contains the shutdown code as a digit in the range
o to 5. These digits have the following meanings:

Digit

Meaning

Accounting not stopped due to crash

Maintenance

Rebootstrap

Scheduled shutdown

Shutup

Other

The ZERO CPU INTERVALS field shows the possible error in the central processing unit
(CPU) time measurements. The error occurs because the system clock is usually run at
60 Hz and is slower than the context switch time of the Executive. Therefore, when the
time needed to execute a task is less than the resolution of the clock, the execution time is
recorded as zero ticks. Resource Accounting rounds each zero tick to one-half tick of CPU
time and counts them. The ZERO CPU INTERVALS field contains the number of zero ticks
that have occurred.

10-16 Resource Accounting

10.4 Using DATATRIEVE-ll to Write an Accounting Report
Program
One way to write a specialized accounting report is to use DATATRIEVE-11. By using
DATATRIEVE-11, you can customize the content and format of the transaction file generated
by your system.

10.4.1 Converting the Transaction File to a DATATRIEVE-11 Readable File
Before a DATATRIEVE-11 program can access the transaction file, the file must be converted
to a DATATRIEVE-11 readable file. To convert the file, use the Resource Accounting
SHOW ACCOUNTING/DATATRIEVE command.

Format
SHOW ACCOUNTING/DATATRIEVE[:trnsfilespec] outfilespec

Parameters
trnsfllespec

Specifies the name of an existing Resource Accounting transaction file.
outfllespec

Specifies the name of the output file where the converted transaction file is to reside.

10.4.2 Using a DATATRIEVE-11 Report Generator
RSX-11M-PLUS operating systems (excluding pregenerated systems) are supplied with a
sample DATATRIEVE-11 report generator. To produce a formatted accounting report on an
RSX-11M-PLUS system, use the sample report generator, as follows:
1. Use the SHOW ACCOUNTING command (see Section 10.4.1) to convert the appropriate
transaction file to a file that is readable by DATATRIEVE-11. Name the file ACCOUNT.DAT
(for this example, ACCOUNT.DAT is the name used in the file ACNTRN.CMD).
2.

Copy the following files from the system disk to your directory:
[1,2]QUERY.DIC
[126,24]ACNTRN.CMD

3. After the files are copied, use the following command line to generate a report:

>:
This command line calls DATATRIEVE-11 and executes the DATATRIEVE-11 commands in
the ACNTRN.CMD file. A brief description is then displayed on your terminal screen with
a portion of the DATATRIEVE-11 commands that make up the report generator.
4.

After the description, DATATRIEVE-11 displays the following prompt:
Enter DEVICE OR FILE:

Enter a device or file specification that Resource Accounting can use for recording
information. For example, specify your terminal as the output device, as follows:
Enter DEVICE OR FILE:

Resource Accounting

10-17

To send the information to a file named ACT.REP, enter the following response:
Enter DEVICE OR FILE:

While creating the report, you are prompted to respond with a destination for the report
displays. These prompts appear at points in the report-generating process where certain parts
of the report can be either displayed or directed to a file.
For example, the first prompt you receive is at a point where the STARTUP TRANSACTION
part of the report can be displayed. The next prompt appears when the first part of the USER
ACCOUNT BLOCK TRANSACTION is complete. At each prompt, you can direct that part of
the report to the same report file, to a different report file, or to a device.
To stop the Resource Accounting report process before it is finished, abort DATATRIEVE-11.
Then, recopy the file [l,2]QUERY.DIC back into your directory before using the example
Resource Accounting report program.
On RSX-11M-PLUS operating systems (excluding pre generated systems), an example of a simple
report generator written in DATATRIEVE-11 is shown in LB:[126,24]ACNTRN.CMD.

10.5 Creating Your Own Transaction Interface
You can define and create your own transactions and write them into the transaction file by
using specific entry points in the Executive Accounting module. To define a transaction interface,
do the following:
•

Write a privileged task.

•

Include code in the task to perform the following operations:
Store an address for a defined area or packet within the task in register 0 (RO).
In the packet, supply a value for the fields B.LEN and B.TYP (see Section 10.5.2). The
packet will contain the header and the information that is to be written as a transaction.

•

Include a call to the Executive directive Switch State ($SWSTK) in the task code.

•

From the system state, issue a call to one of the following entry points in the Executive
module ACSUB:
$QTRAN
$QTRN1
$QTRN2

The action taken by the ACSUB code depends on the entry point called by the privileged task.

10-18 Resource Accounting

10.5. 1 Calling $QTRAN
The $QTRAN routine automatically fills in the user-ID fields of the packet from those used by
the TI: terminal of the calling task. In effect, this shows that the new transaction is coming
from the same user who ran the task.
To call this entry point, the task must do the following:
•

Store the address of the transaction packet in register RO.

•

Record the transaction length in the field B. LEN.

•

Record a transaction code (a value between 128 and 255) in the field B.TYP.

•

Store the values for B.LEN and B.TYP in the transaction packet.

$QTRAN obtains the transaction header from the User Account Block (UAB) of the privileged
task. It copies the header (except for B.LEN and B.TYP) into the packet, time-stamps the packet,
and links the packet into a queue. The SYSLOG task takes the packet from the queue and
writes it into the transaction file.
$QTRAN does not alter the task's space; instead, it copies the packet into secondary pool space
before copying the header and queuing the packet into the SYSLOG queue.
Example 10-1 is an example of the code needed to call $QTRAN.
Example 10-1:

Call to the $QTRAN Entry Point

.MCALL ACNDF$
ACNDF$
TRAN:

.BLKB

;DEFINE ACCOUNTING SYMBOLS

B.MLEN

This area contains code that
describes the data to be
written into the transaction
file.

MOV
MOVB
MOVB
CALL
CALL

#TRAN.RO
#BT.MOV.B.TYP(RO)
#B.MLEN.B.LEN(RO)
$SWSTK •.....
$QTRAN

;GET PACKET ADDRESS
;FILL IN TYPE
;FILL IN LENGTH
;SWITCH TO SYSTEM STATE
;TO CALL QUEUE TRANSACTION EXEC ROUTINE

10.5.2 Calling $QTRN 1
The $QTRN1 routine allows the user-ID fields to be obtained from a specified place, instead of
assuming the current task.
To call this entry point, the task must do the following:
•

Store the address of the transaction packet in register RO.

•

Record the transaction length in the field B.LEN.

•

Record a transaction code (a value between 128 and 255) in the field B.TYP.

Resource Accounting 10-19

•

Store the values for B.LEN and B.TYP in the transaction packet.

•

Store an Active Page Register (APR) value in register 1 (R1) that points to a User Account
Block (UAB) or Task Account Block (TAB). These account blocks, UAB and TAB, contain
the user-ID data to be copied into the transaction.

The privileged task writes a transaction associated with another task. The $QTRN1 routine
time-stamps the packet and obtains the transaction header from the UAB of the other task. The
routine then places the packet in the SYSLOG queue to be written into the transaction file.
The $QTRN1 routine does not alter the packet within the task; instead, it copies identifying
information from the specified UAB into secondary pool. Then, it copies data into the packet
and places the packet in the SYSLOG queue.
Example 10-2 is an example of the code needed to call $QTRNl.
Example 10-2:

Call to the $QTRN 1 Entry Point

.MCALL ACNDF$
ACNDF$

;DEFINE ACCOUNTING SYMBOLS

This example assumes that R1 contains the pOinter
to the TCB of the task for which the transaction
is to be posted.

TRAN: .BLKB B.MLEN

;START OF TRANSACTION

MOV
BEQ
MOV

T.ACN(R1).R1
10$
#TRAN.RO

;GET OTHER TASK'S UAB OR TAB ADDRESS
;IF EQ NO ACCOUNTING DATA PRESENT
;POINT TO TRANSACTION HERE

MOVB
MOVB
CALL

#BT.MOV.B.TYP(RO)
#B.MLEN.B.LEN(RO)
$SWSTK.

;FILL IN TRANSACTION TYPE
;FILL IN TRANSACTION LENGTH
;SWITCH TO SYSTEM STATE
;TO CALL EXECUTIVE ROUTINES

CALL

$QTRN1

10.5.3 Calling $QTRN2
The $QTRN2 routine assumes the calling task completely fills in the user-ID area of the
transaction. The Executive queues the packet with no modification, except for time-stamping.
To call this entry point, the task must do the following:
•

Store the address of the transaction packet in register RO.

•

Record the transaction length in the field B.LEN.

•

Record a transaction code (a value between 128 and 255) in the field B.TYP.

10-20 Resource Accounting

•

Store the values for B.LEN and B.TYP in the transaction packet.

•

Supply $QTRAN with the following data:
Header and data to be written to the transaction file
User session ID
Account number
TerminalID

The $QTRN2 routine does not obtain a header from any source other than the transaction
packet. Therefore, except for the transaction time, the privileged task must have completely
filled in the transaction header and the transaction data contained within the packet.
The $QTRN2 routine fills in the transaction time field in the transaction header area of the
packet created by the task. Then, it queues the complete packet to the SYSLOG queue to be
written to the transaction file.
Example 10-3 is an example of the code needed to call $QTRN2.
Example 10-3:

Call to the $QTRN2 Entry Point

.MCALL ACNDF$
ACNDF$

;DEFINE ACCOUNTING SYMBOLS

TRAN: .BLKB B.MLEN
This area contains the code that
describes the header and data to
be written into the transaction
file.

MOV
MOVB
MOVB
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
CALL
CALL
RETURN

#TRAN,RO
#BT.MOV,B.TYP(RO)
#B.MLEN,B.LEN(RO)
UID,B.UID(RO)
UID+2,B.UID+2(RO)
ACN,B.ACN(RO)
TID,B.TID(RO)
$SWSTK, 10$
$QTRN2

;POINT TO TRANSACTION
;FILL IN TRANSACTION TYPE
;FILL IN TRANSACTION LENGTH
;USER SESSION ID
;SECOND HALF
;ACCOUNT NUMBER
;TERMINAL ID
;SWITCH TO SYSTEM STATE
;TO USER

10$:

Figure 10-1 describes this privileged task interface. Section 10.6.1.1 contains a description of
the header area fields.

Resource Accounting 10-21

Figure 10-1 : Privileged Task Interface Overview
Calling $QTRAN
Input

Process

User Task

Calls $QTRAN.
User task fills
in B.LEN. B.TYP.
and Packet
transaction
data. Header is
from user task
UAB or TAB.

RO
Transaction
PACKET:
B.LEN=
B.TYP=
Data

Output
SYSLOG Queue
Transaction
Header of
User Task
UAB or TAB
Data from
Packet

Calling $QTRN 1
Input

Process

Output

User Task

Calls $QTRN 1.
User task fills
in packet data.
B.LEN. and B.TYP.
Header is from
another task's
UAB or TAB
(Task A).

SYSLOG Queue

RO
Transaction
PACKET:
B.LEN=
B.TYP=
Data

Transaction
Header of
UAB or TAB
of Task A
Data from
Packet

- r@]
Task A
UAB or TAB

Header

Calling $QTRN2
Input
User Task
RO
Transaction
PACKET:
Filled in
Header

Process

...

Calls $QTRAN2.
User task fills
in entire
header and
transaction
data within
packet.

Output
SYSLOG Queue
Transaction
Header and
Data from
Packet

Filled in
Data
ZK-165-81

10-22 Resource Accounting

10.6 Account Blocks
Resource Accounting gathers system usage information by collecting the data in account blocks
in secondary pool and by writing each account block as a record in the transaction file. There
are two types of Resource Accounting account blocks: memory resident and transaction.

Memory-resident account blocks are as follows:
•

The Task Account Block (TAB) accumulates accounting data per task and stays in secondary
pool as long as a task is active.

•

The User Account Block (UAB) for each logged-in user accumulates the accounting data and
stays in secondary pool as long as the user is logged in.

•

The System Account Block (SAB) accumulates data for tasks running on the console terminal
(CO:). It stays in secondary pool and accumulates system accounting data as long as Resource
Accounting is active.

Transaction account blocks are created and filled when any transaction occurs. They are copied
by Accounting into secondary pool and are written immediately into the transaction file. After
these operations complete, the space is deallocated back to secondary pool.

10.6. 1 Account Block Data Structures
All the account blocks have a header area. The fields and offsets for the header area are the
same for all types of account blocks (memory resident or transaction). In addition, the memoryresident account blocks (TAB, UAB, and SAB) use the same offsets for the data accumulation
fields that follow the header. Information that is specific to the TAB, UAB, or SAB appears after
the accumulation fields.
Note
If you plan to write a program that uses the offsets, refer to the
[126,IO]ACNDF.DOC file on the RSX-IIM-PLUS distribution kit for the correct
numeric offsets. In MACRO-II programs, use the symbolic names defined by
the ACNDF$ macro in [1,l]EXEMC.MLB. The names will not change even if
their associated offsets do.

The files ACNDF.DOC and EXEMC.MLB are not supplied with pregenerated
RSX-IIM-PLUS (RL02 distribution kits) or Micro/RSX operating systems.
The following subsections provide detailed descriptions of the data structures associated with
each type of account block.

Resource Accounting 10-23

10.6. 1. 1 Account Block Header Area Fields
The header area fields precede the accumulation fields for the TAB, UAB, and SAB. The header
area fields also precede all transaction blocks.
The header provides user identification in two fields for every transaction. The fields are as
follows:
•

The unique session identification field is two words long. The first word, the session
identification, is three RAD50 characters supplied by the user when the system account is
created using the ACNT program. The second word is a unique number assigned by the
system at login. Thus, it is possible to match every transaction with the login session that
produced it.

•

The account number field is a binary word (entered through the Account File Maintenance
Program (ACNT» that is copied into every transaction.

Resource Accounting does not use either of these fields, except to ensure that they appear in
every transaction.
Table 10-2 describes all the header area fields.

Table 10-2:

Header Area Fields

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.LNK::

.BLKW 1

Link to next packet in SYSLOG queue

B.TYP::

.BLKB 1

Transaction type:
000-127 reserved for DIGITAL use
128-255 reserved for your use

BT.SAB==1

System Account Block (SAB)

BT.UAB==2

User Account Block (UAB)

BT.TAB==3

Task Account Block (TAB)

BT.SS==11

Accounting startup transaction

BT.lNV==12

Invalid login transaction

BT.TIM==13

System time change transaction

BT.ALL==14

Allocate device transaction

BT.DEA==15

Deallocate device transaction

BT.MOU==16

Mount device transaction

BT.DMO==17

Dismount device transaction

BT.PRT==20

Print despooler transaction
Reserved
Reserved

BT.LOG==23

10-24 Resource Accounting

Table 10-2 (Cont.):

Header Area Fields

Size or Value

Definition

BT.CRH==24

Crash recovery transaction

BT.DST==25

Device statistics (Unit Control Block Extension or UCBX)

BT.RTP==26

Reset transaction parameters

BT.INP==27

Card reader spooling transaction

B.LEN::

.BLKB 1

Transaction length in bytes

B.TIM::

.BLKW 3

Ending time of transaction (supplied by $QTRAN, $QTRN1,
or $QTRN2)

Offset

B.HID==.

Start of header identification area

B.UID::

.BLKW 2

Unique session identification
First word-RAD50
Second word-binary

B.ACN::

.BLKW 1

Account number

B.TID::

.BLKB 1

American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)
terminal type:
V-Virtual
T-Real
B-Batch
C-Console

.BLKB 1

Unit number
End of header identification area

B.HEND==.

10.6. 1.2 Account Block Accumulation Fields
Table 10-3 describes the accumulation field offsets for the UAB, TAB, and SAB. For an overview
of the linkages between the three types of account blocks, see Section 10.6.2.
Table 10-3:

Accumulation Fields for UAB, TAB, and SAB

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.CPU::

.BLKW 2

Total central processing unit (CPU) time used

B.DIR::

.BLKW 2

Total directive count

B.QIO::

.BLKW 2

Total QIO$ count

B.TAS::

.BLKW 2

Total task count (not used in TAB)

.BLKW 3

Reserved

.BLKW 3

Beginning/login time

B.BEG::

Resource Accounting 10-25

Table 10-3 (Cont.):

Accumulation Fields for UAB, TAB, and SAB

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.CPUL::

.BLKW 2

CPU time limit in TAB or UAB (not used in SAB)

B.PNT::

.BLKW 1

Pointer to SAB or UAB or is equal to O.
In the SAB, B.PNT is 0 (zero).
In the TAB, B.PNT points to the UAB.
In the UAB, B.PNT points to the SAB (if you specify SYSTEM_STATISTICS:YES) or is 0 (if you specify
SYSTEM_STATISTICS:NO).

B.STM::

.BLKB 1

Status mask:

BS.ACT==200

Control block active (UAB, TAB)

BS.CRH==100

Record from TMP file after crash (UAB and SAB)

BS.LGO==40

Logged out with outstanding activities (UAB only)

BS.CO==40

Task's TI: is CO: (TAB only)

BS.TML==20

TAB exists only for time limit (TAB only). TABs with this bit
set will not be written to the transaction file

BS.SIL==20

Silent login/logout (UAB only)

BS.ZER==10

Last CPU interval was zero length (TAB and UAB)

BS.SCN==4

Transaction ready for write to scan file (UAB and SAB)

10.6. 1.3 Memory-Resident Account Blocks and Offsets
Figures 10-2, 10-3, and 10-4 illustrate the data structures that are unique to the Task Account
Blocks (TAB), the System Account Block (SAB), and the User Account Blocks (UAB), respectively.
The offsets for the data structures are described in the tables that follow each figure.

10-26 Resource Accounting

Figure 10-2:

Task Account Block
r

B.LNK
B.LEN

Header
Area
Fields

Accumulation
Fields

Octal

Decimal

B.ACN

B.TID

B.TYP

B.TIM

B.UID

r--

B.CPU

r--

B.DIR

B.QIO

B.TAS

Reserved

B.BEG

B.CPUL

r-I-

>
f-

B.TCB

B.TST3

B.CUIC

100

B.PUIC

102

104

B.PNT
B.PRI

I
B.TNAM

B.STM

Reserved

TAB
Offsets

B.CTXT

B.TCKP

110

B.OVLY

114

B.EXST

120

\..
B.TLEN==.

124

84
ZK-593-81

Resource Accounting 10-27

Table 10-4 defines the TAB offsets. Note that TABs must end on a word boundary.
Table 10-4:

Task Account Block Offsets

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.PRI::

.BLKB 1

Highest running priority

B.TNAM::

.BLKW 2

Task name

B.TCB::

.BLKW 1

Task Control Block (TCB) address

B.TST3::

.BLKW 1

T.ST3 from task's TCB

.BLKW 1

Reserved for future status bits

B.CUIC::

.BLKW 1

Current User Identification Code (UIC) of task

B.PUIC::

.BLKW 1

Protection VIC of task

B.CTXT::

.BLKW 2

Number of context loads

B.TCKP::

.BLKW 2

Times task has been checkpointed

B.OVLY::

.BLKW 2

Number of disk overlay loads

B.EXST::

.BLKW 2

Exit status and abort code (a list of abort codes follows this
table)

B.TLEN==.

TAB length

Valid abort codes for the TAB offset B.EXST are as follows:

Abort Code

Definition

S.CACT=-410

Task still active

S.CEXT=-210

Task exited normally

S.COAD=OlO

Odd address and traps to 4

S.CSGF=2 10

Segment fault

S.CBPT=4 10

Breakpoint or trace trap

S.CIOT=6 10

lOT instruction

S.CILI=8 10

Illegal or reserved instruction

S.CEMT=10 10

Non-RSX EMT instruction

S.CTRP=12 10

TRAP instruction

S.CFLT=14 10

PDP-11/40 floating-point exception

S.CSST=16 10

Synchronous system trap (SST) abort bad stack

S.CAST=18 10

Asynchronous system trap (AST) abort bad stack

10-28 Resource Accounting

Abort Code

Definition

S.CABO=20 10

Abort via directive

S.CLRF=22 10

Task load request failure

S.CCRF=24 10

Task checkpoint read failure

S.IOMG=26 10

Task exit with outstanding I/O

S.PRTY=28 10

Task memory parity error

S.CPMD=30 10

Task aborted with Postmortem Dump (PMD) request

S.CELV=32 10

TI: virtual terminal was eliminated

S.CINS=34 10

Task installed in two different systems

S.CAFF=36 10

Task aborted due to bad affinity (required by runs are off line or not
present)

S.CCSM=38 10

Bad parameters or bad stack

S.COTL=40 10

Task has run over its time limit

S.CTKN=4210

Abort via directive with no Task Termination Notification program (TKTN)
message

Resource Accounting

10-29

Figure 10-3:

User Account Block
r

Octal
0

B.LNK
B.LEN

Header
Area
Fields

Accumulation
Fields

B.ACN

B.TID

B.TYP

B.TIM

-< "r

B.UID

B.CPU

B.DIR

B.QIO

B.TAS

Reserved

I-

B.BEG

I-

B.CPUL
B.PNT

>
r-

B.USE

B.STM

B.ACT

B.UUIC

B.UCB

102

104

112

132

B.LGO

I-

B.ULNK

UAB
Offsets

Decimal
0

B.RNA

B.NAM
(16 10 Bytes)

II-

B.LDS

I-

\.
B.ULEN==.

144

100
ZK-594-81

10-30 Resource Accounting

Table 10-5 defines the User Account Block (UAB) offsets. Note that UABs must end on a word
boundary.

Table 10-5: User Account Block Offsets

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.USE::

.BLKB 1

Use count

B.ACT::

.BLKW 1

Number of currently active tasks

B.UUIC::

.BLKW 1

B.UCB::

.BLKW 1

Pointer to Unit Control Block (UCB)

B.LGO::

.BLKW 3

Logout time

B.ULNK::

.BLKW 1

Link to next UAB

B.RNA::

.BLKW 3

Location in system account file (inaccurate if the account file
is changed by additions, deletions, or sorts):
First word-Offset
Second word-Upper virtual block number
Third Word-Lower virtual block number

B.NAM::

.BLKB 1410

Last name of user

.BLKB 1

First initial of user

.BLKB 1

Flag byte for UAB (for example, BS.SIL)

.BLKB 10

B.LDS::
B.ULEN==.

UAB length

Resource Accounting 10-31

Figure 10-4: System Account Block
Octal

Decimal

B.ACN

B.TIO

B,LNK

B,LEN

IHeader
Area
Fields

B,TYP

B.TIM

B.UIO

t--

I-

Accumulation
, Fields

B.CPU

B.DIR

B,QIO

B,TAS

t--

Reserved

B,BEG

B.CPUL

B.PNT

)

B.SHON

B.STM

B.UHO
B,ULO

56
58

102

106

112

B.DVNM

120

B.UNIT

122

B,EXTS

124

126

B.ULT

B.CKP

t--

B,SHF

B,RNO

B,FIO

I-

ISAB
Offsets

B,LSCN

B.SCNR

134

SDSCN

136

Reserved
(18 10 Bytes)

140

B.SLEN==.

162

114
ZK-595-Bl

10-32 Resource Accounting

Table 10-6 defines the SAB offsets.

Table 10-6: System Account Block Offsets
Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.SHDN::

.BLKB 1

Accounting shutdown reason code:
I-Maintenance
2-Reboot
3-Scheduled shutdown
4-Accounting shutdown by Shutup task
5-0ther

B.UHD::

.BLKW 1

UAB listhead

B.ULO::

.BLKW 1

Number of users currently logged in

B.ULT::

.BLKW 2

Total number of logins

B.CKP::

.BLKW 2

Total number of checkpoints

B.SHF::

.BLKW 2

Total number of Shuffler (SHF) runs

B.RND::

.BLKW 2

Number of CPU intervals rounded up to 1/2

B.FID::

.BLKW 3

File ID of transaction file

B.DVNM::

.BLKB 2

Device of transaction file

B.UNIT::

.BLKW 1

Unit of transaction file

B.EXTS::

.BLKW 1

Extend size for transaction file

B.LSCN::

.BLKW 3

Time of last scan

B.SCNR::

.BLKW 1

Scan rate in seconds

B.DSCN::

.BLKW 1

Device statistical scan rate in seconds

.BLKW 910

Reserved

B.SLEN==.

SAB length

10.6. 1.4 Transaction Block Diagrams and Offsets
This section describes the offsets for the following transaction account blocks:
Transaction Block

Format

Offset Definjtions

Accounting Startup

See Figure 10-5

Reset Accounting

See Figure 10-6

See Table 10-7

Crash Recovery

See Figure 10-7

See Table 10-8

See Figure 10-8

See Table 10-9

Invalid Login

See Figure 10-9

See Table 10-10

Resource Accounting 10-33

Transaction Block

Format

Offset Definitions

AlIoca te Device

See Figure 10-10

See Table 10-11

Deallocate Device

See Figure 10-11

See Table 10-11

Mount Device

See Figure 10-12

See Table 10-11

Dismount Device

See Figure 10-13

See Table 10-11

System Time Change

See Figure 10-14

See Table 10-12

Print Despooler

See Figure 10-15

See Table 10-13

Card Reader Spooling

See Figure 10-16

See Table 10-14

Device Statistics

See Figure 10-17

See Table 10-15

Figure 10-5: Accounting Startup Transaction Block
Octal

Decimal

B.ACN

B.TID

B.SSLN==.

B.LNK
B.LEN

I--

B.TtM
I--

B.TYP

B.UtD

18
ZK-596-81

In the Accounting Startup Transaction Block, the offset B.SSLN==. defines the transaction
length.

10-34

Resource Accounting

Figure 10-6:

Reset Accounting Transaction Block
Octal

Decimal

B.ACN

B.TID

B.ODNM

B.OUNT

B.NDNM

B.NUNT

B.OEXS

B.NEXS

B.OSCR

B.NSCR

B.ODSC

B.NDSC

B.RTLN==.

B.LNK
B.LEN

B.TYP

B.TIM

B.UID

B.OFID

I--

B.NFID

I--

50
ZK-597-81

Resource Accounting 10-35

Table 10-7 defines the offsets for the Reset Accounting Transaction Block.
Table 10-7:

Reset Accounting Transaction Block Offsets

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.OFID::

.BLKW 3

File ID of old transaction file

B.ODNM::

.BLKB 2

Device of old transaction file

B.OUNT::

.BLKW 1

Unit of old transaction file

B.NFID::

.BLKW 3

File ID of new transaction file

B.NDNM::

.BLKB 2

Device of new transaction file

B.NUNT::

.BLKW 1

Unit of new transaction file

B.OEXS::

.BLKW 1

Extend size for old transaction file

B.NEXS::

.BLKW 1

Extend size for new transaction file

B.OSCR::

.BLKW 1

Old scan rate in seconds

B.NSCR::

.BLKW 1

New scan rate in seconds

B.ODSC::

.BLKW 1

Old statistical scan rate

B.NDSC::

.BLKW 1

New statistical scan rate

B.RTLN==

10-36 Resource Accounting

Transaction length

Figure 10-7: Crash Recovery Transaction Block
Octal

B.ACN

B.TID

B.LNK

B.LEN

B.TYP

B.TIM

B.UID

r-r--

r--

B.CTLS

B.CSRT

r'..l

Decimal

B.CRSN
(60'0 Bytes)

B.CLEN==.

t:'1..J

T
126

86
ZK-598-81

Table 10-8 defines the offsets for the Crash Recovery Transaction Block.

Table 10-8: Crash Recovery Transaction Block
Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.CTLS::

.BLKW 3

Time of last scan before crash

B.CSRT::

.BLKW 1

Scan rate before crash

B.CRSN::

.BLKB 6010

ASCII text explaining crash

B.CLEN==.

Transaction length

Resource Accounting 10-37

Figure 10-8:

Decimal

B.ACN

B.TID

B.LUIC

B.LNK

B.LEN

B.TYP

B.TlM

B.UID

I-I--

B.LNAM
( 15'0 Bytes)

B.LLEN==.

,.\.1

T
ZK-606-82

Table 10-9 defines the offsets for the Login Transaction Block.

Table 10-9:

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.LUIC::

.BLKW 1

B.LNAM::

.BLKB 1410

User's last name

.BLKB 1

User's first initial

B.LLEN==.

10-38 Resource Accounting

Transaction length

Figure 10-9: Invalid Login Transaction Block
Octal

Decimal

B.ACN

B.TID

B.LNK
B.LEN

B.TIM

B.UID

B.INAM
( 14'0 Bytes)

I--

B.IUIC
I--

B.TYP

B.IPSW

B.ILEN==.

44
ZK-599-81

Table 10-10 defines the offsets for the Invalid Login Transaction Block.

Resource Accounting 10-39

Table 10-10: Invalid Login Transaction Block Offsets

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.INAM::

.BLKB 1410

Name from login line

B.IUIC::

.BLKB 610

UIC from login line

B.IPSW::

.BLKB 610

Password from login line

B.ILEN==.

Transaction length

Figure 10-10: Allocate Device Transaction Block
Octal

Decimal

B.ACN

B.TID

B.DNAM

B.LNK
B.LEN

B.TYP

-----

B.TIM

B.UID

Reserved

I
B.DLEN==.

B.DUNT

22
ZK-600-81

10-40 Resource Accounting

Figure 10-11 : Deallocate Device Transaction Block
Octal

B.ACN

B.TID

B.DNAM

B.LNK
B.LEN

B.TIM

f--

B.UID

Reserved

Decimal

I
B.DLEN==.

B.TYP

B.DUNT

22
ZK-601-82

Resource Accounting 10-41

Figure 10-12: Mount Device Transaction Block
Octal

B.ACN

B.TID

B.DNAM

B.DMST

B.DUIC

B.DVPR

B.LNK
B.LEN

B.TYP

f--

B.TIM

B.UID

Reserved

B.DUNT

B.DLBL

Decimal

B.DACP
B.MLEN==.

44
ZK-602-82

10-42 Resource Accounting

Figure 10-13:

Dismount Device Transaction Block
Octal

Decimal

B.TIM

B.UID

B.ACN

B.TID

B.DNAM

B.LNK

B.LEN

Reserved

B.TYP

B.DUNT

B.DLEN===.

22
ZK-603-82

Table 10-11 defines the offsets for the Allocate, Deallocate, Mount, and Dismount Device
Transaction Blocks. A list of offsets that appear only for MOUNT transactions follows the table.

Table 10-11:

Device Transaction Offsets

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.DNAM::

.BLKW 1

ASCII device name

B.DUNT::

.BLKB 1

Octal device unit number

B.DLEN==.

Transaction length for
DEALLOCATE

ALLOCATE,

DISMOUNT,

and

Resource Accounting 10-43

The following offsets appear only for MOUNT transactions:

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

.BLKB 1

Unused byte

B.DLBL::

.BLKW 6

Volume label

B.DMST::

.BLKW 1

Mount status bits

B.DUIC::

.BLKW 1

Owner UIC

B.DVPR::

.BLKW 1

Volume protection code
The volume protection codes are as follows:

Bits

Protection

0-3

System

4-7

Owner

8-11

Group

12-15

World

The bit settings within each protection group are as
follows:

B.DACP::

.BLKW 2

B.MLEN==.

10-44 Resource Accounting

Bit

Access denied (if bit set)

Read

Write

Create

Delete

Name of Ancillary Control Processor (ACP) for device
Length of MOUNT transactions

Figure 10-14:

System Time Change Transaction Block
Octal

Decimal

B.ACN

B.TID

B.LNK
B.LEN

B.TYP

B.TIM

B.UID

f-f--

I--

B.TOLD

B.TNEW

B.TMLN==.

30
ZK-604-82

Table 10-12 defines the offsets for the System Time Change Transaction Block.

Table 10-12:

System Time Change Transaction Block Offsets

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.TOLD::

.BLKB 6

Old time (yr, mon, day, hr, min, sec)

B.TNEW::

.BLKB 6

New time (yr, mon, day, hr, min, sec)

B.TMLN==.

Transaction length

Resource Accounting 10-45

Figure 10-15:

Print Despooler Transaction Block
Octal

Decimal

B.ACN

B.TID

B.PPGS

B.PNFI

B.LNK

B.LEN

B.TYP

B.TIM

B.UID

----

B.PNAM

B.PFRM

B.PPRI

B.PDEV
Reserved

B.PPUN

B.PLEN==.

33
ZK-605-82

Table 10-13 defines the offsets for the Print Despooler Transaction Block.
Table 10-13:

Print Despooler Transaction Block Offsets

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.PNAM::

.BLKW 3

Print job name (RADSO)

B.PPGS::

.BLKW 1

Page count

B.PNFI::

.BLKW 1

Number of files printed

B.PFRM::

.BLKB 1

Form number

10-46 Resource Accounting

Table 10-13 (Cont.):

Print Despooler Transaction Block Offsets

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.PPRI::

.BLKB 1

Print priority

B.PDEV::

.BLKW 1

Print device name (ASCII)

B.PPUN::

.BLKB 1

Unit number of print device
Transaction length

B.PLEN==.

Figure 10-16: Card Reader Spooling Transaction Block
Octal

Decimal

B.ACN

B.TID

B.RCDS

B.RDEV

B.LNK
B.LEN

B.TYP

B.TIM

B.UID

I--

B.RNAM

B.RSOP

I
B.RLEN==.

B.RUNT

30
ZK-607-82

Table 10-14 defines the offsets for the Card Reader Spooling Transaction Block.

Resource Accounting 10-47

Table 10-14:

Card Reader Spooling Transaction Block Offsets

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

B.RNAM::

.BLKW 3

Batch or print job name

B.RCDS::

.BLKW 1

Number of cards read

B.RDEV::

.BLKW 1

Reader device name (ASCII)

B.RUNT::

.BLKB 1

Unit number of reader device

B.RSOP::

.BLKB 1

Submit or print (O=SUBMIT, l=PRINT)

B.RLEN==.

10-48 Resource Accounting

Transaction length

Figure 10-17:

Device Statistics Block
Octal

Decimal

B.ACN

B.TID

B.LNK
B.TYP

B.LEN

B.TIM

B.UID

X.NAME

X.IOC

X.ERSL

X.ERHL

X.ERHC

X.ERSC

X.WCNT

X.CYLC

X.CCYL
X.FUM

X.FCUR
X.DNAM
X.UNIT

Reserved
X.LGTH==.

ZK-902-82

Resource Accounting

10-49

Table 10-15 defines the offsets for the Device Statistics Block.

Table 10-15:

Device Statistics Block Offsets

Offset

Size or Value

Definition

X.NAME::

.BLKW 2

Drive name in Radix-50

X.IOC::

.BLKW 2

I/O Count

X.ERHL::

.BLKB 1

Hard error limit

X.ERSL::

.BLKB 1

Soft error limit

X.ERSC::

.BLKB 1

Soft error count

X.ERHC::

.BLKB 1

Hard error count

X.WCNT::

.BLKW 2

Words transferred count

X.CYLC::

.BLKW 2

Cylinders crossed count

X.CCYL::

.BLKW 1

Current cylinder

X.FCUR::

.BLKB 1

Current fairness count
Fairness count limit

X.FLIM::
X.DSKD::

.BLKB 1

Disk direction (high bit 1=out)

X.DNAM::

.BLKB 1

Device name for accounting

X.UNIT::

.BLKB 1

Unit number for accounting

.BLKB 1

Unused

X.LGTH==.

Length of the Unit Control Block Extension (UCBX)

10.6.2 Account Block Linkages
Figure 10-18 provides an overview of the linkages between the system UAB, the SAB, the
TABs, and the UABs.

10-50

Resource Accounting

Figure 10-18:

Account Block Linkages

SYSCM

$SABPT

TCB
TAB

V
V
C
T.UCB

T.ACN

B.PNT

TCB

TAB

T.UCB

T.ACN
UCB

TT5

U.UAB
TeB

B.PNT

c><

UAB

B.PNT
B.UCB
B.ULNK

t}-r7
~,
~

SAB

B.UHD
B.PNT=O

TAB

V
C
T.UCB

T.ACN
UCB

TT7

U.UAB

B.PNT

c><

UAB

B.PNT
B.UCB
B.ULNK

SYSCM

$SYUAB

TCB
TAB

V
C
T.UCB

T.ACN

UCB

co:

B.PNT

System
UAB

B.PNT
B.UCB
B.ULNK=O
ZK-166-81

Resource Accounting 10-51

Terminal TT5, which is indicated by the Unit Control Block (UCB), is the terminal of
the most recently logged-in user. The user of this terminal has started two tasks, which
are indicated by the two Task Control Blocks (TCBs) that contain pointers to the UCB
(T.UCB) and each associated Task Account Block (TAB; T.ACN). Each TAB then points to
the terminal's User Account Block (UAB). The total usage of terminal TT5 is totaled in the
associated UAB.

Terminal TT7 is that of the next most recently logged-in user. The user has started a task
indicated by the single TCB, which points to a TAB that points to a UAB. The total usage
of terminal TT7 is totaled in the associated UAB.

The CO: console terminal has associated with it a single TCB that indicates a system task is
running. In effect, the system is also a user and has system usage accumulated at the task
level in the TAB and totaled in the UAB associated with the CO: terminal.
Note
Although all active UCBs point to the appropriate UABs using U.UAB, this
is not true for CO:. U.UAB does not exist for CO:; instead, it is reflected by
location $SYUAB.

The System Account Block (SAB) contains the usage totals for all the users including the
system itself. The B.UHD pointer in the SAB points to the UAB of the most recently
logged-in user. B.UHD and the B.ULNK words in each UAB are the linkages that are used
when Resource Accounting periodically writes the UABs to the scan file.

The pointer to the SAB ($SABPT) is in the Executive module SYSCM.

CD The pointer to the system UAB ($SYUAB) is in the Executive module SYSCM.

10.7 System Resources Used
The following sections discuss the amount of system space that Resource Accounting uses.
Secondary pool usage varies from a certain minimum to an amount determined by the number
of logged-in users and event-associated transactions.

10.7.1 Executive Space Requirements
Accounting support uses approximately 532 words of Executive instruction and data space.
Space in system pool is required for one active task and one open file.

10.7.2 Secondary Pool Usage
Each logged-in user requires two blocks (32 words per block) of secondary pool for the UAB;
that is, two blocks for each logged-in terminal or virtual terminal. Each task running in the
system requires two blocks for the TAB, if task accounting is enabled. Resource Accounting
needs two blocks for the SAB and two blocks for the system UAB. Non-memory-resident events,
such as device mounts, require one block for a brief period of time.

10-52 Resource Accounting

10.8 Resource Accounting Messages
Accounting messages are numbered from 110 to 79 10 , However, not all of the numbers in this
range are used. The number appears at the start of the accounting message.

Format
hh:mm:ss aaaTnn nn. *aaaaaa* message ...

Display Parameters
hh:mm:ss

Specifies time-stamping of the message occurrence in the format hh:mm:ss. For example, at
10 minutes and 36 seconds after 1:00 P.M., time-stamping is 13:10:36. Note that the hours
are recorded in 24-hour format.
aaaTnn

Specifies the task issuing the message and the terminal executing the task. The first three
letters of the task name are indicated by aaa. Tnn is the terminal number of the terminal
executing the task. The word SYSLOG appears if the message originated from that task.
nn.

Specifies the message number.
-aaaaaa-

Specifies the message severity code, in one of four forms. This code may not be present; if
it is not, the message is an informational message. The four forms of the severity code are
as follows:
*DIAG*

Information only.

*WARN*

Possible error condition.

*ERROR*

Command did not succeed.

*FATAL*

Extreme error condition.

The remainder of this section lists the Resource Accounting messages by message number:
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 1. Undefined message number nn. at PC aaaaaa

Explanation: The message number is a decimal number specified by nn. The location is
specified by the address aaaaaa. This is an internal Resource Accounting error.
User Action: Submit a Software Performance Report (SPR).
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 2. Directive error. $DSW=nnn PC is just before aaooao

Explanation: The directive error code is an octal number specified by nnn. The program
counter (PC) contains an address just preceding the octal address aaaaaa. This message
provides additional information to a message that will appear with it.
User Action: Look up the directive error code in the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/O
Operations Reference Manual to obtain more information.

Resource Accounting 10-53

nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 4. FCS 000 ERROR CODE
FILE: DBn: [???, ???]fllename.flletype;v

nnn

Explanation: The word "I/O" or "DSW" is specified by aaa. The error code is specified by
nnn. The UIC is inaccessible and appears as question marks.
User Action: Refer to the RSX-llM-PLUS Mini-Reference for an explanation of the error
code.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 5. -ERROR- Illegal filename

Explanation: The file name specified in the START/ACCOUNTING command is invalid.
User Action: Correct the file name and reenter the command.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 6. -FATAL- Can't open transaction file

[message]

Explanation: The transaction file could not be created. An additional message explaining the
reason follows.
User Action: Refer to the description of the second message to determine the cause of the
error.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 7. -FATAL- Can't open transaction file (by id)

[message]

Explanation: After it was created, the transaction file became inaccessible. An additional
message explaining the reason follows this message.
User Action: Enter the STOP/ACCOUNTING CLEAN _UP command. Then, refer to the
description of the second message to determine the cause of the error. Correct the error
before restarting Resource Accounting.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 8. -FATAL- Can't write transaction file

[message]

Explanation: The transaction file could not be written. An additional message explaining the
reason follows this message.
Resource Accounting cannot recover from this error. Accounting data is lost because the
file cannot be written.

User Action: Enter the STOP/ACCOUNTING CLEAN _UP command. Then, refer to the
description of the second message to determine the cause of the error. Correct the error
before restarting Resource Accounting.

10-54 Resource Accounting

nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 9. *ERROR* Can't close transaction file

Explanation: The transaction file could not be closed. Resource Acounting cannot recover
from this error. Accounting data is lost because the file cannot be closed.
User Action: If possible, determine why the file cannot be closed.
Accounting for a short period of time to see if the error recurs.

Restart Resource

nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 10. *FATAL* Can't init new blocks

Explanation: The transaction file cannot be written when the file is being extended. Resource
Accounting cannot recover from this error. Accounting data is lost because the file cannot
be written to be extended.
User Action: Enter the STOP/ACCOUNTING CLEAN _UP command.
before restarting Resource Accounting.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 11. *FATAL* Can't init new blocks. I/O error

Correct the error

nnn

Explanation: The transaction file cannot be written when the file is being extended. Resource
Accounting cannot recover from this error. Accounting data is lost because the file cannot
be written to be extended.
User Action: Enter the STOP/ACCOUNTING CLEAN _UP command. Locate the I/O error
code in the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/O Operations Reference Manual; then, correct
the error before restarting Resource Accounting.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 12. *FATAL* Can't write attributes. I/O error

nnn

Explanation: The transaction file cannot be written when the file is being extended. Resource
Accounting cannot recover from this error. Accounting data is lost because the file cannot
be written to be extended.
User Action: Enter the STOP/ACCOUNTING CLEAN _UP command. Locate the I/O error
code in the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/O Operations Reference Manual; then, correct
the error before restarting Resource Accounting.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 13. *FATAL* Can't write attributes

Explanation: The transaction file cannot be written when the file is being extended. Resource
Accounting cannot recover from this error. Accounting data is lost because the file cannot
be written to be extended.
User Action: Enter the STOP/ACCOUNTING CLEAN _UP command. Correct the error
before restarting Resource Accounting.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 14. *FATAL* Secondary pool allocation failure

Explanation: There is insufficient secondary pool remaining to start Resource Accounting.
User Action: Use the Virtual Monitor Console Routine (VMR; see Chapter 5) to increase the
secondary pool partition size. Then, rebootstrap the system.

Resource Accounting 10-55

nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 15. -FATAL- Bad SYSLOG queue

Explanation: The SYSLOG task has outstanding I/O during accounting startup.
U~er

Action: Enter the STOP / AC<;:OUNTING CLEAN _UP command and restart Resource

Accounting.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 16. -ERROR- Accounting already active

Explanation: Accounting is already active.
User Action: No user action is required.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 17. -FATAL- Error spawning SYSLOG

[message]

Explanation: The SYSLOG task could not be started. An additional message explaining the
reason follows this message.

[message]

Explanation: Resource Accounting was not started. An additional message explaining the
reason follows this message.

~tatus

::;: n:

[message]

Explanation: The exit status of the SYSLOG task is represented by the decimal number n.
See the accompanying SYSLOG message.

User Action: Correct the problem, if there is one; then, reenter the command.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 22. -ERROR- SYSLOG not installed

Explanation: The SYSLOG task
START / ACCOUNTING command.

was

not

installed

when

you

entered

User Action: Install SYSLOG and reenter the START/ACCOUNTING command.

10-56 Resource Accounting

the

nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 23. "ERROR" Error bit set. Cleanup before restart.

Explanation: Resource Accounting had an error and cannot be restarted until you issue the
STOP / ACCOUNTING CLEAN _UP command.

User Action: Enter the STOP / ACCOUNTING CLEAN _UP command and restart
Accounting.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 25. "ERROR" Accounting did not crash

Explanation: You entered A STOP/ACCOUNTING CLEAN_UP command that was not
needed because the system did not fail.
User Action: No user action is required.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 27. "FATAL" System command handling error

Explanation: The Executive directive Get MCR command line (GMCR$) failed.
User Action: No user action is required. The ... ACC task executed, so no command line was
queued. Access to this task is only valid with the specified accounting commands.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 28. "ERROR" Privilege violation

Explanation: You did not have the privilege for the specified operation.
User Action: No user action is requrired. Nonprivileged users can access the accounting
data for their terminal only.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 29. "ERROR" Accounting not supported in system

Explanation: Resource Accounting cannot be used unless it is selected as an option during
system generation.
User Action: Include support for Resource Accounting during system generation.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 30. "ERROR" Illegal command or parameter

Explanation: You entered a command incorrectly.
User Action: Reenter the command, using the correct syntax.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 31. "ERROR" Command or parameter ambiguous

Explanation: You abbreviated

parameter with too few letters to be uniquely identified.

User Action: Reenter the command, specifying more letters for the parameter name.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 32. "ERROR" Syntax error

Explanation: You entered a command incorrectly.
User Action: Reenter the command with the correct syntax.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 33. "ERROR" Terminal I/O error

Explanation: A terminal I/O error occurred during a prompt or a read to the terminal.
User Action: Reenter the command. If the error persists, submit an SPR to DIGITAL.

Resource Accounting 10-57

nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 34. -ERROR- Repeated or contradictory parameter

Explanation: You entered an invalid or duplicate parameter combination.
User Action: Enter the correct command parameter or parameters.
nn:nn:nn aoaTnn 35. -ERROR- Required parameter missing

Explanation: A parameter is missing in the command line.
User Action: Reenter the command with the required parameter.
nn:nn:nn aoaTnn 36. -ERROR- Value out of range

Explanation: You entered a value that is either too large or too small.
User Action: Reenter the command with the correct value.
nn:nn:nn aoaTnn 38. -ERROR- No accounting data present

Explanation: You specified a terminal in a SHOW ACCOUNTING command that either does
not have any accounting data or is not logged in.

User Action: Determine the correct terminal to use and reenter the command.
nn:nn:nn aooTnn 39. -ERROR- Device specification error

Explanation: You entered a device specification incorrectly.
User Action: Determine the correct device and reenter the command.
nn:nn:nn aooTnn 40. -FATAL- No startup transaction found

Explanation: The START/ACCOUNTING command and the SYSLOG task are closely related
and depend on each other for correct operation. Any attempt to start the SYSLOG accounting
task by any method other than the use of START/ACCOUNTING results in this message.
User Action: If START/ACCOUNTING and SYSLOG were used as intended and this error
resulted, submit an SPR to DIGITAL.
nn:nn:nn aooTnn 41. -WARN- Bad transaction length. Block(s) of
secondary pool may be lost

Explanation: A transaction may be too large or too small. You may have designed the
transaction incorrectly.

User Action: Correct the generation of the transaction.
Section 10.6.1.4.

See B.MINL or B.MAXL in

nn:nn:nn aooTnn 42. -ERROR- UAB Listhead not zero on shutdown

Explanation: This message indicates an internal consistency error.
User Action: Submit an SPR to DIGITAL.

10-58 Resource Accounting

nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 43. -ERROR- Transactions follow SAB

Explanation: This message indicates an internal consistency error.
User Action: Submit an SPR to DIGITAL.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 44. -FATAL- UAB Not found in list

Explanation: This message indicates an internal consistency error.
User Action: Submit an SPR to DIGITAL.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 45. -FATAL- Exiting due to error

Explanation: The SYSLOG task exited for the specified reason.
explaining the reason follows this message.

An additional message

Explanation: This message indicates an internal consistency error.
User Action: Submit an SPR to DIGITAL.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 47. Exiting

Explanation: This message indicates a normal SYSLOG exit due to a STOP/ACCOUNTING
command.

User Action: No user action is requrired. This is an informational message.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 50. Accounting not active

Explanation: You entered a command that requires Resource Accounting to be running.
User Action: Enter the START/ACCOUNTING command and reenter the command.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 51. -ERROR- Accounting had a fatal error, must be cleaned up

Explanation: Resource Accounting failed.
User Action: Enter the STOP/ACCOUNTING CLEAN _UP command.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 52. -ERROR- SYSLOG Not active

Explanation: The SYSLOG task has exited unexpectedly.
User Action: Enter the STOP/ACCOUNTING CLEAN _UP command and restart Resource
Accounting.

Resource Accounting 10-59

nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 53. *ERROR* Cannot write crash transaction

[message]

Explanation: The crash transaction could not be written to the new transaction file. The
crash data is lost.
An additional message explaining the reason follows this message.

User Action: No user action is required.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 54. *ERROR* Error during scan tfle rename

Explanation: The specified error was encountered when dealing with the scan file.
User Action: Determine the cause of the problem and correct it.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 55. *ERROR* On scan file PUTS

Explanation: The specified error was encountered when dealing with the scan file.
User Action: Determine the cause of the problem and correct it.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 57. Enter reason for the crash (Maximum 60. characters)

Explanation: This is the prompt for the user-supplied crash reason because "yes" was
answered as the CRASH-REASON parameter on the START/ACCOUNTING command.
User Action: Enter a crash reason.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 58. *ERROR* Terminal I/O Error

Explanation: An I/O error occurred from the terminal during the input of the crash
information. The crash information is lost.
User Action: No user action is required.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 60. *ERROR* I/O Error

Explanation: The specified I/O error occurred during the SHOW ACCOUNTING
TRANSACTION command.

User Action: Correct the I/O condition and try the command again.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 64. *ERROR* Illegal file name

Explanation: There is an incorrect file specification for the SHOW ACCOUNTING
TRANSACTION command.
User Action: Correct the file specification and try the command again.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 65. -ERROR* Open error

Explanation: The specified error occurred during a file open procedure of the SHOW
ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTIONJILE command.
User Action: Determine the cause of the error, correct it, and try the operation again.

10-60 Resource Accounting

nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 70. -ERROR- On scan file open

Explanation: The specified error was encountered when Resource Accounting was processing
the scan file.

User Action: Determine the cause of the problem and correct it.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 71. -ERROR- On scan file delete

Explanation: The specified error was encountered when Resource Accounting was processing
the scan file.

User Action: Determine the cause of the problem and correct it.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 72. -ERROR- On scan file close

Explanation: The specified error was encountered when Resource Accounting was processing
the scan file.

User Action: Determine the cause of the problem and correct it.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 73. -ERROR- On scan file open

Explanation: The specified error was encountered when Resource Accounting was processing
the scan file.

User Action: Determine the cause of the problem and correct it.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 74. -ERROR- Copying scan file to trans file

Explanation: The specified error was encountered when processing the scan file. The crash
information that would have appeared in the transaction file is lost.
User Action: No user action is required.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 75. -ERROR- On scan file close

Explanation: The specified error was encountered when processing the scan file.
User Action: Determine the cause of the problem and correct it.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 76. -ERROR- On scan file delete

Explanation: The specified error was encountered when processing the scan file.
User Action: Determine the cause of the problem and correct it.
nn:nn:nn aaaTnn 79. -ERROR- Task not in memory or not active

Explanation: The task specified with the SHOW ACCOUNTING/INFORMATION command
parameter TASK=taskname was not in memory or was not active. Therefore, there is no
task accounting date for this task.
User Action: No user action is required.

Resource Accounting 10-61

Part III: System Problems and
Performance

Chapter 11
Handling System Problems
This chapter introduces the basic tools and concepts that are necessary for understanding the
problems you may encounter while managing your system In addition, it includes a brief
discussion of the Diagnostics Loader task (OLD), which is available for multiprocessor systems
only.

11 . 1 System Faults
System faults cause an RSX-IIM-PLUS or Micro/RSX operating system to stop processing an
application properly. A fault could be a user error, a system software failure, an application
software error, or a hardware fault. You can recognize these types of errors as follows:

•

User errors (for example, accidentally removing a disk from the system) are obvious because
the fault usually occurs immediately after the user action.

•

System software failures generally occur if a system problem is encountered while you are
debugging the application software.

•

Application software errors are application-specific and are not discussed in this manual.

•

Hardware faults occur when a device malfunctions and causes errors.

The remainder of this chapter describes how to detect, isolate, and recover from hardware faults.

11.2 Hardware Faults
Hardware faults can be grouped in the following categories:
•

Media failures

•

Transient failures

•

Intermittent failures

•

Soft errors

•

Hard errors

Handling System Problems 11-1

The following subsections describe each type of fault in detail.

11.2. 1 Media Failures
Media failures occur when I/O operations fail because portions of the medium (a disk or tape)
are bad. For both disks and tapes, when a media failure is detected, the system makes repeated
attempts to perform read operations.
Before you initialize a disk, check the disk for faulty sectors with the Bad Block Locator Utility
(BAD). BAD marks the bad sectors, which prevents the file system from using them. (See the
RSX-11M-PLUS Utilities Manual for more information.)
Occasionally, sectors on the media become unusable, causing I/O operations to those sectors
to fail. The Error Logging system can be used to detect these failures. (See the RSX-11M-PLUS
and Micro/RSX Error Logging Manual for more information.) If your media contains critical data
records, or if a large number of errors have occurred on them, you should probably replace the
media.
On devices supported by the DU-device driver (DUDRV), bad blocks may be replaced by the
Bad Block Replacement Control Task (RCT) or the Mass Storage Control Protocol (MSCP)
controller. See Chapter 13 for more information on RCT.

11.2.2 Transient Failures
Transient failures cannot be repeated and are caused by electrical factors, such as static from
clothing or carpeting. If the failure occurs on an I/O device, the I/O operation is retried
automatically and the application software does not detect the failure.
If the failure occurs in memory or in a central processing unit (CPU), the system may fail or
"crash" and may have to be rebootstrapped.

The Error Logger records transient failures. For more information, see the RSX-11M-PLUS and
Micro/RSX Error Logging Manual.

11.2.3 Intermittent Failures
Intermittent failures are caused by irregular conditions within the system and usually happen
during periods of high system or device activity. The failures occur when recorded data is too
corrupted to be read. The data becomes corrupted when the device on which it is recorded is
not working properly, usually because of a temporary power shortage.
An example of an intermittent failure is a disk device detecting a power failure, which causes the
disk's volume valid bit to be reset. Dismounting and remounting the disk clears this condition
and may allow I/O operations to proceed.
If the sources of intermittent failures are not obvious or directly reproducible, re-create the
conditions that caused the failure by using the I/O Exerciser (lOX). lOX simulates high system
activity, which could cause the failure to recur. (See Chapter 12 for information on lOX).

The Error Logger records intermittent failures that result in device errors.

11-2 Handling System Problems

11.2.4 Soft Errors
Soft errors are device errors that do not prevent an I/O operation from completing successfully.
The device driver retries the operation and, depending on the capabilities of the device, executes
the error correction code (ECC) or disk-head offset positioning. The driver may also attempt to
perform multiple read requests of a smaller size.
Soft errors usually indicate poor media or a misaligned device. Disk heads that are not aligned
properly cause disk errors, which can be corrected by head offset pOSitioning.
If several soft errors occur on a device, locate the source of the errors and contact DIGITAL
Field Service Maintenance.

The Error Logger records soft errors.

11.2.5 Hard Errors
Hard errors are solid device failures that prevent a device from working properly. The errors
make the device unusable, but they are also the easiest to diagnose and correct.
The Error Logger records failed operations on disks and tapes.

11.3 Recoverable and Nonrecoverable Errors
Soft errors and many media errors are recoverable errors. They are recorded by the Error Logger
but do not impact system operation.
Hard errors and some media errors are nonrecoverable errors. They usually result in recurring
device errors and failure of the application software. (The application can survive one failure on
each device type before it will stop processing completely.) However, the operating system itself
often recovers from the failure because it requires only the system disk, the central processing
unit (CPU), and memory to continue running.

11.4 Fault Isolation
Once the software is stable, the availability of a system depends on the reliability of individual
devices and the time required to restore processing. RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX systems
can, in some cases, work around equipment failures in individual devices; however, you must
eventually isolate a faulty device, correct the reason for the failure, and restore the device to
the system. Depending on the severity and location of the error, you may have to restart the
application and the system.
Failures often exhibit symptoms that allow you to detect a failing device before it disrupts
system operation. Because of this, you should regularly monitor the condition of all peripheral
devices and their ability to respond correctly to I/O requests. Periodically, examine the Error
Logging reports on all devices and run the I/O Exerciser (lOX) on infrequently used devices.
The Error Logger gathers information concerning all types of errors as they occur and generates
comprehensive error reports. lOX exercises combinations of devices under high I/O activity.
(For more information on lOX, see Chapter 12. For information on the Error Logger, see the
RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX Error Logging Manual.)

Handling System Problems 11-3

The Error Logger also provides error reports that contain a description of device fault conditions.
Use the reports to determine whether the device should remain in operation. If the fault
conditions are transient (see Section 11.2.2) and the device is capable of correctly performing its
I/O functions, the device can remain in operation. However, you should closely monitor the
device and schedule it for future maintenance as required.

11.5 System Recovery
The procedure you use to diagnose and recover from a system fault depends on the primary use
of your system. If it is mainly used for application development, then use the Error Logger or
lOX to determine the cause of a failure and to prevent future failures. If your system is used for
process control and is running an application that requires enhanced availability, utilities such
as the Executive Debugging Tool (XOT) can be used to isolate and correct failed components.
(For more information on XOT, see the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX XDr Reference Manual.)
If you are using an RSX-11M-PLUS system and you want to restart it and your application, first

bring up the baseline system (that is, the minimum requirements for running the RSX-11M-PLUS
operating system). Then, gradually bring devices on line until you have the minimum system
required for running the application. If any of the devices are faulty, remove them from the
system and bring others on line until you have the required configuration.
The meth()d for recovering from system faults also depends on the type of fault. For example:
•

Transient errors could cause the system to fail, which would require bootstrapping the
system again.

•

Hard errors prevent you from using the device. The device may need to be reconfigured
out of the system so that diagnostics can be run for it.

•

Intermittent errors do not have an obvious source. You may need to begin with a minimum
configuration and then gradually add devices until you find the one that caused the error.
If the minimum configuration still has the problem, switch to a different configuration.

Another possible way to recover from intermittent failures is to tum the error into a hard
error by using lOX, which can impose an appropriate system load. By re-creating the error,
you can discover its source; then, you can correct the error.
The following sections describe how to recover from different kinds of hardware failures.

11.5. 1 Device Unit and Controller Failures
Most failures in an operating system result from disk, tape, or other such device failures. Either
the units themselves fail or the respective controller fails.
The time needed to reconfigure around these failures depends entirely on the application. If
the application can notify an operator of the failure, thus allowing the operator to remove and
inspect the media, mount it on another drive, and reintegrate it into the system; then, the
time to reconfigure is short. If, on the other hand, the operator must find a way to halt the
application, to move the media, and to restart the system, then the time to reconfigure increases.
The Task Termination Notification program (TKTN) prints a message at the console terminal
whenever an nonrecoverable hardware error occurs. For example:

***

OBi: -- Nonrecoverable hardware device error

11-4 Handling System Problems

These messages can alert an operator to an impending failure and allow time to issue the
commands to remove the failing unit from the system.

11.5.2 Processor Failures
Although it occurs rarely in comparison with device unit and controller failures, a processor
failure also halts system operation. If a processor fails, the system usually exhibits one of the
following symptoms:
•

The system traps to XDT or fails.

•

The sanity timer expires for one or more processors (multiprocessor systems only).

•

The console lights on nonremote diagnostic consoles show that the system is halted in the
Executive.

•

The system halts with no printouts or visual indicators.
Note
On multiprocessor systems, a crash, odd address trap, or other failure may occur
on a processor other than the faulty one.

On multiprocessor systems, regardless of the cause of a processor failure, the recovery technique
is straightforward and direct: you must isolate and exclude the disabled processor and reboot
the system. The memory configuration need not change unless you wish to perform standalone
diagnostics (see Section 11.6) on the failed processor.

11.5.3 Memory Failures
The two most common causes of memory failures are uncorrectable double-bit errors (parity
errors) and loss of memory power.
If a user-state task encounters an un correctable memory parity error, the system aborts the task
and locks that portion of memory. The Fixer task (FXR) detects the parity errors and creates a
distinct segment in the task's region by using the memory in which the errors were detected.
This segment is separate from the rest of the region and is not used by other tasks. FXR is
completely transparent to both users and tasks.
If the Executive or a system-state task encounters an uncorrectable parity error, the system
prints the following message and then halts:
***EXEC PARITY ERROR STOP

Also, the sanity timers on multiprocessing systems may expire.
On RSX-11M-PLUS multiprocessor operating systems with MK11 memory, regardless of system
state (user or kernel), a double-bit error causes the MK11 memory box hardware to light the
UNCOR ERROR light or lights on the respective memory box port controllers. The lights
indicate that an uncorrectable error has halted the system.
Before rebooting the system, you must manually exclude the MK11 memory box, as follows:
1. Switch all ports of the faulty memory box off line. If necessary, use the thumbwheel switches
to properly address the remaining memory box or boxes. (The thumbwheel switches are
used when the failed box is box 0, which is the boot box, or when you want to disable a
memory box by changing the starting addresses of the remaining boxes.)

Handling System Problems 11-5

Halt the processor, initialize it, and rebootstrap the system.

When loss of power causes the memory failure, the system halts. The system exhibits one or
more of the following symptoms:
•

No lights or indicators are lit. This usually indicates that the outside power supply has
failed.

•

No MEM POWER READY lights are lit on the memory box. This indicates that the memory
box's power supply has failed or has been powered down. Check the power switch on the
Port A controller to the box.

•

No MEM POWER READY lights are lit on one port of all memory boxes. This indicates
that the central processing unit's (CPU's) power supply has failed or that the CPU has been
powered down. Note that the power supply failure could have come through an expander
box or through the far side of a switched bus currently switched to the CPU.

In all of the above cases, if a CPU or a memory box has been switched off but then switched back
on before the memory batteries discharge, the system usually recovers without rebootstrapping.
Otherwise, follow the same two steps used when an un correctable error halts the system.

1 1.6 Standalone Maintenance for Multiprocessor Systems
On multiprocessor systems, when a device fails, it is often necessary to run diagnostic tasks
before servicing the device. However, the diagnostic tasks require a processor for execution.
Thus, to service most devices, you must remove a processor from the system.
The following list gives the requirements for testing and servicing peripheral devices:
•

A processor must be available to execute the diagnostics for the peripheral.

•

Memory must be available for the diagnostics.

•

A mechanism to load the diagnostic task into memory must be available.

The processor that executes the diagnostics must be connected to the UNIBUS on which the
device to be tested resides. This implies that other peripherals on that bus run will not be
available to the remainder of the system. Therefore, when determining the initial system
configuration, you must ensure that duplicate devices are located on distinct bus runs. If the
device to be tested is on a switched bus run, the switched bus can be connected to any processor
to which it has access.
To make memory available for diagnostic tasks, the usual procedure is to logically remove a
memory box from the running system and to use the box for diagnostics only. This memory
box is then switched manually so that the processor to be used for diagnostics views the box
with a starting address of O.
For loading a diagnostic into memory, the RSX-IIM-PLUS multiprocessor system provides the
Diagnostic Loader task (OLD). OLD loads a diagnostic program into a partition in the memory
box of the diagnostic processor (the processor to which the failed device is attached). Diagnostic
programs are system image files that you use to test the failed devices. The partition is created
and specified by you and is mapped by Program Logical Address Space (PLAS) directives. By
default, OLD clears the partition to the end after loading the program. The diagnostic is then
run stand alone on the failed processor.

11-6 Handling System Problems

The steps for using DLD are as follows:
1. Use the File Transfer Utility program (FLX) to transfer the diagnostic program from the
diagnostic tape or disk to a Files-II device attached to the diagnostic processor. (See the
RSX-llM-PLUS Utilities Manual for information on FLX.) Because the tape or disk is in
DOS-II format, use the FLX switch Image Mode (JIM) to convert the file (the diagnostic
program) to Files-II format. The file is in formatted binary format and has a file type of
BIC or BIN. (Note that binary formatted files cannot be patched.)
2.

Reconfigure your system so that you have a system that is logically connected to two CPUs;
each CPU should have at least one memory box (each box has 256K words of memory).
An example of a typical configuration is as follows:
BOX 0

PORT A ONLINE, START=OOO
PORT B

BOX 1

PORT A OFFLINE
PORT B ONLINE, START=OOO

lIST

Off line both sides.

Bootstrap RSX-IIM-PLUS on CPA.

Set BOX 0 PORT A to ONLINE, START=010

Bring Box 1 on line. This memory box will contain the diagnostic partition. For example:
CON>

Use the CON DISPLAY command to determine the base address and size of the memory
box. For example:
CON>

The base address of the partition will be the base address of the diagnostic program.
7.

Create the diagnostic partition in the memory box by using the command SET jP AR and by
specifying the type DIAG. This partition will be devoted to diagnostic functions and should
begin at the location in memory that the diagnostic processor will see as location 0 or the
bottom of memory. For example:
>

This command creates a partition named JIMK with a base address of 2000000 8 , which
consists of 177710 32-word blocks. The other processors see the memory box used for
diagnostics as starting at location 2000000 8 , but the processor running the diagnostic will
see the box as starting at location O.
Other partition types used with the SET jP AR command ensure that the requested memory
is within the system image area (less than $SYSIZ), but DIAG ensures only that the memory
physically exists. For the other processor to run concurrently with the diagnostic processor,
the partition must be larger than $SYSIZ.
8.

Use the DLD task to convert the binary formatted file into a bootable system image file
(patchable with the Task File Patch Program called ZAP; see the RSX-IIM-PLUS Utilities
Manual) and then to load it into the partition. The DLD command line has the following
format:
DLD> [partition] [/HE] =filename [.typ] [/qualifier]

Handling System Problems

11-7

partition

Specifies the partition created in the diagnostic processor's memory box into which
the diagnostic program will be loaded. Unless you specify the INL qualifier, you
must specify a partition name. Otherwise, DLD displays a "Partition not found" error
message. If you specify both a partition name and the INL qualifier, the qualifier
overrides the name.

/HE
Provides a brief description of DLD's use and format.
typ

Specifies the file type for the diagnostic program. The file type can be BIC, BIN, or SYS.
If you specify the file type as BIC or BIN, DLD converts the file into a system image
file. Also, if DLD cannot find the file, it searches for a file with the SYS file type. If

you do not specify any file type, DLD searches for a file with the BIC file type and then
for one with the BIN file type.
If you specify the file type as SYS, DLD does not have to convert the file; it is ready to
be loaded into the memory box.
/qualifler

Specify one of the following qualifiers:
INL

Inhibits loading of the diagnostic program (DLD creates the system image file
only).

INC

Inhibits clearing (zeroing) of any remaining memory in the partition after the
diagnostic program has been loaded. The default is to clear the remaining
memory.

IOFF:n

Offsets the starting location of the load by n times 3210 words. The area
between the beginning of the partition and the beginning of the diagnostic is
unaltered.

ILl

Lists information about the partition and the file: the partition name (if you
have specified one), the base and size of the partition, and the new name of
the system image file (if it is converted).
Specify this qualifier to display the transfer address of the diagnostic program
(usually 200 8 or 1000 8 ), You will need the transfer address to initiate the
diagnostic.

ILW

Accounts for the DOS-II link word that may exist in bytes 0 and 1 of every
input block.

The following example converts the diagnostic file TEST.BIN (in binary format) into the
system image file TEST.SYS:
DLD>
PARTITION NAME: JIMK
PARTITION BASE: 20000
FILE NAME: TEST.SYS;1
TRANSFER ADDRESS: 200

SIZE: 1777 (32. WORD BLOCKS)

In this example, DLD lists the transfer address of the file and other information about
the file and the partition.

11-8

Handling System Pro111ems

After you enter the DlD command line, DlD loads the program into a region that it creates
in the diagnostic partition. The region is called DIAG and is the same size as the partition.
After the program is loaded, DlD clears any remaining memory from the partition (unless
otherwise specified).

10. Halt the processor (in this case, CPB) and start the diagnostic at its transfer address. Push
the START button to begin the diagnostics.
11. Use the following DIGITAL Command language (DCl) or Monitor Console Routine (MCR)
command line to remove the diagnostic partition from the memory box:
DCL>
MCR>

Handling System Problems 11-9

Chapter 12
The I/O Exerciser
The I/O Exerciser (lOX) detects I/O problems on the disk, terminal, and tape units in your
hardware configuration. lOX tests the hardware (and accompanying software) by performing
repeated operations to the same unit. This is commonly referred to as exercising" the device.
II

lOX exercises devices on two kinds of volumes: non-file-structured (NFS) and file-structured
(Files-II). In the context of lOX, the meaning of these terms differs from other manuals within
the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX documentation sets. They are defined here as follows:
•

All tapes and terminals are NFS volumes. NFS describes devices and the testing of devices
that contain non-file-structured volumes.

•

Disks can be either NFS or Files-II volumes.

•

Files-II volumes are disks that you initialize with the Monitor Console Routine (MCR)
command INITIALIZE. They have a home block and a Files-II structure.

You can use lOX to test Files-II disks, NFS disks, magnetic tapes, DEC tapes, and cassettes.
Using the lOX Command Language, you can execute, control, and monitor I/O exercises for all
the device units in your system.
This chapter describes how to use lOX. It also describes each lOX command in alphabetical
order and provides examples on how to set exercising parameters.

12. 1 Introduction to lOX
Before you run an I/O exercise, you need to consider the following aspects of testing:
•

The type of devices you want to exercise

•

The type of exercises you want to run for each device

•

The parameters you want to set for each exercise

To show how these aspects affect the way you use lOX, this section provides an overview of
the procedures lOX uses to exercise a device.

The I/O Exerciser 12-1

Using lOX, you can perform an exercise operation on any mounted disk volume, magnetic tape
unit, or terminal in your hardware configuration (as long as it has not been allocated to another
user). By default, lOX exercises up to 28 units simultaneously. However, by modifying certain
parameters, you can use lOX to test as many as 250 units simultaneously.
Note
To change the initial default values for lOX parameters as well as other default
values for the lOX task, IOX.TSK, edit the lOX task-build file IOXBLD.BLD. On
RSX-11M-PLUS systems, this file is located on your system disk in directory
[1,24].

Pregenerated RSX-11M-PLUS (RL02 distribution kits) and Micro/RSX operating
systems do not allow you to modify the default values for lOX; thus, they do
not include the file IOXBLD.BLD.
When lOX exercises a device, it follows a general procedure consisting of four basic steps:
1. Writing bytes of data (made up of a specific data pattern) to a mounted volume
2.

Reading· the data just written

Checking that the data read matches the data written

Reporting mismatches of data

lOX repeats this process until the exercise has completed.
More specifically, however, lOX uses procedures that depend upon the type of device being
exercised (disk, magnetic tape, cassette, DECtape, or terminal). The following list provides a
more detailed description of how lOX exercises each device type:
Disks

lOX writes a buffer of data to a disk and then reads that data from the disk. By setting
exercise parameters, you determine the data pattern to be written, the range of blocks to be
tested, and the access method to be used (sequential or random).
Magnetic Tapes and Cassettes

To exercise magnetic tapes and cassettes, lOX uses a procedure similar to the one used for
disks. lOX rewinds the tape, writes one record, backspaces one record, and then reads the
record that was just written. This procedure is repeated until the number of records that
you specified for testing are read. At the end of the exercise, lOX writes two tape marks
and rewinds the tape. If you test more than one unit, lOX continues testing on those units
while the tape is rewinding.
By setting exercise parameters, you determine the data pattern to be written, the size of the
data buffer, and the number of records to be exercised.
Terminals

lOX exercises terminals by continuously writing out a portion of the American Standard
Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) character set to a terminal that is not logged in.
If you specify the parameter LOOPBACK NO (that is, if you accept the default), lOX does
not perform any additional functions. However, if you specify LOOPBACK, lOX reads the
characters back (after writing them), compares the two sets of characters, and reports on
the comparison between the two sets.

12..:.2 The I/O Exerciser

Note
LOOPBACK mode requires that a loopback connector be connected in place
of the terminal to direct the characters written back to lOX. lOX depends on
the presence of a type-ahead buffer to store the characters between writing
and reading them.

For more information on the LOOPBACK parameter command, see Section 12.6.16.
DECtapes

lOX exercises DECtapes by writing forward and by reading forward, and then by writing
reverse and by reading reverse until the end of the tape is reached. lOX exercises DECtapes
by using a data buffer of two blocks (1024 10 bytes).
By setting a test parameter, you determine the data pattern that lOX writes to the DECtape.

12.2 Running an I/O Exercise
There are four steps involved in running an I/O exercise:
1.

Invoking lOX

Including the device or devices to be tested in your test configuration

3. Selecting the device units for exercising (using the SELECT, VERIFY, or FILESll command)
4.

Issuing lOX commands

Using lOX commands, you can start and stop the I/O exercise, set and modify the exercise
parameters, and monitor lOX reports. The sections that follow provide detailed descriptions of
each procedure. Section 12.6 provides a description of all the lOX commands.

12.2.1 Invoking lOX
lOX is task built as a nonprivileged, checkpointable task that runs at a priority of 50 in the
GEN partition. If lOX is not installed, you can invoke it by entering the DIGITAL Command
Language (DCL) or MCR command RUN. You can also install the lOX task by using the DCL or
MCR command INSTALL; then, you can invoke lOX by typing the task name (lOX, by default).
You can invoke lOX from a nonprivileged or a privileged terminal, but you must be at a
privileged terminal to install it.
Format 1: Invoking an Uninstalled Version of lOX

To invoke an uninstalled version of lOX, enter the MCR or DCL command RUN, as follows:
>

If you invoke lOX with the RUN command, lOX uses your terminal number to name the task
and prompts you with this task name. For example, if you type the RUN command at terminal
TTI0, lOX displays the following prompt:
TTi0>

You can enter lOX commands at the prompt.

The I/O Exerciser 12-3

Format 2: Invoking an Installed Version of lOX
To install lOX, enter the MCR or DCL command INSTALL from a privileged terminal, as
follows:
>

After lOX is installed, invoke it with the following command:
>

lOX responds by prompting you with the name of the task that you assigned to lOX when you
installed it. If you did not specify a task name when you installed lOX, its task name is .. .lOX
and the prompt is as follows:
lOX>

You can enter lOX commands at the prompt.

12.2.2 Setting Up a Test Configuration-The CONFIGURE Command
Before setting up your test configuration, allocate and mount all units that you want to
exercise. To mount volumes that are not in Files-II format, use the MOUNT command with
the /FOREIGN switch. (For information on the MCR commands ALL and MOU, see the
RSX-11M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual. For information on the DCL commands ALLOCATE
and MOUNT, see the RSX-11M-PLUS Command Language Manual or the Micro/RSX User's Guide,
Volume 2.)
After you allocate and mount the units, include them in your test configuration. When you
include a unit in your test configuration, lOX adds the unit to its list of units available for
exercising and creates an empty data structure for the unit.
In the default test configuration, lOX includes one of each device type supported by DIGITAL
(as unit number 0). To add units to the test configuration, use the CONFIGURE command.
To display the units that are included in the current test configuration, enter the CONFIGURE
command without specifying any of the parameters.

Format
CONFIGURE [ddnn: [=type]]

Parameters
dd

Specifies the device mnemonic (for example, DU).
nn

Specifies the device unit number.
type

Specifies the device type: DISK, TERM (for terminal), or TAPE.

12-4 The I/O Exerciser

You can also assign logical device names to units in the test configuration with the DCL
command ASSIGN (MCR command ASN). Logical names make it possible for you to direct
multiple lOX exercises to the same device. (For more information on the ASSIGN command
and logical assignments, see the RSX-llM-PLUS Command Language Manual or the Micro/RSX
User's Guide, Volume 2. For information on the ASN command, see the RSX-11M-PLUS MCR
Operations Manual.)

Examples
lOX>

Disks:
DBO DDO
DXO DYO

DFO
EMO

DKO
SYO

DLO

DNO

Tapes:
eTO DTO

MMO

MSO

MTO

MUO

DPO

DRO

DSO

DUO

Terminals:
TTO

Displays the current test configuration.
lOX>

Adds DKI to the configuration as a disk unit (because DKO is already configured as a disk)
and MMI to the configuration as a tape unit (because MMO is already configured as a magnetic
tape).
lOX>

Adds TTI2 to the configuration as a terminal unit (because TTO is already configured as a
terminal.)

12.2.3 Selecting Devices for Exercising
After configuring all the units you want to exercise, select the units for exercIsIng. When
you select a unit, lOX fills in the data structure created when you configured the unit. This
data structure contains all the information lOX needs to exercise the specified unit. To select
units for exercising, use the FILESII command for Files-II structured volumes, and use the
SELECT command or the VERIFY command for non-file-structured (NFS) volumes. Briefly,
these commands are described as follows:
•

The FILESII command selects a disk unit with a mounted Files-II volume for an I/O
exercise. Exercising with FILESII does not affect the contents of the disk being tested; your
data is preserved.

•

The SELECT command selects a unit with an NFS volume for an I/O exercise. Exercising
with the SELECT command destroys the contents of the volume being exercised.
The SELECT command is also used to select a terminal for exercising.

•

The VERIFY command selects a disk unit with a mounted NFS volume for an I/O exercise.
Exercising with VERIFY does not affect the contents of the volume because VERIFY only
reads from the volume; it does not write to the volume being exercised. Your data is
preserved.

The I/O Exerciser 12-5

Before exercising a unit, lOX checks the home block to see if it is file-structured. If you try to
select a Files-II volume with the SELECT or VERIFY commands, lOX returns an error message.
Note
If you specify the lOX command VOLUMECHECK=NO parameter, you can
prevent lOX from checking the file structure of the volume.
Use the
VOLUME CHECK command only if you are selecting a Files-II disk that you
no longer want to use as Files-II.
Section 12.6 contains information on the use and syntax of these commands.

12.2.4 Using the lOX Command Language
The lOX Command Language has the following four categories of commands:
Function commands

Select devices for testing, deselect devices from testing, and initiate
tasks to run in parallel with lOX.

Control commands

Start and stop lOX processing, switch lOX modes of operation, and
exit from lOX to the operating system monitor.

Display commands

Display current default parameters, get help text for lOX commands,
and display status and activity reports during an I/O exercise.

Parameter commands

Set default parameters that affect how lOX tests the devices you select
for testing.

Table 12-1 summarizes the lOX commands by category.
Table 12-1:

lOX Command Summary

Command

Description
Function Commands

DESELECT

Removes a device from the list of devices to be tested.

EXECUTE

Directs a command line to the operating system for execution.

FILESll

Selects a device with a mounted Files-II volume for an I/O exercise that
preserves the contents and structure of the volume.

SELECT

Selects a unit with a mounted NFS scratch volume for an I/O exercise that
destroys the contents of the volume.

VERIFY

Selects a mounted disk for an NFS exercise that reads buffers of data
without writing on the volume or performing data comparisons. The
contents of the volume are preserved.

Control Commands
ABORT

Terminates execution of an I/O exercise.

CONTROL_C

Allows you to enter lOX commands while an exercise is in progress.

EXIT

Terminates lOX processing and exits from lOX.

12-6 The I/O Exerciser

Table 12-1 (Cont.):

Command

lOX Command Summary

Description
Control Commands

PROCEED

Exits Interactive Mode, enters Execution Mode, and checks for lOX activity.

RESTART

Reinvokes lOX without exiting to the operating system.

START

Starts exercising units that you have selected for testing.

Display Commands
BAD BLOCKS

Enters bad blocks into the bad blocks list and omits them from testing.

CONFIGURE

Displays the current configuration.

DENSITY

Displays the current density setting on a magnetic tape.

HELP

Displays a summary of lOX commands at your terminal.

PARAMETERLIST

Displays current default parameters, lOX buffer space statistics, and devicedependent parameters for devices you have selected for testing.

PATTERN

Displays the pattern that lOX writes and reads during an exercise.

PRINTSUMMARY

Displays summary reports that summarize lOX activity between the last
interval report and the time you enter the command.

RANGE

Displays the minimum and maximum block numbers for NFS testing on
the specified disk.

Spy

Displays status information on devices being tested.

Parameter Commands
BADBLOCKS

Enters bad blocks into the bad blocks list and omits them from testing.

BUFFERSIZE

Sets the amount of data that lOX transfers for every read or write request
when testing NFS disks, magnetic tapes, and cassettes.

COMPAREDATA

Enables or disables checking of the data pattern.

CONFIGURE

Adds devices to your test configuration.

CONTROL_C

Enables or disables the use of CTRL/C for interrupting an I/O exercise.

DENSITY

Sets the density and characteristic word of the specified magnetic tape
or displays the current density and characteristic word for the specified
magnetic tape unit.

The I/O Exerciser 12-7

Table 12-1 (Cont.):
Command

lOX Command Summary

Description
Parameter Commands

ERRORLIMIT

Sets the maximum number of errors that lOX tolerates between interval
reports before terminating testing on a device.

INTERLEAVE

Sets the number of blocks to be skipped before lOX writes the next buffer
of data for disk testing (applies only to sequential testing, which you
determine with the RANDOM command).

LOGFILE

Determines whether lOX directs activity and error reports to your terminal
or to a log file.

LOOPBACK

Writes ASCII characters to a logged out terminal and then reads them
back.

PATTERN

Sets the pattern that lOX writes and reads during an exercise.

RANDOM

Directs lOX to select either random or sequential blocks for disk testing.

RANGE

Sets the minimum and maximum block numbers for NFS testing on the
specified disk.

RECORDS

Specifies the number of records to be exercised on magnetic tapes and
cassettes.

REPORTERRORS

Enables or disables error reports.

RETRIES

Determines (for magnetic tapes and NFS disks) whether an I/O driver
repeats an I/O operation after the driver receives errors during the
operation.

RUNTIME

Sets the length of time (in minutes) that lOX exercises the unit or units
you have selected for testing.

SUMMARYTIME

Determines how often (in minutes) lOX will output interval reports.

TEMPORARYFILE

Sets the size of the temporary file that lOX uses for testing Files-II disks
with the FILES 11 command.

VOLUMECHECK

Enables or disables checking of disks, which are mounted as NFS volumes,
for a home block and Files-II structure.

WAIT

Determines whether or not lOX waits for an event flag while an exercise
is in progress.

WRITE CHECK

Determines whether or not I/O drivers check write requests to NFS disks.

For a detailed description of each command, see Section 12.6.

12-8 The I/0 Exerciser

12.3 lOX Operating Modes
lOX operates in three modes: Command, Execution, and Interactive. Some of the lOX commands
execute in only one of the three modes. This section discusses the functions of these modes,
how you enter and exit each mode, and what lOX commands are valid in each mode.

12.3. 1 Command Mode
lOX is in Command Mode after you have invoked it and have received the first lOX prompt.
In Command Mode, no devices are being exercised, and tasks initiated by the EXECUTE
command are queued but are not active. (For more information on the EXECUTE command,
see Section 12.6.10.) Use Command Mode to set parameters, to select devices for testing, and
to initiate tasks to be executed.
When you press the RETURN key, you receive an lOX prompt. When you press CTRL/C, you
exit to MCR for one command line.

12.3.2 Execution Mode
When you begin an I/O exercise by entering the START command, lOX exits Command Mode
and enters Execution Mode. In Execution Mode, the following events occur:
•

Exercises begin on selected devices

•

Tasks initiated with the EXECUTE command begin executing

•

The lOX clock is turned on

•

Activity reporting begins (See Section 12.5.1)

•

Error reporting begins (See Section 12.5.2)

Set the CONTROL_C parameter in Command Mode to allow you to enter lOX commands
while an exercise is in progress. By default, CTRL/C is enabled (CONTROL_C YES is set).
If you disable CTRL/C (that is, if you set CONTROL _C NO), then pressing CTRL/C in
Execution Mode gives control to MCR. You receive the MCR prompt (> ) every time you press
the RETURN key and the explicit prompt (MCR> ) every time you press CTRL/C. This remains
in effect until the I/O exercise ends. With CTRL/C disabled, you cannot interrupt the exercise,
but you can terminate it with the MCR command ABORT. (For more information on the ABORT
command, see the RSX-11M-PLUS MeR Operations Manual.)
If you enable CTRL/C (that is, if you set CONTROL _C YES), lOX does not accept any input
from your terminal except CTRL/C. If you try to enter something else, you receive the following
error message for each key you press:
lOX -- Only AC Allowed

When you press CTRL/C, you receive the lOX prompt (instead of the MCR prompt) and lOX
exits Execution Mode and enters Interactive Mode.
(For more information on CONTROL_C, see Section 12.6.6.)

The I/O Exerciser 12-9

12.3.3 Interactive Mode
You have access to Interactive Mode only if CONTROL_C is enabled. When you press CTRL/C
in Execution Mode, lOX exits Execution Mode and enters Interactive Mode. In Interactive Mode,
the RETURN key and CTRL/C have the same functions that they have in Command Mode.
In Interactive Mode, the exercise and tasks initiated by the EXECUTE command are running.
Activity reports and error reports directed to your terminal are suspended if you have set
LOGFILE=NO. If you have set LOGFILE=YES, activity and error reports continue as in Execution
Mode.
The following lOX commands are not valid in Interactive Mode:
•

BUFFERSIZE
You can use the BUFFERSIZE command within the SELECT and VERIFY command lines to
override the current defaults for the device being selected, but the BUFFERSIZE command
cannot be used by itself to reset the default.

•

PATTERN
Although you cannot use the PATTERN command to choose a different pattern to be written
to the volumes being tested, you can use PATTERN with no argument to display all the
patterns.

•

RUNTIME

•

START

•

RESTART

If you enter one of these commands, lOX prints the following error message:
lOX -- Command valid only in command mode

The following lOX commands are valid only in Interactive Mode:
•

ABORT
When you use the ABORT command, lOX exits Interactive Mode and enters Command
Mode. The ABORT command with no qualifiers terminates all exercising and all tasks
initiated by the EXECUTE command. This form of ABORT is valid only in Interactive Mode
because in Command Mode there can be no exercise or active tasks to abort.

•

PRINTSUMMARY

•

PROCEED
The PROCEED command exits Interactive Mode and enters Execution Mode unless no
activity remains when you issue PROCEED, in which case lOX aborts the exercise.

•

Spy

Although you can use PRINTSUMMARY and SPY in Command Mode without generating an
error message, these commands display meaningful information only when you use them in
Interactive Mode.

12-10 The I/O Exerciser

12.4 Using Indirect Command Files with lOX
You can use indirect command files as input to lOX. lOX accepts one level of indirect command
files. You can use indirect command files to set up your test configuration, to choose devices
for testing, to set exercise parameters, and to start and exit the exercise. The default file type is
CMD.
For example, use an editor to create a file named TEST.CMD that contains the following lOX
command sequence:
CONFIGURE DB2:

; Adds DB2 to the test configuration.

FILES11 DB2:

; Selects DB2 for an exercise that preserves
; the contents and structure of the disk.

RUNTIME 10

; Sets an exercise parameter that runs
; for 10 minutes.

START

; Starts the exercise.

EXIT

; Exits from lOX to the operating system
; monitor when the exercise completes.

After you invoke lOX, execute the command file by typing an at sign (@) followed by the file
name. For example:
IOX>

Note that you cannot interrupt an I/O exercise to enter commands; you must execute the
command file before you start an exercise.
In this example, TEST.CMD instructs lOX to exercise DB2 (preserving its contents and structure)
for 10 minutes and then to exit to the operating system monitor.

12.5 lOX Output
lOX generates two types of output: activity reports and error reports. Activity reports summarize
lOX processing information, such as how long an exercise runs and how many asynchronous
system traps (ASTs) are executed. There are two kinds of error reports: data compare error
reports and I/O error reports. Data compare reports show where lOX finds errors on the volume
being tested; 1/0 reports indicate failed QIOs from a driver.
The LOGFILE command directs activity and error reports to your terminal or to a log file. The
REPORTERRORS command enables or disables error reports. (For more information on the
LOGFILE and REPORTERRORS commands, see Section 12.6.15 and 12.6.24.)

The 1/0 Exerciser 12-11

12.5. 1 Activity Reports
There are three types of activity reports, as follows:
Accumulated Totals

Summarize the activity for the entire exercise.

Interval Reports

Summarize lOX activity in
SUMMARYTIME command.

Summary Reports

Summarize activity between the last Interval Report and the time you
enter the PRINTSUMMARY command, which requests a summary
report.

the

time intervals

set by the

Sections 12.6.31 and 12.6.19 describe the SUMMARYTIME and PRINTSUMMARY commands,
respectively.
The Format of Activity Reports

With the exception of the first line, the formats for the different types of activity reports are
identical. Interval and summary reports begin with the time and date of the report.
For example:
lOX -- Summary of exerciser activity at 20-JUL-87 11:16:26

The accumulated totals report does not give the time or date of the report. Instead, it begins as
follows:
ACCUMULATED

TOTALS

The Content of Activity Reports

The content of all activity reports is identical. The following is an interval report of an exercise
that tests the device SY:.
lOX -- Summary of exerciser activity at 31-DEC-87 11:18:29
TIME -- Run: 1 min.
Elapsed: 2 min.
Remaining: 3 min.
SYO: -- 1,874. R/W requests totaling 1,874. blocks with no errors
ASTs executed: 1,875.
Idle-loop iterations: 1,803.

The activity report contains the following information:
•

Timing information
Time between reports as set in the SUMMARYTIME command
Time that the exercise ha,s been in progress to the nearest minute
Time remaining to the nearest minute before the exercise will finish

•

Unit information for each unit being tested
Number of I/O requests to the unit
Number of blocks exercised for disks and tapes
Number of bytes exercised for terminals
Number of error encounters on the unit

12-12 The I/O Exerciser

•

Number of ASTs executed

•

Number of iterations through the idle loop

Use the following commands to control the output of activity reports:
LOGFILE

Directs activity and error reports either to your terminal or to a log file in
your default disk area. (See Section 12.6.15.)

PRINTSUMMARY

Generates reports that summarize lOX activity between the last interval
report and the time at which you enter the command. (See Section 12.6.19.)

Spy

Displays information on the device or devices being tested.
Section 12.6.29.)

(See

SUMMARYTIME

Specifies the frequency at which lOX generates interval reports.
Section 12.6.31.)

(See

12.5.2 Error Reports
There are two kinds of error reports: data compare error reports and I/O error reports.

Data Compare Error Reports
A data compare error indicates that the driver returned a success I/O code to lOX but that the
data written to the volume and the data read from the volume did not match. The following is
an error report generated by a data compare error:
lOX -- DR1: data compare error at block 33,937(decimal) 102221(octal) ~
Good Data: 005767
Bad Data: 155555
~
Word Position: 0 (decimal) 0 (octal)
Et
Buffer contained 255. additional errors C)
~

Identifies the device on which lOX encountered an error. It reports the starting block (in
both decimal and octal) in which the error was found.

Shows the valid ("good") data that lOX wrote to the volume and the invalid ("bad") data that
lOX read from the volume. Only the first error encountered in the test buffer is reported.

Et Shows the position of the first word in the test buffer that generated a mismatch during the
current operation. Only the first error encountered in the test buffer is reported.
C)

Shows how many other errors were found in the test buffer.

I/O Error Reports
If the Executive directive Queue I/O (QIO$) fails, the driver returns an I/O failure code to lOX.
lOX generates a specific I/O error report as a result of the following I/O errors:

I/O Code

Description

IE.ABO

Operation aborted

IE.BBE

Bad block

IE.DAO

Data overrun

The I/O Exerciser 12-13

I/O Code

Description

IE.DNR

Device not ready

IE.EOT

End-of-tape detected

IE.FHE

Fatal hardware error

IE.OFL

Device off line

IE.PRI

Privilege violation

IE.VER

Unrecoverable error

IE.WCK

Write-check error

IE.WLK

Write-lock error

These error codes are shown in the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/0 Drivers Reference Manual.
Section 12.8 of this chapter presents the format and content of the error messages that lOX
generates because of these error codes.

12.6 lOX Command Descriptions
This section provides complete descriptions of the commands in the lOX Command Language.
The commands are presented alphabetically, and each command description includes the
following information:
•

Type of command: Function, Display, Parameter, and Control

•

Command format or formats

•

Descriptions of one or more qualifiers

•

Operating mode restrictions. (If no mode restrictions are described, the command is valid
in Command Mode and in Interactive Mode.)

•

Types of devices and testing to which the command applies.

•

Initial defaults, if applicable.

The lOX Command Language observes the following conventions:
•

Commands are not case sensitive. You can enter the commands in uppercase, lowercase,
or both. In the text, all commands are represented by uppercase letters.

•

You can abbreviate commands by using any combination of characters that appear unique to
the lOX Command Language. In the text, all commands are presented in their unabbreviated
form.

•

In a command line, lowercase words and letters indicate that you substitute a value.

•

All numerical qualifiers are decimal.

•

Square brackets ([ ]) indicate optional elements in the command line.

12-14 The I/0 Exerciser

ABORT
12.6. 1 ABORT
The ABORT command is an lOX control command. It terminates the execution of tasks initiated
with the lOX command EXECUTE.
There are three ABORT command formats; each format performs the same basic function.
However, the format you use determines which tasks are aborted.
Note
You cannot use the ABORT command to abort a task that is attached to your
terminal, such as the Peripheral Interchange Program (PIP).
Format 1: Terminating lOX and Aborting All Tasks
ABORT

Format 1 terminates the execution of an I/O exercise and tasks initiated by the EXECUTE
command. This format is valid only in Interactive Mode (testing in progress) because in
Command Mode (no testing in progress) there can be no running exercise or active tasks to
abort.
Format 2: Aborting All Active Tasks
ABORT/ALL

In Interactive Mode, Format 2 terminates the execution of all tasks initiated by the EXECUTE
command and removes the tasks from the list of tasks to be executed. In Command Mode, this
format removes all tasks from the list of tasks to be executed.
Format 3: Aborting a Specified Task
ABORT taskname

In Interactive Mode, Format 3 terminates the execution of a task initiated by the EXECUTE
command and removes the task from the list of tasks to be executed. In Command Mode, this
form of ABORT removes the task from the list of tasks to be executed.
The taskname parameter specifies the name of the task to be aborted.

The I/O Exerciser 12-15

BADBLOCKS
12.6.2 BADBLOCKS
The BADBLOCKS command is a device-dependent parameter command and a display command.
It applies only to non-file-structured (NFS) disk testing. To use the BADBLOCKS command,

specify a disk that has already been selected for NFS operations.
There are two formats for using BADBLOCKS as a parameter command. Both formats enter
bad blocks into the bad blocks list. After you enter the bad blocks for your disk into the list,
the block numbers remain on the list until you deselect the disk.

Format 1: Specifying Individual Blocks
BADBLOCKS ddnn:blocknumber[.blocknumberl] [.blocknumber2][ •... ]

Parameters
ddnn:

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the device to be tested. You
can also specify a logical name that has been assigned to the device.
blocknumber[, ... ]

Specifies the number of the block or blocks to be entered in the bad block list. If you
specify more than one block number, separate the numbers with commas.

Format 2: Specifying a Range of Blocks
BADBLOCKS ddnn:beg:num

Parameters
ddnn:

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the device to be tested. You
can also specify a logical name that has been assigned to the device.
beg

Specifies the beginning block number.
num

Specifies the number of sequential blocks.
You can also use the two formats together on the same command line.
By using BADBLOCKS as a parameter command, you can omit the bad blocks on your disk
from lOX testing. BAD BLOCKS does not find bad blocks on your disk; instead, it allows you
to enter blocks reported as bad (by the BAD utility) into a bad blocks list for the disk. When
you exercise the disk with the SELECT or VERIFY commands, lOX does not exercise the blocks
you enter in the list. Note that lOX omits only those blocks that you list in the BAD BLOCKS
command line; lOX assumes any blocks that are not on the list are good (even if the BAD utility
has listed them as bad blocks.)
To use BADBLOCKS as a display command, specify BADBLOCKS with the device specification
(ddnn), but do not include any block numbers.

12-16 The I/O Exerciser

BADBLOCKS
Examples

Enters block 3 in the bad blocks list for the OM1 device.

Enters blocks 3, 4, 5, II, 12, 13, 99, and 151 into the bad blocks list for OMl.

Enters blocks 3 to 5, 10 to 13, and 100 to 149 into the bad blocks list for OMl. You can extend
the list of numbers for the length of a single command line. (lOX does not accept continuation
lines.)

Enters blocks 3 to 7, 10 to 13, 99, 100 to 149, and 151 into the bad blocks list for OMl.
000003:005
000010:004
000099:051
000151:001

Displays the bad blocks list for OMl.
The number of sequential blocks was specified for block number 100, but not for block
number 99. However, when lOX displays the bad blocks list, it does not separate the two
blocks because they are consecutive. It strings consecutive blocks together, even if you did not
enter all the block numbers.
Also, lOX does not display two lines (one for block 99 and one for blocks 100 to 149). Instead,
it displays the bad blocks list in one line (line 3).
Note that you can name the blocks explicitly. In the previous example, if you entered 51 blocks
beginning with block 99 in the bad blocks list (that is, 99:51), lOX would produce the same
display.

The I/O Exerciser 12-17

BUFFERSIZE
12.6.3 BUFFERSIZE
The BUFFERSIZE parameter command is device dependent. Use BUFFERSIZE to determine the
amount of data that lOX transfers for every read/write operation request when exercising NFS
disks, terminals, magnetic tapes, and cassettes. lOX stores the specified size in bytes and rounds
this number up to the next 4-byte boundary.

Format
BU[FFERSIZE] buffersize

If you use the random data pattern (PATTERN 0), the buffer size should not exceed
3400 10 bytes. lOX responds to larger buffer sizes by generating unpredictable data compare
errors. (For more information on the available data patterns, see the description of the PATTERN
command.)

Although read/write buffers are used for testing Files-II disks and NFS DECtapes, the buffer
size for these devices is fixed. A 512 1O -byte buffer is used for all Files-II testing. A 1024 1O -byte
buffer is used for all DECtape testing.
The BUFFERSIZE command is valid only when used by itself in Command Mode. In addition,
it is valid only if units are not currently selected; that is, you must set your default buffer size
before you select any units for testing. However, you can use the BUFFERSIZE command in the
SELECT and VERIFY command lines to override the default buffer size for the selected device
as long as you set the buffer size smaller than the default.
The initial default is 1024 10 bytes. The default buffer size for terminals is the size of the
type-ahead buffer, if type-ahead is enabled. Otherwise, the default is 9610 bytes. (For more
information on type-ahead buffers, see the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/0 Operations
Reference Manual.)

12-18 The I/0 Exerciser

COMPAREDATA
12.6.4 COMPAREDATA
The COMPAREDATA command is a device-dependent parameter command for the lOX
commands FILES11 and SELECT. It enables or disables the checking of the data pattern.
Format
COMPAREDATA option
Options
YES

Enables data pattern checking.
NO

Disables data pattern checking.
When you direct lOX to compare data patterns, it compares the data that it writes to the unit
with the data it reads from the unit. If the data read does not match the data written, lOX
prints a data compare error report. Section 12.5.2 discusses data compare error reports in detail.
You can use the COMPAREDATA command within the FILES11 and SELECT command lines
to override the current CaMP AREDATA setting for the device being tested.
The initial default is CaMP AREDATA YES.

The I/O Exerciser 12-19

CONFIGURE
12.6.5 CONFIGURE
The CONFIGURE command is a parameter command and a display command. To add devices
to your test configuration, use CONFIGURE as a parameter command. To display the current
configuration, use CONFIGURE as a display command.

Format
CONF[IGURE] [ddnn: [=type]]

Parameters
ddnn:

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the device to be included in
the test configuration. You can also specify a logical name that has been assigned to the
device.
If you specify more than one unit, separate the unit specifications with spaces or tabs.
type

Specifies the device type. By default, lOX configures one of each supported device type
as unit O. Allowable device types are: DISK, TERM (terminal), or TAPE (magnetic tape or
cassette).
If you do not specify a device type when you configure a device, the device type default values

are as follows:

•

lOX maintains consistency in configuring device units. If one unit of a device type has
already been configured as a disk and you add a unit with the same device specification,
lOX also configures that unit as a disk. For example, if DKO and DBO are configured as
disks in the default configuration, lOX also configures DKl, OBI, and DB2 as disks. By the
same logic, if MMO is configured as a tape unit by default, lOX also configures MMS as a
tape.
Likewise, you cannot configure DKl, OBI, or DB2 as tapes, and you cannot configure MMS
as a disk. If the device type you specify is not consistent with the device unit, lOX displays
the following error message:
IOX---dduu: specified device type is inconsistent

•

For devices with mnemonics that you have not configured previously, the default type is a
disk.

You can add any device to the test configuration and assign it a logical device name by using the
MCR (or DCL) command ASSIGN (ASN). When you configure a device, lOX adds the device
to its list of devices available for testing and creates an empty data structure for the device.
If a device is not already included in the test configuration, you must configure it before you
can select it for testing. lOX does not remove the devices from the configuration at the end of
an exercise. Once you have included a device in the test configuration, only the lOX command
RESTART can remove it.
If you specify CONFIGURE without any qualifiers, it displays the current test configuration. To
find out if a device is already configured, use CONFIGURE as a display command:
lOX>

12-20 The I/0 Exerciser

CONFIGURE
lOX responds as follows:
Disks:
DBO DDO DFO
DXO DYO EMO

DKO DLO DMO DPO DRO DSO DUO
SYO

Tapes:
eTO DTO MMO

MSO MTO MUO

Terminals:
TTO

Examples
lOX>

Configures both XX and YY as disks, and MQl as a tape. lOX also displays the following
messages:
lOX -- XXO: device type not specified - defaulting to 'DISK'
lOX -- YYO: device type not specified - defaulting to 'DISK'
lOX>

Configures devices DKl, OBI, DB2, XXO, and YYO as disk units. lOX configures devices MMS
and MQl as tape units.
lOX>
Disks:
DBO DB1 DB2 DDO DFO DKO DK1 DLO DMO DPO
DRO DSO DUO DXO DYO EMO SYO XXO YYO
Tapes:
eTO DTO MMO MM5 MQ1 MSO MTO MUO
Terminals:
TTO

Displays the current device assignments (including the units added in the previous example.)

The I/O Exerciser

12-21

CONTROL_C

12.6.6 CONTROLC
The CONTROL _C command is a general parameter command. Use CONTROL _C to enable
or disable the use of CTRL/C for interrupting an I/O exercise.

If you are in Command Mode or Interactive Mode, the CONTROL _C command has no effect
on the CTRL/C sequence. When you are in either of these two modes, pressing CTRL/C always
returns you to the MCR. However, in Execution Mode, the function of CTRL/C depends upon
the option you select with the CONTROL_C command. By default, CTRL/C allows you to
exit Execution Mode and enter Interactive Mode.
Section 12.3 describes the three lOX operation modes in detail.
Format
CONTROL_C option

Options
YES

Enables CTRL/C and prevents lOX from accepting any characters other than CTRL/C as
input. If you try to enter a command, you receive the following error message for each key
you press:
lOX -- Only -C allowed

When you press CTRL/C, you receive the lOX prompt instead of the MCR prompt. The
prompt indicates that lOX has left Execution Mode; you are now in Interactive Mode. Note
that this is the only way to access Interactive Mode from Execution Mode.
After you enter Interactive Mode, you can enter other lOX commands.
The initial default is CONTROL _C YES.
NO

Disables CTRL/C and allows lOX to accept CTRL/C as a command for returning control
to MCR. You receive the MeR prompt (> ) each time you press the RETURN key, and you
receive the explicit prompt (MCR> ) every time you press CTRL/C. This remains in effect
until the exercise ends.
With CTRL/C disabled, you cannot interrupt the exercise to enter lOX commands. However,
you can end the exercise with the MeR command ABORT. You can also issue other MeR
commands while an exercise is in progress.

12-22 The I/O Exerciser

DENSITY
12.6.7 DENSITY
The DENSITY command is a device-dependent parameter command and a display command.
It applies only to magnetic tape testing.

Format
DEN[SITY] ddnn: [n]

Parameters
ddnn:

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the magnetic tape to be tested.
You can also specify a logical name that has been assigned to the device.
n

Specifies the magnetic tape density in bits per inch (bpi).
The following tape densities are valid:
MM
800
1600

1600

200

1600

556

6250

800
To use DENSITY as a device-dependent parameter command, issue the DENSITY command
before you issue the SELECT command, or use the DENSITY command within the SELECT
command line. The SELECT command selects the tape for non-file-structured testing, while the
DENSITY command sets the tape density. lOX records the new density setting for the unit in
the second characteristic word (U.CW2) of the Unit Control Block (UCB).
To use DENSITY as a display command, omit the argument (n). lOX displays the current
density of the specified magnetic tape unit and the current bit settings for U.CW2. (For a
description of the individual bit settings, see the RSX-I1M-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/0 Drivers
Reference Manual.)
The DENSITY command is the only command that determines the current DENSITY setting on
a magnetic tape (DENSITY is not displayed by the P ARAMETERLIST command).

Examples
lOX>
Density= 1600 BPI Characteristic Word= 004000 (octal)

Displays the current density and characteristic word (U.CW2) for the tape MMO. (For an MM
device, the density is 1600 10 bpi when bit 11 of U.CW2 is set.)
lOX>

Changes the tape density to 80010 bpi.

The I/0 Exerciser 12-23

DENSITY
lOX>
Density= 800 BPI Characteristic Word= 000000 (octal)

Displays the new tape density and characteristic word (U.CW2) for MMO. (For an MM device,
the density is 80010 bpi when bit 11 of U.CW2 is cleared.)
lOX>
Density= 1111 BPI

Characteristic Word= 004004 (octal)

Displays the current default setting for U.CW2. Because you have not set the density for
MM, lOX does not display the current density. (However, for an MM device, the density is
1600 10 bpi when bit 11 of U.CW2 is set.)
lOX>
lOX>
Density= 800 BPI

Characteristic Word= 001440 (octal)

Sets the tape density to 80010 bpi; then, displays the new settings for the density and the
second characteristic word, U.CW2. (For an MM device, the density is 80010 bpi when bit 11
of U. CW2 is cleared.)
Except for MT devices, the initial default density for magnetic tape devices is 1600 bpi. The
initial default for MT devices is 800 bpi.

12-24 The I/O Exerciser

DESELECT
12.6.8 DESELECT
The DESELECT command is an lOX function command. Use DESELECT to omit, or "deselect,"
devices that you previously selected for testing with the commands SELECT, VERIFY, or FILESll.
Note that the DESELECT command does not remove a device from the test configuration.

Format
DES [ELECT] ddnn:

Parameter
ddnn:
Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the device to be tested. You
can also specify a logical name that has been assigned to the device.

If you issue the command in Command Mode (while no testing is in progress), DESELECT
removes the device from the list of devices to be tested. If you issue the DESELECT command
in Interactive Mode (while testing of the specified device is in progress), lOX stops testing the
device and removes the device from the list of devices to be tested.

For devices that you have selected for non-file-structured testing, DESELECT does the following:
•

Terminates I/O operations (if they are in progress)

•

Deletes the bad blocks list associated with the device (disks only)

•

Deallocates all buffer space associated with the device

•

Detaches lOX from the device

For devices that you have selected for FILES 11 testing, DESELECT does the following:
•

Terminates I/O operations (if they are in progress)

•

Closes and deletes the temporary file

•

Deallocates all buffer space associated with the device

The I/O Exerciser 12-25

ERRORLIMIT
12.6.9 ERRORLIMIT
The ERRORLIMIT command is a device-dependent parameter command that sets the maximum
number of errors lOX tolerates between interval reports before lOX deselects the device.
Format
ER[RORLlMlT] n

Parameter
n

Specifies the maximum number of errors between interval reports before lOX stops testing
the device. After the maximum number is reached, lOX removes the device from the list of
devices to be tested.
The initial default is 10 errors.
To determine how often lOX generates interval reports, use the ERRORLIMIT command with
the SUMMARYTIME command. (See Section 12.6.31 for more information.) To override the
default error limit for the device being selected for testing, use ERRORLIMIT within the FILES 11,
SELECT, and VERIFY command lines.
Example
lOX>
lOX>

Requests interval reports every 2 minutes and sets the error limit at 10 errors. As a result of
these settings, lOX does not allow more than 10 errors on a device in a 2-minute interval before
deselecting the device from testing.

12-26 The I/O Exerciser

EXECUTE
12.6.10 EXECUTE
The EXECUTE command is an lOX function command. Use the EXECUTE command to direct
a command line to the operating system for execution.
To remove a task from the list of tasks to be executed and to terminate execution of the task (if
the task is in progress), use the lOX or MCR command ABORT.

Format
EXE [CUTE] taskname commandstring

Parameters
taskname

Specifies the name of the installed task.
commandstring

Specifies the command line for the task you want to execute.
When you use the EXECUTE command in Interactive Mode (testing in progress), the task you
initiate with EXECUTE runs immediately. When you use the EXECUTE command in Command
Mode (no testing in progress), lOX queues the task for execution. The task begins executing
when you start an exercise with the START command.
Tasks you initiate with EXECUTE run in parallel with I/O exercises. Therefore, you can use
EXECUTE to run a task that does system testing while lOX is doing I/O testing. For example,
if you have written and installed a central processing unit (CPU) exerciser task, you can run
this task in parallel with lOX.
Likewise, you can use the EXECUTE command to run the Bad Block Locator Utility (BAD).
BAD lists the bad blocks on a non-file-structured (NFS) disk at your terminal. To prevent lOX
from performing I/O operations on the blocks that are listed as bad, enter this information into
the lOX bad blocks list. (To enter information into the bad blocks list, use the BADBLOCKS
command. For more information, see Section 12.6.2.)

Restrictions
The following restrictions apply to the EXECUTE command:
•

You cannot use EXECUTE to run uninstalled tasks.

•

EXECUTE only operates on systems that support task spawning.

•

You must provide a number sign (#) for tasks whose command line processing requires
a leading space (such as the BAD task). lOX converts the number sign to a space. (You
do not need to include a number sign in the command line for tasks that do not require a
leading space.)

•

The rules for using the spawn (SPWN$) directive and entering command lines apply to the
EXECUTE command arguments (taskname and commandstring). (For more information, see
the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX Executive Reference Manual.)

The I/0 Exerciser 12-27

EXECUTE
Examples
lOX>

Runs the Bad Block Locator Utility (BAD) on the NFS disk DLO. The BAD command switch
ILl tells BAD to list all the bad blocks.
lOX>
lOX>

Runs a CPU exerciser task that has been installed with the task name ... QWK. Also, lOX passes
the command line ICPU=1144 to the task.

12-28

The liD Exerciser

EXIT
12.6. 11 EXIT
The EXIT command is a control command. Use the EXIT command to terminate lOX processing
and to exit from lOX to the operating system monitor.

Format
EXI [T]

The I/O Exerciser 12-29

FILES 11
12.6.12 FILES11
The FILESll command is a function command for selecting a Files-II disk for an I/O exercise.
When you test a disk with the FILES 11 command, you protect the contents and structure of
your disk. lOX writes data into a temporary file, which it removes from the disk at the end of
the test.
Before you can select a disk for testing, you must add the disk to the test configuration (see
Section 12.2.2).

Format
F[ilesll] ddnn: [command=qualifier] ...

Parameters
ddnn:

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the device to be tested. You
can also specify a logical name that has been assigned to the device.
command

Specifies a valid lOX command. To specify more than one command, separate the commands
with spaces or tabs.
qualifier

Specifies the exercise parameter being set by the lOX command.
When you select a disk for testing with the FILES 11 command, you can override the default
parameters by using the following device-dependent parameter commands in the command line:
COMPAREDATA

Enables or disables checking of the data pattern (see Section 12.6.4).

ERRORLIMIT

Sets the maximum number of errors that lOX tolerates between interval
reports before terminating testing on a device (see Section 12.6.9).

INTERLEAVE

Sets the number of blocks to be skipped before lOX writes the next buffer
of data for disk testing (see Section 12.6.14).

RANDOM

Directs lOX to select either random or sequential blocks for testing (see
Section 12.6.21).

TEMPORARYFILE

Sets the size of the temporary file that lOX uses for testing (see
Section 12.6.32).

You can use these commands to set the default parameters before you use the FILESll command
to select a unit. You can also use these commands within the FILES 11 command line to override
the default parameters for the unit being selected. Howver, once you have selected a device,
the default parameters become fixed for that device. You cannot reset them until after you
deselect the device.
If you do not specify any commands within the FILES 11 command line, the device is exercised

with the default parameters currently in effect.

12-30 The I/0 Exerciser

FILES 11
If you issue the FILESll command in Interactive Mode (while an exercise is in progress), lOX
begins testing the specified device immediately. If you issue the FILESll command in Command
Mode (while no exercise is in progress), lOX includes the specified device in its list of devices
to exercise. To begin the exercise, use the START command.

Examples
lOX>

Selects the device DBO for I/O exercising. lOX compares data, sequentially accesses the blocks
in the file, and opens a 600-block temporary file.
Example 12-2 in Section 12.7 illustrates and describes how you test an RL02 disk with the
FILES 11 command.

The I/O Exerciser 12-31

HELP
12.6. 13 HELP
The HELP command is a display command. To display a summary of lOX commands at your
terminal, use the HELP command.

Format
H[ELP]

12-32 The I/O Exerciser

INTERLEAVE
12.6. 14 INTERLEAVE
The INTERLEAVE command is a parameter command that sets a device-dependent parameter
for disk testing. The INTERLEAVE command sets the number of blocks to be skipped before
lOX writes the next buffer of data.

Format
I[NTERLEAVE] number

Parameter
number

Specifeis the logical blocks numbers (LBNs) that lOX skips before it writes the next buffer
of data. The initial default is four blocks.
You can use the INTERLEAVE command within the FILES11, SELECT, and VERIFY command
lines to override the current default for the disk being selected.

Restriction
The INTERLEAVE factor applies only to sequential testing. To enable sequential testing, specify
the RANDOM command with the NO option. (The initial default for the RANDOM command
is YES; lOX tests blocks on the disk randomly and ignores the INTERLEAVE command.)

The I/0 Exerciser

12-33

LOGFILE
12.6. 15 LOGFILE
The LOGFILE command is a general parameter command. Use the LOGFILE command to
direct activity and error reports either to your terminal or to a log file in your default disk area.
Sections 12.5.1 and 12.5.2 discuss the content and format of activity and error reports.
Format
LOGFILE option

Options
NO

Directs activity and error reports to your terminal. This is the initial default.
YES

Directs activity and error reports to the log file.
Summary reports, which lOX generates when you issue the PRINTSUMMARY command, are
displayed at your terminal regardless of how you have set LOGFILE.
lOX does not open a new log file each time you run an exercise with LOGFILE enabled. Instead,
lOX creates the file when you first run an exercise, and then it appends new data to the created
file. The file is located in your User File Directory (UFD) and is named as follows:
yyyyyy.LOG

The prefix yyyyyy is the name of the task currently running lOX on your terminal (lOX, another
task name, or the name of your terminal).
In addition to activity and error reports, lOX inserts the following date and time information
into the log file:
•

When the exercise begins, followed by the output of the P ARAMETERLIST command

•

When the exercise ends

•

When lOX starts a log file

•

When lOX ends log file entries

•

When an exercise is aborted

For example, all exercises begin with an event line such as the following:
lOX -- 20-JUL-87 11:15:24 ******** EXERCISER STARTED

********
In addition, all exercises end with an event line similar to the following one:
lOX -- 20-JUL-87 11:20:34 ******** EXERCISER TERMINATED

********

12-34 The I/O Exerciser

LOOPBACK
12.6. 16 LOOPBACK
The LOOPBACK command is a parameter command for exercising terminals. When LOOPBACK
is enabled, lOX writes ASCII characters to a logged out terminal and then reads them back.
Format
L[OOPBACK] option

Options
YES

Enables LOOPBACK testing of a terminal line and interface.
NO

Disables LOOPBACK testing. lOX tests a terminal by displaying a portion of the ASCII
character set.
This is the default.
LOOPBACK YES tests a terminal line and terminal interface. During the I/O exercise, characters
are written by the interface to the terminal line. Then, the characters are reversed by the loopback
connector, which sends them back up the line. After they are received by the interface, lOX
reads them back into a buffer for comparison. If characters are not transmitted successfully
throughout the exercise, lOX reports an error.
Restriction

The terminal characteristics SLAVE, PASSTHRU, NOECHO, LOWERCASE, and NOWRAP must
be set before the loop back connector is installed.

The I/O Exerciser 12-35

PARAMETERLIST
12.6.17 PARAMETERLIST
The PARAMETERLIST command is a display command.
following information:

PARAMETERLIST displays the

•

Current execution default parameters at the time you entered the P ARAMETERLIST
command

•

lOX buffer space statistics
lOX displays the statistics in the following format:
totalmemory:freeblock:freebytes:fragments

Field

Description

totalmemory

Displays the size of lOX buffer space in bytes.

freeblock

Displays the size of the largest free block of lOX buffer space in bytes.

freebytes

Displays the total amount of free bytes available in lOX buffer space.

fragments

Displays the number of memory fragments in lOX buffer space.

•

List of tasks initiated by the EXECUTE command (if applicable)

•

Devices selected for testing with the FILES11, SELECT, and VERIFY commands

Examples
lOX>

BUFFERSIZE= 1024.
ERRORLIMIT= 10.
INTERLEAVE= 4.
PATTERN= O.
RECORDS= 1024.
RUNTIME= 5.
SUMMARYTIME= 1.
TEMPORARYFILE= 500.

COMPAREDATA= YES
CONTROL_C= YES
LOGFILE= NO
LOOPBACK= NO
RANDOM= YES
REPORTERRORS= YES
RETRIES= YES
VOLUMECHECK= YES
WAIT= YES
WRITECHECK= NO

Buffer space usage= 3290. :1924. :1924. :1.

Displays the current default parameters and the lOX buffer space statistics.
Example 12-1 describes the PARAMETERLIST display in more detail.

12-36 The I/0 Exerciser

PARAMETERLIST

Example 12-1:

PARAMETERLIST Display Shown in Four Parts

IOX>EXECUTE ... BAD #DLO:/LI
IOX>FILES11 SY: TEMPORARYFILE=800 ERRORLIMIT=50
IOX>SELECT MMO: RECORDS=350 BUFFERSIZE=700 RETRIES=NO
IOX>VERIFY DMO: RANGE 200:1000 RANDOM=NO INTERLEAVE=8
IOX>PARAMETERLIST

4t
~

Device Mode Buffersize Filesize/Records/Range Parameters C.
DMO:
MMO:
SYO:

VFY
SEL
F11

Task

Status

... BAD QUEUED

1024.
700.
512.

Command line
-----------DLO:/LI

BUFFERSIZE= 1024.
ERRORLIMIT= 10.
INTERLEAVE= 4.
PATTERN= O.
RECORDS= 1024.
RUNTIME= 5.
SUMMARYTIME= 1.
TEMPORARYFILE= 500.

RET INT=8. ERR=10. ~
COM ERR=10.
COM RET RAN ERR=50. ~

200. ->1,000.
350.
800.

•

COMPAREDATA= YES
CONTROL_C= YES
LOGFILE= NO
LOOPBACK= NO
RANDOM= YES
REPORTERRORS= YES
RETRIES= YES
VOLUMECHECK= YES
WAIT= YES
WRITECHECK= NO

Buffer space usage= 5338. :1020. :1588. :2.

4t While lOX executes, the EXECUTE command runs the Bad Block Locator Utility (BAD). (For
more information, see Section 12.6.10.)
~

Selects SY: for FILESll testing, overriding the defaults for the TEMPORARYFILE and
ERRORLIMIT commands. lOX tests SY: as a Files-II device, using the following parameters:
•

A 512 -byte data buffer (fixed)

•

A TEMPORARYFILE size of 800 blocks

•

CaMP ARE DATA enabled (by default)

•

RETRIES enabled (by default)

•

RANDOM YES (by default)

•

An error limit of 50 errors

Selects DMO with the VERIFY command. lOX tests DMO, using the following parameters:
•

A default buffer size of 102410 bytes

•

A range of blocks, 200 to 1000

•

RETRIES enabled (by default)

The I/O Exerciser 12-37

PARAMETERLIST
•

RANDOM disabled

•

The INTERLEAVE factor set to 8

•

A default error limit of 10

G Displays the selected devices (DM, MM, and SY:) and their device-dependent parameters.
Unless the default parameters were overridden in the previous command lines, lOX displays
the defaults.
This part of the display has five fields that are labeled by function. They are as follows:

Display Field

Description

device

Specifies the device mnemonic of the selected device.

mode

Indicates the testing mode selected: VERIFY, SELECT, or FILESIl.

buffersize

Specifies the buffer size used for reading data from the device and
writing data to the device. You can alter the buffer size for magnetic
tapes, non-file-structured (NFS) disks, and cassettes. Files-II disks
have a fixed buffer size of 51210 bytes. DECtapes have a fixed buffer
size of 1024 10 bytes.

file size
records
range

Indicates one of the following:

parameter

•

Temporary file size in blocks for disks selected with
FILESII

•

Number of records to test for magnetic tapes and cassettes
selected with the SELECT command

•

Range of blocks to be tested on NFS disks selected with
the SELECT or VERIFY command

Specifies device-dependent parameter commands. Parameter commands specify a value (such as INTERLEAVE=8. or ERRORLIMIT=10.)
or a YES/NO setting. In a display, RAN indicates that RANDOM is
set to YES; the absence of RAN indicates that RANDOM is set to NO.

Display line corresponding to the VERIFY command line (see number 3).

Display line corresponding to the FILES 11 command line.

List of task or tasks initiated by the EXECUTE command. In this example, only one task
(BAD) was initiated.

12-38

The I/0 Exerciser

PARAMETERLIST
This part of the display has the following fields:
Task Installed

Specifies the taskname (for example, ... BAD).

Status Execution

Specifies one of the following status fields:

Command Line
6)

•
•
•

ACTIVE

•

WARNING

•

ERROR

•

SEVEREERROR

QUEUED

SUCCESS

Specifies the command line passed to the task.

Current defaults at the time the P ARAMETERLIST command was entered.
(In Command Mode, you can press CTRL/O to suppress the output of PARAMETERLIST.
In Interactive Mode, pressing CTRL/O has no effect on the output.)

CD lOX buffer space statistics.
In the examples, these statistics have changed to reflect the buffer allocations for the three
devices that you selected for testing.

The I/O Exerciser 12-39

PATTERN
12.6.18 PATTERN
The PATTERN command is a parameter command and a display command. As a parameter
command, PATTERN sets the data pattern that lOX writes and reads during I/O testing. As a
display command, PATTERN displays the 13 available patterns and indicates the current default
with an asterisk (*).

Format
PAT [TERN] [patternnumber]

Parameter
pattern number

Specifies a number corresponding to the pattern that you want lOX to use during I/O
testing. To use PATTERN as a display command, omit this argument.
The numbers and corresponding patterns are as follows:

Pattern Number

Data Pattern

Random data

000000,000000

177777,177777

125252,052525

165555,133333

163126,163126

055555,155555

022222,122222

111111,111111

007417,007417

021042,021042

104210,104210

052652,052652

Pattern 0 is a random data pattern from pure portions of lOX. It differs from block to block.

Restrictions
The following restrictions apply to the PATTERN command:
•

When you use pattern 0, do not exceed a buffer size of 3400 10 bytes. When a buffer is larger
than 3400 10 bytes, lOX generates unpredictable data compare errors. Note that pattern 0 is
the initial default pattern.

•

If you use logical assignments to direct multiple lOX exercises to one device, you cannot
use pattern O.

12-40

The I/O Exerciser

PATTERN
•

To change the default pattern for the PATTERN command, you must be in Command
Mode. The form of the PATTERN command that changes the pattern default is not valid
in Interactive or Execution Mode.

Examples
lOX>

o = Random
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Data

= 000000,000000

= 177777,177777
= 125252,052525
= 165555,133333

= 163126,163126

= 055555,155555

= 022222,122222

= 111111,111111
= 007417,007417

= 021042,021042
= 104210,104210

= 052652,052652

Displays the default pattern (pattern 0, random data).
lOX>

Changes the default pattern from random data to pattern 3 (125252,052525).
lOX>

o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Random Data

= 000000,000000

= 177777,177777

= 125252,052525

= 165555,133333
= 163126,163126
= 055555,155555

= 022222,122222
= 111111,111111

= 007417,007417
= 021042,021042

= 104210,104210
= 052652,052652

Displays the new default pattern (the initial default was pattern 0). The asterisk indicates that
the default is now pattern 3.

The I/0 Exerciser

12-41

PRINTSUMMARY
12.6. 19 PRINTSUMMARY
The PRINTSUMMARY command is a display command that is valid only in Interactive
Mode. When you enter the PRINTSUMMARY command, lOX generates summary reports
that summarize lOX activity between the last interval report and the time you enter the
command.
Summary reports and interval reports are different types of activity reports produced by lOX.
Activity reports summarize lOX processing information, such as how long an exercise will run
and how many asynchronous system traps (ASTs) have been executed. Summary reports and
interval reports have the same content and format. However, lOX generates interval reports
at time intervals set with the lOX command SUMMARYTIME. lOX generates summary reports
when you enter the PRINT SUMMARY command in Interactive Mode.
lOX displays the summary reports at your terminal (even if LOGFILE is enabled).
For a complete description of activity reports, see Section 12.5.1.

12-42 The I/O Exerciser

PROCEED
12.6.20 PROCEED
The PROCEED command is a control command that is valid only in Interactive Mode. When
you enter the PROCEED command, lOX exits Interactive Mode, enters Execution Mode, and
checks for lOX activity. If no exercises are in progress and no tasks initiated by lOX are
executing, then lOX terminates the exercise.
If there is lOX activity and you have disabled LOGFILE (set LOGFILE NO), lOX resumes the

display of activity and error reports at your terminal. (When LOGFILE is disabled in Interactive
Mode, lOX suspends the display of activity and error reports at your terminal.) If there is lOX
activity and you have enabled LOGFILE (set LOGFILE YES), lOX continues recording activity
and error reports in the log file.
Use the PROCEED command for one of the following reasons:
•

If you want lOX to end an exercise as soon as lOX activity ends

•

If LOGFILE is disabled and you want lOX to resume display of activity and error reports at

your terminal.
For more information, see the description of the lOX command LOGFILE.

The I/O Exerciser 12-43

RANDOM
12.6.21 RANDOM
The RANDOM command is a device-dependent parameter command that applies to disk testing.
It directs lOX to select either random or sequential blocks for disk testing.

Format
RAND [OM] option

Options
YES

Directs lOX to use its random number generator to choose the blocks on the selected disk
for exercising.
RANDOM YES is the initial default.
NO

Directs lOX to test blocks on the disk sequentially.
If you set RANDOM NO, lOX skips the number of blocks specified with the INTERLEAVE
command before testing the next block. (For more information, see the description of the
lOX command INTERLEAVE.)

You can use the RANDOM command within the FILESll, SELECT, and VERIFY command
lines to override the current default parameter, when selecting blocks for testing.

Examples
lOX>
lOX>

Tests every eighth block on the disk (that is, block 0, 7, 15 and so on).

12-44 The I/O Exerciser

RANGE
12.6.22 RANGE
The RANGE command is a device-dependent parameter command and a display command. It
applies to disks that you select for non-file-structured (NFS) testing with the lOX commands
SELECT or VERIFY. (For more information on the SELECT and VERIFY commands, see the
individual command descriptions. For an example of NFS testing, see Section 12.7.)
Format
RANG[E] ddnn: [minimum: maximum]

Parameters
ddnn:

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the disk to be tested. You
can also specify a logical name that has been assigned to the device.
minimum

Indicates the beginning block number for the range of blocks to be tested.
maximum

Indicates the ending block number for the range of blocks to be tested.
As a parameter command, RANGE sets the minimum and maximum block numbers for NFS
testing on the specified disk unit. You can also use RANGE as a parameter command within
the SELECT or VERIFY command lines.
As a display command, RANGE is valid only for devices you have previously selected for
lOX testing. (For information on selecting a device, see Section 12.2.3.) RANGE displays the
minimum and maximum block numbers for the specified disk unit. The display form of the
RANGE command cannot be used within the SELECT or VERIFY command lines.
Examples
lOX>

Tests blocks in the range 300 to 500 on the device DLO.
lOX>
300. ->600.

Displays the current range of blocks to be tested. This display verifies that the range specified
in the previous example is now in effect.
lOX>
O. ->20,420.

Displays the current range of blocks to be tested on the device DLO. In this example, the range
of blocks is from 20 to 420. (This is the default for RL02 devices.)
The default range for all disks that have been selected is between zero and the maximum block
number on the disk minus 60 (O:maximum -60).

The I/O Exerciser 12-45

RECORDS
12.6.23 RECORDS
The RECORDS command is a device-dependent parameter command. The RECORDS command
applies to magnetic tapes and cassettes that you have selected for testing with the lOX command
SELECT. Use the RECORDS command to specify the number of records on the magnetic tape
or cassette to be exercised.

Format
REC[ORDS] recordcount

Parameter
recordcount

Specifies the number of records on the magnetic tape or cassette to be exercised. If you set
the record count to 0, lOX tests the records on magnetic tapes and cassettes until it detects
the end of the tape. At the end of the tape, lOX displays a message and deselects the tape
unit.
You can use RECORDS in the SELECT command line to override the default record count for
the magnetic tape or cassette being selected.

Examples
IOX>

Directs lOX to exercise 200 records on all magnetic tapes and cassettes.
The initial default is 1024 10 records.

12-46 The I/O Exerciser

REPORTERRORS
12.6.24 REPORTERRORS
The REPORTERRORS command is a general parameter command that enables or disables lOX
error reports.

Format
REP[ORTERRORS] option

Options
YES

Enables lOX error reports. This is the initial default.
NO

Disables lOX error reports.
There are two kinds of error reports: data compare error reports and I/O error reports.
lOX reports a data compare error when the following two conditions are met:
1.

A success code is returned from the device driver (meaning that a QIO succeeded).

The data that lOX wrote does not match the data that lOX read.

Section 12.5.2 illustrates and describes data compare error reports.

I/O error reports contain lOX error messages. I/O error codes are returned from the device
drivers (meaning that a QIO failed). These error codes generate one of the error messages
discussed in Section 12.8.
Restrictions
lOX directs error reports to your terminal, but it does so with the following restrictions:
•

Error reports never interrupt activity reports.

•

If LOGFILE is enabled, lOX enters error reports in the log file instead of displaying them at
your terminal.

•

In Interactive Mode, lOX suppresses the printing of error reports.

The I/O Exerciser 12-47

RESTART
12.6.25 RESTART
The RESTART command is a control command that is valid only in Command Mode. When
you restart lOX, you reinvoke lOX without exiting to the operating system monitor.
The RESTART command performs the following functions:
•

Deselects devices that are selected for testing.

•

Resets all parameters to their initial defaults.

•

Removes all tasks queued for execution by the EXECUTE command from the list of tasks
to be executed.

•

Removes all devices from the default test configuration.

12-48 The I/O Exerciser

RETRIES
12.6.26 RETRIES
The RETRIES command is a device-dependent parameter command that applies to the testing
of magnetic tapes and non-file-structured (NFS) disks.
Format

RET[RIES] option
Options
YES

Directs a device driver to use its standard recovery techniques to attempt to recover from
an error.
This is the default.
NO

Inhibits an I/O driver from using its standard recovery techniques when it encounters an
error.
You can use the RETRIES command within the SELECT and VERIFY command lines to override
the current default for the device being selected.

The I/O Exerciser 12-49

RUNTIME
12.6.27 RUNTIME
The RUNTIME command is a general parameter command that is valid only in Command Mode
(that is, when no exercising is in progress).

Format
RUN [TIME] minutes

Parameter
minutes

Specifies the number of minutes that lOX tests the device or devices that you select for
testing. If you specify RUNTIME 0, lOX continues testing the selected devices until you
abort the exercise with either the lOX or MCR command ABORT.
The initial default is 5 minutes.

12-50 The I/O Exerciser

SELECT
12.6.28 SELECT
The SELECT command is a function command. It selects a device with a non-file-structured
(NFS) volume mounted for an I/O exercise that destroys the contents and structure of the
volume. Before you can use SELECT, you must include the device in the test configuration.

Format
SE[LECT] dduu: [command=qualifier] ...

Parameters
ddnn:

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the device to be tested. You
can also specify a logical name that has been assigned to the device.
command

Specifies one of the commands listed in Table 12-2.
qualifter

Specifies the value for the parameter you are setting with the corresponding command.
Exercise parameters determine how lOX exercises units. These parameters set various aspects of
testing, such as: how long an exercise is to run, how many records are to be tested on magnetic
tapes, what range of blocks are to be tested on disks, and whether output is to be directed to
your terminal or to a log file.
Use the following commands in conjunction with the SELECT command to set default parameters
for exercising a terminal or a unit with an NFS volume:
BADBLOCKS

INTERLEAVE

RECORDS

BUFFERSIZE

LOOPBACK

RETRIES

COMPAREDATA

RANDOM

VOLUME CHECK

DENSITY

RANGE

WRITECHECK

ERRORLIMIT
With the exception of the BADBLOCKS command, you can use these commands within the
SELECT command line to override the current default settings. For more information on each
command, see the individual command descriptions.
There are two kinds of exercise parameters: general and device dependent. Table 12-2 lists the
device-dependent parameters for exercising different types of devices.

The I/O Exerciser 12-51

SELECT

Table 12-2:

Parameter Commands by Device Type for the SELECT Command

Parameter Command

NFS Disks

BADBLOCKS 1

BUFFERSIZE

COMPAREDATA

Cassettes

DECtapes

Magnetic
Tapes

Terminals

DENSITY

X
X

ERRORLIMIT

INTERLEAVE

LOOPBACK

RANDOM

RANGE

RECORDS

RETRIES

VOLUMECHECK

WRITECHECK

X
X

1 Cannot be used within SELECT command line.

Once you have selected a device, the default parameters become fixed for that device. You
cannot reset them without first "deselecting" the device.
When you issue the SELECT command in Interactive Mode (while an exercise is in progress),
lOX begins testing the specified device immediately. When you issue the SELECT command
in Command Mode (while no exercise is in progress), lOX includes the specified device in its
list of devices to exercise but does not begin the exercise until you start the exercise with the
START command.
If no further parameter commands are specified within the SELECT command line, the device
is exercised with the parameters currently in effect.

Note that commands can be separated only by spaces or tabs.

12-52 The I/O Exerciser

SELECT
Example
IOX>

This command line does the following:
•

Selects DLO for I/O exercising

•

Tests only blocks 100 to 4000

•

Allows the driver to retry I/O operations if it encounters errors

•

Accesses the blocks on the volume sequentially testing every eighth block

•

Uses a data buffer of 2000 bytes for data transfer

Example 12-3 in Section 12.7 illustrates and describes how to test a magnetic tape unit with
the SELECT command.

The I/0 Exerciser 12-53

Spy
12.6.29 Spy
The Spy command is a display command. To display status information on one or more devices
being tested, use the Spy command in Interactive Mode.
Format
SP [YJ [ddnn : J

Parameter
ddnn:

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the device. You can also
specify a logical name that has been assigned to the device.
If you do not specify a device, lOX displays status information on all devices being tested.

Otherwise, SPY displays status information only for the specified device.
Example
>
nBO: -- TYPE=Fll

VBN=305.

I/O=AST

queued

FUNCTION=WRITE

This display indicates the following:
•

Device being exercised (DBO)

•

Type of testing being performed on the device: FILES11, SELECT, or VERIFY

•

Virtual block number (VBN) being tested (For non-file-structured [NFS] volumes, lOX
displays the logical block number [LBN])

•

I/O request status: asynchronous system trap (AST) queued, in progress, or executing an
idle loop

•

Type of I/O function being performed: READ or WRITE

Spy always outputs to your terminal, even if LOGFILE is enabled.

12-54 The I/O Exerciser

START
12.6.30 START
The START command is a control command that is valid only in Command Mode. When you
use the START command, lOX exits Command Mode and enters Execution Mode. Section 12.3
discusses the three lOX operating modes in detail.
After you have set your test configuration and have selected the devices you want to test, use
the START command to begin exercising the selected units. START also turns on the lOX clock,
begins activity and error reporting (if you enabled error reporting with REPORTERRORS YES),
and begins executing tasks queued by the EXECUTE command.

The I/O Exerciser 12-55

SUMMARYTIME
12.6.31 SUMMARYTIME
The SUMMARYTIME command is a general parameter command that specifies how often lOX
generates interval reports. (For a complete discussion of interval reports, see Section 12.5.1).
Format
SU[MMARYTIME] minutes

Parameter
minutes

Specifies the time interval (in minutes) between interval reports.
reports, set SUMMARYTIME to O.
The initial default is 1 minute between interval reports.

12-56 The I/O Exerciser

To suppress interval

TEMPORARYFILE
12.6.32 TEMPORARYFILE
The TEMPORARYFILE command is a device-dependent parameter command that applies to
the testing of Files-II disks with the FILES 11 command. The FILES 11 command protects the
contents of the disk by writing them to a temporary file, which lOX deletes at the end of the
exercise.
Format
T[EMPORARYFILE] filesize

Parameter
flleslze

Specifies the size of the temporary file in blocks.
Use the TEMPORARYFILE command in the FILES11 command line to override the current
default for the disk being selected.
The initial default is 500 blocks.

The I/O Exerciser 12-57

VERIFY
12.6.33 VERIFY
The VERIFY command is a function command you use to select a mounted non-file-structured
(NFS) disk for an exercise. It reads buffers of data without writing to the disk, performing data
comparisons or destroying the contents of the disk.

Format
VE[RIFY] ddnn: [command=qualifier] ...

Parameters
ddnn:

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the device to be tested. You
can also specify a logical name that has been assigned to the device.
command

Specifies one of the commands listed in Table 12-2.
qualifier

Specifies the value for the parameter you are setting with the corresponding command.
VERIFY accepts the following device-dependent parameter commands within its command line:
BUFFERSIZE

Sets the amount of data that lOX transfers for every read or write request
(see Section 12.6.3).

ERRORLIMIT

Sets the maximum number of errors that lOX tolerates between interval
reports before terminating testing on a device (see Section 12.6.9).

INTERLEAVE

Sets the number of blocks to be skipped before lOX writes the next buffer
of data for 9isk testing (see Section 12.6.14).

RANDOM

Directs lOX to select either random or sequential blocks for testing (see
Section 12.6.21).

RANGE

Sets the minumum and maximum block numbers for NFS testing on the
specified disk (see Section 12.6.22).

RETRIES

Determines whether or not the device driver repeats an I/O operation
when it receives errors during the operation (see Section 12.6.26).

Once you have selected a device, the default parameters for that device are fixed. You cannot
reset them without first deselecting the device. If you do not specify any parameter commands
within the VERIFY command line, the disk is exercised with the parameters currently in effect.
When you use the VERIFY command in Interactive Mode (while an exercise is in progress),
lOX begins testing the specified device immediately. When you issue the VERIFY command
in Command Mode (while no exercise is in progress), lOX includes the specified device in its
list of devices to exercise but does not begin the exercise until you start the exercise with the
START command.
Note that the parameter commands can be separated only by spaces or tabs.

12-58 The I/O Exerciser

VERIFY
Example
lOX>'

Illustrates how to use the ERRORLIMIT and RANGE commands within the VERIFY command
line to override the current defaults for testing the device DMO. This command line selects
DMO for read-only testing of blocks 1000 to 3000 (inclusive) with a maximum of 1000 errors
before lOX deselects the disk.
Example 12-4 in Section 12.7 illustrates and explains how to test an NFS disk with VERIFY.

The I/O Exerciser 12-59

VOLUMECHECK
12.6.34 VOLUMECHECK
The VOLUME CHECK command is a device-dependent parameter command that applies to NFS
disk testing with the lOX command SELECT. VOLUMECHECK enables or disables checking of
disks mounted as non-file-structured (NFS) volumes for a home block and a Files-II structure.
Format
VO[LUMECHECK] option

Options
YES

Enables VOLUME CHECK. Prevents you from using the SELECT command to select a
volume with a Files-II structure. You should use VOLUMECHECK YES unless you are
intentionally writing over a Files-II disk.
NO

Disables VOLUMECHECK. lOX allows you to use the SELECT command to select the
disk without warning you that the test destroys the contents of the disk. Do not use
VOLUMECHECK NO unless you are intentionally writing over a Files-II disk.
You can use the VOLUMECHECK command within the SELECT command line to override the
current default values for the disk being selected.
The initial default is VOLUME CHECK YES.

12-60

The I/O Exerciser

WAIT
12.6.35 WAIT
The WAIT command is a general parameter command that determines whether or not lOX waits
for an event flag while an exercise is in progress. The WAIT command has no effect on tasks
initiated with the EXECUTE command.
Format
WA[IT] option

Options
YES

Requires lOX to wait for an event flag to signal that an I/O operation has completed.
During this time, the Executive may be able to execute another task.
NO

Does not require lOX to wait for an event flag; lOX executes an idle loop during I/O
operations. Setting WAIT NO occupies system resources; therefore, you should not specify
this option unless you intentionally want to monopolize resources.
The initial default is WAIT YES.

The I/O Exerciser

12-61

WRITECHECK
12.6.36 WRITECHECK
The WRITE CHECK command is a device-dependent parameter command that applies only to
testing non-file-structured (NFS) disks with the lOX command SELECT. Use WRITECHECK to
determine whether or not I/O drivers check write requests to NFS disks.
If you enable WRITE CHECK, lOX writes data to the disks by issuing the I/O request Write

Logical Block With Check (IO.WLC) to the driver instead of Write Logical Block (IO.WLB).
The disk controller reads, word by word, a copy of the data from the data buffer, while
simultaneously reading the same data from the disk. Then, the disk controller compares the
two copies of the data. If the copies do not match, the driver repeats the original write
operation and performs another write-check. This process continues until the WRITECHECK
function succeeds or the retry count for the driver is exceeded.
If RETRIES is disabled, or if RETRIES is enabled but the retry count for the driver is exceeded,

the driver returns an error code (IE.WCK) and lOX generates an error message. (For more
information on the lOX command RETRIES, see Section 12.6.26.)
You can use the WRITE CHECK command within the SELECT command line to override the
current default for the device being selected.
Format
WR[ITECHECK] option

Options
YES

Enables WRITECHECK. This is the default.
NO

Disables WRITE CHECK.

12-62 The I/O Exerciser

12.7 Examples
This section provides examples of setting parameters for different types of devices by using the
commands FILES-II, SELECT, and VERIFY.

12.7. 1 Setting Parameters for Exercising Files-11 Volumes
This section shows you how to use lOX to exercise an RL02 with a Files-II structure.
Example 12-2 uses the following lOX commands:
•

P ARAMETERLIST

•

RUNTIME

•

FILESII

•

TEMPORARYFILE

•

START

For a brief description of each command, see Table 12-1. For more detailed information, see
the individual command descriptions.

The I/O Exerciser 12-63

Example 12-2:

Exercising an RL02 with the FILES 11 Command

>
>
>

•
•

IOX>PARAMETERLIST
BUFFERSIZE= 1024.
ERRORLIMIT= 10.
INTERLEAVE= 4.
PATTERN= O.
RECORDS= 1024.
RUNTIME= 5 . •
SUMMARYTIME= 1.
TEMPORARYFILE= 500. C)

COMPAREDATA= YES
CONTROL_C= YES
LOGFILE= NO
LOOPBACK= NO
RANDOM= YES
REPORTERRORS= YES
RETRIES= YES
VOLUMECHECK= YES
WAIT= YES
WRITECHECK= NO

Buffer space usage= 3290. :1924. :1924. :1.
lOX>
lOX>
lOX>
Device

Mode

DLO:

Fl1

Buffersize Filesize/Records/Range Parameters
512.

BUFFERSIZE= 1024.
ERRORLIMIT= 10.
INTERLEAVE= 4.
PATTERN= O.
RECORDS= 1024.
RUNTIME= 3.
SUMMARYTIME= 1.
TEMPORARYFILE=500.

800.

COM RET RAN ERR=10.

COMPAREDATA= YES
CONTROL_C= YES
LOGFILE= NO
LOOPBACK= NO
RANDOM= YES
REPORTERRORS= YES
RETRIES= YES
VOLUMECHECK= YES
WAIT= YES
WRITECHECK= NO

Buffer space usage= 3290. :1308. :1308. :1.
lOX>

The command sequence in Example 12-2 does the following:

Allocates drive DLO.

•

Mounts the disk with label "LOUIE" in DLO.

•

Invokes an installed version of lOX with default task name, .. .lOX.

o
o
o

Displays the initial default parameters with P ARAMETERLIST.

•

Note the difference between the defaults displayed by the P ARAMETERLIST command
before and after you changed RUNTIME and selected DLO. Only the RUNTIME default has
changed.

The default for TEMPORARYFILE has not changed.

12-64

Changes the default RUNTIME to 3 minutes.
Selects DLO for FILES 11 testing with a temporary file size of 800 blocks.

The I/0 Exerciser

CD After you selected DLO for testing, P ARAMETERLIST contains an extra line at the beginning
that displays all device-dependent parameters for the selected device. Each selected device
has its own display line. There are five fields of parameters.

4D Field four shows that the temporary file size used for FILES 11 testing for DLO is
80010 blocks instead of the 500 1O -block initial default. During FILESll testing, this field
refers only to temporary file size.
•

The START command begins FILESll testing on DLO for a RUNTIME of 3 minutes and
uses a temporary file size of 80010 blocks.

12.7.2 Setting Parameters for Exercising NFS Volumes
This section shows examples for the command sequences that test a magnetic tape volume
using the SELECT command and that test a non-file-structured (NFS) disk using the VERIFY
command. Both examples are explained in detail.
Testing a Magnetic Tape with the SELECT Command

The command sequence in Example 12-3 tests a magnetic tape by using a buffer of 8 Kb (which
contains the data pattern 052652) to transfer data.
Example 12-3 illustrates the following commands:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

P ARAMETERLIST
PATTERN
BUFFERSIZE
DENSITY
SELECT
RETRIES
ERRORLIMIT
RECORDS
START
EXIT

For a brief description of each command, see Table 12-1. For more detailed information, see
the individual command descriptions.

The I/0 Exerciser

12-65

Example 12-3:

Exercising a Magnetic Tape with the SELECT Command

>
>"
>'
lOX>

BUFFERSIZE= 1024.
ERRORLIMIT= 10.
INTERLEAVE= 4.
PATTERN= O.
RECORDS= 1024.
RUNTIME= 5.
SUMMARYTIME= 1.
TEMPORARYFILE= 500.

COMPAREDATA= YES
CONTROL_C= YES
LOGFILE= NO
LOOPBACK= NO
RANDOM= YES
REPORTERRORS= YES
RETRIES= YES
VOLUMECHECK= YES
WAIT= YES
WRITECHECK= NO

Buffer space usage= 3290. :1924. :1924. :1.
lOX>
lOX>
lOX>
Density= 1600 BPI
lOX>
lOX>

Characteristic Word= 004004 (octal)

Device

Mode

Buffersize

MMO:

NFS

8192.

BUFFERSIZE= 8192.
ERRORLIMIT= 10.
INTERLEAVE= 4.
PATTERN= 12.
RECORDS= 1024.
RUNTIME= 5.
SUMMARYTIME= 1.
TEMPORARYFILE= 500.

CD
CD

Filesize/Records/Range Parameters

20000. fD

COM ERR=10. CD

COMPAREDATA= YES
CONTROL_C= YES
LOGFILE= NO
LOOPBACK= NO
RANDOM= YES
REPORTERRORS= YES
RETRIES= YES
VOLUMECHECK= YES
WAIT= YES
WRITECHECK= NO

Buffer space usage= 36058.:8188. :18292.:3.
lOX>,
',',
Density= 800 BPI
Characteristic Word= 000000 (octal)
lOX>
..
lOX -- MMO: bad block, 112 (decimal) 160 (octal)

(Continued on next page)

12-66 The I/O Exerciser

Example 12-3 (Cont.):

Exercising a Magnetic Tape with the SELECT Command

lOX -- Summary of exerciser activity at 20-JUL-87 16:50:40
TIME -- Run: 1 min.
Elapsed: 1 min.
Remaining: 4 min.
MMO: -- 230. R/W requests totaling 230. records with 1 errors
ASTIs executed: 346.
Idle-loop iterations: 344.

lOX -- MMO: bad block, 486 (decimal) 746 (octal)
lOX -- MMO: bad block, 551 (decimal) 1047 (octal)
lOX -- Summary of exerciser activity at 20-JUL-87 16:54:50
TIME -- Run: 1 min.
Elapsed: 5 min.
Remaining: 0 min.
MMO: -- 217. R/W requests totaling 217. records with 2 errors
ASTIs executed: 325.
Idle-loop iterations: 321.
ACe U M U L ATE D

TOT A L S

TIME -- Run: 5 min.
Elapsed: 5 min.
Remaining: 0 min.
MMO: -- 1,121. R/W requests totaling 1,121. records with 3 errors
ASTIs executed: 1,686.
Idle-loop iterations: 1,670.
lOX>
>

The command sequence in Example 12-3 does the following:

Allocates drive MMO, mounts the magnetic tape, and invokes an installed version of lOX.
Note that the tape is mounted with the /FOREIGN switch.

•

Displays the initial defaults.

Selects pattern number 12 to be written to the tape.

Changes the default BUFFERSIZE from 1024 10 bytes to 8192 10 bytes (8 Kb).

Displays the default density and characteristic word on the magnetic tape mounted in drive
MMO.

Selects MMO for NFS testing with SELECT, overriding the defaults for RETRIES,
ERRORLIMIT and RECORDS, and sets the tape density at 80010 bpi.

Checks the parameters with PARAMETERLIST and DENSITY.

G Changes the BUFFERSIZE default.

eD Changes the PATTERN default.
~

Displays the device display line for MMO.

4» Shows the current BUFFERSIZE of MMO.

48 Shows that the number or records to be tested is 20,000.
~

Starts NFS testing with SELECT on MMO.

The I/O Exerciser 12-67

The remainder of Example 12-3 shows interval reports, error reports, and accumulated totals
generated at your terminal during this exercise. These reports are discussed fully in Section 12.5.
When the exercise has finished, exit to the operating system monitor (unless you want to do
more testing).
Exercising with the VERIFY Command

The following commands affect the exercise parameters of NFS disks that you select with the
VERIFY command:
BADBLOCKS
BUFFERSIZE
ERRORLIMIT
INTERLEAVE
RANDOM
RANGE
RETRIES
Use these commands with the VERIFY command to set default parameters for testing a unit with
an NFS disk. You can use all but the BADBLOCKS command within the VERIFY command
line.
The command sequence in Example 12-4 performs oscillating seeks between blocks 1 and 1000
to align disk heads. It reads only 4 bytes per data transfer, which is the minimum. No error or
summary reporting is required. The exercise runs until you abort it. Example 12-4 illustrates
the following commands:

•

P ARAMETERLIST

•

VERIFY

•

RANGE

•
•
•
•
•

BUFFERSIZE

INTERLEAVE

•

SUMMARYTIME

•
•

RUNTIME
LOGFILE

•

START

•
•

CTRL/C

RANDOM

ERRORLIMIT
REPORTERRORS

ABORT

For a brief description of each command, see Table 12-1. For more detailed information, see
the individual command descriptions.

12-68 The I/O Exerciser

Example 12-4:

Exercising an NFS RK07 with the VERIFY Command

>.
>
>
>

BUFFERSIZE= 1024.
ERRORLIMIT= 10.
INTERLEAVE= 4.
PATTERN= O.
RECORDS= 1024.
RUNTIME= 5.
SUMMARYTIME= 1.
TEMPORARYFILE= 500.

COMPAREDATA= YES
CONTROL_C= YES
LOGFILE= NO
LOOPBACK= NO
RANDOM= YES
REPORTERRORS= YES
RETRIES= YES
VOLUMECHECK= YES
WAIT= YES
WRITECHECK= NO

Buffer space usage= 3290. :1924. :1924. :1.
lOX>
lOX>
lOX>
lOX>
lOX>
lOX>
Device

Mode

DMO:

VFY

Buffersize Filesize/Records/Range Parameters
4.

BUFFERSIZE= 1024.
ERRORLIMIT= 10.
INTERLEAVE= 4.
PATTERN= O.
RECORDS= 1024.
RUNTIME= O.
SUMMARYTIME= O.
TEMPORARYFILE= 500.

1. ->1,000.

RET INT=999. ERR=50000.

COMPAREDATA= YES
CONTROL_C= YES
LOGFILE= YES
LOOPBACK= NO
RANDOM= YES
REPORTERRORS= NO
VOLUMECHECK= YES
WAIT= YES
WRITECHECK= NO

Buffer space usage= 3290. :1912. :1912. :1.
lOX>
lOX>
lOX>

The command sequence in Example 12-4 does the following:

Allocates drive DMO, mounts the RK07 as foreign (MOU /FOR) for NFS testing, and invokes
lOX.

•

Displays the initial default parameter.

The I/O Exerciser 12-69

•

Selects DMO for read-only NFS testing with VERIFY, overriding the following defaults:
RANGE

Set for blocks 1 to 1000.

BUFFERSIZE

Set at 4 bytes (minimum).

RANDOM

Disables block testing and sets INTERLEAVE at 999. lOX tests blocks 1
and 1000 only.

ERRORLIMIT

Set to 50,000 10 (extremely high) so that lOX will not deselect DMO,
regardless of how many errors are encountered during the exercise.

Turns off REPORTERRORS so that no error reports are generated. Turns SUMMARYTIME
off so that no interval reports will be generated. Sets RUNTIME to 0 so that lOX runs the
exercise until you abort it. Sets LOGFILE YES to direct all output to the log file, IOX.LOG,
instead of to the terminal.

CD Shows that the RUNTIME, SUMMARYTIME, and LOGFILE defaults have been reset and
that DMO is being selected with the VERIFY command. The exercise conditions are as
follows:

•
•
•
•
•

A buffer size of

410

A range of 1000 10 blocks
RETRIES enabled
INTERLEAVE set at 999
ERRORLIMIT set at 50,000

Shows how to start the exercise with the START command and how to enter Interactive
mode by pressing CTRL/C. To abort the exercise, enter the ABORT command.

The following display illustrates the contents of the log file for Example 12-4:
lOX -- 20-JUL-87 18:24:12 ******** EXERCISER STARTED ********
Device

Mode

DMO:

VFY

Buffersize
4.

BUFFERSIZE= 1024.
ERRORLIMIT= 10.
INTERLEAVE= 4.
PATTERN= O.
RECORDS= 1024.
RUNTIME= O.
SUMMARYTIME= O.
TEMPORARYFILE= 500.

Filesize/Records/Range Parameters
1. ->1,000.

RET INT=999. ERR=50000.

COMPAREDATA= YES
CONTROL_C= YES
LOGFILE= YES
LOOPBACK= NO
RANDOM= YES
REPORTERRORS= NO
RETRIES= YES
VOLUMECHECK= YES
WAIT= YES
WRITECHECK= NO

Buffer space usage= 3290. :1812. :1812. :1.
lOX -- Summary of exerciser activity at 20-JUL-87 18:27:28
TIME -- Run: 3 min.
Elapsed: 3 min.
Remaining: 65533 min.
DMO: -- 3,075. R/W requests totaling 3,075. blocks with no errors
ASTls executed: 3,081.
Idle-loop iterations: 2,982.

12-70 The I/O Exerciser

A C CUM U L ATE D

TOT A L S :

TIME -- Run: 0 min.
Elapsed: 3 min.
Remaining: 65533 min.
DMO:A -- 3.076. R/W requests totaling 3.076. blocks with no errors
AST's executed: 3.082.
Idle-loop iterations: 2.982.
lOX -- 20-JUL-87 18:27:31 ******** EXERCISER ABORTED

********
The log file output terminates when you abort lOX. The log file begins with the time and date
that the exercise began and the current default parameters as displayed by the P ARAMETERLIST
command.

12.8 lOX Error Messages
lOX generates two types of error messages: error messages with device specifications and error
messages without device specifications. lOX displays device specifications as appropriate.
The format for an error message with a device specification is as follows:
taskname -- ddnn: message

Parameters
taskname

Specifies the name of the lOX task that is currently running. In the error messages that
follow, taskname is always lOX.
ddnn

Represents the device specification text of the message.
message

Represents information specific to this message.
The format for an error message without a device specification is as follows:
taSkname--message

The taskname and message parameters are the same as those parameters defined in the previous
format.
All error messages use the letter "x" to indicate that lOX substitutes the appropriate comn.land,
task name, or value for "x" within the message.

12.8.1 Error Messages with Device Specifications
This section lists lOX error messages in alphabetical order, according to the first letter that
follows the device specification.
IOX-dduu: bad block, xxx (deCimal) xxx (octal)

Explanation: IE.BBE error code returned to lOX (bad block error).
User Action: Use the BAD BLOCKS command (only for NFS disks) to enter the block number
into the bad blocks list.

The I/O Exerciser 12-71

IOX-dduu: block number out of range

Explanation: You used the BAD BLOCKS command to enter a block number in the bad
blocks list that is outside the range of blocks that you specified with the RANGE command.
User Action: Reenter the command with the correct block number.
IOX-TTuu: buffer size being reduced to typeahead buffer size

Explanation: The buffer size specified or used by default is larger than the size of the
type-ahead buffer.

User Action: No user action is required. lOX will reduce the buffer size to equal the size of
the type-ahead buffer.
IOX-dduu: buffer size is greater than default

Explanation: The buffer size that you specified in the SELECT or VERIFY command line is
greater than the current default set with the BUFFERSIZE command by itself.
User Action: Either raise the default buffer size (using BUFFERSIZE by itself) or lower
the buffer size override for the device (using BUFFERSIZE within the SELECT or VERIFY
command line).
IOX-dduu: data compare error at block xxx (decimal) xxx (octal)
Good data: xxxxx bad data: xxxxx
Word position: xxx (decimal) xxx (octal)
Buffer contained xx. additional errors

Explanation: lOX found an error when comparing the data read with the data written. This
error message shows the first block number in which the error occurred during the transfer,
the good and bad data, the word position of the first error found in the buffer, and the
number of additional errors found in the buffer. Section 12.5.2 discusses data compare error
reports in detail.
User Action: No user action is required. If the error persists, enter the block in the bad
blocks list by using the BADBLOCKS command (for NFS disks only).
IOX-dduu: data overrun at block xxx (decimal) xxx (octal)

Explanation: IE.DAO error code returned to lOX (data overrun). The record size given was
greater than the record size read. This error occurs on tape devices only.
User Action: No user action is required.
IOX-dduu: device type not specified-defaulting to 'DISK'

Explanation: This message tells you that you are adding a device to your test configuration
with the CONFIGURE command and that lOX is configuring that device as a disk by default.
User Action: No user action is required.

12-72 The I/0 Exerciser

IOX-dduu: did not respond-unit now deselected

Explanation: The unit did not respond to the lOX command within 1 minute. The device
may have been accidentally put off line or a tape drive may have lost its column vacuum.
User Action: Check the device.
IOX-TTuu: does not support the LOOPBACK command

Explanation: LOOPBACK cannot be used with the selected terminal line. This error occurs
because type-ahead is disabled.
User Action: Use the DCL command SET TERMINAL /TYPE-AHEAD (MCR command
SET /TYPEAHEAD) to enable type-ahead for the selected terminal.
IOX-dduu: does not support the x command

Explanation: The x command is incompatible with the device specification dduu.
User Action: For a list of the device-dependent parameter commands supported by different
devices, see Table 12-2. Enter parameter commands that are compatible with the type of
device you are selecting.
IOX-dduu: duplicate block number

Explanation: The block number you entered with the BADBLOCKS command is already in
the bad blocks list for the device.
User Action: No user action is required.
IOX-dduu: end of tape detected-unit now deselected

Explanation: IE.EOT error code returned to lOX (end-of-tape detected). lOX attempted to
write a record past the end-of-tape marker.

User Action: This is an informational message only.
IOX-dduu: error threshold exceeded-unit now deselected

Explanation: The number of errors set with the ERRORLIMIT command has been exceeded.
User Action: Repeat the exercise with a higher value for the ERRORLIMIT parameter. If you
have already specified the maximum value for ERRORLIMIT and this message is displayed,
the device you selected may be defective.
IOX-dduu: error while reading home block

Explanation: When VOLUMECHECK is enabled, this message occurs if lOX detects an error
while attempting to read the home block of a Files-II device.
User Action: The disk you selected may be defective. If you are testing a scratch disk, select
the disk again with VOLUMECHECK NO.

The I/O Exerciser 12-73

IOX-dduu: failed to attach

Explanation: lOX could not attach the unit.
User Action: The device may be mounted or attached by someone else. Make sure you have
allocated the device and have mounted it with the /FOREIGN qualifier (/FOR keyword).
IOX-dduu: failed to detach

Explanation: An error occurred while lOX was attempting to detach a unit that it had
previously attached.
User Action: No user action is required. However, if this problem persists, submit a Software
Performance Report (SPR) to DIGITAL.
IOX-dduu: failed to open temporary file

Explanation: lOX could not find enough free blocks on the disk to open a temporary file as
large as the one you specified with the TEMPORARYFILE command.
User Action: Specify a smaller temporary file size either by resetting the default with the
TEMPORARYFILE command or by using TEMPORARYFILE within the FILES11 command
line to override the default TEMPORARYFILE size for each device.
If you are using the default (500 blocks) when lOX generates this message, you need to

provide additional space on the disk.
IOX-dduu: fatal hardware error-unit now deselected

Explanation: The system returned the error code IE.FHE to lOX. This indicates a fatal
hardware error.
User Action: Check the hardware.
IOX-dduu: illegal density

Explanation: You specified an invalid magnetic tape density with the DENSITY command.
User Action: Reenter the command with a valid density (see Section 12.6.7).
IOX-dduu: illegal range

Explanation: The range of blocks that you specified for the device to be tested with the
RANGE command is not within the limits for the device.
User Action: To display the default range for the device, enter the RANGE command without
specifying any parameters; then, specify a range within these limits.
IOX-dduu: invalid block number

Explanation: The block number that you entered with the BAD BLOCKS command was not
a valid block number for the device.
User Action: No user action is required.

12-74 The I/O Exerciser

10X-dduu: I/O Is unsatisfied at timeout-function: xxx x

Explanation: When lOX finishes processing, it waits 5 seconds for I/O to stop. If a long
tape has not finished rewinding, this message may occur. The function that timed out is
xxxx.

User Action: No user action is required.
10X-dduu: I/O request aborted-unit now deselected

Explanation: The driver returned the error code IE.ABO to lOX. The operation aborted.
User Action: No user action is required.
10X-dduu: is already configured

Explanation: You tried to configure a unit (with the CONFIGURE command) that is already
in the test configuration.
User Action: Use CONFIGURE as a display command to display the devices in the current
test configuration.
10X-dduu: is already selected

Explanation: You tried to select a unit that has already been selected.
User Action: Use the P ARAMETERLIST command to display information on all units that
are selected.
10X-TTuu: is logged in

Explanation: A user is logged in on the terminal selected.
User Action: Select a terminal that is not in use.
10X-dduu: is not configured

Explanation: You issued a command that is valid only for configured devices.
User Action: Use the CONFIGURE command to configure the device.
10X-dduu: is not mounted or allocated for NFS operations

Explanation: You have selected a device for testing with SELECT or VERIFY that is not
properly allocated and mounted for NFS testing.
User Action: Allocate and mount the device with the /FOREIGN switch.
10X-dduu: is not ready-unit now deselected

Explanation: IE.DNR error code returned to lOX (device not ready).
User Action: Select the device again.

The I/0 Exerciser 12-75

IOX-dduu: is not selected

Explanation: You issued a device-dependent parameter command (BADBLOCKS or RANGE)
that is valid only after you have selected the device.

User Action: Select the device; then, reenter the command.
IOX-dduu: is offline

Explanation: The driver returned the error code IE.OFL to lOX, which indicates that the
device is off line. Either the device was taken off line while testing was in progress, or you
tried to select a device that was off line.
If testing was in progress on the device when it was taken off line, lOX appends the
following string to the error message:
- unit now deselected

User Action: Ensure that the device is on line.
IOX-dduu: is write locked-unit now deselected

Explanation: The driver returned the error code IE.WLK lOX, which indicates that the device
is write-locked.
User Action: Check the write-Iock/write-enable switch located on the device drive. Also,
check the write-lock status for the device.
IOX-dduu: LUN assignment failure

Explanation: Either the device ddnn is not known to the system or you have exceeded the
maximum number of devices that lOX supports. The default is 28 devices; the maximum
number of devices is 246.
User Action: Modify the system configuration to include the device in your system (see
Chapter 4) or edit the Task Builder (TKB) command file, 10XBLD.CMD to allow lOX to
support more devices (see Section 12.1).
IOX-dduu: privilege violation-unit now deselected

Explanation: The dirver returned the error code IE.PRI to lOX, which indicates a privilege
violation. Either the device was not allocated or it was mounted by someone else.
User Action: Be sure you have allocated and mounted the device before you begin the I/O
exercise.
IOX-dduu: specifted device type is inconsistent

Explanation: You tried to configure device dduu as a tape when a dd-type device had already
been configured as a disk. This error also occurs if you configure dd as a tape and then
attempt to configure another dd-type device as a disk.
User Action: Use the CONFIGURE command as a display command to check on the devices
in your test configuration. Configure the unit with a different device mnemonic.

12-76 The I/0 Exerciser

IOX-dduu: unexpected error #xx

Explanation: lOX received an I/O error code that it could not process. The error code is the
octal number xx.
User Action: No user action is required.
IOX-dduu: unexpected request to queue I/O-request aborted

Explanation: lOX received an asynchronous system trap (AST) from a device after it
deselected the device.
User Action: Check the device.
IOX-dduu: unrecoverable error at block xxx (decimal) xxx (octal)

Explanation: The driver returned the error code IE.VER to lOX, which indicates an
unrecoverable error.
User Action: Check the device drive and the media.
IOX-dduu: VOLUMECHECK failure. Unit contains a home block

Explanation: The unit is file-structured because the device contains a home block. This error
message is generated by the SELECT command if you try to select a Files-II volume while
VOLUMECHECK is enabled.
User Action: lOX destroys information on devices that you select for exercising with the
SELECT command. If you want to destroy the contents of the disk, disable VOLUME CHECK
(VOLUMECHECK NO) and select the device again.
IOX-dduu: write check error at block xxx (decimal) xxx (octal)

Explanation: The driver returned the error code IE.WCK lOX, which indicates a write-check
error. The write-check operation failed at block xxx.
User Action: No user action is required.

12.8.2 Error Messages Without Device Specifications
This section lists lOX error messages in alphabetical order, according to the first letter that
follows the lOX task name.
lOX-Indirect command file syntax error

Explanation: There is an error in the indirect command file.
User Action: Check the indirect command file.
lOX-Indirect command file nesting level exceeded

Explanation: lOX accepts indirect command files with only one level of nesting.
User Action: Rewrite the indirect command file so that it does not have more than one level
of nesting.

The I/O Exerciser 12-77

lOX-Aborting due to user command

Explanation: You aborted lOX by using the MCR command ABORT.
User Action: To continue testing, reinvoke lOX.
lOX-EXECUTE command is not supported

Explanation: You attempted to use the EXECUTE command in a system that does not support
task spawning.

User Action: Include support for task spawning during system generation.
lOX-Command Input I/O error

Explanation: lOX detected an error when it tried to read the command that you typed at
the terminal.

User Action: Reenter the command.
lOX-Command valid only in Command Mode

Explanation: You tried to enter a command that cannot be entered while an I/O exercise is
in progress.

User Action: Either abort the exercise and enter the command or wait until the exercise has
finished to enter the command.
lOX-Command valid only in Interactive Mode

Explanation: You tried to enter a command that cannot be entered unless lOX is running.
User Action: Enter the START command to run lOX; then, reenter the command.
lOX-Command not unique

Explanation: The command abbreviation that you entered was not unique.
User Action: Reenter the command with enough characters to distinguish it from other lOX
commands.
lOX-Failed to close log file. F.ERR=-x

Explanation: lOX could not close the log file in your directory. The File Control Services
(FCS) error returned was -x.
User Action: For a description of the I/O error code, see the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX
I/O Operations Reference Manual. Then, take the appropriate action.
lOX-Failed to open indirect command file

Explanation: The FCS routine GCML failed to open the indirect command file.
User Action: Check to see that the file exists and that you specified the file correctly; then,
resubmit the file to lOX.

12-78 The I/O Exerciser

lOX-Failed to open log file. F.ERR=-x

Explanation: lOX could not open the log file. The FCS error returned was -x.
User Action: The disk may be write-protected or may not have enough blocks. For a
description of the I/O error code, see the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX I/O Operations
Reference Manual. Then, take the appropriate action.
lOX-Failed to open existing log file. F.ERR=-x

Explanation: lOX could not open a log file that already exists in your directory. The FCS
error returned was -x.
User Action: For a description of the I/O error code, see the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX
I/O Operations Reference Manual. Then, take the appropriate action.
lOX-Failed to truncate/close log file. F.ERR=-x

Explanation: lOX could not truncate or close the log file. The FCS error returned was -x.
User Action: For a description of the I/O error code, see the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX
I/O Operations Reference Manual. Then, take the appropriate action.
lOX-Fatal file system error. F.ERR= xxx PC+2= xxx

Explanation: lOX exited because an error occurred while lOX was trying to issue a read or
write. F.ERR is the octal error code in the File Descriptor Block (FDB) indicating the file
error type. PC+2 is the octal location of the failure in the lOX code.
User Action: For a description of the I/O error code, see the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX
I/O Operations Reference Manual. Then, take the appropriate action.
lOX-Fatal system error. DSW= xxx PC+2= xxx

Explanation: lOX immediately exits because a directive that lOX issued failed. DSW is the
Directive Status Word in octal. PC+2 is the octal location of the failure in the lOX code.
User Action: For a description of the I/O error code, see the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX
I/O Operations Reference Manual. Then, take the appropriate action.
lOX-Invalid pattern number

Explanation: You tried to set a data pattern by using a pattern number greater than 12. The
valid arguments for PATTERN are 0 to 12 (inclusive).
User Action: Enter a valid pattern number.
lOX-Invalid task name

Explanation: You specified an invalid task name with the EXECUTE command. Either the
task name is incorrect or the task does not exist.
User Action: Reenter the task name correctly or determine if the task exists.

The I/O Exerciser 12-79

lOX-No activity remains-aborting

Explanation: In Execution Mode, lOX determines whether or not any exercises are in progress
or any tasks are executing at I-minute intervals. If lOX finds no activity, it aborts the exercise
and generates this informational message.
In Interactive Mode, lOX determines whether or not any exercises are in progress or whether
any tasks are executing only when you enter the PROCEED command. If there is no activity
when you enter PROCEED, lOX aborts the exercise and issues this informational message.

User Action: No user action is required.
lOX-No activity to start

Explanation: When you issued the START command, no devices were selected for testing
and no tasks were initiated for execution.
User Action: Select devices that you want to test, and use the EXECUTE command to initiate
tasks that you want to execute.
lOX-No buffer space available

Explanation: lOX does not have adequate buffer space to accommodate all the devices you
selected.

User Action: Either deselect some devices from testing or reinstall or reinvoke lOX with a
greater increment.
lOX-No such command-type H for help

Explanation: You entered a command that lOX did not recognize.
User Action: Type H (abbreviation for the HELP command), which displays a summary all
lOX commands.
lOX-No tasks to abort

Explanation: You tried to abort tasks by using the ABORT command when no tasks had
been initiated by the EXECUTE command.
User Action: No user action is required.
lOX-Only CTRL/C allowed

Explanation: You set CONTROL _C YES to enable you to enter lOX commands while
exercises are in progress. Therefore, lOX only accepts CTRL/C in Execution Mode.
User Action: Press CTRL/C to exit Execution Mode; then, lOX is in Interactive Mode and
you can enter commands.
lOX-Syntax error

Explanation: The command line that you entered contained a syntax error.
User Action: If necessary, check the syntax of the command line that you entered. See
Section 12.6 or type H (for HELP).

12-80 The I/O Exerciser

lOX-Task never executed

Explanation: The task that you tried to abort is not on the list of tasks initiated by the
EXECUTE command.

User Action: Use the PARAMETERLIST command to check the list of tasks to be executed.
lOX-Task "xxxxxx" is currently active

Explanation: You tried to execute a task that was already active. The name of the task
is xxxxxx.

User Action: No user action is required.
lOX-Task "xxxxxx" is completed. Status= nnnnnnn

Explanation: The task has completed execution. The name of the task is xxxxxx. The task
status represented by nnnnnnn is one of the following: SUCCESS, WARNING, ERROR,
and SEVEREERROR.
User Action: No user action is required.
lOX-Task "xxxxxx" is not installed

Explanation: Task "xxxxxx" is not installed and cannot be initiated by using the EXECUTE
command.

User Action: Install the task from a privileged terminal.
lOX-Task "xxxxxx" is unable to execute

Explanation: Task "xxxxxx" could not execute.
User Action: Try to execute the task again.
lOX-Units are selected-command ignored

Explanation: The BUFFERSIZE command is valid only if no units are selected for testing.
User Action: You can use the BUFFERSIZE command within the SELECT and VERIFY
command lines to override the default for each device. However, if you require a larger
buffer size for all devices, use the DESELECT command to deselect all units; then, reissue
the BUFFERSIZE command.

The I/0 Exerciser 12-81

Chapter 13
The Bad Block Replacement Control Task
This chapter describes bad block handling and the Bad Block Replacement Control task (RCT).
It begins with an introduction to RCT, which is followed by information on installing RCT and
loading the driver for DU-type devices (DUDRV). The chapter continues with a description of
how the RCT task performs bad block replacment. It concludes with a brief summary of the
interaction between RCT and the Error Logger.

13.1 Introduction to RCT
The Bad Block Replacement Control Task (RCT) handles bad block replacement and recovery
on Mass Storage Control Protocol (MSCP) disks such as the RASO. However, RCT does not
replace the Bad Block Locator utility (BAD); you must run BAD on MSCP devices to create a
bad block descriptor file before you initialize the disk. BAD locates bad blocks and lists them in
a bad block descriptor file. To include information in the bad block descriptor file about blocks
to be detected by the device controller and to be replaced by RCT, specify the BAD switch
jRETRY. (For more information on BAD, see the RSX-11M-PLUS Utilities Manual.)
Note
Utilities such as BAD, the Backup and Restore Utility (BRU), and the INI task,
treat MSCP devices as non-last-track devices. For more information, see the
RSX-llM-PLUS Utilities Manual.

13.2 Installing RCT and Loading DUDRV
If you are using a conventional RSX-IIM-PLUS system (that is, a system that has not been
pregenerated) and you select a DU-type device during system generation, the system generation
procedure builds the RCT task and the DUDRV driver for you. Then, when you create
the system image with the Virtual Monitor Console Routine (VMR), the command procedure
SYSVMR.CMD installs RCT and loads DUDRV. If you have a pregenerated RSX-IIM-PLUS or
MicrojRSXoperating system, the system startup procedure includes support for RCT by default.

The Bad Block Replacement Control Task

13-1

However, you may need to load or install and then load RCT and DUDRV under the following
conditions:
•

You have removed RCT, unloaded DUDRV, or both.

•

You have edited the file SYSVMR.CMD to exclude RCT, DUDRV, or both.

If you plan to load DUDRV manually, you must install RCT first. If RCT is not installed, you
will receive an error message at the console terminal.

To install RCT, use the DIGITAL Command Language (DCL) or Monitor Console Routine (MCR)
command INSTALL, as follows:
DCL>
MCR>

To load DUDRV, use the LOAD command, as follows:
>

13.3 Bad Block Handling
Bad block handling is performed by either the RCT task or the disk controller, depending on
the type of device being used. Table 13-1 summarizes the relationship between device type,
controller type, and the method of bad block handling.

Table 13- 1: Bad Block Replacement Method for Different Device Types

Devices

Controllers

Method

RA80/81/60

UDA50
KDA50

RCT replaces bad blocks.

RC25

KLESI-U
KLESI-Q

RCT replaces bad blocks.

RD51/52/53/54

RQDX1
RQDX2
RQDX3

Controller replaces bad blocks.

RX50

RQDX1
RQDX2
RQDX3
RUX50

No replacement.

RX33

RQDX3

No replacement.

The following subsections describe the methods of bad block handling in more detail.

13-2 The Bad Block Replacement Control Task

RCT Performs Bad Block Replacement
If the RCT task performs the bad block replacement, bad block handling involves the following
sequence of steps:

•

Detecting the bad block

•

Notifying the device driver DUDRV

•

Replacing the bad block (using RCT)

•

Revectoring I/O from the bad block to the replacement block

The disk controllers handle the detection of bad blocks and the notification of the driver
(DUDRV). After the driver is notified, it activates ReT, which performs all the bad block
replacement functions. After the bad blocks have been replaced, the controller dynamically
revectors (that is, redirects) I/O from the bad block to the replacement block.
RCT also performs replacement and recovery on disks that went off line during bad block
replacement or before the contents of a write-back cache were copied to the disk (see
Section 13.3.3).
Controller Performs Replacement
If the controller (RQDX-series) performs the bad block replacement, bad block handling involves
the following sequence of steps:

1. Detecting the bad block
2. Replacing the bad block (using the controller)
3.

Revectoring I/O from the bad block to the replacement block

Notifying the device driver DUDRV

For RD-series devices, the controller handles the detection and replacement of bad blocks. After
the bad blocks have been replaced, the controller dynamically revectors (that is, redirects) I/O
from the bad block to the replacement block. When the revectoring is complete, the controller
notifies DUDRV.
The following subsections describe each aspect of bad block handling in more detail.

13.3.1 Detecting Bad Blocks-The MSCP Disk Configuration
To perform bad block replacement functions, RCT uses the following address spaces on MSCP
disks:
•

Logical block numbers (LBNs)

•

Replacement block numbers (RBNs)

•

Revector control tables

The subsections that follow describe these addresses.

The Bad Block Replacement Control Task

13-3

Logical Block Numbers

LBNs are accessible to user tasks for transferring data between the disk and the operating
system. When the controller encounters an invalid LBN and notifies DUDRV, DUDRV activates
RCT to replace the LBN.
Replacement Block Numbers

RBNs are blocks reserved throughout the disk that RCT allocates as substitutes for bad LBNs.
When a disk is formatted, a forced error bit is placed in the header of each replacement block.
This prevents a bad block from accidentally being revectored to a good block that is already in
use.
RBNs cannot be directly accessed by user tasks during normal data transfers.
Revector Control Tables

RCT and the device controllers use the DUDRV driver to access the revector control tables.
Each table entry corresponds to an RBN; the address of the RBN depends upon the location
of the entry in the table. An entry contains the LBN being replaced and a code describing the
status of the RBN. The status codes are as follows:

Status Code

Definition

ALLOCATED

Indicates that the RBN is currently being used.

UNALLOCATED

Indicates that the RBN is not being used.

UNUSABLE

Indicates that the RBN cannot be used.

PRIMARY

Identifies the first RBN read when a bad block is replaced.

SECONDARY

Identifies the RBN read after the primary blocks are read.

For a given LBN, a primary RBN is in a predetermined location; all other RBNs are secondary.
The revector control tables store information in a flag word that enables RCT to determine if
recovery techniques are required when a disk is brought on line.

13.3.2 Notifying DUDRV
The controller may detect a bad LBN while processing an I/O request from the driver. The
controller notifies DUDRV by listing the bad LBN in an end packet. DUDRV then stores this
information in pool and activates RCT.
DUDRV provides RCT with the bad LBN, the I/O packet address, and the Unit Control Block
(UCB) address.

13-4 The Bad Block Replacement Control Task

13.3.3 Replacing Bad Blocks
The RCT task performs the bad block replacement. It stores data from the bad block, allocates
and initializes the replacement block, and then updates data structures on the disk.
After receiving information from DUDRV, RCT performs the following steps in bad block
replacement:
1.

Makes the disk device appear as though it's attached, which inhibits all I/O requests to the
device (except the I/O necessary for bad block replacement).

Reads the data from the bad LBN into a buffer in its data space.

Determines which RBN on the disk to use by applying a predetermined algorithm, which
ensures that the block was revectored correctly.

Issues QIO$ requests to DUDRV that update the rev ector control tables (see Section 13.3.4).

Updates the header and data of the bad LBN by issuing the I/O function code IO.RPL to
DUDRV. The IO.RPL code directs the controller to indicate that the LBN has been replaced
either by a primary or secondary RBN.

Initializes the RBN by writing back the data read from the LBN. Because the bad LBN has
been replaced by the RBN, the data is written transparently to the RBN by the controller.
If an RBN is bad, RCT treats it as a bad LBN. RCT finds another RBN, updates the revector
control tables, marks the old RBN as unusable, and initializes the new RBN by writing the
stored data back to the bad LBN.

Detaches the unit. Normal I/O to the disk resumes.

During bad block replacement, RCT uses a recursion counter. If the counter identifies three
consecutive bad disk blocks, it aborts the search operation and will not replace the block.
Subsequently, if the problem causing the errors is in the data line (thus affecting all I/O), the
recursion counter prevents RCT from marking all replacement blocks as bad.
RCT also checks MSCP disks that have just come on line for two conditions: incomplete bad
block replacement, and write-back cache corruption. However, because RSX-11M-PLUS and
Micro/RSX operating systems do not support disks with write-back caching, write-back cache
corruption is extremely rare. RCT performs this function only under the following circumstances:
•

A disk with a write-back cache failed to copy the data from the write-back cache to the
disk before going off line, while on another operating system (which supports write-back
caching), and was then moved to an RSX-11M-PLUS operating system.

•

The revector control tables have been altered such that the write-back cache-in-use flag is
set.

RCT handles these conditions in the following ways:
•

If RCT determines that bad block replacement was partially completed when the disk went
off line, RCT completes the bad block replacement process.

•

If RCT determines that the write-back cache was not copied to the disk before the disk went
off line, RCT software write-locks the disk so tha,t the contents of the write-back cache are
preserved.

The following subsections describe these procedures in more detail.

The Bad Block Replacement Control Task

13-5

Completing Partial Bad Block Replacements
When a disk unit is brought on line, RCT checks the revector control table to be sure that no
bad block replacement was in progress when the disk went off line. If replacement needs to be
completed, RCT completes the bad block replacement before allowing the disk to be brought
on line.
Preventing Loss of Write-Back Cache Data
RCT prevents loss of write-back cache data.
A disk with the write-back-cache-in-use flag set will be write-locked each time it is brought on
line. To write-enable such a disk, use the /WRITE qualifier with the DCL command MOUNT
(MCR command MOU) each time you mount the disk. RCT checks the write-back-cache-in-use
flag of the revector control tables, software write-locks the disk if the flag is set, and writes
the following Task Termination Notification program (TKTN) message to the console output
device (CO:):
ddnn: -- Write back caching data lost. Unit write locked

The device specification ddnn is the disk that RCT has write-locked.

13.3.4 Bad Block Revectoring
Revectoring is performed dynamically by the device controller. When the controller first accesses
an LBN that has been replaced by RCT, the controller revectors (redirects) the I/O to the RBN
that RCT designated as the replacement for the LBN. Thereafter, I/O to the bad LBN is
revectored transparently to the RBN; DUDRV does not need to activate RCT.
When the controller detects a bad LBN that has been replaced by a primary RBN, the controller
accesses the RBN directly.
When the controller detects a bad LBN that has been replaced by a secondary RBN, the controller
must search for the address of the secondary RBN before it can access the primary RBN. The
controller locates the address in one of the following two ways:
•

Checking the data field of the bad LBN

•

Checking the revector control tables for the entry containing the bad LBN

After the controller locates the address of the secondary RBN, it accesses the primary RBN and
performs the revectoring.

13.4 ReT and the Error Logger
DUDRV notifies the Error Logger with an error log packet whenever an error has been detected
that requires bad block replacement. RCT also generates an error log packet indicating that a
bad LBN has or has not been successfully replaced by an RBN. RCT logs the packet under the
name of the task that issued the Executive directive Queue I/O request (QIO$), which resulted
in the detection of the bad block by the controller.
For more information on Error Logging, see the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX Error Logging
Manual.

13-6 The Bad Block Replacement Control Task

Chapter 14
I/O Queue Optimization
I/O queue optimization increases the number of I/O requests processed by the system in a
given amount of time. I/O processing is improved by using the list of I/O requests in a
queue more effectively. The I/O queue for a particular disk device is scanned by I/O queue
optimization. Then, after each request is examined, the best request is removed from the queue
and passed to the I/O driver for processing. By selecting from different methods of I/O queue
optimization, you decide how I/O requests are selected.
This chapter describes I/O queue optimization and how you can initialize, display, and select
different methods for using it. The chapter also includes a list of associated error messages.

14. 1 Overview
RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX operating systems support the following methods of I/O queue
optimization:
•

Nearest Cylinder

•

Elevator

•

Cylinder Scan

The method that is best for your application depends on your processing environment. (For
more information on each method, see Section 14.3.)
You can also choose not to use I/O queue optimization. I/O queue optimization works by
optimizing requests in the queue; if the load on your system does not require frequent use of the
queue, little optimization is achieved. If you do not use I/O queue optimization, the operating
system groups the I/O requests in the queue by priority. Then, requests are processed on a
first-in/first-out (FIFO) basis. The highest priority requests appear first in the queue and are
processed in sequence.
If you use I/O queue optimization, the I/O requests within priority groups are examined.
The request having the "appropriate" disk address is chosen as the next I/O operation. The
optimization method you select determines what address is appropriate. The highest priority
requests are still serviced first; however, I/O requests are processed more rapidly because
requests are reordered within a priority.

I/O Queue Optimization 14-1

I/O service time depends upon three components: seek-time, latency, and data transfer time.

Seek-time is the amount of time the disk device spends searching for an area on a disk. Latency
refers to the delay between seek-time and the actual data transfer time. All three methods of
I/O queue optimization attempt to minimize the seek-time component of the data I/O service
time. In some cases, I/O queue optimization may provide smoother disk operation by reducing
erratic head movement.

14.2 Initiating Optimization
The Monitor Console Routine (MCR) command SET /OPT is used to initiate I/O queue
optimization. The parameters in this command are used to specify the disk device, the method
of optimization, and a fairness count limit for I/O requests that are passed over. These
parameters are explained in detail in later sections.
The SET command is for privileged users. However, nonprivileged users can use this command
to display the optimization status of devices in the system.

Format:
SET /[NO]OPT[=ddnn:opttype:fairnesscount.]

Parameters
ddnn

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the disk device requiring
optimization. The following device types support I/O queue optimization:

Mnemonic Device
DBn

RP04, RPOS, and RP06 pack disks

DRn

RM02, RM03, RMOS, RM80, and RP07 pack disks

DMn

RK06 and RK07 cartridge disks

DLn

RLOI and RL02 cartridge disks

DUn

MSCP disks

opttype

Specifies one of the following optimization methods:
NEAR[EST]

Initiates the Nearest Cylinder method; the next request processed is the one
closest to the current request.

ELEV[ATOR]

Initiates the Elevator method; requests are processed first in one direction
along the disk and then in the reverse direction.

CSCAN

Initiates the Cylinder Scan method; requests are processed in only one
direction along the disk (lowest to highest).

The default is NEAREST.

14-2

I/O Queue Optimization

falrnesscount

Specifies a limit on the number of times the most unsatisfactory I/O request is passed over.
The maximum fairness count allowed is 128 10 •
For more information on setting the fairness count, see Section 14.3.1.
The default is 10 10 •

Quollflers
/NOOPT[=ddnn:]

Disables disk I/O queue optimization for the specified device. When you omit =ddnn:, the
system displays all the devices that do not use I/O queue optimization.
/OPT[=ddnn:optfype:fairnesscount.]

Enables disk I/O queue optimization for the specified device. When you omit =ddnn:, the
system displays all the devices that do not use I/O queue optimization. (See Section 14.2.1.)

14.2. 1 Displaying Optimization Status
You can display the optimization status for all devices in the system that are currently using
I/O queue optimization by entering the MeR command SET /OPT, as follows:
>

The SET /OPT command displays status in the following format:
OPT=ddnn:opttype:fairnesscount

You can also display the devices that are not currently using I/O queue optimization by entering
the command SET /NOOPT:
>

The SET /NOOPT command displays status in the following format:
NOOPT=ddnn:

Both nonprivileged and privileged users can display the I/O queue optimization status. For
more information on the SET /OPT and SET /NOOPT commands, see the RSX-11M-PLUS

MeR Operations Manual.
Examples
OPT=DBO:NEAR:l0.
OPT=DB1:ELEV:5.
OPT=DB2:CSCAN:8.

Displays the optimization status for the devices DBO, DB1, and DB2.
NOOPT=DR1:

Displays the device DR1. DR1 is not using I/O queue optimization.

I/O Queue Optimization

14-3

14.3 Selecting the Type of Optimization
Selecting the correct optimization method is dependent upon the I/O processing environment
in which your application is running, the physical location of data on the disk drive, and how
often tasks access certain data areas.
A general guideline is to try the default first. (This initiates the Nearest Cylinder method with
a fairness count limit of 10.) Then, compare the difference in the rate of I/O processing or
throughput by recording the amount of time it takes for your application to run. For a closer
look at disk activity and throughput, use Resource Accounting (see Chapter 10). Resource
Accounting provides this information under the heading DEVICE STATISTICS in the output
from the Resource Accounting transaction file.
The default (NEAREST, and a fairness count of 10) is an average setting and should improve I/O
throughput in most cases. As you become more familiar with the I/O load and data organization
on the disk in your application, you can make adjustments by changing the fairness count limit
or by using one of the other methods of I/O queue optimization.

14.3. 1 Adjusting the Fairness Count Limit
When you use I/O queue optimization, you may notice increased waiting time. I/O requests
to some data areas may have slower than normal access times because I/O queue optimization
categorizes them as unsatisfactory. When this happens, the optimization method passes over
these requests for a better choice, keeping the unsatisfactory requests in the queue longer. This
may cause a decrease in performance for some tasks (even though overall system performance
improves).
To counteract increased waiting time and to acquire a better balance, you can adjust the fairness
count limit. This places a limit on how many times an I/O request can be passed over.
Optimization increments the fairness count for the first I/O request in the queue whenever that
request is passed over. When the fairness count for an I/O request reaches the limit indicated
with the SET command, the request is removed from the queue and the fairness count is cleared.
Decreasing the fairness count limit reduces waiting time but decreases the overall throughput
initially gained with the higher count. As an alternative to decreasing the fairness count limit,
use another optimization method. It may be more applicable to your situation.

14.3.2 Nearest Cylinder Method
The Nearest Cylinder optimization method processes the I/O request that is closest to the current
cylinder. In general, this method is effective for both long and short I/O queues. However, there
may be an increase in waiting time, which may be unacceptable in an interactive environment.
To remedy this, reduce the fairness count limit (which reduces the throughput) or try one of
the other optimization methods. (The Elevator method may be the next best choice.)

14-4 I/O Queue Optimization

14.3.3 Elevator Method
The Elevator optimization method processes I/O requests like an elevator. It processes requests
as it moves in one direction along the disk until it reaches the last request in that direction. The
Elevator method then changes direction and processes requests in that direction. This method
is effective if there are many I/O requests outstanding. Also, waiting time tends to be less with
the Elevator method than with the Nearest Cylinder method.
The Elevator method favors the center of the disk. Requests are done as they are passed, and
the center of the disk tends to be passed over twice as often as the periphery. Therefore, a task
that has a number of requests located in the center of the disk tends to have faster I/O than a
task with requests at the periphery.

14.3.4 Cylinder Scan Method
The Cylinder Scan optimization method operates like the Elevator method, but it processes I/O
requests only while passing in one direction along the disk. The direction is from the lowest
cylinder number to the highest cylinder number. This method is most effective if each task
tends to do I/O to a localized area on the disk. It results in a more even distribution of I/O
among tasks.

14.4 Error Messages
SET-Privileged command

Explanation: If you are a nonprivileged user, you cannot set I/O queue optimization for
a device. Nonprivileged users can only use the SET /OPT command to display the
optimization status.
User Action: For more information on displaying the optimization status for a device, see
Section 14.2.1.
SET-Feature not supported

Explanation: You tried to initiate optimization for a disk device that does not support I/O
queue optimization.

User Action: For a list of devices that support I/O queue optimization, see Section 14.2.
SET-Device not in system

Explanation: You tried to initiate optimization for a disk device that is not mounted in the
system.

User Action: Use the DCL command SHOW DEVICES (or the MCR command DEV) to
obtain a list of mounted devices. Select a disk that is already mounted or mount the disk;
then, initiate optimization.
SET-Illegal keyword value

Explanation: You specified an invalid value for the fairness count. The maximum fairness
count allowed is 128 10 •
User Action: Specify a fairness count less than 128 10 ,

I/O Queue Optimization 14-5

SET -Invalid keyword

Explanation: You specified an invalid keyword.
User Action: For a list of valid keywords for the SET command, see the RSX-11M-PLUS
MCR Operations Manual or the RSX-11M-PLUS Command Language Manual.
SET-Device offline or privileged diagnostic

Explanation: You tried to initiate I/O queue optimization for an offline device. You may
have specified the wrong device.
User Action: Be sure you are using the correct device specification. If you have an
RSX-IIM-PLUS system, use the Reconfiguration Services to bring the device on line
(see Chapter 4). If necessary, mount the device. Then, reenter the SET /OPT command.

14-6 I/O Queue Optimization

Chapter 15
Disk Data Caching
Disk data caching enhances I/O operations by reducing the number of physical I/O requests
directed to a disk.
The Data Cache Manager (DCM) monitors disk data cache operations by acting as an intelligent
preprocessor to the disk drivers. In addition to monitoring all I/O operations performed on disk
devices, the DCM decreases the number of physical I/O operations taking place on "cached"
disk drives by using a designated storage area (or "cache") in memory. Copies of disk data are
placed in the cache region, making the data available for memory-to-memory transfers instead
of disk-to-memory transfers during an I/O request.
DCM is enabled by default on Micro/RSX systems and on pregenerated RSX-I1M-PLUS
systems. You can also enable DCM by selecting data caching as a system generation option. If
you select the Full-functionality Executive, DCM is enabled by default.
The system provides the following Virtual Monitor Console Routine (VMR) commands in
SYSVMR.CMD to permanently include disk data caching as a directive common in the
bootstrapped system:
INS DCM11M/RON=YES
FIX DCM11M/DIR

15.1 Associating Data Caching with a Disk
Although data caching is enabled during system generation, it is not associated with any disk
volumes. To activate data caching, you must associate it with the volumes that you want to be
cached.

Disk Data Caching 15-1

15. 1. 1 Using the MOUNT Command
The DIGITAL Command Language (DCL) command MOUNT and Monitor Console Routine
(MCR) command MOU makes a disk volume available for processing. To associate caching
with a selected volume, use the /CACHE qualifier with the MOUNT (MOU) command.

Format
DCL>MOUNT ddnn:volumelabel /[NO]CACHE[:(option,option, ... )]
MCR>MOU ddnn:volumelabel /[NO]CACHE[:(option,option, ... )]

If you specify one option only, the parentheses are optional.

Parameters
ddnn

Specifies the device on which you are mounting the volume. Note that the device must
be a mass-storage device (DV.MSD); DCM does not execute with tape devices (such as
DV.SQD).
volumelabel

Specifies the name that is associated with the volume.

Qualifiers
/NOCACHE

Specifies that caching is not associated with the device being mounted. /NOCACHE is the
system default.
/CACHE

Associates caching with the specified disk and allows you to override the disk data caching
defaults and to set one or more of the options.
The following options are available with the MOUNT (MOU) command qualifier /CACHE:
CREATE[: [region][: [main_partition][: [size]]]]
REGION :name
[NO]DEFER_WRITES
[NO]DIRECTORY[:extent-size]
[NO]LOGICAL[ :extent-size]
[NO]OVERLAY[ :extent-size]
[NO]READ-AHEAD[:extent-size]
[NO]VIRTUAL[:extent-size]
You cannot activate caching for a device unless a cache region exists. Therefore, when you use
the MOUNT command to associate caching with a disk volume for the first time, the CREATE
option is required.
The extent-size argument specifies the maximum size of an I/O request thlt is considered for
caching. The extent size is a decimal number. The minimum value for an extent size is 1 block;
the maximum size is 12710 blocks.

15-2 Disk Data Caching

For a desription of the CACHE and REGION options, see Section 15.1.3. For a description of
the other options, see Section 15.1.4.

15. 1.2 Using the SET DEVICE Command
The DCL command SET DEVICE (or MCR command SET) associates caching with a disk volume
that has been mounted with the MOUNT (MOU) /NOCACHE command. If the volume already
has caching associated with it (that is, if you mounted the volume with the MOUNT /CACHE
command), then the SET DEVICE (SET) command modifies the current data caching options.
The first time you use the SET DEVICE (SET) command to associate caching with a device,
you set the default values for each of the data caching options. Subsequent SET DEVICE (SET)
commands change only the options specified in the command line. All other options retain
the values that you set when you associated caching with the device (using either the MOUNT
[MOU] or SET DEVICE [SET] command).

Note
Prior to Version 4.0 of the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX operating systems,
the DCL command SET DEVICE (and MCR command SET) used the system
default values for any options that you did not specify in the command line.
For more information on modifying data cache operations, see Section 15.3.

Formats
DCL>SET DEVICE ddnn: /[NO]CACHE[:(option,option, ... )]
MCR>SET /[NO]CACHE[:ddnn: [(option, ... )]]

If you specify one option only, the parentheses are optional.

Parameter
ddnn

Specifies the device you are associating with caching. If the device is already associated
with caching (that is, if you have already mounted or have set the device cached), then
ddnn specifies the device you are modifying.
The device specification ddnn can also be a logical name assigned to the device.

Qualifiers
/NOCACHE

Deactivates caching for the specified device.
With the SET command, if you do not specify a device, /NOCACHE lists devices with disk
data caching disabled.
You cannot specify any options with the /NOCACHE qualifier.
/CACHE

Enables caching or modifies the caching behavior for the specified device.
With the SET command, if no device is specified, /CACHE lists devices with disk data
caching enabled.

Disk Data Caching 15-3

You can enable or modify the following options:
CREATE[:[region][:[main_partition][:[size]]]]
REGION:name
[NO]DEFER_WRITES
[NO]DIRECTORY[ :extent_size]
[NO]LOGICAL[:extent-size]
[NO]OVERLAY[ :extent-size]
[NO]READ.-AHEAD[:extent-size]
[N O]VIRTU AL[ :extent-size]
The first time you enter the SET /CACHE command for a device, the CREATE option
is required. To associate caching with a disk volume, you must create a cache region.
However, if you modify the data caching attributes for the same device with subsequent
SET commands, the CREATE option is optional.
The extent_size argument specifies the maximum size of an I/O request that is considered
for caching. The extent size is a decimal number. The minimum value for an extent size is
1 block; the maximum size is 12710 blocks.
For a desription of the CACHE and REGION options, see Section 15.1.3. For a description
of the other options, see Section 15.1.4.
To associate caching with a disk that you mounted with the MOUNT /NOCACHE command,
use the SET DEVICE/CACHE (or SET /CACHE) command. Likewise, to disassociate caching
from a disk that you mounted with the MOUNT /CACHE command, use the SET DEVICE
/NOCACHE (or SET /NOCACHE) command.

15.1.3 Specifying a Cache Region
To associate caching with a disk volume, you must create a cache region.
To create a cache region, use the CREATE option with the MOUNT /CACHE (MOU /CACHE)
or SET DEVICE /CACHE (SET /CACHE) command. To name (or rename) a region, use the
REGION option.

15-4 Disk Data Caching

The CREATE and REGION options are defined as follows:
CREATE[:[reglon][:[maln_partltion][:[slze]]]]

Creates a cache region and associates caching for the specified device with that region.
Specify the following arguments with the CREATE option:
region

Names the cache region. The default is CACHE.
To use a cache region other than the default (CACHE) provided by
the system, specify a different name when you create the region.

main _partition

Names the main partition for data caching. The default is GEN.
In general, RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX systems define one main
partition for general use. This partition, named GEN by default, may
contain many regions. These regions can be commons, Extended
Executive Partitions (EXPs), and task images.

size

Specifies the number (in decimal) of disk blocks for the cache region.
The default is 100 10 disk blocks.
Note that you can change the size of a cache region only when you
create it.

REGION:name

Associates caching for the specified device with an already existing cache region (that is, a
region that you previously created with the CREATE option).
You can specify a region to be used in place of the system default. The default region is
CACHE.

15. 1.4 Specifying Different Types of Caching
Disk data caching is available for various types of I/O operations. Caching of I/O requests is
most effective when blocks of data are read repeatedly or are accessed sequentially in small
increments. Thus, caching depends on the size of the request. If a request exceeds the specified
(or default) extent size, it is not cached. (This prevents any single type of I/O from monopolizing
the cache buffers.)
To enable or disable data caching for different types of I/O operations, use one or more of
the SET DEVICE /CACHE (SET /CACHE) or MOUNT /CACHE (MOV /CACHE) command
options. Note that you can specify each option for each device unit independently.
The following options are available:
DEFER_WRITES
NODEFER_WRITES

Enables or disables the deferred-write request attribute of data caching for temporary files.
Temporary files are files that have been marked for deletion when all associated tasks close
the file. These files do not need to be maintained across a system failure. Therefore, write
requests to these files can be written into the cache at the time of the request and deferred
until a later time to the disk.
Deferral of write requests speeds the completion time of I/O requests by postponing
potentially long disk accesses. This operation is beneficial for disks with slow access time.

Disk Data Caching 15-5

DIRECTORY[ :extent_slze]
NODI RECTORY

Enables or disables caching of directory I/O. Directory I/O consists of all I/O operations issued by an Ancillary Control Processor (ACP) task when context switching is enabled. Typically, caching of directory I/O is useful for files such as [O,O]BITMAP.SYS,
[O,O]INDEXF.SYS, and the directory files (file type DIR).
The system default for this option is DIRECTORY; caching of directory I/O is enabled. In
addition, the default extent size for DIRECTORY is 1 block. Depending on your system
usage, an extent size of 3 blocks may be more effective.
lOGICAl[: extent_size]
NOlOGICAl

Enables or disables caching of logical I/O. Logical I/O requests consist of all Read Logical
Block (IO.RLB) and Write Logical Block (IO.WLB) I/O functions that are not issued by an
ACP. Typically, tasks that use logical I/O do not benefit from data caching. For example, the
Backup and Restore Utility (BRU) reads file extents randomly throughout the disk. Because
caching is most effective when blocks of data are accessed repeatedly or sequentially in
small amounts, it would not benefit this type of BRU operation.
The system default for this option is NOLOGICAL; caching of logical I/O is disabled.
The default extent size for LOGICAL is 1 block.
OVERlAY[ :extent_slze]
NOOVERlAY

Enables or disables caching of overlay I/O. Caching of I/O overlay load requests (lO.LOD
and 10.LOV) depends on the size of the load. If a load request exceeds the specified (or
default) extent size, the request is not cached. This prevents overlay loads from monopolizing
the cache buffers.
The system default for this option is OVERLAY; caching of overlay I/O is enabled. The
default extent size for OVERLAY is 4 blocks.
VIRTUAl[ :extent_slze]
NOVIRTUAl

Enables or disables caching of virtual I/O. Virtual I/O consists of all Read Virtual Block
(IO.RVB) and Write Virtual Block (IO.WVB) I/O functions. When context switching is
disabled, requests issued by an ACP are also considered virtual I/O. (This characteristic
distinguishes them from directory I/O.)
The system default is VIRTUAL; caching of virtual I/O is enabled. The default extent size
for VIRTUAL is 5 blocks.
READ-AHEAD[ :extent_slze]
NOREAD-AHEAD

Enables or disables reading of data into the cache before you explicitly request it. To reduce
the number of physical I/O operations, READ-AHEAD transforms a small I/O request into
a larger request. The maximum number of blocks that can be read is equal to the maximum
extent size.
The system default for this option is NOREAD-AHEAD; to transfer data into the cache,
you must explicitly request it.

15-6 Disk Data Caching

The default extent size for READ-AHEAD is 5 blocks. To use an extent size other than
the default, specify a value that is equal to or greater than the extent size for virtual I/O
requests. If you specify a smaller extent size, it is automatically increased to match the
value for virtual I/O.
This option applies only to virtual I/O requests, and it is best for volumes containing data
files that are accessed sequentially.

15.2 Monitoring Data Cache Operations
Once disk data caching is established through the MOUNT (MOU) or SET DEVICE (SET)
command, you can monitor the performance of data caching with other commands provided by
the system. Using these commands, you can evaluate the following aspects of data caching:
•

Listings of all devices (cached and uncached) known to the system

•

General data cache information about cache regions and devices (RMD C page)

•

Detailed data cache information about cache regions and devices (RMD D page)

The sections which follow provide detailed descriptions of the DCL and MCR commands for
monitoring data cache operations.

15.2. 1 Displaying Information About Devices (Cached and Uncached)
The DCL commands SHOW DEVICE and SHOW DEVICE/[NO]CACHE (MCR commands DEV
and SET) display information about devices recognized by the system.
Note that you cannot specify both a device and a qualifier in the same command line. To
display information about a particular device, include a device specification. To list all cached
(or uncached) devices, use the /CACHE (or /NOCACHE) qualifier.

Formats
DCL>SHOW DEVICE [dd[nn]:]
DCL>SHOW DEVICE /[NO]CACHE
MCR>DEV [dd[nn]:]
MCR>SET /[NO]CACHE

Parameters
dd

Specifies the devices about which you want to display information.

nn
Specifies the unit of a particular device about which you want to display information.
The device specification ddnn can also be a logical name assigned to the device.
If you do not specify a device, all the devices known to the system are listed. If you specify a
device and not a unit, all the units of that device are listed. If you specify both a device and a
unit, information about the specified unit is displayed.

Disk Data Caching 15-7

Qualifiers
jCACHE

Lists all devices known to the system that are cached.
If you specify the /CACHE qualifier, but no devices are cached, the system does not display
any information.
jNOCACHE

Lists devices that are not cached but could be cached.

15.2.2 Displaying General Cache Statistics
The Resource Monitoring Display (RMD) provides displays or "pages" of system information.
The DCL command SHOW CACHE/REGION (or MCR command RMD C) allows you to display
the C page, which shows general statistics about a particular cache region.
To display detailed data cache information about a specific device (that is, the RMD D page),
use the /DEVICE qualifier and supply the device name (see Section 15.2.3).
After you analyze this information, you can use the SET command to modify system values
and performance (see Section 15.1.2 and 15.3.)
Formats
DCL>SHOW CACHE [/REGION=name] [/RATE:nn]
MCR>RMD C [.REGION=name. RATE=nn]

DCl Qualifiers and MCR Setup Commands
jREGION=name
,REGION=name

Selects the cache region to be displayed. The default region is CACHE.
Note that the /DEVICE and /REGION qualifiers cannot be used together (see Section 15.2.3).
If you do not specify either qualifier in the SHOW CACHE command line, /REGION is the
default.
jRATE:nn
,RATE=nn

Specifies, in seconds, the rate between screen refreshes. The default rate is 1 second.
Example 15-1 is a sample RMD C page display; it is followed by an explanation.

15-8 Disk Data Caching

Example 15-1:

Cache Region Display (General Statistics)

RSX-11M-PLUS V4.0

BL40

•

•o

Region Size: 47440 (2500. disk blocks)

Cache Region Name: CACHE

22-MAR-87 13: 17: 11

Cache Statistics (General)

0
CD

Device
Name
DB6:
DB7:

Total Hit Fail Load
Reads Rate Rate Rate
58834. 92%
4%
2%
O.
0%
0%
0%

Total Hit Fail Defer
Writes Rate Rate Rate
19393. 62%
0%
0%
o.
0%
0%
0%

Total

58834.

19393.

92%

62%

•

Total
I/O Ops
78227.

o.
78227.

4B
Cache
Used
96%
0%
96%

The RMD C Display contains the following information about each cache region:

Indicates the name of the cache region. By default, the name of the region is CACHE.

•

Shows the actual memory size (in octal) of the cache region in 32-word memory blocks,
followed in parentheses by the decimal number of disk blocks available in the extent storage
area. (The memory size includes the private cache pool area as well as the extent storage
area.)

•

Displays the total count of all types of read requests issued to that device. These include
VIRTUAL, READ-AHEAD, DIRECTORY, LOGICAL, and OVERLAY read requests.

Displays the percentage of all read requests that were satisfied by the cache (the Read Hit
Rate).

CD Displays the percentage of all read requests that could not be satisfied by the cache (the
Read Fail Rate). Requests to the cache may fail for one or more of the following reasons:
An extent overlap
A cache pool allocation failure
A request size exceeding the specified extent size limit
Actual errors in loading the cache from the disk are not counted in this rate.

Displays the percentage of all read requests that resulted in data being loaded into the
cache (the Load Rate). The total of the Hit, Fail, and Load rates should be close to 100%;
however, the total may not always equal 100. Read requests can fail due to a primary pool
allocation failure that is not associated directly with read or write requests. The failure rate
of primary pool allocation is shown on the RMD D page; it should be small.

Displays the count of all write requests issued to the device. These include VIRTUAL,
DIRECTORY, and LOGICAL write requests.

Displays the percentage of all write requests that caused updating of blocks already loaded
in the cache (the Write Hit Rate).

Displays the percentage of all write requests that could not be directed to the cache because
of an extent overlap (the Write Fail Rate). The combined hit and fail rates do not total
100% because a write miss is not considered a write failure. Also, write requests to a cache
can fail because of a primary pool allocation failure, which is not associated directly with
read or write requests. The failure rate of primary pool allocation is shown on the RMD D
page; it should be small.

Disk Data Caching 15-9

0& Displays the percentage of all write requests to temporary files that were deferred from
write-through to the disk (the Defer Write Rate). The actual write operation to the disk was
performed some time after the user's write request was completed.

4D Displays the total of all read and write operations for the device.
•

Indicates the percentage of the cache extent storage area used by the device.

•

Displays the grand totals for the cache region.

15.2.3 Displaying Detailed Cache Statistics
The DCL command SHOW CACHE/DEVICE (or MCR command RMD D) allows you to display
the D page of the Resource Monitoring Display (RMD). The D page shows detailed statistics
about cached devices. If you include a device specification, RMD displays information only
about that device.
After you analyze this information, you can use the SET command to modify system values
and performance (see Sections 15.1.2 and 15.3.)

Formats
DCL>SHOW CACHE/DEVICE[=ddnn:] [/RATE:nn]
MCR>RMD D[,DEVICE[=ddnn:] [,RATE=nn]

Parameter
ddnn

Specifies the device for which you are requesting information. If you do not specify a
device, the system displays information about all the devices known to the system.

DCl Qualifiers and MCR Setup Commands
/DEVICE=ddnn
,DEVICE=ddnn

Specifies the device about which you want to display detailed data cache information.
Note that the /DEVICE qualifer cannot be used with the /REGION qualifier. For more
information, see Section 15.2.2.
The default device is the system disk (SY).
/RATE:nn
,RATE=nn

Specifies, in seconds, the rate at which the screen refreshes. The default rate is 1 second.
Example 15-2 is a sample RMD D page display; it is followed by an explanation. For more
information about RMD, see Chapter 7 of this manual.

15-10 Disk Data Caching

Example 15-2: Cache Region Display (Detailed Statistics)
RSX-11M-PLUS V4.0

BL40

Cache Statistics (Detailed)

Device Name: SYO:
Cache Status: Active.Defer ~

22-MAR-87 13:17:22

Region Name: CACHE
Region Size: 47440 ..
Requests Being Cached: Dir.Ovr.Vir.Log.Rdh ~

Virtual
Reads
14961.
Read Hit Rate
87%
Read Load Rate
3%

Readahead
O.
0%
0%

Directory
24398.
93%
1%

Logical
4842.
92%
4%

Overlay
14676.
96%
4%

Total
68867.
92%
2%

Read Overlap
0%
Extent Too Big
0%
Max Extent Size 127.

0%
0%
127.

6%
0%
3.

1%
0%
127.

0%
0%
127.

2%
0%

10380.
86%
0%

48.
70%
0%

62%

34778.

4890.

Writes
8966.
Write Hit Rate
331Write Overlap
0%
Total I/O

23916.

Primary Pool Allocation Failure Rate (as a % of Total l/Os):
Cache Pool Allocation Failure Rate (as a % of Total Read l/Os):
Read Load Failure Rate (as a 1- of Cache Load l/Os):
Deferred Write Rate (as a % of Total Write l/Os):

•

19393 .

14676.
0%
2%
0%
0%

78260.

.. Displays the region name and region size (see the description of the RMD C page). Note
that the extent storage area size is not displayed (as it is in the RMD C page).
~

Shows whether the cache is ACTIVE, ENABLED, DEFER, or a combination of all three.
ACTIVE indicates that the device is being cached through the region.
ENABLED indicates that the device will automatically be cached when it is mounted
(even if the MOUNT command does not explicitly request that the device be cached).
DEFER indicates that deferred write requests to temporary files are enabled for the
device.

Displays the types of cache I/O operations enabled for the device. The types can
be VIRTUAL (VIR), READAHEAD (RDH), DIRECTORY (DIR), LOGICAL (LOG), and
OVERLAY (OVR). However, note that values for RDH are not currently recorded; RMD
displays them as zeros.

Displays the number of read requests issued for each of the I/O types listed in the display,
as well as the total of all read requests.

Displays the Read Hit Rate, Read Load Rate, Read Overlap Rate, and the Extent Too Big
rate for each type of request. Each of these rates is computed as a percentage of the total
number of read operations for the particular type of request.

Displays the maximum extent size for each of the 1/0 types.

Shows the number of write requests issued for each of the I/O types and the total of all
write requests. Note that READ-AHEAD and OVERLAY write requests do not exist, so
these fields are blank.

Disk Data Caching

15-11

CD Displays the Write Hit Rate and Write Overlap Rate for each type of I/O request. Each
of these rates is computed as a percentage of the total number of write operations of a
particular type.

CD Displays the total number of each type of I/O request, as well as the total number of all
I/O operations.

«D Displays the following rates, which are not accumulated by I/O type:
The Primary Pool Allocation Failure Rate line shows how often the allocation cannot
be done as a percentage of the total number of I/Os issued for the device.
The Cache Pool Allocation Failure Rate is similar to the Primary Pool Allocation Failure
Rate, except that allocation from the cache pool is only required on read operations.
Therefore, the rate is computed as a percentage of the total number of read operations.
The Read Load Failure Rate is the percentage of all cache load attempts that failed
because of an I/O error.
The Deferred Write Rate is the rate at which write requests to temporary files were
able to be deferred. This is computed as a percentage of the total number of write
operations.
All cache I/O requests require that an I/O packet be allocated from primary pool.

15.3 Modifying Data Cache Operations
After you monitor and evaluate the state of data cache operations, you can enhance data caching
performance by modifying various cache parameters. To modify data caching on your system,
use the DCL command SET DEVICE (or the MCR command SET).
The first time you use the SET DEVICE (SET) command, you associate caching with a device
and set the default values for each of the data caching options. Subsequent SET DEVICE (SET)
commands change only the options specified in the command line. All other options retain
the values that you set when you associated caching with the device (using either the MOUNT
(MOU) or SET DEVICE (SET) command). To modify the performance of a specific cached
device, specify the device name in the command line.
You can also modify the size of a cache region; however, the size cannot be changed while the
region is associated with a device. First, you must dissociate all devices from the region with
the SET DEVICE /NOCACHE (SET /NOCACHE ddnn:) command. Then, use the CREATE
and REGION options to create a modified cache region and reassociate the devices with that
region (see Section 15.1.3).
To delete a region, use the REMOVE command. For example, if the cache region is store, use
one of the following command lines:
DCL>
MCR>

For more information on the REMOVE command, see the RSX-11M-PLUS Command Language
Manual or the RSX-llM-PLUS MCR Operations Manual. For more information on the syntax
and options that are available with the SET DEVICE (SET) command, see Section 15.1.2.

15-12 Disk Data Caching

15.4 The Data Caching Environment
This section describes the internal operations of data caching. Subsections include a detailed
explanation of I/O cache considerations and data structures.

15.4. 1 The Data Cache Region
The data cache region is composed of memory-resident copies of physically contiguous disk
blocks, or "extents." The cache region stores blocks of disk data when a task requests a read
operation. The Data Cache Manager (DCM) tags these blocks with their corresponding logical
block numbers (LBNs) and then uses the LBNs to locate data during subsequent I/O requests.
If you enable read-ahead, the cache region creates a new extent size. The size of the extent is
based on the size of the request and the number of additional blocks available in the file. The
total size of the extents cannot exceed the maximum read-ahead value.

15.4.2 The Data Cache Manager
The Data Cache Manager (DCM) executes within the I/O system after all packet preprocessing
and before disk driver activation. Because DCM is positioned at this point in processing, it can
intercept I/O packets when all but the driver processing has been performed. If a task directs
an I/O request to a device other than a disk, DCM maps and activates the appropriate device
driver at the initiation entry point.
If deferred write request support is not enabled, DCM ensures that the data within the cache
extents matches the data on the disk. If a single cache extent contains all the data to be read
by an I/O request, the data transfer occurs from the extent and not from the disk. However, if
the extent does not contain the requested data, or if the request overlaps only part of an extent,
DCM forwards the I/O request to the appropriate driver for processing. The driver transfers the
data from the disk without using the data or structures within the cache. When the physical
I/O completes, DCM resumes processing and copies the requested data into your buffer.

During a write operation for I/O that is to be cached, DCM copies data from your buffer to
the corresponding cache buffer. If there is no corresponding cache buffer, DCM forwards the
request to the disk driver for processing. When the driver finishes copying the data to the disk,
DCM completes the I/O processing by passing the packet to the I/O Finish routine ($IOFIN).
The MOUNT and DMOUNT commands issue the Set Characteristics function (lO.STC) as part
of mount and dismount processing, respectively. 10.STC checks the volume label to validate
the disk. If the volume label is correct, the device driver marks the volume "valid" by setting the
volume valid bit. If you enable data caching, DCM uses 10.STC to ensure that the cache buffers
reflect data for mounted (valid) disks. If you disable data caching, the driver uses 10.STC to
ensure that I/O requests are processed for valid disks only.
When DCM receives the mount parameters, it initializes the cache, duplicates and dispatches
the I/O packet, and retains the original request. Before initializing the cache, DCM purges the
cache to eliminate any stale data.
The Executive I/O Finish routine ($IOFIN) returns the status of I/O processing. If an I/O
packet is processed successfully, DCM increments a variable for the corresponding cache region
to prevent de allocation of the cache. When DCM receives a dismount packet, it stalls the I/O
packet until the device driver writes any outstanding buffers to the disk. DCM disables all
further cache processing for that device. When the cache context for the device is clear (that is,

Disk Data Caching

15-13

when all the extents have been processed or eliminated), DCM forwards the stalled dismount
request to the driver.

15.4.3 Deferred Disk Write Requests
Deferred disk write requests are implemented in two steps. First, the Executive recognizes an
incoming I/O packet from a temporary file that is marked for deletion (also called a "temporary"
file). Then, the Data Cache Manager (DCM) prevents the data already in the cache from being
written to the disk. The subsections which follow describe these two actions in greater detail.

15.4.3. 1 Recognition of I/O Packet Marked for Deletion
The data pool for the Files-II Ancillary Control Processor (FIIACP) contains the File Control
Block (FCB) bit SC.MDL. The SC.MDL bit indicates that a file has been marked for deletion.
FIIACP propagates the bit to all window blocks associated with the file for later use by the
Executive and DCM.
During a virtual I/O operation, a task calls the Executive module $MPVBN to convert the
virtual block number (VBN) to a logical block number (LBN). At the same time, the Executive
maps the window block. The window block maps an area for the file and stores the bit setting
as part of the context for the virtual operation. The bit setting signals to DCM that the file is
marked for deletion. DCM considers the file "temporary;" consequently, it uses data from the
cache to process I/O requests.
The data on the disk remains unaltered until a write request overlaps only part of the cache
extent or exceeds the boundaries of the extent (in either case, the data for the write request
cannot be contained completely within the existing extent). If a write request requires a write
operation to both the disk and the cache, the request is not deferred; instead, the data is
transferred only to the disk and the extent is deleted.

15.4.3.2 Deferring Disk Data Transfers
When DCM defers a write operation to part (or all) of the storage blocks for a cache extent, it
labels the extent with the Deferred Write Request (DFR) attribute. DFR indicates to the system
that the extent has "new" data (that is, data that does not appear on the disk). Before DCM
can process any other write requests that overlap the associated areas, the driver must write the
data out to the disk.
Read and write requests to temporary files (that is, files marked for deletion) are processed using
extents with the DFR attribute. Consequently, DCM executes these requests differently. The
two subsections which follow describe these differences.
Read Requests to Extents with the DFR Attribute

You can disable DFR support by specifying the NODEFER_WRITES option for a disk. (See
Section 15.1.4.) If DFR support is disabled, DCM ensures that the data within the cache extents
matches the data on the disk. If a single cache extent contains the entire area to be read by a
request, DCM uses the data from the extent. However, if a single extent does not contain the
request, or if the request overlaps only part of an extent, DCM transfers the data from the disk
\Arithout using the data or structures within the cache.

15-14 Disk Data Caching

OCM processing remains the same for requests to areas contained completely within one cache
extent. However, processing is modified for read requests that overlap part of one or several
extents with the OFR attribute. If there are one (or more) extents for temporary files within an
area, OCM reads the entire area from the disk (including the "stale" data from the OFR extent
ranges). After the area is read from the disk, OCM overlays all OFR-associated extents (that is,
it performs a "multiple overlay") into your current buffer. The multiple overlay supersedes the
"stale" data that OCM read from the disk.
Write Requests to Extents with the DFR Attribute

If OFR support is disabled, cache support for write operations extends only to areas that are
loaded into the cache by a prior read operation. If a write request maps completely into a cache
extent, OCM updates the cache and writes the data out to the disk. If only part of a current
disk extent covers the request, OCM deletes the extent and passes the original request to the
disk driver.
If OFR support is enabled and there is a virtual request to a file marked for deletion, OCM does
not write data out to the disk. If a write request maps completely into a cache extent, OCM
updates the cache only. Because data is not written out to the disk, the disk contains old data.
OCM labels the cache extent containing the new data with the OFR attribute.
If a virtual request does not completely map the extent previously marked with the OFR
attribute, OCM stalls any subsequent I/O requests until the OFR extent is written to the disk.
An I/O stall must occur to prevent the new data from the latest request from being superseded
by the old data in the cache extent. If the I/O request is not stalled, the timing or selection of
the device drivers could result in the loss of new data.

The OFR extents can be eliminated by removing the extent from the age list within the cache
structures when the cache partition becomes full. 1 A write request from a task that is only
partially contained within the cache extent also eliminates a OFR extent.
When an I/O is issued that causes a write overlap to occur to an area covered by a OFR extent,
the following steps preserve the data on the disk and in the cache:
•

OCM modifies the user task so that it reissues the request following a significant event.
(For more information on events, see the RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX Executive Reference
Manual.)

•

Any extent within the affected area that is not marked OFR is erased.

•

An internal I/O writes the OFR cache extent to disk.

•

When the I/O completes, an internal completion routine is called to eliminate the extent.

Although the Executive sets SC.MOL for an entire extent, the data in the temporary file may
only correspond to part of an extent. Regardless of the status of the extent, the requests to
temporary files are deleted; however, the requests associated with a "regular" file continue to
be written to both the cache and the disk.

1 The age list is a list of the extents in the cache partition in order of latest manipulation. This list has a maximum number of entries allowed;
if a particular extent is not referenced after a settable number of operations on other extents, the cache flushes the structure to make room
for other areas that may be used more heavily.

Disk Data Caching 15-15

15.4.4 Data Cache Structures and Symbolic Definitions
For disk caching purposes, a region is used to contain the cache-specific data structures and disk
data buffers. This region can have any name. It is marked with the following Partition Control
Block (PCB) status bits:

PCB Word

Status Bits and Functions

P.STAT

PS.FXD-Region is fixed in memory.
PS.NSF-Region cannot be shuffled.
PS.COM-Region is a common.

P .PRO

Protection word blocking all types of file access.

P.ST2
P2.RON-Read only (applies to external users).
P2.APR-Depends on Executive (five for systems with separate Executive instruction and data space, six for systems without separate instruction and data space).
P2.LMA-Do not remove this region.
P2.CHE-Cache region (informational only).
Cache regions may be shared by multiple devices, or one region may be used exclusively by
one device. When you enable caching for a device, DCM uses the system default cache region
(CACHE) unless you specify another region.

Data Cache Region Format
The cache region is formatted when it is created. When data caching is enabled for a disk
device, the Unit Control Block Extension (UCBX) is marked with the address of the data cache
region (PCB). To force the binding of the region with the device to prevent illegal deallocation,
the resident mapped task count field (P.RMCT) reflects the number of devices that currently
have caching enabled for that region. The region cannot be deleted as long as P.RMCT is
nonzero. When there are no devices with access for that region, the status bit P2.LMA is
cleared, allowing the region to be removed from the system.

Data Cache Structures
The data cache region has two parts. (See Figure 15-1.) The beginning of the region contains
pool space. The remainder of the cache region is used to buffer disk data blocks. It is allocated
on 32-word boundaries in 256-word increments.
Systems without separate Executive instruction and data space map pool through Active Page
Register (APR) 6 and have a 4K limitation; systems that support separate instruction and data
space map pool through data space APR 5 and APR 6 with an 8K limitation. DCM uses
the Executive pool allocation and deallocation routines ($ALOCB (entry point $ALOCl) and
$DEACB (entry point $DEACl), respectively) to allocate and deallocate space from this area.
The dynamic data structures, which are cache-specific, are retained in this area to minimize the
load of data caching on the primary pool resource.
The Cache Extent Descriptor (CED) is a data structure within the region's pool that describes all
data buffer space in the cache region, whether the space is in use or not. This allows contiguous
blocks of space to be reclaimed when the system needs them.

15-16 Disk Data Caching

Figure 15-1:

Format of Data Cache Region

} Cache-Specific Pool

Disk Data Buffer Space

ZK-4187-85

The pool space contains a header that is used to control various region-specific structures. (See
Figure 15-2.)

Figure 15-2:

Format of Pool Header Area
H.CSTS

+00

H.IIOC

H.PAVL

I--

H.PKTQ

I--

H.CMDH

I--

H.CEDH

+02

+10

+14

+20

H.TEMP1

+24

H.TEMP2

+26
ZK-4188-85

Disk Data Caching

15-17

The pool header area contains the following information:
H.CSTS

Defines the region code status.

H.IIOC

Defines the region internal I/O count, which is not used by the cache region.

H.PAVL

Defines the available pool list. This is a standard 3-word pool list head, which
contains the alignment word followed by the list head, which is a pointer to the
next available block and the size of the block.

H.PKTQ

Defines the pending packet queue (in descending priority order). These packets are
waiting for data cache completion processing. They either have I/O in progress,
are waiting for data movement to begin, or they are waiting to be dispatched to
the user or the driver.

H.CMDH

Defines the list head for region buffer space allocation.

H.CEDH

Defines the list head for CEDs ordered by age (the oldest are at the head of the
queue).

H.TEMPI

Defines the pointer used in allocating new extents.

H.TEMP2

Defines the pointer used in allocating new extents.

The region is formatted before caching is enabled on any dependent disk devices.

15-18 Disk Data Caching

Part IV: Advanced Features

Chapter 16
Shadow Recording (RSX-11 M-PLUS Systems Only)
Shadow Recording (SHA) is a system generation option for RSX-IIM-PLUS operating systems.
If you select the Full-functionality Executive during system generation, Shadow Recording is
included by default. This chapter describes Shadow Recording, how to prepare your system for
it, and how to control it. It also contains information on bad block handling and a list of error
messages.

16. 1 Introduction to Shadow Recording
Shadow Recording backs up all new data as it is written to a Files-II disk. It creates two
identical sets of disks called a shadowed pair. You can shadow more than one pair of disks, but
shadowed disk pairs cannot overlap.
The first disk of the pair (the primary disk) is the original disk. It exists whether or not Shadow
Recording is active. Any disk on your system, including the system disk, can be the primary
disk of a shadowed pair. The second disk of the pair (the secondary disk) is an exact copy of
the primary disk.
Shadow Recording has important uses in the following applications:
•

Duplicating important information to prevent damage or loss. With Shadow Recording,
critical data is duplicated on two disks. This redundancy prevents loss of data if a disk
error occurs and provides quicker recovery time in critical applications. The length of time
an application is unable to operate (the "down time") is reduced because you do not need
to halt the application to correct for disk errors.

•

Providing an online ("hot") backup so that a duplicate disk is immediately available (even
when backup time or resources are not).

Shadow Recording operates transparently; it does not change any aspects of the system that are
visible to you. During Shadow Recording, the Executive writes the same data to the secondary
disk that it writes to the primary disk. However, when a disk read occurs, the Executive reads
the primary disk first. If a read error occurs on the primary disk, the Executive reads the
secondary disk. The Executive displays all I/O errors occurring on a Shadow Recording disk
pair on the console device (pseudo device CO:).
If you encounter errors during any of the Shadow Recording procedures, refer to Section 16.4.

Shadow Recording (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

16-1

16.2 Preparing Your System for Shadow Recording
You can shadow more than one pair of disks, but shadowed pairs cannot overlap. For example,
if you make DBO and OBI a shadowed pair, you cannot make OBI and DB2 a shadowed pair.
Also, the devices must be of the same type (for example, two RP06 or two RM02 disks).
Before you can use a pair of disk drives for Shadow Recording, you must have two identical
disk packs available. The two disk packs must have the same bad block data. You can make the
bad block data on the two disks functionally equivalent by following the procedure discussed
next. The procedure assumes you are Shadow Recording the system disk. However, it is valid
for any two devices of the same type.
To use Shadow Recording, perform the following steps:
1.

Select Shadow Recording as an option during system generation.

Select a set of disks (three or more) that you can use for Shadow Recording. If disk errors
occur, you can use the extra disks in the set for a quick recovery. In critical applications,
this can decrease the down time.

Select two device units for the shadowed pair. One of these two devices will be the device
that contains the primary disk that you want to shadow, the other will contain the secondary
disk.
For example, if your system has four RP06 disks and you decide to shadow record the
system device (DBO), use one of the three remaining devices (OBI, DB2, or DB3) for the
secondary disk.

Run the Bad Block Locator Utility (BAD) with the JLIST switch on all the disks in the set
of Shadow Recording disks. BAD locates the bad blocks and lists them on your terminal.
This list includes information you need for the next step.

Ensure that the disks have the same bad blocks by making the bad block descriptor block
on the primary disk the logical OR of all the bad blocks in the set of disks.
To make entries in the bad block descriptor block of the primary disk, initialize
the disk by using the DCL command INITIALIZE (MCR command INI) with the
jBADBLOCKS:MANUAL qualifier (jBAD=[MAN] keyword). Use one of the following
formats:
DCL>
MCR>

Parameters
/BAD_BLOCKS:MANUAL (/BAD=[MAN»

Includes bad block processing in the volume initialization and instructs INI to accept a
bad block list specified from the terminal.
ddnn

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the primary disk being
initialized.

16-2 Shadow Recording (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

volumelabel

Specifies the Files-II volume label for the primary disk.
After you enter the INITIALIZE (or INI) command, the system prompts for bad blocks, as
follows:
INI>LBN(S)=

In response to this prompt, type the list of bad blocks. (Subsequent IN!, Disk Save and
Compare Utility (DSC), and Backup and Restore Utility (BRU) operations use the bad block
information. For a description of DSC and BRU, see the RSX-11M-PLUS Utilities Manual.)
For more information on the Monitor Console Routine (MCR) command INITIALIZE
VOLUME, see the RSX-llM-PLUS MCR Operations Manual. For information on the DIGITAL
Command Language (DCL) command INITIALIZE, see the RSX-11M-PLUS Command
Language Manual.
6.

Use the Backup and Restore utility (BRU) to copy the data from your system disk to your
primary disk. This disk becomes the primary disk and your new system disk for Shadow
Recording.
For example, if you want to shadow record your system disk, copy it to the primary disk.
After this is done, you will have two system disks with identical data. However, the disks
are not physically identical because of the bad block locations.
When you start Shadow Recording, the contents of the primary disk (including the bad
block information) are copied to the secondary disk. After Shadow Recording is enabled,
the Executive writes the same data to the secondary disk that it writes to the primary disk.
When you make the· bad block information on the primary disk a logical OR of all the bad
blocks in the set of disks (including its own), the write to the secondary disk does not occur
for a defective block.

Use the DCL command MOUNT (MCR command MOU) on the secondary device with the
/FOREIGN qualifier (/FOR keyword) to mount one of the disks you selected in step 2. Use
one of the following formats:
DCL>
MCR>

Parameters
ddnn

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the secondary disk.
Now, you are ready to use Shadow Recording, beginning with the START command (see
Section 16.3.1).

Shadow Recording (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

16-3

16.3 Controlling Shadow Recording
Five commands control Shadow Recording:
•

START

•

STOP

•

ABORT

•

CONTINUE

•

DISPLAY

Enter these commands from a privileged terminal only.
To invoke Shadow Recording, enter the task name SHADOW (or SHA) at the system prompt.
Then, enter one of the five commands at the explicit prompt SHA> . For example:
>

SHA>

You can also enter both commands on one line, as follows:
>

The sections that follow describe the Shadow Recording commands.

16-4 Shadow Recording (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

START
16.3.1 START Command
The START command invokes a Shadow Recording task called SHAddn (or SHddnn), where
ddnn is the device unit of the primary disk. This task copies the primary disk to the secondary
disk. Shadow Recording occurs while this copy operation, called catchup, is in progress. Records
are written to both the primary disk and the secondary disk without interfering with the catchup
process.
After you issue the START command, Shadow Recording provides a dynamic backup of all
blocks as they are written to the primary disk.
The START command performs the following functions:
•

Verifies that the primary disk is a Files-11 device and is mounted

•

Verifies that the secondary disk is mounted as a foreign device

•

Verifies that both the primary and secondary disks are identical disk types

•

Sets up the Shadow Recording data structure (VMB) that starts the Shadow Recording task
within the Executive

•

Starts the copying of the primary disk to the secondary disk

Format
START ddnn: TO ddxx:

Parameters
ddnn

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the primary device.
ddxx

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (xx) for the secondary device (the
shadowed copy of the primary device).
The START command copies the primary' disk onto any secondary disk of the same device
type. After you make the bad block information identieal, and then use the START command,
the secondary disk becomes a logical duplicate of the primary disk. All data structures (such
as data blocks, bad blocks, headers, and directories) occupy the same logical locations on the
secondary disk as they do on the primary disk.
Both disks have equivalent logical block numbers (LBNs). If they are system disks, both disks
are bootable. In addition, after the START command is issued, the secondary disk becomes a
Files-11 format disk. The START command makes an exact copy of the primary disk (including
the Files-11 format) on the secondary disk.
If new data is written to the primary disk after Shadow Recording is initiated, Shadow Recording
also writes the new data to the secondary disk. That is, when a write occurs on the primary
disk, it also occurs on the secondary disk. However, the secondary disk is read only from the
last portion that has been copied. The information about the last block copied is in the VMB
control block. A fully redundant secondary disk does not exist until all the data is transferred
from the primary disk to the secondary disk.

Shadow Recording (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 16-5

STOP
16.3.2 STOP Command
The STOP command performs the following functions:
•

Verifies that the primary device is part of a shadowed pair

•

Unlinks the UMB data structure, if no outstanding I/O exists, thereby stopping the Executive
from Shadow Recording

•

Marks the data structure for deletion, if there is outstanding I/O

Format
STOP ddnn:

Parameters
ddnn

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the primary device.
The STOP command prevents Shadow Recording from continuing. However, while the primary
disk is being copied to the secondary disk (that is, while catchup occurs), the STOP command
cannot stop Shadow Recording. If you issue the STOP command during catchup, you receive
an error message. To stop Shadow Recording during catchup, use the ABORT command (see
Section 16.3.3).
The absence of outstanding I/O does not necessarily mean that all file activity has stopped.
To ensure the integrity of the secondary data, all tasks that write records to the shadowed pair
must stop before you issue the commands STOP or ABORT.

16-6 Shadow Recording (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

ABORT
16.3.3 ABORT Command
The ABORT command performs the following functions:
•

Verifies that the primary disk is part of a shadowed pair

•

Aborts catchup if it is in progress and then executes a STOP command

•

Stops Shadow Recording, even if catchup is in progress

Format
ABORT ddnn:

Parameters
ddnn

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the primary device.

Shadow Recording (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

16-7

CONTINUE
16.3.4 CONTINUE Command
The CONTINUE command performs the following functions:
•

Assumes that the primary and secondary disks are identical

•

Verifies that the primary disk is in Files-I1 format and is mounted properly

•

Verifies that the secondary disk is mounted foreign

•

Verifies that both disks are identical device types

•

Sets up the Shadow Recording data structure, which starts Shadow Recording within the
Executive

Format
CONTINUE ddnn: TO ddxx:

Parameters
ddnn

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the primary device.
ddxx

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (xx) for the secondary device.
The CONTINUE command allows you to restart Shadow Recording on the same two disks that
you were using when the STOP command was issued. The CONTINUE command assumes
that the two disks are physically alike, and it does not check the disks for equality. After you
issue the STOP command, do not allow writing to occur on the primary or secondary disks.

16-8 Shadow Recording (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

DISPLAY
16.3.5 DISPLAY Command
The DISPLAY command displays a list of all the shadowed pairs that are currently known to
the system.

Format
DISPLAY

The shadowed device pairs are displayed in the following format:
xxxxxx

ddnn

ddxx

The three display fields contain the following information:
xxxxxx

Displays the address of the UMB control block for Shadow Recording. This control
block is in the system Executive pool space.

ddnn

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (nn) for the primary device.

ddxx

Specifies the device mnemonic (dd) and unit number (xx) for the secondary device.

Shadow Recording (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

16-9

16.4 Error Handling
The Executive writes data from a task buffer to the primary disk and then writes it from the
task buffer to the secondary disk. (The START command, which copies the primary disk to the
secondary disk, is an exception.) If write errors occur on one of the disks, you may be unaware
of the errors until the Executive attempts to read the block in error.
To be notified of write errors as they occur, run Shadow Recording with write-checking enabled
for both disks of the shadowed pair. The DCL command SET DEVICE/WRITE_CHECK
(MCR command SET /WCHK=ddnn) enables write-checking on the device, ddnn. Note that a
write-check of every write operation takes more time to execute than a write-only.
When write-checking is enabled, the Shadow Recording program prints the error messages on
the console terminal. These error messages consist of device unit numbers and LBNs.
For a read operation, the Executive reads from the primary disk first. If it encounters an error
on the primary disk, it reads the same record from the secondary disk. It is unlikely that both
disks would develop an error in exactly the same place. However, if they do, a notification of
read errors on the secondary disk means that the primary disk is also bad in the same location.
The following subsections discuss the procedures you can follow when a read error occurs.

16.4. 1 Errors on the Primary Disk
If errors occur when the Executive tries to read from the primary disk, the Executive tries to

read the same record from the secondary disk. You are notified of the errors by a message on
the console. You can let your task continue, but be aware that the shadowed pair is no longer
alike.
If you decide to stop the processing task (or tasks), then you can stop Shadow Recording with

the STOP command. The secondary disk contains all the data that was on the primary disk,
including the bad block record. Use the secondary disk as the new primary disk. Designate a
new device of the same type for the new secondary disk. Then, mount the new secondary disk
on the secondary device as foreign.
After mounting the old secondary disk on the primary device as the new primary disk, enter
the START command. The START command copies the primary disk to the secondary disk,
including the bad block record.

16.4.2 Errors on the Secondary Disk
If errors occur on the secondary disk, the shadow of the primary data is no longer valid. Stop

Shadow Recording, mount a new secondary disk, and restart Shadow Recording. The catchup
task (SHAddn) then copies the primary disk to the new secondary disk.

16-10 Shadow Recording (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

16.4.3 Errors on the Primary and Secondary Disks
To correct for a disk error, stop Shadow Recording and your tasks. Then, select a new primary
disk and new secondary disk, mark the bad block information on the new primary disk, and
copy the old primary disk to the new primary disk.
If the error occurs on different blocks on both disks, save the data by using the old primary and

secondary disks as a shadowed pair input to the Backup and Restore Utility (BRU). BRU copies
all the data that is on the input disk and writes it to the output disk. If you use a shadowed
pair as input to BRU, only the valid or "good" data is written to the output disk. If primary
disk errors occur, the Executive does an alternative read on the secondary disk.
BRU does not create a new primary disk; you must create a new primary disk from the BRU
output (see Section 16.2).
For more information on BRU, see the RSX-11M-PLUS Utilities Manual.

16.5 Shadow Recording Messages
This section lists error messages that you may receive during Shadow Recording. The first
message consists of time-stamping and a list of information, which is described in the explanation
that follows. The remainder of the Shadow Recording messages appear in the following format:
SHA--message text

The messages are listed alphabetically, according to the text of the message. Each message is
followed by a brief explanation and a suggested response to the error.
hh:mm:ss-Handler Error code-nn. on ddnn:
Shadow Pair: ddnn: ddxx:
Task: xxxxxx
Logical Block: nnn.
Bytes in xfer: nnn.
File 10: n,n
File Name: xxxxxx
nn. errors lost due to saturation.

Explanation: This message contains the following information:
hh:mm:ss

Specifies the time of the error in hours, minutes, and
seconds.

Handler Error code-nn.

Specifies the I/O error code (in decimal) for the error.
(I/O error codes are summarized in the RSX-llM-PLUS
and Micro/RSX I/O Operations Reference Manual.)

ddnn:

Specifies the device on which the error occurred.

Shadow Pair: ddnn: ddxx:

Specifies the devices containing the primary (ddnn:) and
secondary (ddxx:) disks of the shadowed pair.

Task: xxxxx

Specifies the name of the task that was executing at the
time the error occurred.

Shadow Recording (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only) 16-11

Logical Block: nnn.

Specifies the LBN (in decimal) on which the error
occurred.

Bytes in xfer: nnn.

Specifies the number of bytes of data (in decimal) being
transferred when the error occurred.

File ID
File Name

Specifies the file identification and file name. These are
printed only when they can be determined at the time of
the error.

nn. errors lost

Specifies, in decimal, the number (nn) of errors lost.
When an error occurs on a shadowed disk, the Executive
stores information about the error in pool and notifies
the shadow error reporting task. Then, the task reads the
information and prints the above message on the console
terminal.
If the Executive stores more than 15 errors before the
error reporting task can process them, pool is depleted.
To prevent this from occurring, the Executive allows only
as many errors as it can process to be queued in pool
at one time. If the number of errors exceeds 15, the
Executive records the errors without processing them.
The message linn. errors lost" tells you how many errors
were ignored.

The term saturation refers to pool being filled with error messages.
This message is only printed when errors have not been processed.

User Action: See Section 16.4.
SHA-Abort error

Explanation: This message occurs if the Shadow Recording ABORT command cannot abort
Shadow Recording during catchup.
User Action: Wait until catchup terminates and then issue the STOP command.
SHA-Bad indirect file specification

Explanation: The indirect command file name is incorrect.
User Action: Reenter the indirect command file specification correctly.
SHA-Bad volume type

Explanation: The disk is not in Files-II format or the primary and secondary disks are
different disk types.

User Action: Check the command line or disks that you are trying to use.
SHA-Catch-up completed

Explanation: The primary disk has been copied completely to the secondary disk.
User Action: No user action is required. This is an informational message.

16-12 Shadow Recording (RSX-11M-PLUS Systems Only)

SHA-Catch-up in progress

Explanation: You tried to issue a STOP command during the catchup process.
User Action: If catchup is still in progress, enter the ABORT command.
SHA-IjO error on logical block nnn.

Explanation: An I/O error occurred during catchup.
User Action: None, unless the I/O errors are frequent. If the I/O errors are frequent, enter
the ABORT command, change disks, and restart Shadow Recording.
SHA-lIIegal command

Explanation: The command that you entered is not a valid command.
User Action: Reenter the command with the correct spelling and syntax.
SHA-Input error on input command file
FILE=

Explanation: An error occurred while the indirect command file was being read.
User Action: Use a different indirect command file or use a copy of the specified command
file.
SHA-lIIegal parse data (internal error)

Explanation: This is an internal system error. You entered the command correctly.
User Action: Reenter the command. If the error persists, submit a Software Performance
Report (SPR).
SHA-Invalid device

Explanation: The device is not a disk device.
User Action: Check the device specification and the device.
SHA-Maximum indirect command file depth exceeded

Explanation: The indirect command file was nested to too many levels. Only three levels
are allowed.

User Action: Check the indirect command file.
SHA-No room available for UMB

Explanation: Not enough pool space exists to allocate space for the UMB control block for
Shadow Recording.
User Action: Check your system.

The system may be running out of pool space (see

Chapter 8).

Shadow Recording (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 16-13

SHA-Not a shadowed pair

Explanation: When STOP or ABORT was issued, the wrong device was specified.
User Action: Reenter the command with the correct device unit.
SHA-Open error on input command file
FILE=

Explanation: The input command file could not be found.
User Action: Check the command file and its location.
SHA-Privileged command

Explanation: You are not using a privileged account or terminal.
User Action: Log in on a privileged account or terminal.
SHA-Send/Receive error

Explanation: An Executive directive Receive Data (RCVD$) error occurred in Shadow
Recording during catchup. This is a system error.
User Action: No user .action is required. However, if the error persists, submit an SPR to
DIGITAL.
SHA-Shadow Recording not in system

Explanation: Shadow Recording is not part of your system.
User Action: If you have an RSX-IIM-PLUS operating system, select support for Shadow
Recording during system generation. MicrojRSX systems do not support Shadow Recording.
SHA-Start-up error

Explanation: Shadow Recording cannot spawn the catchup task, so Shadow Recording has
been forced to exit.
User Action: Restart Shadow Recording with the START command.
SHA-Syntax error

Explanation: You entered a command with incorrect syntax.
User Action: Reenter the command with the correct syntax.
SHA-System error

Explanation: A system error occurred.
User Action: If possible, determine the effects of the error. If this error recurs, submit an
SPR to DIGITAL.
SHA-Unknown command error

Explanation: Shadow Recording received a command line that it could not recognize.
User Action: Check the command that you entered or the indirect command file.

16-14 Shadow Recording (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only)

SHA-Volume currently part of shadowed pair

Explanation: The specified device is already being shadow recorded.
User Action: Check the devices being shadowed with the DISPLAY command.
SHA-Volume not mounted properly

Explanation: The primary disk is not mounted Files-II, or the secondary disk is not mounted
foreign.

User Action: Check the disks and mount them correctly.

Shadow Recording (RSX-llM-PLUS Systems Only) 16-15

Chapter 17
Command Line Interpreters
This chapter introduces the concepts of command line interpreters (CLls) for RSX-IIM-PLUS
and Micro/RSX operating systems. A brief description of two CLls supplied with your operating
system illustrates these concepts. Although these CLls process command lines differently, the
basic goal of each is the same: to provide a specific environment for the terminal user. You can
use this information to write a CLI that is specific to your application.
A sample CLI (written in MACRO-II and FORTRAN) is included in this chapter. The sample
illustrates the CLI interface and clarifies the basic operations of a CLI. It is also supplied in the
following files:
•

TMCLI.MAC (the MACRO-II version)

•

TMCLI.FTN (the FORTRAN version)

On RSX-IIM-PLUS distribution kits, these files are located on pseudo device LB: in the named
directory [USER]. On Micro/RSX distribution kits, these files are located on the diskette or the
tape backup set labeled REFERENCE in the [USER] directory.

17. 1 Introduction to Command Line Interpreters
A command line interpreter (CLI) is a task that services commands for the operating system or
an application. These commands are not prompted for by any task nor are they given to a task
by a read operation on a terminal. No read Queue I/O (QIO) or asynchronous system trap
(AST) processing of characters is involved. By default, the input from the terminal goes to the
CLI for processing.
A CLI task is a complete user interface. All lines typed on a terminal are processed by the
CLI (except those used to satisfy a read request from a task). You cannot bypass a CLI to
send commands to the system or application. Thus, the CLI serves as a connection between an
application command processor and any number of terminals.
Every terminal on an RSX system is set to a CLI; the CLI controls the use of the terminal. The
following sections describe MCR and DCL, the two CLls that are supplied with your operating
system.

Command Line Interpreters 17-1

17. 1. 1 The Monitor Console Routine
The Monitor Console Routine (MCR) receives commands from the terminal and executes them
to control the system. It consists of a set of privileged tasks that call Executive routines and
interact with the system's database. Due to MCR's function in system control, it is tied closely
with the Executive.
While MCR is a CLI, it is a special CLI. MCR does not use the CLI interface directives because
it must work on systems that do not support these directives. Most other CLls interact with
an application running on the system, instead of interacting with the system itself. Therefore,
MCR is not a model for other RSX-IIM-PLUS or MicrojRSX CLls.

17.1.2 DIGITAL Command Language
The DIGITAL Command Language (DCL) interpreter is a CLI that does not execute any
commands. DCL provides a connection to the operating system by translating the commands it
receives (in DCL syntax) to the equivalent MCR commands. Then, DCL passes the translated
command line to the appropriate MCR task or utility for execution. This operation is invisible
to you; you do not need to know about MCR or the utilities.
DCL is oriented toward operations, such as COpy or LINK, rather than toward tasks, such as
the Peripheral Interchange Program (PIP) and the Task Builder (TKB). DCL presents a different
external interface, one that is easier to learn and use than MCR.

17.2 Installing and Initializing a

eLi

Before a CLI can process commands, the CLI must be made "known" to the system. That is,
you must create an internal data structure that allows the system to recognize the existence of
the CLI. This is done by installing the CLI task with the DCL or MCR command INSTALL.
Formats
DCL>
MCR>.

Parameter
filespec
Specifies the name of the task image file containing the CLI you want to install.

Qualifier (Keyword)
/INTERPRETER (/CLI=YES)

Specifies that the task being installed is a CLI.
After you install the CLI, initialize it with the MCR command CLI jlNIT, as follows:
>

The CLI command also supports other keywords and subkeywords. By specifying the appropriate
keywords, you can make a CLI known to the system, you can eliminate it from the system,
and you can enable or disable its recognition of commands. For example, if you specify the
CLI jlNIT command with the jMESSAGE sub keyword, the CLI receives messages from the
system informing it of relevant events.

17-2 Command Line Interpreters

For more information on the MCR commands INSTALL and CLI, see the RSX-llM-PLUS MCR
Operations Manual. For a description of the DCL command INSTALL, see the RSX-11M-PLUS

Command Language Manual.

17.2.1 Specifying Task Names for CLis
You can install CLIs with task names in the form ... xxx (a prototype task name) or with names
in some other valid format, such as xxxxxx (a conventional task name).

If the CLI has a prototype task name, the system creates a separate copy of the CLI each time
a command is entered on a terminal set to that CLI. The task is named xxxttnn, where ttnn is
the device specification of the terminal from which the command was issued. The task follows
the same rules as any other task installed in the system with a prototype task name. Each copy
of the CLI runs with the same TI: and Vser Identification Code (VIC) as that of the issuing
terminal (TI:). These tasks exit when they finish processing a request.
If the CLI has a conventional task name, all commands associated with the CLI are queued to a
single copy of the task. Instead of running a task from each terminal, this task uses the console
output device (CO:) as the TI:. CLIs with conventional task names specify the TI: and VIC
fields in any RPOI$ or SPWN$ directives that they issue. If the task names do not specify these
fields, the default values for TI: and VIC are incorrect.
CLls with conventional task names have only one copy in the system. So, when there are no
commands queued to the CLI, it stops (instead of exiting). The CLI maintains information from
one command to the next.
DCL installs with a prototype task name (... DCL) because most DCL commands issue prompts
for input. While DCL waits for a user to respond, it cannot do any command processing. If
only one copy of DCL existed, command processing for all DCL terminals would stop while
a prompt request to anyone terminal was outstanding. Giving each terminal its own copy
of DCL allows independent command processing for each terminal. Individual copies of the
task exit when no commands are left for them; there is no need to maintain context between
commands.

17.2.2 Prompts that Affect CLis
There are three kinds of prompts issued by the system that affect CLls. They are as follows:
CTRL/C prompts

Issued by the terminal driver when it receives a CTRLjC character. When you initialize the
CLI, you can specify the string to be issued. However, because the terminal driver issues
the prompt, the CLI cannot be notified when it is issued.
Empty-Line prompts

Result from terminal input consisting solely of a carriage-return character (a null command
line). The MCR dispatcher task issues the default prompt; you can specify the default
prompt when you initialize the CLI.
If you initialize the CLI with the jNVLL qualifier, the system sends null command lines to
the CLI as if they were commands. The CLI is responsible for any prompting or appropriate

response.

Command Line Interpreters

17-3

Task-Exit prompts

Issued when a task that was started by a command line exits. The standard system action
is to have the MCR dispatcher task issue the same default prompt string as in the case of
an empty line.
To inform the CLI of these events, initialize the CLI with the jPROMPT qualifier. The
jPROMPT qualifier causes the system to send these task-exit prompt requests directly to
the CLI; no output is sent to the terminal. The CLI is responsible for any prompting or
appropriate response.
A CLI initialized to receive either empty-line or task-exit prompts. has to issue an SNXC$
directive when its processing of the prompt is complete. SNXC$ tells the terminal driver that
the current command is complete, and it can send the next command if the terminal is in serial
processing mode. Even if the terminal is not in serial mode, this directive can be issued without
any adverse effects (see Section 17.3.4 for more information).

17.2.3 Handling Continuation Lines
Continuation lines are handled by the terminal driver before the command is passed to the CLI.
Incomplete segments of command lines are detected by the presence of a hyphen (-) as the
character immediately preceding the terminator. Any hyphens are removed and all the pieces
of the command are put together before the CLI is aware of the command. The CLI does not
process the continuation lines.
If you do not want to use hyphens to denote continuation lines, initialize the CLI with the
jSNGL keyword. jSNGL tells the system to accept single-line commands only and to pass
every line to the CLI as it is entered. No continuation line checks are made.

17.3 Writing an Application ell
You do not need to be an expert on the internal operation of the operating system to design
a CLI. However, an alternate CLI is expected to synchronize with the operating system in
command handling and prompting. This interaction is achieved through a set of Executive
directives for CLls, which are described in the following subsection.

17.3.1 Using Executive Directives for CLis
The most important Executive directive used by a CLI is Get Command for Command Interpreter
(GCCI$). Any CLI you write must include this directive. GCCI$ supplies a command to the CLI
from a queue maintained by the system. It also controls the internal status bits necessary for
correct synchronization of prompting and general command handling in a manner transparent
to the CLI task.
The following Executive directives may also be used by a CLI:
•

The Request and Pass Offspring Information (RPOI$) and Send, Request, and Pass (SDRP$)
directives direct commands to another task so that the CLI is free to receive more commands.

•

When a command arrives for processing by the CLI, the Specify Command Arrival AST
(SCAA$) directive specifies an asynchronous system trap (AST) in the CLI.

•

The Get Command Interpreter Information (GCII$) directive returns information about a
terminal or CLI to the task.

17-4 Command Line Interpreters

See the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX Executive Reference Manual for a complete description
of these directives.

17.3.2 Interacting with the Operating System
A CLI's operation starts when you enter a command into the system. To receive a command,
the CLI must be associated with the terminal from which the command originated. You can
type a command line on a terminal or execute a task that issues a command.
First, the command is processed by the system command dispatcher (the MCR ... task). This
task puts the command into a first-in/first-out (FIFO) queue of commands to be retrieved by
the CLI. Then, the CLI runs (or restarts, if it is already active). The CLI gets the command from
the system by issuing the GCCI$ directive. GCCI$ removes a command from the queue and
copies it into a buffer in the CLI task space. It can also supply information to the CLI about
the terminal.
When the CLI receives a command, it executes the command or passes the command to another
task for execution. If you want the CLI to pass the command to another (non-CLI) task, use
the RPOI$ or SDRP$ directives. These directives propagate the information the system needs
for controlling, prompting, and getting exit status back to a parent task (if any). This is the
recommended procedure for handling commands because it avoids the wait for the preceding
command to complete execution. DCL works in this way, translating a command into a different
format and dispatching it to another task for execution.
Note
CLls that process commands themselves need to control delays in execution. If
you write a CLI that performs I/O to a terminal, a user could suspend command
handling by not responding to a prompt or by pressing CTRL/S.

After a CLI processes a command, it reissues the GCCI$ directive to get another command
from the queue. If the queue is empty, the CLI can stop or exit by issuing the GCCI$ directive
with an appropriate null operation (NOP) specified. This prevents a command, queued between
the return from the GCCI$ and the issuance of an EXIT or STOP directive, from failing to be
processed until the next command is queued.

17.3.3 Receiving System Messages
The GCCI$ directive returns system messages to the CLI. the same way it returns commands.
However, the CLI differentiates messages from commands by clearing the first word of the
command buffer (G.CCDV). If the CLI receives a command, it records the name of the device
from which the command originated in G.CCDV. ·The code that identifies the message is
returned in the unit number byte G.CCUN.
The other fields have the same meaning for messages as they do for commands. If the message
does not contain any American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) text, the
text field of the buffer is blank.
Note
The CLI command includes both a/MESSAGE sub keyword to the /INIT
keyword and a /MESSAGE keyword. The /MESSAGE subkeyword specifies
that the CLI being initialized can receive messages. The /MESSAGE keyword
sends an ASCII message to a CLI that has been initialized with the /MESSAGE
subkeyword.

Command Line Interpreters 17-5

Message codes 1 to 12710 are reserved for use by DIGITAL. To create your own messages to
CLls, use codes in the range of 128 10 to 255 10 . The symbol shown for each message code is
defined in the Executive definition library LB:[l,l]EXELIB.OLB. Tasks obtain the messages at
build time by linking with the library.
The predefined message codes are as follows:

eLi

Initialized into an Enabled Mode

Message Code: 1 (CM.lNE)
Text: Displays the CLI name in Radix-50. The length of the text is 4 bytes.
Explanation: This message is sent to a CLI when it is initialized by a CLI IINIT command
without the IDISABLE subkeyword. The CLI is enabled.

eLi

Initialized into a Disabled Mode

Message Code: 2 (CM.lND)
Text: Displays the CLI name in Radix-50. The length of the text is 4 bytes.
Explanation: This message is sent to a CLI when it is initialized with the jDISABLE
subkeyword to the CLI jlNIT command. The jDISABLE subkeyword initializes the CLI in
disabled mode. The system rejects any commands issued from the terminal until the CLI is
enabled.

eLi

Enabled

Message Code: 3 (CM.CEN)
Text: No text accompanies this message.
Explanation: This message is sent to a previously disabled CLI when it is enabled by a
CLI jENABLE command. The CLI can now accept commands.

eLi

Disabled

Message code: 4 (CM.CDS)
Text: No text accompanies this message.
Explanation: This message is sent to the CLI when it is disabled by a CLI IDISABLE
command. The CLI cannot accept commands. This effectively stops system use by terminals
set to this CLI until the CLI is enabled again.

eLi

Eliminated

Message Code: 5 (CM.ELM)
Text: No text accompanies this message.
Explanation: This message is sent to a CLI when it has been eliminated by an explicit
CLI IELIMINATE command. After this command executes, you can remove the CLI task.

17~6

Command Line Interpreters

All ells Eliminated, and must Exit

Message Code: 6 (CM.EXT)
Text: No text accompanies this message.
Explanation: When a CLI /ELIM=* command is issued, this message is sent to all CLls
on the system that were initialized with the /MESSAGE subkeyword to the CLI /INIT
command. A CLI that receives this message should exit as soon as possible, because a
system shutdown or other emergency procedure may be taking place.
Terminal Linked to eLi

Message Code: 7 (CM.LKT)
Text: Displays the ASCII name and unit number (in octal) for the terminal. The length of
the text requires 4 bytes (2 bytes for the name and 2 bytes for the number).
Explanation: This message is sent to a CLI when a terminal becomes associated with it. This
message could result from a SET command processed by MCR, or any other use of the
SCLI$ directive.
Terminal Removed from eLi

Message Code: 8. (CM.RMT)
Text: ASCII name and unit number (in octal) for the terminal. The length of the text
requires 4 bytes (2 bytes for the name and 2 bytes for the number).
Explanation: This message is sent to a terminal's former CLI when it is switched to another
CLI.
General Message

Message Code: 9. (CM.MSG)
Text: Name (ASCII) and unit number (in octal) of the terminal from which the
CLI /MESSAGE command originated, followed by the text from the command string.
The length is equal to the length of the string (possibly zero) plus the length of the terminal
name and unit number (2 bytes each).
Explanation: This message is the result of a CLI /MESSAGE command. It contains the text
the issuer of the command included in the string, plus the name and unit number of the
terminal on which the command was typed.

Command Line Interpreters

17-7

17.3.4 Interacting with Serial Command Processing
Serial command processing is a mode in which commands from a terminal are executed in
sequential order; each command is executed after the preceding command is finished. The
default for command line processing on RSX-IIM-PLUS and MicrojRSX operating systems is
parallel processing; however, you may want to write a CLI that synchronizes commands. For
example, if you want to be able to enter several commands from the same terminal, without
waiting for each command to complete before entering another one, the CLI must save your
input in a temporary buffer while the command that is currently executing completes. In other
words, the CLI must synchronize the command processing.
To achieve command synchronization, use the terminal driver to store characters in a type-ahead
buffer. Then, if you enter a command while another command is still outstanding, the terminal
driver can store the characters temporarily. After processing of the current command completes,
the CLI must issue a call to the terminal driver, requesting the characters stored in the buffer.
The driver sends the characters to the CLI, which then processes them as the next command.
Command completion is signalled to the system when the final task involved in processing
a command exits. If a task exits at the completion of command execution and the CLI does
not issue a prompt request, (for example, if the command was terminated by an ESCAPE
character), the task-exit code in the Executive calls the terminal driver directly. However, if the
CLI generates a task-exit prompt, it must also call the terminal driver at the completion of the
prompt request processing.
Note
The exiting task may be either the CLI or a task chained to by a RPOI$ or
SDRP$ directive.
If the CLI is not receiving prompt requests, the terminal driver call is done automatically by
the system, and the CLI is not involved. However, if you initialize the CLI to receive prompt
requests, the system passes the prompt request on to the CLI as if it were a command. It is
the CLI's responsibility to write a prompt string "to the terminal and to call the terminal driver
to initiate the next command. To call the terminal driver, the CLI issues an SNXC$ directive
when it finishes processing the prompt request.
If a task does not exit (that is, if the task does not terminate the command execution), the
system cannot detect command completion. So, to mark the end of the command and to cause
the next command to be initiated, you must use the SNXC$ directive. Issuing this directive
causes a task-exit prompt request to be generated if the task-exit would have generated one. If
no prompt request is generated, SNXC$ calls the terminal driver to send the next command to
the system for processing. This directive can be issued by the CLI or by the final task chained
to it by an RPOI$ or SDRP$ directive.

When you use the SNXC$ directive, you do not need to verify whether or not a terminal
is actually in serial mode. If the terminal is not in serial mode, the terminal driver sends
commands to the system as they are entered; the directive does not cause the terminal driver
to be called because it is not necessary. The terminal driver still generates a task-exit prompt
request if one would have been generated when the task exited.
The SNXC$ directive clears the status bits that tell the system to generate a prompt request or
to call the terminal driver at task exit. Therefore, a task exiting after issuing an SNXC$ directive
does not cause two prompt requests to be issued.

17-8 Command Line Interpreters

See the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX Executive Reference Manual for more information on the
SNXC$ directive.

17.4 Sample

eLi

This section illustrates a sample CLI, which is written in both MACRO-II and FORTRAN. This
sample CLI appears in a simplified form. It is meant to be a learning tool for writing a CLI. The
same MACRO-II and FORTRAN programs used here are included on your distribution kit in
the files TMCLI.MAC and TMCLI.FTN, respectively. On RSX-IIM-PLUS distribution kits, these
files are located on pseudo device LB: in the named directory [USER]. On Micro/RSX distribution
kits, these files are located on the diskette or the tape backup set labeled REFERENCE in the
[USER] directory.
The primary function of the TMCLI sample CLI is to receive commands and pass them to
MCR for execution. In addition, TMCLI features two single-letter commands: T to type a file
and M to switch back to MCR mode. The comments in each sample listing suggest several
modifications that you can make when designing or setting up a CLI.

17.4.1 MACRO-11 CLI
The following example is a sample CLI written in MACRO-II. It is also supplied with your
distribution kit in the file LB:[USER]TMCLI.MAC .
. TITLE TMCLI - EXAMPLE CLI THAT IMPLEMENTS "T" AND "M" COMMAND
.IDENT /1. 00/
THIS TASK (TMCLI) ILLUSTRATES THE USE OF THE CLI CONTROL DIRECTIVES OF
RSX-llM-PLUS V4.0.
WHEN SET UP AS A TERMINAL'S CLI, IT PROVIDES THE FOLLOWING COMMANDS:
T
M

->
->

TYPE FILE
SET TERMINAL TO MCR

IF THE FIRST TWO LETTERS OF THE COMMAND ARE NOT "T" FOLLOWED
BY A SPACE, OR "M" FOLLOWED BY A CARRIAGE RETURN,
THE COMMAND IS PASSED TO MCR FOR EXECUTION. THEREFORE,
USERS AT TERMINALS SET TO THIS CLI WILL SEE THE ENTIRE MCR COMMAND SET
AS BEING PRESENT, PLUS THE "T" AND "M" COMMANDS. IF THE /DPR SUBKEYWORD
IS INCLUDED ON THE CLI /INIT COMMAND, USERS WILL KNOW IMMEDIATELY IF
THEIR TERMINAL IS SET TO THIS CLI BY THE DOUBLE RIGHT ANGLE BRACKET PROMPT.
IF TMCLI IS INITIALIZED WITH THE /MESSAGE KEYWORD, TMCLI WILL
GREET USERS WHEN THEIR TERMINAL IS SET TO THE CLI, AND SAY GOODBYE
TO THEM WHEN THEY SWITCH AWAY.
IN ORDER TO BRING THIS CLI UP ON THE SYSTEM, ISSUE THE FOLLOWING
COMMAND SEQUENCE:
,

;>MAC
;>TKB
;>INS
;>CLI

TMCLI,TMCLI/-SP=TMCLI
TMCLI,TMCLI/-SP=TMCLI,[l,l]EXELIB/LB
TMCLI/CLI=YES/TASK= ... TMC
/INIT=TMCLI/MESSAGE/DPR=I<15><12>/»/"/TASK= ... TMC
TO SET TERMINALS TO THIS CLI, ISSUE THE FOLLOWING COMMAND
WHERE TTNN: IS REPLACED BY THE TERMINAL NUMBER OR TI:

Command Line Interpreters 17-9

.;>SET /CLI=TTNN:TMCLI
NOTE THAT THE PROMPT ISSUED IN RESPONSE TO A CONTROL/C DEFAULTS TO THE
NAME OF THE CLI. WHICH IS "TMCLI>".
TMCLI CAN BE ELIMINATED FROM THE SYSTEM BY THE FOLLOWING COMMANDS. ASSUMING
NO TERMINALS ARE SET TO IT:

.;>CLI /ELIM=TMCLI
;>REM ... TMC

EXPERIMENT WITH THE OTHER SUBKEYWORDS OF THE CLI /INIT COMMAND. THE CLI
/ENABLE AND CLI /DISABLE COMMANDS. AND WITH THE /MESSAGE SWITCH ON THE /INIT
COMMAND TO OBSERVE THE EFFECTS. ALSO TRY CHANGING THE /TASK=
SWITCH ON THE INS AND CLI /INIT COMMAND TO "/TASK=TMCLI" AND NOTICE
THAT ONLY ONE COPY OF THE TASK WILL EXIST FOR ALL TERMINALS. RATHER THAN
ONE PER COMMAND. IF YOU DO THIS. YOU SHOULD ALSO CHANGE THE OPTION
ON THE GCCI$ DIRECTIVE FROM GC.CEX TO GC.CST SO THE TASK WILL STAY ACTIVE
BUT STOPPED WHEN NO COMMANDS ARE OUTSTANDING FOR IT .
. MCALL GCCI$.RPOI$.EXIT$S.QIOW$.ALUN$.DIR$
DIRECTIVE DPBS
GCCI:
RPOI:
QIOW:
ALUN:

GCCI$
RPOI$
QIOW$
ALUN$

CMDBUF.CBLEN.IBUF.IBLEN.O.GC.CEX
MCR ...
IO.WVB.5.1 .... <.. 40>
5

BUFFER AREAS
CMDBUF: .BLKB

80.+G.CCBF

;LENGTH = HEADER PLUS COMMAND IN BYTES
;NOTE THAT ON M-PLUS THE MAXIMUM COMMAND
;LENGTH IS 255. BYTES. SO THE LENGTH SHOULD
;BE <255.+G.CCBF>OR CHARACTERS MAY BE LOST.
;CALCULATE LENGTH

CBLEN=.-CMDBUF
. EVEN
IBUF:
.BLKB
IBLEN=.-IBUF
. EVEN

G.CCCA+2

;LONG ENOUGH TO CONTAIN ALL INFORMATION
;CALCULATE LENGTH

TCMD:
.ASCII
TCLEN=.-TCMD
BUF:
.BLKB
. EVEN

/PIP TI:=/

;BASIC PIP COMMAND TO IMPLEMENT "T" COMMAND
;LENGTH OF COMMAND
;BUFFER TO GENERATE COMMANDS IN

80.-TCLEN

MCR:
.ASCII /M/<15> ;STRING TO RECOGNIZE AS A SET TO MCR REQUEST
MCMD:
.ASCII %SET /MCR=TI:%
;SET TERMINAL TO MCR COMMAND
MCLEN=.-MCMD
;LENGTH OF COMMAND
. EVEN

17-10 Command Line Interpreters

TEXT TO BE DISPLAYED UPON RECEIPT OF NEW TERMINAL-LINKED OR
TERMINAL-REMOVED MESSAGES FROM SYSTEM.
LKT:
.ASCII
LKTLEN=.-LKT
. EVEN

<15><12>/WELCOME TO THE EXAMPLE CLI/<15><12>

RMT:
.ASCII
RMTLEN= . -RMT
. EVEN

<15><12>/GOOD BYE FROM THE EXAMPLE CLI/<15><12>

MESSAGE FOR CHARACTERS LOST DUE TO BUFFER BEING TOO SMALL
CHLOST: .ASCII <15><12>/SORRY, PART OF YOUR COMMAND WAS LOST/<15><12>
CLLEN=.-CHLOST
ILLEGAL COMMAND MESSAGE
ILL:
.ASCII
ILLLEN=.-ILL
. EVEN

<15><12>/ILLEGAL COMMAND/<15><12>

CLI CODE

START:

.ENABL LSB
DIR$
#GCCI
BCS
100$

;GET A COMMAND FROM SYSTEM
;IF CS, DIRECTIVE ERROR

IF THE GCCI$ DIRECTIVE HAD THE GC.CST OPTION SPECIFIED, WE MAY HAVE
JUST BEEN UNSTOPPED, SO WE HAVE TO GET THE COMMAND.
CMP
BEQ
MOV
TST
BEQ
CMPB
BLO
MOV

#IS.CLR,$DSW
START
#CMDBUF,RO
(RO)
MSG
G.CCCT(RO),G.CCCL(RO)
150$
#RPOI,R5

;WERE WE JUST UNSTOPPED?
;IF EQ YES
;POINT TO COMMAND BUFFER
;IS THIS A SYSTEM MESSAGE?
;IF EQ YES
;DID ENTIRE COMMAND FIT IN BUFFER
;IF LO NO
;POINT TO DPB OF RPOI$ DIRECTIVE

AT THIS POINT, THE CLI HAS A COMMAND TO BE PROCESSED. THE CODE FROM
THE "START:" LABEL TO HERE SHOULD BE FAIRLY COMMON AMONG ALL CLIS.
FROM THIS POINT ON, THE CODE WILL BE SPECIFIC TO THE PARTICULAR LANGUAGE
THIS CLI IS IMPLEMENTING. COMMANDS CAN BE ADDED OR DELETED AT WILL
BY MODIFYING CODE IN THIS SECTION. AS STATED ABOVE, THIS EXTREMELY
SIMPLE CLI PROVIDES TWO COMMANDS, AND GIVES EVERYTHING ELSE TO MCR.
THIS CREATES AN OPEN-ENDED ENVIRONMENT. REJECTING UNRECOGNIZED COMMANDS
INSTEAD OF PASSING THEM TO MCR WOULD LIMIT THE TERMINAL USER'S USE OF
THE SYSTEM TO ONLY THOSE OPERATIONS ALLOWED BY THE CLI. THIS IS
A SECURE WAY OF CONTROLLING SYSTEM USE, IN CASES WHEN IT IS NECESSARY.
IN THIS EXAMPLE, CHANGING THE "BNE 50$" BELOW, TO A "BNE 60$"
WOULD CREATE AN ENVIRONMENT WHERE THE ONLY OPERATION A USER COULD
PERFORM WOULD BE TO TYPE FILES ON THE TERMINAL, OR SWITCH BACK TO MCR.

Command Line Interpreters

17-11

ALL OF THE REST OF THE SYSTEM IS INACCESSIBLE. IF NO MEANS OF SWITCHING
BACK TO MCR IS PROVIDED. IT IS IMPOSSIBLE FOR THE USER TO DO
ANYTHING THE CLI DOES NOT EXPLICITLY LET HIM DO.
CMP
BEQ
CMP

#"T .G.CCBF(RO)
10$
MCR.G.CCBF(RO)

;IS IT A "T" COMMAND?
;IF EQ YES
;IS IT AN "M" COMMAND?

CHANGE THE NEXT INSTRUCTION TO "BNE 60$" TO ELIMINATE PASSING UNKNOWN
COMMANDS TO MCR.
BNE

50$

;IF NE NO

THE USER HAS ENTERED AN "M" COMMAND. SO SET THE TERMINAL TO MCR.
MOV
MOV
BR

#MCMD.R.POBF(R5)
#MCLEN.R.POBL(R5)
ISSCMD

;PUT ADDRESS OF CMD TO ISSUE IN DPB
;PUT LENGTH OF CMD IN DPB
;ISSUE COMMAND

THE USER HAS ENTERED A "T" COMMAND SO CONSTRUCT THE NECESSARY PIP
COMMAND AND SEND IT TO MCR.
10$:

20$:

30$:

MOV
ADD
MOV
MOV
MOVB
CMPB
BEQ
CMPB
BEQ
MOVB
INC
BR
MOV
MOV

RO.Rl
#G.CCBF+l.Rl
#BUF.R2
#TCLEN.R4
(Rl)+.R3
#15.R3
30$
#40.R3
20$
R3, (R2) +
R4
20$
#TCMD,R.POBF(R5)
R4,R.POBL(R5)

17-12 Command Line Interpreters

;COPY ADDRESS OF BUFFER WITH COMMAND
;POINT TO SPACE AFTER THE T
;POINT TO BUFFER THAT WILL CONTAIN CMD
;GET LENGTH OF INITIAL PART OF COMMAND
;GET NEXT CHARACTER
;IS IT THE END OF THE COMMAND
;IF EQ YES
;IS IT A SPACE
;IF EQ YES, SKIP IT
;PUT CHARACTER IN OUTPUT BUFFER
;COUNT CHARACTER
;GET NEXT CHARACTER
;PUT ADDRESS OF CMD TO ISSUE IN DPB
;INSERT LENGTH OF COMMAND

THIS COMMAND WILL BE PASSED TO THE MAIN COMMAND DISPATCHER (MCR ... ).
WHICH WILL START A COPY OF PIP AND GIVE IT THE COMMAND. THE RPOI
DIRECTIVE COULD BE USED TO GIVE THE COMMAND DIRECTLY TO ... PIP AND
GIVE THE RESULTING TASK A DIFFERENT NAME. IN THIS EXAMPLE.
WE COULD CALL THE RESULTING PIP TASK "TYPTNN" WHERE THE LAST
THREE CHARACTERS (TNN) ARE REPLACED BY A DEVICE NAME CHARACTER AND
UNIT NUMBER. FOR EXAMPLE. IF THE "T" COMMAND WAS TYPED ON TT10:
THE RESULTING TASK NAME COULD BE MADE TO BE ITYPT10". THIS HAS THE
ADVANTAGE OF ALLOWING THE TASK TO BE ABORTED BY AN "ABO TYP" COMMAND.
INSTEAD OF "ABO PIP". THUS THE USER WOULD NOT HAVE TO KNOW THAT THE
"T" COMMAND HE ISSUED IS ACTUALLY BEING SERVICED BY THE PIP TASK. THIS
IS EXACTLY WHAT THE DCL CLI DOES. IT IS NOT DONE HERE
TO SIMPLIFY THE EXAMPLE. PICKING UP THE TERMINAL NAME AND UNIT
NUMBER. CONVERTING IT TO RAD50. AND SUPPLYING IT IN THE RPOI DIRECTIVE
ALONG WITH A DIRECT REQUEST OF PIP IS LEFT AS AN EXERCISE TO THE USER.
(BE CAREFUL ON RSX-11M-PLUS SYSTEMS WITH MORE THAN 64. TERMINALS).
NOTE THAT REQUESTING PIP DIRECTLY AVOIDS A SUBSTANTIAL AMOUNT OF SYSTEM
OVERHEAD.
BR

ISSCMD

;EXECUTE COMMAND

COMMAND IS NOT "T" OR "M". SO GIVE IT TO MCR AS IS .

.
50$:

MOV
MOVB

#CMDBUF+G.CCBF.R.POBF(R5)
G.CCCT(RO).R.POBL(R5)

;PUT ADDRESS OF STRING IN DPB
;PUT LENGTH IN RPO! DPB

ISSUE RPOI$ DIRECTIVE TO EXECUTE COMMAND
ISSCMD: MOV
MOVB
MOVB
MOVB
MOV
DIR$
BCC
BR

(RO).R.PODV(R5)
G.CCUN(RO).R.POUN(R5)
IBUF+G.CCPU.R.POUM(R5)
IBUF+G.CCPU+1.R.POUG(R5)
IBUF+G.CCOA.R.POOA(R5)
#RPOI
START
110$

;PUT NAME OF ISSUING DEVICE IN RPOI
;COPY UNIT NUMBER
;PROPAGATE UIC OF TERMINAL
;COPY ID PARENT IN CASE WE WERE SPAWNED
;PASS COMMAND TO EXECUTOR TASK
;IF CC. SUCCESS
; ERROR

CONTROL IS TRANSFERRED HERE IF UNKNOWN COMMANDS ARE TO BE REJECTED
INSTEAD OF BEING PASSED TO MCR .

60$:

MOV
MOV
CALL
BR

#ILL.R1
#ILLLEN.R2
ISSMSG
START

;POINT TO MESSAGE TO BE PRINTED
;GET LENGTH OF MESSAGE
;ISSUE MESSAGE
;TRY FOR NEXT COMMAND

ERROR HANDLING CODE
100$:
110$:
120$:

CLR
BR
MOV
lOT

RO
150$
#1.RO

;FATAL ERROR ON GCCI$
;FATAL ERROR ON RPOI$
; FATAL

Command Line Interpreters

17-13

150$:

MOV
MOV
CALL
BR
.DSABL

#CHLOST,Rl
#CLLEN,R2
ISSMSG
START
LSB

;POINT TO MESSAGE TO BE PRINTED
;GET LENGTH OF MESSAGE
;ISSUE MESSAGE

A SYSTEM MESSAGE WAS RECEIVED INSTEAD OF A COMMAND.
MSG:

CMPB
BEQ
CMPB
BEQ
CMPB
BEQ
CMPB
BEQ
BR

#CM.LKT,G.CCUN(RO)
10$
#CM.RMT,G.CCUN(RO)
20$
#CM.EXT,G.CCUN(RO)
50$
#CM.ELM,G.CCUN(RO)
50$
START

;IS IT A NEW TERMINAL LINKED TO US?
;IF EQ YES
;IS IT A TERMINAL BEING REMOVED
;IF EQ YES
;IS IT AN ELIMINATE ALL PACKET
;IF EQ YES
;IS IT A CLI ELIMINATION MESSAGE
;IF EQ YES
;IGNORE ALL OTHER MESSAGES

ISSUE WELCOME MESSAGE
10$:

MOV
MOV
ADD
BR

#LKT,Rl
#LKTLEN,R2
#G.CCBF,RO
30$

;POINT TO MESSAGE TEXT
;GET LENGTH
;POINT TO TERMINAL THAT WAS SET

ISSUE GOODBYE MESSAGE
20$:
30$:

MOV
MOV
ADD
CALL
JMP

#RMT,Rl
#RMTLEN,R2
#G.CCBF,RO
ISSMSG
START

;POINT TO MESSAGE TEXT
;GET LENGTH
;POINT TO TERMINAL NAME
;ISSUE MESSAGE
;GET NEXT COMMAND

WHEN AN ELIMINATE ALL MESSAGE IS RECEIVED, EXIT IMMEDIATELY.
50$:

EXIT$S

17-14 Command Line Interpreters

ROUTINE TO PRINT TO TERMINAL
INPUTS:
RO=ADDRESS OF NAME OF TERMINAL TO PRINT TO
Rl=ADDRESS OF MESSAGE TO PRINT
R2=LENGTH OF MESSAGE
OUTPUTS:
NONE
THIS ROUTINE PRINTS THE SPECIFIED MESSAGE ON THE SPECIFIED TERMINAL.
ALL ERRORS THAT MIGHT RESULT ARE IGNORED. IN GENERAL. CLIS SHOULD
DO ASYNCHRONOUS I/O WITH COMPLETION ASTS. AND PROVIDE A TIME-OUT
FACILITY TO KILL THE I/O IF IT HASN'T COMPLETED IN A CERTAIN
AMOUNT OF TIME. THIS PREVENTS TERMINAL I/O FROM HOLDING UP
COMMAND PROCESSING. THIS IS NOT DONE HERE FOR SIMPLICITY.
ISSMSG: MOV
MOVB
CLRB
DIR$
BCS
MOV
MOV
DIR$
10$:
RETURN
. END

17.4.2 FORTRAN

(RO) .ALUN+A.LUNA
2(RO).ALUN+A.LUNU
ALUN+A.LUNU+l
#ALUN
10$
Rl. QIOW+Q . IOPL
R2.QIOW+Q.IOPL+2
#QIOW

;SET UP DEVICE NAME
;AND UNIT NUMBER
;CLEAR HIGH BYTE
;ASSIGN LUN 5 TO THE SPECIFIED DEVICE
;IF CS. SKIP I/O
;SET ADDRESS OF MESSAGE
;INSERT LENGTH OF MESSAGE
;DO I/O AND WAIT FOR IT

START

eLi

The following example is a sample CLI written in FORTRAN. It is also supplied with your
distribution kit in the file LB:[USER]TMCLI.FTN.

Command Line Interpreters

17-15

C THIS TASK (TMCLI) ILLUSTRATES THE USE OF THE CLI CONTROL DIRECTIVES OF
C RSX-iiM-PLUS V4.0.
C

C WHEN SET UP AS A TERMINAL'S CLI, IT PROVIDES THE FOLLOWING COMMANDS:
C

C
C

T
M

->
->

TYPE FILE
SET TERMINAL TO MCR

C IF THE FIRST TWO LETTERS OF THE COMMAND ARE NOT "T" FOLLOWED
C BY A SPACE, OR "M" FOLLOWED BY A CARRIAGE RETURN,
C THE COMMAND IS PASSED TO MCR FOR EXECUTION. THEREFORE,
C USERS AT TERMINALS SET TO THIS CLI WILL SEE THE ENTIRE MCR COMMAND SET
C AS BEING PRESENT, PLUS THE "T" AND "M" COMMANDS. IF THE /DPR SUB KEYWORD
C IS INCLUDED ON THE CLI /INIT COMMAND, USERS WILL KNOW IMMEDIATELY IF
C THEIR TERMINAL IS SET TO THIS CLI BY THE DOUBLE RIGHT ANGLE BRACKET PROMPT.
C

C IF TMCLI IS INITIALIZED WITH THE /MESSAGE KEYWORD, TMCLI WILL
C GREET USERS WHEN THEIR TERMINAL IS SET TO THE CLI, AND SAY GOODBYE
C TO THEM WHEN THEY SWITCH AWAY.
C

C IN ORDER TO BRING THIS CLI UP ON THE SYSTEM, ISSUE THE FOLLOWING
C COMMAND SEQUENCE:
C

C>FOR
C>TKB
C>INS
C>CLI

TMCLI,TMCLI/-SP=TMCLI
TMCLI/FP,TMCLI/-SP=TMCLI, [i,i]FOROTS/LB
TMCLI/CLI=YES/TASK= ... TMC
/INIT=TMCLI/MESSAGE/DPR="/»/"/TASK= ... TMC

C IF USING FORTRAN IV-PLUS INSTEAD OF FORTRAN IV, THE FIRST TWO
C COMMANDS ABOVE WOULD BE:
C

C>F4P TMCLI,TMCLI/-SP=TMCLI.FTN
C>TKB TMCLI/FP,TMCLI/-SP=TMCLI, [i,i]F4POTS/LB
C

C TO SET TERMINALS TO THIS CLI, ISSUE THE FOLLOWING COMMAND
C WHERE TTNN: IS REPLACED BY THE TERMINAL NUMBER OR TI:
C

C>SET /CLI=TTNN:TMCLI
C

C NOTE THAT THE PROMPT ISSUED IN RESPONSE TO A CONTROL/C DEFAULTS TO THE
C NAME OF THE CLI, WHICH IS "TMCLI>".
C

C TMCLI CAN BE ELIMINATED FROM THE SYSTEM BY THE FOLLOWING COMMANDS, ASSUMING
C NO TERMINALS ARE SET TO IT:
C

C>CLI /ELIM=TMCLI
C>REM ... TMC
C

C EXPERIMENT WITH THE OTHER SUBKEYWORDS OF THE CLI /INIT COMMAND, THE CLI
C /ENABLE AND CLI /DISABLE COMMANDS, AND WITH THE /MESSAGE SWITCH ON THE /INIT
C COMMAND TO OBSERVE THE EFFECTS. ALSO TRY CHANGING THE /TASK=
C SWITCH ON THE INS AND CLI /INIT COMMAND TO "/TASK=TMCLI" AND NOTICE
C THAT ONLY ONE COpy OF THE TASK WILL EXIST FOR ALL TERMINALS, RATHER THAN
C ONE PER COMMAND. IF YOU DO THIS, YOU SHOULD ALSO CHANGE THE OPTION
C ON THE GTCMCI DIRECTIVE FROM GC.CEX TO GC.CST SO THE TASK WILL STAY ACTIVE
C BUT STOPPED WHEN NO COMMANDS ARE OUTSTANDING FOR IT.
C

17-16 Command Line Interpreters

C BUFFER AREAS
C
C
C
C

COMMAND BUFFER - THIS BUFFER IS USED IN THE GTCMCI DIRECTIVE. IT CONTAINS INFORMATION ON THE COMMAND RECEIVED (8 BYTES)
AND THE COMMAND TEXT.
BYTE CMDBUF(264)
INTEGER*2 CBLEN
! NOTE THAT ON M+ THE MAXIMUM COMMAND
DATA CBLEN/263/
! LENGTH IS 255.
INTEGER*2 GCCDV, GCCCL ! ASCII DEV NAM, # CHARS IN CMD LINE
BYTE GCCCT, GCCUN, GCCBF(255) ! # OF CHARS, TERMINAL UNIT #, CMD
EQUIVALENCE (GCCDV,CMDBUF), (GCCCL,CMDBUF(5)), (GCCCT,CMDBUF(4)),
1
(GCCBF,CMDBUF(9)), (GCCUN,CMDBUF(3))

INFORMATION BUFFER - ALSO RETURNED IN THE GTCMCI DIRECTIVE.

BYTE IBUF(14)
INTEGER*2 GCCPU
DATA IBLEN/14/,GCCPU/9/ ! LENGTH OF IBUF, LOGIN UIC OFFSET
INTEGER*4 GCCOA
! ADDR OF OFFSPRING CONTROL BLOCK FROM PARENT
EQUIVALENCE (GCCOA,IBUF(7))
C

BUFFER IN WHICH TO GENERATE COMMANDS

BYTE BUF(72)
REAL*8 TCMD(2)
EQUIVALENCE (BUF,TCMD)

BUFFER IN WHICH TO GENERATE COMMANDS
FOR CONVENIENCE IN ASSIGNMENT STATEMENTS

MCR TASK NAME IN RAD50

INTEGER*4 IMCR
DATA IMCR/6RMCR ... /

MCR TASK NAME IN RAD50

C DIRECTIVE SYMBOLIC VALUE DEFINITIONS
C

INTEGER*2 GCCCS, GCCEX, GCCST, GCCND
DATA GCCCS, GCCEX, GCCST, GCCND /0, 1, 2, 128/ ! INCP VALUES IN GTCMCI
DATA ISCLR /0/
! IS.CLR RETURN CODE
INTEGER*2 CMELM, CMEXT, CMLKT, CMRMT ! TERMINAL CODES FOR SYSTEM MSGS
DATA CMELM, CMEXT, CMLKT, CMRMT /5, 6, 7, 8/
C

C CLI CODE
C

C TO FORCE THE CLI TO EXIT INSTEAD OF RETURNING, THE GC.CEX OPTION IS SPECIC FlED IN THE GTCMCI DIRECTIVE BELOW. IF THE CLI IS INSTALLED SO THAT ONLY
C ONE COpy OF THE TASK WILL EXIST FOR ALL TERMINALS, CHANGE THE VARIABLE
C GCCEX BELOW TO GCCST. THIS SPECIFIES THE GC.CST OPTION SO THAT THE TASK
C WILL STAY ACTIVE BUT STOPPED WHEN NO COMMANDS ARE OUTSTANDING FOR IT.
C

CALL GTCMCI(CMDBUF,CBLEN,IBUF,IBLEN,O,GCCEX,IDS) ! GET CMD FOR CLI
IF (IDS .LT. 0) GO TO 100

C IF THE GTCMCI DIRECTIVE HAD THE GC.CST OPTION SPECIFIED, WE MAY HAVE
C JUST BEEN UNSTOPPED, SO WE HAVE TO GET THE COMMAND.
C

IF (IDS .EQ. ISCLR) GO TO 1

WERE WE JUST UNSTOPPED?

Command Line Interpreters

17-17

IF (GCCDV .EQ. 0) GO TO 200

IS THIS A SYSTEM MESSAGE?

IGCCUN = GCCUN
CALL ASNLUN(5,GCCDV,IGCCUN,IDS)
IGCCCT=GCCCT
IF (IGCCCT .GE. 0) GO TO 5
IGCCCT = 256 + IGCCCT
IF (IGCCCT .LT. GCCCL) GOTO 150

CONVERT BYTE TO INTEGER (UNIT
ASSIGN TERMINAL TO LUN 5
CONVERT BYTE TO INTEGER

CONVERT NEGATIVE TO UNSIGNED
DID ENTIRE COMMAND FIT IN BUFFER?

C AT THIS POINT, THE CLI HAS A COMMAND TO BE PROCESSED. THE CODE FROM
C THE LABEL 1 TO HERE SHOULD BE FAIRLY COMMON AMONG ALL CLIS.
C FROM THIS POINT ON, THE CODE WILL BE SPECIFIC TO THE PARTICULAR LANGUAGE
C THIS CLI IS IMPLEMENTING. COMMANDS CAN BE ADDED OR DELETED AT WILL
C BY MODIFYING CODE IN THIS SECTION. AS STATED ABOVE, THIS EXTREMELY
C SIMPLE CLI PROVIDES TWO COMMANDS, AND GIVES EVERYTHING ELSE TO MCR.
C THIS CREATES AN OPEN-ENDED ENVIRONMENT. REJECTING UNRECOGNIZED COMMANDS
C INSTEAD OF PASSING THEM TO MCR WOULD LIMIT THE TERMINAL USERIS USE OF
C THE SYSTEM TO ONLY THOSE OPERATIONS ALLOWED BY THE CLI. THIS IS
C A SECURE WAY OF CONTROLLING SYSTEM USE, IN CASES WHEN IT IS NECESSARY.
C IN THIS EXAMPLE, CHANGING THE "GO TO 50" BELOW, TO A "GO TO 60"
C WOULD CREATE AN ENVIRONMENT WHERE THE ONLY OPERATION A USER COULD
C PERFORM WOULD BE TO TYPE FILES ON THE TERMINAL, OR SWITCH BACK TO MCR.
C ALL OF THE REST OF THE SYSTEM IS INACCESSIBLE. IF NO MEANS OF SWITCHING
C BACK TO MCR IS PROVIDED, IT IS IMPOSSIBLE FOR THE USER TO DO
C ANYTHING THE CLI DOES NOT EXPLICITLY LET HIM DO.
C

C IS IT A "T" COMMAND?
C

IF ((GCCBF(1) .EQ. ITI) .AND. (GCCBF(2) .EQ. I I)) GO TO 10
C

C CHANGE THE NEXT IF STATEMENT TO "GO TO 60" TO ELIMINATE PASSING UNKNOWN
C COMMANDS TO MCR.
C

C IS IT ALSO NOT AN "M" COMMAND?
C

IF ((GCCBF(l) .NE. IMI) .OR. (GCCBF(2) .NE. 13)) GO TO 50 ! M
C

C THE USER HAS ENTERED AN "M" COMMAND, SO SET THE TERMINAL TO MCR.
C

TCMD(l) = ISET /MCR I
TCMD(2) = I=TI:
IGRP = IBUF(GCCPU+l)
IMEM = IBUF(GCCPU)

SET /MCR=TI:
(CONVERT BYTE TO INTEGER) GROUP
MEMBER PART OF UIC

C ISSUE RPOI$ DIRECTIVE TO EXECUTE COMMAND
C

CALL RPOI(IMCR,IGRP,IMEM"TCMD,12"GCCDV,IGCCUN"GCCOA,IDS)
IF (IDS .LE. 0) GO TO 110 ! ERROR?
GO TO 1
! BACK TO START

17-18 Command Line Interpreters

C THE USER HAS ENTERED A "T" COMMAND SO CONSTRUCT THE NECESSARY PIP
C COMMAND AND SEND IT TO MCR
C

20
30

TCMD(1) = 'PIP TI:='
PUT BEGINNING OF PIP CMD IN BUFFER
12 = 8
POINTER INTO TARGET BUFFER
DO 20. Ii = 10. CBLEN
BEGIN AT SPACE AFTER THE T IN CMDBUF
IF (CMDBUF(I1) .EQ. 13) GO TO 30 ! END OF COMMAND? «CR»
IF (CMDBUF(I1) .EQ. 1 I) GO TO 20 ! SKIP ANY SPACES
12 = 12 + 1
COUNT CHARACTER
BUF(I2) = CMDBUF(I1)
COpy INTO OUTPUT BUFFER
CONTINUE
IGRP = IBUF(GCCPU+1)
(CONVERT BYTE TO INTEGER) GROUP
IMEM = IBUF(GCCPU)
MEMBER PART OF UIC

C ISSUE RPOI$ DIRECTIVE TO EXECUTE COMMAND
C

CALL RPOI(IMCR.IGRP.IMEM .. TCMD.I2 .. GCCDV.IGCCUN .. GCCOA.IDS)
IF (IDS .LE. 0) GO TO 110 ! ERROR?
GO TO 1
! BACK TO START
C

C IN THE ABOVE SECTION OF CODE. THE RPOI DIRECTIVE WAS USED TO PASS
C THE PIP COMMAND TO THE MAIN COMMAND DISPATCHER (MCR ... ).
C WHICH WILL START A COpy OF PIP AND GIVE IT THE COMMAND. THE RPOI
C DIRECTIVE COULD BE USED TO GIVE THE COMMAND DIRECTLY TO ... PIP AND
C GIVE THE RESULTING TASK A DIFFERENT NAME. IN THIS EXAMPLE.
C WE COULD CALL THE RESULTING PIP TASK "TYPTNN" WHERE THE LAST
C THREE CHARACTERS (TNN) ARE REPLACED BY A DEVICE NAME CHARACTER AND
C UNIT NUMBER. FOR EXAMPLE. IF THE "T" COMMAND WAS TYPED ON TT10:
C THE RESULTING TASK NAME COULD BE MADE TO BE "TYPT10". THIS HAS THE
C ADVANTAGE OF ALLOWING THE TASK TO BE ABORTED BY AN "ABO TYP" COMMAND.
C INSTEAD OF "ABO PIP"; THUS THE USER WOULD NOT HAVE TO KNOW THAT THE
C "T" COMMAND HE ISSUED IS ACTUALLY BEING SERVICED BY THE PIP TASK. THIS
C IS EXACTLY WHAT THE DCL CLI DOES. IT IS NOT DONE HERE IN ORDER
C TO SIMPLIFY THE EXAMPLE. PICKING UP THE TERMINAL NAME AND UNIT
C NUMBER. CONVERTING IT TO RAD50. AND SUPPLYING IT IN THE RPOI DIRECTIVE
C ALONG WITH A DIRECT REQUEST OF PIP IS LEFT AS AN EXERCISE TO THE USER.
C (BE CAREFUL ON RSX-11M-PLUS SYSTEMS WITH MORE THAN 64. TERMINALS).
C NOTE THAT REQUESTING PIP DIRECTLY AVOIDS A SUBSTANTIAL AMOUNT OF SYSTEM
C OVERHEAD.
C
C
C

C COMMAND IS NOT "T" OR "M". SO GIVE IT TO MCR AS IS.
C

IGRP = IBUF(GCCPU+1)
IMEM = IBUF(GCCPU)
IGCCCT = GCCCT

(CONVERT BYTE TO INTEGER) GROUP
MEMBER PART OF UIC
# OF CHARS IN COMMAND

C ISSUE RPOI$ DIRECTIVE TO EXECUTE COMMAND
C

CALL RPOI(IMCR.IGRP.IMEM .. GCCBF.IGCCCT .. GCCDV.IGCCUN .. GCCOA.IDS)
IF (IDS .LE. 0) GO TO 110 ! ERROR?
GO TO 1
! BACK TO START

Command Line Interpreters

17-19

C CONTROL IS TRANSFERRED HERE IF UNKNOWN COMMANDS ARE TO BE REJECTED
C INSTEAD OF BEING PASSED TO MCR.
C

60
62

WRITE (5.62)
FORMAT('OILLEGAL COMMAND')
GO TO 1
! BACK TO START

C ERROR HANDLING CODE
C

100
102

WRITE (5.102) IDS
! ERROR IN GTCMCI
FORMAT('OFATAL ERROR IN GTCMCI DIRECTIVE.
GO TO 250
EXIT

DSW=' .16)

110
112

WRITE (5.112) IDS
ERROR IN RPOI
FORMAT('OFATAL ERROR IN RPOI DIRECTIVE.
GO TO 250
EXIT

DSW=' .16)

150
152

WRITE (5.152)
ENTIRE COMMAND DID NOT FIT IN BUFFER
FORMAT('OSORRY. PART OF YOUR COMMAND WAS LOST')
GO TO 1
! BACK TO START

C A SYSTEM MESSAGE WAS RECEIVED INSTEAD OF A COMMAND
C

200

CONTINUE
IF (GCCUN
IF (GCCUN
IF (GCCUN
IF (GCCUN
GO TO 1

.EQ.
.EQ.
.EQ.
.EQ.

CMLKT)
CMRMT)
CMEXT)
CMELM)

GO
GO
GO
GO

TO 210
IS
TO 220
IS
TO 250
IS
TO 250
IS
! IGNORE ALL

IT A NEW TERMINAL LINKED TO US?
IT A TERMINAL BEING REMOVED?
IT AN ELIMINATE ALL PACKET?
IT A CLI ELIMINATION MESSAGE?
OTHER MESSAGES

C ISSUE WELCOME MESSAGE
C

210
212

IGCCUN = CMDBUF(ll)
! CONVERT BYTE TERMINAL UNIT # TO INTEGER
CALL ASNLUN(5.GCCBF.IGCCUN.IDS) ! ASSIGN LUN 5 TO SPECIFIED DEVICE
WRITE (5.212)
FORMAT('OWELCOME TO THE EXAMPLE CLI')
GO TO 1
! BACK TO START

C ISSUE GOODBYE MESSAGE
C

220
222

IGCCUN = CMDBUF(ll)
! CONVERT BYTE TERMINAL UNIT # TO INTEGER
CALL ASNLUN(5.GCCBF.IGCCUN.IDS) ! ASSIGN LUN 5 TO SPECIFIED DEVICE
WRITE (5.222)
FORMAT('OGOOD BYE FROM THE EXAMPLE CLI')
GO TO 1
! BACK TO START

C WHEN AN ELIMINATE ALL MESSAGE IS RECEIVED. EXIT IMMEDIATELY
C

250

CONTINUE
CALL EXIT
END

17-20 Command Line Interpreters

Chapter 18
The DCl Task
The DIGITAL Command Language (DCL) is a general-purpose command language syntax
implemented on several DIGITAL operating systems. The DCL task, in conjunction with the
CLI dispatcher, provides support for DCL.
Note
Micro/RSX distribution kits do not include the source files for the DCL task.
Therefore, the information in this chapter does not apply to Micro/RSX systems.
This chapter describes several methods for installing the DCL task on your system. It also
includes an explanation of how each method affects the parsing and translation of DCL
commands. In addition, the chapter contains information on the Macro Metalanguage (MML),
a set of MACRO-II macros used to define DCL. Using MML, an experienced programmer can
add, modify, or remove DCL commands.

18.1 Introduction to the Del Task
The DCL task receives DCL commands from a command line interpreter (CLI) command
dispatcher. After the dispatcher sends the commands to the DCL task, DCL translates them to
equivalent Monitor Console Routine (MCR) commands. The MCR commands are then sent to
the MCR CLI for interpretation and execution.
For additional information on DCL and MCR syntax or on the Executive directives used to
implement alternate CLls, see the following manuals:

•

RSX-11M-PLUS Command Language Manual (DCL syntax and functions)

•

RSX-11M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual (MCR syntax and functions)

•

RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX Executive Reference Manual (Executive directives used to
implement alternate CLls)

Also, for a general description of the CLI command dispatcher and alternate CLls, see
Chapter 17.

The DCL Task

18-1

The examples of source code in this chapter illustrate features of DCL and the DCL task, but
the examples are changed from the actual source code for clarity. See the DCL source code
in directory [23,10] for exact information. As a general example of DCL coding, the command
tables for the ASSIGN command are also included in this chapter (see Section 18.5.1).

18.2 Installing the DeL Task
You can install the DCL task in any of the following ways:
•

As an alternate CLI

•

As a conventional task (installed with the install-run-remove option of the RUN command)

•

As an MCR prototype task (installed with the task name ... DCL)

•

As a catchall task (installed with the task name ... CA.) .

The method you select depends upon the requirements of your system users and your installation.
If you run DCL as a task (an uninstalled version, a prototype task, or a catchall task), you can
use a subset of DCL features. However, the following restrictions apply:
•

You cannot use the LOGIN command to log in to the sytem.

•

You cannot change your defaults with the SET DEFAULT command.

•

Breakthrough write requests do not break through.

•

The system does not rename spawned tasks (for example, the DCL command DIRECTORY
spawns a task named PIPTnn, not DIRTnn).

These restrictions do not apply if you install DCL as an alternate CLI.

18.2. 1 Installing DCl as an Alternate CLI
Installing DCL as an alternate CLI is the most common way to use DCL. This allows you to
classify users by CLI in the system account file. Users can log in using the HELLO or LOGIN
commands. The HELLO task checks the account file for the CLI and sets the user's terminal to
the designated CLI.
If you include support for alternate CLls during system generation, you can use the following
Executive directives:

•

AST Service Exit (ASTX$)

•

Get Command for Command Interpreter (GCCI$)

•

Get Command Interpreter Information (GCII$)

•

Get Task Parameters (GTSK$)

•

Parent/Offspring Tasking directives
Connect (CNCT$)
Request and Pass Offspring Information (RPOI$)
Send, Request, and Connect (SDRC$)

18-2

The DeL Task

Send Data Request and Pass Offspring Control Block (SDRP$)
Spawn (SPWN$)
•

Run Task (RUN$)

•

Stop (STOP$)

•

Specify Command Arrival asynchronous system trap (AST; SCAA$)

•

Specify Requested Exit AST (SREA$ or SREX$)

The GCCI$, GCII$, RPOI$, and SCAA$ directives are specifically added for alternate CLI
support. For more information, see Chapter 17 and the RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX Executive

Reference Manual.
To install DCL as an alternate CLI, the system uses the following two commands:
MeR>
MeR>

Unless you modify the system files SYSVMR.CMD and STARTUP.CMD, these commands are
issued for you during the system generation and startup procedures. When you run the Virtual
Monitor Console Routine (VMR) to create the system image file, SYSVMR.CMD issues the
INSTALL command. The CLI /INIT command is included in the system STARTUP.CMD file.

18.2.2 Running DCl as a Task
When DCL runs from your terminal as a task, the terminal remains set to MCR. All DCL
commands work in the normal way, but a carriage return on a line by itself causes the task to
exit.
To run DCL as an uninstalled task, enter the RUN command, as follows:
>

If the task image file DCL.TSK is in the directory [3,54] on device LB:, precede the file name
with a dollar sign ($) and omit the directory and device specification, as follows:
>

By default, the RUN command searches for the file in the library directory on device LB:.

18.2.3 Installing DCl as a Prototype Task
To install DCL as a prototype task, enter the following command line:
>

When you install DeL as a prototype task, you can enter DCL commands from an MCR terminal
by preceding the command with the letters DCL. For example:
MeR>

In this example, MCR passes the command SHOW USERS to DCL. However, the terminal
remains set to MCR.

The DeL Task

18-3

18.2.4 Installing DCl as a Catchall Task
To install DCL as a catchall task, use the following command line:
>

When you install DCL with the name ... CA., all commands not recognized by MCR are passed
to DCL; DCL runs as the "catchall" task. To enter DCL commands that are identical to MCR
commands, such as MOUNT and SET, use valid MCR syntax. If you use DCL syntax to enter
one of these commands, MCR returns an error message.
Note
To avoid an infinite loop, do not install DCL as the catchall task for MCR if
MCR is already installed as the catchall task for DCL.
For more information on catchall tasks, see Chapter 19.

18.3 Using DCl to Perform Flying Installs
The default DCL task returns an error for any command not recognized as a DCL command.
However, tasks need not be installed for DCL to access them. You can modify DCL to allow any
unrecognized commands to fall through to MCR for another chance at execution. This allows
you to access MCR tasks and utilities without using the MCR or RUN commands. Instead,
when DCL encounters a command it does not recognize, it attempts to install a task named
after the command; in other words, DCL performs a flying install.
To allow DCL to perform flying installs (or to prevent this from occurring), modify the file
[l,24]DCLBLD.CMD by following the instructions contained in the file. Then, rebuild the DCL
task.
Note that the DCL command MCR is included in the default DCL task. This command allows
you to issue a one-line MCR command without leaving DCL. The MCR command is not affected
by the SET DEBUG command. In addition, you can enter any of the DCL SET commands from
MCR. MCR has been modified to pass to DCL all SET commands that do not have a slash (/)
in front of the keyword.

18.4 Task Building DCl
All of the changes to DCL described in this chapter require that the DCL task be rebuilt. The
overlay structure of the DCL task uses a task-build process that requires two passes by the Task
Builder (TKB) before it is complete. The first pass creates a symbol table (file type STB). During
the second pass, TKB uses the STB file to build the DCL task.
Note
The file [l,24]DCLBLD.CMD is included by the system generation procedure
when you request DCL support. You should read this file before attempting to
task -build DCL.
The following subsections summarize the task-build process.

18-4

The DeL Task

18.4. 1 The First-Pass Task Build
The following list summarizes the first task build:
•

Each DCL command is defined in a parser table (PT), which defines the DCL syntax of the
command.

•

The PT is paired with a translator table (TT), which defines the MCR equivalents for the
DCL command.

•

The addresses of the PT and TT are included in a master command table (MCT), which
lists all DCL commands.

•

When DCL parses a command, it seeks the address of that command in the MCT. After
locating the address, DCL uses the information in the PT and TT to translate the DCL
command into an equivalent MCR command.

•

The parser tables and translator tables are overlaid on the MCT; at the time of the first task
build, the entries in the MCT are undefined symbols.

To execute the first task build, enter the following command line:
MeR>

This results in one or more undefined symbols for each command, but the STB file contains the
PT ITT addresses for each command.

18.4.2 The Second-Pass Task Build
The following definitions summarize the second task build:
•

The MCT symbols are defined by the STB file.

•

The addresses in the PT ITT are doubly defined, once in the STB and once in their overlays.
The two definitions are identical.
This part of the process is accomplished through two Overlay Description Language (ODL)
files (see the file DCLBLD.CMD for more information).

To execute the second task build, enter the following command line:
>

18.5 Understanding How DCl Interprets Commands
There are three steps involved in interpreting DCL commands. They are as follows:
1.

Receiving the DCL command line

Parsing and translating the DCL command line to an equivalent MCR command line

Sending the equivalent MCR command line to the system for execution

The first step involves two tasks: the CLI dispatcher task (MCR ... ) and the DCL task. The CLI
dispatcher task gets the command line from the terminal driver, places it in a CLI queue, and
activates the DCL task (if it is not already active). The activated DCL task is named DCLTnn,
where nn is the number of the issuing terminal. The nonprivileged DCL task issues the

The DeL Task

18-5

Executive directive Get Command for Command Interpreter (GCCI$) to remove the command
line from the CLI queue.
During the second step, the DCL command line is translated to an equivalent MCR command
line. The translation involves two processes: the parser process and the translator process. The
parser process checks syntax to ensure that the received command line is a valid DCL command
line. Then, it constructs an intermediate form (IFORM) to pass data about the command line to
the translator. The translator process uses this data to construct an equivalent MCR command
line from the valid DCL command line.
The final step sends the equivalent MCR command line to the system for further interpretation
and execution. This process dispatches the equivalent MCR command line to MCR (or to MCR
utility tasks) with the Executive directive Request and Pass Offspring Information (RPOI$).
The RPOI$ directive is similar to the Exective directive Spawn Task (SPWN$); however, they
differ in the following ways:
•

RPOI$ allows the spawned task to be named. (For example, if the system spawns the MCR
task PIP, it names the task COPTnn, which is the task name for the DCL command COPY.)
The DCL task requires the task-naming ability to record the association between the DCL
command name and the MCR or utility task that executes the command.

•

RPOI$ does not create Offspring Control Blocks (OCBs). Instead of creating an OCB, RPOI$
takes the OCB attached to the DCL task and attaches it to the spawned task. As a result,
the spawned task can communicate exit status directly to the parent task. In addition, the
DCL task can spawn a task without waiting for the task to exit.

The following subsections describe the second step in interpreting DCL commands (that is, the
parser and translator processes) in more detail.

18.5.1 DCl Command Tables
The parser/translator process involved in interpreting DCL commands is table-driven. To parse
and translate a DCL command, the DCL task requires the following three tables:
•

The master command table (MCT)

•

A parser table (PT)

•

A translator table (TT)

The tables for each command are contained in separate files. By convention, the file containing
the MCT is COMMAND.MAC. The files for the PTs and TTs are named after the DCL command
that they describe, followed by the file type MAC. For example, the PT and the TT for the DCL
command COPY are in a file named COPY.MAC. However, note that the PT and TT for one
command can be located in two separate files. For example, the PT for the DCL command SET
is in a file named SET.MAC; whereas, the TT for the same command is located in a file named
TSET.MAC.
By altering these tables, you can add, delete, or modify DCL commands. However, before you
begin to make any changes, you need to understand how DCL uses these tables. You should
also understand the language in which the existing tables are written.

18-6 The DeL Task

The following subsections describe the DCL command tables in more detail. Section 18.5.2
explains the general characteristics of the macros and rules that define a metalanguage;
Section 18.5.3 describes the Macro Metalanguage (MML), which defines the DCL command
tables.

18.5. 1. 1 The Master Command Table
The master command table (MCT) contains an entry for each DCL command.
provides the following information:
•

The name of the DCL command

•

The address of a parser table (PT) for the command

•

The address of a translator table (TT) for the command

•

The name of the overlay containing the PT and the TT (optional)

Each entry

The DCL task uses MCT to recognize an arbitrary command and to locate the PT and TT
for that command. MCT consists of calls to COMMAND macros; each DCL command has a
corresponding macro. Arguments to the COMMAND macros specify the information required
for each MCT entry (the command name, the PT and TT addresses, and optionally, the name
of the overlay).

18.5. 1.2 The Parser and Translator Tables
There are two tables (one parser and one translator) for each DCL command. Each PT and TT
combination contains the information that the parser and translator processes need to translate
a DCL command line to an equivalent MCR command line, as follows:
•

The syntax of the DCL command

•

The syntax of the equivalent MCR command (that is, the syntax of the MCR command to
which the DCL command translates)

•

The relationship (or mapping) between the DCL syntax and the MCR syntax

For example, the PT and TT for the DCL commands ABORT, ASSIGN, and MYOWN
contained in the files ABORT. MAC, ASSIGN.MAC, and MYOWN.MAC, respectively.
for the ABORT command, the label ABORT:: appears in the parser table contained in
file ABORT.MAC. Likewise, the label ABO:: appears in the translator table in the same
(ABORT.MAC). Table 18-1 summarizes these command tables.
Table 18-1:

are
So,
the
file

DCL Command Tables

DCl Command

Master Command Table
COMMAND.MAC

Parser Table (PT)

Translator
Table (TT)

ABORT

COMMAND ABORT ABORT ABO

ABORT::

ABO::

ASSIGN

COMMAND ASSIGN ASSIGN ASN

ASSIGN::

ASN::

MYOWN

COMMAND MYOWN MYOWN MYN

MYOWN::

MYN::

The PT defines the syntax or structure of the DCL command; thus, it "drives" the parser
process. Likewise, the TT defines the syntax or structure of the corresponding MCR command

The DeL Task

18-7

and "drives" the translator process. The definitions within the tables are expressed in the Macro
Metalanguage (MML).
The following section describes a metalanguage in general terms, using an English sentence as
the example. Following the introduction of these general concepts is a more detailed explanation
of the Macro Metalanguage (MML) in Section, 18.5.3.

18.5.2 A General Description of a Metalanguage
MACRO-II macros and rules define the DCL command tables. The macros and rules form a
language, called the Macro Metalanguage (MML), which supports the following characteristics:
•

Allows you to specify a prompt string for each syntax element. When a test for end-of-line
(EOL) is successful, DCL prompts for more input with the specified string.

•

Interacts with the utility. In response to a prompt, users can request help by typing a
question mark (?).

•

Allows the specification of an error message string for each syntax element. If DCL detects
an error while processing a syntax element that has an error message associated with it,
DCL issues the error message and aborts the parse.

•

Allows the specification of contradictory bit masks for each syntax element. DCL uses the
bit masks to detect contradictory syntax.

•

Allows the use of globally defined syntax elements, such as file and device specifications.

•

Allows MACRO-II assembly language subroutines to be mixed with MML statements if a
command cannot be completely defined with MML.

•

Allows one DCL command to translate to more than one MCR command. For instance, the
DCL command SET DEFAULT can generate the MCR commands ASN and SET JUIC.

•

Supports "floating" qualifiers, which can be specified anywhere in the command line.

•

Models a Backus-Naur Form (BNF) metalanguage. A BNF language specifies the sequences
of symbols that constitute a syntactically valid statement in a given language. In this case,
MML is used to describe the proper syntax of a DCL command and the equivalent syntax
of an MCR command.

As an example of metalanguage syntax, consider a sentence in the English language. A syntax
tree defines the structure or syntax of a sentence, as follows:
THE

OLD

MAN

WALKED

THE

\
\
\

\
/
/
\

\
\

I
I
I
I
I

/
/
/

/
/

/
\

18-8 The DeL Task

DOG.

Note that the sentence "The old man walked the dog" is one of many sentences that could fit
the above structure (syntax). The following description of the syntax tree is a metalanguage
definition of the sentence:

::= THE

::= OLD

::=MAN

::= WALKED

::=DOG

.. =

< predica te >

.. =

< direct obj ect >

< predicate>

The metalanguage definition and the syntax tree describe the same structure; however, the
metalanguage uses the following symbols:
•

Left angle bracket ( <)

•

Right angle bracket (> )

•

Two colons followed by an equal sign (::=)

The angle brackets denote category references; they enclose the name of a category. Categories
define classes of objects. For example, the category defines English words that fit
the structure of an , followed by an , followed by a .
The symbol ::= means "is defined as" and denotes a production rule. In a production rule, you
specify the category name to the left of the symbol and the definition for the category to the
right of the symbol. For example, the following production rule for references the
category :
::=

Likewise, the production rule for the category is as follows:
::= OLD

Thus, you can rewrite the production rule for as follows:
::= OLD

You can also perform additional substitutions for references to the categories and
to produce the following production rule:
::= THE OLD MAN

You cannot substitute for the words THE, OLD, and MAN. These words are literal strings.
For simplicity, literal strings are called literals, and category references are called nonliterals. A
category reference means there is a production rule for the category that requires that the right
part of the production rule be substituted for the name of the category.

The DCL Task 18-9

A category definition (the right part of a production rule) consists of literals, nonliterals, or both,
concatenated by implied ANDs. The implied AND has no symbol in the metalanguage; instead,
it forms category definitions by concatenating arbitrary numbers of syntax elements. A syntax
element is either a literal or a nonliteral. For example, in the category definition for < subject> ,
there are three nonliterals, as follows:
•

•

An implied AND concatenates these nonliterals.
Two additional notations in the metalanguage are as follows:
Exclusive-OR indicator
Optional syntax indicators

[]

Use the exclusive-OR indicator ( I ) to show that a category can be defined in several ways. For
example, the production rule for the category is as follows:
::= OLD I YOUNG I MIDDLE-AGED

Each definition in the production rule is separated by a vertical bar ( I). When you substitute for a
nonliteral (such as , as it
is defined by the production rule for , you produce the following three production
rules:
::= THE OLD MAN
::= THE YOUNG MAN
::= THE MIDDLE-AGED MAN

Use the optional syntax indicators (square brackets) to enclose optional syntax. For example,
the following production rule defines the category :
::= [ ]

The square brackets around the nonliteral indicate that is optional
syntax. This syntax allows you to substitute for and produce either of the following
production rules:
::= OLD
::=

In addition to denoting optional syntax, the square brackets also indicate iteration. That is,
syntax denoted as optional can also be used to define the syntax repeatedly. For example,
assume that the following production rule defines the nonliteral :
::= WISE I OLD I GENTLE

You could then rewrite the production rule for (if is defined with
brackets), as follows:
::= WISE OLD GENTLE

18-10 The DeL Task

Note the repeated substitution for the nonliteral .
Thus, you can use the symbols, rules, and logic described above as a language (that is, as a
metalanguage) to define the structure of other languages. The structure or syntax of a language
is called the grammar of that language. The grammar is used to determine mechanically whether
an arbitrary sentence is a sentence in the language.
Our interest here is in the grammar for DCL and MCR, the RSX-IIM-PLUS command languages.
Sentences in these two grammars are called commands. For example, the following metalanguage
definition is for the grammar of the DCL command ASSIGN:
assign ::= ASSIGN [ / ]
qual ::= LOCAL I LOGIN I GLOBAL I TERMINAL:

Likewise, the following metalanguage definition is for the grammar of the MCR command ASN:
asn ::= ASN = [ / ]
qual ::= LOGIN I GBL I TERM=

The following section describes the correspondence of the metalanguage notation presented in
this section to Macro Metalanguage (MML) notation.

18.5.3 The Macro Metalanguage
The Macro Metalanguage (MML) is a set of MACRO-II macros and rules that define the syntax
for the DCL and MCR command languages. It implements the logic that is characteristic of
a BNF-type metalanguage (as described in the previous section). By providing a means of
generating (with the MACRO-II assembler) the data structures that drive the parser/translator
process, MML expresses the mapping from DCL syntax to equivalent MCR syntax.
The following subsections summarize the basic components of MML.
Syntax Elements (Literals and Nonlinterals)

In MML, there are two types of syntax elements: literals and nonliterals. Both are presented as
arguments to the MACRO-II assembly language AND and OR macros. An argument to either
macro represents one syntax element (a literal or a nonliteral).
To distinguish a literal from a nonliteral, place a single quotation mark (') before the first
character (for example, 'ASSIGN). In addition, to indicate the minimum number of characters
that the parser must match for a parse to be considered successful, specify an abbreviation
count. The abbreviation count is an optional argument that you can specify with a literal. For
example, to indicate that the literal ASSIGN can be abbreviated to ASSI, rewrite 'ASSIGN as
<'ASSIGN,4> .
Note
The use of the left and right angle brackets ( < and > ) as symbols indicates
to MACRO-II that the argument (,ASSIGN,4) is one argument instead of two
(that is, ASSIGN and 4). Do not confuse these symbols with the identical
metalanguage symbols used to identify nonliterals.

The DeL Task 18-11

Logical Operators (AND and OR Macros)
The Macro Metalanguage has two MACRO-II macros to correspond to the implied AND and
exclusive OR operators: AND macros and OR macros.
To define a category, place a MACRO-II label on either the AND or the OR macro. The label
is the name of the category, and the arguments to the macro are the definition for the category.
For example, the metalanguage notation for the category is as follows:
::= GLOBAL I LOCAL I TERMINAL:

The eqUivalent MML notation is as follows:
QUAL:

OR 'GLOBAL 'LOCAL TERM

TERM:

AND 'TERMINAL: $DEV

This example uses the following notations:
•

Two categories: QUAL and TERM

•

Two MACRO-II macros: AND and OR

•

Three category definitions for QUAL: 'GLOBAL, 'LOCAL, or TERM
The category definitions for QUAL consist of two literals (,GLOBAL and 'LOCAL) and one
nonliteral (TERM).

•

One category definition for TERM: 'TERMINAL:$DEV
The category definition for TERM consists of a literal ('TERMINAL) and a predefined
nonliteral ($DEV). (See Section 18.10.2 for a description of common predefined syntax
elements.) Note that 'TERMINAL: $DEV is specified on a separate line with the AND
macro.

Optional Syntax Elements (OPT=T)
Use the MML notation OPT=T (optional=true) to indicate that syntax elements are optional.
(This notation corresponds to the metalanguage notation [ and D. The optional syntax notation
OPT=T is an attribute of syntax elements (that is, literals and nonliterals). Literals and nonliterals
in MML notation are arguments to AND and OR macros. Therefore, you can specify the optional
syntax indicator OPT=T as part of the arguments.
To specify OPT=T as an attribute of a syntax element, enclose the syntax element and the
OPT=T notation in angle brackets. For example, to specify that the terminal device specification
$DEV in the previous example is an optional syntax element (nonliteral), rewrite the category
TERM as follows:
TERM:

AND

'TERMINAL: <$DEV OPT=T>

Use the OPTR=T attribute to indicate that a syntax element is optional and to indicate that the
parser/translator can process the syntax element repeatedly.
The notation OPT means a syntax element can occur, at most, one time. The notation OPTR
means a syntax element can occur many times. In either case (OPT or OPTR), the element can
also be specified to occur zero times (in other words, the element is optional). For a complete
description, see Section 18.9.11.

18-12 The DeL Task

Macros (OR., AND., and END)
To specify an arbitrary number of arguments for the AND and OR macros, use the OR., AND.,
and END macros. Use the AND. and OR. macros as continuation markers for the AND and
OR macros, respectively. That is, if there is not enough space on the line for all the arguments
to either the AND or OR macros, place additional arguments on the next line. To do this, place
the AND. or the OR. macro on the next line, followed by the continuation of the specification
of the arguments. For example, you could rewrite the category for < QUAL> to the following:
QUAL:

OR 'GLOBAL 'LOCAL
OR. TERM
END

Use the END macro to indicate the end of an argument list, even if the list does not continue on
more than one line. For example, specify the END macro in the following category definition
for :
QUAL:

OR 'GLOBAL 'LOCAL TERM
END

18.5.4 Interpreting DCl Command Tables
The parser/translator process locates the PT and the TT for a particular DeL command line
by searching the master command table (MeT) for the command entry. The parser/translator
extracts from the command entry the address of the first AND or OR macro of the PT and the
address of the first AND or OR macro of the TT.
The following sections describe how the parser and the translator interpret the PT and the TT.

18.5.4. 1 Parser Processing
The parser starts processing at the address of the first macro in the PT. If the processing of this
macro succeeds, then the parser process succeeds.
The parse is successful if the following two conditions are met:
•

The input command line is a syntactically correct DeL command line (as defined by the
PT).

•

The intermediate form (IFORM) has been constructed.

The IFORM is a condensed representation of the input command line. If the processing of this
macro fails, then the parser process fails.
The parser processes each AND macro argument from left-to-right. The process continues until
all the arguments have been processed successfully or until one argument fails to process. If
all arguments process successfully, then the processing of the macro succeeds; otherwise, the
processing is aborted.
The parser also processes each OR macro from left-to-right. However, the criteria for determining
whether or not the processing is successful differs from the criteria for the AND macro. If one
of the arguments is processed successfully, then the processing of the macro succeeds. If one
argument fails to process, the processing is aborted. The processing does not continue until all
the arguments have been processed; its success or failure depends upon one argument.

The DeL Task

18-13

18.5.4.2 Translator Processing
The translator starts processing at the address of the first macro of the TT. If the processing of
this macro succeeds, then the translation succeeds and an equivalent MCR command line (as
defined by the TT) has been constructed from the IFORM. If the processing of this macro fails,
then the translator process fails. The processing of the AND and OR macros by the translator
is the same as the processing of the AND and OR macros by the parser (as described in the
previous section).
Arguments to AND and OR macros can be literals or nonliterals. Nonliterals are handled in
the same way by both the parser and the translator. Literals, however, are handled differently
by the parser and the translator (see Section 18.5.4.3).

18.5.4.3 Parser/Translator Handling of Literals
A string of American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) characters used as an
argument to an AND or OR macro is called a literal. The string can be a keyword in the DCL
or MCR command grammar. The parser and translator process literals differently.
To parse a literal, the parser attempts to match the literal to the input DCL command line. If the
input command line contains the same ASCII string as the literal, then the match is successful
and the processing of the literal succeeds; otherwise, nothing happens.
However, to translate a literal, the translator copies the literal from the TT to the MCR command
line buffer. If you do not associate attributes with a literal in a TT, then the processing of
the literal always succeeds. (In other words, writing a literal to the MCR command line buffer
always succeeds.) A literal in a TT can fail only if you have associated one of the following
attributes with the literal:
•

MAP

•

CBM

•

BCT

•

BST

When you associate these attributes with a literal, the translator processes the attributes before
the literal is written to the MCR command line buffer.
The MAP attribute instructs the translator to check for a mapping number in the IFORM. If the
number is not there, the translator does not write the literal to the MCR command line buffer
and the processing of the literal fails.
The CBM, BCT, and BST attributes instruct the translator to check the status of certain bits
in its internal data structures. If the status of the bits is not correct, the translator does not
write the literal to the MCR command line buffer and the processing of the literal fails. (See
Section 18.9 for more information on these attributes.)

18-14

The DeL Task

18.5.4.4 Parser/Translator Handling of Nonliterals
In MML, when you use the label of an AND or OR macro as the argument to an AND or
OR macro it is called a non literal; thus, a nonliteral is the address of another AND or OR
macro. The processing of a nonliteral is the processing of the other AND or OR macro that
the nonliteral addresses. That is, when the parser or translator encounters a non literal (as an
argument to an AND or OR macro), the parser or translator transfers parsing or translation
control to the macro that the non literal addresses.
The addressed macro is either an AND or OR macro and the parser/translator processes this
macro like all AND or OR macros (as described in the previous section). If the processing of
this macro succeeds, then the processing of the nonliteral succeeds; otherwise, the processing
of the nonliteral fails.

18.5.4.5 Summary of Parser/Translator Functions
The following list summarizes the Parser and Translator functions:
•

The parser table (PT) drives the parser process and the translator table (TT) drives the
translator process.

•

The parser/translator processes succeed only if the processing of the first AND or OR macro
of the PT /TT succeeds.
-

•

The processing of an AND or OR macro succeeds only when the processing of the
arguments to the macros succeeds.

Arguments can be either literals or nonliterals.
A non literal instructs the parser/translator to process (recursively) another AND or OR
macro. It succeeds only if the subsequent AND or OR macro succeeds.
A literal instructs the parser to ensure the input command line matches the literal. It
succeeds only if the match is successful.

•

A literal instructs the translator to output the literal (possibly conditionally) to the MCR
command line. The translator succeeds only if either the literal is not conditionalized or the
conditionals are satisfied.

18.5.4.6 Example of PIT Tables for DCl ASSIGN Command
The following is an example of a PT for the DCL command ASSIGN:
MML notation for Parser Table
ASSIGN::
QUAL:
QUALI:

TERM:

AND
END
AND
END
OR
OR.
OR.
OR.
END
AND
END

'ASSIGN $DEV $DEV
,/ QUALI
<'LOCAL.4>
<'LOGIN.4>
<'GLOBAL.2>
TERM
'TERMINAL: < 'TERMINAL.4> , :

The DeL Task

18-15

The following is an example of a translator table (TT) for the MCR command ASN:
ASN: :
LAUQ:

MRET:

MML notation for Translator Table
AND
'ASN $DEV '= $DEV
END
OR
'/LOGIN
OR.
'/GBL
OR.
MRET
END
AND
'/TERM= $DEV
END

These examples show the first two steps in creating the tables for the DCL command ASSIGN.
The last step is to express the mapping of the syntax elements in the PT to the syntax elements
in the TT. This mapping provides the information that the parser/translator process needs to
construct the MCR command line for ASN from the DCL command line for ASSIGN. The
following section describes how to express this mapping.

18.5.5 Mapping DCl to MCR
For the translator to know which particular MCR command line to construct from a particular
DCL command line, the PT and the TT must express a relation between the DCL syntax and
the MCR syntax. The PT/TT expresses this relation by mapping elements from DCL syntax to
elements in MCR syntax.
The parser passes the mapping information to the translator with a dynamic data structure
called the Intermediate Form (IFORM). The parser processes mapping information and records
it in the IFORM. The translator searches the IFORM for the information and then generates the
MCR command line.
Mapping information is expressed in MML with the MAP=n attribute. MAP takes one or two
values: the first value is the primary mapping number; the second value is the secondary mapping

number.
Use one of the following formats to specify the MAP attribute:
•

If you need only the primary mapping number, specify it in the following form:
MAP=n

•

If you need to specify both mapping numbers (which is allowed only in a TT), or if you
need to specify only the second number, enclose the numbers in angle brackets and separate
them with a comma, as follows:
MAP= or MAP=<,n>

•

To associate the MAP attribute with a syntax element, enclose the syntax element and the
MAP attribute in angle brackets, as follows:

•

To map a DCL syntax element in a PT to an MCR syntax element in the corresponding TT,
use MAP with the same mapping number for both syntax elements.

18-16 The DeL Task

For example, in the ASSIGN command, the DCL qualifier /GLOBAL maps to the MCR
keyword /GBL. That is, when you type the DCL qualifier /GLOBAL, it is translated to the
the MCR keyword /GBL. To represent this mapping in the DCL command tables, use MAP
with the same mapping number for both /GLOBAL and /GBL, as follows:
QUAL:
LAUQ:

OR <'/GLOBAL MAP=l> ...
END
OR <'/GBL MAP=l> ...
END

MML macros at QUAL: define DCL syntax. MML macros at LAUQ: (QUAL spelled
backwards) define the corresponding MCR syntax.
In the previous example, when the parser reaches QUAL:, it tries to match the literal/GLOBAL
to the input DCL command line. If the match is successful, then the parser queues the MAP
number PI (the P indicates a primary mapping number) to the IFORM queue.
When the translator reaches LAUQ:, it searches the IFORM queue for the MAP number PI. If
it finds PI, it sends the literal /GBL to the IFORM for the MCR command line. However, if it
cannot find the MAP number in the IFORM queue, it does not use the corresponding syntax
element in the translation.

18.5.5. 1 Using the MAP Attribute in the Parser Table
When you use the MAP attribute to associate a primary mapping number with a syntax element
in the PT, you instruct the parser to queue the primary mapping number to the IFORM queue.
Likewise, when you associate a secondary mapping number with a syntax element in the PT,
you instruct the parser to queue the secondary mapping number to the IFORM queue. In both
cases, the parser queues a mapping number only if the parser processes the associated syntax
element successfully.
The MAP attribute in a PT can associate either a primary or a secondary mapping number with
a syntax element, but not both.

18.5.5.2 Using the MAP Attribute in the Translator Table
When you use the MAP attribute in a TT, you instruct the translator to search the IFORM queue
for a mapping number. When the translator finds the number, it marks the number as "used"
and processes the associated syntax element.
The MAP attribute in a TT can associate a primary mapping number, a secondary mapping
number, or both, with a syntax element. However, the search for a primary mapping number
differs from the search for a secondary mapping number, as follows:
•

To find a primary mapping number, the translator searches the entire IFORM queue from
beginning to end.

•

To find a secondary mapping number, the translator begins searching at the queue element
containing the last used primary mapping number, and it stops searching at the next queue
element containing a primary mapping number.

The DeL Task

18-17

When you specify both a primary and a secondary mapping number in the TT (for example,
MAP= < 1,1 > ), you instruct the translator to search the entire IFORM queue for the specified
primary mapping number such that the secondary mapping number follows without any
intervening primary mapping numbers. The secondary mapping number qualifies the primary
mapping number, but the primary mapping number is the object of the search.
If the translator finds a mapping number in the IFORM queue, the translator processes the
associated syntax element. If the translator fails to find the mapping number, the processing of
the associated syntax element fails.

When the translator finds a mapping number and successfully processes the associated syntax
element, the translator marks as used the queue element containing the found mapping number.
A used mapping number is a mapping number that is ignored by the translator. Marking a
mapping number as used prevents infinite loops in the TT without requiring you to specify
termination conditions.

18.5.5.3 Using the MAP Attribute Without a Syntax Element
You can specify the· MAP attribute in both the PT and the TT without associating it with a
syntax element, as follows:

If you specify this attribute as an argument to an AND or OR macro in a PT, the parser assumes
a null syntax element, which is always parsed successfully.
If you specify a null syntax element in a TT, the translator (after finding the queue element
containing the mapping number) checks to see if a character buffer is attached to the queue
element. If a character buffer is attached, then the translator copies the contents of the buffer to
the MCR command line buffer. If a character buffer is not attached, then the translator assumes
a null syntax element, which is always translated successfully.

The parser attaches the character buffer to the queue element. The COP attribute instructs
the parser to create the character buffer and to copy the text parsed by the associated syntax
element to the character buffer (see Section 18.9.5 for details on the COP attribute).

18.5.5.4 Summary of the Mapping Procedure
The following list summarizes the mapping procedure:

•

The parser records mapping information; the translator detects the mapping information.

•

Mapping starts in the parser process. The parser queues mapping numbers to the IFORM
queue, as it successfully processes syntax elements that have associated MAP attributes.

•

Mapping is completed in the translator process. The translator detects mapping numbers in
the IFORM queue and translates the syntax elements.

•

The translator does not output a syntax element that has a MAP attribute associated with
it unless the following two conditions are met:
The translator finds the mapping number in the IFORM queue.
The mapping number is not marked as used.

18-18 The DeL Task

Example

The following is an example of a complete DCL command table (with DCL-to-MCR mapping)
for the DCL command ASSIGN:
ASSIGN MML notation for Parser Table
ASSIGN::
QUAL:
QUALI:

TERM:

AND
END
AND
END
OR
OR.
OR.
OR.
END
AND
END

'ASSIGN <$DEV MAP=1><$DEV MAP=2>
'/ QUALI
<'LOCAL,3>
<'LOGIN,3 MAP=3>
<'GLOBAL,2 MAP=4>
TERM
< 'TERMINAL ,4> ,

ASN MML notation for Translator Table
ASN: :
LAUQ:

MRET:

AND
END
OR
OR.
OR.
END
AND
END

'ASN '=
<'/LOGIN MAP=3>
<'/GBL MAP=4>
MRET
'/TERM=

For a complete description of the MAP attribute, see Section 18.9.9. For information on related
attributes, see the descriptions of the following attributes:
•

DMAP

•

COP

•

OCOP

•

TST

•

DIR

The following section describes the IFORM, the dynamic data structure that passes mapping
information from the parser to the translator.

The DeL Task

18-19

18.5.6 The Intermediate Form
The Intermediate Form (IFORM) contains the essential information (extracted from the input
DCL command line) that the translator needs to construct the MCR command line. The IFORM
consists of three data structures: the queue, the character buffers, and the general bit-mask
words.
Note
To display the IFORM for a given DCL command, enter the DCL command
SET DEBUG/FULL.

•

When the parser successfully processes syntax elements with MAP attributes, it creates
the [FORM queue. Then, each time the parser successfully processes a subsequent MAP
attribute, it queues the mapping number to the IFORM queue.

•

When a syntax element has both MAP and COP attributes, the parser creates a character
buffer. The parser attaches the character buffer to the queue entry that contains the mapping
number. The character buffer contains the text parsed during the processing of the associated
syntax element.
A syntax element with a COP attribute and no MAP attribute instructs the parser to copy
the text parsed to the last queued mapping number (creating and attaching the character
buffer, if necessary).

•

The general bit-mask words are two words used as a set of 32 flags. The parser/translator
process attaches no meaning to the flags, but MML provides a set of attributes to perform
the following functions:
Set flags
Clear flags
Test to see whether or not the flags are set
Test to see whether or not the flags are clear
You can use the flags to check for contradictory syntax or to pass information from the
parser to the translator. For example, set a flag during the parser process if a DCL qualifier
is parsed. Then, detect the set flag during the translator process to generate the equivalent
MCR keyword.

The translator searches the IFORM queue for mapping numbers. If the translator finds the
mapping numbers, it processes the syntax elements. If the translator cannot find the mapping
numbers, then the syntax elements fail.
For example, assume you have specified a MAP attribute without an associated syntax element,
as follows:

The translator first finds the queue element containing the mapping number. Then, it examines
the queue element for a character buffer attached with the COP attribute. If the translator finds
an attached character buffer, it copies the contents of the buffer to the MCR command line
buffer. If it cannot, it assumes a null syntax element (which always succeeds).

18-20

The DeL Task

Creating the IFORM

Use the following attributes in the PT to direct the parser in the creation of the IFORM:
Attributes

Meaning

MAP=n
MAP= <,n>

Map

DMAP=n
DMAP= <,n>

Map, unless duplicate exists

COP=T
OCOP=T

Copy, or copy optional input

BS=n
BS= <,n>
BS=

Set bit in mask word

BC=n
BC= <,n>
BC=

Clear bit in mask word

NO=T

Repeat for negative form of syntax element

Use the following attributes (in the TT) to direct the translator in the examination of the IFORM:
Attributes

Meaning

MAP=n
MAP= <,n>
MAP=

Unmap

BST=n
BST= <,n>
BST=

Test for bit set in mask word

BCT=n
BCT= <,n>
BCT=

Test for bit clear in mask word

TST=T

Test for mapping number, do not mark as used

DIR=T

Search IFORM in reverse direction

For more information on these attributes, see Section 18.9.

The DeL Task

18-21

Examples
$

Translation of this DeL command line produces the following IFORM:
Queue

Character Buffer

DK1:

SY:

Translation of this DeL command line produces the following IFORM:
Queue

Character Buffer

P3
P5

TT12:

DK1:

SY:

18.6 Adding New DCl Commands
A DCL command consists of an entry in the master command table (MeT), a parser table (PT),
and a translator table (TT). The PT defines the syntax of the DCL command; the TT defines the
syntax of the corresponding MCR command. The entry in the MCT connects the PT and the
TT to the DCL task. Thus, to add a new command to the DCL task, you must construct a PT
and a TT and make an entry in the MCT.
Adding a command to the DCL task involves the following steps:
1. Creating the PT and the TT (that is, creating the file that contains the PT and the TT)
2.

Creating the MCT entry

Creating an entry in the overlay description file for the DCL task

Incorporating the new PT /TT file and the modified MCT file into the DeL task

18.6.1 Creating the PT/TT File
The file that contains the PT and the TT is named after the verb of the command. The file
type is MAe (for example, the PT and the TT for the COpy command are in a file named
COPY.MAC). The PT/TT file must specify the MACRO-II assembly directives .TITLE, .PSECT,
and .END. The title of the file (specified as an argument to the .TITLE directive) must also be the
same as the verb of the command. Normally, the program-section name is CDEF, which stands
for command definition." However, if MACRO-II subroutines are interspersed with Macro
Metalanguage (MML) notation (by using the $JSR predefined syntax element), the subroutines
must be in the blank program section. (See Section 18.10.5 for details on $JSR.)
II

In addition to these directives, the PT /TT file must contain a MACRO-II global label on the
first MML macro of the PT and a global label on the first MML macro of the TT. By convention,
the label on the PT is the same as the verb of the DCL command, and the label on the TT is

18-22

The DeL Task

the same as the verb on the corresponding MCR command. The following example shows the
structure of the file that contains the PT and the TT for the DCL ASSIGN command:
ASSIGN.MAC
.TITLE ASSIGN
.PSECT .CDEF
ASSIGN: :
Parser Table
ASN: :
Translator Table
. END

The two global labels in the PT ITT file connect the PT and the TT to the DCL task. This is
accomplished by making an entry in the MCT.

18.6.2 Creating the MCT Entry
The file COMMAND.MAC contains the master command table (MCT). The MCT consists of
a list of MACRO-II COMMAND macro calls. Each COMMAND macro call identifies a DCL
command. The list of COMMAND macro calls is ordered alphabetically by the name or verb
of the command. The COMMAND macro takes five arguments; the first four are mandatory
and the fifth is optional.

Format
COMMAND

name, min, ptaddr, ttaddr, [ovrnam]

Arguments
name

Specifies the name (or verb) of the command.
min

Specifies the minimum number of characters necessary to make the name unique.
ptaddr

Specifies the label of the PT for the command.
ttaddr

Specifies the label of the TT for the command.
[ovrnam]

Specifies the 3-character name of the overlay for the PT and TT.
This argument to the COMMAND macro is optional. However, even if you do not specify
this argument, the PT and TT must be in an overlay.
If PT and TT are in the same module, the default overlay name is the command name. If

they are in separate modules, the PT overlay name is the command name (for example,
SET .MAC) and the TT overlay name is the command name preceded by a T (for example,
TSET.MAC).

The DeL Task

18-23

The MCT is in two parts. The first part of the MCT includes all DCL command names (verbs)
in alphabetical order, as described in this section. It is searched with a binary search algorithm.
The second part describes the brief forms of commonly used DCL commands. If the search
of Part 1 for a command verb fails (for example, if a line is too short), a search of Part 2 is
initiated. Note that Part 2 is not necessarily in alphabetical order; it is searched from the top
down.

18.6.3 Specifying the Overlay Entry
Each PT /TT must reside in an overlay. Use one of the following formats to overlay a PT /TT:
•

One overlay for two or more PT /TTs

•

One overlay for one PT /TT

•

Two overlays for one PT /TT

•

More than two overlays for one PT /TT

Specify an overlay by making an entry in the overlay description files (DCLBLD.ODL and
DCDBLD.ODL) and connect the new overlay entry to the root segment overlay entry.

Format 1: One Overlay for Two or More PT/TTs
label:

. NAME
.FCTR

ovrnam
ovrnam-DCLO/LB:cmdnaml:cmdnam2 ... :cmdnamn-L

Arguments
label

Connects the entry to the root segment.
ovrnam

Specifies the 3-character name of the overlay. Include this argument for each entry in the
MCT whose command tables are in an overlay with two or more PT/TTs.
DClO/lB

Specifies the object library containing the modules in the overlays.
:cmdnam 1:cmdnam2: ... :cmdnamn-l

Specifies the title of the file containing the first (cmdnaml), second (cmdnam2), and
subsequent PT and TT.

Format 2: One Overlay for One PT/TT
label:

.FCTR DCLO/LB:cmdnam-L

Arguments
label

Connects the entry to the root segment.
DClO/lB

Specifies the object library containing the modules in the overlays.

18-24

The DeL Task

cmdnam-l

Specifies the title of the file that contains the PT /TT.
The title of the file containing the PT /TT must be the same as the name or verb of the
command because the Task Builder (TKB) uses the title as the default for the overlay name.
This format does not specify the overlay name. Instead, the DCL task uses the name or verb
of the command as the overlay name.
Format 3: Two Overlays for One PT/TT
label:

.FCTR (DCLO/LB:cmdnam-L,DCLO/LB:tcmdnam-L)

Arguments
label

Connects the entry to the root segment.
DClOjlB

Specifies the object library containing the modules in the overlays.
cmdnam-l

Specifies the title of the file that contains the PT. By convention, the title is the same as the
verb of the command. (For example, the file containing the PT for the DCL command SET
is named SET.MAC with the title SET.)
fcmdnam-l

Specifies the title of the file that contains the TT. By convention, the title is the same as the
verb of the command prefixed by the letter T. (For example, the file containing the TT for
the DCL command SET is named TSET.MAC with the title TSET.)
This format requires separate files for the PT and TT. The separate files have the same format
as a single file that contains the PT /TT; however, each file contains only one global label.
Format 4: More than Two Overlays for One PT/TT
label:

. FCTR
(DCLO/LB:cmdnam-L,DCLO/LB:tcmdnam-L,DCLO/LB:ovrnam1-L)

Arguments
label

Connects the entry to the root segment.
DClOjlB

Specifies the object library containing the modules in the overlays.
cmdnam-l

Specifies the title of the file that contains the PT.

The DeL Task

18-25

tcmdnam-L

Specifies the title of the file that contains the TT.
ovrnaml-L

Specifies the title of a file containing additional portions of the PT or TT.
This format allows a PT or a TT to invoke additional overlays containing portions of the PT or
TT. Since the PT and TT are read-only data, the additional overlay segments are loaded on top
of the overlay that is invoking them. When the DCL task returns from the overlay that was
invoked, it reloads the previous overlay. Control returns to the point in the previous overlay
from which the additional overlay was invoked.
Use the predefined syntax element $CALLOV to invoke additional overlays from a PT or a
TT. (See Section 18.10.5, for details on the $CALLOV predefined syntax element.) To specify
additional overlays, repeat the previous format. That is, for each additional overlay, specify an
additional argument to the MACRO-II directive .FCTR by using the following format:
DCLO/LB:ovrnam-L

Next, connect the new overlay entry to the root segment of the DCL task by adding the label
of the entry to the list of labels for other entries. The list of labels for other entries is found in
the overlay description file after the label OLAY. By convention, enter the labels in alphabetical
order. The following format shows the list of overlay entry labels:
OLAY:

.FCTR (11.12.13.14.15 ....• In)

The variables 11, 12, and so on, represent the labels for the overlay entries.
Because there are two overlay description files for building the DCL task (DCLBLD.ODL and
DCDBLD.ODL), you must make new overlay entries in both files. The format is the same for
both overlay description files.
For details on how to build the DCL task, see Section 18.4. For details on overlay structures,
see the RSX-llM-PLUS and Micro/RSX Task Builder Manual.
The last step required to add a command to the DCL task is the incorporation of all created
or modified files into the DCL task. The procedure for incorporating the PT, TT, and MCT is
described in the following section.

18.6.4 Incorporating the PTITT and MeT
The last step in adding new commands to DCL (assembly and task building) is accomplished
through the indirect command file [23,24]DCL.CMD, which is located on the same device as the
DCL source files. This file prompts for the name of a file containing the names of all modules
you have changed or created. The input file consists of one module name per line; each name
is entered without a file type or version number. The command file DCL.CMD assembles the
modules, updates the object libraries, and task builds the new version of DCL.
Before you run DCL.CMD, establish the appropriate environment, as follows:
•

Set your command line interpreter (CLI) to MCR.

•

Install the following tasks (if they are not already installed):
The MACRO-II Relocatable Assembler (MAC)
The Librarian Utility Program (LBR)

18-26 The DeL Task

The Peripheral Interchange Program (PIP)
The Task Builder (TKB)
•

Verify that the following files are present on your system and that you have access to them:
Your DCL source files
DCLO.OLB and DCLR.OLB (overlay and root library files for DCL)
DCLMAC.MAC and COMMAC.MAC (prefix files for DCL)
DCLBLD.CMD (task-build command file)
DCLBLD.ODL and DCDBLD.ODL (overlay descriptor files)
By default, DCL.CMD searches for the files in the User File Directory (UFD) with which it
is invoked.

•

Verify that the file RSXMC.MAC is in directory [11,10] on device LB:.

Then, invoke DCL.CMD with the following command line:
>
*Do you want expanded comments; [YIN]:

Answer Y (Yes) to this question.
process.

The comments in DCL.CMD direct the remainder of the

If all source files assemble correctly, DCL.CMD builds the DCL task. (See Section 18.4 for
information on how to determine if the DCL task was built correctly and how to install DCL as
a CLI.)

18.7 Deleting Commands
To delete a command from DCL, break the link between the MCT and the PTjTT by deleting the
appropriate COMMAND macro entry in the MCT, which is in the file COMMAND.MAC. Then,
incorporate the modified COMMAND.MAC file into the DCL task by following the procedure
outlined in the preceding section. You can also delete the entry in the overlay description files
and the object modules for the PT JTT in the DCLO.OLB library, but this step is optional.

18.8 Modifying Commands
Modifying an existing DCL command involves modifying the PT JTT files to reflect the desired
change and incorporating the modified files into the DCL task, as described in Section 18.4.

18.9 Attributes of Syntax Elements
Attributes associate characteristics with literal and nonliteral syntax elements. The parser
jtranslator processes attributes either before or after it processes the associated syntax elements
(depending on the attribute). The processing of attributes can influence the processing of the
associated syntax elements.

The DeL Task

18-27

Formats
<'literal

KEY=value KEY1=value ... >

Parameters
literal

Specifies the literal string in American Code for Information Interchange (ASCII).
label

Specifies the nonliteral (that is, the address of an AND or OR macro).
KEY

Specifies the attribute keyword identifying the attribute.
value

Specifies the· value assigned to the attribute.
Note the use of the angle brackets ( < and > ). Use these MACRO-tt symbols to indicate that
the enclosed parameters are to be considered as one argument (when expanding macros). Do
not confuse these MACRO-tt angle brackets with the angle brackets used to indicate non literals
in metalanguage notation.

18-28 The DeL Task

AND
18.9.1 AND
The AND attribute allows you to extend a syntax element by specifying a non literal that is a
logical AND to the syntax element. The primary function of AND IS to allow OR logic to be
mixed with AND logic. Assign a nonliteral to the AND attribute as follows:
AND=label

The label is the nonliteral address of an AND or OR macro.
AND instructs the parser/translator to process the AND or OR macro that the label (the
nonliteral) addresses. In addition, the parser/translator processes the syntax element with
which the AND attribute is associated.
Example

In the following MML definition for QUAL, the second syntax element defines the structure
FILE: :
QUAL:

OR
OR.
OR.
END
FNAME: AND
END

'BRIEF
<'FILE AND=FNAME>
'FULL
': $FILE

There are three syntax elements in this structure:
FILE

Specifies a literal to which the AND attribute connects the other syntax elements.

colon (:)

Specifies a literal, which connects to the literal FILE with the AND attribute.

Specifies a nonliteral, which also connects to the literal FILE with the AND
attribute.

By definition of the AND attribute, the parser/translator processes all three syntax elements as
one argument to the OR macro.

The DeL Task

18-29

Be/BS
18.9.2 Be and BS
Bit Clear (BC) and Bit Set (BS) attributes operate on two global bit-mask words. The BC attribute
instructs the parser/translator to clear the bits in these words; the BS attribute instructs the
parser/translator to set the bits.
Use the BCT and BST attributes to test these bits (see the next section).

Formats
BC=n

BC=<,n1>

BC=

BS=n

BS=<,n1>

BS=

Arguments
n

Selects a bit mask that specifies bits in the first global word.
nl

Selects a bit mask that specifies bits in the second global word.
Specify a bit mask by using logical OR, single-bit specifications with the exclamation point (!).
The symbols B1, B2, ... B32 are predefined to correspond to single-bit specifications for each
bit in the two global words.
For example, the expression BS=Bl!B2!B5 sets bits 1, 2, and 5 of the first global word. See
Section 18.9.3 for an example of how to use these attributes.

18-30

The DeL Task

BCT/BST
18.9.3 BCT and BST
Bit Clear Test (BCT) and Bit Set Test (BST) attributes test the status of bits in two global bit-mask
words. The BCT attribute instructs the parser/translator to test whether bits are cleared. The
BST attribute instructs the parser/translator to test whether bits are set. (See Section 18.9.2 for
information on how these bits are set or cleared.)
The parser/translator does not clear the two global bit-mask words between the parse and the
translation. You can use these words as part of the IFORM to pass information from a PT to
a TT.

Formats
BCT=n

BCT=<,n1>

BCT=

BST=n

BST=<,n1>

BST=

Arguments
n

Selects a bit mask that specifies bits in the first global word.
nl

Selects a bit mask that specifies bits in the second global word.
For example, the expression BST= <,B19!B31> tests whether bits 19 and 31 of the second
global bit-mask word are set.

Example
The following example illustrates the use of the BS, BC, SST, and BCT attributes:
COPY:

AND
END

FILE QUA=QUAL

FILE:

OR
OR.
END

<$NFIL
$FILE

BS=B1

BCT=B2!B3>

QUAL:

OR
OR.
END

<'INDEX
<'SEQUENTIAL

BS=B2
BS=B3

BCT=B1!B3>
BCT=B1!B2>

In this example, INDEX and SEQUENTIAL are qualifiers. $NFlL and $FILE are predefined
syntax elements: $NFIL represents a file specification that has a node name prefixing it; $FlLE
represents a file specification without a node name.
In the example, the following combinations are contradictory:
•

INDEX and SEQUENTIAL

•

INDEX and $NFIL

•

SEQUENTIAL and $NFIL

However, duplicates of each qualifier or attribute are not contradictory.

The DeL Task

18-31

BCT/BST
The BS attribute instructs the parser to set the specified bits if the processing of the associated
syntax elements is successful. The BCT instructs the parser to test the specified bits and to
determine whether or not they are clear.
H the tested bits are set, the parser does not process the associated syntax elements. Thus, bits
are set to remember which syntax elements process successfully. In addition, bits are tested to
determine if a contradiction would result from the processing of syntax elements.
The main difference between the BC, BCT, BS, and BST attributes and the CBM attribute
(described in Section 18.9.4) is as follows: CBM always prevents duplicate or contradictory
syntax; however, it cannot pass information from the parser to the translator.

18-32

The DeL Task

CBMjCCBM
18.9.4 CBM and CCBM
The Contradictory Bit Mask (CBM) attribute prevents the parser or translator from allowing
contradictory syntax. To indicate that two or more syntax elements cannot be specified in the
same command line, specify CBM with each syntax element. First, assign a bit mask as the
value to CBM. Then, specify the same bit in each bit mask associated with each contradictory
syntax element.
CBM conditionalizes the processing of the associated syntax element. The parser uses the
specified bit mask to set bits in two global words. If the parser detects that any bits specified in
the bit mask are already set in the two global words, then the parser assumes a contradiction.
The syntax element fails; consequently, CBM does not allow duplicate syntax elements.
Also, note that the parser/translator clears two global words between the parse and the
translation. Therefore, you cannot use CBM to pass information from a PT to a TT.
Format
CBM=n or CBM=<,nl>or CBM=

Arguments
n

Selects a bit mask that specifies bits in the first global word.
nl

Selects a bit mask that specifies bits in the second global word.
To use the CBM attribute, specify a bit mask with an exclusive OR operation on single-bit
specifications, as follows:
•

Use the symbols Bl, B2, ... , B32, which are predefined to correspond to a single-bit
specification.

•

Use the exclamation mark (!), which is the MACRO-II symbol for an exclusive OR
operation.

For example, CBM=Bl!B2!B5 specifies bits 1, 2, and 5 of the first global word, and
CBM= <,BI9!B31> specifies bits 19 and 31 of the second global word.
Example

The following example illustrates the use of the CBM attribute:
QUAL:

OR
OR.
OR.

<'LOCAL
<'LOGIN
<'GLOBAL

CBM=Bl!B2>
CBM=B2>
CBM=Bl>

END

The example specifies that the following combinations of literals are contradictory:
•

LOCAL and GLOBAL

•

LOCAL and LOGIN

Note that the literals LOGIN and GLOBAL are not contradictory.
The example also specifies that each of these elements can be used only once.

The DeL Task

18-33

CBM/CCBM
The Clear Contradictory Bit Mask (CCBM) attribute clears the bits in the two global words. The
format for specifying CCBM is identical to the format that you use to specify the CBM attribute.

18-34 The DeL Task

COP/OCOP
18.9.5 COP and OCOP
The Copy (COP) attribute is valid only in a PT and only with a literal syntax element. COP
passes a literal from the input DCL command line to the IFORM. The translator can then use
the literal in the MCR command line. The parser copies the literal to a character buffer and
attaches it to the mapping number last queued. If you specify a MAP attribute with the COP
attribute, the mapping number (assigned to the MAP attribute) is the mapping number last
queued.

Format
COP=T

To instruct the translator to copy the character buffer to the MCR command line, specify the
MAP attribute without specifying an associated syntax element, as follows:

When the translator processes a MAP attribute that has no associated syntax element, the
translator examines the mapping number queue element for an attached character buffer. If
a character buffer is found, the translator copies the contents of the character buffer to the
forming MCR command line buffer. If a character buffer is not found, the translator assumes a
null syntax element (which always processes successfully).
The Optional Copy (OCOP) attribute is identical to COP except for one significant difference.
OCOP instructs the parser to copy the literal to the IFORM whether or not the processing of
the literal succeeds. That is, the literal is optional and always succeeds if you associate OCOP
with it.

Examples
The following code defines a terminal specification:
TERM:

OR
OR.
OR.
OR.
END
AND <$ONUM.O.3>

This code parses and copies (as terminal names) the letters TT, VT, HT, or TI, followed by
an octal number. (See Section 18.10.1 for a description of $ONUM, which defines an octal
number.) The OCOP attribute assures the presence of the terminating colon by copying it into
a character buffer (whether or not the user types a colon).
The following example illustrates the use of the OCOP attribute:
DEV:

AND

<$ALF.2.2><$NUM.O.3>

The MML definition defines a device specification such that the colon on the end of the
specification is optional. The translator copies the colon to the output MCR command line
whether or not a colon is present in the input DCL command line.

The DeL Task

18-35

DIR
18.9.6 DIR
The Direction (DIR) attribute is valid only in the TT and only when you specify it with a MAP
attribute. DIR instructs the translator to search the IFORM queue for the specified mapping
number. The search procedes from the end of the queue to the beginning of the queue. (If you
do not specify the DIR attribute, the direction of the search is from the beginning of the queue
to the end of the queue.)
Format
DIR=R

Note

The double angle brackets are necessary when the contents of the brackets include a MACRO-II
separator character (in this case, the comma) that is to be treated as a literal by MML.
Example

The following example of a TT fragment illustrates the use of the DIR attribute:
FILE:

AND
END

«, .»FILE

This example defines, recursively, the structure of a file specification list. The file specifications
are mapped to mapping number 1. Due to the associated DIR attribute, the translator searches
for the mapping numbers in reverse order; thus, the list of file specifications is output to the
MCR command line in reverse order.

18-36

The DeL Task

ERR
18.9.7 ERR
The Error (ERR) attribute allows you to associate error messages with syntax elements. If the
parser or the translator fails to process a syntax element, and the syntax element has ERR
specified, then the parser or translator prints the error message specified and aborts the parse
or translation.

Formats
ERR=' string
ERR=label
label:

ERROR

Example
To specify an error message for the device being assigned, use the following MML notation in
the PT for the ASSIGN command:
AND

'ASSIGN <$DEV ERR=<'Invalid device»

If the parser cannot parse the input DeL command line text that corresponds to the device
specification $DEV, the parser aborts the parse and prints the following message:
ASSIGN -- Invalid device

The DeL Task

18-37

HLP
18.9.8 HLP
In a PT, the Help (HLP) attribute associates help text with syntax elements that are specified
with the PRO attribute (see Section 18.9.12). When the parser prompts for input and a user
types a question mark (?), the parser spawns a HELP command. The parser appends the text
specified in the HLP attribute to "HELP command." The "command" is the name of the DCL
command being processed.

Formats
HLP=' string
HLP=label
label:

HELP

Arguments
string

Specifies the string appended to the HELP command.
label

Specifies the label of a HELP macro.
The parser appends the string to the command "HELP command," where "command" is the
name of the current command being processed.

Example
AND

<$DEV PRO='Device? HLP=<'Logical name»

If you use this format to specify the PT for ASSIGN and a user types a question mark (?) in

response to the Device? prompt, the parser forms and spawns the command HELP ASSIGN
LOGICAL NAME.
This PT requires a file named DCLASSIGN.HLP containing the necessary help text. For
a description of help file format, see the RSX-11M-PLUS Command Language Manual or the
RSX-11M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual.

18-38 The DCL Task

MAP/DMAP
18.9.9 MAP and DMAP
The MAP attribute is valid in both the PT and the TT. However, the parser and the translator
interpret MAP differently. The following MAP attributes are valid in a parser table:
MAP=n

Instructs the parser to queue the specified primary mapping number n
to the IFORM queue only if the associated syntax element is successfully
parsed.

MAP= <,nl>

Instructs the parser to queue the specified secondary mapping number nl
to the IFORM queue only if the associated syntax element is sucessfully
parsed.

Note that specifying COP with MAP in a PT instructs the parser to create and attach a character
buffer to the mapping number and to copy the text parsed by the associated syntax element to
the attached character buffer. For additional details, see Section 18.10.3, which describes COP.
The following MAP attributes are valid in a translator table:
MAP=n

Instructs the translator to search the IFORM queue from beginning to end
for the specified primary mapping number n. If n is found, the translator
places the element in the MCR command line. If n is not found, nothing
happens.

MAP= <,n1>

Instructs the translator to search the IFORM queue for the secondary
mapping number nl. Because the object of the search is a secondary
(not primary) mapping number, the translator does not search the entire
IFORM queue. The translator starts searching at the last used primary
mapping number and stops the search at the next primary mapping
number. If the secondary mapping number is found, then the associated
syntax element is processed; otherwise, nothing happens.

MAP=

Instructs the translator to search the IFORM queue from beginning to end
for the specified primary mapping number n.
If n is found, the translator searches for the specified secondary mapping
number nl. If n1 is found, the associated syntax element is processed.
If nl is not found, then the translator searches for another occurrence of
primary mapping number n.
This search process continues until either all primary mapping numbers
n have been found and none of them have a secondary mapping number
nl after them, or until a primary mapping number n is found that does
have a secondary mapping number nl after it.

If you specify a MAP attribute in a TT without specifying an associated syntax element, the

translator examines the queue element containing the specified mapping number for an attached
character buffer. If the translator finds an attached character buffer, the translator copies the
contents of the buffer to the forming MCR command line buffer. If the translator does not
find an attached character buffer, the translator assumes a null syntax element (which always
processes successfully).

The DeL Task

18-39

MAP/DMAP
To allow additional flexibility in the search for secondary mapping numbers, the translator
supports the following additional formats for specifying the MAP attribute in a TT:
MAP=

Instructs the translator to search the IFORM queue from beginning to
end for the specified secondary mapping number n 1. If n 1 is found, the
translator processes the associated syntax element. If n1 is not found, the
associated syntax element fails to process.
The keyword X identifies this MAP attribute as an unconditional search
for a secondary mapping number.

MAP=

Instructs the translator to seach the IFORM queue for the secondary
mapping number n1. The keyword Xl instructs the translator to limit the
search of the queue. The search is started at the beginning of the queue
and proceeds until the first primary mapping number is detected.
If the secondary mapping number n 1 is not found, then another search is
conducted. The second search looks for the secondary mapping number
n1 such that it follows a negative primary mapping number. If n1 is
found following this search, the translator processes the associated syntax
element. If n1 is not found, nothing happens.

The MAP attribute X searches for a secondary number as if it were a primary number (that
is, unconditionally). The MAP attribute Xl searches for floating command qualifiers. (For
information on floating command qualifiers, see Section 18.9.13, which describes QUA.)
When the translator finds a mapping number and processes the associated syntax element, the
translator marks the mapping number as being in use. A used mapping number cannot be
found by the translator in a subsequent search. Thus, marking mapping numbers prevents
infinite loops in the TT. You do not need to specify termination conditions.
To override the marking of mapping numbers, use the TST attribute. To reset all marked
mapping numbers, use the $RESET predefined syntax element (PSE; see Section 18.10). $RESET
is useful for generating multiple MCR commands with the $NEW predefined syntax element.
The Duplicate map (DMAP) attribute is identical to MAP in most ways. However, it is only
allowed in a PT. DMAP instructs the parser not to queue the mapping number to the IFORM
queue if the same mapping number is already present in the queue. If the parser does not queue
the mapping number, then the syntax element that MAP is associated with fails to process.
Thus, the DMAP attribute can prevent duplicate syntax.
For additional information on the use of the MAP attribute, see Section 18.5.5.
When translating the DCL command MACRO to the MCR command MAC, the translator must
determine which (if any) input file specification has the qualifier ILIST appended to it. For
example, the translator must be able to determine (by means of information in the TT) that the
file specification C is specified with the ILIST qualifier in the following DCL command line:
MACRO A.B.C/LIST.D

The IFORM maps the DCL file specification that has the ILIST qualifier appended to it to the
correct position in the MCR command line.

18-40

The DeL Task

MAP/DMAP
The mapping can be understood more easily from the perspective of the translator. The
translator generates the MCR command MAC from left to right. When the translator reaches
the position in the output MCR command line where the list file must be placed, the translator
looks in the IFORM queue for the mapping number that represents the file specification and the
ILIST qualifier. Since the file specification and the qualifier are two distinct syntax elements,
there are two mapping numbers in the IFORM queue to represent them.
To express an association between elements in the IFORM queue, use primary and secondary
mapping numbers. Secondary mapping numbers (such as 51) have meaning only as related to
primary mapping numbers (such as PI).
Due to the recursive definition of FILES, which represents the input file specifications, identical
map numbers may be placed in the IFORM queue. However, the left-to-right positioning
of the PI map numbers distinguishes them from one another. To find the PI map number
that represents the file specification with the ILIST qualifier, the translator searches for a PI
map number directly followed by an 51 map number. There can be no intervening Pn map
numbers. To instruct the translator to perform such a search in MML, use the argument
> (see the label LST).
If a reference is made to a secondary map number without specifying a primary map number,
the translator looks for a secondary map number associated with the primary map number that
was used last.

Examples
Parser Table
TERM:

AND 'TERMINAL: <$DEV,MAP=2>
END

Translator Table
MRET:

AND 'TERM=
END

Shows the use of primary mapping numbers with predefined syntax elements.
DCL file specifications, device specifications, and numbers map to themselves. So, when a user
enters a file specification, device specification, or number, the same information is output.
In this example, a terminal device specification is being mapped to itself. The parser table
specifies the following sequence of instructions at label TERM:
1. Place the mapping number P2 in the IFORM queue if the input command line matches a
device specification $DEV.
2.

Attach a character buffer to this queue element.

Copy the device specification to the attached character buffer.

The translator table specifies the following instruction at label MRET:
If P2 is in the IFORM queue, then output the contents of any attached buffer to the forming
MCR command line.

The DeL Task

18-41

MAPjDMAP
Parser Table

FILES:
MORE:

AND
END
AND
END
AND
END

'MACRO FILES
<$FILE MAP=l><'/LIST OPT=T MAP=<,l»
«' ,»FILES

Translator Table

LST:

AND
END
AND
END
SELIF:

'MAC '= SELIF
«',»

Illustrates the use of the NO attribute. In this example, the parser attempts to parse either
NOLIST, -LIST, or LIST. If LIST is parsed, the parser adds the mapping number 10 to the
IFORM queue. If either NOLIST or -LIST is parsed, the parser queues the mapping number 11.

The DeL Task

18-43

OPTjOPTR
18.9.11 OPT and OPTR
The Optional (OPT) attribute indicates that a syntax element is not required. You can use OPT
in both the PT and the TT. The parser and the translator interpret OPT identically.
Use the Optional Repeat (OPTR) attribute in the same way to indicate that a syntax element is
not required. In addition, use OPTR to indicate that the syntax' element can be used repeatedly
in the parse/translation until a failure results. In other words, the presence of OPTR indicates
that the syntax element can be used to parse or translate syntax from zero to an infinite number
of times.

Formats
OPT=T
OPTR=T

If the OPT and AND attributes are used in the same syntax element, the OPT modifies the
AND. That is, the OPT does not modify the entire syntax element.

Examples
To specify that qualifiers (label QUAL) are optional syntax in the ASSIGN command, use the
following MML notation:
AND

'ASSIGN ...

The parser goes to label QUAL and processes the syntax defined at label QUAL. If the parser
cannot process a syntax element in an AND macro, it assumes that the AND macro itself has
failed. The OPT=T attribute tells the parser to ignore the failure and to continue processing the
AND macro with the next left-to-right argument to the macro.
Similarly, to specify that qualifiers (label QUAL) are optional syntax in the ASSIGN command
and that the qualifiers can be used repeatedly in the input command line, use the following
MML notation:
AND

'ASSIGN ...

The parser goes to label QUAL and processes the syntax defined at the label. If the syntax
element in the AND macro fails, the element cannot be used in the parse. If the syntax element
was required, the failure of the element would imply the failure of the AND macro. However,
the OPTR=T attribute tells the parser that the syntax element is optional; so, the parser ignores
the failure and continues processing the AND macro with the next left-to-right argument. As
long as the syntax element defined at label QUAL matches the input command, the parser uses
the element repeatedly.
The following example is a fragment of code based on the LINK command translator table. The
TT specifies a TKB switch that can be specified with or without arguments attached.

PRIV:

18-44

OR.
END

<'/PR MAP=1 AND=PRIV OPT=T>

AND
END

The DeL Task

OPTjOPTR
In the example, the optional argument to the jPR switch is attached to mapping number 3.
The OPT applies to AND=PRIV and not to the entire syntax element. If the OPT attribute is
applied to the entire syntax element, then the entire OR macro (of which this fragment is a
part) would always succeed.

The DeL Task

18-45

PRO
18.9.12 PRO
The Prompt (PRO) attribute associates prompt strings with syntax elements. If the parser detects
end-of-line while processing a syntax element that has the PRO attribute specified, the parser
prints the prompt string specified, and suspends itself to wait for more input. The parser
appends any input received to the input DCL command line. PRO is valid only in the PT; the
translator does not prompt.

Formats
PRO='string
PRO=label
label:

PROMPT

Arguments
string

Specifies the ASCII string to be used as the prompt string.
lobel

Specifies the MACRO-II label for a MACRO-II PROMPT macro.
Thus, specify the prompt string directly after the equal sign (=) or as the argument to the
PROMPT macro. The PROMPT macro allows global prompt strings, which conserve space.

Example
The following example illustrates the use of the PRO attribute:
AND

<$DEV PRO='Device?><$DEV PRO=PRODEV>

PRODEV:

PROMPT

The command requires two device specifications ($DEV). If the parser expects the first $DEV
but reaches the end of the line, then the parser prompts as follows:
Device?

If the parser expects the second $DEV but reaches the end of the line, then the parser prompts
as follows:
Logical device?

18-46

The DeL Task

QUA

18.9.13 QUA
The Qualifier (QUA) attribute specifies qualifiers. You can specify floating or positional qualifiers.

Floating qualifiers are qualifiers that are valid anywhere in the input DeL command line.
Positional qualifiers are qualifiers that are valid only at specific positions in the input DeL
command line or output MeR command line.
The positional form of the QUA attribute is valid in both a PT and a TT. The floating form is
valid only in a PT.

Format
QUA=label

The label is a nonliteral; that is, it represents the address of an AND or an OR macro.
When the QUA attribute is used in a PT and the parser encounters a slash (/) in an appropriate
location, it attempts to match the text following the slash with one of the elements of the AND
or OR macro at the specified label. If an end-of-line is encountered after the slash, the parser
issues a prompt. If an invalid qualifier is given, then an error message is printed and the parse
is aborted. The list of qualifiers is repeatedly scanned until all qualifiers in the input comm"and
line have been parsed.
To specify a positional QUA attribute, use QUA as part of a syntax element. For example:

QUAL:

AND
END

<'ASSIGN,3 QUA=QUAL>$DEV $DEV

OR
OR.
OR.
OR.
END

<'GLOBAL, 1>
<'LOCAL,3>
<'LOGIN,3>
TERM

In this example, any qualifiers (such as /GLOBAL) must immediately follow ASSIGN in the
command line. (See the Examples section for more details on how the QUA attribute works.)
To specify floating qualifiers, use QUA as a separate argument to an AND macro, not as part of
another argument. The parser attempts to match the qualifiers defined at the label before and
after it processes each argument of the AND macro. That is, the qualifiers float before and after
each syntax element defined by the AND macro. In addition, the parser attempts to parse the
floating qualifiers after any prompts. If you are using QUA to specify floating qualifiers, it must
be an argument to an AND macro, rather than an AND. extension macro. The floating-qualifier
form of QUA is valid only in a PT.

Examples

QUAL:

AND
END

'ASSIGN, 3 $DEV $DEV QUA=QUAL

OR
OR.
OR.
OR.
END

<'LOCAL,3>
<'LOGIN,3>
<'GLOBAL, 1>
TERM

Illustrates the floating-qualifier form of QUA. The label QUAL defines the allowable qualifiers.
The parser checks for the qualifiers before, between, and after the $DEV syntax elements. Before

The DeL Task 18-47

QUA

the parser transfers parsing control to the OR macro at label QUAL, the parser attempts to parse
the slash (/) character.
If the parser successfully parses the slash, it attempts to parse the qualifiers defined at label
QUAL. If the parser detects the end of the input DeL command line after it parses a slash
character, the parser prompts for more input.
If a slash is detected and the qualifiers defined at label QUAL fail to process, the parser issues
an error message and aborts the parse. The parser repeatedly attempts to parse the qualifiers
until it no longer can parse a slash character.

Thus, using QUA in the previous example is equivalent to the following:

QUAL:

AND
END

$DEV $DEV

AND

'I
<'LOGIN,2>
< 'GLOBAL, 1>

The following example illustrates the use of the QUA attribute in a TT:
ASN::

AND «'ASN»'=
END

LAUQ:

OR <'GBL
MAP=4>
OR. <'LOGIN MAP=3>
OR. MRET
END

The label LAUQ defines the MeR switches equivalent to the DeL qualifiers. The parser and the
translator process QUA in the same way. However, instead of parsing the input DeL command
line for qualifiers, the translator uses the qualifiers to construct the equivalent MeR command
line.
QUA automatically includes slashes before each switch.

18-48

The DeL Task

TST
18.9.14 TST
The Test (TST) attribute is valid only in a TT and only when specified with MAP. This attribute
instructs the translator not to mark a mapping element used in a translation as having been
used.
Format
TST=T

Example
MCRCOP: OR
OR.
OR.
END

MAP=2 TST=T>
MAP=3>

Illustrates the use of the TST attribute. In this example, the OR macros instruct the translator
to process the nonliteral PIP if either mapping numbers 1 or 2 are in the IFORM queue or to
process the nonliteral NFT if mapping number 3 is in the IFORM queue. The TST attribute
associated with the syntax element PIP instructs the translator not to mark mapping numbers
2 or 3 as having been used. This allows the syntax defined at label PIP to use these mapping
numbers.

The DeL Task

18-49

18.10 Predefined Syntax Elements
Predefined syntax elements (PSEs) are syntax elements defined for use by all DCL command
tables. PSE names, by convention, are distinguished from local category names by having a
dollar sign ($) as their first character.
If the syntax of a command does not match that of a predefined syntax element, then the parse
fails. Several PSEs have two forms: one ends with an E and one does not, such as $NOD
and $NODE, $FIL and $FILE, or $DEV and $DEVE. The form ending in an E produces an
error message before aborting the parse; the shorter form does not. Use the shorter form when
defining optional syntax.

The following list briefly defines the PSEs. Note that some PSEs require arguments. Specify
the required arguments in the order shown. Also, to allow the MACRO-tt assembler to treat
the PSE and arguments as one argument, enclose the PSE and its arguments in angle brackets.

18.10.1 Basic Data Types
The following list of PSEs define basic data types in MML. You can use them only in a PT. The
parser copies to an IFORM character buffer the text in the input DCL command line that fits the
structure defined by the PSE. The buffer is attached to the last queued mapping number and
can be accessed by the translator for use in constructing the equivalent MCR command line.
Basic Data Type Syntax Elements
$NUM,A 1,A2

Defines the structure or syntax of a decimal numeric string (0 to 9). The arguments At and
A2 designate the minimum and maximum length, respectively, for the numeric string.
The PSE allows an optional decimal point on the end of the string; however, the decimal
point is not copied to the IFORM character buffer.
$DNUM,A 1,A2

Defines the structure or syntax of a decimal numeric string (0 to 9). The arguments At and
A2 designate the minimum and maximum length, respectively, for the numeric string.
The PSE allows an optional decimal point on the ~nd of the string. The decimal point
is copied to the IFORM character buffer (whether or not it is specified in the input DCL
command line).
$ONUM,A 1,A2

Defines the structure or syntax of an octal numeric string (0 to 7). The arguments At and
A2 designate the minimum and maximum length, respectively, for the numeric string.
$WONUM,A 1,A2

Defines the structure or syntax of $ONUM or the wildcard character ( *). The arguments At
and A2 designate the minimum and maximum length, respectively, for the numeric string.
$DONUM,A 1,A2[.]

Defines the structure or syntax of a decimal or octal numeric string (0 to 9). The arguments
At and A2 designate the minimum and maximum length, respectively, for the numeric
string.

18-50 The DeL Task

The PSE allows an optional decimal point on the end of the string. The decimal point is
copied to the IFORM character buffer if either the input DCL command line or the parsed
string contains the characters 8 or 9.
$WDONUM,A l,A2

Defines the structure or syntax of $DONUM or an asterisk character ("'). The arguments Al
and A2 designate the minimum and maximum length, respectively, for the numeric string.
$BNUM,A l,A2

Defines the structure or syntax of a binary numeric string (0 to 1). The arguments Al and
A2 designate the minimum and maximum length, respectively, for the numeric string.
$ALF,A l,A2

Defines the structure or syntax of an alphabetic string (A to Z). The arguments Al and A2
designate the minimum and maximum length for the alphabetic string.
$ALFN,A l,A2

Defines the structure or syntax of an alphanumeric string (0 to 9 and/or A to Z). The
arguments Al and A2 designate the minimum and maximum length for the alphanumeric
string.
$WALFN,A l,A2

Defines the structure or syntax of $ALFN with asterisk ("') and percent sign ( % ) characters.
(These characters are used by some RSX-IIM-PLUS utilities as wildcard characters.) The
arguments Al and A2 designate the minimum and maximum length for the alphanumeric
string.
$R50,A l,A2

Defines the structure or syntax of a Radix-50 string (0 to 9, A to Z, dollar sign, and period).
The arguments Al and A2 designate the minimum and maximum length for the Radix-50
string.

18.10.2 Common Command Elements
The following PSEs define parts of the DCL command grammar. You can use them only in a
PT. The text (except for $DATE) parsed from the input DCL command line that fits the structure
defined by the PSE is copied to an IFORM character buffer that is attached to the last queued
mapping number.
'

The DeL Task

18-51

Common Command Syntax Elements
$FIL

Defines the structure or syntax of a file specification. Each element explicitly included in
the file specification sets a bit in the global bit-mask words, as follows:
Element

Bit Setting

Device

B28

User Identification
Code (UIC)

B29

File name

B30

File type

B31

File version

B32

These bits are also set by the other $FIL-based predefined syntax elements.
$FILE

Defines the structure or syntax of $FlL. Also, if the parser fails to process $FILE, the parser
issues an error message and aborts the parse.
$WFIL

Defines the structure or syntax of $FIL. Also, the wildcard characters (the asterisk and the
percent sign) are allowed as part of the file specification.
$WFILE

Defines the structure or syntax of $WFlL. Also, if the parser fails to process $WFlLE, the
parser issues an error message and aborts the parse.
$NFIL

Defines the structure or syntax of $WFlL if preceded by a DECnet node specification.
$NFILE

Defines the structure or syntax of $NFlL. Also, if the parser fails to process $NFILE, the
parser issues an error message and aborts the parse.
$IFIL

Defines the structure or syntax of $FlL. Also, the indirect file indicator (@) must prefix the
file specification.
$IFILE

Defines the structure or syntax of $IFIL. Also, if the parser fails to process $IFILE, the parser
issues an error message and aborts the parse.
$NOD

Defines the structure or syntax of a DECnet node name specification.

18-52 The DeL Task

$NODE

Defines the structure or syntax of $NOD. Also, if the parser fails to process $NODE, the
parser issues an error message and aborts the parse.
$DEV

Defines the structure or syntax of a device specification.
$DEVE

Defines the structure or syntax of $DEV. Also, if the parser fails to process $DEVE, the
parser issues an error message and aborts the parse.
$ODEV

Defines the structure or syntax of $DEV. Also, the colon character (:) is optional syntax.
$ODEVE

Defines the structure or syntax of $ODEV. Also, if the parser fails to process $ODEVE, the
parser issues an error message and aborts the parse.
$UIC

Defines the structure or syntax of a UFD specification.
$UICE

Defines the structure or syntax of $UIC. Also, if the parser fails to process $UICE, the parser
issues an error message and aborts the parse.
$WUIC

Defines the structure or syntax of $UIC. Also, the wildcard character (the asterisk) is allowed
as part of the UIC specification.
$WUICE

Defines the structure or syntax of $WUIC. Also, if the parser fails to process $WUICE, the
parser issues an error message and aborts the parse.
$OUIC

Defines the structure or syntax of $UIC. Also, the left square bracket ([), the right square
bracket (]), and the comma (,) are optional syntax.
$OUICE

Defines the structure or syntax of $OUIC. Also, if the parser fails to process $OUICE, the
parser issues an error message and aborts the parse.
$DATE

Defines the structure or syntax of a date specification. A date specification can take one of
two forms: mm/dd/yy or dd-mmm-yy. $DATE produces the following data structures in
the IFORM queue: the day is attached to secondary mapping number 210, the month is
attached to secondary mapping number 211, and the year is attached to secondary mapping
number 212. The output format is always dd-mmm-yy (with the first three characters of
the month name spelled out) even if the slash format (with the number of the month) is
used.

The DeL Task

18-53

$DAlEl

Defines secondary mapping numbers 213, 214, and 215 for the day, month, and year,
respectively. Otherwise, $DATE1 is identical to $DATE.
$DATE1 serves as a second PSE for commands that require two dates (for example, SINCE
and THROUGH).
$lIME

Defines the structure or syntax of a time specification. The time specification is of the form
hh:mm[:ss].

18.10.3 Special Parser Elements
You can specify the following PSEs only in a PT.

Special Parser Syntax Elements
$All,label

Defines the syntax or structure of an arbitrary string of characters. $ALL matches
all characters in the command line (left-to-right) until anyone of a set of specified
terminating characters is detected. The set of terminating characters are specified with
the TERMINATORS macro. The label is a label on the TERMINATORS macro. The text
parsed from the input DCL command line that fits the structure defined by $ALL is copied
to an IFORM character buffer that is attached to the last queued mapping number.
The following is an example of $ALL with the TERMINATORS macro:

AND.

EXCEPT: TERMINATORS '"

,) '] SEOL

This example allows commas, quotation marks (1/), and right angle brackets (]) as
terminators, in addition to the $EOL predefined syntax element.
$EOl

Parses end-of-line characters. For instance, in the previous example, a carriage return or
escape character is also acceptable as a terminator.
$eoP/1it

Instructs the parser to copy the specified literal, 'lit, unconditionally to an IFORM character
buffer. The IFORM character buffer is always attached to the last queued mapping number.
$COP does not define syntax.

18-54

The DeL Task

$DSB

Instructs the parser not to skip blanks. Normally, blanks are ignored. $DSB and $ESB must
be in the same syntax element, such as AND or OR, but they do not need to be on the
same line.
$DSB (disable skip blanks) does not define syntax.
$ESB

Restores the default state, which is to ignore blanks.
For example, a file specification cannot include blanks. The following could define a file
specification:
$DSB $DEV $urc <$ALFN.O.9>'. <$ALFN.O.3>'; <$ONUM.O.3>$ESB

(The actual file specification definition is more complex. This is only an example.)
$ESB (enable skip blanks) does not define syntax.
$DDR

Instructs the parser to disable delimiter recognition. Delimiter recognition is enabled by
default and instructs the parser to ensure that all literal syntax elements have delimiting
characters terminating them. $DDR must be used on the same line with $EDR.
$DDR does not define syntax.
$EDR

Enables delimiter recognition. This is the default case.
For example, the following line allows you to attach the first one to three characters to one
mapping number while the remainder are attached to another.
COM1: AND $DDR <$R50.1.3 MAP=1><$R50.0.7 MAP=2>$EDR
END

Notice that no delimiting character distinguishes the two strings, and the second string may
be null.
$SEP

Defines the colon (:) or equal sign (=) for use as separators between qualifiers and
arguments.
$OSEP

Defines an optional separator (a colon, equal sign, or null argument).
$CSEP

Defines the colon (:) or equal sign (=) for use as separators between qualifiers and
arguments. Then, it copies a colon to the IFORM.
$COSEP

Defines an optional separator (a colon, equal sign, or null argument) and copies a colon to
the IFORM (even if no input is received).

The DeL Task

18-55

$FSEP

Defines the comma (,) and plus sign (+) as file specification separators.
$TERM

Defines a terminal specification and copies it to the IFORM.
$PROC

Defines a processor name for the Queue Manager (QMG) as either a device name followed
by a colon or six Radix-50 characters followed by a colon.
$PRONC

Defines a processor name for the Queue Manager (QMG) as a device name followed by a
colon or six Radix-50 characters not followed by a colon.

18.10.4 Special Translator Elements
You can specify the following PSEs only in a TT.

Translator Syntax Elements
$NEW

Indicates the start of an additional MCR command line. $NEW instructs the dispatcher
subprocess of the DCL task that there are multiple MCR commands that must be dispatched
serially.
$RESET

Resets the IFORM queue. Resetting the IFORM queue allows all used mapping numbers to
be reused. $RESET is designed to be used with $NEW to define multiple MCR commands.
$FNAM

Specifies that only the file name in a file specification is to be copied to the MCR command
line buffer as a result of unmapping a mapped file specification.
$SY

Converts the assigned device for SY: to ASCII and appends it to the MCR command line;
for example, DB2.
$11

Converts the assigned terminal device for TI: to ASCII and appends it to the MCR command
line; for example, TTI5.
$CUIC

Converts the current VIC for the user to ASCII and appends it to the MCR command line;
for example, [301,113].
$LUIC

Converts the login VIC for the user to ASCII and appends it to the MCR command line.

18-56

The DeL Task

18.10.5 Program Control Elements
You can specify the following predefined syntax elements in either a PT or a TT.

Program Control Syntax Elements
$JSR,A

Gains control of the central processing unit (CPU). The argument A must be the label of a
MACRO-II subroutine. To indicate failure, the MACRO-II subroutine should (on return)
set the carry bit to indicate failure and clear it to indicate success.
The routine must be in the blank program section.
$TST

Tests if a mapping number is in the IFORM queue. A MAP attribute specifies the mapping
number. $T5T succeeds only if the mapping number is in the IFORM queue; for example,
<$T5T MAP=I> .
$TSTNOT

Tests if a mapping number is not in the IFORM queue. A MAP attribute specifies the
mapping number. $T5TNOT succeeds only if the mapping number is not in the IFORM
queue. The syntax is identical to $T5T.
$LOAD,name

Loads an overlay from a parser or translator table. The argument name specifies the name
of the overlay as specified in the overlay description file.
$CALLOV,name

Loads and activates part of either a parser or translator table. The starting address within
the overlay must be contained in the first word of the overlay. Use .WORD to specify the
address. On return, the previous overlay is loaded. The argument (name) specifies the
name of the overlay as specified in the overlay description file.
$NULL

Executes attributes without specifying a syntax element. $NULL succeeds if the attributes
succeed.
$AB

Passes the left angle bracket ( <) as an argument to the MACRO-II assembler. $AB (angle
bracket) is equivalent to the left angle bracket literal.
$BA

Passes the right angle bracket (> ) as an argument to the MACRO-II assembler. $BA is
equivalent to the right angle bracket literal.

The DeL Task

18-57

18.10.6 Example from DCl Command Tables
The following is an example of the DCL command tables used to translate the DCL commands
ASSIGN, ASSIGN/QUEUE, ASSIGN/REDIRECT, and ASSIGN/TASK, to the equivalent MCR
commands (ASN, QUE, RED, and REA) .
. TITLE ASSIGN
.IDENT /00/
.PSECT .CDEF
.ENABL LC
THIS SOFTWARE IS FURNISHED UNDER A LICENSE AND MAY
BE USED OR COPIED ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS
OF SUCH LICENSE.
COPYRIGHT (c) 1987 BY DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
FUNCTION:
TRANSLATE THE DCL COMMANDS 'ASSIGN'. 'ASSIGN/QUEUE'. 'ASSIGN/REDIRECT'.
'ASSIGN/TASK' TO THE SEMANTICALLY EQUIVALENT MCR COMMANDS 'ASN'. 'QUE'.
'RED' . 'REA'.
;THE FOLLOWING TABLE DEFINES THE MAPPING OF THE DCL TO MCR SYNTAX:
;DCL SYNTAX ELEMENT

.·_-----------------

MCR SYNTAX ELEMENT

------------------

MAPPING LETTER/NUMBER
---------------------

;
;

Pl
P2

;
;

P3
P4

;
;
;

P5
P6
P7

;
;
;/GLOBAL
;/LOGIN
;/TERMINAL=

/GBL
/LOGIN
/TERM=

P8.
P9.
Pl0.
P11.
P12 .

. PAGE
ASSIGN: :

QUEUE:

18-58

OR
END

AND
AND.
END

,/ <'QUEUE.l><$PRONC MAP=l PRO=$QNMSG ERR=$BQMSG>
<$PROC MAP=2 PRO=$PRMSG ERR=$IPMSG>

The DeL Task

REDIR:

AND
AND.
END

II <'REDlRECT.l><$ODEVE MAP=3 PRO=$FRMSG>
<$ODEVE MAP=4 PRO=$TOMSG>

TASK:

AND
AND.
AND.
END

II <'TASK.2>$OSEP <$R50.1.6 MAP=5 PRO=$TKMSG ERR=$ITMSG>
<$ODEVE MAP=6 PRO=$DVMSG>
<$DNUM.l.5 MAP=7 PRO=$LUMSG ERR=$NEMSG>
.TITLE ASSIGN
.IDENT 1001
THE DCL TASK

LOGDEV: AND
END
QUAL:
OR
OR.
OR.
OR.
OR.
END
. PAGE
MCRASN: :
OR
END

<$ODEVE MAP=8. PRO=$DVMSG><$ODEVE MAP=9. PRO=$LDMSG>QUA=QUAL
<'GLOBAL.l MAP=10. CBM=Bl!B2>
<'LOCAL.3 CBM=Bl>
<'LOGIN.3 MAP=ll. CBM=Bl>
<'SYSTEM.l MAP=10. CBM=Bl!B2>
<$TERM MAP=12. CBM=B2>

QUE:

AND
END

«I QUE» IlAS:

RED:

AND
END

«'RED»'=

REA:

AND
END

«'REA»«'»«'»

ASN:

AND
END
OR
OR.
OR.
END
AND
END
.ENABLE
ERROR
PROMPT
PROMPT
ERROR
ERROR
PROMPT
PROMPT
PROMPT
PROMPT
PROMPT
PROMPT
.DSABLE
. END

«'ASN»'=

LAUQ:

VTERM:
$BQMSG:
$DVMSG:
$FRMSG:
$IPMSG:
$ITMSG:
$LDMSG:
$LUMSG:
$PRMSG:
$QNMSG:
$TKMSG:
$TOMSG:

<'GBL MAP=10.>
<'LOGIN MAP=l1.>
<'TERM= AND=VTERM>

The DeL Task

18-59

Chapter 19
Using the Catchall Task
The RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX operating systems include a catchall task (TDX) that
"catches" commands that are not recognized by the DIGITAL Command Language (DCL) or the
Monitor Console Routine (MCR). If MCR receives an unrecognized command, it searches for a
task with that name and passes the command line to TDX. TDX allows you to run uninstalled
tasks and to abbreviate command names.
RSX-I1M-PLUS and Micro/RSX systems install TDX on your system for you. However, any
task installed with the task name ... CA. is treated as a catchall task. The catchall task image is
in the system library directory (usually directory [3,54]) and is named TDX.TSK. Once installed,
TDX checks the typed command against its list of commands. If the commands match, TDX
translates the command into a valid MCR command. The following section describes the TDX
commands and their corresponding MCR commands.

19. 1 lOX Commands
TDX commands are a shorter way of specifying MCR commands and qualifiers. Table 19-1
lists the TDX commands, their MCR translations, and the definition for each command.
Table 19-1: TOX Command Summary
TDX Command

MCR Translation

Command Meaning

ATS

ACT /ALL

Displays the names of all active tasks in the
system.

ATS ttnn:

ACT /TERM=ttnn:

Displays the names of all active tasks on the
specified terminal.

CHD

SET /DEF

Displays the current default directory for
terminal TI:.

Using the Catchall Task

19-1

Table 19-1 (Cont.):

TOX Command Summary

TDX Command

MCR Translation

Command Meaning

CHDgm

SET IDEF=[g,m]

Changes the current default directory to
the directory specified in named directory
mode. In nonamed directory mode, changes
the current default directory and, if privileged, the protection User Identification
Code (UIC).

CHU

SET IUIC

Displays the protection UIC for terminal TI:
and, if in nonamed directory mode, the
default User File Directory (UFD).

CHUgm

SET IUIC=[g,m]

Changes the current protection UIC to the
UIC specified in named directory mode
(privileged command). In nonamed directory mode, changes the default directory
and, if privileged, the protection VIC.

CLR

None

Clears the issuing terminal's screen and sets
the cursor to 0,0. Returns exit status of
EX$SUC (if the terminal is a video terminal)
and EX$WAR (if it is not).

CRE file

PIP file=TI:

Creates a new file without invoking an
editor.

CVT val

None

Evaluates an arithmetic expression, converts
that expression into different formats, and
displays all the formats on your terminal.
CVT accepts input in octal (nnn or nn,nn)
or decimal (nnn. or nn.,nn.) words or bytes,
hexadecimal numbers ($nnnn), Radix-50
(%ccc) or ASCII ('C or "cc" characters, or
arithmetic expressions using +, -, I, *,
and < .)

DLG

DEV ILOG

Displays information about all the logged-in
terminals on the system.

DLN

NCP SHOW KNOWN NODES

Displays all known DECnet nodes.

FRE

PIP IFR

Displays the amount of available space on
SY:, the largest contiguous space on SY:,
the number of available file headers, and
the number of file headers used.

19-2 Using the Catchall Task

Table 19-1 (Cont.):

TOX Command Summary

TDX Command

MCR Translation

Command Meaning

FRE ddu:

PIP ddu:/FR

Displays the same information as FRE for a
specified device.

SHQ

QUE/LI

Displays information about all entries in all
print queues.

SYS

SET /SYSUIC

Displays the current system UIC.

TDX

None

Displays the current version of TDX.

19.2 Understanding How lOX Works
TDX works in three different ways, depending on how you make logical assignments for the
pseudo device ZZ. In each case, if you type a DCL command, the system executes the command
normally.
The subsections that follow describe how the three different assignments affect TDX.

19.2.1 No ZZ Pseudo Device Assigned
When you receive your system, there are no logical assignments for the ZZ pseudo device. If
you type a command that is not part of DCL, the system processes the command as follows:
1.

The system passes the command to the MCR commmand dispatcher.

2. If the unknown command is three characters long, the system looks for an installed task of
that name and runs it.
For example, if you type XYZ, DCL passes the command to the command dispatcher (MCR).
MCR looks for an installed task named ... XYZ and runs it.
3. If the unknown command is not the name of an installed task, or if it is longer than three
characters, the command fails and the system prints an error message.
Thus, one way to add a custom command is to write a task that does whatever you want it to
do. Then, install the task with a name of the form ... abc, where abc is the 3-character string
you want to use as a custom command name. For more information, see the description of
the INSTALL command in the RSX-11M-PLUS MCR Operations Manual, the RSX-llM-PLUS
Command Language Manual, or the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 1.

Using the Catchall Task

19-3

19.2.2 Pseudo Device ZZ 1 Assigned
If you assign the pseudo device ZZl to the system disk, you activate the flying install behavior
of the catchall task. You can do the assignment by typing the following command line:
$

If ZZl is assigned and you type a command that is not part of DeL, the system processes the
command as follows:

1. The system passes the command to the MeR commmand dispatcher.
2.

If the unknown command is three characters long, the system looks for an installed task of
that name and runs it if it finds it.

For example, if you type XYZ, DeL passes the command to the command dispatcher (MeR).
MeR looks for an installed task named ... XYZ and runs it.
3. If the unknown command is not the name of an installed task, or if it is longer than three
characters, TDX issues a RUN command. TDX uses the unknown command as the task
name.
For example, if the command is SHRINK, the catchall task issues a RUN $SHRINK command.
The dollar sign ($) tells the system to search the system directory (usually [1,54]), then
the system library directory (usually [3,54]), for a task image file named SHRINK.TSK. If
the task exists in either of the directories, the catchall task runs it using the name SHRTn,
where n is the number of the terminal from which the command was issued. The task is
removed after execution completes.
4. If the RUN $ command fails, the system prints an error message.
(For information on using the RUN command with the dollar sign, see the RSX-llM-PLUS
MCR Operations Manual, the RSX-11M-PLUS Command Language Manual, or the Micro/RSX
User's Guide, Volume 1.)
Use the flying install behavior to run tasks that typically are not used enough to warrant
installing them permanently. You should not do this with tasks that require a larger increment
than the default.

19.2.3 Pseudo Device ZZ2 ASSigned
If you assign the pseudo device ZZ2 to the system disk, you activate the flying Indirect behavior
of t~e catchall task. You can do the assignment by typing the following command line:
$

If ZZ2 is assigned, and you type a command that is not part of DeL, the system processes the
command as follows:

It passes the command to the MeR commmand dispatcher.

If the unknown command is three characters long, the system looks for an installed task of
that name and runs it if it finds it.

For example, if you type XYZ, DeL passes the command to the command dispatcher (MeR).
MeR looks for an installed task named ...XYZ and runs it.

19-4 Using the Catchall Task

3. If the unknown command is not the name of an installed task, or if it is longer than three
characters, TDX tries to invoke an indirect command file. TDX uses the unknown command
as the command file name, and TDX looks for the file in your login directory.
For example, if you type in XYZ and your login directory is [303,5], TDX looks for a directory
called 303005.DIR and looks in that directory for a file named XYZ.CMD. If such a file
exists, then TDX invokes it.
If the unknown command was more than three characters long, TDX uses only the first
three characters; the rest are ignored.

Note
Because your login UIC does not change when you issue a SET DEFAULT
or SET UIC command, your default directory or UIC does not affect TDX.
4. If there is no directory named for your login UIC, or if the directory does not contain the
command file, TDX looks for the file in the system library directory. If the file exists, TDX
invokes it.
5. If the library directory does not contain the command file, TDX looks in your login directory
for a command file named CATCHALL.CMD. If the file exists, TDX assigns the value XYZ
to symbol PI and invokes CATCHALL.CMD. PI is passed to the command file for further
processing.
For an example of a CATCHALL.CMD file, see Example 19-1. For more information on
using symbols (such as PI) with Indirect, see the RSX-11M-PLUS Indirect Command Processor
Manual or the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 1.
6. If there is no such command file in your login directory, the catchall task looks for
CATCHALL.CMD in the system library directory. If the file exists, the catchall task assigns
the value XYZ to symbol PI and invokes CATCHALL.CMD. PI is passed to the command
file for further processing.
You can use this behavior of the catchall task not only for adding commands to the system but
also for controlling which users can issue which commands. Also, the path from directory to
directory and command file to command file is consistent, so the system manager can insert the
catchall behavior at a number of points and on a user-by-user basis.
Note
Independent of the behavior of the catchall task, the Indirect Command
Processor (Indirect) checks the library directory after checking the default
directory for a command file invoked in the usual way (that is, with an at sign
(@». See the discussion of Indirect in the RSX-11M-PLUS Indirect Command
Processor Manual or the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 1 for more information.
Example 19-1 is a sample command file for use with TDX. Experiment with it in a directory
named for your login UIC before you put it in the library directory.

Using the Catchall Task 19-5

Example 19-1:

A Sample CATCHALL.CMD File
.,
.,
.,
.,
.,

This indirect command file demonstrates one way
of using a catchall task. The catchall task is
installed as ... CA. and is in the system
library directory in the task image file
TDX. TSK .

. ENABLE SUBSTITUTION
., You must always enable SUBSTITUTION when the
., command file uses changeable symbols such as P1
., or symbols defined with .ASK directives .
. ENABLE QUIET
., When QUIET is enabled, Indirect executes commands
., without displaying them on the terminal .
.,
.,
.,
.,
.,
.,
.,
.,
.,
.,

The following list of possible values of P1 is, in
effect, a table of pseudo commands that this file can
execute. The labels (following the GOTOs) indicate the
part of the file where the action to be taken is
given. If you type in FLY, the GOTO goes to the
label .FLY:, where the command TYPE DUO: [USER] FLY. TXT
is issued. Note the use of full filespecs. TDX,
like most system features, will use the defaults of
the user who issued the command if no other device
or directory information is provided in filespecs .

. , If the pseudo command is not in the table, Indirect
., reaches the comment that prints Foo on the screen
., and then exits .
. , Using a combination of the capacities of DCL and of
., Indirect, you can implement pseudo commands to do
., whatever you want .
. IF P1 EQ "FLY" .GOTO FLY
.IF P1 EQ "FLU" .GOTO FLU
.IF P1 EQ "MYD" .GOTO MYD
Foo

. FLU:
.FLY:
.MYD:

.GOTO OVER
TYPE DUO: [USER] FLU. TXT
.GOTO OVER
TYPE DUO: [USER]FLY.TXT
.GOTO OVER
~DUO: [USER]MYDISK.CMD
.GOTO OVER

(Continued on next page)

19-6 Using the Catchall Task

Example 19-1

(Cont.):

A Sample CATCHALL.CMD File

., The .DISABLE DISPLAY prevents Indirect from
., printing the ~ that it ordinarily prints when
., it has finished executing a command file .

. OVER:
. EXIT

.DISABLE DISPLAY

19.3 Selecting MeR Options for lOX
You may want to add other commands to TDX by modifying the source file, [24,lO]TDX.MAC.
Routines for the commands are at the end of the source file. To reassemble the source file after
making additions, use the TDXASM.CMD file located in directory [24,24].
If the command you enter does not match a TDX command, TDX attempts to use one of the
following MCR command options (in the following descriptions, the letters xxx represent the
first three characters of your command):

•

The first option installs, runs, and then removes a task, as follows:
MeR>,

"Params ... " represents the command line that you enter. Your command line cannot
exceed 39 characters because TDX adds other characters to this line. To select this option,
place the following command in your LOGIN.CMD file:

•

The second option searches for an indirect command file. You can specify this option with
one of the following four command lines:
MeR>
MeR>
MeR>
MeR>'

TDX searches for one of the @[ ... ]xxx.CMD indirect command files in the order indicated.
Once TDX locates one of these files, the search stops. You can design the indirect command
file to perform a variety of functions, such as installing tasks, providing HELP, or issuing
error messages.
To use this option, place the following command in your LOGIN.CMD file:

The option used by TDX depends on whether the logical devices ZZI or ZZ2 exist on your
system. You can assign one of these devices in your LOGIN.CMD file. Note that the presence
of the ZZI assignment masks the presence of the ZZ2 assignment. If no assignment is made,
TDX will not exercise either option.
You can also select an option by placing the following command in the system startup file:

The number n equals 1 or 2, depending upon which ZZn option you select.

Using the Catchall Task 19-7

If the command you enter does not match a TDX command or if TDX cannot locate the necessary
task, TDX issues the following message:
MeR -- Task not in system

19.4 Installing Tasks Permanently
Instead of invoking TDX to install tasks as you need them, you can install some tasks
permanently. You should install the following types of tasks permanently:
•

Tasks requiring a larger increment than the default

•

Tasks used frequently

•

Tasks requiring commands longer than 39 characters

For more information, see the description of the INSTALL command in the RSX-11M-PLUS
MCR Operations Manual, the RSX-11M-PLUS Command Language Manual, or the Micro/RSX
User's Guide, Volume 1.

19-8 Using the Catchall Task

Appendix A
RSX-ll M-PLUS UFD Conventions
The RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX operating systems observe a set of User File Directory
(UFD) conventions for files on disk. These conventions provide a consistent method of locating,
allocating, and maintaining a file.
A UFD is itself a file, named in the format gggmmm.DIR where ggg and mmm are octal
numbers in the range 18 to 3778 (0 is reserved). The numbers represent the file owner's group
and member number respectively. For more information on file ownership and directories, see
the RSX-IIM-PLUS MeR Operations Manual, the RSX-llM-PLUS Command Language Manual,
or the Micro/RSX User's Guide, Volume 1.
The following sections describe group and member numbers and their use in identifying the
contents of system UFDs. A section on file naming conventions is also included.

A. 1 Group Number
The group number identifies groups of directories. By convention, group numbers 18 to 200 8
are reserved by DIGITAL for system files, and group numbers 201 8 to 3778 are reserved for
user files. Table A-I lists the group numbers and their usage.

Table A-l:

Group Number Identification

Group Number

Usage

Executive files

Monitor Console Routine (MCR) files

Files-II Ancillary Control Processor (FCP) files

Resource Monitoring Display (RMD) files

Executive utility tasks (EUT)

Multiuser utility tasks

File system utility tasks (such as MOU, DMO, INI, or UFD)

RSX-IIM-PLUS UFD Conventions A-I

Table A-l (Cont.):

Group Number

Group Number Identification

Usage

DIGITAL Command Language (DCL)

Catchall utility task (TDX)

Queue Manager (QMG) files

Online configuration

K-series files

File Control Services (FCS) files

Replacement Control Task (RCT)

Indirect Command Processor (ICP) Files

file~

104

Error Logging Control files

121

Line printer despooler

125

Shadow Recording

126

Resource Accounting tasks

200

System Generation indirect command files

A.2 Member Number
The second number (member number) identifies the different file types within each group.
Table A-2 lists the member numbers.
Table A-2:

Member Number Identification

Member Number File Types
10

Source modules

Object modules, assembly and task-build command files, and object module
libraries for the Executive and for privileged and nonprivileged tasks

System listings and map files for privileged and non privileged tasks

SLP correction files for files located under member number 10

System image and task image files

200

System Generation indirect command files

A.3 Example of System UFOs
The system UFDs consist of a group number and a member number. These numbers identify
the specific contents of each directory. For example, to locate all the Monitor Console Routine
(MCR) listing and map files, find the group number for MCR files (12) and the member number
for listing and map files (34). Then, combine the group and member numbers to specify the

A-2 RSX-IIM-PLUS UFD Conventions

UFO [12,34], which contains the MeR listing and map files. Table A-3 lists the MeR UFOs
and the files contained in each UFO. Table A-4 lists the UFOs used by the operating system.
Table A-3:

MeR User File Directories (UFOs)

UFD

Usage

[12,10]

MeR source files

[12,24]

MeR object modules, assembly command files, and library build command file

[12,34 ]

MeR listing files from assembling source files in [12,10].

[12,40]

SLP correction files for files under [12,10]

Table A-4:

System UFOS

UFD

Usage

[1,1]

System and macro object module libraries

[1,2]

System message and help files

[1,3]

Lost files found by the File Structure Verification Utility (VFY)

[1,4]

Postmortem and snapshot dumps

[1,6]

Error Logging and Resource Accounting files

[1,7]

Spooling queue file and transparent listing file

[1,11 ]

Work space for system maintenance

[1,24]

Object module libraries, task-build command files for mapped tasks, and overlay
descriptor files for privileged tasks

[1,34]

Executive and task map files

[1,54]

Executive and system tasks

[200,1]

Sample files for system introduction

[200,2]

Field service files

A.4 System File-Naming Conventions
RSX-11M-PLUS and Micro/RSX operating systems observe certain conventions for naming files.
Format
nnnsss.typ

Fields
nnn

Specifies the system identification for the task. For example, OMP is the identification for
the File Oump Utility (OMP) program.

RSX-IIM-PLUS UFD Conventions A-3

sss
Specifies a suffix for noting the relationship of the file to the task specified in the nnn
identification. For example, PIPBLD.CMD is the command file for building the Peripheral
Interchange Program (PIP).
The following suffixes are valid:
ASM

Assembly command file

BLD

Task Builder (TKB) command or overlay descriptor file

RES

File Control Services (FCS) memory-resident version of the task

FSL

FCS supervisor-mode library version of the task

typ

Specifies the standard mnemonic for file type. RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX systems
have a set of conventional and default file types that are used to reflect the contents of a
file (see Table A-5).
Table A-5:

System File Types

Type

File Contents

BAS

BASIC-II language source file

BAT

Batch file (convention only)

BIC

Diagnostic binary file (chainable)

BIN

Diagnositc binary file

BLD

Indirect command file used as input to system generation procedure

B2S

BASIC-PLUS-2 language source file

CBL

COBOL language source file

CDA

Crash dump binary file

CFS

Error Logging control file string

CLB

Indirect Command Processor command file library

CMD

Indirect command file

CMF

Preprocessed indirect command file

COR

SLP correction file

CRF

Cross-Reference Processor (CRF) symbol table file

DAT

File containing data (as opposed to a program)

DIR

Directory file

DMP

File Dump Utility (DMP) output file

ERR

Error Logger output file

A-4 RSX-IIM-PLUS UFD Conventions

Table A-5 (Cont .):

System File Types

Type

File Contents

FTN

FORTRAN IV or FORTRAN-77 language source file

HLP

Help file

JOU

EDT editor journal file

LOG

Batch or console log file

LST

Listing file

MAC

MACRO-11 source file

MAP

TKB memory allocation map

MLB

Macro library file

OBJ

Object module file (output from either the MACRO-11 assembler or a compiler)

ODL

TKB overlay descriptor file

OLB

Object module library file

PAS

Pascal-11 language source file

PAT

Object Module Patch Utility (PAT) correction file

PMD

Postmortem Dump (PMD) file

POB

Patched object module used by the PAT Utility

SML

System Macro Library file

STB

Task symbol table file

SYS

Bootable system image or other system file

TMP

Temporary file

TSK

Task image file

TXT

Text file

ULB

Universal library file

RSX-llM-PLUS UFD Conventions

A-S

Index
A
1ABAUD keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-50
:AB option
QUE ISTO command, 3-33
ABORT command
lOX, 12-15
Shadow Recording, 16-7
1ABORT qualifier
STOP IPROCESSOR command, 3-33
STOP IQUEUE/MANAGER command,
3-35
1ACCESSED qualifier
MOUNT command, 1-8
Account
transferring, 2-2
ACCOUNT.DAT file, 10-17
Account blocks, 10-23
memory-resident, 10-23
non-memory-resident, 10-23
Account file
increasing size, 2-13
using from another system, 2-2
Account File Maintenance program
See ACNT program
Accounting Startup Transaction Block, 10-34
Accpath status flag, 4-13
ACFP AR.DAT file, 4-1
modifying, 4-2
record format
controller, 4-2
CPU, 4-2
line frequency, 4-2
ACFPRE. TSK file, 4-1
ACNT program, 2-1
account entry
contents, 2-1

ACNT program
account entry (cont'd.)
deleting, 2-6
examining, 2-8
listing, 2-10
modifying, 2-11
account file
copying, 2-3
extending, 2-3
maximum number of entries, 2-4
sorting, 2-13
changing password, 2-2
copying account file, 2-3
description, 1-11
error messages, 2-14
invoking, 2-3
non privileged use, 2-2
options, 2-3
ADD,2-4
CREATE,2-3
DELETE,2-6
EXAMINE,2-8
EXIT, 2-13
LIST, 2-10
MODIFY, 2-11
SORT,2-13
password encryption, 2-1
protection
restoring, 2-3
using ESCAPE key to list options, 2-4
ACNTRN.CMD file, 10-18
ACS command, 1-5
ACSUB module, 10-18
Active Task display
RMD
altering from MCR command line,
7-11
altering from setup page, 7-11

Index-l

Active Task display
RMD (cont'd.)
description, 7-10
example, 7-10
OWNER command, 7-11
PRIORITY command, 7-11
TASK command, 7-11
Activity report
lOX, 12-12, 12-42
directing to device, 12-34
generating summary, 12-42
ADD option
ACNT, 2-4
/ AFF keyword
INS command (VMR), 5-21
SET command (VMR), 5-51
/ ALIGN qualifier
START/PROCESSOR command, 3-37
/ ALL keyword
ASN command, 8-18
DFL command, 8-18
Allocate Checkpoint Space Command
See ACS command
Allocate Device Transaction Block, 10-40
/ ALL qualifier
SHOW ASSIGNMENTS command, 8-18
SHOW LOGICALS command, 8-18
/AL option
QUE /STA command, 3-37
ALT command
VMR
definition, 5-8
example, 5-8
format, 5-8
parameters, 5-8
/PRI keyword, 5-8
ALTER command
VMR
See ALT command
/ ANSI keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-51
/ APPLICATIONS_PROCESSOR processor
type, 3-20
ASN command
MCR
/ ALL keyword, 8-18
VMR
definition, 5-9
examples, 5-10
formats, 5-9
keywords
/GBL, 5-9, 5-10

Index-2

ASN command
VMR
keywords (cont'd.)
/SYSTEM, 5-9, 5-10
parameters, 5-9
ASSIGN/QUEUE command, 3-29
assigning batch queues, 3-13
assigning print queues, 3-9
ASSIGN/REDIRECT command, 9-9
format, 9-1
parameters, 9-2
redirecting CO:, 9-1
ASSIGN command
VMR
See ASN command
AST
declared by Executive, 1-7
parity error, 1-7
Asynchronous system trap
See AST
ATL command
secondary pool usage, 8-17
Autoconfigure, 4-1
/ AVO keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-51

B
/BACKSP ACE qualifier
START /PROCESSOR command, 3-37
Backup
See Online backup
Backup and Restore Utility
See BRU
BACKUP command
description, 1-14
Backus-Naur Form metalanguage, 18-8
Bad block
See also RCT task
detection, 13-3
handling of MSCP disks, 13-3
listing with lOX, 12-16
notification of DUDRV, 13-4
removing from lOX test, 12-16
replacement, 13-5
partial, 13-6
replacing, 13-1
revectoring, 13-3, 13-6
specifying in lOX, 12-16
Bad Block Locator Utility
See BAD utility

Bad Block Replacement Control Task
See RCT task
BADBLOCKS command
lOX, 12-16
displaying bad blocks, 12-16
examples, 12-16
specifying individual blocks, 12-16
specifying range of blocks, 12-16
use, 12-16
IBADBLOCKS qualifier
INITIALIZE command
Shadow Recording preparation, 16-2
IBAD keyword
INI command
Shadow Recording preparation, 16-2
BAD utility
interaction with RCT, 13-1
media failures and, 11-2
running with EXECUTE command
lOX, 12-27
switches
ILIST, 16-2
IRETRY, 13-1
IBA function

QUE /SP command, 3-20
interactive use, 3-11
:BA option
QUE /STA command, 3-37
Base priority for nonprivileged tasks, 8-10
BATCH. TXT file
description, 1-11
IBATCHJROCESSOR processor type, 3-20
IBATCHJROCESSOR qualifier
INITIALIZE command
interactive use, 3-11
IBATCH_QUEUE qualifier
INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR command,
3-20
Batch job information file
See BATCH. TXT file
Batch processing, 3-1
Batch processor
initializing, 3-11
installation, 3-10
Batch processor prototype task
See BPR
Batch queue, 3-17
assigning, 3-13
initializing, 3-12

Baud rate
remote terminal
setting, 5-63
BC, 18-30
BCT, 18-31
Bit Clear
See BC
Bit Clear Test
See BCT
Bit map
use, 1-7
Bit Set
See BS
Bit Set Test
See BST
IBLKMOD keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-52
Block
bad
See Bad block
disk
changing default number allocated,
1-8
extension
overriding default, 1-8
IBOOT keyword
SAY command (VMR), 5-45
IBOT keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-52 to 5-53
BPR, 3-2
error messages, 3-51 to 3-53
BPR.TSK
installing, 3-11
/BRO keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-53
BRU, '1-14
copying a saved system, 5-20
BS, 18-30
BST, 18-31
BUFFERSIZE command
lOX, 12-18
Command mode, 12-18
initial default, 12-18
Interactive mode
restriction, 12-10
random data pattern, 12-18
restriction
.DECtapes, 12-18
FILESll disk testing, 12-18
SELECT command line, 12-18
VERIFY command line, 12-18

Index-3

/BUFFERSIZE keyword
SET command
messages to CO:, 9-4
Buffer space
PARAMETERLIST display statistics
lOX, 12-36
/BUF keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-53
BUILD command, 4-10
example, 4-10
format, 4-10
Bus run
naming convention for, 4-19
switched
disconnecting from processor, 4-32
linking, 4-19
modifying connection to processor,
4-31

c
Cache
definition, 15-1
/CACHE qualifier
options, 15-2
use with MOUNT command, 15-2
Cache region
See Disk Data Caching
Cache Region display
RMD
detailed statistics, 7-21
altering from MCR command line,
7-24
altering from setup page, 7-23
contents, 7-22
example, 7-21
general statistics, 7-19
.
- altering from MCR command hne,
7-21
altering from setup page, 7-21
contents, 7-20, 15-9
example, 7-19
RATE command, 7-21
REGION command, 7-21
CANCEL command
VMR
See CAN command
CAN command
VMR
definition, 5-11
example, 5-11
format, 5-11

Index-4

CAN command
VMR (cont'd.)
parameter, 5-11
/CARD-READER processor type, 3-20
Card Reader Processor
See CRP
Card Reader Spooling Transaction Block,
10-47
Cassette
exercising with lOX, 12-2
CATCHALL.CMD file
See also TDX
example, 19-5
Catchall Task
See TDX
Catchup
definition, 16-5
CBD,5-26
CBM, lS-33
CDA, 1-17
/CHAR_LENGTH keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-53
Checkpoint
region, 1-3
task, 1-3
/CHECKPOINTJ'ILE qualifier
SET DEVICE command, 1-5
Checkpointable task
fixing, 5-19
Checkpointing, 1-3, 5-21
common, 5-26
dynamic space allocation, 1-5
Checkpoint space
dynamic allocation, 1-5
/CKP keyword
INS command (VMR), 5-21
CLEAN _UP parameter
STOP/ACCOUNTING command, 10-10
CLEAR command, 4-11
example, 4-11
format, 4-11
CLI
adding to account entry, 2-4
application, 17-4
changing, 2-11
command processing
serial, 17-S
continuation lines, 17-4
DCL, 17-2
definition, I-IS, 17-1
displaying, 2-S, 2-10
examples, 17-9, 17-15

CLI
examples (cont'd.)
FORTRAN, 17-15 to 17-20
MACRO-II, 17-9 to 17-15
in account entry, 2-2, 2-4
initializing
/NULL qualifier, 17-3
/PROMPT qualifier, 17-4
/SNGL keyword, 17-4
interaction with system, 17-4, 17-5
MCR,17-2
as default, 2-4
prompting, 17-3
prompts
CTRL/C, 17-3
empty-line, 17-3
task-exit, 17-4
supplied with system, 1-18
system messages
codes, 17-6
receiving, 17-5
task, 5-21
task names, 17-3
writing
alternate, 1-18
Executive directives for, 17-4
CLI command
controlling alternate CLls with, 17-2
/INIT keyword, 17-2
CLI dispatcher task, 18-5
/CLI keyword
INS command
MCR, 17,.2
INS command (VMR), 5-21
Clock
line frequency
rate of interrupts, 1-6
programmable
rate of interrupts, 1-6
setting frequency, 4-2
CO: device, 9-1
as default, 9-6
assigning to null device, 9-6
attaching, 9-3
detaching, 9-3
disabling, 9-6
displaying current assignment, 9-5
enabling, 9-6
monitoring status, 9-8
reading from, 9-4
reassigning, 9-6
redirecting, 9-9

CO: device (cont'd.)
using as pseudo device, 9-1
using with the Console Logger, 9-2
writing to, 9-4
CODRV driver, 1-14, 9-1
loading, 9-3
reasons for, 9-2
/COLOG keyword, 9-5
Command
adding your own, 19-3
VMR
See also VMR commands
comments in, 5-5
continuation lines, 5-5
file specifications, 5-5
keywords
overview, 5-4
name, 5-4
parameter, 5-4
Command format
VMR,5-4
Command line
continuation, 5-5
file specifications, 5-5
maximum number of characters in, 5-5
rejected, 5-82
total length, 5-5
VMR
components, 5-4
extending, 5-5
format, 5-4
including comments, 5-5
Command Line Interpreter
See CLI
Command mode
lOX
description, 12-9
Command syntax
VMR,5-4
continuation lines, 5-5
entering comments, 5-5
keywords
overview, 5-4
parameters, 5-4
Common
checkpointing, 5-26
directive
fixing, 5-18
installing, 5-26
name, 5-33
partition
read/write, 5-33

Index-S

Common
partition (cont'd.)
read-only, 5-33
protecting, 5-23
read/write
checkpointing, 5-26
read-only
installing, 5-26
synchronizing task use, 5-25
task sharing, 5-25
unfixing, 5-80
Common Block Directory
See CBD
Common region
code libraries, 1-1
data commons, 1-1
shuffling, 1-4, 8-20
Communication
with other systems, 1-19
Compaction (memory)
definition, 1-4
COMPAREDATA command
lOX, 12-19
error report, 12-19
FILESll command line, 12-19
initial default, 12-19
SELECT command line, 12-19
CON
command descriptions, 4-7 to 4-32
CON command
VMR
definition, 5-12
examples, 5-13 to 5-15
formats, 5-12
keywords
CONTROLLERS, 5-12
CPU, 5-13
FULL,5-13
UNITS, 5-13
parameters, 5-12
CON commands
abbreviating, 4-7
BUILD, 4-8, 4-10
CLEAR, 4-8, 4-11
DISPLAY, 4-8, 4-12
entering, 4-7
ESTATUS, 4-8, 4-15
HELP, 4-8, 4-17
IDE NT, 4-8, 4-18
LINK, 4-8, 4-19
LIST, 4-8, 4-20
OFFLINE, 4-8, 4-22

Index-6

CON commands (cont'd.)
OFFLINE MEMORY, 4-25
ONLINE, 4-8, 4-26
ONLINE MEMORY, 4-28
SET, 4-8, 4-29
storing command sequence, 4-20
summary, 4-7
SWITCH, 4-8, 4-31
UNLINK, 4-8, 4-32
Condition
high pool, 8-3
low pool, 8-3
Configuration
See also Device state
lOX test, 12-20
nonstandard, 4-2
CONFIGURATION command
VMR
See CON command
Configuration data file
See SYSPARAM.DAT configuration data
file
CONFIGURE command
lOX, 12-20
device type
default values, 12-20
specifying, 12-20
display command, 12-20
example, 12-21
examples, 12-21
logical names, 12-20
parameter command, 12-20
lOX test configuration, 12-4
examples, 12-5
CON interface, 4-4
error messages, 4-33 to 4-36
format, 4-33
invoking, 4-6
direct task format, 4-6
indirect command file, 4-7, 4-20
interactively, 4-6
Console
displaying current assignment, 9-5
CONSOLE. LOG file, 9-6
as default log file, 9-5
Console Logger, 9-1
communication with, 9-3
description, 1-14
messages
length, 9-4
task communication, 9-3

Console Logging
commands
format, 9-4
functions, 9-4
command summary, 9-3
default log file, 9-6
displaying CO: assignment, 9-5
displaying log file assignment, 9-5
error messages, 9-14 to 9-15
installing COT, 9-2
loading CODRV, 9-2
log file
changing specification, 9-7
creating a new version, 9-7
disabling, 9-8
example, 9-10
reading, 9-10
reassigning, 9-6
sample session, 9-10
starting, 9-5
stopping, 9-5
using multiple commands, 9-8
writing to CO:, 9-4
Console Output Device
See CO: device
/CONSOLE qualifier
INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR command,
3-20
Console terminal
default assignment, 9-6
disabling, 9-6
reassigning, 9-6
CON task, 1-12
Context (device)
definition, 4-6
Context status flag, 4-13
Continuation line
CLI, 17-4
example, 5-5
use in a command line, 5-5
CONTINUE command
Shadow Recording, 16-8
/CONTINUE qualifier
START/PROCESSOR command, 3-37
Contradictory Bit Mask
See CBM
CONTROL_C command
lOX, 12-22
Command mode, 12-9
CTRL/C
disabling, 12-22

CONTROL_C command
lOX
CTRL/C (cont'd.)
effect on, 12-22
enabling, 12-22
Execution mode, 12-9
initial default, 12-22
Control and Status Register
See CSR address
Control commands
lOX
description, 12-6
Controller
ACFPAR.DAT record format, 4-2
activating with ONLINE command, 4-26
Controller failure, 11-4
COP, 18-35
CORAL.MAC file, 8-2
pool monitoring interface, 8-2
/COTERM option
SET /COLOG command, 9-6
COT task, 1-14, 9-1
aborting, 9-5
installing, 9-2
reasons for, 9-2
redirecting CO:, 9-9
CPU interval
displaying, 7-19
transaction file, 10-16
CPU tick
displaying, 7-19
Crash
See System failure
CRASH-REASON parameter
START / ACCOUNTING command, 10~5
Crash Dump Analyzer
See CDA
Crash Recovery Transaction Block, 10-37
CREATE option
ACNT,2-3
CRP, 3-2
/CRT keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-53
CSR address
changing value, 4-29
/CTB keyword
LOA command (VMR), 5-29
CTRL/C
lOX
disabling in, 12-9
effect on, 12-22

Index-7

CTRL/C
lOX (cont'd.)
enabling in, 12-9
entering Interactive mode, 12-10
CTRL/C command
See CONTROL_C command
CTRL/G sequence
messages to CO:, 9-4
CTRL/O
Command mode
lOX, 12-39
Interactive mode
lOX, 12-39
Cylinder crossed count, 10-8

o
Data Cache Manager
See DCM
Data compare error
conditions for, 12-47
definition, 12-13
Data patterns
lOX
list, 12-40
Data space
Executive support for
running VMR, 5-3
Data Terminal Emulator
See DTE
Data transfer time
I/O service time and, 14-2
DATATRIEVE-ll program
as report generator, 10-17
converting transaction file for, 10-17
writing accounting report with, 10-17
Date
displaying, 5-78
setting, 5-78
DCL, 17-2
intermediate form
See IFORM
QMG
command format, 3-15
naming conventions, 3-15
running as a task, 18-3
SET commands, 18-4
task
See DCL task
DCL commands
interpretation, 18-5
mapping to MCR, 18-16

Index-8

DCL command table, 18-6
example, 18-58 to 18-59
interpreting, 18-13
modifying, 18-22
DCL Master Command Table
See MCT
DCL task
commands
adding, 18-22
deleting, 118-27
modifying, 18-27
definition, 1-19, 18-1
IFORM, 18-20
installation, 18-2
alternatives, 18-2
catchall task, 18-4
conventional, 18-2
MCR task, 18-3
MCR fallthrough, 18-4
modifying, 1-19
overlay, 18-24
parser process, 18-6
parser table
example, 18-15
PT/TT, 18-26
file, 18-22
task building, 18-4
first pass, 18-5
second pass, 18-5
translator process, 18-6
DCM
definition, 15-1
enabling, 15-1
Deallocate Device Transaction Block, 10-41
DEASSIGN/QUEUE command, 3-30
/DEC keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-54
DECnet
shutting down with SHUTUP.CMD, 6-3
DECtape
exercising with lOX, 12-3
Default
VMR
device, 5-5
directory, 5-6
file types, 5-6
version number, 5-6
DEFER_WRITES option, 15-5
Deferred write request
description, 15-5
I/O completion time, 15-5

DELETE/PROCESSOR command, 3-27
processor types, 3-27
DELETE/QUEUE command, 3-26
Delete access
common region, 5-24
DELETE option
ACNT,2-6
Density (tape)
displaying in lOX, 12-23
specifying in lOX, 12-23
DENSITY command
lOX, 12-23
display command, 12-23
examples, 12-23
logical names, 12-23
SELECT command, 12-23
use, 12-23
valid tape densities, 12-23
/DENS keyword
SAV command (VMR), 5-45
DESELECT command
lOX, 12-25
Command mode, 12-25
functions
Files-II testing, 12-25
NFS testing, 12-25
Interactive mode, 12-25
logical names, 12-25
Despool prototype task
See LPP
DEV command
disk data caching, 15-7
status of CO:, 9-8
VMR
definition, 5-16
example, 5-17
format, 5-16
notes, 5-16
parameter, 5-16
Device
activating with ONLINE command, 4-26
definition of context, 4-6
improving response to requests, 1-7
lOX configuration
adding to, 12-20
displaying, 12-20
removing from, 12-20, 12-48
lOX exercise
selecting, 12-5
status during, 12-54
null, 5-37
offline, 5-16

Device (cont'd.)
peripheral
adding to configuration, 4-2
placing off line, 4-6
placing on line, 4-6
redirecting, 5-37
restrictions, 5-37
removing, 5-81
attached device, 5-81
RL02
example of testing with lOX, 12-63
system default
adding to account entry, 2-4
changing, 2-11
displaying, 2-8, 2-10
in account entry, 2-1, 2-4
testing with lOX
file-structured, 12-1
non-file-structured, 12-1
steps involved, 12-2
time, 12-50
unit failures, 11-4
Device driver
loading, 5-29
mapping, 5-30
jDEVICE processor type, 3-19
DEVICES command
VMR
See DEV command
DEVICE setup command, 7-17
Device state, 4-5
marked for off line, 4-5
marked for on line, 4-5
off line, 4-5
on line, 4-5
Device statistics
Resource Accounting
example, 10-7
Device Statistics Block, 10-49
jDFB keyword
INSTALL command (VMR), 5-22
DFL command
/ ALL keyword, 8-18
Diagnostic error message, 5-82
Diagnostics Loader task
See DLD task
DIGITAL Command Language
See DCL
DIR attribute, 18-36
Directive common
fixing, 5-18

Index-9

Directory
least recently used list, 1-8
search time
decreasing, 1-8
Directory I/O
definition, 15-6
DIRECTORY option, \ 15-6
default extent size for, 15-6
/DIR keyword
FIX command (VMR), 5-18
Disk
default number of blocks allocated
changing, 1-8
primary
shadowing, 1-15
RL02
example 'Of testing with lOX, 12-63
swapping
definition, 1-4
testing with lOX, 12-2
selecting random blocks, 12-44
skipping blocks, 12-33
Disk block
random or sequential
lOX, 12-44
Disk Data Caching
activating, 15-1
cache region
creating, 15-4
naming, 15-5
using alternate, 15-4
definition, 15-1
description, 1-18
eliminating association with a device,
15-12
I/O operations, 15-2
including as a directive common, 15-1
monitoring, 15-7
options for different types of I/O, 15-5
region, 15-16
Disk swapping, 1-4
Dismount Device Transaction Block, 10-43
DISPLAY command, 4-12
examples, 4-13 to 4-14
format, 4-12
keywords
ALL, 4-12
ATTRIBUTES, 4-12
CONTROLLERS, 4-12
FULL,4-13
UNITS, 4-13

Index-l0

DISPLAY command (cont'd.)
parameter
FOR string, 4-12
Shadow Recording, 16-9
Display commands
lOX
description, 12-6
DLD task, 11-6
how to use, 11-7 to 11-9
DMAP attribute, 18-40
Driver status flag, 4-13
DTE, 1-19
Dual-port device
placing ports on line separately, 4-27
Dual-port terminal
switching, 4-27
DUDRV driver
activating RCT, 13-3
loading, 13-2
Dynamic checkpoint space
allocation, 1-5
Dynamic memory
See Memory
Dynamic storage region
See Pool

E
/EBC keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-54
/ECHO keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-54
/EDIT keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-54
Emulation (terminal), 1-19
Encryption routine
user-written support for, 2-1
:EOF option
QUE /STO command, 3-33
:EOJ option
QUE /STO command, 3-33
ERR attribute, 18-37
Error
data compare, 12-13
conditions for, 12-47
double-bit (multiprocessor systems), 11-5
hard, 10-7, 11-3
limit
lOX
altering, 12 -26
nonrecoverable, 10-7, 11-3
TKTN message, 11-4

Error (cont'd.)
parity
un correctable, 11-5
queue I/O, 12-13
recoverable, 11-3
soft, 11-3
ERRORLIMIT command
lOX, 12-26
example, 12-26
FILESll, SELECT, and VERIFY
command lines, 12-26
initial default, 12-26
use with SUMMARYTIME command,
12-26
Error Logger
RCT and the, 13-6
use in detecting faults, 11-4
Error Logging System, 1-15
Error message format, 5-82
Error messages
lOX, 12-71
RMD, 7-25
VMR, 5-82 to 5-105
diagnostic, 5-82
fatal, 5-82
format, 5-82
unmarked, 5-82
Error report
lOX, 12-13
data compare, 12-13
directing to device, 12-34
disabling, 12-47
enabling, 12-47
I/O error, 12-13
types, 12-47
ESCAPE key
requesting list of options
ACNT,2-4
/ESCSEQ keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-55
ESTATUS command, 4-15
example, 4-16
exit status values
ports, 4-16
units and controllers, 4-15
Event flag
lOX, 12-61
EXAMINE option
ACNT,2-8
EXECUTE command
lOX, 12-27
Command mode, 12-27

EXECUTE command
lOX (cont'd.)
examples, 12-28
initiating tasks in parallel, 12-27
Interactive mode, 12-27
leading spaces, 12-27
relationship to SPWN$ directive,
12-27
restrictions, 12-27
running BAD utility, 12-27
spawning tasks, 12-27
Execution mode
lOX
description, 12-9
entering, 12-55
Executive
copy of task header
installing below task image, 5-26
data space support
running VMR, 5-3
loadable device driver, 5-29
partition
extended, 8-16
task
loading, 5-20
running, 5-20
Executive Debugging Tool
See XDT
Executive directive
RUN$
effect on task protection UIC, 5-25
Executive pool monitor code, 8-2
EXIT command
lOX, 12-29
EXIT option
ACNT,2-13
Exit status value
ports, 4-15, 4-16
units and controllers, 4-15
/EXP keyword
LOAD command, 8-16

special symbol, 4-16
EXTEND_SIZE parameter
SET ACCOUNTING command, 10-9
START / ACCOUNTING command, 10-5
Extend access
common region, 5-24
/EXTENSION qualifier
INITIALIZE command, 1-8
MOUNT command, 1-8

Index-ll

IEXT keyword
INI command, 1-8
MOUNT command, 1-8

F
FIIACP
See Files-II ACP
Failure
controller, 11-4
device unit, 11-4
intermittent, 11-2
example, 11-2
recreating conditions, 11-2
media
definition, 11-2
detecting, 11-2
memory, 11-5
MKll memory box, 11-5
processor, 11-5
recovery from, 11-5
symptoms, 11-5
transient, 11-2
Fairness count, 10-8
Fast-mapping feature
installing task for use with, 5-22
Fatal error message, 5-82
Fault
correction, 11-3
detecting
Error Logger, 11-3
lOX, 11-3
hardware
categories, 11-1
definition, 11-1
intermittent, 11-2
media, 11-2
transient, 11-2
isolating, 11-3
system
definition, 11-1
recovery from, 11-4
FCS
default extension block count, 1-8
IFDX keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-55
File
See also Account file
accessing, 5-25
index
position
in large volumes, 1-8

Index-12

File
index
position (cont'd.)
in small volum.es, 1-8
mapping pointer for file window, 1-9
protection
determined by task UIC, 5-25
system image, 8-18
system management, 1-10
IFILE-END qualifier
STOP IPROCESSOR command, 3-33
File Control Processor
multiple, 1-7
File Control Services
See FCS
FILE parameter
SET ACCOUNTING command, 10-9
STARTI ACCOUNTING command, 10-5
File protection
system default
in account entry, 2-1, 2-4
Files-II ACP
mounting separate, 1-7
Files-II Ancillary Control Processor
See Files-II ACP
Files-II volume
selecting for lOX exercise, 12-5, 12-30
testing with lOX
example, 12-63
verifying with lOX, 12-6
FILES 11 command
lOX, 12-30
Command mode, 12-31
default parameters, 12-30
examples, 12-31
function, 12-5
Interactive mode, 12-31
logical names, 12-30
overriding default parameters, 12-30
File specification
VMR
components, 5-5
defaults, 5-5
device name, 5-5
directory, 5-6
file name, 5-6
file type, 5-6
format, 5-5
11M switch, 5-6
named directory, 5-6
specifying, 5-5
version number, 5-6

File system
options, 1-8
FIX command
VMR,5-18
definition, 5-18
examples, 5-19
format, 5-18
keywords
/DIR, 5-18
/NSF, 5-19
/REG,5-19
/RON,5-19
parameter, 5-18
Fixer task
See FXR task
FIX-IN-MEMORY command
VMR
See FIX command
/FLAG J AGE qualifier
INITIALIZE /PROCESSOR command,
3-21
/FLAG qualifier
START /PROCESSOR command, 3-37
/FL option
QUE /STA command, 3-37
/FL switch
QUE /SP command, 3-21
Flying installs, 18-4
/FMAP keyword
INS command (VMR), 5-22
/FO option
QUE /STA command, 3-37
/FOREIGN qualifier
MOUNT command
Shadow Recording preparation, 16-3
/FOR keyword
MOU command
Shadow Recording preparation, 16-3
Form
length
setting, 3-21
types, 3-21
width
setting, 3-21
/FORMFEED keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-55
/FORMS qualifier
INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR command,
3-21
START/PROCESSOR command, 3-37
Form types
specifying with /FORMS qualifier, 3-22

FOR string
CON command line, 4-12
/FORWARDSPACE qualifier
START /PROCESSOR command, 3-37
/FO switch
QUE /SP command, 3-21
Fragmentation
extreme
PMT messages, 8-6
pool
definition, 8-6
setting fragment size, 8-10
FREE setup command, 7-8
Frequency
setting clock, 4-2
Function commands
lOX
description, 12-6
:FWoption
QUE /STA command, 3-37
FXR task, 11-5

G
/GBL keyword
ASN command (VMR), 5-9, 5-10
GEN partition
description, 7-7

H
Halt indicators, 11-6
Hard error, 10-7
definition, 11-3
Hardware fault
categories, 11-1
definition, 11-1
intermittent, 11-2
media, 11-2
transient, 11-2
HELP command, 4-17
example, 4-17
format, 4-17
lOX, 12-32
Help display
RMD
description, 7-4
Help file
description, 1-11
/HFILL keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-55
/HHT keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-55

Index-13

High pool condition, 8~3, 8~4
HLP attribute, 18~38
Home block
checking with lOX, 12-6
Hot backup
See Online backup
HRC task, 1-12, 4-4
error messages, 4-36 to 4-40
format, 4-33
placing device off line, 4-6
placing device on line, 4-6
/HSYNC keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-56
Hyphen (-)
extending command line with, 5-5

I/O completion
overlapped, 1-9
I/O count
definition, 10-7
I/O Counts display
RMD
altering from MCR command line,
7-17
altering from setup page, 7-16
contents, 7-16
description, 7-15
DEVICE command, 7-17
example, 7-15
RATE command, 7-17
I/O error
lOX error codes, 12-13
I/O exercise
See also lOX
terminating, 12-15
I/O Exerciser
See lOX
I/O queue optimization, 14-1
default settings, 14-4
description, 1-18
displaying status, 14-3
error messages, 14-5
fairness count
default value, 14-3
maximum, 14-3
modifying, 14-4
specifying limit, 14-3
initiating, 14-2
methods, 14-1
Cylinder Scan, 14-2, 14-5

Index-14

I/O queue optimization
methods (cont'd.)
default, 14-2
Elevator, 14-2, 14-5
Nearest Cylinder, 14-2, 14-4
selecting, 14-4
supported device types, 14-2
I/O service time
components, 14-2
IDENT command, 4-18
example, 4-18
format, 4-18
IFORM, 18-20
/IM switch
VMR
definition, 5-6, 5-44
relationship to symbol definition file,
5-6
uses, 5-6
/INC keyword
INS command (VMR), 5-22
Index file
position
in large volumes, 1-8
in small volumes, 1-8
/INDEX qualifier
INITIALIZE command, 1-8
Indirect command file
lOX, 12-11
VMR
number of levels allowed, 5-4
requirements, 5-3
running VMR, 5-3
specifying, 5-3
/INDX keyword
INI command, 1-8
Information
preventing loss, 1-14
INI command
keywords
/BAD
Shadow Recording preparation,
16-2
/EXT, 1-8
/INDX, 1-8
/WIN, 1-9
INITIALIZE/PRINTER command
qualifiers
/SHAREABLE, 3-8
INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR command, 3-19
processor types, 3-19
qualifiers, 3-19

INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR command
qualifiers (cont' d.)
/BATCH_QUEUE, 3-20
/CONSOLE, 3-20
/FLAGJ AGE, 3-21
/FORMS, 3-21
/LOWERCASE,3-23
/NOWARNINGS, 3-23
/PRINTER_QUEUE, 3-20
/SHAREABLE, 3-23
/UPPERCASE,3-24
restrictions, 3-24
INITIALIZE/QUEUE command, 3-17
initializing batch queues, 3-12
initializing print queues, 3-5
qualifiers
/BATCH, 3-17
/PRINT, 3-17
INITIAlIZE command
/BAOBLOCKS qualifier
Shadow Recording preparation, 16-2
/EXTENSION qualifier, 1-8
/INOEX qualifier, 1-8
qualifiers
/BATCHJROCESSOR
interactive use, 3-11
/WINOOW qualifier, 1-9
INITIALIZE VOLUME command
using to modify file system, 1-8
/INIT keyword
CLI command, 17. . 2
/INPUT function
QUE /SP command, 3-20
/INPUT processor type, 3-20
INS command
/ CLI keyword, 17-2
VMR
definition, 5-20
examples, 5-27 to 5-28
format, 5-20
keywords
/ AFF, 5-21
/CKP, 5-21
/CLI,5-21
/OFB,5-22
/FMAP, 5-22
/INC, 5-22
/IOP, 5-23
/PMO, 5-23
/PRI, 5-23
/PRO, 5-23
/RON,5-24

INS command
VMR
keywords (cont'd.)
/ROP AR, 5-24
/SEC, 5-24
/SLV, 5-25
/SYNC, 5-25
/TASK,5-25
/UIC, 5-25
/WB,5-26
/XHR, 5-26
notes, 5-26 to 5-27
parameters, 5-21
Installation (system), 1-9
INSTALL command
installing BPR. TSK, 3-10
installing LPP. TSK, 3-6
/INTERPRETER qualifier, 17-2
keywords
/TASK
installing batch processors, 3-11
loading COT task, 9-2
qualifiers
/TASK
installing batch processors, 3-11
VMR
See INS command
Interactive mode
lOX
description, 12-10
valid commands, 12-10
Interface
customizing, 1-18
INTERLEAVE command
lOX, 12-33
FILES11, SELECT, and VERIFY
command lines, 12-33
initial default, 12-33
restrictions, 12-33
sequential testing, 12. . 33
specifying LBNs, 12-33
Intermittent failure, 11-2
example, 11-2
recreating conditions, 11-2
/INTERPRETER qualifier
INSTALL command, 17-2
Interrupt (clock)
rate, 1-6
Interrupt vector
changing value, 4-29

Index-15

Interval report
lOX
output frequency, 12-56
Invalid Login Transaction Block, 10-39
IIOP keyword
INS command (VMR), 5-23
lOX, 1-15
aborting tasks, 12-15
clock
turning on, 12-9
command categories
control, 12-6
display, 12-6
function, 12-6
parameter, 12-6
command language
conventions, 12-14
syntax, 12-14
commands
ABORT, 12-15
BADBLOCKS, 12-16
BUFFERSIZE, 12-18
CaMP AREDATA, 12-19
CONFIGURE, 12-20
CONTROL_C, 12-22
DENSITY, 12-23
descriptions, 12-14 to 12-62
DESELECT, 12-25
ERRORLIMIT, 12-26
EXECUTE, 12-27
EXIT, 12-29
FILES11, 12-30
HELP, 12-32
Indirect Command Processor, 12-11
Interactive mode only (list), 12-10
INTERLEAVE, 12-33
LOGFILE, 12-34
LOOPBACK, 12-35
PARAMETERLIST, 12-36
PATTERN, 12-40
PRINTSUMMARY, 12-42
PROCEED, 12-43
RANDOM, 12-44
RANGE, 12-45
RECORDS, 12-46
REPORTERRORS, 12-47
RESTART, 12-48
restrictions (Interactive mode), 12-10
RETRIES, 12-49
RUNTIME, 12-50
SELECT, 12-51
SPY, 12-54

Index-16

lOX
commands (cont'd.)
START, 12-55
summary, 12-6
SUMMARYTIME, 12-56
TEMPORARYFILE, 12-57
VERIFY, 12-58, 12-68
VOLUMECHECK, 12-60
WAIT, 12-61
WRITECHECK, 12-62
configuration, 12-20
adding units, 12-4
displaying, 12-4
examples, 12-5
logical names, 12-5
removing units, 12-48
setting up, 12-4
controlling with CTRL/C, 12-22
data pattern
altering, 12 -40
displaying, 12-40
data transfer
size, 12-18
definition
file-structured device, 12-1
non -file-structured device, 12-1
deselecting devices, 12-25, 12-48
device-dependent parameters, 12-51
list, 12-58
displaying bad blocks, 12-16
error messages, 12-71
error retries
magnetic tape, 12-49
NFS volumes, 12-49
exercise
device-dependent parameters, 12-51,
12-58
Files-11 volume, 12-30
example, 12-63
NFS device
example, 12-65
NFS volume
SELECT, 12-51
VERIFY, 12-58
removing devices from, 12-25
running, 12-3
selecting devices for, 12-5
specifying time, 12-50
starting, 12-55
terminal, 12-35
exercise procedure
cassettes, 12-2

lOX
exercise procedure (cont'd.)
DECtape, 12-3
disks, 12-2
magnetic tapes, 12-2
terminals, 12 -2
exiting, 12-29
home block
checking, 12-60
I/O error codes, 12-13
indirect command file, 12-11
example, 12-11
invoking, 12-11
installing, 12-4
interleaving with Executive, 12-61
invoking, 12-3
installed version, 12-4
uninstalled version, 12-3
log file
contents, 12-34
creating, 12-34
event lines, 12-34
naming, 12-34
maximum number of test units
increasing, 12-2
modes, 12-9
Command, 12-9
Execution, 12-9
Interactive, 12-10
NFS volume
displaying block range, 12-45
specifying block range, 12-45
nondestructive read, 12-58
output
See lOX reports
overview, 12-1
parameter
exercising NFS volume, 12-68
setting for Files-II volumes, 12-63
setting for magnetic tape, 12-65
setting for NFS volumes, 12-65
parameters
displaying default, 12-36
setting, 12-51, 12-58
pattern checking, 12-19
preparing to use, 12-1
prompt, 12-4
protecting Files-II disk, 12-57
removing tasks, 12-48
report
See lOX reports

lOX (cont'd.)
resetting parameters, 12-48
restarting, 12-48
selecting device, 12-5
Files-II volume, 12-5, 12-30
NFS, 12-51, 12-58
NFS volume
using SELECT" 12-5
using VERIFY, 12-5
sequential testing
See RANDOM command
lOX
setting parameters
examples, 12-63
specifying record number
cassette, 12-46
magnetic tape, 12-46
starting, 12-55
status display, 12-54
steps for exercising a device, 12-2
stopping, 12-15
task-build file, 12-2
terminating, 12-29
PROCEED command, 12-43
wait-for-event flag, 12-61
write-check, 12-62
IOXBLD.BLD file, 12-2
lOX reports
activity, 12-12
accumulated totals, 12-12
content, 12-12
controlling output, 12-13
directing to device, 12-34
example, 12-12
format, 12-12
interval, 12-12
summary, 12-12
generating, 12-42
error, 12-13
data compare, 12-13
directing to device, 12-34
disabling, 12-47
enabling, 12-47
example, 12-13
queue I/O, 12-13
types, 12-47
interval
output frequency, 12-56
types, 12-11

Index-17

J
/JOB-END qualifier
STOP /PROCESSOR command, 3-33

L
Latency
definition, 14-2
LBN
installed task, 5-20
relationship to TCB, 5-26
using to transfer data, 13-4
Library
resident
installing, 5-26
. /LIBUIC keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-56
/lINES keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-56
lINK command, 4-19
example, 4-19
lIST command, 4-20
example, 4-21
format, 4-20
storing CON command sequence, 4-20
lIST option
ACNT,2-10
/LIST switch
BAD utility
preparing for Shadow Recording, 16-2
lOA command
See LOAD command
VMR
definition, 5-29
examples, 5-31
format, 5-29
keywords
/CTB,5-29
/PAR, 5-30
/SIZE, 5-30
/VEC, 5-30
notes, 5-30
parameters, 5-29
lOAD command, 8-16
format, 8-16
keywords
/EXP, 8-16
/SIZE, 8-16
loading CODRV driver, 9-3
VMR
See LOA command

Index-18

Log file
Console logging
displaying assignment, 9-5
enabling, 9-6
reassigning, 9-6
lOGFIlE command
lOX, 12-34
creating log file, 12-34
default action, 12-34
naming log file, 12-34
summary reports, 12-34
/lOGFIlE option
SET /COlOG command, 9-6
logical AND, 18-29
logical assignment
assigning, 5-9
deleting, 5-10
displaying, 5-10
logical block number
See lBN
logical I/O
definition, 15-6
lOGICAL option, 15-6
default extent size for, 15-6
LOGICAL UNIT NUMBERS command
See lUN command
LOGIN. CMD file
function, 1-10
lOGIN. TXT file
description, 1-10
login information file
See LOGIN. TXT file
login Transaction Block, 10-38
/lOGON keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-56
lOGOUT.CMD file
function, 1-10
LOOPBACK command
lOX, 12-35
loopback connector, 12-35
restriction, 12-35
/lOWERCASE qualifier
INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR command,
3-23
flOWER keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-57
Low pool condition, 8-3, 8-4
flOW switch
QUE /SP command, 3-23
lPP, 3-2
source files, 3-2

LPPBLD. CMD build file
modifying forms, 3-21
/LRU keyword
MOU command, 1-8
LUN command
VMR,5-32
definition, 5-32
example, 5-32
format, 5-32
parameter, 5-32

M
Macro Metalanguage
See MML
Magnetic tape
density
displaying in lOX, 12-23
specifying in lOX, 12-23
error retries, 12-49
lOX exercise
example, 12-65
using SELECT, 12-65
records tested, 12-46
testing
altering record count, 12-46
MAP attribute, 18-39 to 18-42
examples, 18-41
secondary mappings, 18-40
Mapping pointer
file window, 1-9
MASSBUS status flag, 4-13
Mass Storage Control Protocol
See MSCP device
Master Command Table
See MCT
Master File Directory
See MFD
/MAXEXT keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-57
MCR,17-2
as default CLI, 2-4
QMG
command format, 3-15
naming conventions, 3-15
translator table
example, 18-16
MCR command, 18-4
MCT
contents, 18-7
creating entry, 18-23

Media failure
definition, 11-2
detecting, 11-2
Memory
allocation, 1-2
compacting space
See SHF
dynamic, 5-29, 8-1
system requirements, 8-1
Memory box
adding to configuration, 4-28
Memory compaction
definition, 1-4
Memory display
altering from MCR command line, 7-8
RMD
accessing, 7-4
description, 7-4
FREE command, 7-8
modifying, 7-8
RATE command, 7-8
setup commands, 7-8
symbols, 7-7
Memory failure, 11-5
Memory management
fixing tasks, 5-19
Memory parity support, 1-7
Memory partition, 1-1
definition, 1-1
Memory region, 1-1
Message
BPR, 3-51
Console Logging, 9-14
output despooler, 3-50
QMG command, 3-43
warning
SHUTUP program, 6-2
Metalanguage, 18-8
category references, 18-9
exclusive-OR, 18-10
optional syntax indicators, 18-10
production rule, 18-9
adjective, 18-9
subject, 18-9
syntax tree, 18-9
MFD
use with separate Files-II ACPs, 1-7
MFT, 1-19
Micro/RSX File Transfer Utility
See MFT

Index-19

MKll memory box
excluding from system, 11-5
failure, 11-5
MML, 18-11
features, 18-8
literals, 18-14
nonliterals, 18-15
parser functions, 18-15
handling of literals, 18-14
handling of nonliterals, 18-15
translator functions, 18-15
handling of literals, 18-14
handling of nonliterals, 18-15
MODIFY option
ACNT, 2-11
Monitor Console Routine
See MCR
MOU command
keywords
/EXT, 1-8
/FOR
Shadow Recording preparation,
16-3
/LRU, 1-8
/WIN, 1-9
/MOU keyword
SAVE command, 1-9
MOUNT command
format, 15-2
function, 15-2
parameters, 15-2
qualifiers
/ ACCESSED, 1-8
/CACHE, 15-2
/EXTENSION, 1-8
/FOREIGN
Shadow Recording preparation,
16-3
/NOCACHE, 15-2
/WINDOW, 1-9
using to modify file system, 1-8
Mount Device Transaction Block, 10-42
MSCP device
bad block
handling, 13-3
replacement, 13-1
configuration, 13-3
Multiport status flag, 4-13
Multistream spooling, 3-1
Mutiprocessor system
standalone maintenance, 11-6

Index-20

N
Naming conventions
DCL,3-15
MCR,3-15
:NE option
QUE /STA command, 3-37
/NETUIC keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-57
/NEXT_JOB qualifier
START /PROCESSOR command, 3-37
NFS volume
error retries, 12-49
selecting for testing
lOX, 12-51, 12-58
NL: device
assigning CO: to, 9-6
spooling to, 3-23
/NM switch
QUE /SP command, 3-23
NO attribute, 18-43
/NOCACHE qualifier
use with MOUNT command, 15-2
NOCOTERM option
SET /COLOG command, 9-6
NODEFER_WRITES option, 15-5
NODIRECTORY option, 15-6
/NOLOGFILE option
SET /COLOG command, 9-8
NOLOGICAL option, 15-6
/NOLO switch
QUE /SP command, 3-24
Nonrecoverable error, 11-3
NOOVERLAY option, 15-6
NOREAD-AHEAD option, 15-6
NO VIRTUAL option, 15-6
/NOWARNINGS qualifier
INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR command,
3-23
/NSF keyword
FIX command (VMR), 5-19
Null device, 5-37
See NL: device
/NULL qualifier
initializing CLI with, 17-3

o
OCOP, 18-35
OFFLINE ALL command, 4-23
OFFLINE command, 4-22
example, 4-24, 4-25
format, 4-23, 4-25

OFFLINE command (cont'd.)
requirements, 4-24
OFFLINE MEMORY command, 4-25
Offline state
definition, 4-5
Offline status flag, 4-13
OFF option
SET /COLOG command, 9-5
ONLINE ALL command, 4-26
Online backup
description, 16-1
ONLINE command, 4-26
examples, 4-27
formats, 4-26
restrictions, 4-27
Online help file
See Help file
ONLINE MEMORY command, 4-28
example, 4-28
format, 4-28
Online state
definition, 4-5
status flag, 4-13
transition to, 4-26
ON option
SET /COLOG command, 9-5
/OPT keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-57
Output despooler
error messages, 3-50 to 3-51
Overlapped I/O completion, 1-9
OVERLAY option, 15-6
default extent size for, 15-6
OWNER setup command, 7-11

P
Page
RMD
definition, 7-1
display, 7-1
setup, 7-2
/P AGE qualifier
START /PROCESSOR command, 3-37
:PA option
QUE /STA command, 3-37, 3-38
Parameter
lOX
displaying default, 12-36
exercising
NFS volume, 12-68
setting, 12-51, 12-58

Parameter
lOX
setting (cont'd.)
Files-11 volumes, 12-63
magnetic tape, 12-65
NFS volumes, 12-65
Parameter commands
lOX
description, 12-6
P ARAMETERLIST command
lOX, 12-36
displaying buffer space statisics, 12-36
displaying default parameters, 12-36
examples, 12-36 to 12-39
format of display, 12-36
Parameters
VMR,5-4
PAR command, 8-15
format, 8-15
VMR
definition, 5-33
example, 5-34
format, 5-33
Parity error
uncorrectable, 11-5
/P ARITY keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-60
Parity support, 1-7
/P AR keyword
LOA command (VMR), 5-30
SET command (VMR), 5-58 to 5-60
/P AR keyword (VMR)
SET command
saving secondary pool, 8-18
Parser processing, 18-13
Partition
common, 5-26
conventions, 1-1
creating, 5-51
fragmentation, 1-3
causes, 1-3
GEN
description, 7-7
loading region in, 5-18
main, 15-5
memory, 1-1
modifying, 5-52
overriding, 5-23
regions, 1-1
SECPOL
description, 7-7

Index-21

Partition (cont'd.)
size and location
RMD Memory display, 7-8
SYSPAR
description, 7-7
type, 5-59
waiting tasks, 1-1
PARTITION DEFINITIONS command
See PAR command
Partition display
contents, 5-33
Password
adding to account entry, 2-4
changing, 2-2, 2-11
characters, 2-4
contained in account entry, 2-1
displaying, 2-8, 2-10
/PASTHRU keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-61
Pattern
lOX
altering, 12-40
displaying, 12-40
PATTERN command
lOX, 12-40
data patterns, 12-40
examples, 12-41
initial default pattern, 12-41
Interactive mode
restriction, 12-10
restrictions, 12-40
Command mode, 12-40
logical assignments, 12-40
/PAUSE qualifier
STOP /PROCESSOR command, 3-33
Peripheral Interchange Program
See PIP utility
PIP utility
account file
copying, 2-3
extending, 2-3
/TR switch
overriding default extension block
. count, 1-8
/PLCTL keyword
SET command, 8-10
SET command (VMR), 5-61
/PMD keyword
INS command (VMR), 5-23
PMT
abortable tasks, 8-7
listing at console, 8-6

Index-22

PMT (cont'd.)
aborting, 8-13
aborting tasks running from console, 8-12
activation, 8-2
checkpointing stopped tasks, 8-12
conditions affecting response, 8-3
controlling actions, 8-12
controlling pool use, 8-12
extreme fragmentation, 8-6
example, 8-8
functions, 8-2
high pool state, 8-6
installation, 8-2
low pool state, 8-5
messages
extreme pool fragmentation, 8-6, 8-8
low pool state, 8-5
preventing, 8-12
operating cycle, 8-3, 8-11
dependencies, 8-11
lengthening, 8-12
pool monitoring support and, 8-2
removing from system, 8-11
task-build options, 8-11
tasks eligible to abort, 8-7
timing, 8-11
PMTBLD.CMD file
modifying, 8-11
Pointer
mapping
allocating, 1-9
default number for file window, 1-9
Pool, 8-1
change in condition of
definition of temporary, 8-4
condition
description, 8-3
largest fragment and, 8-4
largest fragment too small, 8-4
definition, 8-1
depleting
explanation, 8-1
depletion
avoiding, 8-1
detecting signs, 8-1
detecting pool events, 8-2
determining overall state, 8-3
Executive code for monitoring, 8-2
extreme fragmentation, 8-6
extreme fragmentation of
PMT messages, 8-6

Pool (cont'd.)
fragmentation
responding to, 8-2
fragment size
. increasing, 8-12
setting, 8-10
high limit, 8-3
high pool event, 8-6
installing headers in, 5-26
low limit, 8-3
low pool event, 8-5
major events, 8-4
monitoring, 8-1
primary
definition, 1-2
requirements, 8-1
secondary
See also Secondaty pool
definition, 1~ 2
displaying, 8-14
increasing availablility, 8-17
percent in use, 8-14
saving, 8-18
/POOL/LIMITS qualifier
SET SYSTEM command, 8-10
POOL -RESERVE parameter
Resource Accounting, 8-18
START/ACCOUNTING command, 10-5
Pool event, 8-4
detecting, 8-2
high pool, 8-6
low pool, 8-5
/POOL keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-62
Pool limits, 8-10
setting high limit, 8-10
setting low limit, 8~10
Pool monitor code
Executive
function, 8-2
Pool monitoring support
description, 8-2
establishing, 8-2
overview, 1-13
Pool monitor interface
functions, 8-2
Pool Monitor Task
See PMT
/POOLSIZE keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-62
Predefined syntax elements, 18-50
basic data types, 18-50 to 18-51

Predefined syntax elements (cont'd.)
common command elements, 18-51 to
18-54
program control elements, 18-57 to 18-58
special parser elements, 18-54 to 18-56
special translator elements, 18":56
/PRI keyword
ALT command (VMR), 5-8
INS command (VMR), 5-23
Primary disk
shadowing, 1-15
Primary RBN, 13-6
Print Despooler Transaction Block, 10-46
Printer
form types
LAI00, 3-22
LA50, 3-22
LA75, 3-22
LN01, 3-22
LN03,3-22
spooling to, 3~ 1
/PRINTERJORT keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-63
/PRINTER-:QUEUE qualifier
INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR command,
3-20
Printer mode, 3-23
/PRINTER processor type, 3-19
Print processor
See also LPP
description, 3-2
initializing, 3-7
installing, 3-6
Print queue, 3-17
assigning, 3-9
initializing
DCL command, 3-5
MeR command, 3-5
PRINT SUMMARY command
lOX, 12-42
Priority
setting base for nonprivileged tasks, 8-10
PRIORITY setup command, 7~11
Privileged user input
rejection, 5-46
/PRIV keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-63
PRO attribute, 18-46
PROCEED command
lOX, 12-43
effect on LOGFILE, 12-43
uses, 12-43

Index-23

Processor
activating with ONLINE command, 4-26
batch
initializing, 3-11
installing, 3-10
failure, 11-5
recovery from, 11-5
symptoms, 11-5
file control, 1-7
print
description, 3-2
initializing, 3-7
restrictions, 3-24
installing, 3-6
See also LPP, 3-2
/PROCE,SSOR processor type, 3-19
/PRO keyword
INS command (VMR), 5-23
Prompt
SHUTUP program, 6-2
example of input, 6-2
Prompting
CLI, 17-3
/PROMPT qualifier
initializing CLI with, 17-4
Protection
file, 2-3
Protection mask, 5-23
Protection UIC, 5-24
Prototype task
fixing, 5-19
installing, 5-25
Prv_Diag status flag, 4-13
/PUB keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-63

Q
QMG,3-1
batch processing
support, 1-11
command descriptions, 3-15 to 3-43
commands
DCL format, 3-15
MCR format, 3-15
DCL commands
ASSIGN/QUEUE,3-29
DEASSIGN /QUEUE, 3-30
DELETE/PROCESSOR,3-27
DELETE/QUEUE,3-26
INITIALIZE/PROCESSOR, 3-19
INITIALIZE/QUEUE, 3-17

Index-24

QMG
DCL commands (cont'd.)
START /PROCESSOR, 3-36
START /QUEUE, 3-40
START/QUEUE/MANAGER, 3-41
STOP/ABORT, 3-31
STOP/PROCESSOR, 3-32
STOP /QUEUE, 3-34
STOP/QUEUE/MANAGER, 3-35
description, 1-11
error messages, 3-43, 3-43 to 3-50
function, 3-2
installation, 3-2 to 3-10
interactive, 3-3
using STARTUP.CMD, 3-2
using SYSPARAM.DAT, 3-2
MCR commands
QUE / AS:, 3-29
QUE /CR, 3-17
QUE /DEA, 3-30
QUE /DEL:Q, 3-26
QUE /KIL, 3-31
QUE jSP, 3-19
QUE /STA, -3-36
QUE /STA:QMG, 3-41
QUE /STA:QUE, 3-40
QUE /STO, 3-32
QUE /STO:QMG, 3-35
QUE /STO:QUE, 3-34
QUE /UNSP, 3-27
number of processors supported, 1-11
number of queues supported, 1-11
starting, 3-4
DCL command, 3-4
MCR command, 3-4
QMGCLI task, 3-2
QMGSTART.CMD file, 3-2
invoking, 3-3
$QTRAN routine
calling, 10-19
description, 10-19
example of call to, 10-19
$QTRNI routine
calling, 10-19
description, 10-19
example of call to, 10-20
$QTRN2 routine
calling, 10-20
description, 10-20
QUA attribute, 18-47
QUE /AS command, 3-29
assigning batch queues, 3-13

QUE /AS command (cont'd.)
assigning print queues, 3-9
QUE /CR command, 3-17
functions, 3-19
initializing batch queues, 3-12
initializing print queues, 3-5
queue types
BATCH,3-17
PRINT, 3-17
switches, 3-19
QUE /DEA command, 3-30
QUE /DEL:Q command, 3-26
QUE /KIL command, 3-31
QUE /SP command, 3-19
functions
/BA,3-20
interactive use, 3-11
/INPUT, 3-20
/SP, 3-20
/SP /EX, 3-20
switches
/FL, 3-21
/FO, 3-21
/LOW, 3-23
/NM,3-23
/NOLO, 3-24
/QUEUE,3-20
/SHR, 3-8, 3-23
/TERM,3-20
QUE /STA:QMG command, 3-41
starting QMG, 3-4
QUE /STA:QUE command, 3-40
QUE /STA command, 3-36
functions, 3-36
options, 3-36
/AL,3-37
:BA, 3-37
/FL, 3-37
/FO, 3-37
:FW,3-37
:NE, 3-37
overview, 3-37
:PA, 3-37, 3-38
:RES, 3-38
QUE /STO:QMG command, 3-35
QUE /STO:QUE command, 3-34
QUE /STO command, 3-32
functions, 3-32
options, 3-32
:AB, 3-33
:EOF,3-33
:EOJ,3-33

QUE /UNSP command, 3-27
functions, 3-27
QUERY.DIC file, 10-17
Queue
batch, 3-17
assigning, 3-13
initializing, 3-12
general, 3-10
I/O optimization, 14-1
print, 3-17
assigning, 3-9
device-specific, 3-10
Queue management subsystem, 3-2
Queue Manager
See QMG
/QUEUE switch
QUE /SP command, 3-20

R
RANDOM command
lOX, 12-44
effect on INTERLEAVE command,
12-44
examples, 12-44
FILES-II, SELECT, and VERIFY
command line, 12-44
RANGE command
lOX, 12-45
default range, 12-45
display command, 12-45
examples, 12-45
logical names, 12-45
parameter command, 12-45
RATE setup command, 7-8, 7-14, 7-17, 7-21
RBN, 13-4
primary, 13-6
secondary, 13-6
RCT task, 1-16, 13-1
activation, 13-3
bad block handling
steps, 13-3
bad block replacement
incomplete, 13-5
Error Logger and, 13-6
installing, 13-1
interaction with BAD, 13-1
MSCP configuration and, 13-3
recursion counter, 13-5
write-back cache corruption, 13-5
RD: driver, 1-12, 4-4

Index-25

REA command
VMR
definition, 5~36
examples, 5-36
format, 5-36
parameters, 5-36
RE1\D-AHEAD option, 15..,6
default extent size for, 15-7
Read access
common region, 5-24
REASSIGN command
VMR
See REA command
Reconfiguration
components, 4-4
CON interface, 4-4
HRC task, 4-4
RD: driver, 4-4
definition, 4-1
timing and, 11-4
use, 4-4
Reconfiguration driver
See RD: driver
Reconfiguration service
description, 1-12
initiating, 4-6
RECORDS command
lOX, 12-46
examples, 12-46
initial default, 12-46
overriding default, 12-46
SELECT command line, 12-46
"Recoverable error, 11-3
RED command
format, 9-1
parameters, 9-2
redirecting CO:, 9-1
VMR
definition, 5-37
examples, 5-37
format, 5-37
parameters, 5-37
restrictions, 5-37
REDIRECT command, 9-9
See RED command
VMR
See RED command
Region
checkpointing, 1-3
disk data cache, 15-16
format, 15-16

Index-26

Region (cont' d.)
dynamic storage, 5-62
fixing, 5-18
memory, 1-1
read/write access, 5-24
re~d-only, 5-24
unfixing, 5-80
REGION setup command, 7-21
/REGIS keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-63
/REG keyword
FIX command (VMR), 5-19
REM command (VMR), 5-38
UNF command (VMR), 5-80
REM command
VMR
definition, 5-38
examples, 5-39
format, 5-38
notes, 5-38
parameters, 5-38
/REG keyword, 5-38
/REMOTE keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-63 to 5-64
Remote terminal
setting baud rate, 5-63
REMOVE command
VMR
See REM command
Replacement
bad block
RCT task, 1-16
Replacement block number
See RBN
REPORTERRORS command
lOX, 12-47
Interactive mode, 12-47
restrictions, 12-47
Report generator
See DATATRIEVE-11 program
Request and Pass Offspring directive
See RPOI$ directive
Reschedule interval, 5-41
Reset Accounting Transaction Block, 10-35
:RES option
QUE /STA command, 3-38
Resource Accounting
See also Transaction file
account blocks, 10-23
commands
SET ACCOUNTING, 10-9

Resource Accounting
commands (cont'd.)
SHOW ACCOUNTING, 10-11
SHOW ACCOUNTING/DATATRIEVE,
10-17
SHOW ACCOUNTING/INFORMATION,
10-12
SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTIONFILE, 10-11, 10-13
START / ACCOUNTING, 10-5
STOP / ACCOUNTING, 10-10
description, 1-14, 10-1
device statistics
example, 10-7
messages, 10-53
POOL --RESERVE parameter, 8-18
privileged task interface, 10-21
scan rate, 10-6
secondary pool, 8-18, 10-5
statistics scan, 10-6
summary of control commands, 10-4
system resources, 10-52
system statistics, 10-6
task accounting, 10-6
transaction interface
$QTRAN routine, 10-19
$QTRNI routine, 10-19
$QTRN2 routine, 10-20
writing, 10-18
using DATATRIEVE-ll, 10-17
Resource Monitoring Display
See RMD
RESTART command
lOX, 12-48
functions, 12-48
Interactive mode
restriction, 12-10
/RESTART qualifier
START /PROCESSOR command, 3-38
RETRIES command
lOX, 12-49
default, 12-49
SELECT command line, 12-49
VERIFY command line, 12-49
write-check, 12-62
/RETRY switch
BAD utility, 13-1
Revector control table, 13-4
status codes, 13-4
RMD,7-1
Active Task display, 7-1

RMD (cont'd.)
cached device
Detailed Statistics display, 7-1
cache region
General Statistics display, 7-1
description, 1-13, 7-1
displaying disk data cache statistics, 15-8,
15-10
display pages, 7-1
displays
Active Task, 7-10
Cache Region (detailed), 7-21
Cache Region (general), 7-19
Help, 7-4
I/O Counts, 7-15
Memory,7-4
System Statistics, 7-18
Task Header, 7-13
error messages, 7-25
Help display, 7-1
help page
description, 1-13
I/O Counts display, 7-1
installed copy
invoking, 7-2
installing, 7-2
INSTALL command, 7-2
invoking, 7-2
format, 7-2
parameters, 7-2
Memory display, 7-1
monitoring pool, 8-1
pages, 7-1
running
nonprivileged users, 7-2
on a slaved terminal, 7-2, 7-3
setup page, 7-2
description, 1-13
specifying setup commands, 7-2
System Statistics display, 7-1
task-build command file
modifying, 7-24
Task Header display, 7-1
type of displays available, 1-13
uninstalled copy
invoking, 7-3
RMD.TSK task image file
location, 7-3
RMDBLD.CMD file
modifying, 7-24
/RNDC keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-64

Index-27

/RNDH keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-65
/RNDL keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-65
/RON keyword
FIX command (VMR), 5-19
INS command (VMR), 5-24
UNF command (VMR), 5-80
/ROP AR keyword
INS command (VMR), 5-24
Round-robin scheduler, 1-6
function, 1-6
setting priority range, 1-6
time interval, 1-6
/RP A keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-65
RPOI$ directive
comparison to SPWN$ directive, 18-6
/RSI keyword
RUN command (VMR), 5-41
RSXll.SYS file
See Account file
RUN$ directive
effect on task protection UIC, 5-25
RUN command
VMR,5-40
definition, 5-40
formats, 5-40 to 5-43
keywords
/RSI, 5-41
/UIC, 5-42
parameters, 5-40
restriction, 5-40
time options, 5-40
Run Task directive
See RUN$ directive
RUNTIME command
lOX, 12-50
Command mode, 12-50
initial default, 12-50
Interactive mode
restriction, 12-10

s
SAB, 10-32
description, 10-23
Resource Accounting, 10-23
Sample configuration
increasing system throughput, 4-23
Saturation
definition, 16-12

Index-28

SAY command
See SAVE command
VMR
definition, 5-44
example, 5-45
format, 5-44
keywords
/BOOT,5-45
/DENS, 5-45
notes, 5-45
parameters, 5-44
SAVE command, 8-18
/MOU keyword, 1-9
VMR
See SAY command
Scan
definition, 10-15
SCAN -RATE parameter
SET ACCOUNTING command, 10-9
START / ACCOUNTING command, 10-5
Scan rate
Resource Accounting, 10-6
Scheduler
round-robin
function, 1-6
setting priority range, 1-6
time interval, 1-6
/SEC keyword
INS command (VMR), 5-24
Secondary pool, 8-13
description, 8-13
displaying, 8-14
increasing availability, 8-17
increasing size, 8-16
Resource Accounting, 8-18, 10-5
saving, 8-18
Secondary RBN, 13-6
/SECPOL keyword
SET command, 8-14
SET command (VMR), 5-65
SECPOL partition
description, 7-7
Seek-time
definition, 14-2
SELECT command
lOX, 12-51
Command mode, 12-52
default parameters, 12-52
examples, 12-52
function, 12-5
Interactive mode, 12-52
logical names, 12-51

SELECT command
lOX (cont'd.)
magnetic tape
example, 12-53
parameter commands for, 12-51
setting default parameters, 12-51,
12-58
specifying block range, 12-45
write-check, 12-62
Serial command processing
definition, 17-8
/SERIAL keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-65
SET /COLOG command
options
/COTERM,9-6
/LOGFILE, 9-6
/NOCOTERM,9-6
/NOLOGFILE, 9-8
OFF, 9-5
ON, 9-5
SET /NOOPT command
displaying optimization status, 14-3
SET /OPT command, 14-2
displaying optimization status, 14-3
format, 14-2
SET /PASSWORD command, 2-2
SET /PLCTL command, 8-10
SET ACCOUNTING command, 10-9
format, 10-9
options, 10-9
parameters
EXTEND_SIZE, 10-9
FILE, 10-9
SCAN-RATE,10-9
STATISTICS_SCAN, 10-9
TASK, 10-9
SET command
/BUFFERSIZE keyword
messages to CO:, 9-4
/COLOG keyword, 9-5
disk data caching, 15-12
keywords
/SECPOL, 8-14
/TOP, 4-25
/TOP qualifier
using added memory, 4-28
VMR,5-46
definition, 5-46
examples, 5-71 to 5-75
format, 5-46

SET command
VMR (cont'd.)
keywords
/AFF,5-51
/BOT, 5-52 to 5-53
/BUF,5-53
/CHAR_LENGTH, 5-53
/HFILL, 5-55
/LIBUIC, 5-56
/LINES, 5-56
/MAXEXT, 5-57
/NETUIC, 5-57
/[NO]ABAUD, 5-50
/[NO]ANSI, 5-5'1
/[NO]AVO, 5-51
/[NO]BLKMOD, 5-52
/[NO]BRO, 5-53
/[NO]CRT, 5-53
/[NO]DEC, 5-54
/[NO]EBC, 5-54
/[NO]ECHO, 5-54
/[NO]EDIT, 5-54
/[NO]ESCSEQ, 5-55
/[NO]FDX, 5-55
/[NO]FORMFEED, 5-55
/[NO]HHT, 5-55
/[NO]HSYNC, 5-56
/[NO]LOGON, 5-56
/[NO]LOWER,5-57
/[NO]OPT, 5-57
/[NO]P AR, 5-58 to 5-60
/[NO]PARITY, 5-60
/[NO]PASTHRU,5-61
/[NO]PRINTERJORT, 5-63
/[NO]PRIV, 5-63
/[NO]PUB, 5-63
/[NO]REGIS, 5-63
/[NO]REMOTE, 5-63 to 5-64
/[NO]RP A, 5-65
/[NO]SERIAL, 5-66
/[NO]SLAVE, 5-66
/[NO]SOFT, 5-66
/[NO]TTSYNC, 5-69
/[NO]TYPEAHEAD, 5-69 to 5-70
/[NO]VFILL, 5-70
/[NO]WCHK, 5-70
/[NO]WRAP, 5-70
/PLCTL,5-61
/POOL, 5~62
/POOLSIZE, 5-62
/RNDC,5-64
/RNDH,5-65

Index-29

SET command
VMR
keywords (cont'd.)
/RNDL,5-65
/SECPOL, 5-65
/SPEED, 5-66
/SWPC, 5-67
/SWPR,5-67
/SYSUIC, 5-67
/TERM,5-67
/TOP, 5-68 to 5-69
/UIC, 5-70
keyword table, 5-46 to 5-50
uses, 5-46
SET command (CON), 4-29
examples, 4-30
format, 4-29
options, 4-29
ALARM,4-29
CSR,4-29
TIMER, 4-29
VEC, 4-29
requirement, 4-30
values, 4-29
SET command (VMR)
saving secondary pool, 8-18
SET DEVICE command
/CHECKPOINTJILE qualifier, 1-5
SET PARTITION command
/TOP qualifier, 4-25
using added memory, 4-28
SET PASSWORD command, 2-2
SET SYSTEM command
/POOL/LIMITS qualifier, 8-10
Setup command
Active Task display, 7-11
OWNER,7-11
PRIORITY, 7-11
TASK, 7-11
Cache Region display
RATE, 7-21
REGION, 7-21
I/O Counts display, 7-16
DEVICE, 7-17
RATE, 7-17
Memory display, 7-8
FREE, 7-8
RATE, 7-8
RMD, 7-2
System Statistics display, 7-19
Task Header display
RATE, 7-14

Index-3D

Setup command
Task Header display (cont'd.)
TASK, 7-14
truncating, 7-11
Shadowed pair
definition, I-IS, 16-1
primary disk, 16-1
secondary disk, 16-1
selecting devices for, 16-2
Shadow Recording, 16-1
See also Shadowed pair
bad blocks and, 16-10
catchup
definition, 16-5
commands
ABORT,16-7
CONTINUE, 16-8
DISPLAY, 16-9
START, 16-5
STOP, 16-6
control commands, 16-4
controlling, 16-4
description, I-IS, 16-1
error handling, 16-10
error messages, 16-11
errors
primary disk, 16-10
secondary disk, 16-10
simultaneous (both disks), 16-11
invoking, 16-4
media requirements, 16-2
preparation for, 16-2
shadowed pair
creating equivalent bad block data for,
16-2
uses, 16-1
write-checking, 16-10
Shareable device
definition, 3-8
/SHAREABLE qualifier
INITIALIZE /PROCESSOR command,
3-23
SHF
algorithms, 8-20
first pass, 8-20
second pass, 8-21
conventions, 8-19
description, 1-4
installation, 8-19
monitoring with RMD, 8-19
overhead, 8-19
performance, 8-19

SHF (cont'd.)
removal, 8-20
shuffling
common regions, 8-20
fixed tasks, 8-20
partition sections, 8-20
size, 8-19
$SHFCT word
changing contents, 8-19
$SHFTM word, 8-19
SHOW ACCOUNTING/DATATRIEVE
command
format, 10-17
parameters, 10-17
SHOW ACCOUNTING/INFORMATION
command, 10-12
format, 10-12
parameters
CO, 10-12
SYS, 10-12
TASK, 10-12
SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTIONFILE
Resource Accounting, 10-11
SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTIONFILE command, 10-13
example, 10-13
format, 10-13
SHOW ACCOUNTING commands, 10-11
summary, 10-11
SHOW ASSIGNMENTS command
/ ALL qualifier, 8-18
SHOW CACHE command
disk data caching, 15-8
SHOW DEVICE command
disk data caching, 15-7
SHOW DEVICES command
status of CO:, 9-8
SHOW LOGICALS command
/ ALL qualifier, 8-18
SHOW PARTITIONS command, 8-15
format, 8-15
SHOW TASKS/ACTIVE command
secondary pool usage, 8-17
SHOW TASKS/INSTALLED command
secondary pool usage, 8-17
/SHR switch
QUE /SP command, 3-8, 3-23
SHUBLD.CMD file, 6-3
Shuffler
See SHF

Shutdown code
transaction file (Resource Accounting),
10-16
Shutdown procedure, 6-4
See also SHUTUP program
customizing, 6-3
example, 6-5
execution time, 6-3
SHUTUP program, 6-4
SHUTUP.CMD file, 6-3
example, 6-4
installing tasks with, 6-3
modifying timeout interval, 6-3
using to shut down DECnet, 6-3
SHUTUP program
description, 1-12, 6-1
functions performed by, 6-4
input prompts, 6-2
invoking, 6-1
prerequisites to running, 6-1
warning messages, 6-2
/SIZE keyword
LOA command (VMR), 5-30
LOAD command, 8-16
/SLAVE keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-66
/SL switch
TKB,5-25
/SLV keyword
INS command
VMR
and /SL switch (TKB), 5-25
and prototype tasks, 5-25
INS command (VMR), 5-25
/SNGL keyword
initializing CLI with, 17-4
Soft error, 10-7, 11-3
/SOFT keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-66
SORT option
ACNT,2-13
/SP /EX function
QUE /SP command, 3-20
/SPEED keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-66
/SP function
QUE /SP command, 3-20
Spooled
definition, 3-19
Spooling
line printer
multistream, 3. . 1

Index-31

Spooling (cont'd.)
transparent, 3-1
SPWN$ directive
relationship to EXECUTE command
lOX, 12-27
SPY command
lOX, 12-54
examples, 12-54
logical names, 12-54
Standalone maintenance, 11-6
START / ACCOUNTING command
parameters
CRASH-REASON, 10-5
EXTEND_SIZE, 10-5
FILE, 10-5
POOL-RESERVE, 10-5
SCAN-RATE, 10-6
STATISTICS_SCAN, 10-6
SYSTEM_STATISTICS, 10-6
TASK, 10-6
Resource Accounting, 10-5
START /PROCESSOR command, 3-36
processor types, 3-36
qualifiers, 3-36
/ ALIGN, 3-37
/BACKSP ACE, 3-37
/CONTINUE, 3-37
/FLAG,3-37
/FORMS, 3-37
/FORWARDSPACE, 3-37
/NEXT_JOB, 3-37
overview, 3-37
/PAGE,3-37
/RESTART, 3-38
/TOP_OFJILE, 3-38
START /QUEUE/MANAGER command,
3-41
starting QMG, 3-4
START /QUEUE command, 3-40
START command
lOX, 12-55
functions, 12-55
Interactive mode
restriction, 12-10
Shadow Recording, 16-5
STARTUP.CMD file
Autoconfigure, 4-1
function, 1-10
Startup procedure
Autoconfigure, 4-1

Index-32

Statistics
device
Resource Accounting, 10-7
STATISTICS_SCAN .parameter
SET ACCOUNTING command, 10-9
START/ACCOUNTING command, 10-5
Statistics scan
Resource Accounting, 10-6
Status line
transaction file, 10-16
STD, 5-20, 5-26
STOP / ABORT command, 3-31
STOP/ACCOUNTING command, 10-10
format, 10-10
shutdown reasons
CLEAN_UP, 10-10
MAINTENANCE, 10-10
OTHER, 10-10
REBOOT, 10-10
SCHEDULED_SHUTDOWN, 10-10
SHUTUP, 10-10
STOP /PROCESSOR command, 3-32
processor types, 3-32
qualifiers, 3-32
/ ABORT, 3-33
/FILE-END, 3-33
/JOB-END, 3-33
/P AUSE, 3-33
STOP /QUEUE/MANAGER command, 3-35
qualifiers
/ ABORT, 3-35
STOP /QUEUE command, 3-34
STOP command
Shadow Recording, 16-6
Summary report
generated by PRINTSUMMARY, 12-42
SUMMARYTIME command
lOX, 12-56
initial default, 12-56
suppressing interval reports, 12-56
Swapping
definition, 1-4
SWITCH command, 4-31
example, 4-31
format, 4-31
/SWPC keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-67
/SWPR keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-67
Symbol Definition File
relationship to system image file, 5-2
specifying, 5-2

Symbol Definition File (cont'd.)
VMR requirements, 5-2
Symbols
Memory display (RMD), 7-7
/SYNC keyword
INS command (VMR), 5-25
Syntax
VMR,5-4
abbreviating commands, 5-4
command line format, 5-4
command names, 5-4
Syntax elements
attributes, 18-27
SYSLOGIN.CMD file
function, 1-10
SYSLOGOUT.CMD file
function, 1-10
SYSLOG task
interaction with $QTRAN, 10-19
interaction with $QTRNl, 10-20
interaction with $QTRN2, 10-21
SYSPARAM.DAT configuration data file
definition, 1-10
setting up QMG, 3-2
SYSP AR partition
description, 7-7
System
failure
causes, 1-16
determining cause, 1-17, 11-4
recovery from, 1-16, 11-4
files for management, 1-10
halt, 11-6
image file, 8-18
saving, 8-18
size, 8-18
installing, 1-9
reconfiguration, 4-1
recovery methods, 11-4
saved
installing task, 5-26
setting up, 1-9
shutdown
See also SHUTUP program
using the SHUTUP program, 1-12
shutting down, 6-4
statistics
Resource Accounting, 10-6
UFD defaults, A-2
unsaved
installing task, 5-20

SYSTEM_STATISTICS parameter
START / ACCOUNTING command, 10-6
System Account Block
See SAB
System fault
definition, 11-1
recovery from, 11-4
System file names
conventions, A-3
System image file
assigning SY: and LB:, 5-2
bootstrap, 5-1
relationship to symbol definition file, 5-2
/SYSTEM keyword
ASN command (VMR), 5-9, 5-10
System login command file
See SYSLOGIN.CMD file
System logout command file
See SYSLOGOUT.CMD file
System startup command file
See STARTUP.CMD file
System Statistics display
RMD
altering from MCR command line,
7-19
altering from setup page, 7-19
contents, 7-18
description, 7-18
example, 7-18
System Task Directory
See STD
Systeln Time Change Transaction Block,
10-45
/SYSUIC keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-67
SYSVMR.CMD file
function, 1-10

T
TAB
description, 10-23
Resource Accounting, 10-23
TAL command
secondary pool usage, 8-17
Tape
exercising with lOX, 12-2
TAS command
VMR
definition, 5-76
display contents, 5-76
examples, 5-76 to 5-77

Index-33

TAS command
VMR (cont'd.)
format, 5~76
parameter, 5-76
Task
abortable
requirements, 8-7
selecting, 8-7
access to commons, 5-24
after exit, 5-80
allocating checkpoint space, 1-5
Autoconfigure, 4-1
base priority
setting, 8-10
checkpointable, 5-19
checkpointing, 1-3, 5-21
dormant, 5-20
executing, 5-20
extending, 1-5
extension size, 5-22
fixed, 5-18
header
Executive copy, 5-26
external, 5 -26
installing in pool, 5-26
in task image, 5-26
image file, 8-18
initiated with lOX
terminating, 12-15
initiation
EXECUTE command (lOX), 12-27
installing, 5-20
default task name, 5-25
installing in unsaved system, 5-20
installing permanently, 19-8
mapping, 5-23
memory management support, 5-19
name
CLI, 17-3
naming, 5 -25
priority
specifying, 5-23
protection
specifying UIC, 5-25
reexecuting, 5-18
removing, 5-18
restrictions for fixing, 5-19
running from console
aborting with PMT, 8-12
size, 5-57
stopped
forcing to checkpoint, 8-12

Index-34

Task (cont'd.)
unfixing from memory, 5-80
Task Account Block, 10-27
See TAB
Task accounting
Resource Accounting, 10-6
Task Builder
See TKB
Task-build file
lOX, 12-2
Task Control Block
See TCB
Task Header display
RMD
altering from MCR command line,
7-15
altering from setup page, 7-14
contents, 7-13
description, 7-13
example, 7-14
RATE command, 7-14
TASK command, 7-14
Task image file
installing task in unsaved system, 5-20
/TASK keyword
INS command (VMR), 5-25
INSTALL command
installing batch processors, 3-11
TASKLIST command
VMR
See TAS command
TASK parameter
SET ACCOUNTING command, 10-9
START / ACCOUNTING command, 10-6
/TASK qualifier
INSTALL command
installing batch processors, 3-11
TASK setup command, 7-11, 7-14
Task Termination Notification program
See TKTN program
TCB, 5-26
creating, 5-26
removing, 5-20
TDX, 19-1
command summary, 19-1
corresponding MCR commands, 19-1
definition, 19-1
description, 1-19
flying Indirect behavior, 19-4
flying install behavior, 19-4
logical assignments for pseudo device ZZ,
19-3

TDX (cont'd.)
modifying, 19-7
sample command file, 19-5
selecting MCR options, 19-7
use, 1-19, 19-1
TEMPORARYFILE command
lOX, 12-57
initial default, 12-57
Terminal
console
displaying current assignment, 9-5
exercising with lOX, 12-2
nonslaved, 5-46
remote
setting baud rate, 5-63
shareable
definition, 3-8
slaved, 5-46
running RMD on, 7-2
testing with lOX, 12-35
Terminal emulation, 1-19
/TERM keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-67
/TERM switch
QUE /SP command, 3-20
Test configuration
setting up for lOX, 12-4
Throughput
definition, 14-4
file system
increasing, 1-7
improving, 14-4
increasing, 4-22
Tick
definition, 1-6
zero, 10-16
TIM command
VMR,5-78
definition, 5-78
examples,S· 79
formats, 5-78
notes, 5-78
parameters,S· 78
Time
displaying, 5-78
setting, 5-78
TIME command
VMR
See TIM command
Timeout interval
system shutdown (SHUTUP.CMD), 6-3

Time-stamp
format, 9-2
TKB
/IP switch
complement to INSTALL keyword,
5-23
/XH option
correlation with INSTALL keyword
/XHR,5-26
TKTN program
nonrecoverable hardware error, 11-4
TMCLI.FTN file, 17-9
TMCLI.MAC file, 17-9
/TOP_OFJILE qualifier
START /PROCESSOR command, 3-38
/TOP keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-68 to 5-69
Total system statistics
Resource Accounting, 10-16
Transaction file
accessing information in, 10-11
account blocks, 10-23
SAB, 10-23
TAB, 10-23
UAB, 10-23
accumulation fields, 10-25
block diagrams, 10-26
card reader job data, 10-3
card reader spooling block, 10-44
crash recovery block, 10-37
DATATRIEVE-11, 10-17
deallocation data, 10-3
device allocation data, 10-3
device mount data, 10-3
device statistics block, 10-50
device usage data, 10-3
disk accounting block, 10-43
dismount data, 10-3
example, 10-13
header area, 10·24
invalid login block, 10-39
login data, 10-3
offset definitions, 10-24
print despooler block, 10-44
print job data, 10-3
reset accounting block, 10-36
scan, 10-15
shutdown codes, 10-16
size, 10-5
status line, 10-16
summary of contents, 10-2
system account block (SAB), 10-33

Index-35

Transaction file (cont'd.)
system data, 10-2
system time change, 10-3
system time change block, 10-44
task data, 10-2
terms
cylinder crossed count, 10-8
fairness count, 10--8
hard error, 10-7
I/O count, 10-7
soft error, 10-7
words transferred count, 10-7
user account block, 10-25
user data, 10-2
zero CPU intervals, 10-16
Transient failure, 11-2
Translator processing, 18-14
Transparent spooling, 3-1
TST attribute, 18-49
/TTSYNC keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-69
/TYPEAHEAD keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-69 to 5-70

u
UAB, 10-30
description, 10-23
Resource Accounting, 10-23
UCB,5-26
UFD, A-I
group number, A-I
Catchall utility task, A-2
DCL files, A-2
Error Logging Control files, A-2
Executive files, A-I
Executive utility tasks, A-I
FCP files, A-I
FCS files, A-2
File system utility tasks, A-I
Indirect Command Processor files, A-2
K-series files, A-2
Line printer despooler, A-2
MCR files, A-I
Multiuser utility tasks, A-I
Online configuration, A-2
Queue Manager files, A-2
RCT files, A-2
Resource Accounting tasks, A-2
RMD files, A-I
Shadow Recording, A -2

Index-36

UFD
group number (cont'd.)
SYSGEN indirect command files, A-2
member number, A-2
Object modules, A-2
SLP correction files, A-2
Source modules, A-2
UIC, 5-24
authorized, 2-1
contained in account entry, 2-1, 2-6, 2-11
displaying, 2-8, 2-10
distinction by password, 2-1
/UIC keyword
INS command (VMR), 5-25
RUN command (VMR), 5-42
SET command (VMR), 5-70
UNF command
VMR
definition, 5-80
example, 5-80
format, 5-80
keywords
fREG,5-80
/RON,5-80
parameters, 5-80
UNFIX command
VMR
See UNF command
Unit Control Block
See UCB
Unknown status flag, 4-13
UNL command
VMR
definition, 5-81
example, 5-81
format, 5-81
parameter, 5-81
restrictions, 5-81
/VEC keyword, 5-81
UNLINK command, 4-32
example, 4-32
format, 4-32
UNLOAD command
VMR
See UNL command
/UPPERCASE qualifier
INITIALIZE /PROCESSOR command,
3-24
User Account Block
See UAB
User File Directory
See UFD

User Identification Code
See UIC
User login command file
See LOGIN. CMD file
User logout command file
See LOGOUT.CMD file

v
/VEC keyword
LOA command (VMR), 5-30
UNL command (VMR), 5-81
Vector
interrupt
changing value, 4-29
VERIFY command
lOX, 12-58
Command mode, 12-58
example, 12-68
examples, 12-58
function, 12-5
Interactive mode, 12-58
logical names, 12-58
parameter commands for, 12-58
specifying block range, 12-45
/VFILL keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-70
Virtual I/O
definition, 15-6
Virtual Monitor Console Routine
See VMR
VIRTUAL option, 15-6
default extent size for, 15-6
VMR
See also Command format
command
abbreviations, 5-4
categories, 5-1
description format, 5-7
descriptions, 5-7 to 5-81
keywords
overview, 5-4
names, 5-4
parameters, 5-4
specifying, 5-4
syntax, 5-4
command file
See SYSVMR. CMD file
defaults
device, 5-5
directory, 5-6
file types, 5-6

VMR
defaults (cont'd.)
version number, 5-6
definition, 5-1
description, 1-12
error messages, 5-82 to 5,-105
extending command lines, 5-5
file specifications
components, 5-5
device name, 5-5
directory, 5-6
file names, 5-6
file type, 5-6
format, 5-5
/IM switch, 5-6
specifying, 5-5
version number, 5-6
range, 5-6
including comments, 5-5
introduction, 5-1
invoking, 5-3
prompt, 5-3
relationship to MCR, 5-1
running, 5-2, 5-3 to 5-4
with indirect command file, 5-3
system image file
assigning SY: and LB:, 5-2
bootstrap, 5-1
relationship to symbol definition file,
5-2
VMR commands
ALTER, 5-8
ASSIGN,5-9
CANCEL, 5-11
CONFIGURATION, 5-12
DEVICES, 5-16
FIX, 5-18
INSTALL, 5-20
LOAD,5-29
LUNS, 5-32
PARTITION DEFINITIONS, 5-33
REASSIGN, 5-36
REDIRECT,5-37
REMOVE, 5-38
RUN,5-40
SAVE,5-44
SET,5-46
TASKLIST, 5-76
TIME,5-78
UNFIX, 5-80
UNLOAD, 5-81

Index-37

Volume
lOX exercise
selecting, 12-5
VOLUMECHECK command
lOX, 12-60
initial default, 12-60
verifying file structure, 12-6

w\
WAIT command
lOX, 12-61
EXECUTE command
effect on, 12-61
initial default, 12-{)1
syst~m resources
effect on, 12-§1
/WB keyword
INS command (VMR), 5-26
/WCHK keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-70
Window file
mapping pointers, 1-9
/WINDOW qualifier, 1-9
MOUNT command, 1-9
/WIN keyword
MOU command, 1-9
Words transferred count, 10-7
/WRAP keyword
SET command (VMR), 5-70
Write access
common region, 5-24
Write-back cache
RCT handling of corruption, 13-5
Write-back cache data
preventing loss, 13-6
Write-check
enabling in lOX, 12,..62
WRITECHECK command
lOX, 12-62
SELECT command line, 12-62
using with RETRIES command, 12-62
Write-checking
enabling for Shadow Recording, 16-10

x
XDT, 1-16
loading, 1,17
/XHR keyword
INS command (VMR), 5-26

Index~38

z
Zero CPU intervals
transaction file, 10-16
Zero ticks
transa~tion file (Resource Accounting),
10-16
ZZ pseudo device
logical assignments, 19-3
<.

RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX
System Management Guide
AA-]S14A-TC

READER'S
COMMENTS

Your comments and suggestions are welcome and will help us in our
continuous effort to improve the quality and usefulness of our documentation
and software.
Remember, the system includes information that you read on your terminal:
help files, error messages, prompts, and so on. Please let us know if you have
comments about this information, too.

Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well organized? Please make suggestions for\
improvement.

Diq you find errors in this manual? If so, spec:ify the error

What kind of user are you?

___ Programmer

~nd

the page number.

___
. . Nonprogralllmer

Years of experience as a computer programmer/user:

Name

Date_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Organization -.,..-_____________________________________
Street _____________________________________________________

City ____----__________________ State _ _ _ _ Zip Code _ _ __
or Country

I
I
I
I

. - - Do Not Tear - Fold Here and Tape

-------------------nlllr-------;~~~~~----'

If MaIled
in the
United States

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 33 MAYNARD MASS.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
Corporate User Publications-Spit Brook
ZK01-3/J35
110 SPIT BROOK ROAD
NASHUA, NH 03062-9987

111'111111.1111 •• 1111 •• 1.11.1111.1111 •• 1.1 ••• 1.11111
. - - Do Not Tear - Fold Here - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

RSX-IIM-PLUS and Micro/RSX
System Management Guide
AA-JS14A-TC

READER'S
COMMENTS

Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well organized? Please make suggestions for
improvement.

Did you find errors in this manual? If so, specify the error and the page number.

What kind of user are you?

__ Programmer

__ Nonprogrammer

Years of experience as a computer programmer/user:

Name ________________________________________________ Date___________
Organization __________________________________________________________________
Street _________________________________________________________________________
City______________________ State _____ Zip Code _ _ __
or Country

I
I
I
I
I

-- Do Not Tear - Fold Here and Tape

-------------------nlllr-------;~:~;~---' ·
II

,f Mailed
in the
United States

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 33 MAYNARD MASS.
POST AGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
Corporate User Publications-Spit Brook
ZK01-3jJ35
110 SPIT BROOK ROAD
NASHUA, NH 03062-9987

111.11 1111.1111 •• 1111111.11.1111.1111111.1.111.11 •• 1
- - Do Not Tear - Fold Here - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37
Create Date                     : 2013:11:25 09:01:24-08:00
Modify Date                     : 2013:11:25 13:03:50-08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2013:11:25 13:03:50-08:00
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 9.55 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:a904ab88-8188-7046-a004-ebc8bb94f4a7
Instance ID                     : uuid:5f129cc0-8bb3-7149-8fee-566b046c6c2c
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Count                      : 682

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

AA JS14A TC_RSX 11M_PLUS_V4.0_RSX 11M PLUS_and_Micro RSX_System_Management_Guide_Sep87 TC RSX PLUS V4.0 And Micro System Management Guide Sep87

AA-JS14A-TC_RSX-11M_PLUS_V4.0_RSX-11M-PLUS_and_MicroRSX_System_Management_Guide_Sep87 AA-JS14A-TC_RSX-11M_PLUS_V4.0_RSX-11M-PLUS_and_MicroRSX_System_Management_Guide_Sep87

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation